# Xorosoft Knowledge Base Xorosoft is a leading provider of cloud-based business software solutions for e-commerce, retail, wholesale, and manufacturing businesses. The company offers a suite of products designed to streamline operations and improve efficiency. Here are its main products: 1. **XoroONE**: This is a cloud-based ERP system designed for small and medium-sized businesses in the apparel and consumer products industries. It offers features such as omnichannel connectivity, sophisticated inventory controls, a full accounting suite, warehouse management, production and manufacturing modules, business reporting, and more. 2. **XoroERP**: This is an ERP solution for businesses that have outgrown their accounting applications and want to improve their processes. It integrates multiple operations into a single platform and is designed for businesses processing 15,000 to 100,000+ orders per month. 3. **XoroLMS**: This is a cloud-based labor management solution designed for medium to large businesses that want to reduce costs and improve productivity in labor-intensive warehouse operations. It integrates with existing WMS, ERP, and payroll systems and offers features such as benchmarking, clock-in and clock-out, productivity tracking, KPIs, scorecards, integrations and implementation, cost tracking, and engagement. 4. **XoroWMS**: This is a cloud-based **warehouse management system** that provides comprehensive functionality to help businesses streamline inventory management and order fulfillment processes. It includes features such as inventory tracking, order management, and warehouse optimization tools. 5. **Xoro3PL**: Xoro3PL is a comprehensive, cloud-based solution tailored specifically for **third-party logistics (3PL)** companies to help them manage and optimize their operations efficiently. By integrating a wide range of functionality, Xoro3PL enables 3PL providers to deliver superior service to their clients while maintaining operational excellence. Xorosoft also offers a range of integrations with leading sales channels, marketplaces, and services, allowing businesses to maintain their existing technology stack. # Release Notes Stay informed about the latest and past releases of XoroERP with our comprehensive Release Notes section. We believe in continuous improvement and are committed to enhancing your ERP experience. This section provides detailed insights into the most recent updates, including new functionalities, feature enhancements, and resolved issues. Explore the current release to take advantage of cutting-edge capabilities that boost productivity and streamline your business processes. Additionally, the archive of previous releases allows you to track the evolution of XoroERP and discover how it has evolved over time. Stay ahead of the curve and make the most out of XoroERP's potential by leveraging the valuable information provided in our Release Notes. Stay tuned for exciting updates, as we strive to bring you the best ERP solution with every release. # Current Release # June Release {% hint style="warning" %} This is a Custom Release. Feature availability depends on configuration and rollout status. Some features listed above may not be visible in your environment if they are part of a staged or custom deployment. Please contact your support representative to confirm enablement. {% endhint %} ### **Added Search Functionality for Product Variants in Product Matrix Generator** **Overview:** A new search box has been added to the **Product Variants** section of the **Product Matrix Generator** module. This enhancement allows users to quickly search and filter product variants based on **Item Number**, **Variant**, or **Option** values, making it easier to locate specific variants when working with products that contain a large number of combinations. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added a search box in the **Product Variants** section of the Product Matrix Generator. * Users can search Item Number/Variant and Option values in the product variants table * Search results are dynamically filtered within the Product Variants grid. * Improves usability and reduces the time required to locate specific product variants. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Product → Product Matrix Generator**.
**Step 2:** Select the required product from the **Base Product** dropdown and click **List Variants**.
**Step 3:** The system displays all available product variants in the **Product Variants** grid.
**Step 4:** In the search box located above the Product Variants grid, enter any of the following: * **Item Number** (for example: *Iphone 17-1-black*) * **Variant** value (for example: *Large*) * **Option** value (for example: *Medium*, *Black*, *Blue*) **Step 5:** As the search criteria is entered, the system filters the Product Variants grid and displays only the matching records.
**Step 6:** Users can review, update, or generate variants from the filtered results as required. *** ### **Additional Email Recipients for Customer Statements** **Overview:** Customer statements emailed from the **Customer Statement** module now support additional customer-specific email recipients. In addition to the existing **Default Billing Email** and **primary Email** logic, the system can now automatically include email addresses configured in the **Statement Email** field when sending customer statements. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added support for Statement Email recipients when emailing customer statements. * Statements continue to be sent to the Default Billing Email when available. * If no **Default Billing Email** is configured, statements are sent to the customer's **main email** address. * All email addresses configured in the **Statement Email** field are automatically included as recipients. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to the **Sales → Customer Section → Customer Centre** module and open an existing customer.
**Step 2:** Configure the customer's **Default Billing Email** and **Main Email** in the **Contact Info** sub-tab, and the **Customer Statement Email** in the **Emails** sub-tab.
**Step 3:** Go to the **Sales → Customer Section → Customer Statement** module. Select the customer statement and choose **Email Statement** from the **Options** dropdown menu.
**Step 4:** Select the required document and email templates. Choose the **Respective Recipient(s)** option and click on **Preview & Send**.
**Step 5:** The **Email Centre** opens, and the system automatically populates the **Recipients** and **CC** fields based on the customer configuration: * Default Billing Email (if configured) * Primary Email (if no Default Billing Email is configured) * Statement Email address(es) * Email CC address(es) (if configured, these will be populated in the CC field).
**Step 6:** Review the email details and click **Send** to email the customer statement.
*** ### **Addition of "Notes" Field in Manufacturing Orders** **Overview:** A new **Notes** field has been added to the **Manufacturing Order (MO)** module to improve visibility of manufacturing-related instructions and comments. The field is available under the **Other** tab in the Manufacturing Order and is also displayed in the **Manufacturing Order Center** and its **subform**. Additionally, when a Manufacturing Order is generated from a Sales Order, the line-level notes entered against manufacturable items are automatically transferred to the Manufacturing Order, ensuring important instructions are readily available throughout the manufacturing process. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added a new **Notes** field under the **Other** tab in the Manufacturing Order module. * Added a **Notes** column to the **Manufacturing Order Centre** and **Manufacturing Order subform.** * Automatically transfers Sales Order line notes for manufacturable items to the Manufacturing Order during MO creation. * Improves traceability by making manufacturing-related instructions accessible directly within Manufacturing Orders. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Sales → Sales Order** and create or open a Sales Order. **Step 2:** Add a **manufacturable item** to the Sales Order and enter the required information in the **Notes** column at the line level.
**Step 3:** Click **Options → Create / Copy → Create Manufacturing Order** to generate a Manufacturing Order from the Sales Order.
**Step 4:** The **Create Manufacturing Order** dialog appears. Review the Manufacturing Order settings as required and click **OK** to create the Manufacturing Order.
**Step 5:** Once the Manufacturing Order is created, the system automatically copies the **Sales Order line note** to the newly added **Notes** field in the Manufacturing Order header under the **Other** tab.
**Step 6:** Navigate to the **Manufacturing Order Centre** to view the generated Manufacturing Order. The transferred note is displayed in the **Notes** column.
**Step 7:** Double-click the Manufacturing Order record to open its subform. Go to the **Other** tab, where the **Notes** field displays the note that was originally entered against the Sales Order line.
*** ### **App Config: Allow Update Production Date on Produced MO** **Overview:** This enhancement introduces a new app configuration that allows users to modify the **Production Date** of a Manufacturing Order (MO) even after the MO has reached the **Produced** status. This provides greater flexibility when production transactions need to be adjusted to reflect the actual production date. *** **Configuration Details:** **App Config Name:** Allow Update Production Date on Produced MO **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → Manufacturing → Allow Update Production Date on Produced MO
*** **Functionality:** **When App Config Is Enabled:** * Users can modify the **Production Date** field even after the Manufacturing Order has been produced. * The updated Production Date is saved against the Produced Manufacturing Order. * Updating the Production Date triggers the regeneration of the Manufacturing Order transactions. * The recalculation may affect the average cost of items associated with the Manufacturing Order. *** **When App Config Is Disabled:** * The **Production Date** field remains read-only once the Manufacturing Order reaches the **Produced** status. * Users cannot modify the Production Date of a Produced Manufacturing Order. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → App Config → Manufacturing** and enable the **Allow Update Production Date on Produced MO** app configuration.
**Step 2:** Navigate to **Menu → Manufacturing → Manufacturing Order Centre.** Open a Manufacturing Order that is in **Produced** status and locate the **Production Date** field.
**Step 3:** Modify the **Production Date** as required and click **Save**.
**Step 4:** The system updates the **Production Date** and regenerates the Manufacturing Order transactions based on the revised date.
Any resulting changes are reflected in the associated average cost calculations. *** ### **Support for Catch Weight and Weight-Based Rate Fields Added in Item Upload Template** **Overview:** This enhancement adds support for three new fields in both the **Upload Products** and **Upload Items** templates. These fields allow users to upload catch-weight configurations and weight-based pricing information directly through CSV imports, reducing manual updates and improving support for weight-based inventory and pricing workflows. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added support for the **CatchWeightFlag** field in the **Upload Items/ Upload Products** templates. * Added support for the **BillingRatePerWeightUnit** field in the **Upload Items/ Upload Products** templates. * Added support for the **PurchaseRatePerWeightUnit** field in the **Upload Items/ Upload Products** templates. * Allows catch-weight settings and weight-based billing/purchase rates to be configured during item creation or bulk updates through uploads. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Utilities → Data Imports → Upload Products** and click **Download Template**.
**Step 2:** Locate the newly added columns in the template: * CatchWeightFlag * BillingRatePerWeightUnit * PurchaseRatePerWeightUnit
**Step 3:** Enter the required values for the item or product in the CSV template and save it.
**Step 4:** Click **Browse** and select the saved template. Then, click the **Upload** button.
**Step 5:** Once the upload is processed successfully, navigate to the **Item Centre**. The system creates the item records and stores the values entered in the newly added catch-weight and weight-based rate fields.
*** ### **Introduction of Reconcile Item Rate in Bill and Item Receipt** **Overview:** The system now displays a **Reconcile Item Rate** field during the **reconciliation process** and a **Reconcile Item Rate** column at the transaction line level in the Bill and Item Receipt modules. This rate represents the cost entered for a reconciled item in the reconciliation currency and provides visibility into the item cost used during reconciliation when the reconciliation currency differs from the vendor's transaction currency. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added the **Reconcile Item Rate** column in the reconciliation window. * Added **Reconcile Item Rate** column at the line level in: * Bill * Item Receipt * Bill Centre * Item Receipt Centre * Supports reconciliation performed in a currency different from the vendor transaction currency. * Provides improved visibility into the exchange-rate-adjusted cost used for reconciliation. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Purchase → Item Receipt Centre**. Double-click the Item Receipt record that requires reconciliation and edit it in a new window.
**Step 2:** The **Create Item Receipt** page opens. In the **Item Receipt Details** section, click **Reconcile** and proceed to the **Add Items** step in the **Reconcile Item Receipt** popup.
**Step 3:** Select the reconciliation item, enter the required quantity, and **Reconcile In Currency** value. Enter the required **Rate** and click **Add**.
**Step 4:** The system stores the entered value as the **Reconcile Item Rate** and records the applicable **Reconcile Exchange Rate**.
**Step 5:** Review the reconciliation details and complete the reconciliation process. **Step 6:** After the reconciliation is completed, the system displays the **Reconcile Item Rate** value in the **Item Receipt Details** section for the reconciled line item.
**Step 7:** Save the Item Receipt. Go to the **Item Receipt Centre** and select **Item Receipt Detail** in the **Search by** dropdown. Search for the required Item Receipt number. The **Reconcile Item Rate** value is visible in the **Reconcile Item Rate** column.
*** ### **Enhanced Ref# Field in Create Item module** **Overview:** The **Sales Forecast tab** in the **Create Item** module has been enhanced to allow users to edit the **Ref#** field directly within existing forecast records. Users can now update, clear, or maintain reference numbers associated with forecast entries without recreating the forecast record. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Made the **Ref#** field editable for existing Sales Forecast records. * Supports updating the Ref# value after a forecast record has been created. * Supports alphanumeric and special character entries in the Ref# field. * Supports year-based filtering while displaying the corresponding Ref# values for forecast records. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Item → Item Centre**. Double-click the required item record and edit it in a new window.
**Step 2:** Go to the **Sales Forecast** tab and enter the forecast details, including **Year**, **Month**, **Sales Quantity**, **Sales Amount**, **Entity**, and **Ref#**. **Step 3:** Click **Add New** to create the forecast record. The forecast entry is displayed in the grid below.
**Step 4:** To modify an existing reference number, click the **Ref#** value in the forecast grid and update it as required.
**Step 5:** Click **Save** to store the changes. The updated **Ref#** value is retained after page refresh.
**Step 6:** If required, remove the **Ref#** value and save the record. The system allows forecast records to be saved with a blank Ref#.
*** ### **Added Last Landed Cost Columns in BOM Costing Tab** **Overview:** This enhancement improves Bill of Material (BOM) cost analysis by introducing **Last Landed Cost** and **Last Landed Cost (Home Currency)** visibility within the BOM Costing tab and by adding a dedicated **Bill of Material Costing Report** under the Operations reports section. Last Landed Cost represents the cost from the most recent item receipt, including purchase cost and additional charges such as freight, duty, and other landed expenses. By making this information available directly within BOM costing analysis and reporting, users can compare manufacturing costs against the latest procurement costs without navigating to other inventory or purchasing modules. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added **Last Landed Cost** and **Last Landed Cost (Home Currency)** columns in the BOM Costing tab. * Introduced the **Bill of Material Costing Report** under **Menu → Reports → Operations**. * Eliminates the need to navigate to Item Centre or purchasing transactions to review landed cost information. * Provides a centralized report for reviewing BOM costing information across multi-level BOM structures *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Manufacturing → Bill of Materials → Bill of Material Centre**. Double-click on a BOM record to open the **BOM Subform**.
**Step 2:** Go to the **Costing** tab. In the grid, select the columns **Last Landed Cost** and **Last Landed Cost (Home Currency)** to view the values.
*** ### **Multi-Store Selection in Item Inventory Snapshot** **Overview:** The **Store** filter in the **Item Inventory Snapshot** module has been enhanced to support multi-store selection. Previously, users could select only a single store when viewing inventory snapshot data. With this enhancement, users can now select multiple stores simultaneously and retrieve inventory information for all selected stores in a single search. This enhancement improves inventory visibility across multiple locations and streamlines inventory analysis by eliminating the need to run separate searches for individual stores. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added multi-select functionality to the **Store** dropdown in the Item Inventory Snapshot module. * Added **Select All** and **Deselect All** options for faster store selection management. * The Store dropdown displays the total number of selected stores. * Inventory records for all selected stores are displayed in a single search result. * The **Store** column identifies the store associated with each inventory record returned. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Inventory → Item Inventory Snapshot**.
**Step 2:** Click the **Store** search field. The Store dropdown opens, displaying the number of currently selected stores. **Step 3:** Select one or more stores from the available list.
**Step 4:** The system displays inventory records for all selected stores. Review the **Store** column to identify the corresponding store for each inventory record.
*** ### **Renamed Copy Option to Create/Copy in Sales Orders** **Overview:** The **Copy** option available under the **Options** menu in the **Sales Order** module has been renamed to **Create/Copy**. This enhancement better reflects the functionality available within the menu, as it includes both transaction creation actions and sales order copy actions. The new label provides greater clarity to users by accurately representing the available options, such as creating purchase orders, transfer purchase orders, manufacturing orders, estimates, and duplicate sales orders from an existing sales order. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Sales → Sales Order → Sales Order Centre** and open an existing sales order.
**Step 2:** Click **Options** in the top-right corner of the page and hover over the **Create/Copy** option.
**Step 3:** The system displays the available Create/Copy actions, including options such as: * Create Duplicate * Copy To Estimate * Copy To Purchase Order * Copy To PO(s) By Vendor * Copy Selected Lines To PO * Copy Selected Lines to Existing PO * Copy To Transfer Purchase Order * Create Manufacture Order * Create Dynamic MO (Selected Lines)
*** ### **Display Invoice Payment Reference Details in Customer Info** **Overview:** The **Transactions** tab in the **Customer Info** module has been enhanced to display **Payment Ref No** and **Payment Ref No 2** columns for **Invoice Payment** transactions. These columns provide quick visibility into the payment reference details that were entered when recording an invoice payment. The values displayed in these columns are automatically populated from the **Reference#** and **Reference 2 / Cheque No #** fields captured in the **Invoice Payment** module. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added **Payment Ref No** and **Payment Ref No 2** columns to the **Transactions** tab in the Customer Info module. * **Ref No** displays the value entered in the **Reference#** field during invoice payment creation. * **Ref No 2** displays the value entered in the **Reference 2 / Cheque No #** field during invoice payment creation. * Enables users to view payment reference information directly from the customer transaction history. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Payment → Invoice Payment**. Select the customer (and store, if required).
**Step 2:** Choose the invoice(s) for which payment is to be made.
Enter the required payment details, including the **Payment Amount**, **Reference#**, and **Reference 2 / Cheque No #** fields. Then, enter the payment amount under the **Pay Amount** column for the invoice and click **Pay Invoice(s)**.
**Step 3:** Once the payment is successfully processed, navigate to **Sales → Customer Section → Customer Info** and search for the required customer. **Step 4:** Go to the **Transactions** tab to view the transactions related to the selected Customer and select **Invoice Payment** from the **Transaction Type** dropdown. **Step 5:** Review the **Payment Ref No** and **Payment Ref No 2** columns in the transaction grid. The system displays the payment reference details associated with each Invoice Payment transaction.
*** ### **Enhanced Shipping Cost Override toggle Behavior** **Overview:** The shipment creation process has been enhanced to automatically enable the **Shipping Cost Override** toggle when an invoice is created through the shipping of a Sales Order and the **Keep the shipping cost consistent from Sales Order to Pack & Ship** app configuration is enabled. Previously, even when the app configuration was enabled, the **Shipping Cost Override** toggle was not enabled by default in the shipment modal. With this enhancement, the toggle is automatically enabled to help maintain shipping cost consistency between the Sales Order and the Pack & Ship process. *** **Key Enhancements:** * When the **Keep the shipping cost consistent from Sales Order to Pack & Ship** app configuration is enabled, the system automatically enables the **Shipping Cost Override** toggle during shipment creation. * Helps maintain shipping cost consistency between the Sales Order and the Pack & Ship process. * Reduces the need for users to manually enable the **Shipping Cost Override** toggle. * The **Shipping Cost Override** toggle remains editable and can be changed by the user at any time. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → App Config → Warehouse** and enable the **Keep the shipping cost consistent from Sales Order to Pack & Ship** app configuration.
**Step 2:** Open **Sales → Sales Order** and create a Sales Order with the **Ship Method** set to **Delivery (Own Truck)** or **Delivery (Third Party)** and the **Shipping Terms** set to **Prepaid and Billed** or **Collect and Allowed**, as applicable.
**Step 3:** Release the Sales Order. Create a wave, allocate inventory, and complete the required fulfillment steps until the order is ready to be shipped. **Step 4:** Open the **Pack & Ship** module and click the **Freight Amount** to open the shipment modal.
**Step 5:** Verify that the **Shipping Cost Override** toggle is automatically enabled. Review the shipment details and modify the **Shipping Cost Override** toggle if required.
**Step 6:** Save the shipment to complete the shipment process. The system creates the invoice and maintains shipping cost consistency between the Sales Order and the Pack & Ship process.
*** ### **Restrict Automatic Item Vendor Mapping Creation** **Overview:** This enhancement provides greater control over Item Vendor Mapping management by introducing a new configuration to restrict automatic Item Vendor Mapping creation and by improving Vendor Part # population in Purchase Orders. Previously, Vendor Part # values were populated in Purchase Order lines only when the **Use Vendor Mapping Price in Purchase Modules** app configuration was enabled. With this enhancement, Vendor Part # information is always populated from existing Item Vendor Mappings regardless of the configuration setting. Additionally, the new **Restrict Automatic Item Vendor Mapping Creation** app configuration prevents the system from automatically generating new Item Vendor Mapping records during updates or modifications, allowing users to manually manage vendor mappings and avoid unintended or duplicate mapping records. *** **Configuration Details:** **App Config Name:** Restrict Automatic Item Vendor Mapping Creation **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → General → Restrict Automatic Item Vendor Mapping Creation
*** **Functionality:** **When App Config is Enabled:** * The system does not automatically create new Item Vendor Mapping records when items are created, updated, imported, or when the Default Vendor is changed. * Existing Item Vendor Mapping records remain unaffected. * Users must manually create Item Vendor Mapping records when required. *** **When App Config is Disabled:** * The system follows the existing behavior and automatically creates Item Vendor Mapping records when applicable. * Item Vendor Mapping records may be generated during item creation, updates, imports, or when a Default Vendor is assigned to an item. * Vendor mappings continue to be maintained automatically by the system. *** **How It Works:** **A. Vendor Part # Population in Purchase Orders** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → App Config → Purchase** and enable/disable the **Use Vendor Mapping Price in Purchase Modules** app configuration.
**Step 2:** Go to **Menu → Purchase → Item Vendor Mapping** and create an Item Vendor Mapping with a **Vendor Part Number**.
**Step 3:** Open **Menu → Purchase → Purchase Order** and create a new Purchase Order. Select the mapped Vendor and add the mapped Item to the Purchase Order. **Step 4:** The system automatically populates the Vendor Part # field from the Item Vendor Mapping.
**B. Item Vendor Mapping Behavior During Item Updates** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → App Config → General** and enable the **Restrict Automatic Item Vendor Mapping Creation** app configuration.
**Step 2:** Go to **Menu → Admin → Item → Item Centre**. Double-click on an existing Item record and select **Edit in New Window**. Update the item and assign a different **Default Vendor**.
**Step 3:** The system does not automatically create any new Item Vendor Mapping records for the selected Default Vendor. Instead, existing Item Vendor Mapping records are updated as applicable.
*** ### **Increased Custom Description Character Limit for Items** **Overview:** The Custom Description field in the **Create Item → Other Attributes** tab has been enhanced to support up to **4000 characters**. Previously, users were restricted to a smaller character limit when entering item-specific descriptions. With this enhancement, users can now maintain significantly longer descriptions for items, allowing additional product details, specifications, marketing content, compliance information, instructions, and other item-related notes to be stored directly within the item record. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Users can now store detailed item descriptions without being constrained by the previous character limit. * Custom Description values entered within the item record are displayed in the **Item Centre** grid, allowing users to review and search item descriptions directly from the Item Centre. * Long descriptions are retained during export, ensuring complete item information is available for reporting, integrations, and data management purposes. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Item → Item Centre** and open an existing item record. Alternatively, you can create a new item.
**Step 2:** Go to the **Other Attributes** tab and enter the required item description in the **Custom Description** field. The field now supports descriptions of up to **4000 characters**.
**Step 3:** Click **Save** to update the item. The **Custom Description** can be viewed in the **Item Centre** by selecting the **Custom Description** column in the grid.
*** ### **Additional Sales Order Details in Inventory Snapshot** **Overview:** This enhancement adds four new columns to the **On SO Details** popup available from the **Item Inventory Snapshot** module. These additional fields provide greater visibility into sales order information directly from the inventory snapshot, allowing users to review order classifications, tags, cancellation dates, and internal notes without opening the Sales Order record. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added **Order Type Name** column to the **On SO Details** popup, displaying the value selected in the **Order Type** field under the **Other** tab of the Sales Order header. * Added **Tags** column to the **On SO Details** popup, displaying the values entered in the **Order Tags** field under the **Other** tab of the Sales Order header. If multiple tags are assigned to the Sales Order, they are displayed as a comma-separated list. * Added **Date To Be Cancelled** column to the **On SO Details** popup, displaying the value from the **To Be Cancelled** field in the **Sales** tab of the Sales Order header. * Added **Memo** column to the **On SO Details** popup, displaying the contents of the **Memo** field in the Sales Order footer section. * Users can select or hide these columns using the **Columns** option available in the **On SO Details** popup grid. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Inventory → Item Inventory Snapshot**.
**Step 2:** Locate the required item and click the quantity displayed in the **On SO** column. **Step 3:** In the **On SO Details** popup, click the **Columns** option. Select the newly available columns: * Order Type Name * Tags * Date To Be Cancelled * Memo The selected columns are displayed in the On SO Details grid, providing additional sales order information for each order line.
*** ### **View Wave Print Status Directly in Sales Order History** **Overview:** The Sales Order **History** tab has been enhanced to display the print status of linked Waves. An **Is Printed** icon is now shown beside each Wave number, allowing users to quickly identify whether the corresponding Wave has been printed without navigating to the Wave Centre. The same indicator is available in both the **table view** and **Timeline View**, providing consistent visibility of the Wave print status throughout the Sales Order history. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added an **Is Printed** icon beside the **Wave Number** in the **History** tab of the Sales Order. * Added the same **Is Printed** indicator in the **Timeline View** of the Sales Order History. * The indicator reflects the current **Wave Printed** status, allowing users to verify whether a Wave has already been printed. * Supports Sales Orders linked to **multiple Waves**, with the print status displayed independently for each Wave. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Go to **Menu → Sales → Sales Order** **Centre** and open a Sales Order.
**Step 2:** Click the **History** tab. In the **table view**, locate the linked **Wave** entries. If a Wave has been printed, an **Is Printed** (printer) icon is displayed beside the corresponding **Wave Number**.
**Step 3:** Turn on the **Timeline View** toggle. For each Wave entry, the **Is Printed** icon is displayed beside the **Wave Number** if the Wave has been printed, making it easy to identify the print status of individual Waves at a glance.
{% hint style="info" %} If a Wave has not been printed, no **Is Printed** icon is displayed beside its Wave Number. {% endhint %} *** ### **Enhanced Invoice Deposit Handling and Invoice Date Offset for SO Shipments** **Overview:** The invoice workflow has been enhanced to provide greater flexibility when managing customer deposits and invoice generation during Sales Order shipments. Users can now link existing customer deposits directly to invoices, subject to validation rules that ensure deposits are applied appropriately. In addition, new app configurations have been introduced to automatically offset the invoice date for Sales Order shipments and control which payment term types the invoice date offset applies to. These enhancements simplify invoice processing while providing greater control over payment and shipment workflows. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added the ability to link existing customer deposits directly to invoices. * Added an **available deposit** notification on the Invoice page to indicate when a deposit can be applied to the invoice. * The notification is displayed only when the invoice has an outstanding balance and the customer has a remaining deposit amount greater than **0**. * Clicking **Click Here** in the notification automatically applies the available deposit to the invoice. * The **Deposit Date** cannot be later than the **Invoice Date**. * The deposit amount applied cannot exceed the **Amount Due** on the invoice. * Invoice and Ship dates in the **Express Ship** window are automatically adjusted based on the configured invoice date offset. * The configured invoice date offset is applied consistently when quick shipping from the **Sales Order Centre**, **Sales Order**, and **Pack & Ship** module. *** **Configuration Details:** 1. **Invoice Date Offset for SO Shipments** * **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → Sales → Invoice Date Offset for SO Shipments
*** 2. **Applicable Payment Term Types for Invoice Date Offset** * **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → Sales → Applicable Payment Term Types for Invoice Date Offset * **Type:** Multi-select Dropdown * **Available Options:** * NET * COD * CIA * CCD * None * Month * Absolute * Split Terms
*** **Functionality:** 1. **Invoice Date Offset for SO Shipments** Specifies the number of days to add to the Invoice Date when invoices are generated during Sales Order shipments. The configured offset is also applied to the Ship Date in the Express Ship window. *** 2. **Applicable Payment Term Types for Invoice Date Offset** Allows users to select one or more payment term types to which the Invoice Date Offset for SO Shipments configuration applies. If no payment term types are selected, the invoice date offset is applied to all payment term types. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → App Config → Sales**. Configure the **Invoice Date Offset for SO Shipments** app configuration by entering the number of days to offset the invoice date.
**Step 2:** *(Optional)* Configure the **Applicable Payment Term Types for Invoice Date Offset** app configuration by selecting the **COD** payment term type to which the invoice date offset should apply.
**Step 3:** Create and release a Sales Order with the **Payment Terms** set to **COD** in the **Sales** tab.
**Step 4:** Click **Options → Quick Ship** at the top of the Sales Order.
**Step 5:** The **Quick Ship** dialog box appears. Verify that the **Invoice Date** and **Ship Date** are automatically updated based on the configured invoice date offset.
**Step 6:** Click **Quick Ship** to successfully ship the Sales Order and generate the invoice.
**Step 7:** Open the generated invoice and verify that the updated invoice date has been applied.
**Step 8:** Open the generated invoice. From the **Options** menu, select the **Take Deposit** option and then click **Record Deposit**. The **Customer Deposit** page opens.
**Step 9:** Verify the **Deposit Date**, select the Sales Order number in the **Ref#** field, and enter the deposit amount to be applied.
**Step 10:** Click **Link** to link the deposit to the invoice, and then click **Save**.
*** ### **Enhanced Default UOM Selection with Configurable UOM Priority** **Overview:** A new **Default UOM** field has been introduced in the **Customer** module to simplify Unit of Measure (UOM) selection when adding items to sales transactions. In addition, the **"Use UOM from the Customer/Item Customer Mapping on Add Item"** app configuration has been enhanced to support multiple UOM selection priorities. When enabled, the system automatically determines the appropriate UOM based on the configured priority, reducing manual effort while ensuring customer-specific UOM preferences are applied consistently across sales documents. Users can still modify the selected UOM after the item is added. *** **Configuration Details:** * **App Config Name:** Use UOM from the Customer/Item Customer Mapping on Add Item * **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → Sales → Use UOM from the Customer/Item Customer Mapping on Add Item * **Type:** Multi-select Dropdown * **Available Options:** * Customer * Item Customer Mapping
*** **Functionality:** * If the **Customer Default UOM** option is selected, the system uses the **Default UOM** configured in the Customer record. * If the **Item Customer Mapping UOM** option is selected, the system uses the UOM configured in the most recently created **Item Customer Mapping** record for the selected customer and item. * If both options are selected, the system gives priority to the **Customer Default UOM**. * If neither configured option is available, the system falls back to the item's default UOM. Users can manually change the UOM in the sales order line after the item has been added to the transaction. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → App Config → Sales** and configure the **"Use UOM from the Customer/Item Customer Mapping on Add Item"** app configuration by selecting both the **Customer Default UOM** and **Item Customer Mapping UOM** options.
**Step 2:** Go to **Sales → Customer Section → Customer Centre** and open the required customer record.
**Step 3:** In the **Other Info** tab, set the **Default UOM** and save the customer record.
**Step 4:** Create an **Item Customer Mapping** for the same customer and item, and select the required UOM. If multiple Item Customer Mappings exist for the same customer and item, the system considers the **most recently created mapping**.
**Step 5:** Create a Sales Order for the configured customer and add the mapped item. **Step 6:** Verify that the UOM displayed in the sales order line is the **Customer Default UOM**.
{% hint style="info" %} If a Customer Default UOM is not configured, the system uses the UOM from the **latest Item Customer Mapping**. If neither is available, the system uses the item's default UOM. {% endhint %} *** ### **Display Customer First Name, Last Name, and Company Name in Sales Order Centre** **Overview:** The Sales Order Centre has been enhanced with three new columns: **Customer First Name**, **Customer Last Name**, and **Company Name**. These columns allow users to view customer details directly within the Sales Order Centre, making it easier to identify customers, differentiate between individuals and companies, and search sales orders without opening the Customer record. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added **Customer First Name**, **Customer Last Name**, and **Company Name** columns to the **Sales Order Centre**. * The **Customer First Name** column displays the value configured in the **First Name** field on the **Primary** tab of the **Customer** page. * The **Customer Last Name** column displays the value configured in the **Last Name** field on the **Primary** tab of the **Customer** page. * The **Company Name** column displays the value configured in the **Company Name** field on the **Primary** tab of the **Customer** page. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Go to **Menu → Sales → Customer Section → Customer Centre** and open an existing customer record.
**Step 2:** In the **Primary** tab, enter or update the **First Name**, **Last Name**, and **Company Name** fields, and save the customer record.
**Step 3:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Sales Order → Sales Order Centre**. **Step 4:** Click the **Columns** icon and enable the **Customer First Name**, **Customer Last Name**, and **Company Name** columns. **Step 5:** The system displays the **Customer First Name**, **Customer Last Name**, and **Company Name** values retrieved from the corresponding fields on the **Primary** tab of the associated Customer record.
*** ### **Drag-and-Drop Reordering of MO Lines in Released Manufacturing Orders** **Overview:** This enhancement allows users to reorder item lines within a Manufacturing Order (MO) while the MO is in Released status. Previously, newly added items could only be appended to the MO, and their position could not be adjusted. With this enhancement, users can drag and drop MO lines to rearrange the item sequence as needed, providing greater flexibility when organizing raw materials, labor items, service items, and other components within the Manufacturing Order. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added support for drag-and-drop reordering of MO Lines in Released Manufacturing Orders. * Newly added items are automatically placed at the bottom of the MO Lines list. * Users can reposition newly added or existing items anywhere within the MO Lines section. * The customized item sequence is retained after saving the Manufacturing Order. *** **How It Works:**\ \ **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Manufacturing → Manufacturing Order** and create a Manufacturing Order.
**Step 2:** In the **MO Lines** section, click **Release** to move the Manufacturing Order to **Released** status.
**Step 3:** Add a new item using the **Add Items** option. Newly added items are automatically displayed at the bottom of the MO Lines list.
**Step 4:** Use the drag handle available on the item line to drag and drop the item to the desired position within the MO Lines section. Click **Save** to retain the updated item order.
# June 2.0 {% hint style="warning" %} This is a Custom Release. Feature availability depends on configuration and rollout status. Some features listed above may not be visible in your environment if they are part of a staged or custom deployment. Please contact your support representative to confirm enablement. {% endhint %} ### Enhanced Default Search Type Selection for Pick Task Assignment **Overview** A new enhancement has been introduced to allow users to configure default **Search Type** selections for the **Pick Task Assignment** page through **WMS User Settings**. Once configured, the selected search type is automatically pre-populated whenever the Pick Task Assignment page is opened, eliminating the need for users to repeatedly select their preferred search mode. **Key Enhancements** * Added support to configure default **Search Type** values in **WMS > User Settings**. * The selected search type is automatically applied when opening the **Pick Task Assignment** page. * Supports all available search types, including: * Pick By Wave * Replenishments * Case Picks * Each Pick * Waiting For Replenishment * Manufacturing **How It Works** 1. Navigate to **WMS -> User Settings**. 2. Under **Pick Task Assignment Defaults**, select the desired default **Search Type**. 3. Click **Update Setting** to save the configuration
4. Open the **Pick Task Assignment** page. The configured search type, **Each Pick**, is automatically selected, and its corresponding tasks are displayed by default.
5. Go to the **Wave Centre** in ERP and double-click the required wave to open the **Wave** subform. Then, click the **Search** icon under the **Action** column for the corresponding **Order#**.
6. The **Wave Line Allocation** window opens, where you can view the **Pick Type** for the corresponding task.
*** ### App Config: Use Signed Invoice For Email Queue **Overview** This enhancement introduces a new application configuration that allows the system to automatically attach the most recently signed invoice when an invoice is manually added to the Email Queue. If no signed invoice is available, the system attaches the standard invoice document instead. *** **Configuration Details** **App Config Name:** Use Signed Invoice For Email Queue **Configuration Location: Menu → App Config → General → Use Signed Invoice For Email Queue** *** **Functionality** **When App Config Is Enabled** * If a signed invoice exists for the selected invoice, the system attaches the most recently signed invoice document to the **Email Queue**. * If no signed invoice exists, the system automatically attaches the standard invoice document. *** **When App Config Is Disabled** * The system always attaches the standard invoice document when the invoice is manually added to the Email Queue, regardless of whether a signed invoice exists. *** **How It Works** 1. Navigate to **Menu → App Config → General** and enable the **Use Signed Invoice For Email Queue** app configuration.
2. Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Invoice** and create an invoice.
3. Go to **Menu → Sales → Invoice Centre** and select the recently created invoice. Click the **header-level Options** menu and select **Print**.
4. In the **Select Reporting Template** popup, select the document template and enable the **Capture Signature** toggle. Click on the **Capture Signature** option.
5. Enter the signer's name, capture the signature, and click **Save**.
6. Open the invoice. The signed invoice is visible under the **Signed Invoice(s)** tab and includes the signed report.
7. From the **header-level Options** menu, select **Add to Email Queue**.
8. Select the required document template and email template, configure the recipient details if required, and click **Preview & Send**.
9. The invoice is added to the **Email Queue** in the **Email Centre.** Send the selected invoice.
If a signed invoice exists, the system attaches the signed invoice to the email. Otherwise, it attaches the standard invoice document.
{% hint style="info" %} This enhancement is applicable only when invoices are manually added to the Email Queue using the **Add to Email Queue** option. It does not affect invoices sent through any automated email processes. {% endhint %} # July Release {% hint style="warning" %} This is a Custom Release. Feature availability depends on configuration and rollout status. Some features listed above may not be visible in your environment if they are part of a staged or custom deployment. Please contact your support representative to confirm enablement. {% endhint %} ### Enhanced Custom Description Character Limit for Items **Overview** The maximum character limit for the **Custom Description** field in the Item module has been increased from its previous limit to **4,000 characters**. This enhancement allows users to store more detailed product information, specifications, or custom descriptions without being constrained by a shorter text limit. The **Custom Description** field is available under the **Other Attributes** tab of the Item module and is also displayed as a column in the **Item Centre**, making the complete description accessible for reference. *** **Key Enhancements** * Increased the maximum length of the **Custom Description** field to **4,000 characters**. * Supports saving and displaying longer item descriptions without truncation. * The updated Custom Description is displayed in the **Item Centre** through the **Custom Description** column. * Enables users to maintain more comprehensive product information directly against an item. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Item** and create a new item. **Step 2:** Go to the **Other Attributes** tab and enter a **custom description** in the **Custom Description** field. The field now supports descriptions of up to **4,000 characters**. Click **Save** to save the item.
**Step 3:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Item → Item Centre**. Locate the item in the Item Centre. The **Custom Description** column displays the saved description, confirming that descriptions up to **4,000 characters** are stored and displayed successfully. *** ### **Display Customer Default Deposit Account During Customer Deposit Creation** **Overview** The Customer Deposit functionality has been enhanced to prioritize the customer's configured **Default Deposit Account** when recording deposits in the Sales Order, Sales Order Centre, or Customer Deposit modules **Sales Order**, **Sales Order Centre**, or the **Customer Deposit** module. Earlier, the system always populated the **Deposit Account** using the **Page Defaults** configuration, even if a customer-specific default deposit account was configured. With this enhancement, the system now displays the customer's default deposit account when available. Additionally, if the customer doesn't have a configured default deposit account, the **Deposit Account** field will remain blank, allowing users to select the appropriate account manually. *** **Key Enhancements** * The system now displays the customer's configured **Default Deposit Account** when recording a customer deposit. * The customer's default deposit account takes precedence over the **Page Default Deposit Account**. * If the customer does not have a configured default deposit account, the **Deposit Account** field now remains blank. * The updated behavior is consistently applied when taking deposits from the **Customer Deposit**, **Sales Order**, and **Sales Order Centre** modules. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Customer Section → Customer Centre** and configure a **Default Deposit Account** for the required customer in the **Payments** tab.
**Step 2:** Navigate to **Menu → Customer Deposit → Customer Deposit**. Click the **three vertical dots** in the top-right corner of the page and configure a **Deposit Account** under **Page Defaults**.
**Step 3:** Create a **Sales Order** for the same customer. Then, select **Options → Take Deposit → Record Deposit**.
**Step 4:** The **Customer Deposit** window opens. If the selected customer has a configured **Default Deposit Account**, the system automatically populates the **Deposit Account** field with that account.
**Step 5:** Save the **Customer Deposit**. Then, navigate to **Menu → Accounting → Account Register** to verify that the selected customer deposit account is used for the accounting transaction.
*** ### Added Net Total-Based Email Interceptor for Customer Statements **Overview** A new enhancement has been added to the **Email Interceptor** for **Customer Statements** that allows emails to be sent conditionally based on the customer's **Net Total**. With this enhancement, the Email Interceptor evaluates the Net Total when the Customer Statement email job is executed. Customer Statement emails are sent only when the customer's **Net Total is greater than 0**. Customers with a **Net Total of 0 or a negative Net Total** are automatically excluded from the email process. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added Net Total-based email filtering in the **Customer Statement Email Interceptor**. * Customer Statement emails are sent only when the customer's **Net Total is greater than 0**. * Customers with a **Net Total of 0** are automatically excluded from email delivery. * Customers with a **negative Net Total** are also excluded from email delivery. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Email Interceptor** and create a new **Email Interceptor**. Select **Entity** as **Customer Statement** and **Action** as **General**. Configure the custom script to evaluate the customer's **Net Total** and allow email delivery only when the **Net Total** is greater than **0**. Save the Email Interceptor.
**Step 2:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Customer Section → Customer Info** and search for the required customer. Verify that the customer's **Net Total** is greater than **0**.
**Step 3:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Customer Statement**, select the required customer statement, click the header-level **Options** menu, and select **Email Statement**.
**Step 4:** In the **Select Reporting Template** window, select the required reporting template and click **Preview &** **Send**.
**Step 5:** The Customer Statement email is added to the **Email Queue** in the **Email Centre**. Send the queued email to deliver the Customer Statement to the customer's email address.
The Customer Statement email is sent successfully to the email address (configured in the **Emails** sub-tab of the **Contact Info** tab on the **Customer** page), only if the customer's **Net Total** is greater than **0**.
*** ### **Added Last Landed Cost (Home Currency) Column in Bill and Item Receipt Modules** **Overview** A new **Last Landed Cost (Home Currency)** column has been added across the **Bill** and **Item Receipt** modules to provide better visibility into the latest landed cost of inventory items in the company's home currency. The column is available in transaction entry screens, corresponding detail centres, and sub forms, enabling users to quickly view and search the latest landed cost without opening individual item records. Additionally, the **Advanced Search** functionality has been enhanced to support filtering records using the **Last Landed Cost (Home Currency)** field in both the Bill Centre (Search By: Bill Item Detail) and Item Receipt Centre (Search By: Item Receipt Detail). *** **Key Enhancements** * Added **Last Landed Cost (Home Currency)** column to: * Bill Details section * Bill Centre (Search By: Bill Items Detail) * Bill Sub Form * Item Receipt Details section * Item Receipt Centre (Search By: Item Receipt Detail) * Item Receipt Sub Form * Added **Advance Search** support for **Last Landed Cost (Home Currency)** in: * Bill Centre (Search By: Bill Item Detail) * Item Receipt Centre (Search By: Item Receipt Detail) * The value is displayed in the company's **Home Currency**, regardless of the vendor currency used in the transaction. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Purchase → Bill** and create a Bill. Add an inventory item. Verify that the **Last Landed Cost (Home Currency)** column is displayed in the **Bill Details** section.
**Step 2:** Go to **Menu → Purchase → Bill → Bill Centre** and select **Bill Item Detail** from the **Search By** dropdown. **Step 3:** Verify that the **Last Landed Cost (Home Currency)** column is available in the grid and displays the latest landed cost for each item in the corresponding Bill.
*** ### **Enhanced Exchange Rate Editing for Same Foreign Currency Fund Transfers** **Overview** The **Funds Transfer** module has been enhanced to allow users to manually update the **Exchange Rate** when both the **Transfer From** and **Transfer To** accounts use the same foreign currency and that currency is different from the home currency. This enables users to record foreign exchange (FX) adjustments directly through the Funds Transfer module without creating a separate Journal Entry. *** **Key Enhancements** * Users can now edit the **Exchange Rate** field when both the **Transfer From** and **Transfer To** accounts are in the same foreign currency, and the currency is not the home currency. * Eliminates the need to create a Journal Entry solely for recording FX adjustments between same-currency foreign accounts. * Existing exchange rate behavior remains unchanged for all other transfer scenarios. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Accounting → Transfer Funds**. **Step 2:** Select the **Transfer From** and **Transfer To** accounts. Ensure both accounts use the same foreign currency and that the currency is different from the company's home currency. Select the corresponding **Transfer Currency**.
**Step 3:** The **Exchange Rate** field becomes editable. Enter the required exchange rate to reflect the desired foreign exchange adjustment.
*** ### **Enhanced Inventory Adjustment Centre to Display Adjustment Amount with Four Decimal Places** **Overview** The **Inventory Adjustment Centre** has been enhanced to display the **Adj Amount** column with up to **four decimal places**. This provides greater precision when reviewing inventory adjustments, particularly for transactions involving fractional quantities or values. *** **Key Enhancements** * The **Adj Amount** column in the **Inventory Adjustment Centre** now displays values with up to **four decimal places**. * Improved precision makes it easier to review and reconcile inventory adjustments involving decimal quantities or values. * The enhancement applies across the **Inventory Adjustment**, **Inventory Adjustment Detail**, and **Inventory Change Log (Transaction Type: Inventory Adjustment)** views. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Inventory → Inventory Adjustment → Create Inventory Adjustment** and create a **Quantity** adjustment for the required **store** and **item**.
**Step 2:** Navigate to **Menu → Inventory → Inventory Adjustment → Inventory Adjustment Centre** and search for the newly created inventory adjustment. **Step 3:** The **Qty Adj** column displays the adjustment quantity with up to **four decimal places**, providing greater precision when reviewing inventory adjustments.
**Step 4:** Double-click the required inventory adjustment record to open the **Inventory Adjustment Detail** window. The **Qty Adjustment** field is displayed with up to **four decimal places**, ensuring consistency between the Inventory Adjustment Centre and the detail view.
*** ### **Product Price Range and Variant Visibility in the Presentation Portal** **Overview** The Presentation Portal has been enhanced to ensure that only sellable product variants are considered when displaying product prices and product visibility. *** **Key Enhancements** * Product price ranges are calculated only from product variants where **Is Sellable** is set to **True**. * If a product contains only one variant and that variant is marked as non-sellable, the product is not displayed in the Presentation Portal. * When a non-sellable single-variant product is accessed, the **"Item Not Specified"** message is displayed. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → B2B → Presentation Centre** and create or edit a Presentation. **Step 2:** In the **Products** tab, include a product with multiple variants, where one or more variants are marked as **Is Sellable = False**, and save the Presentation. **Step 3:** Generate or open the Presentation link from the **Links** tab to access the Presentation Portal. **Step 4:** The product price range is calculated using only the variants where **Is Sellable = True**. For example, if the product contains variants priced at **50**, **100**, and **150**, and the **50-**priced variant is non-sellable, the displayed price range is **100–150**. **Step 5:** If a product contains only one variant and that variant is marked as **Is Sellable = False**, the product is not displayed in the Presentation Portal. If the product is accessed, the system displays the **"Item Not Specified"** message. *** ### **Enhanced Item Availability with Qty Details Popup in Sales Estimates** **Overview:** The **Availability** column in the **Estimate Details** section has been enhanced to provide quick access to item inventory information. Clicking the **Availability** indicator for an inventory item now opens the **Qty Details** popup, allowing users to review inventory availability, stock levels, sales history, incoming deliveries, and location-level inventory details without leaving the Estimate page. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added the ability to open the **Qty Details** popup directly from the **Availability** column in the **Estimate Details** section. * Users can review inventory availability and stock details for the selected item without navigating to another module. * The popup reflects the latest inventory information, including inventory adjustments and lot-controlled inventory. * The enhancement is available regardless of how the item is added to the Estimate, including: * Add Item * Advanced Variant Finder * Item Inventory Snapshot * Transfer Sales Order * Copy Estimate * Duplicate Estimate * Short Inventory Planner *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Estimate** and create an Estimate. **Step 2:** Add one or more inventory items to the **Estimate Details** section. In the **Estimate Details** section, locate the **Availability** column for the required inventory item. **Step 3:** Click the **Availability** indicator to open the **Qty Details** popup.
**Step 4:** Review the item's inventory information, including inventory levels (On Hand, Available, Not Available), sales history and forecast trends, incoming deliveries, and location-level inventory details.
*** ### **Added Additional Fields in Batch Update for Item Centre** **Overview** The **Batch Update** option in the **Item Centre** has been enhanced to support updating additional item dimension and measurement fields. This enhancement allows users to update multiple items simultaneously with size, dimension, weight, and cubic capacity information, eliminating the need to edit each item individually. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added **Size UOM** field to the **Batch Update** window. * Added **Length**, **Width**, and **Height** fields to the **Batch Update** window. * Added **Weight UOM** and **Weight** fields to the **Batch Update** window. * Added **Cubic Capacity UOM** and **Cubic Capacity** fields to the **Batch Update** window. * Users can batch update these fields for multiple selected items in a single operation. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Item → Item Centre**. **Step 2:** Select one or more items and click **Options → Batch Updates**.
**Step 3:** In the **Batch Update** window, you can now update the **Size UOM**, **Length**, **Width**, **Height**, **Weight UOM**, **Weight**, **Cubic Capacity UOM**, and **Cubic Capacity** fields.
**Step 4:** Enter the required values for the fields, then click **Update** to apply the changes to all selected items. Verify that the values have been updated successfully for the selected item(s) in the **Item Centre**.
*** ### Batch Update Support for Item Date Fields **Overview** The **Batch Update** option in the **Item Centre** has been enhanced to support updating the **Launch Date**, **Expiration Date**, and **Discontinued Date** fields for multiple items simultaneously. Changes made through Batch Update are also recorded in **Activity Tracking**, making it easier to manage and audit item date updates. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added support for updating **Launch Date**, **Expiration Date**, and **Discontinued Date** through the **Batch Update** window. * Users can update these date fields for multiple selected items in a single batch update. * Updated date values are reflected in the corresponding item records in the **Item Centre**. * Changes made through **Batch Update** are also recorded in **Activity Tracking**. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Item → Item Centre**. Select one or more items and click **Options → Batch Updates**.
**Step 2:** The **Launch Date**, **Expiration Date**, and **Discontinued Date** fields are now available in the **Batch Update** window. Select **Launch Date** from the **Column** **Name** field, enter the required value, and click **Update**.
**Step 3:** Verify that the **Launch Date** value has been updated successfully for the selected item.
*** ### **Enhanced Transaction Page Titles with Order Number** **Overview** Transaction pages have been enhanced to display the **transaction name** and **order number** in the browser tab title. This makes it easier to identify and switch between multiple open transaction tabs. *** **Key Enhancements** * Enhanced transaction page titles to display the transaction name and order number in the format **` - `**. * The page title is displayed when opening a transaction in **New** or **Edit** mode. * Supported transaction pages include: * Sales Order * Invoice * Purchase Order * Bill * Item Receipt * Credit Memo * RMA * Manufacture * Estimate *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to any supported transaction page, such as **Menu → Sales → Estimate → Create Estimate**. **Step 2:** Create a new Estimate or open an existing estimate from the **Estimate Centre**. **Step 3:** Verify that the transaction opens in a new browser tab and that the page title is displayed in the format **` - `** (for example, **Estimate - LA-SO16385**).
*** ### **Enhanced Delivery Management System (DMS) Mobile Application** **Overview** The Delivery Management System (DMS) Mobile Application has been enhanced to improve delivery processing, provide additional delivery information, and simplify delivery management. The enhancements include support for Invoice Header Custom Fields in the **Mark Order As Delivered** pop-up window, new delivery filters and refresh functionality, and Route and Case Count display. *** **Key Enhancements** * Enhanced the **Mark Order As Delivered** window with separate **Delivery** and **Custom Fields** tabs. * Added support for displaying and editing the first five configured **Invoice Header Custom Fields** during delivery confirmation. * Updated Invoice Header Custom Fields automatically when an order is marked as delivered. * Added **Case Count** to the **Delivery** tab to display the total invoice line quantity included in the delivery. * Added the **Route** column to the **Delivery Detail** page using the Route configured on the Sales Order header. * Added **Status Filters**, **Date Filters**, and a **Refresh** button to the Delivery page for easier delivery management. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to the **Delivery** module in the [DMS Mobile Application](/other-products/xorodms/xorodms-delivery-management-system/dms-workflow). The Delivery page now includes: * **Status Filters** (Open, In Progress, Partially Delivered, Delivered) * **Date Filters** * **Refresh** button
Use these options to filter and refresh the delivery list. **Step 2:** Select a delivery to open the **Delivery Detail** page. The **Route** column displays the value configured in the corresponding **Sales Order Header** (Shipping tab).
**Step 3:** Click **Mark As Delivered** for the required order. The **Mark Order As Delivered** window now contains: * **Delivery** tab * **Custom Fields** tab (displayed only when Invoice Header Custom Fields are configured)
The **Delivery** tab also displays the **Case Count**, which represents the total invoice line quantity included in the delivery.
**Step 4:** Open the **Custom Fields** tab. Only the first **five** configured **Invoice Header Custom Fields** are displayed, and all displayed fields are editable.
**Step 5:** Update the required custom field values and click **Mark as delivered**. The updated values are saved to the corresponding **Invoice Header Custom Fields** (Custom Fields tab).
*** ### **Apply Purchase Order Approval Rules Based on System User** **Overview** The **PO Approval Rule** module has been enhanced to support **System User** filtering. This allows approval rules to be applied only to Purchase Orders created by selected system users. When no system users are selected, the approval rule continues to apply to Purchase Orders created by all system users. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added a **System User** field to the **PO Approval Rule** module. * By default, approval rules apply to Purchase Orders created by all system users. * When one or more system users are selected, the approval rule applies only to Purchase Orders whose **Created Source** matches one of the selected system users. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → PO Approval Rule** and create a new PO Approval Rule or open an existing rule. **Step 2:** In the **System User** field, select your user to apply the approval rule only to Purchase Orders whose **Created Source** matches your user ID.
**Step 3:** Save the PO Approval Rule. Navigate to **Menu → Purchase → Purchase Order** and create a new Purchase Order. Verify that the approval rule is applied only to Purchase Orders created by your user.
{% hint style="info" %} Purchase Orders that are pending approval cannot be printed or added to the Email Queue. The **Print** and **Add to Email Queue** options become available only after the Purchase Order has been approved. {% endhint %} *** ### Enforce Item Customer Mapping **Overview** This enhancement simplifies customer-specific inventory item restrictions by moving the control from the Sales App Configuration to the Customer module. A new **Enforce Item Customer Mapping** toggle has been introduced in the Other Info tab of the **Create/Update Customer** and **Upload Customer** modules. When enabled for a customer, inventory items available across Sales modules are filtered according to the configured **Item Customer Mapping** records and, where applicable, the selected **Ship To Address**.
This provides greater flexibility by allowing item restrictions to be managed individually for each customer while maintaining existing behavior for customers where item restrictions are not enforced. *** **Functionality** **When Enforce Item Customer Mapping Is Enabled** * Inventory items displayed in Sales modules (Estimate, Sales Order, Invoice, Credit Memo, and Sales Receipt) are filtered according to the configured **Item Customer Mapping** records. * The **Ship To Address** field is always available in the **Item Customer Mapping** module. * When Ship To Address-specific mappings exist, only inventory items mapped to the selected Ship To Address are available. * When customer-level mappings exist without Ship To Address restrictions, only the mapped inventory items are available. * If no Item Customer Mapping records exist for the selected customer, all inventory items remain available. * Customer-based item validation is enforced for manual item selection, Quick Add Items, Last Ordered Items, uploads, APIs, and third-party integrations. **When Enforce Item Customer Mapping Is Disabled** * Existing system behavior is maintained. * Customer-specific item restrictions are not applied. * All eligible inventory items remain available for selection. *** **What's Changed** * The **Ship To Address** field is now always displayed in the **Item Customer Mapping** module. * Introduced the **Enforce Item Customer Mapping** toggle in the **Create/Update Customer** and **Upload Customer** screens. * Item restrictions are now controlled at the **Customer** level instead of through a global Sales App Configuration. * Existing Item Customer Mapping behavior, validation rules, Ship To Address logic, and supported mapping combinations remain unchanged. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Create/Update Customer** (or **Upload Customer**) and enable the **Enforce Item Customer Mapping** option for the required customer. **Step 2:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Item Customer Mapping** and create an Item Customer Mapping for the required customer and inventory item.
Likewise, create additional **Item Customer Mappings** for the same customer and inventory item using different **UOMs** or **Ship To Addresses**, as required. The configured mappings are displayed in the **Item Customer Mapping Centre**, including the corresponding **Ship To Address Name** column, which displays the **Ship To Address** for each mapping.
**Step 3:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Sales Order**, and select the required customer. **Step 4:** Click **Add Item**. The Item Detail pop-up displays inventory items according to the configured Item Customer Mapping.
**Step 5:** Select the required inventory item and UOM, click **Add Item**, and then click **Save** to save the Sales Order.
The same customer-based validation is applied when adding inventory items through **Quick Add Items**, **Last Ordered Items**, manual item entry, uploads, APIs, and third-party integrations. *** **Validation Rules** **Allowed Mapping Combinations** The following Item Customer Mapping combinations are supported: * The same **Item**, **Customer**, and **UOM** can be mapped to multiple **Ship To Addresses**. * When **Multi UOM** is enabled, the same **Item** and **Customer** can be mapped to the same **Ship To Address** using different UOMs. **Ship To Address Consistency** For the same **Item** and **Customer**, mappings must be configured consistently. * If an existing mapping does not have a **Ship To Address**, additional mappings with a **Ship To Address** cannot be created. Update the existing mapping to assign a Ship To Address before creating additional mappings. * Similarly, if existing mappings already use **Ship To Addresses**, a new mapping without a **Ship To Address** cannot be created. {% hint style="info" %} Duplicate mappings are allowed only when **Multi UOM** is enabled, and the UOM is different for the same customer-item mapping. {% endhint %} *** ### Added Weight Precision support in Barcode **Identification** profile **Overview** A new **Weight Precision** field has been added to the **Barcode Identification Profile** to support weight values stored in barcodes without a decimal point. This enhancement allows the system to interpret the extracted numeric weight based on the configured precision, ensuring that the correct decimal value is resolved during barcode scanning in WMS. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added a new **Weight Precision** dropdown to the **Barcode Identification Profile**. * The **Weight Precision** field is displayed **only when the profile detail Type is set to Weight**. * Supported precision options include: * **No Precision** * **10th Place** * **100th Place** * **1000th Place** * The selected precision determines how the extracted weight value is interpreted when the barcode does not contain a decimal point. * For profile detail types other than **Weight** (Item UPC, Batch Number), the **Weight Precision** field remains hidden and does not affect barcode resolution. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Barcode Identification Profile** and create a new Barcode Identification Profile. Configure the barcode profile by adding the required profile detail rows: * Add a profile detail with **Field Type = Item UPC** and configure the appropriate **Start Index** and **End Index**. * Add another profile detail with **Field Type = Weight**, configure the required **Start Index**, **End Index**, **Weight UOM**, and select the appropriate **Weight Precision** (**No Precision**, **10th Place**, **100th Place**, or **1000th Place**).
**Step 2:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Item → Item Centre** and open the required inventory item. In the **Primary** tab, enable the **Catch Weight** toggle and configure the required pricing information.
**Step 3:** Navigate to **Menu → Purchase → Vendor Section → Vendor Centre** and open the required vendor. In the **Other Info** tab, select the configured **Barcode Identification Profile** and save the vendor.
**Step 4:** Navigate to **Menu → Purchase → Purchase Order** and create a Purchase Order for the configured vendor and catch weight item. Release the Purchase Order and create an ASN.
**Step 5:** Open the **Receiving** module in WMS and select **Receive**. In the **Scan ASN** page, enter or scan the ASN number in the **ASN#** field and click **Accept**.
**Step 6:** In the **Receiving Mode** page, select **Receive By Item**.
**Step 7:** Scan or enter the **Item UPC** in the **Scan ASN#** field and click **Accept**. The system: * Identifies the item using the configured **Item UPC** portion of the barcode. * Extracts the configured weight value from the barcode. * Applies the configured **Weight Precision** to resolve the correct decimal value. * Displays the resolved weight using the appropriate **Weight UOM**. * Displays the decoded barcode details, including the **UPC**, **Item Number**, **Description**, **Weight**, **LPN**, and other configured barcode attributes.
{% hint style="info" %} **Note:** The system determines the Weight UOM using the following priority: * The item's **SKU UOM** (UOM tab). * The **Default Weight UOM** configured in **App Config**, if the item does not have a default Weight UOM. {% endhint %} *** ### Route Scheduling and Shipment Delivery Enhancements **Overview** We've introduced a comprehensive set of enhancements to the **Route** and **Shipment Delivery** functionality to make delivery planning more intelligent, shipment management more flexible, and the overall fulfillment process more efficient. With this release, you can configure delivery schedules for each route, automatically calculate shipment and delivery dates based on predefined routing rules, create Shipment Deliveries directly from Sales Orders, manage partial shipments with greater accuracy, and continue updating deliveries as fulfillment progresses. These improvements reduce manual effort, improve scheduling accuracy, and provide greater control over the entire delivery lifecycle. *** **Key Enhancements** **Smarter Route Scheduling** The Route module has been enhanced to automate delivery scheduling and reduce manual planning. * Added a new **Delivery Day** multi-select field in the [**Route** module,](/xoroerp-1/admin/route) allowing one or more delivery days to be configured for each route. * Added a new **Day** column in the **Route Centre** to provide quick visibility into the configured delivery schedule for every route. * Introduced a **Ship Date Offset** field for each route, enabling the system to calculate when an order must be shipped to meet its scheduled delivery date.
* If no Ship Date Offset is specified, XoroERP automatically considers the offset as **0**. * Customers can now be assigned a **default Route**, ensuring the appropriate route is automatically selected whenever a new Sales Order is created for that customer. * The system automatically calculates both the **Delivery Date** and **Ship Date** using: * The assigned Route * Configured Delivery Day(s) * Ship Date Offset * Sales Order Date * If the **Customer**, **Route**, **Order Date**, or **Delivery Date** is modified, the system automatically recalculates the remaining dates to maintain an accurate delivery schedule. * If **Delivery Manager** is disabled, Route selection remains optional, and the Sales Order continues through the standard processing workflow without any restrictions. *** **Create Shipment Deliveries Earlier in the Fulfillment Process** Shipment planning can now begin much earlier without waiting for invoicing. * Shipment Deliveries can now be created directly from **Sales Order** lines using the Line Header Options dropdown.
* An invoice is **no longer required** before creating a Shipment Delivery. * If the selected Sales Order quantities have not yet been completely shipped, the Shipment Delivery is automatically created in **Draft** status. * Once the planned shipment quantity has been fully shipped, the same Shipment Delivery automatically transitions from **Draft** to **Open**. * Only Shipment Deliveries in **Open** status can be processed through the **Delivery Manager**. * This enhancement allows warehouse and logistics teams to prepare deliveries in advance while ensuring deliveries are processed only after shipment requirements have been fulfilled. *** **Greater Flexibility When Managing Shipment Deliveries** Shipment Deliveries can now be updated throughout the fulfillment process, rather than fixed after creation. Users can now: * Add additional eligible Sales Order lines to an existing Shipment Delivery. * Remove Sales Order lines that have not yet been delivered. * Modify the **Quantity to Deliver** for individual Shipment Delivery lines. * Continue refining Shipment Deliveries while they remain in **Draft** or **Open** status. To preserve shipment integrity: * Shipment Deliveries or Shipment Delivery lines with **Delivered**, **In Progress**, **Void**, or **Cancelled** statuses cannot be modified. * This prevents accidental changes to deliveries that have already entered the fulfillment process. *** **Improved Support for Partial Shipments** XoroERP now provides enhanced support for organizations that fulfill customer orders across multiple shipments. * A single Sales Order line can now be shipped in multiple batches. * Each shipment is automatically linked to its corresponding: * Shipment Delivery * Invoice * The system independently tracks shipped quantities for each shipment. * Duplicate shipment quantities are automatically prevented. * The cumulative Shipment Delivery quantity always remains synchronized with the original Sales Order quantity. * This provides complete traceability while simplifying multi-stage order fulfillment. *** **Add Sales Order Lines to Existing Shipment Deliveries** Managing deliveries is now more flexible by allowing Sales Order lines to be associated with existing deliveries. Users can now add Sales Order lines directly from: * **Sales Order Centre** * **Create Sales Order** page They can choose to: * Add selected Sales Order lines to an existing Shipment Delivery. * Create a brand-new Shipment Delivery using the selected Sales Order lines. This simplifies delivery consolidation, reduces duplicate deliveries, and minimizes navigation between different modules. *** **Enhanced Validation and Data Integrity** Additional system validations have been introduced to ensure Shipment Deliveries remain accurate and consistent throughout the fulfillment lifecycle. The system now ensures that: * Shipment Deliveries with a **Delivered** status cannot be deleted. * Sales Order lines can only be added to Shipment Deliveries with **Open**, **In Progress**, or **Partially Delivered** statuses. * Only **shipped** Sales Order lines can be associated with **In Progress** or **Partially Delivered** Shipment Deliveries. * **Void** and **Cancelled** Sales Order lines cannot be added to any Shipment Delivery. * Shipment quantities remain synchronized with their originating Sales Orders, preventing duplicate or inconsistent fulfillment records. These validations help maintain data integrity while providing users with greater confidence when managing deliveries across the order fulfillment process. *** **How It Works** 1. Configure one or more **Delivery Days** and an optional **Ship Date Offset** for each Route. 2. Assign a default Route to the appropriate Customer. 3. When a Sales Order is created, XoroERP automatically populates the customer's assigned Route. 4. Using the configured Route, Delivery Day(s), Ship Date Offset, and Sales Order Date, the system automatically calculates the required **Ship Date** and **Delivery Date**. 5. Users can create Shipment Deliveries directly from Sales Order lines without first generating an invoice. 6. If the planned shipment quantity has not yet been completely shipped, the Shipment Delivery is created in **Draft** status. Once the planned quantity has been fully shipped, the Delivery automatically transitions to **Open**. 7. While the Shipment Delivery remains editable, users can add eligible Sales Order lines, remove undelivered lines, and adjust delivery quantities as business requirements change. 8. For orders fulfilled across multiple shipments, XoroERP tracks every shipment independently, links each shipped quantity to its corresponding Shipment Delivery and Invoice, and ensures delivered quantities remain synchronized with the originating Sales Order. *** **Business Benefits** * Automates route-based delivery scheduling. * Reduces manual date calculations during order fulfillment. * Enables delivery planning before invoicing. * Simplifies management of partial and multi-stage shipments. * Improves flexibility when modifying deliveries. * Prevents duplicate shipment quantities and maintains fulfillment accuracy. * Enhances operational visibility through improved routing and delivery controls. *** ### Commission Rules and Commission Report Enhancements **Overview** This enhancement introduces greater flexibility in commission calculations and significantly improves the Commission Report. Users can now manually update either the **Commission Percentage** or the **Commission Rate**, with the system automatically recalculating the corresponding value to keep both fields synchronized. Additionally, Commission Rules now support using **Line Quantity** in both **Conditions** and **Offset Criteria**, allowing businesses to define quantity-based commission structures. The enhanced Commission Report provides an expandable view with detailed commission breakdowns, advanced filtering, clearer visibility into commission adjustments, and improved printing options.
*** **Key Enhancements** **Manual Commission Percentage and Rate Synchronization** * Commission Percentage can now be edited directly. * When the Commission Percentage is updated, the system automatically recalculates the corresponding Commission Rate. * Similarly, when the Commission Rate is modified, the Commission Percentage is automatically recalculated. * Both values remain synchronized, ensuring consistent and accurate commission calculations. * Updated values are reflected immediately in the Commission Report. **Quantity-Based Commission Rules** Commission Rules now support using **Line Quantity** in both: * Conditions * Offset Criteria This enables organizations to create commission rules that reward or adjust commissions based on the quantity sold on individual invoice lines. **Enhanced Commission Report** The Commission Report has been redesigned with a modern, expandable interface, allowing users to: * Review commissions by Sales Representative, Invoice, Customer, and individual Item Line. * Expand and collapse report levels for easier navigation. * Filter results by Sales Representative, Invoice, Customer, and Item. * View the Base Commission Rate and any applied Commission Adjustments separately. * Clearly identify when an Offset Criterion has been applied, along with the corresponding reason. **Improved Effective Commission Rate Display** The report now displays invoice-level effective commission rates more clearly: * Displays a single percentage (for example, **15%**) when all invoice lines use the same commission percentage. * Displays a percentage range (for example, **15%–20%**) when invoice lines have different commission percentages. * Displays **Mixed** when percentage-based and amount-based commission methods are combined. * Displays **Amount** when only fixed commission amounts are applied. **Enhanced Printing Options** The Commission Report now supports additional print options, including: * Selectable report detail levels. * Sales Representative filtering. * Optional page breaks between sections. * Optional **Created By** and timestamp footers. *** **How It Works** 1. Configure Commission Rules as required, including quantity-based Conditions or Offset Criteria if applicable. 2. Create or process transactions that generate commissions. 3. Update either the **Commission Percentage** or **Commission Rate**, if necessary. 4. The system automatically recalculates the corresponding value to keep both fields synchronized. 5. Open the Commission Report to review the updated commission details, applied adjustments, effective commission rates, and quantity-based calculations. 6. Apply filters, expand report sections, or print the report using the available print options as needed. *** ### **Enhanced Invoice Payment Module with Batch Credit/Deposit Application and Parent-Child Invoice Support** **Overview** The Invoice Payment module has been enhanced to simplify invoice payment processing for customers with multiple invoices. Users can now apply customer deposits and credits to multiple selected invoices in a single action, define the sequence in which the available balance is allocated, and quickly view payment summaries while selecting invoices. Additionally, the Invoice Payment module now automatically displays invoices belonging to child customers when a parent customer is selected, allowing users to make direct payments to child invoices without first transferring credits or deposits from the parent customer. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added **batch application of Deposits and Credits** to multiple selected invoices. * Enhanced **All Due**, **Due**, **Deposit**, **Credit**, and **Remaining** payment summary indicators in the **Apply Payments** section that automatically update based on the selected invoices. * Added **Credit** and **Deposit** columns in the invoice grid to display the amounts applied to each invoice. * Added an **Apply Sequence** option in the **Apply Deposit/Credit to Selected Invoices** pop-up when batch applying deposits, allowing users to control the order in which invoices receive the available deposit balance. * Enhanced batch deposit allocation to automatically distribute the available deposit balance across selected invoices without requiring manual amount entry. * Added support for applying **multiple deposits or credits individually** to a single invoice. * Enhanced invoice payment processing to allow **direct payment of child customer invoices** without requiring parent-to-child credit or deposit transfers. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Payment → Invoice Payment**. Select the required **Store** and **Parent Customer**.
**Step 2:** Select the invoices to which you want to apply deposits or credits. As invoices are selected, the payment summary above the grid is automatically updated: * **All Due** displays the customer's total outstanding invoice balance. * **Due** displays the combined **Amount Due** of the selected invoices. * **Remaining** displays the outstanding balance of the selected invoices after deposits, credits, or payments are applied.
**Step 3:** Click **Apply Deposits** from the **Payment Header** section, located below the message displaying the selected customer's available deposits and credits.
The **Apply Deposit to Selected Invoices** window opens and displays all available customer deposits.
**Step 4:** Select the deposit to use. Users can select only one deposit and cannot manually enter the amount to apply. The system automatically applies the required amount from the selected deposit toward the selected invoices, up to the deposit's available balance. **Step 5:** Select the preferred **Apply Sequence**. Users can choose how the available deposit should be distributed across the selected invoices: * Invoice Order * Oldest Invoice First * Highest Remaining First * Smallest Remaining First The window also displays: * **Ready to Apply** – The available balance of the selected deposit that can be applied. * **Invoices Selected** – The total number of selected invoices. * **Selected Pending** – The total outstanding balance of the selected invoices.
**Step 6:** Click **Apply Deposit**. The system automatically allocates the available deposit across the selected invoices according to the chosen sequence.
The **Deposit** column displays the amount applied to each invoice, while the **Remaining** column reflects the outstanding balance still payable.
**Step 7:** To apply deposits or credits to an individual invoice, click the value in the **Deposit** or **Credit** column for the required invoice.
The corresponding **Apply Deposit** or **Apply Credit** pop-up window opens, where users can apply multiple deposits or credits to a single invoice.
**Step 8:** For each available deposit or credit, users can manually enter the amount to apply. The system validates the entered amount and does not allow the applied value to exceed the invoice's remaining payable balance. After clicking **Apply**, the applied deposit is reflected in the corresponding **Deposit** column of the invoice grid, and the invoice's remaining balance is recalculated automatically.
*** # July 2.0 ### **Enhanced B2B Variant Grid with Fixed Top Row and Left Column** **Overview** The B2B Variant Grid has been enhanced to improve usability when browsing products with a large number of item variants. The grid now keeps the top header row and the left-most item column fixed while scrolling, making it easier to identify item names and variant codes during order entry. Users can continue selecting quantities anywhere in the grid without losing context. *** **Key Enhancements** * Enhanced the B2B Variant Grid to keep the top header row fixed during vertical scrolling. * Enhanced the B2B Variant Grid to keep the left-most item name column fixed during horizontal scrolling. * Added support for simultaneous vertical and horizontal scrolling while keeping both the header row and item column visible. *** #### How It Works **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → B2B → Presentation Centre** and open a Presentation whose **Default Product Layout** is configured as **Grid**.
**Step 2:** Hover over a product and click on View Details. The Variant Grid opens, displaying the product variants in a matrix. Scroll both vertically and horizontally. Both the top header row and the left-most item column remain fixed simultaneously, allowing users to identify the corresponding item and option values regardless of the scroll position.
{% hint style="info" %} Ensure that the Presentation contains products with multiple variant combinations. The product should have more than three values configured for **Option 1**, **Option 2**, and **Option 3**. Product option names and values can be configured from the [**Product** module](/xoroerp-1/admin/product/product/create-product) before generating the corresponding product variants. {% endhint %} *** ### **Enable SMS Notifications for Shipment Delivery Updates** **Overview** The shipment notification process has been enhanced to support SMS notifications for delivery updates. A new **SMS Notifications** option has been added to the **App Module Access** module, allowing the system to send SMS notifications to customers for key shipment events. When enabled, customers receive SMS notifications on their **Main Phone** number when an order is **Out for Delivery** and when it has been **Delivered**. Additionally, the **Main Phone** field in the **Customer** module now includes a **Country Code** selector to support international phone numbers for SMS delivery. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added a new **SMS Notifications** option in **App Module Access** to enable or disable shipment SMS notifications. * Customers receive SMS notifications for the following shipment events: * **Out for Delivery** * **Order Delivered** * Added a **Country Code** selector to the **Main Phone** field in the **Customer** module for SMS delivery. * Delivery notification emails now prioritize the **Shipment Notification Email** field. * If no Shipment Notification Email is configured, the system automatically sends notifications to the customer's **Main Email**. * Multiple email addresses can be configured in the **Shipment Notification Email** field by separating them with commas (,). Notifications are sent to all configured email addresses. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → App Module Access** and enable the **SMS Notifications** option.
**Step 2:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Customer** **Section → Customer** and create a customer. **Step 3:** Select the appropriate **Country Code** for the customer's **Main Phone** number in the **Contact Info** tab. * Enter the customer's **Main Phone** number. * (Optional) Enter one or more email addresses in the **Shipment Notification Email** field **(Emails tab)**, separated by commas (,). If this field is left blank, the system uses the customer's **Main Email** address **(Contact Info tab)** for delivery notifications.
Update the new changes made in the Customer record. **Step 4:** Create a Shipment Delivery by following the standard [**Shipment Delivery process**](/other-products/xorodms/xorodms-delivery-management-system/dms-workflow). Once the Shipment Delivery is created, log in to the **Xoro DMS** application using the assigned delivery operator account and open the generated delivery. When the delivery is opened, the shipment status changes to **Out for Delivery (In Progress)**. The system automatically: * Sends an **Out for Delivery** SMS notification to the customer's **Main Phone** number. * Sends an **Out for Delivery** email to the customer's **Shipment Notification Email** address(es). If no Shipment Notification Email is configured, the email is sent to the customer's **Main Email** address. **Step 5:** After completing the delivery, click **Mark as Delivered** in the Xoro DMS application and complete the delivery confirmation process. When the delivery status changes to **Delivered**, the system automatically: * Sends an **Order Delivered** SMS notification to the customer's **Main Phone** number. * Sends an **Order Delivered** email to the customer's **Shipment Notification Email** address(es). If no Shipment Notification Email is configured, the email is sent to the customer's **Main Email** address. {% hint style="info" %} If the **SMS Notifications** option is disabled in **App Module Access**, SMS notifications are not sent. Email notifications continue to be sent based on the configured email priority. {% endhint %} *** ### **Enhanced Batch Update to Clear Field Values** **Overview** The Batch Update feature has been enhanced to allow users to clear supported field values across multiple records in a single operation. A new **Clear Data** toggle has been added to the **Batch Update** window. When enabled, the selected field is updated to an empty (null) value for all selected records, eliminating the need to manually edit each record individually. The feature includes validations to prevent required fields from being cleared and is available across modules that support Batch Update. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added a **Clear Data** toggle to the **Batch Update** window. * Users can clear the value of supported fields for multiple selected records in a single batch update. * When **Clear Data** is enabled, the **Value** field is automatically disabled since no input is required. * Required fields cannot be cleared. If users attempt to clear a mandatory field (such as **WIP Account** in the Item Centre), the system prevents the update and displays an appropriate validation message. * The **Clear Data** toggle is automatically hidden for **Boolean (Yes/No)** fields, as these fields cannot be set to an empty value. * Supported across modules that provide the Batch Update functionality. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to the **Menu → Sales → Sales Order Centre** module and select one or more records. **Step 2:** Click on the **Options** menu and select the **Batch Updates** option. In the **Batch Update** window, select the field to update from the **Column Name** dropdown. **Step 3:** Enable the **Clear Data** toggle. * The **Value** field is automatically disabled. * The selected field will be updated to an empty (null) value for all selected records when the update is performed. **Step 4:** Click **Update** to apply the changes. * If the selected field supports empty values, the existing values are cleared for all selected records. * If the selected field is mandatory, the system blocks the update and displays a validation message indicating that the field cannot be left empty. {% hint style="info" %} The **Clear Data** toggle is not displayed for Boolean fields because these fields only support predefined values (such as **Yes** or **No**) and cannot be cleared. {% endhint %} *** ### **Enhanced Batch Update to Clear Existing Field Values** **Overview** The **Batch Update** feature has been enhanced to allow users to clear existing values from supported fields across multiple records in a single operation. A new **Clear Existing Data** option has been added to the **Batch Update** window. When selected, the system removes the existing value from the selected field for all selected records, eliminating the need to clear each record individually. This enhancement streamlines bulk maintenance tasks while preserving existing validations for fields that cannot be left empty. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added a **Clear Existing Data** option to the **Batch Update** window. * Users can clear the existing value of a selected field across multiple records in a single batch update. * The feature updates all selected records in one operation, reducing manual effort. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to the **Menu → Admin → Item → Item Centre** and select the records to update.
**Step 2:** Click **Options → Batch Updates** to open the **Batch Update** window.
**Step 3:** Select the required field from the **Column Name** dropdown. Click **Clear Existing Data**.
The system prepares the selected field to be cleared for all selected records. **Step 4:** Click **Update**. The existing value of the selected field is removed from all selected records.
*** ### **Copy Selected Sales Order Lines to Released Purchase Orders** **Overview** The **Copy Selected Lines to Existing PO** functionality has been enhanced to allow users to copy selected Sales Order lines to **Released** Purchase Orders. Previously, the selection window displayed only Open Purchase Orders, limiting users to copying lines into POs that had not yet been released. With this enhancement, users can now choose from both **Open** and **Released Purchase Orders**, providing greater flexibility when updating existing procurement documents. *** **Key Enhancements** * Enhanced the **Copy Selected Lines to Existing PO** popup to display both **Open** and **Released** Purchase Orders. * Enables users to append selected Sales Order lines to Released Purchase Orders without creating a new Purchase Order. * Improves procurement workflows by allowing users to update eligible Purchase Orders regardless of whether they are in **Open** or **Released** status. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Sales Order** and open the required Sales Order. **Step 2:** In the **SO Details** grid, select the line(s) to copy.
**Step 3:** Click **Options → Create / Copy → Copy Selected Lines to Existing PO**.
**Step 4:** The **Select Existing PO** window opens and displays Purchase Orders with both **Open** and **Released** statuses.
**Step 5:** Select the required Purchase Order from the list. Click **Add To PO**. The selected Purchase Order opens with the copied Sales Order lines in edit mode.
**Step 6:** Review the Purchase Order and click **Save**. The copied Sales Order lines are added to the Purchase Order only after the Purchase Order is saved.
*** ### **Introduced Custom Field Mapping Support for Manufacturing Orders** **Overview** The **Custom Field Mapping** module has been enhanced to support mapping custom fields from **Item** to **Manufacturing Order (MO)** and **Item** to **Manufacturing Order Item Line**. This enhancement enables custom field values defined on an Item to be automatically transferred to the corresponding Manufacturing Order header or line during MO creation, reducing manual data entry and ensuring consistency across manufacturing transactions. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added support for mapping custom fields from **Item → Manufacturing Order (MO)**. * Added support for mapping custom fields from **Item → Manufacturing Order Item Line**. * Supports mapping only between custom fields with the **same data type**. For example, **Text** fields can only be mapped to **Text** fields, and **Number** fields can only be mapped to **Number** fields. * The mapped custom field values are also displayed in the **Manufacturing Order Centre** and the **Manufacturing Order** popup window. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Custom Field Mapping** and create a new custom field mapping. **Step 2:** Enter the **Name**, **Description**, and **Priority** for the mapping. Select **Item** as the **From Entity**. **Step 3:** Select either **Manufacturing Order** or **Manufacturing Order Item Lines** as the **To Entity**, depending on where you want the custom field values to be transferred. **Step 4:** Select the corresponding **From Custom Field** and **To Custom Field**, then click **Add** to create the mapping. **Step 5:** Click **Save** to save the custom field mapping configuration.
**Step 6:** Define the custom fields for an Item in the **Custom Fields** tab.
**Step 7:** Create a Manufacturing Order for the respective Item. The mapped custom field values are automatically transferred from the **Item** to the **Custom Fields** section of the **Manufacturing Order**.
*** ### **Auto-Population of Ship Carrier and Ship Service Based on Customer Default Ship Method** **Overview** The **Sales Order** module has been enhanced to improve the automatic population of shipping details based on the customer's default shipping configuration. When a customer is selected, or the **Ship Method** is changed back to the customer's configured **Default Ship Method**, the system automatically populates the corresponding **Ship Carrier** and **Ship Service**, ensuring that the customer's preferred shipping settings are consistently applied throughout the Sales Order process. *** **Key Enhancements** * Enhanced the **Ship Method** logic to automatically restore the customer's default **Ship Carrier** and **Ship Service** when the **Customer Default Ship Method** is reselected. * Ensures the **Ship Carrier** and **Ship Service** remain synchronized with the selected **Ship Method**. * Prevents blank or incorrect carrier and service values when switching between different Ship Methods. * Preserves the correct shipping configuration after saving and reopening the Sales Order. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Customer Section → Customer** and open the required customer. **Step 2:** In the **Shipping** tab, configure the customer's **Default Ship Method**, **Default Carrier**, and **Default Service**, then click **Save**.
**Step 3:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Sales Order** and create a new Sales Order. Select the customer. The system automatically populates the **Ship Method**, **Ship Carrier**, and **Ship Service** based on the customer's default shipping configuration.
**Step 4:** Change the **Ship Method** to a different value. The system updates the available **Ship Carrier** and **Ship Service** based on the selected Ship Method.
*** ### **Enhanced Missing Address Alert Display** **Overview** The **Show Missing Address Alert** app configuration has been enhanced to display a non-blocking warning banner at the top of the page when mandatory **Bill To** or **Ship To** address fields are incomplete. Instead of interrupting users with warning messages, the system now shows a persistent banner in the selected modules, allowing users to review the missing information while continuing to save and process the record. *** **Key Enhancements** * Enhanced the **Show Missing Address Alert** app configuration to display warning banners instead of warning messages. * The enhancement applies to the modules selected in the app configuration: * Sales Order * Invoice * Customer * The banner identifies missing mandatory address fields, such as **City**, **State**, **Postal Code**, and **Country**. * Records can still be saved even when warning banners are displayed, as the alerts are informational only. * When the **Show Missing Address Alert** app configuration is disabled, no warning banners are displayed. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → App Config** and view the **Show Missing Address Alert** app configuration. **Step 2:** Select the modules in which missing address alerts should be displayed: * Sales Order * Invoice * Customer
**Step 3:** Create a Sales Order with incomplete **Bill To** or **Ship To** address details. The system displays a warning banner at the top of the page.
Likewise, warning banners are displayed in the Invoice and Customer modules when the configured address details are incomplete. These banners are informational only and do not prevent the record from being saved. *** ### **Improved Customer Deposit Visibility in the Sales Order Centre** **Overview** The **Sales Order Centre** has been enhanced with two new columns—**Deposit Refunded** and **Deposit Remaining**—to provide immediate visibility into the refunded and available balance of customer deposits linked to each Sales Order. When a Customer Deposit is linked to a Sales Order during deposit creation, the linked deposit is displayed in the **Linked Credits/Deposits** tab of the Sales Order. As deposits are refunded, the Sales Order Centre automatically reflects both the total refunded amount and the remaining deposit balance, enabling users to monitor deposit activity without opening the individual Customer Deposit record. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added **Deposit Refunded** column to the **Sales Order Centre** (Header View). * Added **Deposit Remaining** column to the **Sales Order Centre** (Header View). * Both columns automatically display values for Customer Deposits linked to the Sales Order. * Deposit values are updated automatically as refund transactions are processed, providing real-time visibility into the remaining deposit balance. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Sales → Credit & Deposit → Customer Deposit**. Create a **Customer Deposit**, then select the required **Sales Order Ref#**. Enter the **Link SO Amount**, then click **Link**. The Customer Deposit is linked to the selected Sales Order.
**Step 2:** The linked deposit is displayed in the **Linked Credits/Deposits** tab of the corresponding Sales Order, where users can view details such as: * Customer Deposit Number * Deposit Status * Linked Amount * Remaining Amount * Total Amount
**Step 3:** Process a refund against the linked **Customer Deposit** by selecting **Refund Balance** from the **Options** dropdown menu on the **Customer Deposit** page. The deposit status and remaining balance are updated automatically.
**Step 4:** The **Customer Refund** window opens. Enter the required amount in the **Refund Amount** field, complete the remaining required details, and click **Refund Deposit**. The refund is processed, and the linked Customer Deposit's status is updated accordingly.
**Step 5:** Open the **Sales Order Centre** and verify that the following columns are available in the **Sales Order Header** view: * **Deposit Refunded:** Displays the total amount refunded from the Customer Deposit linked to the Sales Order. * **Deposit Remaining:** Displays the remaining balance available in the linked Customer Deposit after refunds have been processed.
*** ### **Filter Bills by Status in the Bill Centre Using the Advanced Search Option** **Overview** The **Bill Centre** Advanced Search has been enhanced to include the **Status** field as a searchable column. Users can now filter bill records based on their status directly from the Advanced Search window, making it easier to locate bills that match specific workflow stages without relying only on the standard header filters. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added **Status** as a selectable **Column Name** in the **Advanced Search** window of the Bill Centre. * Enables users to build advanced search queries using bill status with supported operators (such as **Contains**, **Equals**, depending on the selected operator). * Allows the **Status** field to be combined with other search criteria to create more refined and reusable searches. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Purchase → Bill → Bill Centre**, then click the **Advanced Search** icon.
**Step 2:** In the **Column Name** dropdown, select **Status**. Choose the required **Operator**, enter or select the desired **Status** value, and click **Find**.
**Step 3:** The Bill Centre displays only the bill records that match the specified status criteria.
*** ### **Set Default Tax Code Behavior for New Customers** **Overview** A new **Force Default Tax Code** option has been added to the **Page Defaults** configuration in the Customer module. This setting allows users to define whether the **Force Default Tax Code** checkbox is enabled by default whenever a new customer is created. Currently, this option is turned **ON** by default. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added the **Force Default Tax Code** option to **Customer → vertical three-dot (⋮) menu → Page Defaults**. * Allows users to configure the default state of the **Force Default Tax Code** checkbox for newly created customers. * When enabled, the **Force Default Tax Code** checkbox is automatically selected for new customer records. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Sales → Customer Section → Customer**, then click the **vertical three-dot (⋮) menu** in the top-right corner and select **Page Defaults**.
**Step 2:** In the **Default Configuration** window, enable or disable the **Force Default Tax Code** option based on your preferred default behavior, then save the changes.
**Step 3:** Create a new customer. The **Force Default Tax Code** checkbox in the **Sales Tax** tab is automatically set according to the configured page default.
*** ### **Addition of "Cancel Qty" field in the Update Sales Order Items module** **Overview** The **Update Sales Order Items** module now includes a new editable **Cancel Qty** field, allowing users to specify the quantity to cancel for individual sales order lines directly from the bulk update screen. This enables users to cancel quantities across multiple sales orders without opening and editing each sales order individually. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added a new editable **Cancel Qty** field to the **Update Sales Order Items** module. * The field defaults to **0** for all loaded sales order lines. * Users can enter the quantity to cancel for each sales order line directly within the grid. * Supports bulk quantity cancellation together with other updates such as item replacement, quantity changes, and price recalculation. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Sales → Sales Order → Update Sales Order Items**. In the **Search Item Number** dropdown, search for and select the required item. The module displays all sales order lines containing the selected item.
**Step 2:** Select the required record and, in the **Cancel Qty** column, enter the quantity to cancel for the sales order line.
**Step 3:** Click **Update Selected Records**.
**Step 4:** Open the selected **Sales Order**. In the **SO Details** section, verify that the **Cancel Qty** value has been updated for the corresponding sales order line.
If the **Cancel Qty** is equal to the **Ordered Qty** (for example, both are **1**), the sales order line is automatically updated to the **Cancelled** status. *** ### Added Parent Customer Search Support Across Multiple Modules **Overview** The **Parent Customer** search filter has been enhanced across multiple modules to support customer hierarchy searches. Users can now search using a parent customer and retrieve records for the parent customer along with all associated child customers. If the selected customer is not part of a hierarchy, only that customer's own records are returned. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added the **Parent Customer** search field to the following modules: * Sales Order Centre * Invoice Centre * Customer Centre * Customer Statement Centre * Estimate Centre * Credit Memo Centre * Searching by a parent customer returns records for the parent customer, all child customers, and all grandchild customers. * If the selected customer has no parent or child hierarchy, only that customer's own records are displayed. * Supports consistent hierarchy-based customer searches across multiple modules. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Sales → Customer Section → Customer Centre**. **Step 2:** In the **Parent Customer** search field, search for and select the required parent customer, then click **Search**.
**Step 3:** The module displays records for the selected parent customer, along with records for all associated child and grandchild customers.
*** ### **Show Offset Account(s) of Matched Transactions in Bank Reconciliation** **Overview** The **Reconcile Bank Account** module has been enhanced to improve the visibility of matched transaction details and streamline the bank reconciliation process. Users can now view **Account Names** alongside **GL Codes** in the **Match Found** section, optionally display the **offset account(s)** of matched transactions through a configurable application setting, and save their preferred **rows-per-page** selection in the reconciliation grid for a more consistent user experience. *** **Configuration Details** **App Config Name:** Show Offset Account(s) of Matched Transaction in Bank Reconciliation **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → Accounting → Show Offset Account(s) of Matched Transaction in Bank Reconciliation
*** **Functionality** **When App Config Is Enabled** * The **Match Found** section displays the **offset account(s)** of the matched transaction instead of the account being reconciled. * Each offset account is displayed with both its **GL Code** and **Account Name**. * If multiple offset accounts exist, they are displayed as a comma-separated list. *** **When App Config Is Disabled** * The **Match Found** section displays the **account being reconciled**. * The reconciled account is displayed with both its **GL Code** and **Account Name**. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Accounting → Bank Reconciliation → Reconcile Bank Account**. Search for the required bank reconciliation, then click **Resume Reconciling** to open it.
**Step 2:** Locate a matched transaction in the **Match Found** section. The system displays the reconciled account's **GL Code** and **Account Name**.
**Step 3:** Navigate to **Menu → App Config → Accounting** and enable the **Show Offset Account(s) of Matched Transaction in Bank Reconciliation** toggle.
Return to the **Reconcile Bank Account** module and open the same bank reconciliation. In the **Match Found** section, the system displays the matched transaction's **offset account(s)** along with their **GL Code** and **Account Name**.
*** ### **Enhanced JE Memo Priority During Bank Reconciliation** **Overview** The **Apply Rule and Reconcile** functionality in the **Reconcile Bank Account** module has been enhanced to assign the Journal Entry (JE) Memo using a defined priority. This ensures that the most relevant memo information is carried forward to the generated Journal Entry, improving transaction traceability and reducing the need for manual updates. When a bank transaction contains a **Description**, the system uses it as the Journal Entry Memo. If the **Description** is unavailable, the system automatically falls back to the **Memo** configured in the corresponding **Bank Reconciliation Rule**. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added a priority-based mechanism for assigning the **Journal Entry Memo** during **Apply Rule and Reconcile**. * Bank transaction **Description** is given the highest priority when creating the Journal Entry. * If the bank transaction **Description** is blank or null, the system uses the **Memo** configured in the **Bank Reconciliation Rule**. * Ensures Journal Entries always contain meaningful memo information without requiring manual intervention. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Accounting → Bank Reconciliation → Reconcile Bank Account**. Search for the required bank reconciliation, then click **Resume Reconciling** to open it.
**Step 2:** Locate a transaction that has a matching **Bank Reconciliation Rule**. Click **Apply Rule and Reconcile**. If the bank transaction contains a **Description**, the system creates the Journal Entry using that **Description** as the **JE Memo**.
**Step 3:** Now, apply the rule and reconcile a bank transaction with a blank or null description.
When the Journal Entry is created, the system uses the value specified in the **Memo** field of the applied **Bank Reconciliation Rule** as the **Journal Entry (JE) Memo**.
*** ### **Item Vendor Mapping Price Based on Default Vendor Currency** **Overview** The Item module has been enhanced to automatically populate the Item Vendor Mapping price based on the currency of the selected Default Vendor during item creation. When a foreign currency vendor is selected as the default vendor, the system retrieves the corresponding price from the item's Advanced Pricing configuration instead of using the home currency price. This ensures that Item Vendor Mapping reflects the correct vendor price based on the selected vendor's currency. *** **Key Enhancements** * Item Vendor Mapping is created automatically when a Default Vendor is assigned during item creation. * If the selected Default Vendor belongs to the home currency, the Item Vendor Mapping uses the item's listed (Standard Cost) price. * If the selected Default Vendor belongs to a foreign currency, the Item Vendor Mapping automatically uses the corresponding Standard Cost configured under **Advanced Pricing** for that currency. * This functionality is supported when **Multi UOM is enabled**. When **Multi UOM is disabled**, the Item Vendor Mapping continues to be created without retrieving the UOM-specific Advanced Pricing values, as designed. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Item → Item Centre** and create a new item. Configure the required pricing for the applicable foreign currency (for example, USD) under the **Advanced Pricing** tab in the **Multi Currency Pricing** section.
**Step 2:** Open the **Other Attributes** tab, select a **Default Vendor**, and save the item.
Since the default vendor belongs to a **foreign currency** (for example, USD), the system creates or updates the **Item Vendor Mapping** using the **Standard Cost** configured for that currency under **Advanced Pricing**. **Step 3:** Go to **Menu → Purchase → Item Vendor Mapping → Item Vendor Mapping Centre** and verify the **Vendor Price.**
*** ### **Create Multiple Dropship Purchase Orders from a Sales Order** **Overview** The **Create Dropship PO** functionality has been enhanced to support creating multiple dropship purchase orders from a single Sales Order. Users can now create separate dropship purchase orders for different order lines while preventing duplicate dropship PO creation for lines that are already linked. *** **Key Enhancements** * Multiple dropship purchase orders can now be created from a single Sales Order. * The **Create Dropship PO** window now includes an **Is Dropship?** column to indicate whether an order line is already linked to a dropship purchase order. * Order lines that are already linked to a dropship purchase order are displayed with **Is Dropship?** selected, and their selection checkbox is disabled to prevent duplicate dropship PO creation. * If all order lines in the Sales Order are already linked to dropship purchase orders, the system displays the following error message when Create Dropship PO is selected: *"Cannot create dropship PO for already linked order(s)."* *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Sales Order**. Create a Sales Order and release it. **Step 2:** Click the **header-level Options** drop-down menu and select **Create / Copy → Create Dropship PO**.
**Step 3:** In the **Create Dropship PO** window, review the available order lines. Select one or more eligible order lines that you want to dropship, then click **Create PO**.
The system creates a dropship purchase order for the selected order line(s) and displays the generated **Dropship PO Number**.
**Step 4:** After the dropship purchase order is created, the Sales Order status is updated to **Dropship**. To create another dropship purchase order for a different order line, select the next eligible order line and navigate to **Options → Create / Copy → Create Dropship PO**.
**Step 5:** In the **Create Dropship PO** window: * Order lines that are already linked to a dropship purchase order display **Is Dropship?** as selected, and their selection checkbox is disabled. * Order lines that are not linked to a dropship purchase order remain available for selection.
**Step 6:** Select the eligible order line(s) and click **Create PO**. The system creates another dropship purchase order and generates a new **Dropship PO Number** for the selected order line(s).
{% hint style="info" %} A Sales Order line can be linked to only one dropship purchase order. Once a dropship PO has been created for an order line, it cannot be selected again for another dropship PO. {% endhint %} *** ### **Added Default Prepaid Asset Account for Vendors** **Overview** The Vendor module has been enhanced with a **Default Prepaid Asset Account** field under the **Payments** tab. This account is automatically used as the default **Asset Account** when creating Vendor Prepayments, including prepayments created directly from a Purchase Order. The enhancement also extends support for this field across Vendor Page Defaults, Vendor Centre, Vendor Import/Export, and Vendor Upload, ensuring consistent account selection and reducing manual effort. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added a **Default Prepaid Asset Account** field to the **Payments** tab in the Vendor module. * Added support for **Default Prepaid Asset Account** in **Vendor Page Defaults**. * Added the **Default Prepaid Asset Account** column to **Vendor Centre** and **Vendor Export**. * Added the **Default Prepaid Asset Account** field to the **Vendor Upload** template and upload process. * The system validates the uploaded account name and displays an error if an invalid asset account is provided. * When a Vendor is selected while creating a **Vendor Prepayment**, the **Asset Account** is automatically populated using the vendor's configured **Default Prepaid Asset Account**. * The same defaulting behavior is supported when creating Vendor Prepayments directly from the **Purchase Order** module. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Purchase → Vendor Section → Vendor**. Click the vertical three-dot menu in the top-right corner of the page and select **Page Defaults**.
In the **Default Configuration** window, configure the **Default Prepaid Asset Account** and save the changes.
**Step 2:** Create a Vendor by entering the required details. In the **Payments** tab, the **Default Prepaid Asset Account** is automatically populated with the account configured in **Page Defaults**. Modify the value if required, and save the Vendor.
**Step 3:** Now, go to the **Vendor Centre** and verify that the newly created Vendor displays the configured value in the **Default Prepaid Asset Account** column.
**Step 4:** Open **Menu → Purchase → Prepayment → Vendor Prepayment**, create a new Vendor Prepayment, and select the Vendor. **Step 5:** The system automatically populates the **Asset Account** with the Vendor's configured **Default Prepaid Asset Account**.
*** ### **Vendor Part Description and Material Columns Available in Purchase Order** **Overview** The **Purchase Order** module has been enhanced to display the **Vendor Part Description** and **Material** fields in both the **Purchase Order Details** and **Purchase Order Detail Centre**. These fields provide additional item information directly within the Purchase Order, improving visibility without requiring users to open individual item records. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added the **Vendor Part Description** column to **Purchase Order Details** and **Purchase Order Detail Centre**. * Added the **Material** column to **Purchase Order Details** and **Purchase Order Detail Centre**. * Both fields are available regardless of whether **Multi UOM** is enabled or disabled. * Values are automatically populated from the corresponding item records and displayed consistently across both views. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Purchase → Purchase Order** and create a Purchase Order containing one or more items. **Step 2:** In the **Purchase Order Details** section, verify that the **Vendor Part Description** and **Material** columns are displayed. The **Vendor Part Description** is automatically populated from the [**Item Vendor Mapping**](/xoroerp-1/purchase/item-vendor-mapping/item-vendor-mapping-fields), while the **Material** value is populated from the [**Other Attributes** tab](/xoroerp-1/admin/item/item/what-is-an-item/creating-items#create-item-other-attributes-tab) of the corresponding Item. If required, enable the columns using the column selector.
**Step 3:** Go to **Menu → Purchase → Purchase Order Centre**. In the **Search By** dropdown, select **Purchase Order Detail**. Verify that the **Vendor Part Description** and **Material** columns are displayed and that their values match those shown in the **Purchase Order Details** of the newly created Purchase Order.
*** ### **Improved Visibility of Ship-To Address Instructions Across ERP and DMS** **Overview** Address Instructions configured for a Ship-To Address are now displayed across both ERP and DMS, ensuring delivery-related instructions are readily available throughout the order fulfillment process. In ERP, the instructions are displayed in the **Address Notes** tab of the Invoice. In DMS, they are available in the **Ship-To Address** popup on the **Delivery Detail** and **Lookup Detail** pages, enabling truck operators to view important delivery instructions while processing deliveries. *** **Key Enhancements** * Displays the configured **Ship-To Address Instructions** in the **Address Notes** tab of the Invoice. * Displays the **first two Address Instructions** in the **Ship-To Address** popup on the **Delivery Detail** page in DMS. * Displays the **first two Address Instructions** in the **Ship-To Address** popup on the **Lookup Detail** page in DMS. * Automatically retrieves the instructions configured for the Ship-To Address associated with the Sales Order. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Go to **Menu → Admin → Warehouse → Address Instructions** and create or update the required Address Instructions for the customer's **Ship-To Address**.
**Step 2:** Create a **Sales Order** and select the customer whose Ship-To Address contains the configured Address Instructions. Complete the fulfillment process by generating the **Invoice** and **Shipment Delivery**.
**Step 3:** Open the generated **Invoice** and navigate to the **Address Notes** tab. The configured Address Instructions for the selected Ship-To Address are displayed.
**Step 4:** In **DMS**, open the **Delivery** page and select the required delivery to open the **Delivery Detail** page.
Click the **Ship-To Address** link for the delivery line to open the **Ship-To Address** popup, where the first two configured Address Instructions are displayed.
**Step 5:** Click **Mark As Delivered** for the required delivery line, complete the delivery confirmation process by entering the required details (including the signature, if applicable), and confirm the delivery.
**Step 6:** After the delivery is completed, open the **Lookup** page and select the completed delivery to open the **Lookup Detail** page.
Click the **Ship-To Address** link to view the same Address Instructions in the **Ship-To Address** popup.
*** ### **App Config: Enable Item Unit Cost for Item Vendor Mapping** **Overview** This enhancement introduces a new application configuration that controls the availability of the **Item Unit Cost** functionality in the **Item Vendor Mapping** module. When enabled, a read-only **Item Unit Cost** field is displayed in Item Vendor Mapping. The field references the item's **Standard Cost** and is automatically calculated based on the selected UOM when **Multi UOM** is enabled, a valid UOM mapping exists, and the **Dynamic Unit Price Calculation Based on UOM Factor** configuration is enabled. Additionally, the **Vendor List Price** is now automatically populated with the calculated **Item Unit Cost** for the selected UOM, regardless of whether the selected UOM matches the item's Base UOM. When disabled, the Item Unit Cost field is hidden, and the Vendor List Price behaves as a manually entered field. *** **Configuration Details** * **App Config Name:** Enable Item Unit Cost on Item Vendor Mapping * **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → General → Enable Item Unit Cost on Item Vendor Mapping
*** The **Item Unit Cost** calculation is dependent on the above configuration and the following setup: * App Config **Dynamic Unit Price Calculation Based on UOM Factor** must be enabled. * When **Multi UOM** is **enabled**, the selected UOM in the Item Vendor Mapping must have a valid conversion mapping with the item's **Base UOM** in the **Multi UOM Mapping** module. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → App Config → General** and enable the following app configs: * **Enable Item Unit Cost on Item Vendor Mapping**
* **Dynamic Unit Price Calculation Based on UOM Factor**
**Step 2:** Go to **Menu → Admin → Item → Item Centre** and select the required item. Verify the item's **Standard Cost**, **Base UOM**, and the UOMs assigned to the item.
**Step 3:** Open the **Multi UOM Mapping** module and ensure a UOM conversion mapping exists for the item's Base UOM and the UOM that will be used in **Item Vendor Mapping**. **Step 4:** Now, create an Item Vendor Mapping record for the required **Item Number**, **Vendor**, and **UOM**. **Step 4:** The system automatically calculates and displays the **Item Unit Cost** field. **Step 5:** The **Item Unit Cost** field is displayed as a read-only field and cannot be edited manually. The value is always derived from the item's Standard Cost, the applicable UOM conversion factor, and the selected UOM. * When the selected UOM matches the item's Base UOM, the **Item Unit Cost** displays the item's **Standard Cost**, and the **Vendor List Price** is automatically populated with the same value.
* When a **different UOM** is selected, the system calculates the **Item Unit Cost** using the configured UOM conversion factor and automatically populates the **Vendor List Price** with the calculated **Item Unit Cost**.
*** ### **Added Email Interceptors for Payment Receipt and Estimate Approval Emails** **Overview** The Email Interceptor module has been enhanced to provide greater control over email notifications for Payment Receipts and Estimate Approval Confirmation emails. New Email Interceptors have been introduced for **Invoice Payment Receipt**, **Deposit Payment Receipt**, and **Estimate Approval Confirmation**, allowing administrators to control when these emails are sent and optionally override the default recipient by specifying a custom email address through interceptor scripts. Additionally, a new application configuration, **Send Estimate Approval Confirmation Email**, has been added to enable or disable Estimate Approval Confirmation emails. *** **Configuration Details** **App Config Name:** Send Estimate Approval Confirmation Email **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → Sales → Send Estimate Approval Confirmation Email
*** **Priority Order for Email Recipients** * If a **SendToEmail** value is specified in the **Email Interceptor script**, the email is sent directly to that email address. * If **SendToEmail** is not specified, the system sends the email using the following priority order: * **Contact Email** *(Configured by enabling the* [***Use Contact Email** toggle*](/xoroerp-1/sales/customer-section/customer/creating-customers#use-contact-email-toggle) *above the **Order Processing Email** field and specifying the email address under the **Contacts** sub-tab in the **Contact Info** section of the **Create Customer** page.)* * **Order Processing Email(s)** *(Configured under the **Emails** sub-tab in the **Contact Info** section of the **Create Customer** page.)* * **Customer Main Email** *(Configured under the **Contact Info** sub-tab in the **Contact Info** section of the **Create Customer** page.)* *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → App Config → Sales** and enable the **Send Estimate Approval Confirmation Email** application configuration.
**Step 2:** Go to **Menu → Admin → Email Interceptor** and create an Email Interceptor for the **Estimate** entity with the **Estimate Approval Confirmation** action.
**Step 3:** Create an Estimate. Click the **header-level Options** menu, and select **Send Approval Link**.
**Step 4:** The system automatically generates the **Estimate Approval Confirmation** email, attaches the Sales Order report, and sends it to the recipient determined by the priority order described above. {% hint style="info" %} Payment Receipt emails (**Invoice Payment Receipt** and **Deposit Payment Receipt**) are sent only when a payment is completed through the Payment Link. {% endhint %} *** ### **Display Product ID in the Product Centre** **Overview** The **Product Centre** has been enhanced with a **Product ID** column. This allows users to view the unique Product ID directly from the Product Centre, making it easier to identify and reference products without opening individual product records.
*** **Key Enhancements** * Added **Product ID** column to the **Product Centre**. * Users can quickly identify and reference products using the displayed Product ID without opening the Product record. *** ### **Enhanced Sort By Options in the Create Sales Order Module** **Overview** The **Sort By** functionality in the **Create Sales Order** module has been enhanced with additional sorting options, allowing users to organize Sales Order line items based on commonly used attributes such as Available Quantity, Ship Date, Unit Price, Default Vendor, and Status. Additionally, the **Sort By** dropdown now supports scrolling with a fixed height, making it easier to navigate when multiple sorting options are available. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added new sorting options to the **Sort By** dropdown: * Available Qty (Low to High) * Available Qty (High to Low) * Ship Date (Old to New) * Ship Date (New to Old) * Unit Price (High to Low) * Unit Price (Low to High) * Default Vendor (Ascending) * Default Vendor (Descending) * Status (Ascending) * Status (Descending) * Added a **Reset** option to restore the original order of Sales Order line items before sorting. * Enhanced the **Sort By** dropdown with a fixed-height, scrollable list for improved usability when viewing multiple sorting options. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Sales Order** and create or open an existing Sales Order. **Step 2:** In the **SO Details** section, click the **Sort By** dropdown.
**Step 3:** Select one of the available sorting options to arrange the Sales Order line items based on the selected criteria.
**Step 4:** The system immediately reorders the line items according to the selected sorting option.
*** ### **Enhanced B2B Portal to Support Customer Default UOM for Pricing and Inventory** **Overview** The B2B Portal has been enhanced to support **Customer Default UOM** for determining product pricing, inventory quantities, and transaction values. The system now automatically resolves the appropriate Unit of Measure (UOM) based on the configured Customer Default UOM and Item configuration, ensuring consistent pricing and quantity calculations throughout the portal. Additionally, pricing now prioritizes Multi-Currency Pricing for the resolved UOM and falls back to the item's Standard Price when applicable. The resolved UOM is also displayed across the B2B Portal, providing greater transparency during product selection and order placement. *** **Configuration Details** **App Config Name:** Dynamic Unit Price Calculation Based on UOM Facto**r** **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → General → **Dynamic Unit Price Calculation Based on UOM Factor** *** **Functionality** **When App Config Is Enabled** * The system calculates the price using the **Standard Price** and **UOM Factor** defined in the Multi UOM Mapping module *** **When App Config Is Disabled** * The system will not perform UOM-based price calculations. A valid price record must exist for the requested UOM. *** **UOM Determination Hierarchy** The system determines the applicable Unit of Measure (UOM) using the following priority: * **Customer Default UOM:** If a **Default UOM** is configured for the customer in the **Other Info** tab and is also included in the item's **Allowed Sell UOM(s)** list on the **UOM** tab of the **Create Item** page, that UOM is used for pricing and quantity calculations. * **Item Default Sell UOM:** If no valid Customer Default UOM is available, the system automatically uses the item's **Default Sell UOM** configured on the **UOM** tab of the **Create Item** page. *** **Price Determination Hierarchy** Pricing for products is determined using the following sequence: **Priority 1: Multi-Currency Price** The system first attempts to locate a **Multi-Currency Price** record that matches the following: * Customer Currency * Resolved UOM If a matching Multi-Currency Price record is found, that price is used. **Priority 2: Standard Price** If no matching Multi-Currency Price record is found, the system evaluates the item's **Standard Price**. **Prerequisites:** * The customer's currency must match the system's **Home Currency**. * The Standard Price is calculated using the item's UOM conversion factor. {% hint style="info" %} When evaluating **Standard Pricing**, if the **customer's currency does not match the system's Home Currency**, the system does not use Standard Pricing. Instead, it displays **"No Price Available"** unless a matching Multi-Currency Price record exists. {% endhint %} *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Item** and create the required item SKUs. Configure the **Default Sell UOM** for each item from the **UOM** tab. For this example, the following Default Sell UOMs are configured: * California Almonds → **200 GM - S**
* Mamra Almonds → **500 GM - S** * Gurbandi Almonds → **200 GM - S** * Marcona Almonds → **KG - S** **Step 2:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Multi UOM Mapping** and configure the UOM conversion mappings for the base UOM (**KG - S**).
These conversion factors are used to calculate prices based on the item's **Standard Price**. **Step 3:** Go to the **Item Centre**, open the required item, and select the **Advanced Pricing** tab. Configure **Multi-Currency Pricing** only for UOMs that require dedicated pricing. In this example: * **California Almonds** has a **CAD Multi Currency Pricing** record configured for **200 GM - S**.
**Mamra Almonds**, **Gurbandi Almonds**, and **Marcona Almonds** do not have any Multi Currency Pricing records configured. **Step 4:** From the **Menu → Sales → Customer Section → Customer Centre**, open the required customer, and ensure that **Default UOM** is **not configured** under the **Other Info** tab. Since no Customer Default UOM is available, the system automatically resolves the UOM using each item's configured **Default Sell UOM**. **Step 5:** Navigate to **Menu → App Config → General** and enable the **Dynamic Unit Price Calculation Based on UOM Factor** app configuration.
**Step 6:** Log in to the **B2B Portal** using the configured customer account and browse the configured products. The system determines product pricing as follows: * **California Almonds** displays the price from the configured **Multi Currency Pricing** record because a matching price exists for the customer's currency and the resolved UOM. * **Mamra Almonds**, **Gurbandi Almonds**, and **Marcona Almonds** do not have matching Multi Currency Pricing records. Therefore, the system calculates the displayed price using the item's **Standard Price** and the **UOM Conversion Factor** configured in the **Multi UOM Mapping** module. The B2B Portal displays each product using its resolved UOM. The corresponding inventory quantity and product price are calculated and displayed based on the applicable pricing hierarchy, ensuring accurate pricing and stock information during product selection and checkout.
*** ### **Added Custom Banner Message Support in the B2B Presentation** **Overview** The B2B Presentation has been enhanced with a **Custom Banner Message** field under the **Other Attributes** tab. This allows administrators to configure a personalized banner message that is displayed on the **Order Summary** page of the B2B Customer Portal when a Discount Rule is applicable. The banner message supports dynamic placeholders that automatically display the configured discount percentage and order amount from the applicable Discount Rule. If no custom banner message is configured, the system displays the default banner message using the values inherited from the configured Discount Rule. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added a **Custom Banner Message** field under the **Other Attributes** tab of the B2B Presentation. * Supports dynamic placeholders: * **{0}** – Displays the Discount Percentage from the applicable Discount Rule. * **{1}** – Displays the Amount for the alert configured in the applicable Discount Rule. * Allows users to customize only the message text while retaining the dynamic placeholder values. * If the **Custom Banner Message** field is left blank, the system displays the default banner message using the configured Discount Rule values. *** **How It Works** **Step 1:** Navigate to **B2B → Presentation Centre**, create or open an existing Presentation, and select the **Other Attributes** tab. **Step 2:** In the **Custom Banner Message** field, enter the banner message using the supported placeholders or leave the field blank.
**Step 3:** Open the **Discount Rules** tab for the same Presentation and configure a Discount Rule by specifying the **From Amount**, **To Amount**, **Discount Percentage**, and **Amount for Alert**. Save the Presentation.
**Step 4:** Log in to the presentation. Browse the products, open a product, specify the required quantity, add the product to the cart, and click **View Cart**.
**Step 5:** On the **Order Summary** page, the configured banner message is displayed at the top of the cart. The placeholders **{0}** and **{1}** are automatically replaced with the **Discount Percentage** and **Amount for Alert** from the applicable Discount Rule.
*** # Previous Releases Welcome to the "Previous Releases" section, your historical roadmap to XoroERP's evolution. Discover the features and enhancements that shaped our ERP software in the past. Learn from the past to make informed decisions about your system upgrades and track the progress we've made to meet your business needs. Stay connected to the journey of XoroERP and witness its transformation over time. # 2026 # January 2026 Release {% hint style="warning" %} This is a Custom Release. Feature availability depends on configuration and rollout status. Some features listed above may not be visible in your environment if they are part of a staged or custom deployment. Please contact your support representative to confirm enablement. {% endhint %} ### **Vendor Bill# Column added in Item Purchase History** **Overview:** The **Purchase History** tab in the **Item** **Subform** provides a detailed view of all purchase transactions associated with an item. This section is critical for tracking procurement activity, vendor interactions, and historical pricing. A new column, **“Vendor Bill#”**, has been added to the **Purchase History** grid within the **Item Subform**. This column displays the **vendor’s bill number** associated with each purchase transaction, aligning the view with the Bill Centre and improving cross-referencing capabilities.
*** **Key Enhancements:** * **Improved Traceability:** Users can now directly view the vendor’s bill number alongside each purchase transaction in the **Purchase History** tab of Item Subform without needing to navigate to the **Bill module**. * **Enhanced Visibility:** Provides a more complete view of purchase-related data in a single place. * **Reduced Navigation Effort:** Minimizes the need to open individual bills to identify vendor bill references, saving time and improving efficiency. *** ### **Batch Update Sales Notes in Item Centre** **Overview:** The **Item Centre** in XoroERP enables users to manage and update item-related information efficiently through batch update functionality. This feature allows users to modify multiple item records simultaneously without opening each item individually. With this enhancement, the **Sales Notes** field is now supported within the **batch update** process, allowing users to update sales-related notes across multiple items in a single action.
*** **Key Enhancements:** * **Improved Efficiency:** Reduces time spent updating Sales Notes individually for multiple items. * **Consistent Data Management:** Ensures uniform sales-related messaging or notes across multiple items. * **Reduced Manual Effort:** Eliminates repetitive manual updates, especially for bulk changes. * **Enhanced Usability:** Provides a more streamlined approach to maintaining item-level sales information within the system. *** ### **Default Sales Rep and Order Type Handling in Sales Orders** **Overview:** This enhancement standardizes how **Sales Rep** and **Order Type** are assigned during Sales Order creation when these values are not explicitly defined in the Presentation. The system now intelligently defaults **Sales Rep** and **Order Type** values based on a defined priority, ensuring smoother B2B order creation while maintaining flexibility and data consistency. *** **Priority Order:** 1. **Logged-in Sales Rep User:** If the order is created by a Sales Rep user, that user is assigned as the Sales Rep. 2. **Presentation:** If a Sales Rep is defined in the **Primary** tab of the Presentation settings, it is assigned when the logged-in user is not a Sales Rep. 3. **Customer:** If the Sales Rep is not defined in either of the above, the Sales Rep defined at the Customer level is assigned. **Order Type** follows the same priority logic as **Sales Rep**. **Order Type** follows the same priority logic as **Sales Rep**. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Open the Presentation through which you want to place the order. In the **Primary** tab of the Presentation, you can select the **Sales Rep**.
If it is not selected here, you will be required to select a Sales Rep on the checkout page, as the system will not allow you to proceed without it.
If the Sales Rep is defined at the Customer level, the system will automatically populate the Sales Rep field on the checkout page.
**Step 2:** Choose the Sales Rep you want for your B2B Order.
**Step 3:** Similarly, in the **Other Attributes** tab of the Presentation settings, you will see the **Order Type** field, where you can select a value if it is not defined in the Customer settings.
If the Order Type is already defined at the Customer level, the system will automatically fetch it from there.
**Step 4:** Click on the **Submit Order** button. The Sales Order is created and can be viewed in the Sales Order Centre. **Step 5:** The system assigns the **Sales Rep** and **Order Type** values based on the defined priority logic.
{% hint style="info" %} Unlike **Sales Rep**, **Order Type is not a mandatory field** and does not need to be defined in either the Customer settings or the Presentation (**Other Attributes** tab). {% endhint %} *** ### **Dynamic Cost Update in Manufacturing Orders** **Overview:** This enhancement improves the accuracy of cost representation in **Manufacturing Orders (MO)** by dynamically updating the **Unit Cost** and **Total Cost** fields based on the latest transaction values. Previously, MO line costs remained static after production, even if the underlying inventory costs changed. With this update, the system ensures that when you open the MO subform or edit it in a new window, the MO line costs always reflect the most recent average cost derived from inventory transactions. *** **Key Enhancements** * **Transaction-Based Cost Sync:** MO line costs now reflect the latest average cost from inventory transactions. * **Dynamic Cost Refresh:** Unit Cost and Total Cost are automatically updated when the MO is accessed. * **Accurate Post-Production Costing:** Changes in raw material average cost after MO production are reflected in MO lines. * **Consistency Across Modules:** Cost values in MO align with Inventory Valuation and transaction records. * **No Manual Intervention Required:** Eliminates the need for manual cost reconciliation or updates. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Create and produce a **Manufacturing Order (MO)** using raw materials. At this stage, the **Unit Cost** is calculated based on the current average cost of the raw material (e.g., *10.00*, as shown in the MO line).
**Step 2:** If the **average cost of raw material items changes** due to subsequent inventory transactions (e.g., item receipt, adjustment), the inventory valuation is updated.
**Step 3:** Right-click on the produced MO in the **Manufacturing Order Centre** and click on the **Edit in New Window** option, or open the **MO Subform view.**
**Step 4:** The system fetches the latest cost from related inventory transactions and updates **Unit Cost** and **Total Cost** values.
*** ### **System Alert for Unconfigured or Inactive Home Country** **Overview:** To improve system awareness and prevent configuration gaps, an ERP-wide alert has been introduced to notify users when a **Home Country is not configured** or **is inactive**. Since the Home Country plays a critical role in transactions, taxation, and regional settings, this enhancement ensures users are proactively informed and can take corrective action without encountering downstream issues. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Introduced an ERP-wide alert message when no Home Country is set or when the configured Home Country is inactive. * The alert is consistently displayed across multiple modules, including Sales, Purchase, B2B, Warehouse, Inventory, Manufacturing, Accounting, Admin, Users, and Reports. * Ensures better visibility and prevents users from operating the system with incomplete country configuration. * Eliminates silent failures or confusion caused by a missing Home Country setup. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to the **Country Centre** module. If no country is marked as the Home Country (or the configured Home Country is inactive), the system identifies this as a missing configuration.
**Step 2:** When you navigate to various modules (such as Sales, Purchase, Inventory, B2B, Warehouse, etc.), an alert message is displayed notifying the user that the Home Country is not configured.
*** ### **Order Tags Added to Purchase Order Centre (Detail View)** **Overview:** To enhance visibility and usability of Purchase Order data, the **Order Tags** defined at the Purchase Order header level are now available in the **Purchase Order Centre (Detail level view)**. This allows users to easily identify, filter, and analyze purchase orders based on tags directly from the detail grid, without needing to open individual records. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added **Order Tags (header-level)** to the **Purchase Order Centre – Detail view**. * Introduced a **Tags column** to display all tags associated with the Purchase Order. * Enabled **search and filtering** based on tags using both quick search and advanced search. * Ensures consistency between Purchase Order entry and reporting views. * Improves traceability and categorization of purchase orders at the line-item level. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Create or open a Purchase Order and add the required tags in the **Order Tags** field under the **Other Info** tab at the header level.
**Step 2:** Navigate to **Purchase Order Centre** and select **Search By: Purchase Order Detail**. **Step 3:** In the detail grid, select the **Tags column** to view header-level tags for each corresponding line item.
**Step 4:** You can also use the **Advanced Search** option and select **Tags** as a filter to find specific purchase orders based on tag values.
*** ### **Addition of a Dropdown Field for Selecting the Print Requester in the Print Modal** **Overview:** This enhancement introduces the ability to select a **Print Requester** while printing Sales Orders directly from the Sales Order Centre. It allows users to route print jobs through a specific, configured print requester, improving control and flexibility in the printing process. *** **Enhancement Added:** * A new field, **Print Requester**, has been added in the **Select Reporting Template** pop-up in the Sales Order Centre, which appears when the user initiates the **Print** action (via right-click) on one or more Sales Orders. * This field is a dropdown displayed next to the **Send to Printer** toggle and lists all available Print Requesters configured in the system. *** **Prerequisite:** App Config **"Enable Xoro Print Service"**, available under **Menu → App Config → System**, must be enabled for this enhancement to work.
*** **Functionality:** **When App Config is Enabled:** * The **Send to Printer** toggle is available in the print pop-up. * Once the toggle is turned ON, the **Print Requester** dropdown is enabled, allowing users to select a Print Requester from the list. * When a Print Requester is selected, the print job is routed through the selected Print Requester, and the Sales Order is added to the **Print Service Queue**. *** **When App Config is Disabled:** * The **Send to Printer** toggle is not available in the print pop-up. * The **Print Requester** dropdown is also not visible, and printing follows the default behavior. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → App Config → System** and enable the app config **"Enable Xoro Print Service"**. **Step 2:** Go to the **Sales Order Centre**, select one or multiple Sales Orders, and click on the **Print** option from the **Options** dropdown menu.
**Step 3:** The **Select Reporting Template** pop-up appears. Turn ON the **Send to Printer** toggle and select a **Print Requester** from the dropdown field.
**Step 4:** Click the **Print** button. The Sales Order(s) are sent to the **Print Service Queue** using the selected Print Requester.
*** ### **Enhancement to Batch Creation Criteria for Sales Order** and Invoices **Overview:** This enhancement introduces configurable criteria for grouping **Sales Orders** and **Invoices during batch creation**. Two new app configurations, **Invoice Batch Creation Criteria** and **Sales Batch Creation Criteria**, have been added that allow users to control how records are consolidated into batches based on selected parameters. Additionally, a **PAPS# editable field** has been introduced in the **Sales Order Batch** and **Invoice Batch** sub-forms. These enhancements provide greater flexibility in batch processing by ensuring that only records meeting the defined grouping criteria are included in the same batch. *** **Enhancement Added:** * **PAPS# editable field** in the Sales Order Batch sub-form and Invoice Batch sub-form.
* **PAPS# column in the respective Batch Centres** * Sales Order Batch Center
* Invoice & Packing Slip Batch Centre
* **Consolidation Identifier Enhancement:** A new dropdown option **“Nothing Selected”** has been added to the **Consolidation Identifier** field in the **Generate Invoice Batch** subform.
*** **Configuration Details:** 1. **Invoice Batch Creation Criteria** * **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → General → Invoice Batch Creation Criteria * **Type:** Multi-select Dropdown * **Available Options:** * Tracking Number * BOL Number * Currency * Customer
2. **Sales Batch Creation Criteria** * **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → General → Sales Batch Creation Criteria * **Type:** Multi-select Dropdown * **Available Options:** * Store * Currency * Customer
Multiple options can be selected in the app configuration dropdowns. *** **Workflow:** 1. **Creating an Invoice Batch** **Step 1:** Navigate to Menu → App Config → General → **Invoice Batch Creation Criteria** and select the parameters that should be used for grouping invoices.
**Step 2:** Go to the **Invoice Centre** and select the invoices you want to include in a batch. Click **Generate Invoice Batch** from the **Options** dropdown menu.
**Step 3:** A pop-up will appear displaying the **Consolidation Identifier** dropdown. Select one of the following options: * Nothing Selected * Tracking Number * BOL Number
**Step 4:** Click **Generate**. The system evaluates invoices based on the selected **App Configuration parameters** and the **Consolidation Identifier** selected from the UI. **Step 5:** Invoices meeting the grouping criteria are included in the same batch. Invoices missing required identifiers (such as **Tracking Number or BOL Number**) are excluded from batch creation.
*** 2. **Creating a Sales Order Batch** **Step 1:** Navigate to Menu → App Config → General → **Sales Batch Creation Criteria** and select the parameters used to group Sales Orders.
**Step 2:** Go to the **Sales Order Batch Centre** and select the orders you want to include in the batch.
**Step 3:** The system groups orders based on the selected parameters in the app configuration. For example, if only **Currency** is selected, orders with the same currency will be grouped into the same batch.
*** **System Behavior:** * Orders are grouped into the same batch only when the selected parameters share **identical values**. * If **no criteria are selected** in the configuration, the system creates **a single batch containing all selected records**. * By default, **all parameters are selected** in the app configurations. * If **I**nvoices or Sales Orders do not contain the parameters selected in the app configuration for grouping, those records are not included in the generated batch. * You will be unable to generate a new batch for orders already existing in a batch. * If the **SO/Invoice** batch contains multiple customers, then the customer name and customer account number will show comma-separated values in the Batch header data. # February 2026 Release {% hint style="warning" %} This is a Custom Release. Feature availability depends on configuration and rollout status. Some features listed above may not be visible in your environment if they are part of a staged or custom deployment. Please contact your support representative to confirm enablement. {% endhint %} ### **Enhanced Location Selection to Support Damaged Area in Manufacturing Orders** **Overview:** In Manufacturing Orders, the selection of destination locations plays a critical role in defining where finished goods are produced and stored. Previously, finished goods location dropdowns within Manufacturing workflows (including Quick Produce) restricted selection to warehouse location types, excluding locations marked as **Damaged Area**. With this enhancement, the system now allows **Damaged Area** locations to be selected within **Manufacturing Order location dropdowns as finished goods locations**, ensuring alignment with real-world operational processes. *** **Enhancement Added:** Updated Manufacturing Order location dropdowns to include locations with **Type as Damaged Area**.
*** **Impact:** * **Improved Workflow Flexibility:** Enables businesses to produce goods directly into inspection or quality control locations without changing location types. * **Accurate Representation of Operational Processes:** Supports real-world scenarios where produced goods require inspection before being moved to sellable inventory. * **Eliminates Workarounds:** Removes the need to temporarily change location types (e.g., from Damaged Area to Warehouse) to enable production. * **Consistent System Behavior:** Ensures location availability aligns across Manufacturing workflows, including Quick Produce and standard MO processing. *** ### **Enhanced Access Control for Create and Edit Customer Permissions** **Overview:** Access control in the **Access Manager** module has been enhanced to provide more granular control over user actions. Previously, customer creation and editing were not distinctly controlled through separate access dependencies, which could lead to unintended permissions. With this enhancement, **Create** and **Edit** customer actions are now governed by clearly defined and dependent access keys, ensuring better control, security, and role-based access management. *** **Enhancement Added:** * Support for separate **Create** and **Edit Customer** access keys has been implemented. * A user can **create** a customer only if they have access to both **“Create Customer Module”** and **“Create Customer.”** * A user can **edit** a customer only if they have access to both **“Create Customer Module”** and **“Edit Customer.”** * A user can **both create and edit** a customer if they have access to **“Create Customer Module,” “Create Customer,” and “Edit Customer.”**
*** **Impact:** * **Granular Access Control:** Enables precise control over who can create vs edit customers, reducing the risk of unauthorized changes. * **Improved Security & Compliance:** Enforces stricter permission validation, including for shortcut-based actions. * **Consistent User Experience:** UI actions such as Create, Update, and Duplicate dynamically reflect assigned permissions. * **Reduced Access Misconfiguration Risks:** Clear dependency structure ensures access is intentionally granted rather than implied. *** ### **Added an Email Interceptor for Overdue Invoice Emails for B2B & WHS Order Types** **Overview:** Overdue invoice email notifications are used to remind customers of pending payments. Previously, these emails were triggered without restriction across all order types, including D2C, which could lead to undesired communication. With this enhancement, an **Email Interceptor** has been introduced to control the triggering of **overdue invoice emails**, ensuring they are sent only for relevant business order types. *** **Enhancement Added:** Created a new Email Interceptor in the **Email Interceptor Centre** that, when active, ensures overdue invoice emails are triggered only for **B2B and WHS order types**.
*** **Impact:** * **Targeted Customer Communication:** Ensures overdue reminders are sent only to relevant business channels (B2B & WHS), avoiding unnecessary emails to D2C customers. * **Improved Customer Experience:** Prevents inappropriate or excessive payment reminders for D2C orders. * **Better Control Over Email Automation:** Provides flexibility to align email triggers with business-specific workflows and order types. * **Reduced Noise & Operational Clutter:** Minimizes unwanted email traffic and improves the effectiveness of overdue communication. *** ### **Item Sub Categories Filter Added at Presentation Level in B2B Portal** **Overview:** The **Presentation Centre** enables businesses to control how products are displayed and filtered for B2B customers, allowing a more structured and intuitive browsing experience. Filters play a critical role in helping users refine product visibility based on specific attributes. With this enhancement, a new **Item Sub Categories Filter** has been introduced, allowing users to further refine product listings within presentations using item sub-category classifications. *** **Feature Added:** Introduced **Item Sub Categories Filter** in the **Presentation Centre** under the **Filters** tab, with support for: * **Show/Hide toggle** to control filter visibility in the presentation * **Collapse/Expand** option for better UI control * Full compatibility with **Include/Exclude sub categories** filtering logic
*** **Key Enhancements:** * **Enhanced Product Filtering Granularity:** Allows users to filter products at a more detailed level using item sub-categories, improving product discoverability. * **Improved Presentation Experience:** Enables end-users to quickly narrow down product selections, leading to a smoother and more efficient browsing experience. * **Flexible UI Control:** Supports Show and Collapse toggles, giving better control over how filters appear in the presentation interface. * **Seamless Integration with Existing Filters:** Works alongside existing filters (Brand, Tags, Categories, etc.) without disrupting current filtering behavior. *** ### **"Manufacturer" Column Introduced in Purchase Order Detail View** **Overview:** The **Purchase Order module** captures item-level details required for procurement, tracking, and reporting. However, visibility into the **Manufacturer** associated with each item was previously not directly available within Purchase Order workflows. A new **“Manufacturer”** column has been introduced in **Purchase Order Detail**, which dynamically references the Manufacturer defined at the Item level. This column has been added in the following modules: * **Purchase Order** – Line level
* **Purchase Order Centre** – Search by **Purchase Order Detail**
* **Purchase Order Subform**
* **Data Export Centre** – Search by **Purchase Order Detail**
* **Export File**
*** **Key Enhancements:** * **Improved Data Visibility:** Enables users to directly view the Manufacturer associated with each item within Purchase Orders without navigating to the **Item Centre**. * **Consistent Data Across Modules:** Ensures Manufacturer information is consistently reflected across UI views, subforms, exports, and reporting layers. * **Enhanced Filtering & Searchability:** Supports visibility in **Purchase Order Centre** and works with advanced search/filtering for better data analysis. * **Export & Reporting Readiness:** Manufacturer data is now included in **Data Export Centre** and export files, enabling downstream reporting and external processing without additional mapping. *** ### **Active BOM Filtering Enabled in Update BOM Items Module** **Overview:** The **Update BOM Items** page is used to manage and update components across multiple Bills of Materials (BOMs). As BOM data grows, identifying relevant and active records becomes critical for efficient updates and accuracy. With this enhancement, users can easily filter and identify **active BOMs** using the **“Active BOMs”** toggle on the **Update BOM Items** page, which displays only active BOM records.
Added a new **“Is BOM Active”** column to clearly indicate the active status of each BOM in the grid.
*** **Key Enhancements:** * **Improved Data Filtering:** Allows users to quickly focus on active BOMs, reducing clutter and improving operational efficiency. * **Better Decision-Making:** The “Is BOM Active” column provides clear visibility into BOM status, helping users avoid unintended updates on inactive BOMs. * **Enhanced User Control:** Users can seamlessly switch between viewing all BOMs and only active ones using the toggle, without needing additional filters. * **Reduced Risk of Errors:** Minimizes the chances of modifying inactive or obsolete BOMs during bulk update operations. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to the **Bill of Material** module and select the required BOM. Check the status of the **Active** checkbox for the BOM.
**Step 2:** Navigate to the **Update BOM Items** page. Use the **Active BOMs** toggle to filter and view either active or inactive BOMs.
**Step 3:** Select the required BOM and update item details (e.g., quantity, Item Unit Cost). Click **Update Selected Records** to apply the changes.
**Step 4:** The changes made will be automatically reflected in the corresponding BOM.
*** ### **Implemented the Ability to Create Task Across Transaction Modules** **Overview:** The ability to create and manage tasks directly from the **Sales Order** module has now been extended across multiple transaction modules. This enhancement allows users to seamlessly create, link, and track tasks at various stages of the transaction lifecycle, improving overall workflow efficiency. The **“Task” tab** has been introduced in the following modules: * Create Estimate * Estimate Subform * Purchase Order * Purchase Order Subform * Invoice * Invoice Subform * Bill * Bill Subform * Credit Memo * Invoice Credit Memo * Credit Memo Subform
*** **Key Enhancements:** * **Centralized Task Management:** Enables users to create and access tasks directly from multiple transaction modules, reducing the need to switch between modules. * **Improved Workflow Efficiency:** Tasks can now be created at different stages, ensuring better tracking and execution of activities. * **Automatic Linking with Transactions:** Tasks created from any module are automatically linked to the respective transaction using the reference number. * **Enhanced Visibility & Accountability:** Improves collaboration by allowing teams to track tasks tied to specific transactions. *** ### **App Configuration: Allow All Users to Update Task** **Overview:** Task update permissions are now configurable through an app-level setting, allowing businesses to control whether tasks can be modified by all users or restricted to the task creator. This enhancement introduces flexibility in task collaboration while ensuring control over critical actions like deletion and ownership. *** **App Config Name:** Allow Task Update by All Users **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → General → **Allow All Users to Update Task**
*** **Functionality:** **When App Config is Enabled:** * All users can update task details, including changing the **Status**, **Assignee**, and **Due Date**, as well as adding **comments**. This enables collaborative task management across users. *** **When App Config is Disabled:** * Only the **task creator** has full control over task updates. Other users have limited access and can perform the following actions: * Change status * Update assignee * Update due date * Add comments *(a validation message is displayed stating that the user does not have access to update the task)* * No **Edit** option is available for users other than the task creator. Actions such as updating the **due date reminder**, adding/removing **watchers**, or performing any other task modifications are not allowed. *** **Impact:** * **Configurable Access Control:** Enables organizations to switch between restricted and collaborative task update models. * **Improved Team Collaboration:** When enabled, multiple users can contribute to task progress without dependency on the creator. * **Data Protection:** Deletion rights remain restricted to the task creator, preventing accidental or unauthorized data removal. * **Better Governance & Accountability:** Ensures clear ownership while allowing controlled flexibility in task updates. {% hint style="info" %} **Task deletion** is always restricted to the **task creator**, regardless of whether the app configuration is **enabled** or **disabled**. {% endhint %} *** ### **Addition Of “Amount Remaining To Ship” Column in Sales Orders** **Overview:** A new calculated field, **“Amount Remaining To Ship,”** has been introduced in the **Sales Order module** to provide better visibility into the pending shipment value. This enhancement helps users quickly understand the financial impact of unfulfilled quantities by calculating the remaining shipment amount based on quantity and pricing. *** **Feature Added:** * Added a new field **“Amount Remaining To Ship”** in the following areas: * **Create Sales Order Module (Item Line Level)**
* **Sales Order Subform (Line Level)**
* **Sales Order Centre (Detail View)**
* The **“Amount Remaining To Ship”** field is calculated as **Qty Remaining to Ship × Effective Unit Price (EUP)**. *** **Key Enhancements:** * **Improved Financial Visibility:** Provides real-time insight into the value of pending shipments directly within the Sales Order. * **Better Order Tracking:** Helps users track unfulfilled quantities not just in units, but also in monetary terms. * **Enhanced Decision-Making:** Enables more informed planning for fulfillment, invoicing, and revenue forecasting. * **Reduced Manual Calculation:** Eliminates the need for users to manually calculate pending shipment amounts using quantity and pricing. *** ### **Added Producible Inventory Columns to the Data Export Centre** **Overview:** The **Data Export Centre** under **Search by: Inventory by Item** has been enhanced to include additional columns related to **BOM producible quantities**. This enhancement enables users to view not only current inventory levels but also the producible quantities based on BOM configurations, providing deeper insight into manufacturing readiness and inventory potential. *** **Prerequisite / App Configuration:** **App Config Name:** Show BOM Inventory Levels in Inventory Snapshot **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → System→ Show BOM Inventory Levels in Inventory Snapshot
*** **Functionality:** **When App Config is Enabled:** * Additional columns related to **producible quantities** become available for selection in the Data Export Centre under **Search by: Inventory by Item**. These include the following fields: * Producible On Hand * Producible Net Available * Producible Available * Producible ATS Qty * Producible ATS Qty (Inc PO / MO / PO & MO) * Total Producible On Hand * Total Producible Net Available * Total Producible Available * Total Producible ATS Qty (Inc PO / MO / PO & MO) These columns display producible quantities for manufacturable items based on BOM and available inventory.
*** **When App Config is Disabled:** * The producible quantity columns are not available for selection. The Data Export Centre continues to display only standard inventory-related fields without BOM-based producible calculations. *** **Key Enhancements:** * **Enhanced Inventory Visibility:** Provides a combined view of both **available stock** and **producible quantities**, improving inventory transparency. * **Manufacturing Readiness Insights:** Helps users understand how many units can be manufactured from existing inventory without manual calculations. * **Better Planning & Forecasting:** Supports production planning, procurement decisions, and order fulfillment by exposing potential inventory. * **Reduced Manual Effort:** Eliminates the need to separately analyze BOMs and inventory to estimate producible quantities. *** ### **Enhanced Catalyst Selection Flexibility in Manufacturing Lab Records** **Overview:** The **Manufacturing Lab Record** module plays a critical role in capturing catalyst-specific data for manufacturing processes. The selected catalyst determines associated property values and impacts validation, quality control, and reporting. Previously, once a lab record was created, the catalyst field was not editable, limiting flexibility in cases of incorrect selection or process changes. *** **Enhancement Added:** The **Catalyst dropdown** in the Manufacturing Lab Record module is now **editable even after the lab record is created**, allowing users to update or change the selected catalyst.
*** **Impact:** * **Improved Flexibility:** Users can modify the catalyst after record creation, accommodating changes in manufacturing requirements. * **Enhanced Data Accuracy:** Reduces the need to void and recreate lab records due to incorrect catalyst selection. * **Better Workflow Efficiency:** Saves time and effort by allowing updates within the existing record instead of recreating it. * **Consistent Property Mapping:** Updating the catalyst ensures that the corresponding property values align with the selected catalyst profile, maintaining data integrity. *** ### **Automated Email Notification on Credit Memo Creation** **Overview:** The Credit Memo module is used to issue credits to customers for returns, adjustments, or refunds. Timely communication of such financial transactions is essential for maintaining transparency and improving customer experience. To streamline this process, an automated email notification mechanism has been introduced for credit memo creation. *** **App Configuration Requirement:** **App Config Name:** Automatically Send Email on Credit Memo Creation **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → Sales → Automatically Send Email on Credit Memo Creation
*** **Functionality:** **When App Config is Enabled** * The system automatically sends an email to the customer’s **Main Email** upon successful creation of a credit memo. *** **When App Config is Disabled** * No email is triggered when a credit memo is created. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu** → **Sales** → **Credit & Deposit** → **Credit Memo Centre** and create a new Credit Memo.
**Step 2:** If the app configuration is enabled, the system automatically triggers an email to the customer’s **Main Email**, including the credit memo details. **Step 3:** Navigate to the **Credit Memo Centre** and verify the **“Email Sent?”** column. A checkmark indicates that the email was successfully sent.
*** **Key Enhancements:** * **Automated Communication:** Eliminates the need for manual email sending after credit memo creation. * **Improved Customer Experience:** Customers receive instant confirmation of issued credits. * **Operational Efficiency:** Reduces manual effort and ensures timely notifications. * **Dependency Awareness:** Ensures proper setup by requiring the customer’s Main Email for successful email delivery. {% hint style="info" %} The **customer’s Main Email must be configured** in the Customer module for the email to be sent successfully. {% endhint %} *** ### **Added "Master Case" and "Inner Case" Fields in Item Module** **Overview:** The **Item module** in XoroERP allows users to define detailed product attributes, including dimensions and packaging configurations such as Item, Master Case, and Inner Case. With this enhancement, additional fields under the **Weights & Dims** section for **Master Case** and **Inner Case** are now more flexible, as they are non-mandatory and seamlessly integrated across the system. These fields are also available in the Item Centre and supported in Advanced Search for improved visibility and usability. *** **Feature Added:** * New fields are introduced under the **Master Case** and **Inner Case** sections in the **Weights & Dims** tab of the **Create Item** page. The following fields have been added: * **Size UOM** * **Length** * **Width** * **Height** * **Weight UOM** * **Weight** * **Cubic Capacity UOM** * **Cubic Capacity**
* All these fields are available as columns in the **Item Centre**, enabling better tracking and reporting.
*** **Key Enhancements:** * **Improved Flexibility:** Users can create or update items without being বাধforced to enter Master Case or Inner Case details. * **Enhanced Visibility:** Newly added fields are exposed in Item Centre for better data access. * **Advanced Search Support:** Users can search and filter items using these new fields. * **Better Data Management:** Supports optional packaging-level data capture without impacting item creation workflows. *** ### **Expense Line Support in Vendor Credit Batch Upload** **Overview:** The **Vendor Credit upload** functionality allows users to create vendor credits in bulk using a predefined template. Traditionally, there was limited flexibility for accounting use cases that require posting amounts directly to specific expense accounts. With this enhancement, users can now include expense-related data in the upload file and optionally create expense lines during the upload process. This provides better control over how vendor credits are recorded in the system, especially for scenarios such as freight, bill-back, or other GL-specific postings. *** **Feature Added:** * A new field, **“Account Expense Name,”** has been added to the **Vendor Credit upload template**.
* A new checkbox, **"Add Expense Line"**, has been added to the **Upload Vendor Credit** page.
*** **Functionality**: When the **“Add Expense Line”** checkbox is selected, and both the **Expense Account Name** and **Expense Amount** fields are provided in the upload file, the system will create an expense line. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Download the template file by clicking on the **“Download Template”** option and populate the CSV file with the required data.
**Step 2:** Select the **“Add Expense Line”** checkbox if you want to create an expense line in the Vendor Credit.
**Step 3:** Click on the **“Verify & Upload”** button. A preview screen will open, displaying the details entered in the template. Users can modify the data before final upload.
**Step 4:** Click on **“Upload Vendor Credits”** to create the Vendor Credits.
**Step 5:** If any amount is entered in the **Total Amount** field, a **Miscellaneous Charges** item line will be created in the Vendor Credit (as per existing behavior).
If the required conditions for creating an expense line are also met, the system will create the corresponding **expense line** in the Vendor Credit.
If the account specified in the **Expense Account** field does not exist or is left blank, the system will automatically select the vendor’s **default expense account** (if available) as the expense account, as shown in the example below.
*** **Validation Rules:** 1. If the **“Add Expense Line”** checkbox is selected and the **Total Amount** field in the upload file is left blank, the system displays an error: **“No amount provided for the vendor credit.”** 2. If the **“Add Expense Line”** checkbox is not selected and the **Total Amount** field is left blank, the Vendor Credit is created with **only an expense line** and no item line. 3. If the **Expense Account** field is left blank and no **default expense account** exists for the vendor, the system does not insert any records, as a valid expense account is required. 4. The **Store Code** and **Vendor** specified in the upload file must exist in the system; otherwise, the records will not be created. *** **Key Enhancements:** * **Expense Line Support in Bulk Upload:** Enables creation of expense lines directly through the Vendor Credit upload process, improving flexibility in accounting entries. * **Optional Expense Handling:** The “Add Expense Line” checkbox gives users control to include or exclude expense lines during upload without impacting existing workflows. * **Backward Compatibility Maintained:** Existing behavior remains unchanged when the “Add Expense Line” checkbox is not selected. * **Smart Default Handling:** Automatically assigns the vendor’s default expense account when a valid account is not provided (if available), reducing upload failures. *** ### **“Standard Unit Cost” Column Added to BOM Centre and Data Export Centre** **Overview:** This enhancement introduces the **Standard Unit Cost** column when the selected option in the **Search By** field is **Bill of Material Lines**, making cost visibility more accessible directly within the system. Users can now view the standard unit cost of raw materials in both the **Bill of Materials Centre** and the **Data Export Centre**, ensuring better transparency and easier access to cost-related information. *** **Key Enhancements:** * **Visibility in BOM Centre:** Users can now view standard unit cost directly within the **Bill of Materials Centre** grid. * **Availability in Data Export:** The same field is now available in the **Data Export Centre**, enabling users to extract cost data for reporting and analysis. * **Consistent Data Representation:** Ensures that the values displayed in the UI match those in the exported files. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to the **Bill of Materials Centre** and select **Bill of Material Lines** in the **Search By** field. **Step 2:** Ensure the **Standard Unit Cost** column is visible to view the cost for each BOM line item.
**Step 3:** Similarly, navigate to the **Data Export Centre** and select **Bill of Material Lines**. Ensure the **Standard Unit Cost** column is visible in the grid.
**Step 4:** Export the data for a selected record. The downloaded file will also display the **Standard Unit Cost** for the selected item(s).
*** ### **Addition of “Create RMA” Option in Invoice Page** **Overview:** This enhancement introduces a new option, **Create RMA**, in the **Options** dropdown menu at the header level of the **Create Invoice** page. It simplifies the return process by allowing users to initiate RMAs directly from the relevant invoice, eliminating the need to navigate separately to the RMA module. *** **Key Enhancements:** * When you click on the **Create RMA** option, the user is redirected to the **RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)** module. * The RMA generated is automatically linked to the selected invoice. * The **Create RMA** option is also available in the **Invoice Centre** when you right-click on an invoice and select **Create RMA**. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Invoice**. The **Create Invoice** page opens. **Step 2:** Click on the **Options** dropdown available at the top-right corner of the page and select the **Create RMA** option.
**Step 3:** The system redirects to the **Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA)** page. A **Select Invoice Lines** pop-up appears, allowing users to choose the items to be returned.
**Step 4:** Enter the required RMA details, such as **return type**, **RMA type**, **customer details**, and **return quantities**. **Step 5:** Click **Save** to create the RMA. The RMA is created and linked to the original invoice.
*** ### **Enhanced Order Balance Calculation in Customer Balance Overview** **Overview:** This enhancement refines how the **Order Balance** is calculated in the **Customer Balance Overview**. The update ensures that only relevant order statuses contributing to financial exposure are considered, providing a more accurate representation of customer liability. *** **Key Enhancements:** * The **Order Balance** field in the **Customer Balance Overview** page now includes only **Sales Orders** with statuses **Released** and **Partially Shipped**. * Orders in **Open status** and **Estimates** are excluded from the Order Balance calculation. * The updated calculation provides a more accurate reflection of committed and in-progress orders. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Customer → Customer Info** and search for the required customer.
**Step 2:** Click on the **Balance Overview** option from the **Options** dropdown at the **top-right corner** of the page.
**Step 3:** Locate the **Order Balance (Released/Partially Shipped)** field. The system automatically calculates the **Order Balance** based on Sales Orders in **Released** and **Partially Shipped** status.
*** ### **Auto Calculation of ASN Label Quantity During Receiving** **Overview:** This enhancement introduces automatic calculation of label quantity in the Receive ASN module. Based on the item’s **Master Case Qty** and **ASN Qty**, the system then calculates the required number of labels, reducing manual effort and ensuring consistency in receiving operations. *** **Enhancement Added:** A new App Config, **"Auto Calculate ASN Label Qty While Receiving"**, has been introduced.
*** **Functionality:** **When App Config Is Enabled:** * The system automatically calculates the **Labels** value in the **Receive ASN** module. The calculation is based on **ASN Qty** and **Master Case Qty** for each item. * The label quantity dynamically adjusts according to the item’s Master Case Qty defined in the Item Centre. **When App Config Is Disabled:** * The system follows the previous behavior; label quantity is not auto-calculated and must be managed manually during ASN receiving. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → App Config → Purchase** and enable the app config **"Auto Calculate ASN Label Qty While Receiving"**. **Step 2:** Go to the **Item Centre** and ensure that the **Master Case Qty** is defined for the respective items.
**Step 3:** Navigate to the **Receive ASN** module and open an ASN record for the respective item. **Step 4:** Observe the **ASN Qty** and **Labels** columns. The system automatically calculates the label quantity based on **ASN Qty** and **Master Case Qty** for each item.
*** ### **Added Order Type and Brand Name Fields in PO and SO Upload Templates** **Overview:**\ \ This enhancement introduces **Order Type Code & Name** in **Purchase Order (PO)** and **Brand Name** fields in both **Purchase Order (PO)** and **Sales Order (SO)** **upload templates**.\ \ It enables users to define these header-level attributes directly through bulk upload, ensuring better control, consistency, and reduced manual intervention during order creation. *** **Key Enhancements:** * New Fields Added in Templates: **OrderTypeCode** and **OrderTypeName** have been added to the **PO Upload Template**, while **BrandName** has been added to both **PO** and **SO Upload Templates**. * Header-Level Mapping: When multiple lines belong to the same order (e.g., multiple items), the system considers header values such as **Order Type Name**, **Order Type Code**, **Brand Name** from the first row of the order, while subsequent rows contribute only to line-level data (items) and do not override header values. * Priority Handling: If either **OrderTypeName** or **OrderTypeCode** is provided, the system automatically derives the corresponding value. However, if OrderTypeCode is invalid and a valid OrderTypeName is provided, the system prioritizes and applies the OrderTypeName. * Efficient Handling of Missing Data: If no value is provided in the first row, the fields remain blank in the order header. Values in subsequent rows do not override the header. * Validation Feedback: **Invalid OrderTypeCode** values are flagged in the **Import Error** column without blocking the processing of valid data. *** **How It Works:**\ \ **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Utilities → Data Imports → Upload Purchase Orders**. Click on **“Download Template”** to download the **PO Upload Template**.\ \ **Step 2:** Populate the required fields like **OrderTypeCode**, **OrderTypeName**, and **BrandName**. Ensure that header-level values are correctly entered in the first row of the order.
For orders containing multiple lines (multiple items), the system considers header values from the first row, while subsequent rows are used to add additional item lines to the same order.\ \ **Step 3:** Upload the file using the Upload option. The system processes the data and creates purchase orders accordingly.\ \ **Step 4:** Navigate to the **Purchase Order Centre** to review and verify the details of the newly created purchase orders. *** ### **Added "Batch Delete Images" option in Product Centre** **Overview:** This enhancement introduces a new **Batch Delete Images** option in the Product Centre, allowing users to remove product images efficiently without manually editing each product record. The feature simplifies product image management by enabling users to delete images in bulk for selected products. It also ensures that image deletions are isolated to the selected product, preventing unintended removal of images from other products that may use the same image file. *** **Feature Added: Batch Delete Images** option in Product Centre. **Location:** `Inventory → Product → Product Centre → Options → Batch Delete Images` *** **Key Enhancements:** **1. Bulk Image Deletion**\ Users can delete product images using the **Batch Delete Images** option available in the Product Centre Options menu. This eliminates the need to open individual product records to remove images. **2. Product-Level Image Isolation**\ If the same image is used across multiple products, deleting the image from one product using **Batch Delete Images** will **not affect other products** using the same image. **3. Permission-Based Visibility**\ The **Batch Delete Images** option will only be visible to users who have the **Delete Products** permission enabled in the Access Manager. **4. Variant Image Synchronisation**\ Deleting images from a product using the **Batch Delete Images** option will also remove the corresponding images from all its variants, ensuring consistent image management across the product and its associated variants. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Product Centre** and select the products from which you want to delete images.
**Step 2:** Click **Options → Batch Delete Images**. A dialogue box displaying the message *“Product(s) images deleted successfully. Press OK to refresh the page.”* appears, confirming the deletion.
**Step 3:** You will see that the selected images are removed from the chosen product only. If the same image exists in other products, those images will remain unaffected.
# March 2026 Release {% hint style="info" %} This is a Custom Release. Feature availability depends on configuration and rollout status. Some features listed above may not be visible in your environment if they are part of a staged or custom deployment. Please contact your support representative to confirm enablement. {% endhint %} ### **Ship-To Email Added as CC in Ship Confirmation Emails** **Overview:** This enhancement introduces an email interceptor for **Ship Confirmation Emails** to ensure that the **Ship-To Email address** associated with a **Sales Order** or **Invoice** is also included in the email communication. Previously, **Ship Confirmation Emails** were sent based on a defined priority of customer email fields. With this enhancement, the Ship-To Email is now additionally included as a **CC recipient**, ensuring better visibility of shipment updates to the intended delivery contact without impacting the [existing email priority flow](/xoroerp-1/sales/customer-section/customer-portal-invitation/in-what-sequence-are-the-customer-emails-used-to-send-the-so-related-emails). *** **Feature Added:** An interceptor has been implemented for the **Ship Confirmation Email** action (Entity: Invoice), which automatically adds the **Ship-To Email** as a CC recipient when it is available. * For **Sales Orders**:\ The Ship-To Email defined on the Sales Order is included as a CC recipient.
* For **Direct Invoices**:\ The Ship-To Email defined on the Invoice is included as a CC recipient.
*** **Key Enhancements:** * **Additional Visibility for Shipment Communication**\ The Ship-To Email address now receives a copy of the Ship Confirmation Email, ensuring that the recipient at the delivery location is informed about the shipment status. * **Non-Disruptive to Existing Email Priority Flow**\ The existing email priority logic for determining primary recipients remains unchanged. The Ship-To Email is added only as a **CC**, without affecting the primary recipient selection. * **Automatic Email Handling via Interceptor**\ The system automatically fetches the Ship-To Email from the Sales Order or Invoice and includes it as a CC recipient, eliminating the need for manual intervention. *** ### **Auto-Population of Lab Record Number from MO Number** **Overview:** Manufacturing lab records can be created either directly from the **Manufacturing Lab Record module** or through the **Manufacturing Order Centre**. Each lab record is associated with a Manufacturing Order (MO). With this enhancement, the **Lab Record Number** is now automatically populated based on the selected **MO Number**, instead of requiring manual entry. *** **Enhancement Added:** The system now auto-populates the **Lab Record Number** field based on the selected **MO Number**. * On selecting or updating the MO Number, the Lab Record Number is automatically filled with the same value. * This functionality works for lab records created: * Directly from the **Manufacturing Lab Record** module.
* From the **Manufacturing Order Centre**, use the **Create Lab Record** option in the **Options** drop-down menu.
*** **Impact:** * **Improved Accuracy**: Ensures consistent mapping between MO Number and Lab Record Number. * **Reduced Manual Effort**: Eliminates the need to enter or copy values manually. * **Error Prevention**: Minimizes the risk of incorrect or mismatched record numbers. * **Better User Experience**: Simplifies and speeds up the creation of lab records. *** ### **Updated Margin % Calculation Logic in Item Centre** **Overview:** The **Item Centre** provides key pricing and cost-related metrics that help users evaluate item profitability. One such metric is **Margin %**, which reflects the relationship between an item’s selling price and its cost. With this enhancement, the **Margin % calculation has been updated to use Average Unit Cost instead of Standard Unit Cost**, and the Margin % is now also available as a dedicated column in the Item Centre for improved visibility. *** **Enhancement Added:** * A new **Margin % column** has been added in the **Item Centre** for quick visibility of item profitability.
* The **calculation logic for Margin % has been updated** as follows:\ **Margin % = (Standard Unit Price − Average Unit Cost) × 100 / Standard Unit Price** * The updated Margin % is also reflected consistently in the **Item subform (Pricing section)**.
*** **Impact:** * **More Accurate Profitability**: Margin % now reflects actual cost behavior using Average Unit Cost. * **Better Visibility**: Users can directly view Margin % in the Item Centre without opening individual item records. * **Improved Decision-Making**: Enables more informed pricing and margin analysis. * **Consistency Across System**: Margin % calculation is standardised across the Item Centre and Item subform. *** ### **Improved Tax Return Amount Consistency and Payment Void Handling** **Overview:** The Tax Return Centre allows users to review filed tax returns, record payments, and manage refunds. With this enhancement, the system introduces improved handling for payment voiding, including support for cheque-based transactions. *** **Enhancement Added:** When voiding a payment in the **Tax Return Centre**, if the payment method is **Cheque** and a cheque number is present, the system prompts the user to enter a **Void Cheque Date**. This ensures that cheque-based transactions are properly tracked and aligned with financial and audit requirements. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Accounting → Sales Tax → Tax Return Centre**.
**Step 2:** Right-click on the relevant tax return record and select **View Payments/Refunds** from the available options.
**Step 3:** If the payment method is **Cheque**, then while voiding the payment/refund (by clicking the **delete/void** option), a confirmation sub-form appears displaying the **Void Cheque Date**.
**Step 4:** The **Void Cheque Date** is auto-populated by default; however, users can modify the date as required.
**Step 5:** Click **OK** to confirm the permanent deletion of the selected payment/refund.
*** **Impact:** * **Accurate Financial Tracking**\ Ensures cheque-based payment voids are recorded with a proper date, maintaining accurate financial records. * **Improved Audit Compliance**\ Capturing the Void Cheque Date provides better traceability and supports audit requirements. * **Controlled Void Operations**\ Adds an extra validation step for cheque payments, reducing the risk of untracked or incorrect void actions. * **Better Transaction Transparency**\ Users gain clear visibility into when a cheque was voided, improving overall transaction clarity. *** ### **Added Customer Group Field in Sales Order Header** **Overview:** The Sales Order module provides key customer-related information to help users make informed pricing and order decisions. With this enhancement, the **Customer Group** (which determines pricing levels) has been added to the **Customer Info section** of the Sales Order header. This value is automatically fetched from the **Customer Centre**, where the Customer Group is defined for each customer. *** **Enhancement Added:** * Added **Customer Group** field in the **Customer Info section** of the Sales Order header.
* The value is auto-populated based on the **Customer Group assigned in the Customer module**. *** **Impact:** * **Improved Visibility:** Users can instantly identify the customer group without navigating away from the Sales Order. * **Reduced Navigation Effort:** Eliminates the need to check the Customer Centre separately. * **Faster Decision-Making:** Enables quicker and more informed order processing. * **Better Pricing Awareness:** Helps users quickly understand the pricing level associated with the customer during order creation. *** ### **Added Batch Upload Reconcile Bills Module** **Overview:** The **Batch Upload Reconcile Bills** module allows users to reconcile multiple bills in bulk by uploading a CSV file. Instead of manually reconciling bills one by one, users can download a predefined template, populate the required bill reconciliation details, and upload the file to process multiple reconciliations at once. This feature simplifies reconciliation workflows, reduces manual effort, and improves accuracy when handling large volumes of vendor bills. *** **Feature Added:** A new module, **Batch Upload Reconcile Bills,** has been introduced to enable users to upload and reconcile multiple vendor bills simultaneously using a CSV template. The system provides a downloadable template containing the required column headers. Users can populate this template with reconciliation data and upload it into the system for processing. **Location:** `Menu → Utilities → Data Imports → Upload Bill Reconciliation → Batch Upload Reconcile Bills`
*** **App Configuration Requirement:** The behavior of expense bill creation during reconciliation depends on the app configuration, **Create Expense Bills in Item Reconciliation.**
*** **Functionality:** 1. If the app configuration **"Create Expense Bills in Item Reconciliation"** is **enabled**: * The system will **always create an Expense Bill**, regardless of the value provided in the upload file. 2. If the app configuration **"Create Expense Bills in Item Reconciliation"** is **disabled**: * The system will follow the value provided in the uploaded file. * If the value in the uploaded file is **TRUE**, an Expense Bill is created. * If the value in the uploaded file is **FALSE**, a **Liability** is created instead of an expense bill. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Enables **bulk reconciliation of bills through CSV upload**. * Provides a **standardised reconciliation template** with required fields. * Automatically validates currency and exchange rate logic during upload. * Supports **automatic exchange rate retrieval** when not provided in the upload file. * Reduces manual reconciliation work and improves processing efficiency. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to the **Batch Upload Reconcile Bills** module and click **Download Template** to download the CSV template. The template contains predefined column headers required for the reconciliation process. Fields marked with **\*\*** are mandatory and must be populated. **Step 2:** After entering the required data in the template, save the file in **CSV format**. Upload the updated template file by clicking on the **Browse** option and selecting the required file. **Step 3:** The system will validate the file and process each reconciliation record accordingly. Currency behavior depends on the relationship between Bill Currency, Reconcile Currency, and Home Currency, as explained in the cases below. *** **Case 1: Bill Currency ≠ Reconcile Currency and Reconcile Currency = Home Currency** * If an Exchange Rate is provided in the upload file, the system uses the entered exchange rate for reconciliation. * If the Exchange Rate is not provided, the system automatically retrieves the exchange rate for the Bill Currency and uses it for the reconciliation process. The system then converts the reconciliation amount to Home Currency using this exchange rate.\ \ **Case 2: Bill Currency ≠ Home Currency** * If the Bill Currency is not the same as the Home Currency, the Reconcile Currency can only be either the Bill Currency or the Home Currency. * If the Exchange Rate is entered in the upload file, the system will use the entered value during reconciliation. * If the Exchange Rate is not entered, the system automatically retrieves the exchange rate for the selected currency and uses it during reconciliation. **Case 3: Bill Currency = Reconcile Currency** * If the Exchange Rate is not entered, the system automatically assigns the value **1**. * If a different exchange rate is entered, it may cause discrepancies because the **reconciliation details/reconciliation info** will display the entered exchange rate. However, all accounting transactions related to the bill will continue to use the original bill exchange rate. {% hint style="warning" %} If **Bill Currency ≠ Home Currency,** and any other currency is entered as the **Reconcile Currency**, the system throws an error stating that the Reconcile Currency must be either the **Bill Currency** or the **Home Currency**. {% endhint %} *** **Validation Rules:** * **Reconcile Tax Code** will default to the **Vendor’s default tax code** if not provided. Note that taxes will apply only if the **Reconcile Item** is taxable. * The **exchange rate** will default to the system’s exchange rate if not entered. It will be used only when the **Reconcile Currency** differs from the **Bill Currency**. * The **Reconcile Method** will default to **Amount** if not entered. (Other available Reconcile Methods include Cost, CBM, Qty, Amount) * The **AddToVendorBill** flag will default to **true** if no value is provided. * **Reconcile Currency** will default to the **vendor's currency** if no value is provided. * The **BillItemNumber** is required only if **BillItemLineId** is not provided. For bills with duplicate **Item Numbers**, the first item will be selected by default. *** The **BillItemLineId** can be obtained by following the steps below: **Step 1:** Navigate to the **Data Export Centre** and in the **Search By** field, select **Bill Items Detail**. **Step 2:** Select the required **Bill Item Line** and click **Options → Export to Local - Selected**.
**Step 3:** An Excel file will be downloaded containing the bill item details, where the **BillItemLineId** value can be retrieved.
*** ### **New Field Available in Batch Update for Sales Orders and Purchase Orders** **Overview:** The Batch Update functionality in the Sales Order and Purchase Order modules allows users to update multiple records simultaneously, improving efficiency and reducing manual effort. With this enhancement, users can now update the **Brand** field in bulk using the Batch Update feature for both Sales Orders and Purchase Orders. *** **Enhancement Added:** * Added **Brand** as a selectable field in the **Batch Update** option for **SOs** and **POs**.
* Users can now assign or update the Brand value across multiple selected records in a single action. * Introduced validation to restrict batch updates when selected records include **Transfer-type orders**. *** **Impact:** * **Improved Efficiency:** Enables bulk updating of Brand across multiple orders, reducing manual updates. * **Better Data Consistency:** Ensures uniform Brand assignment across selected records. * **Time-Saving:** Eliminates the need to update Brand individually for each order. * **Controlled Updates:** Prevents unintended updates by restricting batch operations on transfer-type orders. *** ### **Added a New App Config: Allow Third Party Shipping Account by Shipping Terms** **Overview:** Shipping terms and third-party shipping account usage must align to avoid confusion during order processing. Previously, users could enter a **Third-Party Shipping Account #** regardless of the selected shipping term, which could lead to ambiguity (e.g., using *Prepaid* with a third-party account). With this enhancement, a new app configuration has been introduced to control when a third-party shipping account is required based on selected **Shipping Terms**, ensuring better validation and reducing shipping errors. *** **App Configuration Requirement:** * **App Config Name:** Allow Third Party Shipping Account by Shipping Terms * **Type:** Multi-select Dropdown * **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → Sales → **Allow Third Party Shipping Account by Shipping Terms** * **Available Options:** * Prepaid * Collect * Prepaid & Billed * Collect & Allowed * Third Party Billing
*** **Functionality:** This configuration allows users to control whether a **Third-Party Shipping Account #** is required for the selected shipping terms. * If no shipping terms are selected in the app configuration, all shipping terms can be used with or without a **"Third-Party Shipping Account"**. * If specific shipping terms are selected in the app configuration, the system requires a **"Third-Party Shipping Account"** for those terms, and the **Sales Order (SO)** cannot be saved without it. *** **Key Enhancements:** * **Granular Control Over Shipping Behavior:** Enables users to precisely control which shipping terms can use third-party shipping accounts, aligning system behavior with business rules. * **Prevents Conflicting Shipping Instructions:** Eliminates scenarios where incompatible combinations (e.g., *Prepaid* with a third-party account) are entered, reducing ambiguity for fulfillment teams. * **Validation & Error Handling:** If a third-party shipping account number is entered with a shipping term that is not allowed by the configuration, the system displays a validation error message: “Third-party shipping account entry is not allowed for the selected shipping terms. Please select the shipping terms in the App Config 'Allow Third Party Shipping Account by Shipping Terms'.” * **Improved Data Accuracy at Entry Level:** Ensures only valid shipping account and shipping term combinations are saved, improving overall data integrity. *** ### **Added a New App Config: Show Balance Due Amount on Sales Order** **Overview:** The Sales Order module displays key financial details such as the total amount and deposits applied. However, users did not have direct visibility into the **remaining balance due** on the Sales Order. With this enhancement, a new app configuration has been introduced to display the **Balance Due** amount on the Sales Order, providing clear visibility into the outstanding amount after deposits are applied. *** **App Configuration Requirement:** * **App Config Name:** Show Balance Due amount on Sales Order * **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → Sales → Show Balance Due amount on Sales Order
*** **Functionality:** **When App Config Is Enabled:** * The system displays the balance due as **Total Sales Order Amount – Linked Deposit Amount.**
*** **When App Config Is Disabled:** * When disabled, the **Balance Due** field is not displayed on the Sales Order. *** **Impact:** * **Improved Financial Visibility:** Users can instantly view the remaining amount on the Sales Order after applying deposits. * **Better Payment Tracking:** Helps track how much amount is still due after deposits are applied. * **Reduced Manual Calculation:** Eliminates the need to manually calculate remaining balances. * **Enhanced Decision-Making:** Supports quicker financial assessment during order processing. *** ### **Introduced a New App Config: Disable Auto Populate Memo in IR/Bill** **Overview:** The system previously auto-populated the **Memo** field in Item Receipts (IR) and Bills during various purchase-related processes. This could lead to unintended or inconsistent memo values, especially when the Purchase Order (PO) memo was empty or when records were generated through different workflows. With this enhancement, a new app configuration has been introduced to give users control over memo population behavior, ensuring that memo values are only carried forward when explicitly defined. *** **App Configuration Requirement:** * **App Config Name:** Disable Auto Populate Memo in IR/Bill * **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → Purchase → Disable Auto Populate Memo in IR/Bill
*** **Functionality:** This configuration controls whether the system should automatically populate the **Memo** field in Item Receipts (IR) and Bills. **When App Config Is Enabled:** * The system will not auto-populate any default memo in IR or Bill. If the Purchase Order memo is empty, the Memo field in IR/Bill will remain blank. If a memo exists on the PO, it will be carried forward to the related IR and Bill. *** **When App Config Is Disabled:** * The system continues to auto-populate the Memo field as per existing behavior. *** **Key Enhancements:** * **Controlled Memo Population:** Prevents automatic insertion of default memo values, ensuring only intentional data is recorded. * **Consistent Behavior Across Workflows:** Applies uniformly across key processes such as Quick Receive, Item Receipt Merge, and Convert Liability to Bills. * **Improved Data Accuracy:** Eliminates unintended or system-generated memo values, maintaining cleaner transaction records. * **Reduced Manual Cleanup:**\ Minimizes the need for users to edit or remove auto-filled memo values post-creation. *** ### **Qty On PO Draft and Qty On SO Draft Columns Added in Inventory by Item Export** **Overview:** The **Inventory by Item** view in the **Data Export Centre** provides key inventory metrics, including quantities related to Purchase Orders and Sales Orders. While fields such as **On PO (Draft)** and **On SO (Draft)** were visible within the UI, they were not included in the exported file, creating a gap between on-screen data and exported data. With this enhancement, the export functionality has been updated to include these draft-related quantities, ensuring consistency between the UI and exported reports. *** **Enhancement Added:** Added **Qty On PO Draft** and **Qty On SO Draft** columns to the export file of the **Inventory by Item** view.
*** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to the **Data Export Centre** and select **Search by: Inventory By Item**. Select the desired record for which you want to view inventory availability and producible stock levels.
**Step 2:** Click on the **Options** menu located at the top left corner of the screen and select **Export to Local – Selected**. The **Select Import/Export Utility Template** pop-up appears.
**Step 3:** In the **Select Import/Export Utility Template** pop-up, choose the required settings (such as file format, delimiter, etc.) and click **Download**.
**Step 4:** The exported file will include the newly added columns: **Qty On PO Draft** and **Qty On SO Draft**.
*** **Impact:** * **Data Consistency:** Exported files now match the data displayed in the UI, eliminating discrepancies. * **Improved Reporting Accuracy:** Users can include draft Purchase Orders and Sales Orders in inventory analysis. * **Better Decision-Making:** Helps users plan inventory more effectively by considering both confirmed and draft quantities. *** ### **Dynamic Variant Filtering and Sales Store Mapping in B2B Presentation** **Overview:** The B2B Presentation module enables users to configure how products and orders behave in the customer portal. Previously, variant dropdowns displayed all possible options regardless of valid combinations, and Sales Store mapping depended on presentation settings, leading to inconsistencies in order creation. With this enhancement, dynamic filtering of variant options has been introduced along with improved control over Sales Store assignment. Additionally, item information is now visible for products with variants, improving overall usability and accuracy. *** **Enhancement Added:** * Introduced **Dynamic Variant Filtering** via app configuration For example, if the user selects Colour: Ivory, only the option sizes available for Ivory (e.g., 28, 20, 34.5) will appear in the Option Size dropdown. Similarly, if the user selects Colour: Floral Pink, only the option sizes available for Floral Pink (e.g., 34.5) will appear in the Option Size dropdown. So, each dropdown dynamically filters the next one to show only valid combinations.
* Added a **Sales Store dropdown** in the Presentation Centre. Orders now use the configured Sales Store from the Presentation. If no **Sales Store** is selected, the **Ship Store** is used as the default.
*** **App Configuration Requirement:** * **App Config Name:** Dynamic Filtering of Variant Dropdowns Based on Previous Option Selectio**n** * **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → B2B → Dynamic Filtering of Variant Dropdowns Based on Previous Option Selection
* **Prerequisite:** The Product Layout must be set to **“Variant Selection”** in the **Other Attributes** tab of the Presentation settings. *** **Functionality:** **When App Config Is Enabled:** * The system dynamically filters variant dropdown options based on prior selections: * Option 2 (Optionsize) values depend on the selected value in Option 1 (Colorr).
* Option 3 (Style) values depend on selections in Option 1 (Colorr) and Option 2 (Optionsize).
* This dependency continues sequentially for all variant options. Only valid variant combinations are displayed, ensuring users cannot select non-existent variants. *** **When App Config Is Disabled:** * When disabled, all dropdowns behave independently; that is, all configured option values are displayed, regardless of available combinations. *** **Impact:** * **Improved Accuracy:** Prevents selection of invalid variant combinations * **Better User Experience:** Cleaner and more relevant dropdown options in B2B * **Consistent Order Creation:** Ensures correct Sales Store mapping for all B2B orders * **Enhanced Product Visibility:** Item information is now available even for variant-based products * **Reduced Errors:** Minimizes confusion for dealers and improves order reliability *** ### **Introduced a New App Config: Global Allocation Order Sorting** **Overview:** Global Allocation (Auto Allocation) determines how inventory received from Purchase Orders is allocated to Sales Orders. Previously, the allocation sequence was fixed and always prioritized Sales Orders based on the **Order Date**. With this enhancement, users can now configure the sorting logic used during allocation, allowing the system to prioritize Sales Orders based on **Date To Be Shipped** instead of only Order Date. This provides greater flexibility and aligns allocation with business priorities such as delivery commitments. *** **App Configuration Requirement:** * **App Config Name:** Global Allocation Order Sorting * **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → Purchase → Global Allocation Order Sorting * **Type:** Multi-select Dropdown * **Available Options:** * Order Date * Date To Be Shipped
* **Prerequisite:** This configuration works when auto allocation is enabled through either of the following app configs: * **Auto Allocate Linked Sales Orders When Stock is Received** * **Auto Allocation Type for Allocating Sales Orders on PO Receiving** (set to a value other than *Do Not Auto Allocate*) *** **Functionality:** This configuration determines how Sales Orders are prioritized during auto allocation when inventory is received (on **ASN** close): * When **Order Date** is selected, Sales Orders are allocated based on the earliest order date (existing behavior). * When **Date To Be Shipped** is selected, Sales Orders are allocated based on the earliest shipping date, ensuring orders with nearer delivery timelines are prioritized. This sorting applies when multiple Sales Orders are eligible for allocation against the same received inventory. *** **Impact:** * **Flexible Allocation Strategy:** Users can choose between **Order Date** or **Date To Be Shipped** based on business needs. * **Better Operational Alignment:** Aligns inventory allocation with delivery timelines instead of just order creation timing. * **Reduced Manual Intervention:** Minimizes the need for manual reallocation by automatically prioritizing the correct Sales Orders. * **Enhanced Control Over Allocation Logic:** Provides configurability instead of relying on a fixed, system-defined sorting method. *** ### **Auto Quote Integration for Purchase Orders via Import Utility** **Overview:** A new utility has been introduced in the Import/Export Utility Centre to support Auto Quote-based Purchase Order creation. This enhancement enables users to upload a structured CSV file and automatically generate Purchase Orders in the system. The utility not only creates Purchase Orders but also ensures that missing master data (such as Items and Vendors) is handled dynamically during the import process, reducing manual setup effort and improving onboarding efficiency. *** **Feature Added:** Introduced a new Import Utility template, **“PO AQ to Xoro,”** for Purchase Order creation.
*** **Key Enhancements:** * **Automated PO Creation from CSV:** Users can upload structured files to create Purchase Orders without manual entry. * **Auto Creation of Missing Items:** If an item does not exist in the system, it is automatically created during import. * **Vendor Auto-Creation Support:** Vendors are created automatically during upload based on the app configuration behavior. * If **“Auto create vendors in API/Uploads”** is enabled, a vendor is created * If disabled, the system throws a validation error * **Support for Multi-Line PO Uploads:** Multiple items can be processed in a single upload with proper mapping and pricing. * **Seamless Data Reflection in ERP:** Uploaded data (Items, Vendors, Pricing, PO details) is accurately reflected across **Purchase Order Centre**, **Item Centre** and **Vendor Centre**. * **Pre-Import Script Flexibility:** Allows custom parsing and transformation of CSV data before processing. *** ### **Addition of “Part of BOM (RM)” Column in Item Centre** **Overview:** A new column, **“Part of BOM (RM),”** has been introduced in the **Item Centre** to identify whether an item is used as a **raw material (RM)** in any Bill of Materials (BOM). Previously, the system only indicated whether an item itself had a BOM. With this enhancement, users can now also identify items that act as **components within BOMs**, improving visibility across manufacturing and inventory workflows. *** **Feature Added:** Added a new column **“Part of BOM (RM)”** in the Item Centre grid. The column displays whether an item is used as a **raw material in any BOM.**
*** **Key Enhancements:** * **Improved BOM Visibility:** Users can instantly identify which items are being consumed as raw materials in manufacturing processes. * **Faster Analysis & Decision-Making:** Eliminates the need to manually check BOMs to understand item dependencies. * **Enhanced Inventory Control:** Helps in tracking critical components that directly impact production. * **Better Filtering & Reporting:** Users can easily filter items (e.g., all RM items used in BOMs) using Advanced Search. * **Reduced Operational Effort:** Simplifies identification of BOM-linked items during planning, procurement, and audits. *** ### **Auto Produce Manufacturing Orders Support for Wave Templates** **Overview:** A new app configuration has been introduced to enable **auto production of Manufacturing Orders (MO)** during wave creation when using **wave templates**. Previously, the system restricted auto MO production when waves were created via templates, even if auto-production was enabled for insufficient inventory. With this enhancement, users can now extend auto-production behavior to wave template-based wave creation, ensuring consistent automation. *** **App Configuration Requirement:** **App Config Name:** Allow Auto Produce MO for Wave Template **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → Manufacturing → Allow Auto Produce MO for Wave Template
**Prerequisite:** This configuration works only when the setting **"Enable auto produce when having insufficient inventory"** is enabled. If this setting is disabled, then auto MO production will not be triggered even if the **app config**, **"Allow Auto Produce MO for Wave Template"**, is enabled. *** **Functionality:** When enabled, the system allows automatic creation of Manufacturing Orders during wave creation using wave templates. *** **Key Enhancements:** * **Extended Auto Production to Wave Templates:** Enables automatic MO creation even when waves are generated using templates. * **Consistent Automation Behavior:** Aligns wave template flow with standard wave creation logic for auto production. * **Reduced Manual Intervention:** Eliminates the need to manually create Manufacturing Orders when inventory is insufficient. * **Improved Fulfillment Efficiency:** Ensures production is triggered instantly during wave creation, reducing delays. *** ### **Enhanced Line-Level Options in Transfer Purchase Order** **Overview:** Enhancements have been introduced in the **Transfer Purchase Order (TPO)** to improve usability and efficiency when managing line items. Users can now quickly search for items within the TPO and perform bulk updates on ship and delivery dates directly from the line-level options. These updates reduce manual effort and streamline operations, especially when working with large orders. *** **Feature Added:** * **Search Box in TPO Details Section**\ A search field has been added to allow users to quickly locate specific items within the transfer purchase order.
* **Batch Ship Date Option**\ Enables users to update the **Expected Ship Date** for multiple selected line items at once. * **Batch Delivery Date Option**\ Enables users to update the **Delivery Date** for multiple selected line items simultaneously.
*** **Key Enhancements:** * **Faster Item Navigation:** The search functionality allows users to instantly find items within large TPOs, reducing time spent scrolling. * **Improved Operational Accuracy:** Ensures consistent ship and delivery dates across multiple items, reducing the risk of manual errors. * **Streamlined Workflow:** Centralizes line-level actions within the Options menu, making updates quicker and more intuitive. * **Better Handling of Large Orders:** Especially useful for high-volume TPOs where multiple items require the same scheduling updates. *** ### **Editable Unit Cost for Non-Inventory Items in Produced MOs** **Overview:** The **Unit Cost** field in the *Raw Materials Consumed* section of a **Produced Manufacturing Order (MO)** is now editable for specific item types. This enhancement allows users to adjust costs for **Non-Inventory, Service, and Labor items** after production, without impacting inventory valuation or stock-related transactions. *** **Enhancement Added:** Users can now modify the **Unit Cost** directly within the *Raw Materials Consumed* table for: * Non-Inventory items * Service items * Labor items
*** **Impact:** * **Accurate Cost Adjustments Post Production**\ Users can correct or update actual costs (e.g., labor, service charges) even after MO completion. * **Preserved Inventory Valuation Integrity**\ Since inventory items are excluded, stock value and inventory logs remain unaffected and reliable. * **Improved Financial Accuracy**\ Updated costs are reflected in accounting entries, ensuring better cost tracking and reporting. * **Reduced Manual Workarounds**\ Eliminates the need for external adjustments or journal corrections for non-inventory cost updates. *** ### **Automatic Delivery Date Calculation Using Vendor Lead Days** **Overview:** This enhancement improves the Purchase Order creation workflow by automatically calculating the **Delivery Date** at the line level using the **Vendor Lead Time** defined in the **Item–Vendor Mapping**. When an item is added to a Purchase Order and a corresponding Item–Vendor Mapping exists, the system automatically calculates the delivery date by adding the configured **Vendor Lead Days** to the **PO Order Date**. This helps ensure more accurate delivery planning and reduces the need for manual date calculations during PO creation. *** **New Enhancement:** Lead Time from Item–Vendor Mapping is used to calculate the Delivery Date at the PO line level. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Configure the **Lead Time (days)** for the item and vendor in the **Item–Vendor Mapping** module.
**Step 2:** Create a **Purchase Order,** selecting the required v**endor.**
**Step 3: A**dd item(s) to the **Purchase Order line. T**he system checks whether an **Item–Vendor Mapping** exists for the chosen **Item–Vendor in the PO**. **Step 4:** If the mapping exists, the system calculates the **Delivery Date** using the following logic: **Delivery Date = PO Order Date + Vendor Lead Days**
**Step 5:** The calculated value is automatically populated in the **Delivery Date field** at the PO line level.
*** **Impact:** * **Automatic Delivery Date Calculation**\ When an Item–Vendor Mapping exists, the system automatically adds the **Vendor Lead Days** defined in the mapping to the **PO Order Date** and sets the calculated value as the **Delivery Date** at the PO line level. * **Improved Purchase Planning**\ This ensures that expected delivery dates reflect the vendor’s defined lead time, improving purchase planning and reducing manual adjustments during PO creation. * **Backward Compatibility Maintained**\ If no **Item–Vendor Mapping** exists for the selected item and vendor, the system continues to follow the existing behavior where the **PO header Delivery Date** is populated at the PO line level. *** ### **App Configuration: Auto-Create ASN for Unreceived Quantity on Close ASN** **Overview:** This enhancement introduces a new App Configuration called **“Auto-Create ASN for Unreceived Quantity on Close ASN.”** When an ASN is **partially received** and then closed through **third-party apps**, the system can automatically generate a **new ASN** containing only the remaining (unreceived) quantities. This ensures that pending deliveries remain traceable without requiring users to manually create another ASN for the remaining items. The system also triggers the appropriate **webhook events for the newly generated ASN**, ensuring downstream integrations remain synchronized. *** **Configuration Details:** **App Config Name:** Auto-Create ASN for Unreceived Quantity on Close ASN **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → Warehouse → Auto-Create ASN for Unreceived Quantity on Close ASN
*** **Functionality:** **When the App Config "Auto-Create ASN for Unreceived Quantity on Close ASN" Is Enabled:** * If an ASN is partially received and the **Close ASN** is triggered through third-party apps, the existing ASN is closed, and the system automatically creates a **new ASN for the remaining (unreceived) quantities**. * A **webhook event** is also triggered for the newly created ASN. * This allows the remaining items to continue through the receiving process using a separate ASN. *** **When the App Config "Auto-Create ASN for Unreceived Quantity on Close ASN" Is Disabled:** * If an ASN is partially received and the **Close ASN** is triggered, the system exhibits default behavior. The existing ASN is closed, and the new ASN is not automatically created for the remaining (unreceived quantities). *** **Key Enhancements:** 1. **Improved Traceability of Inbound Inventory**\ By creating a new ASN for unreceived quantities, the system maintains clear tracking of pending deliveries and ensures that remaining items continue through the receiving workflow without disruption. 2. **Webhook Notification for New ASN**\ When the new ASN is created automatically, a **webhook event is triggered**, ensuring external systems and integrations are notified of the new ASN record. 3. **Configurable System Behavior**\ The functionality is controlled through an **App Configuration**, allowing organizations to enable or disable automatic ASN creation based on their operational requirements. *** ### Preventing Double Inventory Sync for Loop Returns (ASN Close) **Overview:** When **Loop Returns** is connected, and an **ASN (Advance Shipment Notice)** is closed from the RMA module, the system triggers an **Update Inventory webhook**. Previously, this resulted in **duplicate inventory adjustments** due to: * One update triggered by the **XoroERP webhook** * Another update sent by **Loop to Shopify** This caused **double synchronization of inventory**, leading to incorrect stock levels in Shopify. To resolve this, we have introduced: * A new setting: **SourceNameForThirdPartyReturns** * A new App Config: **Include Third-Party Source in Inventory Update Webhook on Close ASN** These enhancements ensure that inventory updates triggered by Loop returns are **identified and handled correctly**, preventing duplication.
*** **How to Use:** Step 1: Configure Third-Party Source * Set the **SourceNameForThirdPartyReturns** in the app settings * This value will be used as the **RMA ThirdPartySource** *** Step 2: Enable App Configuration Enable the following App Config: **Include Third-Party Source in Inventory Update Webhook on Close ASN** *** Step 3: System Behavior After Enabling When this setting is enabled: * Closing an ASN from RMA will trigger an **Update Inventory webhook** * The webhook payload will now include the **ThirdPartySource** * The value passed will be the one selected in **SourceNameForThirdPartyReturns** *** **Impact** **What This Fixes** * Prevents **double inventory adjustments** * Eliminates conflicts between: * XoroERP webhook updates * Loop’s inventory sync to Shopify *** ### **Added Ability to Edit Return Code in RMA and Credit Memos** **Overview:** Item Return Codes are used to identify and categorise the reasons behind product returns, such as damaged items, incorrect shipments, or customer dissatisfaction. These codes help businesses track return patterns, analyse return causes, and improve operational and customer service processes. Previously, the **Return Code (RCode)** field displayed the item return code associated with the returned item, but could not be modified during return processing. With this enhancement, the **Return Code field is now editable** when processing returns, allowing users to update or correct the return reason directly at the transaction level. *** **Enhancement Added:** Users can now modify the **Return Code (RCode)** field directly within the line-level details when adding or selecting items in the following modules. * **RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)**
* **Invoice Credit Memo**
* **Credit Memo**
*** **Impact:** * **Improved Return Tracking:** Ensures the correct return reason is recorded during return processing. * **Better Data Accuracy:** Enhances the reliability of return analytics and reporting. * **Operational Flexibility:** Allows users to adjust return codes without modifying the underlying item return code records. * **Enhanced Return Analysis:** Helps businesses better understand and address the root causes of product returns. *** ### **Added Total Price Column in Create ASN and ASN Modules** **Overview:** The **Create ASN** module allows users to select item lines from a Purchase Order and create an Advance Shipping Notice (ASN) for receiving goods. During this process, users define the quantity of items that will be included in the shipment before the inventory is received into the warehouse. To improve visibility into the value of items being received, a **Total Price column has been introduced** in the Create ASN and ASN modules. This enhancement enables users to quickly view the total value of the items being processed in the ASN based on the quantity being shipped or received. *** **Enhancement Added:** A **Total Price** column has been added in the following modules: 1. **Create ASN Module** * A **Total Price** column is now available in the **Purchase Order Lines** and **ASN Lines** table. * The value is calculated using the formula: **Total Price = Effective Unit Price (EUP) × To ASN Quantity** * The total price dynamically updates when the **To ASN Qty** is modified.
2. **ASN Centre** * The **Total Price** column is also available in the **ASN Centre (Detail View)** and **ASN Subform (Line Level).**
*** **Impact:** * **Improved Cost Visibility:** Users can immediately view the total value of items included in the ASN. * **Dynamic Calculation:** The total price automatically updates when quantities are adjusted during ASN creation. * **Consistency Across Modules:** The same calculated value is carried forward from the Create ASN module to the ASN Centre and ASN subform. * **Better Receiving Oversight:** Warehouse and procurement teams can easily track the monetary value of shipments before and during the receiving process. *** ### **Enhanced Journal Entry Upload with Home Currency Adjustment Support** **Overview:** In multi-currency environments, journal entries may require adjustments to ensure that the home currency amounts align correctly with foreign currency values. XoroERP provides a **Home Currency Adjustment** option within the Journal Entry module to handle such scenarios. Previously, this adjustment could only be configured manually when creating journal entries within the system. The batch upload functionality did not support this setting, meaning users could not specify Home Currency Adjustments while importing journal entries through the upload template. With this enhancement, the **Journal Entry upload template now includes support for Home Currency Adjustment**, allowing users to define this behaviour directly during batch uploads. *** **Enhancement Added:** A new column **`IsHomeCurrencyAdjustment`** has been added to the **Upload Journal Entry template**. **Description:** * This column corresponds to the **Home Currency Adjustment checkbox** available in the Journal Entry module. * When uploading journal entries, the system reads this value from the upload template and applies it to the corresponding Journal Entry created in the system. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to the **Upload Journal Entries** module and download the CSV template by clicking on “**Download Template.**“ **Step 2:** The template now includes the new column **IsHomeCurrencyAdjustment**.
**Step 3:** Populate the template with the required journal entry details. If the journal entry should be treated as a **Home Currency Adjustment**, enter **Y** in the **IsHomeCurrencyAdjustment** column. Otherwise, if no adjustment is required, leave the field blank. **Step 4:** Upload the completed CSV file through the **Upload Journal Entry** module. If the upload is successful, journal entries are created in the system. **Step 5:** The **Home Currency Adjustment flag** will be applied based on the value provided in the template. {% hint style="info" %} A journal entry may contain multiple lines (debit and credit rows) with the same **ThirdPartyRefNo**. In such cases, the system reads the value from the first line of the journal entry. This value determines whether the **Home Currency Adjustment** flag is enabled for the entire journal entry. {% endhint %} *** ### **Added New Fields in Item Page Default Setup** **Overview:** The **Item Page Default Setup** has been enhanced to include additional configurable fields that support improved manufacturing tracking, warranty management, and product reference accessibility. These fields allow administrators to define default operational attributes directly within the item configuration interface, ensuring that critical item-level information is captured consistently at the point of setup. By incorporating these fields into the Item Default Setup, organisations can better align inventory configuration with manufacturing accounting requirements, warranty tracking needs, and product documentation workflows. *** **Feature Added:** The following fields are now available within the **Item Page Default Setup** configuration: • WIP Account\ • Warranty UOM\ • Web URL **Location:** From the **Create Item** page, click the **vertical ellipsis (⋮) icon** located at the top of the page and select **Page Defaults.** *** **Key Enhancements:** 1. **WIP Account**\ • Allows associating a Work-In-Progress (WIP) account with the item.\ • Supports manufacturing environments where production costs accumulate before the item is completed.\ • Improves financial tracking of partially completed inventory during manufacturing. 2. **Warranty UOM**\ • Defines the unit of measure used for warranty duration.\ • Works together with the Warranty Time field to determine the warranty period.\ • Typical units may include days, months, or years. 3. **Web URL**\ • Allows storing a reference link to the item’s webpage or external documentation.\ • Can be used to link product pages, manufacturer documentation, or specification resources.\ • Provides quick access to external product information directly from the item record. # April 2026 Release {% hint style="warning" %} This is a Custom Release. Feature availability depends on configuration and rollout status. Some features listed above may not be visible in your environment if they are part of a staged or custom deployment. Please contact your support representative to confirm enablement. {% endhint %} ### **Added “Custom Description” Column to the Data Export Centre** **Overview:** The Data Export Centre enables users to extract data from various modules for reporting, analysis, and external processing. Within the **Purchase Order Detail** export, users can select specific columns to control the data included in the output. With this enhancement, the **Custom Description** field is now available as a selectable column in the **Purchase Order Detail** export, improving data visibility and usability in exported reports. The field is automatically populated based on the item associated with each line and is sourced from **Item → Other Attributes → Custom Description**. ***
*** **Key Enhancements:** * **Enhanced Data Visibility:** Provides direct access to item-level custom descriptions within Purchase Order exports without requiring additional lookups. * **Improved Reporting Accuracy:** Ensures exported data reflects item-specific contextual information used in business operations. * **Seamless Integration with Existing Export Options:** The field behaves like any standard column and is compatible with all export methods (**Export to Local, Export to FTP, Export to Email, and Scheduled Export**). * **Reduced Manual Effort:** Eliminates the need to manually map or merge item attributes after export. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Item → Item Centre** and open an Item record.
**Step 2:** In the **Other Attributes** tab, enter the required value in the **Custom Description** field and save the Item record.
**Step 3:** Navigate to **Menu → Purchase → Purchase Order** and create a new Purchase Order using the same item.
**Step 4:** Navigate to **Menu → Utilities → Data Exports → Data Export Centre**. In the **Search By** dropdown, select **Purchase Order Detail**.
**Step 5:** View the required Purchase Order record in the grid. The **Custom Description** column displays the value automatically populated from **Item → Other Attributes → Custom Description** for the corresponding item.
*** ### **Enhanced Profitability Calculation with Configurable Cost Type in Sales Orders** **Overview:** The **Show Profitability** option in **Sales Orders** and **Estimates** provides visibility into profit margins, total cost, and total profit, helping users evaluate the financial viability of transactions. Previously, the profitability calculation relied on a fixed cost source **(Average Cost),** which could lead to inconsistencies when businesses needed to evaluate margins based on **Standard Unit Cost**—especially for forward-looking scenarios such as replenishment planning. With this enhancement, the profitability calculation is now aligned with the configured **Item Profitability Cost Type**, ensuring consistent and accurate cost evaluation based on business preference. *** **Configuration Details:** * **App Config Name:** Item Profitability Cost Type * **Type:** Single-select Dropdown * **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → General → **Item Profitability Cost Type** * **Available Options:** * Average Cost * Standard Unit Cost
*** **Functionality:** This configuration determines the cost basis used in profitability calculations within the **Show Profitability** view. * When **Average Cost** is selected, the system calculates profitability using the item’s average cost. * When **Standard Unit Cost** is selected, the system calculates profitability using the item’s standard unit cost. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Introduced a new app configuration, Item Profitability Cost Type, allowing users to control the cost basis used in the Show Profitability view for Sales Orders and Estimates. * Users can now choose between Average Cost and Standard Unit Cost for profitability calculations based on business requirements. * The system now correctly fetches and applies the configured cost type value while calculating **Total Cost**, **Total Profit Margin**, and **Total Profit Value**. {% hint style="info" %} This configuration currently does **not** impact profitability calculations in the **Invoice module** or **Reports module**. {% endhint %} *** ### **Tax Adjustment Handling Enabled in Linked Bills** **Overview:** This enhancement improves how **Tax Adjustments** are handled in linked (child) bills by allowing controlled updates while maintaining the integrity of the parent transaction. Previously, any modification to a linked bill—including tax adjustments—was restricted, displaying the message: **“Bill details cannot be changed in the linked bill. Parent bill number: #...”** With this update, users can now add or update **Tax Adjustment lines** in linked bills, while changes to core financial data remain restricted. *** **Feature Added:** Users can add or modify **Tax Adjustment lines** in the linked bills.
*** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Create a linked bill from a parent bill and open the linked (child) bill where you want to perform updates.
**Step 2:** Navigate to the **Tax Adjustments** tab in the **Bill Details** section. Select a tax adjustment item, enter the adjustment amount and memo, then click **Add**. **Step 3:** The update is successfully saved, and the adjustment is reflected in the bill total.
*** **Key Enhancements:** * **Controlled Edit Permissions:** Only tax-related changes are allowed; changes to item and expense lines remain restricted. * **Tax Adjustment Flexibility:** Enables adding and updating Tax Adjustment lines in linked bills. * **Data Integrity Maintenance:** Prevents discrepancies between parent and linked bills. * **Textual Updates Allowed:** Users can update fields such as Memo without any restrictions. *** ### **Order Type Added to Purchase Order Header** **Overview:** This enhancement introduces the **Order Type** field at the Purchase Order header level, allowing users to directly view and assign an order classification while creating or reviewing a purchase order. This improves visibility and ensures consistency between manually created purchase orders and those uploaded via CSV. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added **Order Type** field to the **Purchase Order Header**. * The selected Order Type is now visible directly within the PO header view. * Ensures alignment with existing upload functionality using the **PoSubTypeName** field. * Enables consistent categorization of purchase orders across manual entry and upload processes. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Purchase → Purchase Order** and create a new purchase order or open an existing one. **Step 2:** In the **header section**, locate the **Order Type** field.
**Step 3:** Select the appropriate order type (e.g., Supply, Wholesale, Retail, etc.) based on your classification setup.
**Step 4:** Save the purchase order. The selected Order Type will now be displayed in the PO header and used for categorization and reporting.
**Step 5:** If creating purchase orders via upload, populate the **PoSubTypeName** field in the template with a valid order type name.
The system will map this value to the **Order Type Name** and **Order Type Code** fields of the newly created purchase order, as reflected in the **Purchase Order Centre**.
*** ### **App Config: Make Phone Number Optional for Customer** **Overview:** This enhancement introduces a new app configuration that allows users to control whether the **Main Phone** field is mandatory during customer creation and updates. It provides flexibility for scenarios where phone numbers may not always be available and is applied consistently across UI, upload (CSV), API, and B2B customer updates. *** **Configuration Details:** **App Config Name:** Make Phone Number Optional for Customer **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → General → **Make Phone Number Optional for Customer**
*** **Functionality:** **When App Config Is Enabled:** * The **Main Phone** field becomes optional during customer creation and updates. * Customer records can be saved even if the Main Phone field is left blank. **When App Config Is Disabled:** * The **Main Phone** field remains mandatory for all customer records. * The system will not allow saving a customer without a phone number. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → App Config → General** and enable the app config **“Make Phone Number Optional for Customer.”**
**Step 2:** Go to **Menu → Sales → Customer Section → Customer Centre**, then open an existing customer or create a new one.
**Step 3:** In the **Contact Info** tab, leave the **Main Phone** field blank and update the record. The system will allow the customer record to be saved successfully without a phone number.
*** ### **Addition of UOMCode Field in Item Customer Mapping Upload** **Overview:** This enhancement introduces support for UOM-based Item Customer Mapping uploads when the **Multi UOM** feature is enabled in App Module Access. A new mandatory field, **UOMCode**, is added to the upload template to ensure mappings are accurately created or updated based on the specified unit of measure. This prevents ambiguity in cases where the same item is mapped differently for a customer across multiple UOMs. *** **Key Enhancements:** * When Multi UOM is enabled, the **UOMCode** field is available and mandatory in the **Item Customer Mapping** **upload template** to uniquely identify each mapping. * The upload template dynamically changes based on configuration. If Multi UOM access is disabled, the **UOMCode** column is not included. * The system validates mappings using a unique combination of Customer, Item, and UOM. During upload, if a matching combination already exists, the existing mapping is updated; if not, a new mapping is created. * Uploaded UOM values are reflected across the system, including the Item Customer Mapping Centre, exported data, and Advanced Search filters. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Enable the **Multi UOM feature** from **App Module Access**. Once enabled, download the Item **Customer Mapping upload template**, which will now include the **UOMCode column**.
**Step 2:** Populate the template with Customer, Item, Customer Item details, and the required UOMCode for each mapping. Ensure that the UOMCode corresponds to a valid unit of measure configured in the system.
**Step 3:** Upload the completed file through the **Batch Upload Item Customer Mapping** module. **Step 4:** The system validates each row based on the Customer, Item, and UOM combination. Since no matching mapping existed, a new mapping was created in the **Item–Customer Mapping Centre**.
*** ### **Item Description Column Added in Item Vendor Mapping Centre** **Overview:** This enhancement introduces a new **Item Description** column in the **Item Vendor Mapping Centre**, allowing users to view item descriptions directly alongside vendor mapping details. This eliminates the need to navigate to the Item module for additional context and improves visibility when managing item-vendor relationships. *** **Key Enhancements:** * A new **Item Description** column is added to the **Item Vendor Mapping Centre** grid. * Displays the item’s description as defined in the Item master, reducing the need to navigate to the Item module to view item details. * Provides better visibility and context while reviewing vendor mappings. * Available within the grid view and supports standard listing behavior alongside existing fields. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Purchase → Item Vendor Mapping → Item Vendor Mapping Centre**. **Step 2:** In the **Item Vendor Mapping grid**, the **Item Description** column is available alongside existing fields such as **Item Number**, **Vendor**, **Price**, and **Discount**.
**Step 3:** The Item Description displayed in the **Item Vendor Mapping Centre** is fetched from the **Description** field in the **Primary tab** while creating the item.
*** ### **Addition of Project/Class Column in Inventory by Location** **Overview:** This enhancement introduces the **Project/Class Name** column in the Inventory by Location module, enabling users to view inventory distribution segmented by project or class directly within the grid. This eliminates the need to cross-reference project/class information from Sales Orders and Purchase Orders, improving visibility into inventory allocation across different business segments. *** **Key Enhancements:** * A new **Project/Class Name** column is added to the Inventory by Location grid, displaying the project or class associated with each inventory record. * The column value is derived from the **Project/Class** assigned at the **header level of transactions** such as **Sales Orders**, **Purchase Orders**, and **Estimates**, and is reflected in the associated inventory records. * Users can include or exclude the **Project/Class Name** column using the column visibility options. * The **Project/Class Name** field is now available in **Advanced Search**, allowing users to filter inventory records based on specific projects or classes. * Enhances traceability and reporting by providing project-level visibility of inventory across locations. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Inventory → Inventory by Location → Inventory by Location Centre**. **Step 2:** In the inventory grid, view the **Project/Class Name** column alongside existing fields such as **Item Number**, **Location**, and **Available Quantity**.
**Step 3:** You can also use **Advanced Search** to filter inventory by selecting **Project/Class Name** and applying the desired condition to refine results.
*** ### **Expiry Date Column Added in Wave Line Allocation** **Overview:** The Wave Line Allocation sub-form in the Wave Centre now displays the **Expiry Date** column whenever **LPN (License Plate Number)** is enabled, regardless of whether the **WMS module** is enabled or disabled. This enhancement improves inventory visibility during wave allocation by allowing users to view expiry information directly from the allocation details screen without depending on WMS functionality. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Displays the **Expiry Date** column in the Wave Line Allocation sub-form when LPN is enabled. * The Expiry Date column is now available even if the WMS module is disabled. * Improves visibility of inventory expiry information during wave allocation and picking. * Helps users identify and allocate inventory based on expiry details more efficiently. * Supports better inventory tracking for LPN-managed inventory. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → App Config → Warehouse** and enable the app config **"Enable LPN Tracking".** If **LPN Tracking** is enabled, only then will the **Expiry Date column** be available in the **Wave Line Allocation sub-form**.
**Step 2:** Go to: **Menu → Warehouse → Picking → Wave Centre**. Double-click on the required Wave record to open the **Wave** sub-form.
**Step 3:** In the Wave sub-form, click on the **Search** icon available under the **Action** column. This opens the **Wave Line Allocation** sub-form.
**Step 4:** The **Expiry Date** column will now be visible in the allocation grid.
*** ### **Introduced Item Category Column in the Inventory Adjustment Centre** **Overview:** The **Inventory Adjustment Centre** now includes an **Item Category** column, allowing users to view the category associated with adjusted inventory items directly from the adjustment listing screen. This enhancement improves inventory visibility and reporting by making it easier to identify and analyze inventory adjustments based on item categories without opening individual adjustment records. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added a new **Item Category** column in the Inventory Adjustment Centre grid. * Displays the category assigned to the item associated with the inventory adjustment. * Helps users quickly identify adjustments related to specific item categories. * Improves inventory analysis, filtering, and reporting at the category level. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Go to **Menu → Inventory → Inventory Adjustment Centre**. **Step 2:** The Inventory Adjustment Centre grid now displays the **Item Category** column. This column shows the category associated with the adjusted inventory item.
**Step 3:** Users can now filter adjustments based on the associated item categories directly from the Inventory Adjustment Centre using the **Advanced Search option**.
*** ### **Enhanced Short Inventory Notifications to Exclude Inactive Items from Re-Order Alerts** **Overview:** The **Short Inventory Email Notification** process has been enhanced to exclude **inactive items** from notification emails. Previously, both active and inactive items were included in short inventory notification emails, which could result in unnecessary reorder recommendations for discontinued or inactive inventory items. With this enhancement, the system now validates the item’s active status before including it in the Short Inventory Notification email. This behavior applies across all available options of the **Short Inventory Notification Trigger** configuration. *** **Configuration Details:** * **App Config Name:** Short Inventory Notification Trigger * **Location:** Menu → App Config → Inventory → Short Inventory Notification Trigger * **Type:** Multi-select Dropdown * **Available Options:** * Re-Order and Short Qty * Re-Order Point * Re-Order Inc (On PO - Short Qty)
*** **Functionality:** **When Re-Order & Short Qty Is Selected** * Select **Re-Order Point** from the available options in the *Short Inventory Notification Trigger* app configuration. * The notification email will be sent for items that have the “circle” icon added (i.e., items short by Re-Order Point), as well as items that are short even by 1 unit. *** **When Re-Order Point Is Selected** * Select **Re-Order Point** from the available options in the *Short Inventory Notification Trigger* app configuration. * The notification email includes only items that are short by Re-Order Point, i.e., items that display the circular indicator icon in the Short Inventory Planner. *** **When Re-Order Inc (On PO - Short Qty) Is Selected** * Select **Re-Order Inc (On PO - Short Qty)** from the available options in the *Short Inventory Notification Trigger* app configuration. * The notification email is triggered when the following condition is satisfied:\ **(On PO - Short Qty - ReOrder Qty) < 0** Only **active items** are considered for notification emails. **Inactive items** are automatically excluded from the notification list regardless of the **selected option** above. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → App Config → Inventory** and select the **Re-Order Point** option in the **Short Inventory Notification Trigger** app configuration. **Step 2:** Go to the **Short Inventory Planner** module and review the items marked with the circular indicator icon, which identifies items short by Re-Order Point.
**Step 3:** Trigger or wait for the Short Inventory Notification email process to run. The notification email includes only active items that are short by the Re-Order Point. Inactive items are automatically excluded from the notification list, even if they satisfy the reorder point condition. *** ### **“Manufacturer” Field Added to Item Centre Batch Update** **Overview:** The Item Centre Batch Update functionality now supports the Manufacturer field, allowing users to assign or update the manufacturer for multiple items simultaneously directly from the Item Centre. This enhancement improves operational efficiency by eliminating the need to manually open and update each item individually. It also ensures consistent manufacturer mapping across inventory items. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Allows users to update the Manufacturer field for multiple selected items in a single action. * Updated manufacturer values are reflected in the Manufacturer column in the Item Centre. * Manufacturer updates are automatically synced with the Manufacturer field under the Other Attributes tab in the Item module. * Supports filtering items using the Manufacturer field through the Advanced Search option. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Go to **Menu → Admin → Item → Item Centre** and select one or more items whose **Manufacturer value** you want to update.
**Step 2:** Click **Options → Batch Updates**.
In the **Batch Update subform**, select **Manufacturer** from the Column Name dropdown. Enter the required Manufacturer in the Value field and click **Update** to apply the selected Manufacturer to all chosen items.
**Step 3:** The updated Manufacturer value is displayed in the Manufacturer column in the **Item Centre**.
It is also reflected in the Manufacturer field under the **Other Attributes** tab of the **Create/Edit Item page.** *** ### **UPC Column Added in RMA Line and RMA Details** **Overview:** The RMA module now includes a UPC column in both the **RMA Centre (RMA Line view)** and the RMA Details section of the **Create/Edit RMA** page. This enhancement improves item identification and return tracking by allowing users to view and search RMAs using UPC values directly from the RMA screens. Additionally, the UPC value entered or fetched in the RMA Details section is now retained after saving the RMA, ensuring consistent visibility of item identification data throughout the return process. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added a UPC column in the RMA Centre when the Search By option is set to RMA Line. * Added a UPC column in the RMA Details table of the Create/Edit RMA page. * UPC values are now retained in the RMA Details section after saving the RMA. * Users can search and filter RMAs using UPC through the Advanced Search option in the RMA Centre. * Improves item traceability and simplifies return item identification during RMA processing. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Credit & Deposit → RMA** and open or create an RMA record. In the **RMA Details section**, the **UPC column** is now available for the added item lines.
**Step 2:** Go to **Menu → Sales → Credit & Deposit → RMA Centre** and select **RMA Line** from the **Search By** dropdown. The UPC column is displayed for RMA line items. If the column is not visible, users can enable it using the grid column selection icon.
**Step 3:** Users can also use the **Advanced Search option** in the **RMA Centre** and select **UPC** as the search field to filter RMA records based on UPC values.
*** ### **Enable Daily Invoice Emails alongside Ship Confirmation Emails** **Overview:** A new app configuration, **Enable Separate Invoice and Shipping Confirmation Emails**, has been introduced to allow Daily Invoice Emails and Ship Confirmation Emails to function independently. Previously, when a Ship Confirmation Email was sent for an invoice, the system automatically marked the invoice as emailed. As a result, the invoice was excluded from the Daily Invoice Email process. With this enhancement, users can now configure the system so that sending a Ship Confirmation Email does not prevent the invoice from being included in the Daily Invoice Email schedule. This ensures customers can receive both email types independently when required. *** **Configuration Details:** **App Config Name:** Enable Separate Invoice and Shipping Confirmation Emails **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → Sales → **Enable Separate Invoice and Shipping Confirmation Emails**
*** **Functionality:** **When the App Config is Enabled:** * Ship Confirmation Emails and Daily Invoice Emails work independently. * Invoices are still included in the Daily Invoice Email process even if a Ship Confirmation Email has already been sent. * Sending a Ship Confirmation Email does not update the Emailed? flag for Daily Invoice Email tracking. The **Emailed?** flag is updated only after the Daily Invoice Email is successfully sent by enabling **“Enable Daily Invoice Email”.** **When the App Config is Disabled:** * The system follows the existing combined email behavior. When a Ship Confirmation Email is sent, the invoice is marked as emailed. * Invoices that receive Ship Confirmation Emails are excluded from the Daily Invoice Email process. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → App Config → Sales** and enable the following app configs: * **“Enable Daily Invoice Email”** * **“Automatically Send Ship Confirmation Email When Invoice Is Marked As Shipped”** * **“Enable Separate Invoice and Shipping Confirmation Emails.”** **Step 2:** Go to **Menu → Sales → Invoice** and create an invoice.
**Step 3:** Click on **Options** and select **Mark As Shipped**. The system automatically sends the **Ship Confirmation Email** to the configured [**Shipment Notification email address**](/xoroerp-1/sales/customer-section/customer-portal-invitation/in-what-sequence-are-the-customer-emails-used-to-send-the-so-related-emails).
**Step 4:** In the **Invoice Centre**, the **Ship Confirmation Email Sent?** and **Ship Confirmation Email Sent At** fields track the Ship Confirmation Email activity, while the **Emailed?** column remains unmarked.
**Step 5:** Now, the **Daily Invoice Email** is sent at the time configured under the app config **“Daily Invoice Email Time.”**
**Step 6:** Once the email is successfully sent, the **Emailed?** flag in the **Invoice Centre** is updated to true.
*** ### **ASN Custom Fields Visibility Added in Item Inventory Snapshot** **Overview:** The Item Inventory Snapshot module has been enhanced to display ASN (Advanced Shipping Notice) Custom Fields within the In Receiving Details view. Previously, ASN Custom Field information configured through the Custom Field Definition module was not visible in the Item Inventory Snapshot → In the **Receiving Details** section. Users could only view ASN quantity and receiving-related information without access to the associated custom field values. With this enhancement, all configured ASN Custom Fields are now displayed directly in the In Receiving Details grid for the corresponding ASN records. This provides users with better visibility into incoming inventory details and allows important ASN-specific information to be reviewed directly from the Item Inventory Snapshot module without navigating back to the ASN Centre. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Custom Fields configured for the ASN transaction type are automatically reflected in the In Receiving Details grid of the Item Inventory Snapshot module. * Users can now review ASN Custom Field values directly while analyzing incoming inventory quantities. * Any updates made to ASN Custom Fields are automatically reflected in the Item Inventory Snapshot receiving details. * Improves visibility and traceability for incoming inventory associated with ASN records. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Custom Field Definition → Custom Field Definition Centre** and review the existing Custom Fields created for the **ASN transaction type**.
**Step 2:** If no Custom Fields are defined for the ASN transaction type, create the required Custom Fields from the **Custom Field Definition module**, such as **Text**, **Number**, **List**, **Date**, **Multi-line Text**, or **Multi-Select List**, and save the configuration. **Step 3:** Go to **Menu → Warehouse → ASN Centre**. Right-click on an ASN record and select **Update Custom Fields**.
Enter values for the configured ASN Custom Fields and save the record.
Double-click on the ASN record and select the **Custom Fields** tab to view the updated details.
**Step 4:** Navigate to **Menu → Inventory → Item Inventory Snapshot** and search for the **item** and **store** associated with the ASN.
**Step 5:** Click on the **In Receiving** quantity for the item to open the **In Receiving Details** view.
**Step 6:** The system displays the ASN records associated with the item, along with all **configured ASN Custom Field columns** and values in the **In Receiving Details grid**.
*** ### **Introduced Default Discount Account Configuration in Bill Payment Page Defaults** **Overview:** The Bill Payment module has been enhanced to support configuring a **default Discount Account** through the **Page Defaults** settings. Previously, users were required to manually select the Discount Account each time a discount was applied to a bill payment. With this enhancement, users can now configure a default Discount Account directly from the Bill Payment Page Defaults configuration. Once configured, the selected Discount Account is automatically populated in the Add Discount pop-up while applying discounts to bills. This helps streamline the bill payment process, improves consistency, and reduces repetitive manual selection. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added a new Discount Account field in the Bill Payment Page Defaults configuration. * The configured Discount Account is automatically populated in the Add Discount pop-up during bill payment processing. * Eliminates the need to manually select the Discount Account each time a discount is applied. * Helps maintain consistency in discount accounting entries. * Improves efficiency and reduces manual errors during bill payment processing. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Purchase → Payment → Bill Payment** and open the **Bill Payment** module. **Step 2:** Click on the **vertical ellipsis (⋮)** in the top-right corner of the page and select **Page Defaults**.
**Step 3:** A **Default Configuration pop-up** opens. Select the required **Discount Account** in the Discount Account field and click Save.
**Step 4:** Click on the value under the **Discount column** for a bill record. The **Discount Account** field in the **Add Discount pop-up** is automatically populated with the configured value from the **Page Defaults**.
**Step 5:** Enter or update the **Discount Account** as required and click **Apply Discount** to apply the discount to the bill payment.
*** ### **Efficient Bulk Removal of Item Customer Mappings** **Overview:** Users can now delete multiple item customer mappings simultaneously from the **Item Customer Mapping Centre** using the newly added **Batch Delete** functionality. Earlier, mappings could only be removed individually, which made cleanup and maintenance difficult when working with large datasets. This enhancement streamlines the management of outdated, duplicate, or incorrect item customer mappings and improves overall database maintenance efficiency. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added a **Batch Delete** option under the **Options** menu. * Enabled multi-record selection using checkboxes in the Item Customer Mapping Centre. * Reduced manual effort by allowing multiple mappings to be deleted in a single action. * Improved the cleanup and maintenance of item customer mapping records. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Item Customer Mapping → Item Customer Mapping Centre**. **Step 2:** Select the required item customer mapping records using the checkboxes available against each record.
**Step 3:** Click on the **Options** button and select **Batch Delete**.
**Step 4:** Confirm the deletion action to remove the selected item's customer mapping records from the system.
# April 2.0 {% hint style="info" %} This is a Custom Release. Feature availability depends on configuration and rollout status. Some features listed above may not be visible in your environment if they are part of a staged or custom deployment. Please contact your support representative to confirm enablement. {% endhint %} ### 3PL Billing Enhancement: Multiple Date Support for Storage Charge Calculation **Overview** A new enhancement has been introduced in the **3PL Billing workflow** to improve flexibility in calculating and invoicing storage charges. Users can now select **multiple dates for storage charge calculation**, allowing more precise billing based on specific storage periods. Additionally, a **page default setting** has been added to allow users to choose whether **storage charges should be included automatically when generating a 3PL invoice**. *** **Functionality** The following improvements have been implemented for **3PL storage charge management**: * Users can now **select multiple dates** when calculating **storage charges** for a 3PL account. * Storage charges will be **generated based on the selected dates**, enabling more accurate billing for storage periods. * A new **Page Default setting** has been added that allows users to **automatically include storage charges while generating a 3PL invoice**. This enhancement provides greater control over **when and how storage charges are calculated and invoiced**. *** **How to Use:** 1. Navigate to the **3PL Storage Charge calculation page**. 2. Select the **3PL account** for which storage charges need to be generated. 3. Choose **multiple dates** for which storage charges should be calculated. 4. Run the calculation process to generate storage charges based on the selected dates. To include storage charges during invoice generation: 1. Open the **Page Default settings** for the **3PL Invoice page**. 2. Enable the option to **include storage charges during invoice generation**. 3. When creating a **3PL Invoice**, the system will include the applicable storage charges automatically.
***
**Impact:** This enhancement improves the **3PL billing process** by: * Allowing **more flexible storage charge calculations** * Supporting **billing for multiple storage periods** * Reducing manual effort when **including storage charges in 3PL invoices** * Improving accuracy and efficiency in **3PL billing operations**. *** ### **Task Assignment Behavior Enhancement in Carton Break Rule** **Overview** This enhancement improves how tasks are generated during wave processing by introducing better control over task grouping in the **Carton Break Rule**. Previously, waiting-for-replenishment lines and each-pick lines were assigned separate task IDs, which could lead to fragmented picking operations and reduced efficiency. With this update, users can now combine these related activities into a single task for more streamlined execution. *** **Key Enhancements** * Added a new option in the **Task Assignment Behavior** dropdown: **“Combine Replen and Each Pick Lines.”** * This option allows grouping of **waiting-for-replenishment lines** and **each-pick lines**, and generates a **single Task ID** for both line types. *** **How to Use:** **Step 1:** Navigate to the **Carton Break Rule** module, create a rule, and select **“Combine Replen and Each Pick Lines”** in the **Task Assignment Behavior** field.
**Step 2:** Create a Sales Order and auto-generate a wave using this rule. **Step 3:** Once the wave is created, open the wave lines for each item individually by clicking on the **search icon** under the **Action** column. **Step 4:** Observe the **Task ID** for the first item in the **Wave Line Allocation** subform. **Step 5:** Now, view the **Wave Line Allocation** details for the second item. You will observe that both **waiting-for-replenishment lines** and **each-pick lines** are assigned the **same Task ID**. {% hint style="info" %} * This behavior applies only when the configuration is enabled * It is recommended to validate the workflow based on warehouse operations before enabling it in production {% endhint %} *** ### **Shipping Notes & VAS Instructions Popup on Packing Page** A new enhancement has been introduced in the **WMS Packing page** to improve visibility and execution of special packing instructions. #### **What’s New** A **popup message** is now displayed on the packing screen to highlight: * **Shipping Note**
* **VAS (Value-Added Services) Instructions**
This ensures that packers can clearly view and act on important order-specific instructions during the packing process. *** #### **Why This Matters** This feature helps reduce errors and ensures that all special requirements are followed before shipment. It provides better control and visibility for warehouse operations, especially for orders requiring additional handling or validation. *** #### **Key Use Cases** * **Add additional items or marketing materials**\ Ensure promotional inserts or special items are included during packing * **Record packing process**\ Instructions such as filming or documenting packing can be followed * **Fraud detection and order validation**\ Based on order tags from external systems (e.g., Signifyd): * Orders with tag like *“signifyd declined”* can be identified and put on hold * Orders with tags like *“signifyd approved”, “PayPal Eligible”, “Klarna”, or “Sezzle”* can be processed for shipment * Supports future tags added during approval workflows (existing tags remain unchanged) * **Region-based handling (e.g., EU shipments)**\ Orders with destinations in specific regions (such as EU countries) can be flagged for review and held for customer confirmation *** #### **Additional Control** * Packers can take action directly based on the instructions shown * Orders can be **moved to Hold** if conditions are not met or require verification *** ### **Support for Staging Area in ‘Allow Modification of Not Available Qty’ Configuration** A new enhancement has been added to the **Allow modification of ‘Not Available’ Qty** App Config setting. #### **What’s New** The **Staging Area** location type is now available as an option in the configuration dropdown. When selected, users can modify the **Not Available Qty** for inventory stored in locations categorized as **Staging Area** through the **Inventory by Location** module.
*** **How It Works:** Previously, quantity modification was limited to the selected location types configured in the setting. With this enhancement, users can now include **Staging Area** locations as part of the allowed location types. This enables greater flexibility when managing inventory that has already been staged for packing, shipment, or temporary holding. *** **Use Case** If inventory has been moved to a staging location during picking or packing, users can now directly adjust the **Not Available Qty** for those items from the **Inventory by Location** screen, provided the **Staging Area** option is enabled in App Config. *** ### **Enhancement: Support for Multiple OLPN Palletization** A new enhancement has been added to the palletization process in WMS, allowing users to palletize **multiple OLPNs (Outbound License Plate Numbers)** onto a single pallet. *** **Overview** Previously, palletization could only be performed **one OLPN at a time**, requiring users to repeat the process for each individual OLPN. With this enhancement, users can now: * Select and palletize multiple OLPNs together * Assign multiple outbound containers to the same pallet in a single operation * Reduce repetitive scanning and processing steps *** **How It Works:** During palletization, users can now scan or select multiple eligible OLPNs and associate them with a single pallet. The system automatically groups the selected OLPNs under the pallet, making them easier to track, move, and ship as a consolidated unit. *** **Use Case** A shipment contains multiple cartons, each represented by a separate OLPN. **Previously:** * Each OLPN had to be palletized individually * Multiple palletization actions were required **Now:** * Multiple OLPNs can be palletized together in a single workflow * The entire shipment can be prepared more efficiently *** ### **Arrival Pallet Count Added to Misc Charge Conditions** A new field called **Arrival Pallet Count** has been added to the **Misc Charge Conditions** section within the **3PL Contract** configuration. *** **Overview** Users can now configure miscellaneous charges based on the **number of pallets received during inbound operations**. The newly added **Arrival Pallet Count** field can be used as a charge condition when defining billing rules in a 3PL contract.
*** **How It Works:** When setting up a Misc Charge Condition, users can select **Arrival Pallet Count** as the criteria for applying a charge. This allows the system to evaluate the number of pallets received and apply charges according to the contract rules defined for that condition. **Example Use Case** A warehouse charges customers based on the number of pallets received during an inbound shipment. With the **Arrival Pallet Count** condition: * Charges can be automatically applied based on pallet quantities received * Billing calculations are handled according to the configured 3PL contract rules *** ### **Reason Code Added to Inventory Write-Off Process** A new enhancement has been introduced in the **Inventory by Location** module to improve inventory adjustment tracking and auditability. *** **Overview** Users can now select a **Reason Code** when performing an inventory write-off from the **Inventory by Location** module. The **Reason Code** field has been added to the **Write-Off Inventory** popup and is available for both: * Single-line write-offs (via right-click action) * Batch write-offs (multiple records)
*** **How It Works:** When initiating a write-off from the Inventory by Location screen: 1. Select the inventory record(s) 2. Right-click and choose **Write-Off Inventory** 3. In the write-off popup, select the appropriate **Reason Code** 4. Complete and save the write-off transaction The selected reason is stored along with the inventory adjustment, providing additional context for the write-off. *** ### **LPN Splitting Based on Item Master Case Quantity Now Supports Assembly Operations** The existing **LPN Splitting Based on Item Master Case Quantity** configuration has been enhanced to provide greater flexibility across warehouse and manufacturing workflows. *** **Overview** Previously, this configuration was available as a simple **Yes/No toggle** and applied only during the **Packing** process. The configuration has now been updated to a **multi-select option**, allowing users to choose where automatic LPN splitting should be applied. Available options: * **Packing** * **Assembly** Users can enable LPN splitting for: * Packing only * Assembly only * Both Packing and Assembly
*** **Assembly-Based LPN Splitting** A new capability has been added to support the automatic creation of LPNs during **Manufacturing Order (MO) production**. When **Assembly** is selected in the configuration: * The system checks the **Item Master Case Quantity** of the manufactured item * If a case quantity is defined: * The produced quantity is automatically divided into multiple LPNs * LPN creation is based on the configured case quantity * If no case quantity is defined: * The system follows the standard behavior and creates a single LPN for the produced quantity *** **Example** If a manufactured item has: * Case Quantity = 25 * Produced Quantity = 100 The system automatically creates: * 4 LPNs * Each containing 25 units This eliminates the need for manual LPN splitting after production. *** #### **Special Handling for “To Be Produced OLPN#”** A special exception has been introduced for production workflows that provide a **To-Be-Produced OLPN#** value. When: * Assembly-based LPN splitting is enabled, and * A To Be Produced OLPN# is supplied The system prioritizes the provided OLPN. As a result: * Automatic LPN splitting is skipped * The entire produced quantity is generated under the specified OLPN This allows users to maintain complete control when a specific output container is required during production. *** ### **Print Requester Confirmation Popup Configuration** A new enhancement has been introduced to improve print request tracking and ensure users explicitly select a print requester before performing receiving or packing operations. *** **Overview** A new configuration called **Enable Print Requester Popup in WMS** has been added under: **ERP → App Config → WMS** When enabled, users are prompted to select a **Print Requester** immediately upon opening supported WMS pages. This ensures that print jobs generated during warehouse operations are associated with the appropriate requester.
*** **Supported Pages** The Print Requester confirmation popup is available on the following WMS pages: **Receiving** * Receive By Item * Receive By UCC * Receive Mixed Carton **Packing** * Packing *** **How It Works:** When a user navigates to one of the supported pages: 1. The **Print Requester popup** automatically appears on page load 2. The user must either: * Select a Print Requester, or * Explicitly choose an empty value (if permitted by the setup) 3. The selection must be confirmed before proceeding The popup cannot be dismissed without making a selection. *** **Mandatory Selection Behavior** To ensure proper print requester assignment: * The popup does not contain a **Cancel** button * The popup cannot be closed using a close icon * Users must make a selection before accessing the page functionality This prevents warehouse operations from proceeding without a defined print requester context. *** #### **Dependency on Xoro Print Services** The Print Requester configuration is only available when: * **Xoro Print Services** is enabled in **ERP App Config** If Xoro Print Services is disabled: * The Print Requester setting is hidden * The popup will not appear on WMS pages *** #### **Configuration Changes** As part of this enhancement, the configuration location has been updated. **Previously** The page and module selection options were managed through: **WMS User Settings** **Now** These options have been moved to: **ERP → App Config → WMS → Enable Print Requester Popup in WMS** This centralizes configuration management and allows administrators to control popup behavior at the application level rather than on individual user settings. *** **User Impact** Users accessing supported receiving and packing pages will now be required to confirm a Print Requester before continuing. This ensures accurate print tracking and a more controlled printing process throughout warehouse operations. *** ### **LPN Printing After Manufacturing Order Assembly** A new enhancement has been added to WMS to support **automatic LPN printing after Manufacturing Order assembly operations**. *** **Overview** Users can now print **LPN (License Plate Number) labels** immediately after a Manufacturing Order is assembled in WMS. This enhancement streamlines the post-assembly workflow by allowing warehouse users to generate LPN labels directly after production completion, improving inventory tracking and handling efficiency.
*** **How It Works:** During the Manufacturing Order assembly process: 1. The Manufacturing Order is completed in WMS 2. LPNs are generated for the produced inventory 3. Users can now directly print the generated LPN labels after assembly
This helps ensure that the produced inventory is properly labeled and ready for: * Putaway * Inventory movement * Staging * Shipping or downstream warehouse operations *** **Use Case** After assembling finished goods through a Manufacturing Order, warehouse users can immediately print and attach LPN labels to the produced inventory, ensuring the items are ready for the next warehouse operation without additional manual processing. *** ### **Create Batch MO Option in MO Centre** A new option, Create Batch MO, has been added to the **MO Centre**, allowing users to group multiple Manufacturing Orders (MOs) into a single Batch MO for streamlined processing and warehouse operations. *** **Overview** Users can now select multiple Manufacturing Orders and create a Batch MO directly from the MO Centre. This enhancement simplifies production handling and improves operational efficiency when multiple related MOs need to be processed together.
*** **Validation Rules** The system performs the following validations while creating a Batch MO: * Selected MOs must be in: * **Open**, or * **Released** status * All selected MOs must belong to the **same store** * An error message is displayed if: * One or more selected MOs are already assigned to another Batch MO * An informational message is shown if: * The selected MOs have different Schedule Dates *** ### **Pick By Batch MO Option in Pick Module** A new toggle, Pick By Batch MO, has been added to the **Pick module in WMS** to support grouped picking for Batch Manufacturing Orders. *** **What’s New** When the **Pick By Batch MO** option is enabled: * The system displays a **single grouped row** for each Batch MO * Users can pick all related tasks together from one consolidated view
*** **How It Works:** When a Batch MO record is selected: * All associated pick tasks * Across all related waves are automatically selected by the system. This eliminates the need to manually select pick tasks individually for each Manufacturing Order. *** #### **Important Behavior** * Users cannot enable: * **Pick By Wave**, and * **Pick By Batch MO** simultaneously. Only one picking mode can be used at a time to ensure workflow consistency. *** #### **User Impact** Warehouse users can now process picking activities more efficiently by handling all pick tasks related to a Batch MO together, improving productivity and simplifying manufacturing fulfillment workflows. *** ### MO Wave Picking Enhancement: Missing Item/LPN Handling with Quantity Edit, Revert, and Substitution Validation **Overview** An enhancement has been introduced in the **MO Wave Picking workflow** to enable the **Missing Item and LPN handling process**, which was previously restricted during picking operations. This update improves flexibility during warehouse picking by allowing operators to handle missing items more efficiently while maintaining system validation controls. *** **Functionality** The following improvements have been implemented in the **MO Wave Picking process**: * The **Missing Item/LPN flow**, which was previously blocked, is now enabled during the **MO Wave picking process**. * Support for **Revert Quantity** has been introduced, allowing users to reverse previously processed quantities when necessary. * Support for **Edit Quantity** has also been enabled, allowing adjustments to picked quantities during the workflow. Additionally, validation has been added to ensure proper substitution handling. **Important Validation** If sufficient quantity is not available for substitution while marking an item as **Missing**, the system will: * Display an **error message** * Prevent the action from being completed This ensures inventory accuracy and prevents invalid substitutions. *** **How to Use:** 1. Navigate to the **MO Wave Picking process**. 2. During picking, if an item or LPN cannot be located, select the **Missing Item option**. 3. If substitution inventory is available, the system will allow the process to continue. 4. If the substitution quantity is **not available**, the system will display an error and prevent the action. 5. If needed, users can also: * Use **Revert Qty** to undo a previously processed quantity. * Use **Edit Qty** to adjust the picked quantity during the workflow. # May 2026 Release {% hint style="info" %} This is a Custom Release. Feature availability depends on configuration and rollout status. Some features listed above may not be visible in your environment if they are part of a staged or custom deployment. Please contact your support representative to confirm enablement. {% endhint %} ### **Implemented serial number tracking in the RMA flow** **Overview:** Previously, if a serial number was used for an item in an Invoice transaction, the same serial number could not be reused for the same item, even after the item was returned through the RMA process. With this enhancement, the system now allows serial numbers to be reused once the return process is completed and the inventory is officially added back into stock through either: * The **New RMA Process** (when the **"Use RMA ASN Process"** app configuration is enabled), or * The **Old RMA Process** (when the **"Use RMA ASN Process"** app configuration is disabled) This ensures accurate serial number lifecycle tracking while still allowing returned inventory to be sold again. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added serial number tracking validation within the RMA flow. * Allowed serial number reuse after inventory is returned to stock through the RMA process. * Restricted reuse of the same serial number if only the RMA is created and no corresponding Credit Memo has been generated yet. * Added serial number entry validation while closing the Return ASN generated from the RMA process for serial-tracked items. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Item → Item Centre** and view the items for which the **Track by Serial Number** toggle is enabled in the **Other Attributes** tab.
**Step 2:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Invoice → Create Invoice** and create an Invoice for the viewed serial-tracked items.
Since the **Track by Serial Number** toggle is enabled for the items, the system automatically displays the **Add Serial Number** pop-up while saving the Invoice. **Step 3:** Enter the serial numbers for the items added and click **Save**.
**Step 4:** Save the Invoice. Go to **Options** and click **Create RMA**. If the [**RMA ASN Process** configuration is enabled](/xoroerp-1/sales/credit-and-deposit/what-is-return-merchandise-authorisation-rma/the-rma-process), the system follows the **New RMA ASN Process**. **Step 5:** After the generated RMA is marked as **Approved**, create the ASN and receive the items in the ASN. When the user clicks **Close ASN**, the system displays the **Add Serial Number** pop-up for serial-tracked items. **Step 6:** Enter the serial numbers for the items being returned and click **Save**.
Once the **Return ASN is successfully closed** and the **Credit Memo** is created, the returned serial numbers are added back into inventory and become available for reuse in future Invoice transactions. *** ### **Ship Carton Detail to Invoice Item Line Custom Field Mapping** **Overview:** Added support for custom field mapping from **Ship Carton Detail** to **Invoice Item Line**. The enhancement also introduces support for passing **Wave Detail custom fields** through **Create Wave APIs** and **Upload Create Wave**, along with support for **Ship Carton Detail** custom fields through **Ship By Wave API** and **Upload Wave** processes. The system now supports automatic propagation of custom field values from **Ship Carton Details** to **Invoice Item Lines** based on the configured **Custom Field Mapping**. Priority handling has also been implemented to determine whether custom field values should be fetched from **Wave Details** or from the **Upload Wave / Ship By Wave** inputs. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added support for **Wave Detail custom fields** in **Create Wave API** and **Upload Create Wave**. * Added support for **Ship Carton Detail custom fields** in **Ship By Wave API** and **Upload Wave**. * Implemented priority handling for custom field values during shipment creation. * If **Ship Carton Detail** custom fields are provided during **Upload Wave** or **Ship By Wave API**, the system gives priority to those values. * If **Ship Carton Detail** custom fields are not provided during shipment creation, the system fetches custom field values from the **Wave Details**. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Custom Field Mapping** and create a **Custom Field Mapping** from **Ship Carton Detail** to **Invoice Item Line**. **Step 2:** Add the required **custom field mapping lines** and save the mapping.
**Step 3:** Now, go to **Menu → Sales → Sales Order** and create a Sales Order.
**Step 4:** Release the Sales Order. Click **Options** and select **Create Wave-Auto → Allocate What's Available**.
**Step 5:** Navigate to **Menu → Utilities → Data Imports → Upload Waves** and download the Wave template.
**Step 6:** Enter the **Wave Number**, **Order Number**, **Item Number**, **quantity**, and the required **Wave Detail** **custom field** values in the template file, and upload the file.
**Step 7:** Upload the **CSV** file and select the **"Pick, close and ship order"** option in the Upload Wave pop-up.
**Step 8:** Open the **Sales Order** and go to the **History** tab. Open the generated Invoice from the transaction history and view the custom field values that are displayed for the item in the **Invoice Details** section.
**Step 9:** To view the **Ship Carton Detail custom field** values, go to the **Shipping** tab of the **Invoice** and click on the **Shipment Info** option.
The **Prepare Shipment** page opens. Click the **Add icon** next to the carton details to expand the **item details section**, where the **mapped custom field values** are displayed against the item.
This verifies the custom field mapping from Ship Carton Detail to Invoice Item Line. *** ### **Added a New “Description” Field in the HS Code Module** **Overview:** The HS Code module now includes a new **Description** field. This description is displayed as subtext in the **HS Code dropdown** within the Item module, making it easier for users to identify and select the correct HS Code during item setup. This enhancement improves HS Code visibility and usability by providing additional context alongside the HS Code name. {% hint style="info" %} HS Code (Harmonized System Code) is an internationally standardized numerical code used to classify traded goods for customs and international trade. {% endhint %} *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added a new **Description** field in the HS Code module. * HS Code descriptions are now displayed as subtext in the HS Code dropdown in the Item module. * Improves the identification and selection of HS Codes during item creation and updates. * Helps reduce errors caused by selecting incorrect or similar HS Codes. * Enhances overall usability for international trade and customs classification management. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Go to: **Menu → Admin → Item → HS Code** and create a **new HS Code** or update an existing one by modifying the **Name**, **Description**, and **Is Active?** values.
**Step 2:** To create a new HS Code, enter the required details in the **Name** field and the newly added **Description** field, then click on the **Add** button.
**Step 3:** The HS Code, along with its Name and **Description**, will now be saved in the system and displayed in the HS Code grid.
**Step 4:** Go to the **Item Centre** and open the required Item record. Navigate to the **“Other Attributes”** tab to view the **HS Code** field.
**Step 5:** Open the **HS Code** dropdown field. The system displays the **HS Code Name** along with the configured **Description** as subtext in the dropdown selection list.
This helps users quickly identify and select the appropriate **HS Code** while configuring items. *** ### **Introduced Quick Create Options for Materials and HS Codes in Item Dropdowns** **Overview:** The Item module now includes **Add New Material** and **Add New HS Code** options directly within their respective dropdown fields in the **Other Attributes** tab. This enhancement allows users to quickly create new Material and HS Code records without manually navigating to their respective modules. Once created, the newly added record is automatically available for selection in the dropdown list. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added **Add New Material** option in the Material dropdown. * Added the **Add New HS Code** option in the HS Code dropdown. * Users can directly navigate to the respective module from the Item screen. * Newly created records are automatically added to the dropdown list. * Reduces navigation effort and speeds up item configuration. * Improves user experience while creating or updating item attributes. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Go to the **Item Centre** and open the required Item record.
**Step 2:** Navigate to the **Other Attributes** tab and open the **Material** dropdown field. The dropdown now includes an **Add New Material** option.
**Step 3:** Click on **Add New Material**. The system redirects the user to the **Material** module, where a new Material record can be created.
**Step 4:** Create and save the new Material record. Once **saved**, the newly created Material is automatically added to the **Material dropdown** **list** in the Item module.
**Step 5:** Similarly, open the **HS Code** dropdown field. The dropdown now includes an **Add New HS Code** option.
**Step 6:** Click on **Add New HS Code**. The system redirects the user to the **HS Code** module, where a new HS Code record can be created.
**Step 7:** Once added, the newly created **HS Code** is automatically added to the HS Code dropdown list in the Item module.
*** ### **Enabled Clickable Sales Order Links in the Create MO Screen and MO Subform** **Overview:** The Sales Order number linked to a Manufacturing Order is now clickable within both the **Manufacturing Order subform** and the **Create Manufacturing Order screen**. This enhancement improves navigation between manufacturing and sales workflows by allowing users to directly open the associated Sales Order record from the **Linked Orders** tab. Users can now quickly review customer details, order quantities, shipping information, and linked order data without manually searching for the Sales Order separately. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Enabled **clickable Sales Order links** in the **Linked Orders tab** of the **Manufacturing Order subform**. * Enabled **clickable Sales Order links** within the **Create Manufacturing Order screen**. * Users can open the associated Sales Order directly by clicking on the **Sales Order Number**. * Reduced manual search effort while reviewing linked transactions. * Simplified traceability between production orders and customer sales orders. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Go to: **Menu → Sales → Sales Order** and open the required Sales Order record. **Step 2:** Navigate to the **Linked Orders tab** and open the **Manufacturing Order sub-tab**. The linked Manufacturing Order(s) will be displayed in the grid.
**Step 3:** Click on the **MO# link** to open the **Manufacturing Order subform**.
**Step 4:** Inside the **Manufacturing Order subform**, navigate to the **Linked Orders tab** and open the **Sales Order sub-tab**. The **linked Sales Order Number** is now displayed as a **clickable link**.
**Step 5:** Click on the SO Number to directly open the **Sales Order subform**.
**Step 6:** Similarly, when creating or opening a Manufacturing Order from the **Create Manufacturing Order screen**, users can navigate to the **Linked Orders tab** and click on the linked **Sales Order Number** to directly open the associated Sales Order record.
*** ### **Generate Duplicate Warehouse Credit Memos Using the “Create Duplicate” Option** **Overview:** A new **Create Duplicate** option has been introduced in the **Credit Memo module** to simplify the process of recreating existing **Warehouse-type Credit Memos**. Users can now quickly generate a **duplicate Credit Memo** directly from the original transaction without manually re-entering customer details, item lines, quantities, return information, and other transaction data. *** **Key Enhancements** * Introduced a **Create Duplicate** option in the Credit Memo module. * The option is available only when the Credit Memo Return Type is set to **Warehouse**. * Inventory transactions are also created for the duplicated Credit Memo and reflected in the Inventory Change Log. * The system displays confirmation and success messages during the duplication process for better user visibility. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Go to **Menu → Sales → Credit & Deposit → Credit Memo** and create a Credit Memo with the **Warehouse** Return Type. **Step 2:** Click on the **Options** menu and select the **Create Duplicate** option.
**Step 3:** A confirmation popup will appear asking the user to confirm the duplication process. Click on **OK** to continue.
**Step 4:** The system creates a **new Credit Memo** by duplicating the original Warehouse Credit Memo transaction, and a success message is displayed showing the **newly generated Credit Memo Number**.
**Step 5:** Inventory movements created from the duplicated Credit Memo are automatically recorded in the **Inventory Change Log** for inventory tracking and audit purposes.
{% hint style="info" %} The **Create Duplicate** option is available only for **Warehouse-type Credit Memos**. The option is not available for **Direct Return Type Credit Memos.** {% endhint %} *** ### **Enhanced Batch Write-Off Control for Unavailable Inventory** **Overview:** A new enhancement has been added to the **Batch Write-Off Not Available Inventory** function in the **Inventory by Location** module. Users can now select a custom **Reason Code** while performing batch write-offs of unavailable inventory instead of the system automatically assigning the default reason code. This enhancement helps businesses better classify inventory adjustments and differentiate actual damaged inventory from other write-off scenarios. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added a **Reason Code** dropdown in the **Batch Write-Off Not Available Inventory** confirmation window. * Users can now select the required adjustment reason code before completing the batch write-off process. * The selected reason code is automatically applied to the generated **Inventory Adjustment** record. * Eliminates dependency on the default reason code for all batch write-off transactions. * Improves inventory tracking, reporting accuracy, and audit visibility for write-off activities. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Go to **Menu → Inventory → Inventory by Location** and select one or multiple inventory records with a **Not Available** quantity.
**Step 2:** Click on the **Options** menu and choose **Batch Write Off Not Available Inventory**.
**Step 3:** A confirmation pop-up will appear. In the pop-up, select the required **Reason Code** from the dropdown list.
**Step 4:** Select the required **Adjustment Account** and click on **OK** to continue.
**Step 5:** Go to the **Inventory Change Log** module to view the Inventory Adjustment transaction created by the system for the selected inventory quantities based on the selected **Reason Code**.
*** ### **Enhanced Page Default Controls in Create Customer Module** **Overview:** Added the **“Set as Default (Bill To Address)”** and **“Set as Default (Ship To Address)”** options in the **Page Defaults** of the **Create Customer module**. These options allow users to control the default behaviour of the **“Set as Default”** checkbox available inside the **Bill To Address** and **Ship To Address** **pop-ups** while creating or editing customer addresses. *** **Key Enhancements:** * The configured settings now control the default state of the **“Set as Default”** option inside the **Bill To Address** and **Ship To Address pop-ups**. * When the **Set as Default (Bill To Address)** and **Set as Default (Ship To Address)** options are enabled in **Page Defaults**, newly added addresses are automatically marked as default. * When these options are disabled, the **“Set as Default”** option remains unchecked by default. * Functionality is supported in both the **Create Customer** and **Edit Customer modules**. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Go to: **Menu → Sales → Customer Section → Create Customer**. Click on the **Vertical Ellipsis (⋮)** and select the **Page Defaults** option.
**Step 2:** The **Default Configuration** pop-up opens. Enable the **Set as Default (Bill To Address)** and **Set as Default (Ship To Address)** options based on your requirements.
**Step 3:** Click on the **Save** button to save the Page Default configuration. Then create a new customer or edit an existing customer. **Step 4:** Go to the **Customer Centre** and open an existing customer record.
**Step 5:** Navigate to the **Contact Info** tab and open the **Address Info** section. While creating a new address or editing an existing address: * If the **Set as Default (Bill To Address)** option is enabled in Page Defaults, the **“Set as Default”** checkbox on the Bill To Address pop-up is automatically selected.
* If the **Set as Default (Ship To Address)** option is enabled in Page Defaults, the **“Set as Default”** toggle on the Ship To Address pop-up is automatically enabled.
**Step 6:** If these options are disabled in Page Defaults, the “Set as Default” option remains unchecked by default in both address pop-ups. *** ### **Batch Update Support Added for Customer Custom Fields** **Overview:** Added support for batch updating **Customer Custom Fields** directly from the **Customer Centre** using the **Batch Update functionality**. Previously, users were unable to update Custom Field values for multiple customers simultaneously and had to manually open and update each customer record individually. With this enhancement, all supported **Customer Custom Fields** are now available within the **Batch Update pop-up** in the Customer Centre. This improves efficiency and simplifies bulk maintenance of customer-specific custom field information. *** **Key Enhancements:** * **Customer Custom Fields** are now supported in the **Batch Update functionality** of the **Customer Centre**. * Supported Custom Field types, such as **Text**, **Number**, **List**, **Date**, **Multi-Line Text,** and **Multi-Select List**, are available in the Column Name dropdown during **batch update**. * Users can batch update Custom Field values for multiple customer records simultaneously. * Updated Custom Field values are automatically reflected in the Customer Centre grid and customer records. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Customer Section → Customer Centre** and select one or multiple customer records.
**Step 2:** Click on the **Options** menu and select the **Batch Update** option.
**Step 3:** The **Batch Update** pop-up opens. In the Column Name dropdown, the supported Customer Custom Fields are available for selection.
**Step 4:** Based on the selected Custom Field type, enter or select the required value in the **Value** field.
**Step 5:** Click on the **Update** button to apply the selected Custom Field value to all selected customer records and verify the updated values in the **Customer Centre** grid.
*** ### **Synchronized Active Status Between Products and Variants** **Overview:** Enhanced the Product and Item validation logic to synchronize the active status between products and variants across UI, bulk upload, and API operations. Previously, users could activate product variants even when the associated base product was inactive, creating inconsistencies between product and variant statuses. With this enhancement, when a base product is marked as inactive, all associated variants are automatically marked inactive, and the system prevents variants from being activated independently until the base product is reactivated. Additionally, during bulk uploads, the system now evaluates the Active Flag of variant records and updates the corresponding product status accordingly. *** **Key Enhancements:** * When a **base product** is marked as **inactive**, **all associated variants** are automatically marked as **inactive**. * The system prevents users from activating a variant if its base product is inactive. * Validation is now supported across **UI**, **Bulk Upload**, and **API** processes. * A validation message is displayed when attempting to activate a variant whose base product is inactive. * During **bulk uploads**, if any variant record for a product contains the **ActiveFlag** value as **“Y”**, the corresponding base product is automatically marked as **active**. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Product → Product Centre** and select an active product.
**Step 2:** Right-click on the product and select the **"Show Variants"** option to view the generated variants.
**Step 3:** The **Item Centre** opens, where all associated variant items can be seen in **Active status**, similar to the **base product**.
**Step 4:** In the **Product Centre**, mark the base product as inactive. To do this, click on the **Options** menu and select **Batch Updates**. In the Column Name field, select **Is Active**, **uncheck the Yes** **checkbox** in the **Value** field, and **update** the record.
**Step 5:** The system automatically marks all associated variants as inactive in the **Item Centre**.
**Step 6:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin →Item → Item Centre** and open one of the inactive variant items.
**Step 7:** Attempt to enable the **Active toggle** for the variant item and save the record. **Step 8:** The system displays the validation message: *“Variant cannot be marked Active because its base product is In-Active.”*
*** ### **Improved Vendor Info Visibility and Communication Tracking** **Overview:** Enhanced the Vendor Info module by adding a dedicated Comment section, ACH bank transfer indicator, and Memo column in the Transactions tab. These enhancements provide better visibility into vendor communication history, payment configuration, and transaction-level notes directly within the Vendor Info page. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added a Comment section in the Vendor Info module for managing vendor-related discussions. * Users can now upload and view attachments within the Comment section. * Added the **“Is Bank Transfer Type ACH?”** field in Vendor Info to indicate whether the vendor uses **ACH bank transfer**. * Added a new **“Memo”** column in the **Transactions** tab to display transaction-related remarks and notes. * Added support to include the Memo column in exported transaction reports from the Vendor Info module. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Purchase → Vendor Section → Vendor** **Info** and search for the required vendor. **Step 2:** Open the vendor record. The system displays the newly added **Comment section** in the Vendor Info module.
**Step 3:** Click on the Comment section to view existing vendor comments, add new comments, and upload/view attachments related to the vendor.
**Step 4:** The system also displays the newly added field: **“Is Bank Transfer Type ACH?”** in the header section of the **Vendor Info**.
**Step 5:** Go to the **Transactions** tab and enable the **Memo** column from the Columns option if it is hidden. The system displays transaction-related memo details in the Memo column for the corresponding transactions.
*** ### **Streamlined Batch MO Creation in Manufacturing Centre** **Overview:** Enhanced the **Manufacturing Order (MO) Centre** by adding the **“Create Batch MO”** option under the **Options** menu. This enhancement allows users to create a Batch Manufacturing Order from multiple existing MOs directly within the MO Centre, improving bulk production planning and batch-level manufacturing management. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added the **“Create Batch MO”** option in the Manufacturing Order Centre. * Users can now create a Batch MO using multiple selected Manufacturing Orders. * Added validation to allow Batch MO creation only for MOs in **Open** or **Released** status. * Added validation to ensure all selected MOs belong to the same store. * Added validation to prevent MOs already **linked to an** **existing Batch MO** from being selected again. * Added an informational message when selected MOs have different Schedule Dates. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Manufacturing → Manufacturing Order Centre** and select multiple Manufacturing Orders from the grid.
**Step 2:** Click on the **Options** menu and select **“Create Batch MO”**.
Step 3: The system validates the selected Manufacturing Orders before creating the Batch MO. **Step 4:** The system allows Batch MO creation only when: * All selected MOs are in Open or Released status. * All selected MOs belong to the same store. * None of the selected MOs is already linked to another Batch MO. **Step 5:** If one or more selected MOs already belong to a Batch MO, the system displays an error message and prevents batch creation. **Step 6:** If the selected MOs have different Schedule Dates, the system displays an informational message before proceeding.
**Step 7:** Once validations are completed successfully, the system creates the Batch MO for the selected Manufacturing Orders.
*** ### **Enhanced Scan to Verify Functionality** **Overview:** Introduced improvements to the **Scan to Verify** process by adding real-time scanned item visibility, enhanced item verification validations, shipment-level Rate Shopper access, and automatic synchronization of shipment details across related transactions. Users can now quickly verify items through scanning, access carrier rates directly from the **Shipment tab**, and ensure that selected shipping details are consistently reflected in Shipment, Invoice, Packing Slip, and Sales Order records. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added the **Current Item#** field in the Scan & Verify module to display the latest scanned item. * The **Item# search field** is automatically cleared after successful item verification. * Added validation to display an error message when the scanned item does not belong to the selected wave. * Added support to access the **Get Rates / Rate Shopper** feature directly from the Shipment tab within Scan & Verify. * **Selected carrier service** and **shipping rate from** **Rate Shopper** are automatically reflected in the Shipment section. * **Shipping Cost**, **Shipping Tax**, and **Shipping Amount** are now correctly reflected in **Invoice**, **Packing Slip**, and **Sales Order Shipping tab**. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Warehouse → Picking → Pick Wave** and select the required wave. The selected wave appears in the **Wave Lines** section.
**Step 2:** Click on the **Scan & Verify** option to open the **Scan & Verify modal**.
**Step 3:** Scan or enter the **Item#** in the **Item search field** and press **Enter** or click **Verify**.
**Step 4:** The system displays the **scanned item** in the **Current Item# field** and automatically clears the **Item# field** after successful verification.
If the scanned item does not belong to the selected wave, the system displays an error message. **Step 5:** In this case, the **Verified Qty** is 1 while the **Allocated Qty** is 5; therefore, the system displays the **Verification Status** as **Partially Verified**. Users can manually modify the **Verified Qty** directly from the grid if required.
The system validates that the Verified Qty does not exceed the **Allocated Qty**. Once the **Verified Qty** becomes equal to the **Allocated Qty**, the system automatically updates the **Verification Status** to **Verified**.
**Step 6:** Once verification is completed, click **Close Wave**. The system creates the **shipment** and enables the **Shipment tab** within the Scan & Verify workflow.
**Step 7:** Navigate to the **Shipment** tab and click **Get Rates**.
The system opens the **Rate Shopper** pop-up. Enter the **Package Weight** and click **Get Rates**.
Based on the entered weight and package dimensions, the system displays the available carrier services and corresponding shipping rates.
**Step 8:** Select the required **shipping service** and click **Apply**. The selected rate and carrier in the rate shopper are automatically reflected in the **Shipment** section.
**Step 9:** After shipment processing, the **rate** and **Ship Carrier** details are automatically reflected in the **Invoice**, **Packing Slip**, and **Sales Order Shipping tab**. *** ### **Added Invoice Cartonization Detail** View **in the Invoice Centre** **Overview:** A new **Invoice Cartonization Detail** view has been added in the **Invoice Centre** and **Account 3PL Portal Invoice** to provide better visibility into carton-level inventory details associated with invoices. This enhancement allows users to view carton-related LPN attributes directly from the Invoice Centre, including **Lot #**, **Batch #**, **Manufacturing Date**, **Expiry Date**, and **Quality** details. The same LPN attribute information is also available in the **Packing Slip Carton Detail** view in the **Packing Slip Centre** to ensure consistency across shipment and invoice records. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added a new **Invoice Cartonization Detail** view in the **Invoice Centre**. * Added support to display carton-level LPN attributes directly within the invoice listing. * Added visibility for the following LPN attribute fields: * **Lot #** * **Batch #** * **Manufacturing Date** * **Expiry Date** * **Quality** * Ensured carton information displayed in **Invoice Centre** matches the carton details associated with the invoice and packing slip records. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Invoice → Invoice Centre.** **Step 2:** Select **Invoice Cartonization Detail** view from the view selection dropdown.
**Step 3:** The system displays invoice records along with carton-level LPN attribute information, including **Lot #**, **Batch #**, **Manufacturing Date**, **Expiry Date**, and **Quality** details.
*** ### **Enabled Advanced Variant Finder with Multi-UOM Support** **Overview:** The **Advanced Variant Finder functionality** is now supported when the Multi-UOM configuration is enabled. Earlier, this feature was available only when **Multi-UOM** was turned **OFF**. With this enhancement, users can now add product variants through the Advanced Variant Finder while maintaining proper UOM handling, conversion logic, inventory visibility, and line-level pricing across Sales, Purchase, Transfer, and Estimate transactions. The enhancement is available in the following modules: * Create Sales Order * Create Purchase Order * Transfer Sales Order * Transfer Purchase Order * Create Estimate *** **Key Enhancements:** * Advanced Variant Finder now works seamlessly when **Multi-UOM** is **enabled**. * Available inventory displayed inside the Variant Finder is shown in the item’s Base UOM. * The system automatically applies the correct default UOM based on the transaction type: * Sales Order (SO), Transfer Sales Order (TSO), and Estimate use the default Sales UOM. * Purchase Order (PO) and Transfer Purchase Order (TPO) use the default Purchase UOM. * Prices and amounts are calculated correctly based on the applied UOM and conversion factor. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Admin → Item → Item Centre** and view the configured **Sell UOM, SKU UOM,** and **Purchase UOM** for the required item.
**Step 2:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Sales Order → Create Sales Order**. **Step 3:** In the **SO Details** section, click on the **Advanced Variant Finder button**.
**Step 4:** Enter or select the required **Base Part/Product** and click **Find Variants**. The system displays all available product variants associated with the selected Base Part. **Step 5:** The Variant Finder displays inventory availability, ATS quantities, allocated quantities, and SKU UOM.
**Step 6:** Enter the required variant quantities directly within the variant grid. The system automatically calculates the **Price** field based on the entered quantity and the **Sell UOM** (defined in the **UOM** tab of the **Create Item** page). Click on **Add To Order**.
**Step 7:** After adding the variants, the system reflects the **Sell UOM** and **unit prices** correctly at the Sales Order line level.
**Step 8:** Now, navigate to **Menu → Purchase → Purchase Order → Create Purchase Order** and follow the same process for adding the variants. The system automatically applies the **Purchase UOM** at the Purchase Order line level and calculates pricing using the configured UOM conversion factor.
*** ### **Added Shopify Setting “Invoice Priority Over Wave Allocation”** **Overview:** A new Shopify setting, **“Invoice Priority Over Wave,”** has been introduced to prioritize invoice processing over existing wave allocations when inventory is insufficient during invoice creation. With this enhancement, the system can automatically unallocate inventory from existing unpicked **(Allocated)** waves before creating an inventory adjustment. This helps prioritize urgent invoice processing while minimizing unnecessary inventory adjustments. *** **Configuration Details:** **App Setting Name:** Invoice Priority Over Wave **Setting Location:** Menu → Sales Channel → Order Settings → Warehousing(section) → Invoice (toggle) → Advanced Settings → Invoice Priority Over Wave (toggle).
*** **Prerequisite:** The app config **“Auto Create Invoice Inventory Adjustments”** must be enabled from **Menu → App Config → System → Auto Create Invoice Inventory Adjustments**.
*** **Functionality:** **When App Setting Is Enabled:** * During invoice creation, if inventory is insufficient, the system first checks existing unpicked **(Allocated)** waves. It automatically unallocates inventory from eligible allocated waves to fulfill the invoice shortage. * If sufficient inventory is still not available after wave unallocation, the system proceeds with **Inventory Adjustment** creation. *** **When App Setting Is Disabled:** * Inventory shortages are handled directly through **Inventory Adjustments**. * Existing allocated waves are not modified or unallocated. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → App Config → System** and enable the app config **“Auto Create Invoice Inventory Adjustments”**. **Step 2:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales Channel → Order Settings → Warehousing(section) → Invoice (toggle) →** **Advanced Settings** and enable the setting **“Invoice Priority Over Wave”**. **Step 3:** Create an invoice in Shopify where the available inventory is lower than the required invoice quantity. **Step 4:** During invoice creation, the system checks for inventory shortages. If inventory is insufficient, the system first checks existing **unpicked waves with allocated inventory** for the same item. **Step 5:** The system automatically unallocates inventory from eligible allocated waves to fulfill the invoice requirement. **Step 6:** If the inventory shortage still remains after wave unallocation, the system automatically creates an Inventory Adjustment for the remaining quantity shortage. *** ### **Added Inventory Reservation & Inventory Reservation Centre** **Overview:** The **Inventory Reservation feature** introduces a centralized reservation management process that enables users to reserve inventory either from **available on-hand stock** or against incoming **inventory linked through Purchase Orders**. The Inventory Reservation Centre provides complete visibility into reservation quantities, linked order movements, consumption history, transferred quantities, incoming quantities, cancellations, and reservation lifecycle statuses from a single interface. This enhancement helps businesses: * Secure inventory for specific customers or entities * Reserve incoming stock before physical receipt * Prevent over-allocation of inventory * Track reservation movement throughout the procurement and fulfillment lifecycle * Maintain complete reservation history and status visibility * Improve inventory planning and allocation accuracy The feature supports two reservation methods: 1. **On-hand** Reservation 2. **Linked** Reservation 1. **Purchase Order** Both reservation types are managed through the **Inventory Reservation Centre** with real-time quantity and status tracking. *** **Key Enhancements:** 1. **Centralized Inventory Reservation Management** * Added a dedicated **Inventory Reservation Centre** for creating, managing, and tracking reservations. * Reservations can now be maintained independently with detailed quantity visibility and linked order tracking. 2. **Linked Purchase Order Reservation** * Users can reserve inventory against incoming Purchase Orders before the inventory is physically received. * Reservation remains tied to inbound inventory until the **ASN receiving** and **PO completion** processes are completed. 3. **Reservation Quantity Tracking** * The system now tracks: * Reserved Qty * Cancelled Qty * Total Incoming Qty * Consumed Qty * Remaining Qty 4. **Incoming Inventory Reservation Tracking** * Reservation status automatically changes to **Incoming** when inventory is reserved against a Purchase Order that has not yet been received and is currently in **Open** status. *** **How It Works:** **A. Linked Order Type: On-hand** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Inventory → Inventory Reservation** and create a new reservation entry. **Step 2:** Select the **Store**, **Item Number**, and **Reservation Type** as **Customer**. Set **Linked Order Type** as **None (On-hand)**, choose the **Customer Entity** from the dropdown menu, and enter the **Effective Date** and **Expiry Date**.
**Step 3:** The **Total Qty on Store** field in the **Reservation Quantities** section displays the quantity available in the store.
If inventory already exists in store stock, the reservation is directly allocated from **on-hand inventory**. **Step 4:** In the **Reservation Quantities** section, enter the required quantity to be reserved in the **Total Reserved Qty** field.
**Step 5:** Click on the **Save** button. The system displays a confirmation pop-up indicating that the selected inventory quantity will be reserved for the selected customer entity.
**Step 6:** Once the reservation is saved, the reservation entry is created successfully. The reservation status updates automatically based on the **Effective Date**. * If the Effective Date is equal to the **current date**, the reservation status becomes **Open**. * If the Effective Date is set in the future, the reservation status becomes **Aging** until the Effective Date is reached, which means the reserved inventory cannot yet be consumed or allocated to the customer.
The reserved quantity is deducted from the available store inventory and can be viewed in the **Total Qty on Store** field.
**Step 7:** Now, create a **Sales Order** for the **same store, reserved customer** and **add the same item** for which the reservation was created.
**Step 8:** Release the Sales Order and create a **Wave**. During wave allocation, the system automatically consumes the reserved inventory quantity for the customer. The system consumes reserved inventory based on the **reservation type** in the following order before using available inventory: * **Customer** * **Customer Group** * **Sales Rep**
**Step 9:** If the wave is allocated for a quantity less than the reserved quantity, the reservation status changes to **Partially Consumed**. The **Total Consumed Qty** in the **Reservation Quantities** section displays the quantity that has been allocated through the wave and consumed by the customer.
**Step 10:** If the reserved quantity is fully consumed, the reservation status changes to **Completed**. **Step 11:** To cancel any remaining reserved quantity, click on **Options → Cancel Reservation**.
A confirmation popup appears indicating that only the remaining quantity will be cancelled, while any quantity already consumed will remain unchanged.
**Step 12:** Once the cancellation is confirmed: * The reservation status changes to **Completed** if part of the reserved quantity was already consumed. * The remaining unconsumed quantity is released back to store inventory and is reflected in the **Total Qty on Store** field * The cancelled quantity is updated in the **Total Cancelled Qty** field.
**Step 13:** If the reservation has already been fully consumed, the reservation remains in **Completed** status and cannot be cancelled. **B. Linked Order Type: Purchase Order** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Inventory → Inventory Reservation** and create a new reservation entry. **Step 2:** Select the **Store**, **Item Number**, and **Reservation Type** as **Customer**. Set the **Linked Order Type** as **Purchase Order**, choose the **Customer Entity** from the dropdown menu, and enter the **Effective Date** and **Expiry Date**. **Step 3:** In the **Linked Order Details** section, click on **Link Qty**. The **Add/Update Linked Order Lines** pop-up appears, displaying available Purchase Orders for reservation linking. **Step 4:** If no eligible Purchase Orders exist for the selected item, no records are displayed in the pop-up. Since a linked reservation depends on incoming inventory, a Purchase Order must first be created for the item. **Step 5:** Navigate to **Purchase → Purchase Order** and create a Purchase Order for the required item and quantity. Save the Purchase Order and return to the reservation entry. **Step 6:** Open the **Link Qty** pop-up again. The newly created Purchase Order is now available for selection. Enter the quantity to be reserved in the **Reserved Qty (Current)** field and close the pop-up. **Step 7:** Once the quantity is entered: * The linked Purchase Order line is added to the **Linked Order Details** section. * The reservation line status changes to **Incoming.** * The **Reserved Qty** **(Current)** is reflected in the **Total Incoming Qty** field. This indicates that the inventory is reserved against incoming stock that has not yet been physically received. **Step 8:** Click the **Save** button. Once the reservation is created, the reservation status becomes **Incoming**. **Step 9:** Now, process the inbound inventory by completing the Purchase Order receiving workflow. **Release the PO** created and create the **ASN**. Once the ASN is created, receive the ASN and close it. **Step 10:** Once the linked Purchase Order inventory is received, the reservation status changes from **Incoming** to **Open**. **Step 11:** Create a **Sales Order** for the same store, reserved customer, and add the same item for which the reservation was created. **Step 12:** Release the Sales Order and create a Wave. If the wave is allocated for a quantity less than the reserved quantity, the reservation status changes to **Partially Consumed**. If the reserved quantity is fully consumed, the reservation status changes to **Completed**. # 2025 # January 2025 Release (WMS) ### Added the ability to delete records in the Generate Cycle Count module We have introduced the ability to delete cycle count records in the Generate Cycle Count module. The "Cycle Count Queue" view within the module has been enhanced with the following functionalities to improve usability and streamline queue management: 1. **Delete on Right-Click:** Users can now quickly delete individual entries in the Cycle Count Queue by simply right-clicking on the desired entry and selecting the **Delete** option.
2. **Batch Delete Functionality:** The option to batch delete cycle count entries has also been introduced to allow users to delete multiple entries in the Cycle Count Queue simultaneously. This enhancement significantly reduces the time and effort required for queue management.
### Added "Assigned User" column in Cycle Count Centre The **Cycle Count Centre** has been updated to include a new **"Assigned User"** column in both the **Cycle Count Header** and **Cycle Count Detail** views. This new column provides visibility into who is responsible for each cycle count, making it easier for teams to track assignments and ensure proper accountability.
The cycle count batch is assigned/unassigned from cycle count module in XoroWMS. ### Batch Pick and Pack Enhancement in XoroWMS Packing Module We are excited to introduce a new feature in the **Packing Module** of XoroWMS: **Batch Pick and Pack for Individually Packing Items/Orders on OLPN Linked to Multiple Sales Orders**. This feature streamlines the packing process when dealing with an Outbound License Plate Number (OLPN) associated with multiple Sales Orders (SO), ensuring better efficiency, accuracy, and flexibility in handling packed goods.
**Key Highlights of the Feature:** 1. **Batch Pick and Pack Capability**: * The system now allows users to individually pack items on a specific OLPN linked to multiple Sales Orders. * This is achieved through the introduction of an **Item# scan field**, enabling the identification and packing of individual items associated with their respective Sales Orders. 2. **Flexibility to Move Items**: * Users can pack items separately and move them to new License Plate Numbers (LPNs), offering a more organized packing workflow. 3. **Order Identification Automation**: * Based on the scanned Item#, the system intelligently identifies and associates the correct Sales Order, eliminating manual entry and reducing errors. *** #### Use Case Scenarios: To better understand the functionality, let’s explore various scenarios where this feature proves beneficial: **Case 1: Different Sales Orders with Different Items Picked on the Same LPN** * **Example**: SO1 contains Item1, and SO2 contains Item2, both picked on the same OLPN. * **Steps**: 1. Scan the OLPN: The system displays the **Item# scan field**. 2. Scan **Item1**: The system automatically associates it with **SO1** and displays the order number in the Order Number field. 3. Scan **Item2**: The system automatically associates it with **SO2** and updates the Order Number field accordingly. * **Benefit**: Quick and accurate association of items with their respective Sales Orders, avoiding confusion during the packing process. **Case 2: Different Sales Orders with the Same Item Picked on the Same LPN** * **Example**: SO1 and SO2 both contain Item1, picked on the same OLPN. * **Steps**: 1. Scan the OLPN: The system detects that the same item exists in multiple orders and prompts a popup to select the relevant Sales Order.
2\. Choose the appropriate Sales Order from the popup.
3\. Proceed to pack the item on the selected Sales Order.
* **Benefit**: Prevents incorrect assignment of items to the wrong Sales Orders, ensuring accuracy when dealing with identical items across orders. **Case 3: Multiple Sales Orders with Multiple Items Picked on the Same LPN** * **Example**: SO1 contains Item1, Item2, Item3, and SO2 contains Item4, Item5, Item6, all picked on the same OLPN. * **Steps**: 1. Scan the OLPN: The system displays the **Item# scan field**. 2. Scan **Item1**: The system associates it with **SO1** and displays a popup to notify the user that the order contains multiple items. 3. Confirm the popup and pack all items associated with SO1 (Item1, Item2, Item3). * **Benefit**: Simplifies the packing process by allowing the user to handle multiple items within the same Sales Order in one action, reducing the effort and time required. ### LPN Label Enhancements in XoroWWS We are thrilled to announce the latest enhancement in the **LPN Label functionality** of XoroWMS. This update focuses on improved customization when generating pallet labels, ensuring that your warehouse operations align seamlessly with your unique workflows. #### New Feature: **Pallet Prefix Configuration** To offer greater flexibility and control in pallet labeling, we have introduced a new **App Config Setting** called **"Set pallet prefix"**. This enhancement enables users to define a custom prefix for pallets generated through the **Print Pallet** functionality in XoroWMS.
**Key Highlights:** 1. **Custom Prefix for Pallet Labels**: * The **Set pallet prefix** setting allows you to configure a unique prefix for all pallets generated via the Print Pallet feature. * By default, the prefix is set to **"LPN"**. 2. **User-Defined Flexibility**: * Organizations can now align their pallet naming conventions with internal standards or customer requirements. * For example, the prefix could be customized to "PLT", "PAL", or any other meaningful identifier. 3. **Seamless Integration**: * The defined prefix will automatically reflect in all pallets printed using the Print Pallet functionality, ensuring consistent and professional labeling across your operations. *** #### How It Works: 1. Navigate to the **App Config Settings** in XoroWMS. 2. Locate the new setting: **"Set pallet prefix"**. 3. Enter your desired prefix (e.g., "VPN", "PLT", "WH", etc.). 4. Save the changes. All pallets printed thereafter will include the specified prefix.
### Enhanced Packing Page with New Columns in XoroWMS We are pleased to announce an enhancement to the **Packing Page** in XoroWMS with the addition of three new columns: **Customer Name**, **Carton Break Rule**, and **Priority**. These updates are designed to provide greater visibility and control during the packing process, ensuring more efficient and accurate order fulfillment.
*** #### New Features on the Packing Page: **1. Customer Name Column** * Displays the name of the customer associated with each order. * **Benefit**: Helps identify and prioritize orders based on specific customers, streamlining workflows for high-priority or repeat clients. **2. Carton Break Rule Column** * Shows the carton break rules applied to the order during its creation via the Sales Order module. * **Benefit**: Provides clear visibility into how items are grouped or split into cartons, ensuring compliance with customer-specific packaging requirements. **3. Priority Column** * Indicates the priority level assigned to each order. * **Benefit**: Enables users to quickly identify and process high-priority orders first, enhancing customer satisfaction and meeting urgent delivery deadlines. #### How It Works: 1. Navigate to the **Packing Page** in XoroWMS and enter the LPN#. 2. The new columns—**Customer Name**, **Carton Break Rule**, and **Priority**—are now visible alongside existing fields.
3. Use these columns to sort, filter, or prioritize orders during the packing process. The addition of the **Customer Name**, **Carton Break Rule**, and **Priority** columns enhances the functionality of the Packing Page in XoroWMS, making it more intuitive and efficient. These improvements allow for better visibility, prioritization, and compliance with customer-specific requirements.
### **Quality Code & Quality Name Columns** The addition of the **Quality Code** and **Quality Name** columns in the **Wave Centre** module improves inventory quality tracking, enhances order fulfillment accuracy, and optimizes warehouse workflows. This update ensures that warehouses can efficiently allocate and track quality-specific inventory during wave processing.
**Where It Has Been Added?** 1. **Wave Detail View** – Displays the quality attributes of inventory associated with each wave. 2. **Wave Detail Allocation View** – Allows users to track quality information at the allocation level, ensuring that orders are fulfilled with the correct inventory. *** #### **How It Works:** 1. Navigate to the **Wave Centre** module. 2. In the **Wave Detail View**, users will now see the newly added **Quality Code** and **Quality Name** columns, displaying quality classifications for inventory. 3. In the **Wave Detail Allocation View**, these columns provide additional insight into allocated inventory, ensuring that correct quality items are assigned to orders. For further assistance or more details, please reach out to the **XoroWMS support team**. *** ### **Introduction of 'Receive Mixed Carton' in XoroWMS** **Feature Overview** The new **‘Receive Mixed Carton’** enhancement in XoroWMS enables users to receive **multiple items simultaneously** when handling mixed cartons during packing and shipping. This update significantly improves efficiency, reduces errors, and streamlines warehouse operations. **Previous Limitations** Before this enhancement, users could only receive one item at a time by: * Scanning a single item and manually entering the quantity. * Repeating the process for each item in a mixed carton. * Lacking a consolidated view of all received items, which led to inefficiencies and potential errors. This method was **time-consuming**, especially for large mixed cartons, and required extra effort for tracking and verification. **Key Enhancements** With the **‘Receive Mixed Carton’** feature, users can:\ ✅ **Receive multiple items in one step**, reducing manual effort.\ ✅ **Speed up the receiving process** by eliminating repetitive data entry.\ ✅ **Improve accuracy** by reviewing all items before finalizing.\ ✅ **Enhance visibility** with a consolidated view of received items. *** #### **User Interface Changes** 1. **New Receiving Option** * Added **‘Receive Mixed Carton’** to the receiving options menu.
2. **Item Entry Interface** * Users can enter multiple items and their respective quantities in a structured form. * Option to **add or remove items** dynamically. 3. **Data Display Section** * **Entered Items List**: Displays all items and quantities added by the user. * **Received Items Summary**: Shows already received items for verification.
4. **Confirmation Button** * **\[Accept]** button added to finalize the entered items before proceeding. 5. **Scanning Prompts** * After confirming, the system will prompt users to scan: * **License Plate Number (LPN)** * **Pallet Identifier** * **Location Identifier** *** #### **How 'Receive Mixed Carton' Works: Step-by-Step Process** **Step 1: Select 'Receive Mixed Carton' Option** * Navigate to **WMS → Receiving** and select **‘Receive Mixed Carton’**. **Step 2: Enter Items and Quantities** * Users enter **multiple item numbers** along with their corresponding quantities. * Example: * **Item: ABC123 | Quantity: 2** * **Item: XYZ456 | Quantity: 2** * **Item: LMN789 | Quantity: 3**
**Step 3: Review Entered Items** * The system displays a **list of entered items** for verification. * Previously received items in the session are also displayed for reference. **Step 4: Confirm Entry** * Users click **\[Accept]** to finalize the list before proceeding.
**Step 5: Scan Required Details** * After confirmation, the system prompts users to scan:\ ✅ **LPN (License Plate Number)** – Identifies the receiving batch.\ ✅ **Pallet ID** – Identifies the pallet used.\ ✅ **Location** – Specifies where the inventory will be stored. **Step 6: Process the Receipt** * The system **processes all entered items together** under the scanned LPN, pallet, and location. * A confirmation message ensures that the **mixed carton has been successfully received**. # February 2025 Release ### Qty Not Linked column added in the SO Centre A new column, **"Qty Not Linked,"** has been added to the **Detail View** of the Sales Order Centre. This column provides users with a clear representation of the quantity of items that are not yet linked to a purchase order (PO).
#### **Calculation Formula** The value of the **Qty Not Linked** column is determined using the following formula: **`Qty Not Linked = Qty Ordered - Cancel Qty - PO Linked Qty`** Where: * **Qty Ordered**: Total quantity of the item ordered in the sales order. * **Cancel Qty**: Quantity of the item that has been canceled from the sales order. * **PO Linked Qty**: Quantity of the item in the sales order that has already been linked to a purchase order. {% hint style="info" %} Please note that if the value of 'Qty Not Linked' becomes negative, it is replaced with 0 (zero). {% endhint %} This field helps users quickly identify unlinked quantities, enabling more efficient order management and procurement planning. ### Vendor Integration in Data Export Centre and Import/Export Utility With this enhancement, we have introduced two key features that empower users to manage vendor-related data effortlessly. The addition of a dedicated **"Vendor" view** in the **Data Export Centre** and the inclusion of the **"Vendor" entity** in the **Import Export Utility** provide users with enhanced flexibility and control over vendor data. With these updates, users can now efficiently handle vendor-related data for reporting, analysis, and bulk updates. #### Key Features 1. **New "Vendor" View in the Data Export Centre** * A dedicated **"Vendor" view** has been added to the **Data Export Centre**. * This feature allows users to export detailed vendor information in a structured format, enabling seamless reporting and analysis. **How to Access:** * Navigate to the Data Export Centre. * Select "Vendor" from the "Search by" dropdown option.
* Configure and execute the export process as needed. 2. **"Vendor" Entity Added to Import Export Utility** * The **"Vendor" entity** is now available in the **Import Export Utility**. * Users can easily import and export vendor data in bulk, facilitating faster updates, integrations, and data consistency across systems. **How to Access:** * Navigate to the Import Export Utility. * Select "Vendor" as the target entity for import or export.
* Create the utility as you normally would. ### Enhanced Product Image Management: Auto-Remove Product Image We’ve introduced a new feature to make managing product images easier. This feature automates the removal of product images based on item-level and product-level associations, providing more control over how product images are handled when images are deleted from individual items. {% hint style="info" %} This is an app config based enhancement. {% endhint %} #### Feature Details: A new app config, **"Auto-Remove Product Images"** has been added under the **General** settings.
When this config is enabled, the image deletions will be handled in the following ways: 1. **Item-Level Image Deletion:** * When an image is deleted from an item, the system checks if it is associated with other items of the same product. * If the image is linked to other items, it is removed **only from the specific item** where it was deleted. 2. **Product-Level Image Deletion:** * If the deleted image is not associated with any other items of the product, it is automatically removed from the **product gallery** as well. {% hint style="info" %} **Please Note:** The system determines image associations using the selection of images from the **Product Gallery**. {% endhint %} ### **Enhancements in Wave Centre and Data Export Centre** We’ve introduced new enhancements to improve usability and provide more detailed insights in the **Wave Centre** and **Data Export Centre.** These updates enhance navigation and provide better visibility into sales order details, making wave management more efficient and insightful. #### Key Features 1. **Clickable Order Number** * The **Order Number** field is now clickable in the **Wave Detail** and **Wave Detail Allocation** views within both the **Wave Centre** and **Data Export Centre**.
* Clicking the Order Number will open the sales order subform, streamlining navigation and improving workflow efficiency.
2. **Custom Fields in Wave Detail View** * **Sales Order (SO) Detail Custom Fields** have been added to the **Wave Detail** view in the **Wave Centre**.
* These fields provide additional information for sales orders, offering more context and flexibility for analysis. * For **Manufacturing-type orders**, the custom fields will remain empty as they are not applicable. ### **Item Image Support in Purchase Flow** We’ve enhanced the purchase flow by adding **item image support** to improve visibility and provide additional context during purchase transactions. #### Key Enhancement: * The **"Item Image"** column has been added at the **line-item level** in the following modules: * **Purchase Order**
* **Item Receipt**
* **Bill**
This enhancement allows users to view associated item images directly within these modules, making it easier to verify items, reduce errors, and streamline the purchase process. ### Enhanced Payment Receipt Emails for Customer Deposits An enhancement has been introduced to automate the sending of payment receipt emails for customer deposits made using **non-credit card payment methods**. #### **Feature Details**: 1. **Automatic Payment Receipt Emails** * A payment receipt will now be sent to customers whenever a deposit is created using non-credit card payment methods. * Internal recipients will also receive the same payment receipt email if configured in the "Send Payment Receipt Notification - Additional Emails" app config. 2. **Email Notification for Deposit Updates** * In addition to the initial deposit receipt, emails will also be dispatched in the following cases: * **Modification of Deposit Amount:** If the deposit amount is updated, an email notification will immediately be sent to the customer and any configured internal recipients. * **Linked Deposits**: If a deposit is linked to a sales order, a notification email is triggered. {% hint style="info" %} Please note that payment receipt emails will only be sent if the "**Payment Confirmation Receipts"** app config is enabled. {% endhint %} This enhancement ensures seamless communication and improved transparency between customers and internal teams regarding payment receipts and updates. ### Enhancement to Allow Linked Expense Bill Receipt Date Prior to Parent Bill Receipt Date We've introduced a new feature giving you more control over expense bill dates when reconciling items. Users can now set the linked expense bill receipt date to a date prior to the parent bill's receipt date, providing greater flexibility in managing bill receipt dates. {% hint style="info" %} This is an app config-based enhancement. {% endhint %} #### Feature Details * A new app config, "**Allow linked bill receipt date prior to the parent's bill receipt date**," has been added under the **Purchase** tab.
* When this setting is enabled, the system will permit users to enter an expense bill receipt date that precedes the parent bill receipt date when creating expense bills during item reconciliation.
* When this setting is disabled, the system will enforce the existing validation, preventing expense bill receipt dates from being earlier than the parent bill receipt date.
# March 2025 Release ### Automatic Item Description Updates on Sales Orders and Purchase Orders We have added the ability to automatically update item descriptions on Sales Orders and Purchase Orders when the item description is modified in the item details. With this enhancement, users no longer need to manually update descriptions on open orders, reducing errors and improving efficiency in order management. {% hint style="info" %} This is an App Config-based enhancement {% endhint %} #### Feature Details * A new config, **"Auto Update Item Description in existing SO, PO and BOM"** has been introduced to ensure that item descriptions in active Sales Orders, Purchase Orders, and Bill of Material remain in sync with updates made in the item details.
If this setting is enabled, when an item(s) description is updated in the Item module, the change will automatically reflect in the existing Sales Order (SO), Purchase Order (PO), and Bill of Materials (BOM) modules.
* When this configuration is **enabled**, whenever item description is updated, a warning text is displayed on update popup indicating that the description will be updated in the existing sales orders and purchase orders.
* Any modification to an item’s description in the item details will be automatically reflected in: * **Sales Orders** that are *not in shipped, closed, or cancelled* status.36 * **Purchase Orders** that are *not in received, closed, or cancelled* status. ### Added "Qty Available to Link" Field in Inventory Info (Multi Company) Details We have introduced a new field, **"Qty Available to Link"**, in the **Inventory Info (Multi Company)** section across the **Item Inventory Snapshot** and **Short Inventory Planner** modules. This enhancement provides users with greater transparency into the quantity available for linking across multiple linked company instances, improving inventory management and planning accuracy. #### How It Works * Open the Item Inventory Snapshot or Short Inventory Planner in your application. * Locate the item for which inventory details need to be viewed. * Click on the "On PO" quantity under the respective column to access the On PO Details screen, which displays information about the purchase orders associated with the selected item.
* On the **On PO Details** screen, click on the **Inventory Info (Multi Company)** option to view inventory details across all linked instances.
* In the Qty Details (Multi Company) screen, click on the "On PO" quantity for the item to view detailed purchase order information.
* The newly added "Qty Available to Link" field displays the quantity that is currently available for linking to fulfill inventory requirements across instances.
### Added "Total Quantity Available on PO" column in the Item Inventory Snapshot module A new field, **"Total Qty Available on PO"**, has been introduced in the **Item Inventory Snapshot** module to enhance inventory tracking and visibility. This field provides users with a consolidated view of the total quantity available from incoming purchase orders, aiding in more accurate inventory planning and decision-making.
### PO/PO Detail to ASN Detail Custom Field Mapping **Now Independent of RMA Process** The custom fields from **PO/PO Detail** can now be mapped to **ASN Detail** with both RMA processes. Previously, mapping custom fields from **PO/PO Detail** to **ASN Detail** was only possible when the application config **"Use RMA ASN Process New"** was enabled and new RMA process was used. With this enhancement, custom fields from **PO/PO Detail** can now be mapped to **ASN Detail** independently, without relying on the above app config. This allows for more flexible and convenient custom field mapping regardless of your RMA ASN process. ### **New Columns Added for Linked and Not Linked Quantities in Sales Order Module** We have added two new columns to the Sales Order module at the item details level, providing enhanced visibility into linked and not-linked quantities for each item. These additions enhance inventory tracking by offering more detailed insights into the status of linked and unlinked quantities in sales orders. #### Feature Details The following columns has been added to the sales order module: * **Active Linked Qty:** This column displays the calculated active linked quantity. It's determined by the following formula: * `Active Linked Qty = Total Linked Qty - Linked Qty Received` * Where "Total Linked Qty" is equivalent to the existing "Linked Qty" field. * **Not Linked Qty:** This column displays the calculated not-linked quantity. It's determined by the following formula: * `Not Linked Qty = Remaining to Ship - Qty Allocated - Active Linked Qty`
### Implemented the ability to map Sales Orders with Customer Refunds A new functionality has been implemented to **map sales orders with customer refunds**, providing better transparency and control over refund processes. This enhancement allows users to specify the refund amount associated with a particular sales order. {% hint style="info" %} This feature is only supported for refunds of customer deposits. {% endhint %} With this update, users can view the refunded amount of a customer deposit directly on the linked sales order. #### **Features Details** 1. **Customer Refund Section in Sales Order Header Details**\ A new **Customer Refund** section has been introduced under the **Linked Credits/Deposits** tab in the Sales Order Header Details. This section displays all customer refunds associated with the sales order deposit.
2. **Sales Order Details in the Customer Deposit Refund Screen**\ \ The mapping has also been extended when refunding the customer deposit. The users can now view the sales order associated with the deposit when processing the refund. * **Sales Order Linkage in Customer Deposit Refund Screen**\ When processing customer deposit refunds, if the deposit is linked to one or more sales orders, the following sales order information is displayed: * **Sales Order Number:** Identifies the linked sales order. * **Remaining Deposit Amount:** Shows the unutilized amount of the customer deposit after applying it to the sales order. * **Refund Amount:** Displays the amount being refunded from the deposit for the respective sales order.
* **Defining Refund Amount per Sales Order:**\ Users can manually specify the refund amount in the **Refund Amount** column for each linked sales order. This feature provides flexibility to process partial refunds based on the remaining deposit amount linked to each order.
3. **Updated Behavior for Refunded Deposit Display** Previously, the Refunded Deposit section displayed the total refunded amount for the entire linked customer deposit—even if only part of that deposit was applied to the sales order. This included any refunded portion of the deposit not directly associated with the sales order. With this update, the "Refunded Deposit" section now only reflects the refunded amount that pertains specifically to the linked deposit portion. In other words, it will display only the refunded amount from the deposit that is associated with the sales order.
### Enhancement in Inventory Snapshot and Short Inventory Planner (SIP) for Improved Inventory Visibility and Purchase Planning The **Item Inventory Snapshot** and **Short Inventory Planner (SIP)** modules have been upgraded to enhance inventory visibility, historical data tracking, and purchase planning. **Key Updates:** 1. **Vendor Filter in Item Inventory Snapshot:** * A new **Vendor** filter has been added, allowing users to filter inventory data based on specific vendors for more targeted inventory analysis.
2. **New Columns in Item Inventory Snapshot (Referencing Short Inventory Planner):** * **Short Qty:** Displays the quantity short based on current stock levels and demand. * **To Order Qty:** Represents the quantity suggested for reorder based on stock shortages.
3. **New App Configuration in Inventory Settings:**\ A new **App Config** option, **"Show Sales History Data in Inventory Snapshot and Short Inventory Planner"**, has been added under the **Inventory** tab.
When this configuration is enabled, the following features are activated: * **Months Search Filter Dropdown:** Allows users to filter sales history by selecting the desired number of months.
* **Include Suggested Qty Toggle Button:** If enabled, the Suggested Order Qty (based on historical sales data) will automatically be added to the To Order Qty column to optimize order suggestions.
4. **Additional Columns Added (Enabled via App Config):** * **Sales History Qty Sold:** Displays the total quantity sold in the selected historical period. * **Suggested Order Qty:** Suggests the quantity to order based on historical sales data and current inventory status. * **Total Line CBM:** Shows the total cubic meter volume for each line item, aiding in warehouse space planning.
5. **Total CBM Row:** * A summary row at the bottom of the table that calculates the **Total CBM** for all line items listed, providing a comprehensive view of inventory volume.
### **New "Contacts" Module in XoroERP** *** #### **Overview** We are excited to introduce a new **"Contacts"** module in **XoroERP**, designed to efficiently store and manage customer and vendor contacts. This module enhances address handling, making order processing more streamlined and reducing manual data entry errors. With the **Contacts Centre**, users can maintain a **centralized repository** of contact information, link contacts to customers and vendors, and ensure seamless address auto-population in transactions like **Estimates, Sales Orders, and Invoices**. {% hint style="info" %} To access the Contacts module, go to Menu > Admin > Contacts {% endhint %}
#### **Key Features & Functionality** #### **A. Contacts / Contacts Centre** The new **Contacts** module enables users to store and manage contact details for **Customers and Vendors**. #### **B. Core Fields in the Contacts Module** Each contact entry includes the following fields: * **First Name** – Contact's first name. * **Last Name** – Contact's last name. * **Phone Number** – Primary contact number. * **Email** – Contact’s email address. * **Title** – Job title of the contact person. * **Entity (Customer/Vendor)** – Specifies whether the contact is linked to a **Customer** or **Vendor**. * **Ship To Address (Multi-Selector)** – Displays available shipping addresses (enabled only when "Customer" is selected as the entity). * **Bill To Address (Multi-Selector)** – Displays available billing addresses (enabled only when "Customer" is selected as the entity). * **Default Ship To Address** – Pre-selected primary shipping address for the contact. * **Default Bill To Address** – Pre-selected primary billing address for the contact. *** #### **Address Handling Logic** * The **"Ship To Address"** and **"Bill To Address"** fields are **initially disabled**. * When a **Customer** is selected in the "Entity" field, these fields **automatically enable** and populate with the customer's available addresses. * Users can select the appropriate addresses from the dropdown, and the chosen addresses will be saved as the **default billing and shipping addresses**. * If a **Vendor** is selected, these fields remain **disabled**, as vendor contacts do not require billing/shipping addresses. *** #### **Contacts Centre – Search & Management** The **Contacts Centre** includes powerful search and management functionalities: * **Search Filters:** * **Entity Name Filter** – Search contacts linked to a specific customer or vendor. * **Quick Search Filters:** Search contacts by * First Name * Last Name * Company Name * Phone Number * Email * **Batch Actions:** * **Batch Delete** – Allows users to delete multiple contacts at once (*Contacts that are in use cannot be deleted*). * **Edit in New Window** – Enables bulk modifications of contact details. * **Added Columns:** * **Default Ship To Address** – Displays the primary shipping address for the contact. * **Default Bill To Address** – Displays the primary billing address for the contact. *** #### **Impact on Sales Transactions** The new **Contacts** module is fully integrated into the **Estimate, Sales Order, and Invoice** workflows, optimizing address handling: * If a **customer has an assigned contact**, the system **automatically populates** the contact’s **default billing and shipping addresses** in the transaction. * If no contact is assigned, the system defaults to the **customer’s primary billing and shipping addresses**. * **Changing the contact during the transaction updates the addresses dynamically**, ensuring real-time accuracy. {% hint style="info" %} **Ensure all customer contacts are linked properly** to leverage address auto-population in transactions. {% endhint %} * **For further assistance**, please reach out to the **XoroERP support team**. We believe this enhancement will significantly improve your workflow efficiency and accuracy in handling customer and vendor interactions. ### **Contact Module Integration with Customer & Vendor Modules** *** #### **Overview** We are pleased to introduce a new enhancement in **XoroERP** that integrates the **Contacts module** with the **Customer and Vendor** modules. This enhancement allows users to efficiently manage contacts directly from the **Create Customer** and **Create Vendor** screens, improving workflow efficiency and data organization. With this update, users can now **view, add, edit, and delete** contacts linked to a specific customer or vendor without navigating away from the main customer/vendor profile. This enhancement simplifies contact management, ensures better tracking, and enhances communication records for businesses dealing with multiple customer or vendor contacts. *** #### **Key Enhancement Details** #### **A. New Contacts Tab in Customer & Vendor Modules** * A **new "Contacts" tab** has been added within the **"Contact Info" parent tab** in both: * **Create Customer** * **Create Vendor**
* This tab now displays **all contacts** linked to the respective **Customer or Vendor**.
#### **B. Contact Management Features** Inside the new **Contacts** tab, users can perform the following actions: **View Contacts** – Displays the **list of contacts** linked to the selected Customer or Vendor.\ **Add New Contact** – Allows users to create a **new contact** for the respective entity directly within the module.\ **Edit Contact** – Enables users to **modify existing contact details** for updates or corrections.\ **Delete Contact** – Allows users to **remove contacts** that are no longer needed. *Note: Contacts that have been used in transactions or linked to records may have restrictions on deletion to maintain data integrity.* *** #### **Workflow Changes & User Experience** #### **Before the Enhancement** * Users had to **navigate separately** to the **Contacts module** to create or manage contacts for a Customer or Vendor. * Contact visibility was not directly available in the Customer/Vendor profiles. * The process involved **extra steps**, making it time-consuming to associate contacts with entities. #### **After the Enhancement** * Users can **view and manage all associated contacts** directly from the **Customer or Vendor profile** under the new **Contacts tab**. * **Seamless contact management** ensures that adding, editing, or deleting contacts is more **intuitive and time-efficient**. * When a contact is created from the Customer or Vendor module, it **automatically links** to the respective entity in the Contacts module. *** #### **How to Use the New Contacts Tab?** * Navigate to **Create Customer** or **Create Vendor** in XoroERP. * Go to the **"Contact Info" parent tab** and select the new **"Contacts" tab**. * View the **list of linked contacts** for the selected entity. * Use the **"Add Contact" button** to create a new contact for the Customer or Vendor. * Click **"Edit"** to modify existing contact details. * Click **"Delete"** to remove an unnecessary contact (*if not in use*). *** #### **Next Steps** * **Users should start leveraging this feature** for streamlined contact management within Customer and Vendor profiles. * **Ensure all relevant customer and vendor contacts are added** to maximize operational efficiency. * **For further assistance**, please reach out to the **XoroERP support team**. This enhancement is designed to **simplify contact handling** and **improve efficiency** in managing business relationships within XoroERP. We look forward to seeing how this improvement enhances your workflows! ### **New "Batch Upload Contacts" Module in XoroERP** *** #### **Overview** We are excited to introduce the **Batch Upload Contacts** module in **XoroERP**, designed to streamline the process of importing contact information in bulk. This new module allows businesses to seamlessly **migrate existing customer and vendor contacts** from their old systems into XoroERP using a structured **Excel template**, eliminating manual data entry and reducing errors. With this enhancement, businesses can **quickly and efficiently update their contact database**, ensuring that all relevant customer and vendor information is available in one centralized system.
*** #### **Key Features & Functionality** #### **A. Simplified Contact Migration Process** * Users can now **export contacts from their old system** and format them using XoroERP’s **predefined template**. * The module supports **bulk data entry** by allowing users to **copy-paste contacts from an exported file into the provided template**. * Once formatted, users can **upload the file**, and the system will automatically create or update contacts in XoroERP. #### **B. Steps to Batch Upload Contacts** * **Download the Contact Upload Template** * Navigate to **Batch Upload Contacts** in XoroERP. * Click on **"Download Template"** to get the required file format. * Open the file using **Excel or any spreadsheet editor**. * **Copy-Paste Contact Data into the Template** * Open the **exported file** from the old system. * Copy and paste relevant **contact details** into the downloaded **XoroERP template**. * Ensure that all required fields (**First Name, Last Name, Phone Number, Email, Entity Type**) are correctly filled. * **Upload the Completed File** * Once all contacts have been copied into the template, go back to **XoroERP**. * Click on **"Upload Contacts"** and select the completed file. * The system will **validate the data** and **import contacts in bulk**. **Validation & Error Handling** * If the file contains **missing or incorrect fields**, the system will highlight errors. * Users can **download an error report**, correct any issues, and re-upload the file. *** #### **How to Access the Batch Upload Contacts Module** **Navigate to:** **XoroERP → Contacts → Batch Upload Contacts** Users can access this module from the **Contacts section**, where they can download the template, format their data, and upload it seamlessly. *** #### **Important Considerations** * **Ensure data accuracy** before uploading, as incorrect or missing fields will result in validation errors. * **Use only the provided template** to format data correctly and prevent import failures. * **Check the entity type** (**Customer or Vendor**) before uploading to link contacts appropriately. * **Review the error report** if the upload fails and make necessary corrections before reattempting. *** We believe this new module will significantly enhance your contact management capabilities, **making data migration and updates easier than ever before!**\
### **Enhancement in Item Receipt & Bill Module – "Amount" Column in Accrual Account Selection** *** #### **Overview** We have introduced an enhancement in **XoroERP’s Item Receipt and Bill modules** by adding a new **"Amount"** column in the **"Select Accrual Account & Vendor"** pop-up. This update provides greater transparency and accuracy when selecting an accrual account and vendor during the item receipt and billing process. *** #### **Key Enhancement Details** #### **A. New "Amount" Column in Accrual Account Selection Pop-Up** * The **"Amount" column** has been added to the **"Select Accrual Account & Vendor"** pop-up. * This allows users to **view the amount associated with the accrual selection**, ensuring better financial tracking. #### **B. How to Access the Pop-Up?** To access this pop-up in **Item Receipt and Bill modules**: * **Uncheck the "Add to Vendor Bill?" checkbox.**
* Click on **"Finish"** to open the pop-up. * The **"Select Accrual Account & Vendor"** pop-up will now display the new **"Amount" column** for reference.
This enhancement is designed to **increase transparency, improve accuracy, and streamline financial processes within XoroERP**. ### **New "Required" Field for LPN Attributes in Create Item** #### **Module:** Create Item, Inventory Management, Receiving, Putaway, and Move Inventory #### **Overview** We have introduced a new **"Required"** field for **LPN (License Plate Number) attributes** in the **Create Item** module. This enhancement enforces validation on LPN attributes during inventory actions, ensuring that critical attributes are provided before processing transactions in **XoroERP and XoroWMS**. This update enhances **inventory accuracy, compliance, and operational control** by preventing actions on LPNS that are missing required attributes. *** #### **Key Enhancements & Functionality** #### **Required" Field for LPN Attributes in Create Item** * Each **LPN attribute** can now be marked as **"Required"** when creating an item. * Once an attribute is marked as required, it **must be provided** when performing actions on LPNS containing that item.
#### **ERP-Side Validations & Impact on Transactions** * If an item has **"Required"** LPN attributes, actions on the LPN will only be allowed if all required attributes are provided. * The following **ERP-side transactions** will enforce this validation:\ ✅ **Inventory Adjustment**\ ✅ **Batch-Edit LPN Info**\ ✅ **Receive ASN & MO (Produce and Disassemble)** * If required attributes are missing, an **error will be displayed**, preventing the action. **ERP-Side Exceptions (Validations Skipped)** The attribute validation **will be skipped** for the following operations to ensure flexibility:\ **Quick Receive (PO)**\ **Quick Produce (MO)**\ **Quick Disassemble (MO)** {% hint style="info" %} These operations will proceed without validation, preventing workflow disruptions. {% endhint %} *** #### **WMS-Side Validations & Impact on Transactions** #### **A. Receiving Module** * If an item has a **"Required"** LPN attribute, it must be provided before completing the receiving process. * **Key Changes:** * The **LPN Attribute page** will **always be displayed** during receiving, even if the app config **"Suppress LPN Attributes Page in Receiving"** is enabled. * **Receiving will only be allowed if all required attributes are provided.** #### **B. Putaway By Item** * **Scenario:** If an LPN does not contain the required attributes for a putaway item, an **error message** will be displayed, preventing the putaway process. #### **C. Move Inventory By Item** * The same validation applies when **moving inventory** using the **Move Inventory by Item** function. * If an LPN lacks the required attributes, the move will be **blocked** until the missing attributes are provided. *** #### **Important Notes** 🔹 **LPN Attribute Hierarchy:** * An **LPN attribute will be marked as "Required"** if **any item** in the LPN has that attribute marked as required. * This ensures that mixed-item LPNS **maintain attribute integrity** across all processes. #### **How to Use This Feature?** #### **Step 1: Mark Required Attributes for an Item** 1. Navigate to **Create Item** in XoroERP. 2. Define **LPN attributes** for the item. 3. Check the **"Required"** box for attributes that must be provided during transactions. 4. Save the item. #### **Step 2: Ensure Compliance During Transactions** * Before performing actions like **Receiving, Putaway, or Moving Inventory**, ensure that required attributes are provided. * If an LPN lacks required attributes, an error will be displayed, preventing the transaction. This enhancement strengthens inventory management **by ensuring all necessary LPN attributes are captured before processing**, leading to a **more accurate and controlled workflow**. ### **New Fields Added to Receive ASN Module** #### **Overview** We have introduced new fields in the **Receive ASN (Advanced Shipping Notice)** module to enhance shipment tracking and vendor management. These additions ensure better alignment between ASN data and shipment records, improving overall visibility and accuracy in the receiving process.
*** #### **Key Enhancements & Functionality** #### **A. New Fields Added to the Receive ASN Module** The following fields have been introduced in the **Receive ASN** screen: 1. **Vendor(s):** * Stores **comma-separated PO Numbers**, allowing users to quickly identify purchase orders associated with the ASN. * Enhances traceability between ASNs and vendor shipments. 2. **Trailer#** * Stores the **trailer number** associated with the shipment, improving inbound logistics tracking. 3. **BOL# (Bill of Lading Number)** * Captures the **BOL number**, ensuring alignment between ASN data and shipment documentation. * Helps in verification and compliance during receiving. 4. **Carrier** * Stores the **carrier name** responsible for delivering the ASN shipment. * Ensures consistency in transportation records. #### **B. Field Consistency with Edit Shipment Info** * **Carrier, Tracking#, and BOL#** fields now match the corresponding fields in the **Edit Shipment Info** section in the ASN Search Centre.
* Ensures uniform data handling across **shipment editing and ASN receiving**. ### **Enhancement in Create Wave – LPN Number Prioritization & Sorting** #### **Module:** Sales Order → Create Wave *** #### **Overview** We are introducing a new enhancement in the **Create Wave** module that improves **LPN (License Plate Number) management and prioritization** when generating waves from the **Sales Order** module. With this update, users can now: * **Manually or automatically assign multiple LPN numbers** when creating a wave. * **Prioritize LPN allocations** based on sorting criteria such as **Expiry Date, Manufacturing Date, or Lot Number Sequence**. * **Ensure systematic picking and allocation of inventory** based on wave template rules. This enhancement provides greater flexibility in **inventory wave processing**, ensuring that orders are fulfilled based on predefined LPN allocation rules.
*** #### **Key Enhancements & Functionality** #### **A. New "LPN Numbers" Field in Create Wave Pop-Up** * A new field **“LPN Numbers”** has been added to the **Create Wave** pop-up when generating a wave. * Users can now enter **multiple LPN numbers** when manually or automatically creating a wave. * Once the **Wave Template** is selected, the system will fetch all items associated with the **specified LPN numbers** while also considering the **wave template criteria rules**. #### **B. Prioritization of LPN Numbers in Assign Consolidation Location Window** * The **Assign Consolidation Location Window** in the Create Wave module now prioritizes the LPN numbers provided in the Create Wave pop-up. * Priority assignment occurs **only when a Wave Template is selected** and the **Criteria Rule Type field has a value**. * This ensures that items associated with the **entered LPNs are sorted and prioritized** accordingly during wave creation. #### **C. New Option to Prioritize LPN Allocations by Attribute Sorting** * Added an option to **prioritize LPN allocations** based on **specific attribute sorting orders**, including:\ ✅ **Expiry Date** – Ensures that items closest to expiry are picked first (FIFO approach).\ ✅ **Manufacturing Date** – Allows prioritization based on production dates.\ ✅ **Lot Number Sequence** – Ensures sequential picking based on lot numbers. * This feature enhances **inventory control**, ensuring that the most relevant stock is allocated to fulfill orders efficiently. *** #### **How to Use This Feature?** #### **Step 1: Create a Wave with LPN Numbers** Navigate to **Sales Order → Create Wave** in XoroERP.\ In the **Create Wave** pop-up, enter multiple **LPN Numbers** in the newly added field.\ Select the **Wave Template** to apply the allocation rules.\ The system will fetch all **items associated with the LPN numbers** while also considering wave template criteria.
#### **Step 2: Prioritize LPN Allocations in Assign Consolidation Location Window** Ensure that the **Wave Template** has been selected.\ If the **Criteria Rule Type** field has a value, the system will **prioritize** LPNs accordingly. #### **Step 3: Enable Attribute-Based Sorting for LPN Allocations** Set up the preferred **LPN sorting criteria** in the system: * **Expiry Date** (for FIFO-based picking). * **Manufacturing Date** (for batch control). * **Lot Number Sequence** (for sequential allocation).\ The system will allocate LPNs based on the **selected sorting order**, ensuring efficient stock utilization. This enhancement significantly **improves LPN prioritization, allocation efficiency, and inventory accuracy** in wave processing, making order fulfillment **smarter and more systematic**. ### **Enhanced Sorting in Wave Processing – "Ascending/Descending" Field in Wave Template Module** #### **Module:** Sales Order → Create Wave & Wave Template #### **Overview** Building upon our previous enhancement that introduced **LPN prioritization and sorting rules in the Create Wave module**, we are now introducing an additional **sorting parameter** in the **Wave Template module** to provide greater flexibility and control over inventory allocation. With this update, users can now define whether sorting should be applied in **Ascending or Descending order** when applying wave template criteria. This enhancement ensures that when both **LPN numbers and a Wave Template** are provided, the system **first prioritizes the specified LPNs** and then **sorts the items based on the selected order**. This enhancement further refines inventory allocation by ensuring that items are not only selected based on LPN assignment but are also **sorted in the most efficient manner for order fulfillment**.
*** #### **Key Enhancements & Functionality** #### **A. New "Ascending/Descending" Field in Wave Template's Add Condition Popup** * A new **sorting field** named **"Ascending or Descending"** has been added to the **Wave Template module’s Add Condition pop-up**. * This field allows users to define the sorting order for inventory allocation based on selected attributes such as: * **Expiry Date** (FIFO or LIFO picking). * **Manufacturing Date** (Oldest or Newest batch prioritization). * **Lot Number Sequence** (Lowest to Highest or Highest to Lowest). #### **B. Contextual Integration with Previous Release (LPN Prioritization & Sorting)** * In our **previous release**, we introduced the **LPN Numbers field** in the **Create Wave** module, which allowed users to: Specify **multiple LPN numbers** during wave creation.\ Ensure the system **fetches items only from those LPNs**.\ Sort those items **based on the wave template criteria**. * With the **new sorting field**, users now have additional control over how **items are sorted** after being selected based on **LPN priority**. * **Example Scenario:** * If an LPN has multiple items with different expiry dates, and the wave template rule is based on **Expiry Date**, users can now choose whether to sort in **Ascending (earliest expiry first) or Descending (latest expiry first) order**. #### **C. Priority Sorting Workflow in Wave Processing** * **If both LPN Numbers and Wave Template are provided:** * The system **first prioritizes items based on the provided LPN numbers**.\ The system then **sorts the selected items** using the **Wave Template criteria**.\ The new **"Ascending or Descending" field** determines whether sorting is applied from **lowest to highest** or **highest to lowest**. * **If only the Wave Template is provided (without LPN Numbers):**\ The system will **apply the sorting order directly to all eligible inventory** based on the wave template conditions. **How to Use This Feature?** #### **Step 1: Configure Sorting Order in Wave Template Module** * Navigate to **Wave Template Module** in XoroERP. * Open the **Add Condition Pop-up** and select the attribute to be used for sorting (e.g., **Expiry Date, Lot Number, Manufacturing Date**). * Choose either **Ascending (Oldest First) or Descending (Newest First)** based on business needs. * Save the template. #### **Step 2: Create a Wave Using LPN Numbers & Wave Template** * Navigate to **Sales Order → Create Wave**. * Enter **LPN Numbers** in the newly added field. * Select a **Wave Template** that includes sorting rules.
The system will: * Fetch **only the items from the specified LPNs**. * Apply **sorting criteria from the Wave Template** based on the **Ascending/Descending selection**. * Prioritize inventory allocation accordingly. ### **New "Upload RMA" Module in XoroERP** #### **Module:** Upload RMA **Overview** We are excited to introduce a new module in XoroERP—**Upload RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)**—which streamlines the process of creating and managing RMAs in bulk. This enhancement allows users to **upload multiple RMAs** using a structured **CSV file**, improving efficiency and accuracy in the returns process. This module **supports only the creation of Direct RMAs**, enabling businesses to quickly process return requests from customers while maintaining seamless integration with existing RMA workflows.
*** #### **Key Features & Functionality** #### **A. Upload Multiple RMAs in Bulk** * Users can now **upload multiple RMAs** through the **Upload RMA module**. * Eliminates the need for manual data entry, reducing errors and saving time. #### **B. Required Fields in Upload RMA CSV** To ensure proper data mapping and validation, the **Upload RMA module** requires the following fields in the CSV file: * **ThirdPartyRefNo** – Reference number for third-party tracking. * **StoreCode** – Identifies the store associated with the return request. * **CustomerName** – Specifies the customer initiating the return. * **TxnDate** – Transaction date of the return. * **ExchangeRate** – Conversion rate for transactions in multiple currencies. * **AccntReceivableName** – Account receivable details linked to the return. * **ItemNumber** – Unique identifier of the item being returned. * **Qty** – Quantity of the item being returned. * **ReturnNotes** – Additional notes or reasons for the return. * **CurrencyCode** – Specifies the currency in which the return is being processed. #### **Conditional Visibility of the "Quality" Field** * The **"Quality" field** in the **RMA File Upload Defaults** is displayed only when **LPN tracking** is enabled. * This ensures that quality-related data is captured only when required for **LPN-based inventory tracking**. #### **D. Support for RMA Header Custom Fields** * Added **support for RMA Header Custom Fields** in the Upload RMA module. * Users can now include **customized header fields** in their CSV uploads, ensuring better flexibility and alignment with business-specific return workflows. *** #### **How to Use This Feature?** * Navigate to **Upload RMA Module** in XoroERP.
* Prepare the CSV file with all required fields (**ThirdPartyRefNo, StoreCode, CustomerName, etc.**). * Upload the file to process multiple RMAs in one go. * If **LPN is enabled**, the **Quality** field will be displayed. * Review and validate the uploaded data before finalizing the RMAs. This enhancement improves **efficiency, accuracy, and flexibility** in RMA management, ensuring a **streamlined return processing experience**. ### **Activity Tracking across Multiple Modules** #### **Feature:** Activity Tracking Enhancement *** #### **Overview** We have introduced **Activity Tracking feature** across multiple modules in **XoroERP**, providing users with greater transparency and accountability when updating records. This enhancement allows users to track and review **field-level changes**, ensuring that any modifications to critical data are recorded for auditing and compliance purposes. With this update, users can: * **View changes** in the **Activity Tracking Data Centre** for various modules, such as Sales Order and Purchase Order. * **Access old and new values** of updated fields directly from their respective module centres. * **Easily navigate to the Activity Tracking Data Centre** from both the **header and line-level options** in the create/edit pages. This improvement enhances **data integrity, accountability, and traceability**, making it easier for users to track changes and maintain accurate records. *** #### **Key Enhancements & Functionality** #### **A. Grant Access to Activity Tracking Data Centre** * To enable activity tracking, access must be **granted via Access Manager**. * Once access is provided, users will be able to view tracking data across different modules. #### **B. View Updated Field Values in Module Centres** * The **Activity Tracking Data Centre** now logs the **old and new values** of updated fields for their respective modules. * For example: * Sales Order updates will be logged and visible in the **Sales Order Centre**. * Purchase Order updates will be logged and visible in the **Purchase Order Centre**. * This ensures users can easily track what changes were made, who made them, and when they occurred. #### **C. Show Activity Option in Header Options Drop-Down** * A new **"Show Activity"** option has been added to the **header options drop-down** in **every Create/Edit page** (e.g., **Create SO, Create PO**).
* Clicking this option opens a popup window displaying the activity logs for the selected record. * This allows users to quickly review changes without navigating manually. #### **D. Show Activity Option at Line Level in the Context View** * A similar **"Show Activity"** option has been added at the **line level** of the same pages. * Users can **right-click on a line item** and select **Show Activity** to view tracking details specific to that line.
* This feature improves traceability at the **line-item level**, ensuring granular visibility into data changes. *** #### **How to Use This Feature?** * **Grant Access to Activity Tracking Data Centre:** * Navigate to **Access Manager** and provide access to relevant users. * **View Updated Field Values in Module Centres:** * Go to any module’s **data centre** (e.g., **Sales Order Centre**). * Check the activity log to see **old and new values** for updated fields. * **Use the Show Activity Option in Header Drop-Down:** * Open a **Create/Edit page** (e.g., **Create Sales Order, Create Purchase Order**). * Click the **"Show Activity"** option in the **header drop-down menu**. * The system redirects to the **Activity Tracking Data Centre**, displaying logs for the selected record. * **Use the Show Activity Option at Line Level:** * Right-click on a **line item** in the **Create/Edit page**. * Click **"Show Activity"** to view tracking logs for that specific line item. This enhancement ensures **better data transparency, stronger audit trails, and more efficient tracking of updates**, helping businesses maintain accurate and compliant records. # March 2.0 2025 Release ### Added "Shipping Carrier" Column in Wave Centre We have introduced a new **"Shipping Carrier"** column in the **Wave Centre**, available at both the **header** and **detail** levels. This provides users with greater visibility into the shipping carrier assigned to each wave, improving tracking and logistics management.
### **Added "Item Image" Column in BOM Item Line** We have added a new "Item Image" column in the Bill Of Materials module at the Bill Of Material Component level. This update allows users to easily view associated item images directly within the BOM, improving identification and accuracy in the manufacturing process.
### Added "Inv Average Unit Cost" field in the Bill Of Material Centre Workflow We have introduced a new field, **"Inv Average Unit Cost,"** at multiple levels within the BOM workflow. This ensures that users can track and analyze the **inventory average unit cost** of BOM components across various modules, improving cost management and decision-making. #### **Feature Details:** 1. **BOM Centre (Detail Level):** * A new column, **"Inv Average Unit Cost,"** has been added to the **detail-level view** of the BOM Centre.
* This allows users to see the inventory average unit cost of each BOM component at a granular level, providing better insights into material costs. * Users can efficiently analyze BOM costs directly from the BOM Centre without needing to navigate elsewhere. 2. **Bill of Material Module (Item Level):** * The **"Inv Average Unit Cost"** column has been integrated into the **Bill of Materials module** at the **Bill of Material Component level**.
* This enhancement enables users to track cost variations across individual BOM components, helping in cost estimation and budgeting. * By having this cost metric available at the item level, users can make informed decisions when updating or modifying BOM structures. 3. **BOM Subform:** * The **"Inv Average Unit Cost"** column is now included in the **Bill of Materials subform**, ensuring consistent cost tracking across related workflows.
* Users can easily and quickly view and verify the inventory average unit cost within the BOM subform. ### Added "GrossAmount" Column in Sales Order Export Template A new column, **"GrossAmount,"** has been added to the **Sales Order Export Template** to provide users with a more comprehensive view of order values. The column displays the total value of the sales order before applying discounts, taxes, or additional charges. This ensures that businesses can easily track and analyze the total value of sales orders before any deductions, such as discounts or taxes. #### How does it work? * Users can access this update through the **Data Export Centre** by selecting the **Sales Order** view and downloading the Sales Order records.
* The exported file will now contain the **GrossAmount** field alongside other standard order details, improving reporting and financial analysis.
### Enhanced Invoice Payment with Custom Fields and Customer Payment Terms The **Invoice Payment Module** has been enhanced to provide more detailed and customizable financial data, improving visibility and efficiency in payment processing. #### Feature Details * **Custom Fields Columns in Invoice Header:** Custom fields from the **Invoice Header** are now available as columns in the **Invoice Payment Module**. This addition allows you to view and manage custom data directly within the payment module, streamlining your workflow and providing better visibility into invoice details.
* **Customer Payment Term Column:** A new column, **"Customer Payment Term,"** has been added to the **Invoice Payment Module**. This column automatically displays the **default payment term** associated with the customer, making it easier to track and manage payment deadlines and terms.
### Enhancements in Transfer Purchase Order (TPO) and Transfer Sales Order (TSO) We have introduced a series of enhancements in the **Transfer Purchase Order (TPO)** and **Transfer Sales Order (TSO)** modules, designed to optimize transfer order processing, improve automation, and provide better visibility into inventory movements. #### Feature Details #### 1. Quick Receive in Transfer Purchase Order (TPO) The **Quick Receive** functionality has been introduced in the Transfer Purchase Order (TPO) module, allowing users to efficiently receive items with minimal steps. This feature enables faster processing of received inventory without requiring users to manually navigate through multiple receiving steps.
#### 2. Quick Ship in Transfer Sales Order (TSO) The **Quick Ship** functionality is now available in the Transfer Sales Order (TSO) module. This enhancement allows users to expedite the shipping process by automatically shipping items without requiring detailed manual processing.
#### 3. Auto Release for TPO and TSO To further automate transfer order processing, the **Auto Release** functionality has been extended to both Transfer Purchase Orders and Transfer Sales Orders. * **Auto Release Purchase Order**: Automatically releases Transfer Purchase Orders upon creation, if the "Auto Release Purchase Order" app config is enabled.
* **Auto Release Sales Order**: Automatically releases Transfer Sales Orders upon creation, if the "Auto Release Sales Order" app config is enabled.
This functionality works similarly to the existing Auto Release features in Sales Orders (SO) and Purchase Orders (PO), enhancing operational efficiency and reducing delays in transfer order processing. #### 4. Incoming Deliveries Subform in TSO A new **Incoming Deliveries** subform has been added to the **Availability** field at the line-item level in the Transfer Sales Order module. When users click on the Availability quantity, the subform will display detailed information about: * Purchase Orders * Transfer Purchase Orders * Expected Delivery Dates * Quantities in Transit
This provides users with comprehensive visibility into incoming stock, helping them make informed decisions regarding inventory availability and order fulfillment. ### Added "On Hand Qty" Column in Create Disassemble Manufacturing Order Pop-Up A new column, **On Hand Qty**, has been added to the **Create Manufacturing Order (MO) Disassemble** pop-up window in the Item Inventory Snapshot module. This column will display the quantity of the selected manufacturable item that is currently available in inventory, providing users with real-time inventory information while creating disassemble MOs. #### **How It Works** 1. Navigate to the Item Inventory Snapshot module and select a manufacturable item. 2. Go to **Options > Disassemble**.
3. The "Create Manufacturing Order" confirmation modal will appear. 4. The **"On Hand Qty"** column is now displayed in the item details section of this modal, showing the current on-hand quantity of the selected item.
### Enhanced Advanced Variant Finder with Option 3 Support We have added support for setting quantity for Option 3 products in the Advanced Variant Finder. Previously, the system would only should two variants for the products (Option 1 and Option 2) did not allow users to specify quantities for Option 3. Instead, it automatically assigned the same quantity as Option 2, limiting flexibility in variant selection. **Feature Details:** * A new dropdown "Option 3" has been introduced in the advance variant finder, which is visible only when a product has three options.
* Users can now select Option 3 from the dropdown and specify the quantity independently.
* This enhancement ensures greater control over product variants, improving accuracy in order management. ### Exclusion of Third-Party Source in Auto Inventory Adjustment Webhook We’ve added a new feature that allows you to exclude Third-Party Source information from your webhook logs when automatic inventory adjustments are triggered by invoices. This feature is only available when LPNs are disabled. #### Feature Details: * The inventory update webhook can now exclude Third-Party Source during invoice auto inventory adjustment. * When this feature is enabled, when you access the webhook log for the "Inventory/Update" from the Webhook Centre, the “Third Party Source” will no longer appear in the third-party orders.
* This helps you avoid unnecessary changes to third-party inventory and keeps your logs cleaner. {% hint style="danger" %} **To enable this functionality, please contact our support team.** {% endhint %} ### Introducing Global Allocation Feature Global Allocation, also known as Auto Allocation, is a powerful feature that automates the process of inventory allocation to sales orders when a purchase order (PO) containing the relevant items is received. This feature helps streamline inventory management and order fulfillment by automatically assigning inventory to sales orders based on certain predefined rules. The process can be configured for both same-store and inter-store sales orders, offering flexibility in how inventory is distributed across different locations. #### How Does Global Allocation Work? The Global Allocation feature is triggered when a purchase order (PO) containing the relevant items is received. Once the PO is received into the system, the inventory will automatically be allocated to the sales orders that require the items. The allocation process prioritizes older sales orders by considering two criteria: the order date and the create date. First, the system checks the order date—meaning that sales orders that were placed earlier will receive inventory first. If several orders share the same order date, the system then uses the create date—the date when the sales order was officially created in the system—to determine which order gets inventory next. Essentially, this means that the oldest sales orders (first by order date, then by create date) will receive inventory before newer orders. Here’s how the auto allocation process works: 1. **Receiving the PO:** The process begins when a Purchase Order (PO) is received in the system. The system will then identify any unallocated sales orders that require the same items as those listed on the PO. {% hint style="info" %} It is important to note that only regular POs are considered for inventory allocation in the auto-allocation process. Dropship POs are not considered for auto-allocation process. {% endhint %} 2. **Allocation to Same-Store Sales Orders:** Inventory is allocated directly to sales orders within the same store where the PO was received. The system will prioritize allocating inventory to these sales orders first. The system checks for unallocated sales orders in the same store and ensures the oldest orders are fulfilled first, in order of their order date and creation date. 3. **Allocation to Inter-Store Orders:** * **TPO and TSO Creation:** For inter-store orders, the inventory cannot be allocated directly as it needs to be transferred from the store where the PO was received to the store where the sales order is located. In this case, the system automatically triggers the creation of Transfer Purchase Orders (TPOs) and Transfer Sales Orders (TSOs). The TPO is linked to the respective respective sales order to which the inventory will be allocated * **Wave and ASN Creation for Inter-Store Orders:** When the system creates the TPO and TSO, it also automatically generates a wave for the TSO and an Advanced Shipment Notice (ASN) for the TPO. * **Manual Shipping and Receiving:** Once the TPO is created, users need to manually ship the TSO from the source store and receive the TPO at the destination store. This manual process ensures that the inventory is physically moved between stores. * **Auto Allocation after Receiving the TPO:** After the TPO is received, the inventory becomes available for allocation to the sales order at the destination store. The system will then automatically allocate the inventory to the linked sales order and generate a wave for the sales order, which prepares it for shipping. #### Checking Allocation Logs To enhance tracking and visibility of the allocation process, we have introduced allocation logs. These logs give details about the allocation process, so users can understand exactly how and when inventory was assigned. Users can access these logs through ASN subform and the Entity Logs module. **ASN Subform** * Users can view the auto allocated inventory for a purchase order by accessing the ASN subform. * Open the **Purchase Order (PO)** and go to the **History tab** of the PO. * Double-click on the ASN line on the History tab to open the **ASN subform**. * In the ASN subform, there’s a newly added **"Allocation Logs" tab**. When you click on this tab, it will show the allocation details specific to that PO. This allows you to see exactly how inventory was allocated to sales orders connected to that PO. **Entity Logs** * A new **Entity Log** center has been introduced. This module provides a comprehensive list of all logs related to **automatic allocations** that happen within the system. * The **Entity Logs** will show you not just individual PO allocations but all system-wide automatic allocations that have been executed. #### **Setting Up Global Allocation** The **Global Allocation** feature is controlled via a set of configurable options, which determine how the system behaves during the receipt of POs and the allocation of inventory to sales orders. To enable **Global Allocation**, you must configure the following app config: #### **Auto Allocation Type for Allocating Sales Orders on PO Receiving** This configuration controls how the system allocates inventory when a PO is received, determining the scope and behavior of the auto-allocation process. #### **Configuration Options:** 1. **Do Not Auto Allocate** * If this option is selected, the system will not automatically allocate inventory to sales orders when POs are received. 2. **Same Store Only** * If this option is selected, the system will only allocate inventory to sales orders within the same store where the PO is received. The system will identify sales orders in the same store with unallocated quantities and allocate the received inventory accordingly. 3. **Same Store and Inter-Store (Transfers)** * If this option is selected, the system will allocate inventory both to sales orders within the same store and to sales orders in other stores. * Inventory is first allocated to sales orders within the same store. * For sales orders in other stores, **Transfer Purchase Orders (TPOs)** and **Transfer Sales Orders (TSOs)** are created to manage inter-store transfers. #### **Selecting the Store for Inter-Store Transfers:** When the **Same Store and Inter-Store (Transfers)** option is selected, you can define which stores will be involved in the allocation process through the following app config: * **Select Stores for Auto Allocation (Enabled for Same Store and Inter-Store Transfers):** This app config allows you to define which specific stores can be involved in the auto-allocation process for the inter-store orders. If defined, the auto-allocation process will only work for the selected stores. Please note that if no stores are selected in the app config, the inter-store auto allocation will work for every store in the system. #### **Eligibility Criteria for Auto Allocation:** You can fine-tune which sales orders are eligible for auto allocation by configuring the following app config: * **Eligibility Criteria for Orders in Auto Allocation on PO Receiving**\ This configuration determines which sales orders will be considered for auto allocation during the PO receiving process, ensuring only the relevant orders are included. #### **Configuration Options:** 1. **All Orders** * If this option is selected, the system will scan all open sales orders with unallocated quantities and include them in the auto-allocation process. 2. **Specific Orders** * If this option is selected, only sales orders with the “**Auto Lock Partially Allocated SO?**” flag enabled will be considered for auto allocation. #### **Wave Management for Auto Allocation:** You can manage wave allocation for sales orders by configuring the following app config: * **One Order, One Wave with Auto Merge for Fully Allocatable Waves**\ When enabled, this setting ensures that each wave contains only a single sales order. The system automatically merges waves when the sales order is fully allocatable. If an order is partially allocated, a locked wave is created, preventing further changes. Once the remaining items are available, the inventory is allocated, and the new wave is merged into the first wave. Once all items are allocated, the wave will be automatically unlocked and merged. Please note that this config does not apply to dropship waves. ### Enhancement to Global Allocation - Dropship Handling We have introduced a significant enhancement to the Global Allocation feature with the addition of the Dropship handling. This enhancement streamlines the order fulfillment process, particularly for items fulfilled via dropshipping, ensuring efficient handling within the auto-allocation framework. #### Feature Details * The auto-allocation feature has been updated to manage dropship items seamlessly alongside regular inventory items during the allocation process. * When a sales order contains a dropship item, and the corresponding dropship Purchase Order (PO) has been generated, the system will automatically **exclude the dropship item from the auto-allocation wave**. * The system will **mark the item as shipped** once the dropship PO is received, ensuring streamlined order processing. * **Auto-allocation for other items** (non-dropship items and dropship items for which Dropship PO has not been generated) in the same sales order will continue to function as usual, ensuring efficient inventory management. ### **Batch Manufacturing & Wave Processing** #### **Modules:** Sales Order Center, Wave Processing, Manufacturing *** #### **Overview** This release introduces significant enhancements in **XoroERP’s Sales Order Center module** and **XoroWMS**, focusing on **batch manufacturing automation, improved wave processing, and a new Manufacturing module in WMS**. These updates enhance **efficiency, automation, and accuracy** in managing **batch manufacturing orders (BMO), wave assignments, and manufacturing processes**. The key highlights of this release include: * **Automated Batch Manufacturing Order (BMO) creation** from **Sales Order Center**. * **Enhancements to Wave Templates** for **LPN-based selection and prioritization**. * **Optimized MO wave picking and staging** in WMS with a new **Manufacturing tab** in the **Picking module**. * **Introduction of the Assembly module** in WMS for **MO Finished Good assembly**. * **Auto-allocation of linked Sales Orders** after assembly completion. *** #### **Enhancements in XoroERP** #### **A. Batch Manufacturing Order (BMO) Workflow Enhancement** To streamline manufacturing order creation, XoroERP now allows **automated batch MO generation** directly from **Batch Sales Orders**, eliminating the need for **manual MO creation**. **New "Generate Batch MO" Option in SO Centre** * The **Generate Batch MO** feature enables users to create BMOs for **all manufacturable items** present in the selected **Sales Orders (SO)**. * Users can select one of the following methods for batch MO generation: * **Item-Based MO Generation**: Creates **one MO per Item**, aggregating total quantity across all selected SOs. * **Sales Order-Based MO Generation**: Generates **one MO per Item per Sales Order**, keeping MOs linked to their respective SOs. #### **B. Wave Template Enhancements** * **New LPN Selection Capability**: Wave templates now allow **specific selection of LPNs** (lot numbers) during the waving process. * **Configurable Sorting for LPN Attributes**: Items in waves can now be sorted based on attributes like **Expiry Date, Manufacturing Date, or Lot Numbers**. * **Grouping of Manufacturing Orders (MO) by Finished Goods**: XoroERP now enables **grouping of MOs** by finished goods across all associated Sales Orders when generating BMOs. #### **C. Enhancements in Batch MO Subform** * Users can **select Carton Break Rule and Priority Code** when clicking **"Start Picking"** in the **Batch MO subform**.
* The **MO wave automatically applies the correct carton break rule and priority code**, ensuring optimal inventory allocation. *** #### **Enhancements in XoroWMS** #### **A. Wave Assignment Process Enhancement** * Users can now **Pick and Stage MO waves** via the **WMS Pick and Stage Module**. * If **multiple OLPNs** are generated during MO wave picking, they **must be consolidated before the assembly process** to ensure that all raw materials are available in a single OLPN. * **New "Manufacturing" Tab on the Pick Assignment Screen**:
* Allows users to **search and assign OLPNs** by entering either the **Batch Manufacturing Order Number** or **Batch Sales Order Number**. * Introduces a **new "Manufacturing" filter** in **Pick Task Assignment** to filter **MO waves**. * Waves can now be searched based on **Wave Number, Batch Number, or Order Number**. #### **B. New "Manufacturing" Module in XoroWMS – Assembly Process** A new **Manufacturing module** has been added to WMS, enabling users to assemble **MO Finished Goods** efficiently.
**1. Scan OLPN** * Users must scan the **OLPN associated with the MO wave**. * The system validates the OLPN on the **"Enter" event**, ensuring it is linked to an MO. * Displays two tables: * **BOM (Bill of Materials) List** * **Linked Order List** (only if the MO is linked to multiple SOs).
**2. Linked Order Line Selection** * Clicking a **linked order line** updates the **Required Quantity** in the BOM table based on the linked order’s quantity.
**3. Assembly Process & Validations** * **Confirm Assembly**: Clicking **"Accept"** renders a confirmation pop-up displaying: * LPN Attributes * **To-Be-Produced Quantity of MO** * Users can update **LPN attributes** and **reduce the to-be-produced quantity** if needed. * If the **quantity is reduced**, a **Move Residual Quantity to ILPN** modal is displayed. * Upon confirmation: * The **excess raw material** is moved to the designated ILPN. * The **MO Finished Good is assembled**. #### **C. Validations in the Assembly Process** * **All raw materials must be present in a single OLPN** before assembling the MO Finished Good. * **Users cannot increase the "To-Be-Produced" quantity**. * The **OLPN must be at a staging location** for assembly to proceed. #### **D. Auto-Allocation of Linked SO (XoroERP)** * Once the **MO Finished Good is assembled**, the linked **Sales Order (SO) is automatically allocated and marked as "Picked and Staged"** at the same OLPN. * This eliminates the need for **manual allocation**, ensuring faster order fulfillment. *** #### **How to Use These Enhancements?** 1. **Generate a Batch MO from SO Centre**: * Select **Item-Based MO Generation** or **Sales Order-Based MO Generation**. 2. **Apply Wave Template Enhancements**: * Use **LPN selection and sorting criteria** in the wave template. 3. **Pick and Stage MO Waves in WMS**: * Use the **Manufacturing Tab in Pick Assignment** to consolidate OLPNs. 4. **Scan OLPN & Assemble Finished Goods in Manufacturing Module**: * Scan OLPN → Verify BOM & Linked Orders → Confirm Assembly. 5. **Auto-Allocate Linked SO**: * Upon assembly, the linked SO is automatically allocated and staged. {% hint style="info" %} In the case of a partial pick for an MO wave, the system will restrict unassignment of the task. {% endhint %} *** * **For further assistance**, contact the **XoroERP/XoroWMS support team**. These enhancements improve **manufacturing automation, wave efficiency, and warehouse operations**, ensuring a **faster, more accurate, and streamlined fulfillment process**. 🚀 **XoroERP & XoroWMS Team** 🚀 ### **Enhancements in XoroERP & XoroWMS – Batch Manufacturing & Wave Processing** #### **Modules:** Sales Order, Wave Processing, Manufacturing *** #### **Overview** This release introduces significant enhancements in **XoroERP’s Sales Order module** and **XoroWMS**, focusing on **batch manufacturing automation, improved wave processing, and a new Manufacturing module in WMS**. These updates enhance **efficiency, automation, and accuracy** in managing **batch manufacturing orders (BMO), wave assignments, and manufacturing processes**. The key highlights of this release include: * **Automated Batch Manufacturing Order (BMO) creation** from **Sales Orders**. * **Enhancements to Wave Templates** for **LPN-based selection and prioritization**. * **Optimized MO wave picking and staging** in WMS with a new **Manufacturing tab** in the **Picking module**. * **Introduction of the Assembly module** in WMS for **MO Finished Good assembly**. * **Auto-allocation of linked Sales Orders** after assembly completion. *** #### **Enhancements in XoroERP** #### **A. Batch Manufacturing Order (BMO) Workflow Enhancement** To streamline manufacturing order creation, XoroERP now allows **automated batch MO generation** directly from **Batch Sales Orders**, eliminating the need for **manual MO creation**. **New "Generate Batch MO" Option in SO Centre** * The **Generate Batch MO** feature enables users to create BMOs for **all manufacturable items** present in the selected **Sales Orders (SO)**. * Users can select one of the following methods for batch MO generation: * **Item-Based MO Generation**: Creates **one MO per Item**, aggregating total quantity across all selected SOs. * **Sales Order-Based MO Generation**: Generates **one MO per Item per Sales Order**, keeping MOs linked to their respective SOs. #### **B. Wave Template Enhancements** * **New LPN Selection Capability**: Wave templates now allow **specific selection of LPNs** (lot numbers) during the waving process. * **Configurable Sorting for LPN Attributes**: Items in waves can now be sorted based on attributes like **Expiry Date, Manufacturing Date, or Lot Numbers**. * **Grouping of Manufacturing Orders (MO) by Finished Goods**: XoroERP now enables **grouping of MOs** by finished goods across all associated Sales Orders when generating BMOs. #### **C. Enhancements in Batch MO Subform** * Users can **select Carton Break Rule and Priority Code** when clicking **"Start Picking"** in the **Batch MO subform**. * The **MO wave automatically applies the correct carton break rule and priority code**, ensuring optimal inventory allocation. *** #### **Enhancements in XoroWMS** #### **A. Wave Assignment Process Enhancement** * Users can now **Pick and Stage MO waves** via the **WMS Pick and Stage Module using the Manufacturing filter**. * If **multiple OLPNs** are generated during MO wave picking, they **must be consolidated before the assembly process** to ensure that all raw materials are available in a single OLPN. * **New "Manufacturing" Tab in the Pick Assignment Screen**: * Allows users to **search and assign OLPNs** by entering either the **Batch Manufacturing Order Number** or **Batch Sales Order Number**. * Introduces a **new "Manufacturing" filter** in **Pick Task Assignment** to filter **MO waves**. * Waves can now be searched based on **Wave Number, Batch Number, or Order Number**. #### **B. New "Manufacturing" Module in XoroWMS – Assembly Process** A new **Manufacturing module** has been added to WMS, enabling users to assemble **MO Finished Goods** efficiently. **1. Scan OLPN** * Users must scan the **OLPN associated with the MO wave**. * The system validates the OLPN on the **"Enter" event**, ensuring it is linked to an MO. * Displays two tables: * **BOM (Bill of Materials) List** * **Linked Order List** (only if the MO is linked to multiple SOs). **2. Linked Order Line Selection** * Clicking a **linked order line** updates the **Required Quantity** in the BOM table based on the linked order’s quantity. **3. Assembly Process & Validations** * **Confirm Assembly**: Clicking **"Accept"** renders a confirmation pop-up displaying: * LPN Attributes * **To-Be-Produced Quantity of MO** * Users can update **LPN attributes** and **reduce the to-be-produced quantity** if needed. * If the **quantity is reduced**, a **Move Residual Quantity to ILPN** modal is displayed. * Upon confirmation: * The **excess raw material** is moved to the designated ILPN. * The **MO Finished Good is assembled**. #### **C. Validations in the Assembly Process** * **All raw materials must be present in a single OLPN** before assembling the MO Finished Good. * **Users cannot increase the "To-Be-Produced" quantity**. * The **OLPN must be at a staging location** for assembly to proceed. #### **D. Auto-Allocation of Linked SO (XoroERP)** * Once the **MO Finished Good is assembled**, the linked **Sales Order (SO) is automatically allocated and marked as "Picked and Staged"** at the same OLPN. * This eliminates the need for **manual allocation**, ensuring faster order fulfillment. *** #### **5. How to Use These Enhancements?** 1. **Generate a Batch MO from SO Centre**: * Select **Item-Based MO Generation** or **Sales Order-Based MO Generation**. 2. **Apply Wave Template Enhancements**: * Use **LPN selection and sorting criteria** in the wave template. 3. **Pick and Stage MO Waves in WMS**: * Use the **Manufacturing Tab in Pick Assignment** to consolidate OLPNs. 4. **Scan OLPN & Assemble Finished Goods in Manufacturing Module**: * Scan OLPN → Verify BOM & Linked Orders → Confirm Assembly. 5. **Auto-Allocate Linked SO**: * Upon assembly, the linked SO is automatically allocated and staged. *** #### **Next Steps** * **Warehouse teams should use the new Manufacturing module** for seamless MO Finished Good assembly. * **For further assistance**, contact the **XoroERP/XoroWMS support team**. These enhancements improve **manufacturing automation, wave efficiency, and warehouse operations**, ensuring a **faster, more accurate, and streamlined fulfillment process**. 🚀 **XoroERP & XoroWMS Team** 🚀
OSearch # March 3.0 2025 Release ### **Automatic Cancellation of Sales Order Quantities on Inventory Shortage** We have introduced a new functionality that automatically cancels unfulfillable quantities in sales orders based on available On-Hand inventory at the time of order creation. This enhancement ensures that only the fulfillable quantity is processed, reducing order discrepancies and improving inventory accuracy. {% hint style="info" %} This is an App-Config based enhancement. {% endhint %} #### **Key Features** 1. **Automated Quantity Cancellation**: The system now automatically cancels unfulfillable quantities on sales orders, ensuring that orders are accurate and up-to-date. 2. **Configurable Settings**: Two new app configurations have been introduced to control this functionality: * **Auto-Cancel Sales Order on Inventory Shortage**: This setting allows the system to automatically mark orders for cancellation if insufficient inventory is available when creating a sales order. When this config is enabled, the "Auto Update Cancel Qty On SO?" option is enabled in the "Other" tab of the sales order. If this option is selected, any unfulfillable item quantities will be automatically canceled upon saving the order. Please remember to enable this option before creating the order to enable auto cancellation.
* **Include Not Available Inventory While Calculating Cancel Qty For Orders**: Determines whether 'Not Available' inventory is considered when calculating cancel quantities. If this config is enabled, the 'Not Available' inventory will be considered when calculating cancel quantities. If this is disabled, the 'Not Available' inventory will not be considered.
{% hint style="danger" %} **It is important to note that users have to enable "Auto Update Cancel Qty On SO?" option on sales order before creating the order.** {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} Re-open the order to view the updated status. {% endhint %} #### **Functionality Details:** The Auto Cancel Quantity Update on Sales Order feature works as follows: 1. **Zero On-Hand Inventory**: If a sales order is created with an item that has 0 (zero) On-Hand quantity, the order is completely cancelled and the status of the sales order will be updated accordingly.
2. **Partial Fulfillment**: If the ordered quantity exceeds the available On-Hand inventory, the system fulfills the available quantity and cancels the remaining units. \ For Example: * Order Quantity: 10 * On-Hand Quantity: 5 In this case 5 units fulfilled, 5 units auto-cancelled, leading to partial fulfillment of the order.
3. **Sufficient On-Hand Inventory**: If the Order Quantity equals the On-Hand Quantity (e.g., Order Qty: 10, On-Hand Qty: 10), the order line is fulfilled completely without cancellation. ### Pallet field Added to WMS Packing module We have added "Pallet" column in the Packing module. This field allows you to add a pallet number to palletize the LPN. * If an **existing pallet number** is entered, the system registers the pallet. * If a **new pallet number** is entered, a new pallet is automatically created.
### New "ATS (Including Open SO)" Column Added to Item Inventory Snapshot Module We have introduced a new column, **"ATS (Including Open SO),"** in the **Item Inventory Snapshot** module. This addition will provide users with a clearer understanding of available inventory by taking open sales orders into account.
**Key Features:** * **New Column Introduction:** The "ATS (Including Open SO)" column displays the available to sell (ATS) inventory while factoring in open sales orders that are currently in draft status. * **Calculation Formula:** The ATS (including open sales orders) is calculated as follows: * **ATS (Including Open SO) = ATS - SO (on draft)**\ This formula allows users to easily see the adjusted inventory levels after accounting for sales orders that have not yet been finalized. ### **3PL Account Column and Account 3PL Dropdown Added in WMS Pick Task Assignment** We have introduced the **"3PL Account"** column and **"Account 3PL"** dropdown in the **Pick Task Assignment** module. These enhancements improve visibility and filtering options for third-party logistics (3PL) operations.
#### **Key Features:** 1. **3PL Account Column:** * The Account 3PL column displays the 3PL account associated with each pick task. 2. **Account 3PL Dropdown:** * The 3PL account dropdown allows users to filter pick tasks based on the assigned 3PL account. {% hint style="info" %} ***Please note that these new features will only be accessible if the 3PL mode is enabled on your instance.*** {% endhint %} ### **Inventory Change Log Enhancement for Outgoing Transactions** #### **Overview** We have enhanced the **Inventory Change Log** feature in XoroERP to now include **outgoing transactions** for inventory movements in the **Move Pallet** and **Putaway** modules using the Receiving module in XoroWMS.
#### Key Features * Previously, the **Inventory Change Log** only displayed incoming transactions—showing where inventory was moved to. * Outgoing transactions (where the inventory was moved from) were **not tracked** in the log. * With this update, the **Change Log** now records both incoming and outgoing transactions, offering greater visibility into inventory movements. #### **Impact & Benefits** * **Enhanced Inventory Tracking** – Users can now see a complete movement history, reducing ambiguity in stock transfers. * **Improved Audit Trail** – Full visibility into both **source** and **destination** locations of inventory. * **Better Operational Control** – Helps warehouse teams track inventory flow more accurately for **Putaway and Move Pallet** operations. #### **How It Works** 1. Navigate to **WMS → Receiving → Putaway / Move Pallet**. 2. Perform an inventory movement. 3. Check the **Inventory Change Log** to view both **incoming and outgoing transactions**. For any questions or support, please reach out to our help desk. ### **Expanded Priority Code Update in Wave Centre** #### **Overview** We have enhanced the **Priority Code Update** functionality in the **Wave Centre**, allowing greater flexibility in managing wave priorities across different statuses. #### **Key Features** * **Previously:** Priority code updates were **only allowed** for waves in **Partially Allocated** or **Fully Allocated** statuses. * **Now:** Priority code can be updated for **all statuses except Closed**, enabling better control over wave processing. #### **Impact & Benefits** **Greater Flexibility** – Modify priority codes at any stage before closure, improving workflow adjustments.\ **Enhanced Wave Management** – Optimize picking and fulfillment priorities dynamically.\ **Improved Operational Efficiency** – Reduces restrictions, allowing users to make necessary priority changes without waiting for specific statuses. #### **How It Works** 1. Navigate to **Wave Search Centre** in XoroWMS. 2. Select a wave in any status except **Closed**.
3. Update the **Priority Code** as needed.
4. Save changes and proceed with operations.
### **Enhanced Move Inventory by Item Screen** #### **Overview** We have enhanced the **Move Inventory by Item** screen with new functionality to improve efficiency and flexibility in inventory movement. #### Key Features * **Multi-Item Scanning:** Users can now scan **multiple items at once**, streamlining the inventory move process. * **Configurable Memo Field:** The **Memo field** is now **configuration-based**, allowing businesses to customize its usage. **New App Configurations to Support These Enhancements:** 1. **Qty Entering Mode for Move Inventory** – This new configuration allows users to select the quantity entering mode from the following options: * **Scan Per Unit** * **Enter Quantity Manually** * **Scan Per Unit Without Stepper** * **Flexible**
2. **Show Memo Field in Move by Item** – This configuration controls whether the memo field is displayed in the Move by Item screen, allowing for a customizable workflow.
#### **How It Works** 1. Navigate to **Move Inventory by Item** in XoroWMS. 2. Use the scanner to scan **multiple items** simultaneously. 3. Enter details and utilize the **configurable Memo field** as needed.
3. Save and complete the move process. ### **Move Inventory by Item Enhancements** #### **Overview** We have introduced key enhancements to the **Move Inventory by Item** screen, improving efficiency, flexibility, and customization options for inventory movement. #### **What’s New?** * Updated the **Move Inventory by Item** screen to allow scanning **multiple items at once**. Now users can scan different items at one time based on the LPN#.
* Made the **Memo field configuration-based** for greater flexibility.
* Added support for moving **multiple items simultaneously from multiple LPNs or a single LPN to a single LPN**. * Introduced two new app configurations: * **Show Memo Field in Move Inventory by Item** – Allows users to enable or disable the memo field. * **Quantity Entering Mode for Move Inventory by Item** – Users can now choose from the following quantity entry modes: * **Scan Per Unit** * **Enter Quantity Manually** * **Scan Per Unit Without Stepper** * **Flexible** * Added **LPN Identifier (LPN#/Batch#) in Move Inventory by Item** for better tracking. * Implemented support for **virtual LPNs and locations** in the form of From Location. Here users can fill in the LPN# for virtual locations.
#### **How It Works** 1. Navigate to **Move Inventory by Item** in XoroWMS. 2. Scan **multiple items** simultaneously from multiple LPNs or a single LPN to a single LPN. 3. Configure the **Qty Entering Mode** based on operational needs. 4. Enable or disable the **Memo Field** using the app configuration. 5. Use the **LPN Identifier (LPN#/Batch#)** for improved inventory tracking. 6. Take advantage of **virtual LPN and location support** for streamlined inventory movements. ### WMS – Allocation & Case Picking #### **Overview** We have introduced a new capability in **XoroWMS** that allows users to **allocate and case-pick mixed LPNs from reserve locations**. This enhancement improves flexibility and efficiency in warehouse operations, enabling better inventory utilization. #### **Key Features** * Users can now **allocate mixed LPNs** directly from **reserve locations**. * **Case picking is now supported for mixed LPNs**, allowing for more granular control over inventory movement. * This update ensures **optimized allocation** and picking workflows, reducing handling time and improving order fulfillment. #### **How It Works** 1. Navigate to **WMS → Allocation / Case Picking**. 2. Select the **reserve location** containing mixed LPNs. 3. Allocate and case-pick inventory directly from the mixed LPNs. 4. Proceed with order fulfillment as usual. # April 2025 Release ### Location Sorting in Item Lookup module We have introduced alphabetical sorting for locations displayed within the Item Lookup module. Previously, locations within the Item Look module were displayed in a random or non-sequential order. With this enhancement, all locations will now be sorted in **ascending alphabetical order** by default. #### How it works? * Go to **Main Menu > Lookup > Item Lookup**. * In the "Item# / UPC" field, enter the item identifier or UPC for the item you want to search and press Enter. * The location list displayed at the details section will be displayed in ascending alphabetical order (sorted from A to Z).
### Pallet Search and Movement Tracking in Inventory Change Log module We have added two new fields to the **Inventory Change Log module** to enhance the ability to track and manage pallet movements. With the addition of the **Pallet search field** and the **Pallet (From/To) column**, users can now search, filter, and track pallet movements more efficiently, improving overall inventory management and visibility. #### Feature Details: * **Pallet Search Field Added in Inventory By Log Module:** * A new **"Pallet"** search field has been added to the **Inventory By Log** module.
* This field allows users to **search and filter pallet movement details** more efficiently. By entering the pallet ID, users can now quickly access specific pallet movement logs. * **Pallet (From/To) Column Added to Inventory Change Log Centre:** * The **Inventory Change Log Centre** table has been enhanced with a new **Pallet (From/To)** column.
* This new column will display the **source and destination pallets** for inventory movements. ### Added Pallet field to multiple lookup modules We have added "Pallet" field to the following lookup modules: * **OLPN Lookup** * **Location Lookup** * **Item Lookup** This addition enhances the user experience by providing better visibility and easier access to pallet data when working with OLPN, Location, and Item Lookups. ### Added the ability to Auto Mark Order Ready to Ship After Complete Packing We have introduced the ability to automate the process of marking an order as "Ready to Ship" after packing is complete. This enhancement is aimed at reducing the manual efforts and the steps in shipping an order. {% hint style="info" %} This is an app-config based enhancement. {% endhint %} #### Feature Details * A new config, **"Auto Mark Order Ready to Ship After Complete Packing"** has been introduced to enable this feature. * When this configuration is enabled, **after clicking the "Accept" button for complete packing**, the system will automatically mark the order as **Ready to Ship**. * As a result, the **Ready to Ship button** will no longer be shown, reducing manual intervention and improving efficiency.
### Added the ability to a**uto select order while Packing** We have introduced a feature that enables the system to automatically select the sales order during the packing process when the same item is included in multiple orders and batch processing is involved. With this enhancement, if an item exists in more than one order, the system will automatically select the first available order for packing when the item is scanned. This streamlines the packing process and reduces the need for manual order selection. {% hint style="info" %} This is an app-config based enhancement {% endhint %} #### Feature Details * A new app config, **"Auto Select Order While Packing"** has been added to enable this feature.
* When this config is enabled, the system will automatically select the first available order when scanning an item that is part of one or more orders and belongs to a batch during the packing process.
* When the app config is turned OFF, the system will display a popup during the scanning process, prompting the user to manually select the order for packing. * This ensures that users still have control over which order to select when packing items that exist in multiple orders or batches. ### Added the ability to deactivate 3PL Account and 3PL Portal We’ve introduced new functionality to allow users to deactivate both 3PL accounts and 3PL portal access, giving you more control over your 3PL operations. #### Deactivating 3PL Account * A new **"Active"** flag has been added to the 3PL Account module. This allows users to easily deactivate a 3PL account.
* Once a 3PL account is deactivated: * A **warning message** will appear at the top of the **Customer**, **Vendor**, and **Item** modules associated with that account.
* The deactivated 3PL account will be **removed** from dropdowns across all center pages, such as **SO Center** and **Customer Center**. #### **Restrictions for Inactive 3PL Accounts:** * **3PL Contracts** and **3PL Charges** cannot be **created or updated** for inactive 3PL accounts. * New **Sales Orders (SO)**, **Purchase Orders (PO)**, and **Return Merchandise Authorizations (RMA)** cannot be **created** for customers or vendors with an inactive 3PL account. #### Deactivating 3PL Portal * In addition to the "Active" flag, we’ve introduced a new **"Activate Portal Login"** flag under the **Settings** tab of the **3PL Account** module.
* Users will only be able to log in to the **3PL portal** if the **"Activate Portal Login"** flag is **enabled**. * If this flag is disabled, users will not be able to access the portal associated with the 3PL account.
#### Updating the 3PL Account With this update, we have also introduced some restrictions on updating the 3PL account. * **Customer 3PL Account Update Restrictions:** When updating a 3PL account for a customer, the system will now check if there are any unshipped Sales Orders (SOs) associated with that customer. If any unshipped SOs exist, the system will not allow users to update the 3PL account of the customer. * **Vendor 3PL Account Update Restrictions:** When updating a 3PL account for a vendor, the system will ensure that all Purchase Orders (POs) for that vendor are in the "Received" status. If any PO is not in the "Received" status, the system will not allow users to update the 3PL account of the vendor. * **Vendor Type Restrictions:** In addition to updating the 3PL account, the system will now restrict users from selecting a 3PL account for vendors classified under the "General" vendor type. ### **Creating** Negative Charges in 3PL Contracts and Restricted Actions on Billing Invoices We’ve enhanced the 3PL contract and invoicing system with the ability to create negative charges within 3PL contracts. These negative charges can now be applied to miscellaneous charges, and the system will generate corresponding **negative 3PL Billing Invoices**. In addition, we have implemented restrictions on actions available for 3PL Billing Invoices to ensure better control and accuracy during the invoicing process. **Feature Details:** 1. **Negative Charges in 3PL Contracts:** Users can now create **negative charges** within the 3PL contract, specifically for miscellaneous charges. This allows more flexibility in adjusting or crediting charges as needed within the contract. 2. **Negative 3PL Billing Invoice:** A **3PL Billing Invoice** can now be generated with a **negative amount** based on the applied negative charges. This ensures that any adjustments, credits, or refunds are properly documented and processed. 3. **Restricted Actions on 3PL Billing Invoices:** To enhance control over the invoicing process, most actions on **3PL Billing Invoices** are now restricted in both the **Invoice Centre** and **Invoice Module**. \ **Permissible Actions:** * **Invoice Centre:** * **Void** – Allows users to void a 3PL Billing Invoice. * **Add To Email Queue** – Enables users to add the invoice to the email queue for sending. * **Invoice Module:** * **Print** – Allows users to print the 3PL Billing Invoice. * **Show Transactions** – Enables users to view the transactions associated with the invoice. * **Edit in New Window** – Allows users to open the invoice for editing in a separate window. ### Enhanced RMA Reference in Inventory Change Log #### Feature Details Previously, the **Inventory Change Log** only displayed the **ASN#** in the *Txn Ref* field, which limited traceability for inventory changes related to RMA transactions. With this enhancement, a new reference to the **RMA#** associated with the ASN has been introduced. Now, the **Ref# column** in the Inventory Change Log dynamically displays the **related PO# or RMA#**, improving visibility and enabling smoother tracking for both internal audits and external reporting. #### How It Works 1. When an ASN is generated from an RMA or PO, the system now maps and displays the corresponding **RMA# or PO#** in the **Ref#** column. 2. This linkage is automatically maintained and updated, requiring no manual input from the user {% hint style="info" %} * This update applies only to ASN-linked records in the Inventory Change Log. * Existing records will also reflect the updated Ref# values if the associated RMA/PO exists in the system. {% endhint %} ### Status Retention for Closed Orders Removed from a Batch #### Feature Details In previous versions, when an order was removed from a batch where **all orders were in 'Closed' status**, the system unintentionally updated the status of the remaining orders to **'Packed'**. This behavior created inconsistencies in order lifecycle tracking and impacted downstream reporting and fulfillment workflows. With this release, we’ve introduced a critical fix:\ **Orders that were previously in 'Closed' status will now retain that status even after being removed from a batch.** This ensures data integrity and proper representation of order states in all warehouse operations. *** #### Key Improvement * **Previous Behavior:**\ Removing an order from a batch of 'Closed' orders caused all orders in the batch to shift to 'Packed' status. * **Updated Behavior:**\ Orders will **remain in 'Closed' status** after being removed from a batch, provided they were already marked as closed. *** #### Notes {% hint style="info" %} * This update applies only to **batches where all orders are in 'Closed' status**. * The fix is backward-compatible and will not affect batches with orders in other statuses. {% endhint %} # April 2.0 2025 Release ### Transfer Purchase Order: Transfer Inventory To and From Damage Locations We have introduced an enhanced functionality to the Transfer Purchase Order to allow users to inventory to and from default locations. Users can now select damage locations in the "From" and "To" default locations.
**Impact on Inventory Availability:** The availability of the inventory being transferred to/from a damage location will depend on the "Auto Mark Damage Inventory Move as Not Available" app config.
* **If "Auto Mark Damage Inventory Move as Not Available" is Enabled:** * The inventory being transferred to the specified damage location will automatically be marked as *Non-Available*. This ensures that the damaged inventory is not used for sales orders. * **If "Auto Mark Damage Inventory Move as Not Available" is Disabled:** * The inventory being transferred to the specified damage location will remain as *Available*. This might be suitable for scenarios where the damage is minor, and the inventory may still be usable or repairable. ### New Conditions and Offset Criteria added to Commission Rule We have enhanced the **Commission Rule** module by adding new fields for more precise commission calculations. The following fields have been added to both **"Add Condition"** and **"Add Offset Criteria"** in the Commission Rule module: * **Order Type** * **Bill to State** * **Ship to State**
### Added the ability to Delete Customer Credits of Type Transfer in the Credit Centre We have added the ability to delete customer credit of the type "Transfer" from the Credit Centre. **Features Details:** 1. **Delete Customer Credit (Transfer Type):** * Users can now delete individual customer credits of type **Transfer** directly from the Credit Centre. * To delete a single credit, navigate to the Credit Centre, **right-click** on the credit record, and select **"Delete"**. 2. **Batch Delete Functionality (Transfer Type):** * A new **Batch Delete** option has been added in the Credit Centre, allowing users to delete multiple customer credits of type **Transfer** at once. * To perform a batch delete, select the credits you wish to delete in the Credit Centre, then go to **Options > Batch Delete**. {% hint style="info" %} **Please Note: The system will not allow deletion of applied credits. Before deleting any customer credit (single or batch), it is *****mandatory***** to un-apply the credit from any transaction it is currently linked to.** {% endhint %} ### Enhancements in Product Upload Template We have added two new fields in the Product Upload Template. * **IsHeaderOnly:** This new field allows users to create **only the product** without generating any variants. When set to **true**, only the product header is created, and variants are not generated for the product. Please note that if **IsHeaderOnly** is set to true for the first row, it will be set to true for all subsequent rows in the template. * **AssignUPCs:** This field allows the system to automatically assign **UPC/GTIN** codes to the item(s). When set to **true** for a row, the system will assign UPC/GTIN codes based on the active universal code series. ### Added the ability to upload Products without generating variants We have enhanced the product upload functionality and introduced the ability to upload products without generating variants. A new **"Product Header Only"** template has been added to the **Upload Products** module. This template allows users to upload **only the product headers** without including variants. In addition to that a new toggle option, **"Use Product Header Only Template"**, has been introduced in the Product Upload module to enable uploading the products without variants.
In addition to that a new toggle option, **"Use Product Header Only Template"**, has been introduced in the Product Upload module. Users need to enable this option to upload products without generating variants.
#### **Feature Details** Users can upload the products without generating variants in three ways: #### 1. Using the New “Product Header Only” Template We has added a new product upload template specifically designed for uploading only product headers. This template excludes variant information and focuses solely on the product header details. **Steps:** 1. Go to the "Upload Products" module and download the new "Product Header Only" template. 2. Fill in the product details. 3. Ensure that you enable the “Use Product Header Only Template” option before uploading the file. 4. Upload the template to create product headers without variants. #### 2. Using the Existing Template and Enabling the “Use Product Header Only Template” Option One way to upload products without generating variants is by using the existing product upload template. Before uploading the file, ensure that you enable the “Use Product Header Only Template” option in the relevant module. This will ensure that only the product header is created, and variants will not be generated during the upload process. **Steps:** 1. Go to the "Upload Products" module and download the template. Fill in the products details in the template. 2. Enable the “Use Product Header Only Template” option within the module. 3. Upload the template as usual. Only the product headers will be created without any associated variants. #### 3. Using the Existing Template and Setting the “IsHeaderOnly” Column to True Another method to prevent the generation of variants when using the existing upload template is by using the "IsHeaderOnly" column in the existing template. You can set the “IsHeaderOnly” column to true. When this column is set to true, the system will only create the product header and will not generate variants for the product. {% hint style="info" %} **Please Note:** If the "IsHeaderOnly" column is set to true in the first row of the template, it will automatically apply this setting to all subsequent rows in the template. This ensures consistency across all product entries in the file. {% endhint %} **Steps:** 1. Go to the "Upload Products" module and download the template. Fill in the products details in the template. 2. Locate the “IsHeaderOnly” column. Set the value of the “IsHeaderOnly” column to true. 3. Upload the template. Only the product headers will be created, and no variants will be generated. ### **Added the option to Batch Generate Variants in Product Centre** We have added a new option, **"Batch Generate Variants"** in the **Product Centre**, designed to simplify and accelerate the process of generating product variants in bulk. This new option allows users to quickly create multiple variants for selected products, reducing the need for manual data entry and providing a more efficient way to manage product variations.
**How it works?** * Navigate to the Product Centre and select the products for which you want to generate the variants. * Go to the **Options** menu and click on **Batch Generate Variants**.
* A confirmation window will appear. Click **"OK"** to proceed with the batch generation process.
* After confirming, you will be redirected to the **Item module**, where you can define the structure of the product variants.
* In the Item module, you will have the flexibility to set the naming sequence for the **Item name** and **Item description**. For example, you can configure the sequence to be **Basepart-Option1-Option2**. This sequence will be applied automatically to all the generated product variants. If you do not specify a custom sequence, the system will default to the existing naming pattern.
* After setting the pattern, enter the "Standard Unit Cost" and "Standard Unit Price".
* Once all necessary fields are configured, click on **"Generate Variants"** to create the variants for the selected products.
{% hint style="info" %} Please Note: If the product variants were previously generated using the 'Generate Variant' option, the system will use the previously generated items' configuration to create new variants. {% endhint %} ### **Added the option to Batch Assign UPCs in Item Centre** In the **Item Centre** module, a new **"Assign UPCs"** option has been added. This option enables users to **batch assign UPCs (Universal Product Codes)** to multiple selected items at once.
#### Feature Details * If there is no UPC associated with the item, the system will assign a UPC incremented from the last registered UPC in the system. So, if the last UPC in your system was `1234567890`, the new UPC assigned would be `1234567891`, then `1234567892`, and so on. The system automatically handles creating unique, sequential UPCs. * If the item already has a UPC assigned, the UPC of the will be updated. Again, the system will assign a UPC incremented from the last registered UPC in the system. ### Posting a New Bill from an IR We've introduced the ability to generate a bill even when the bill amount differs from the Item Receipt (IR) amount. This is especially useful in cases where a vendor issues a bill with an amount that doesn't match the value recorded in the IR. Now, users have the option to post a new bill directly from an IR. When a vendor has a Suspense AP Account configured, and it’s set to be the default for IRs, the system provides a new “Post as New Bill” option instead of the traditional “Convert to Bill”. This allows you to post a new vendor bill directly from the IR, transferring the amount from the Suspense AP Account. #### Feature Details **Vendor Setup Enhancements** To enable this feature, navigate to the Vendor > Payments tab. We’ve added two new options: * **Default AP Suspense Account:** Select the account to temporarily hold the amount during item receipt. When generating a bill, the amount will be transferred from this account to the selected AP account.
* **Use as default for IR?:** Enable this to use the suspense account as the default account for all new IRs created for this vendor.
When an IR is generated for a vendor with a designated suspense account set as the default for IRs, you'll notice the standard "Convert to Bill" option is disabled. Instead, you'll see a new option: "Post as New Bill". **Post As New Bill** To post a bill from the item receipt, go to Options > Post As New Bill. This opens a pop-up window where you can enter the following details: * **AP Account:** Select the Accounts Payable account to which the bill amount should be transferred from the suspense account. * **Post Amount:** Enter the actual amount from the vendor bill that you want to post. * **Expense Account:** Select the appropriate expense account for this bill. * **Memo:** Add any relevant notes or descriptions for the bill. * **Vendor Bill#:** Enter the bill number as provided by the vendor. * **Bill Date:** Specify the date of the vendor bill. * **Mark as Posted?:** This toggle button allows you to mark the IR as posted if the \ “Post Amount” is less than the “IR Amount”. If this toggle is not enabled, if the \ “Post Amount” is less than the “IR Amount” the IR will be marked as “Partially \ Posted”. If the “Post Amount” is equal to or greater than the “IR Amount”, this option will be \ automatically enabled. After filling in these details, click “Post” to generate the bill. **Bill Posting Scenarios** Here's a breakdown of how the system handles different posting scenarios: * Posted (Post Amount = IR Amount or More): * IR Status: Posted * The bill will show a corresponding expense line for the full posted amount. * Partial Posting (Post Amount < IR Amount): * IR Status: Partially Posted * The bill will show a negative expense line for the remaining amount (IR Amount - Post Amount). * You can create additional bills later to account for the remaining balance. * Mark as Posted (During Partial Posting): * If the "Mark as Posted" toggle is turned ON during a partial posting, the IR status will be set to "Posted," even though the Bill Amount is less than the IR Amount. # April 3.0 2025 Release ### Added Ship To Company Name in Invoice Payment Module We’ve enhanced the Invoice Payment module by adding the **“Ship To Company Name”** field to the **invoice details** section. This new field automatically pulls the company name from the shipping address specified in the invoice, providing greater clarity and consistency in invoice records.
### New Placeholders Added to Sales Order Template We’ve introduced two new dynamic placeholders to the **Sales Order template** to offer more flexibility and personalization: * **User Full Name** – Displays the full name of the user generating the sales order.
* **Customer Service Rep Name** – Displays the name of the assigned customer service representative.
### Support Added For Multiple Bank Feeds Mapping We’ve expanded the functionality of the **“Link Bank Feeds”** feature by allowing a single **Xorosoft Account** to be mapped to **multiple bank feeds**. Previously, each Xorosoft Account could only be linked to one bank account feed. With this update, users can now connect a Xorosoft Account to **as many bank accounts as needed**, providing greater flexibility for managing financial data and streamlining reconciliation processes.
### Country and State Dropdown added for Vendor address We’ve improved the vendor address entry process to enhance accuracy and ease of use. Previously, the Country and State fields in the Vendor Module - under “Billed From” and “Shipped From” addresses within the Contact Info tab- were free-text fields. With this update, these fields have been upgraded to dropdown menus, allowing you to select the country and state from predefined options.
### New “Estimates & Orders” Tab Added in Item Subform To provide greater visibility into item-level sales activity, we’ve introduced a new **“Estimates & Orders”** tab within the **Item subform**. This enhancement enables users to view related sales documents directly from the item centre, streamlining access to key sales information.
#### Feature Details The "Estimates & Order" tab is divided into two sections: **Estimates** This section provides a comprehensive view of all estimates created for the item. Information includes Estimate Number, Estimate Date, Customer Name, Total Amount, Order Type, and more.
**Orders** This section displays the details of all sales orders created for the item. Key information includes Order Number, Order Date, Customer Name, Item Number, Order Status, Total Amount, and more.
{% hint style="warning" %} The user must be granted access to the Estimate and Order tabs through the Access Manager. {% endhint %} ### Custom Query Dropdown in Account Register Module A new **Custom Query dropdown** feature has been added to the **Account Register** module to streamline advanced search operations and improve user efficiency. This enhancement allows users to **save frequently used search filters** and access them quickly through a dropdown menu—eliminating the need to recreate complex filters each time.\
*** #### How It Works 1. Navigate to:\ **Account Register → Advanced Search** 2. Select desired **column names** and input corresponding **filter values**. 3. Click **Save as Query** to save the custom search. 4. **Refresh** the page. 5. A **Custom Query dropdown** will now appear next to the Advanced Search button, displaying all saved queries. 6. Select a saved query from the dropdown to apply predefined filters instantly. ### Enhancements to Transfer Order Workflow (TPO/TSO) #### Overview This release brings significant workflow improvements to the **Transfer Order process** in XoroERP, including **Quick Receive**, **Quick Ship**, **Auto Release**, and enhanced **Availability insights**. These updates are designed to simplify transfer operations, reduce manual effort, and improve real-time visibility into stock movements.
#### What's New #### 1. Quick Receive for Transfer Purchase Orders (TPO) Users can now perform **Quick Receive** actions directly on TPOs, streamlining the receiving process without navigating through full ASN workflows.
#### 2. Quick Ship for Transfer Sales Orders (TSO) **Quick Ship** functionality is now available for TSOs, allowing users to instantly mark transfer shipments as shipped, saving time during inter-location transfers.
#### 3. Auto Release for TPO and TSO The **Auto Release** functionality, previously available for standard Sales and Purchase Orders, has now been extended to **TPO** and **TSO**.\ It is governed by the existing App Config: **Auto Release Sales Order**, ensuring a consistent control mechanism across all order types. #### 4. Incoming Deliveries Subform in TSO Clicking the **Availability** field at the line level in a Transfer Sales Order now opens a **subform displaying Incoming Deliveries**. This provides users with instant insight into the expected stock inflow for the requested items. ### Vendor-Specific Item Display in Purchase Module #### Overview A new App Config, **Show items by item vendor mapping in purchase modules (PO, Item Receipt, Bill, Vendor Credit)**, has been introduced to improve vendor-specific purchasing workflows. \ This enhancement ensures that when creating a Purchase Order or related transaction, users see only the items mapped to the selected vendor, streamlining the item selection process and minimizing errors.
#### Key Features * **Behavior Before:**\ While creating a Purchase Order, the system displayed items from all vendors, requiring additional manual filtering. * **New Behavior with App Config Enabled:** * The system will automatically filter and display only the items linked to the **selected vendor** on the Purchase Order. * This filter is applied at the **Add Items modal** only. * The vendor is auto-selected based on the vendor chosen on the PO, and the item list will dynamically adjust accordingly. * **Applicable Modules:** * Purchase Order (PO) * Item Receipt * Bill * Vendor Credit {% hint style="warning" %} #### This functionality is controlled through the new App Config setting "**Show Items by Item vendor mapping in purchase modules**". {% endhint %} * The restriction applies specifically to the **Add Items modal** during item selection. *** ### Add New Contact Option in Sales Transactions #### Overview To simplify customer contact management during transaction creation, an **"Add New Contact"** option has been added to the **Contacts dropdown** in the following pages: * Create Sales Order * Create Estimate * Create Invoice This enhancement allows users to add new customer contacts without navigating away from their current workflow.
*** #### How It Works * In the Contacts dropdown, users can now select **"Add New Contact."** * This opens the **Contacts** page in a **popup window** without leaving the Sales Order, Estimate, or Invoice page. * The **Entity** field in the Contacts form is automatically **pre-selected with the Customer** from the originating Sales Order, Estimate, or Invoice. *** ### Display On Hand Quantity in MO Create Disassemble Pop-up #### Overview Responding to client feedback requesting a more efficient way to manage item disassembly, we have introduced a new enhancement:\ An **"On Hand Qty"** column has been added to the **MO Create Disassemble** pop-up window under the **Item Inventory Snapshot** section. This improvement eliminates the need for users to manually check and input available stock quantities when creating a Disassemble Manufacturing Order, thereby saving time and reducing errors. Previously, when users initiated a **Create Disassemble** process, they had to manually type the desired quantity into the **Qty** field, even if they wanted to disassemble the entire on-hand quantity of an item.\ The lack of immediate visibility into stock levels increased manual effort and the potential for mistakes. This enhancement addresses that gap. *** #### What Has Changed * A new column **"On Hand Qty"** has been added to the **Item Inventory Snapshot** pop-up during the **Create Disassemble** process.
* Users can now clearly view the current available quantity (On Hand Qty) for each item without navigating away from the MO creation screen. * This provides users with immediate inventory insight when deciding how much to disassemble. #### Important Notes {% hint style="warning" %} * The **On Hand Qty** column is informational only; users still need to input the desired disassembly quantity manually. * Future enhancements could be considered to allow auto-populating Qty field based on On Hand Qty if business requirements demand it. {% endhint %} ### New Module: Timesheet Entry and Timesheet Entry Centre #### Overview We are excited to introduce the new **Timesheet Entry** and **Timesheet Entry Centre** modules in XoroERP.\ These modules provide a centralized and efficient way for users to log service time against customers and service items, manage billable entries, and generate invoices directly from recorded timesheets.4
*** #### Key Features **Timesheet Entry Functionality** * **Service Item Recording**:\ Users can create time-based entries against specific **Service Items**, linked to both **User** and **Customer**. * **Time Duration Tracking**:\ Users can specify the duration of service provided and mark entries as **Billable** if they are chargeable to the customer. * **Flexible Date Navigation**: * Users can select a specific **date** and view entries for either a **week** or a **month**, based on the selected dropdown value. * Use left/right **arrows** to switch between different weeks or months for easy navigation. * **Pivot Table View**:\ Once timesheet entries are added, users can view the data in an interactive **pivot table** format. * Add new entries quickly by entering time, selecting the item number, adding notes, and saving. * Alternatively, users can click directly into a cell and hit **Enter** to save changes instantly. *** #### Invoicing from Timesheet Entries There are two options available for creating invoices directly from timesheet entries: 1. **Generate Invoice** * Automatically generates a **new invoice per customer** for all entries that are **marked as Billable** and **have not yet been billed**. 2. **Add Selected Lines to Existing Invoice** * Allows users to **add specific timesheet entries** to an **already existing invoice**. * During the confirmation step, users must select the existing invoice. * **Important**: The customer associated with the timesheet entry and the selected invoice must be the **same**. {% hint style="warning" %} * Users must ensure that service entries intended for billing are correctly marked as **Billable**. * When adding to an existing invoice, validation is enforced to match the **Customer** between timesheet entries and the invoice. {% endhint %} ## WMS Enhancement ### “Customer” Column Added to Pick Task Assignment Module We’ve added a new **“Customer”** column to the **Task List** section of the **Pick Task Assignment** module. This enhancement allows users to quickly identify which customer each task pertains to, enabling more informed and efficient task assignment decisions.
### New Feature: Upload Pre-Cartonized ASNs with SSCC/LPN Support #### Overview We are excited to introduce a new functionality to streamline the **Pre-Cartonization process** for multiple ASNs.\ A new module, **Upload Carton UCC** with SSCC/LPN Support, has been added to enable bulk uploads of ASN line information along with detailed cartonization attributes. This feature is designed to enhance receiving efficiency by enabling early cartonization mapping — critical for users who manage large inbound shipments requiring SSCC/UCC and pallet tracking.
**Key Highlights** * **New Upload Module**:\ A new module has been added — **Upload Carton UCC with SSCC/LPN Support** — allowing users to pre-cartonize ASN records by uploading structured data. * **WMS Handled App Requirement**:\ This functionality is available **only when the WMS Handled App is enabled**. * **Upload Fields**: * **Required**: * ASN Number * PO Number * PO Item Number * Quantity * UCC (SSCC) * Pallet * **Optional**: * ASN Line ID * **LPN Attributes**: * Lot Number * Batch Number * Expiry Date * Manufacturing Date * **ASN Status Restriction**:\ Only **ASNs in 'Open' status** can be uploaded for pre-cartonization.\ This upload is a **one-time creation** process and does **not update existing ASNs**. * **Mapping Behavior**: * System maps the uploaded **UCC** and **Pallet** values directly to **ASN Lines** in **ASN Detail** (fields: *Carton UCC*, *Carton Pallet*). * If **ASN Line ID** is provided in the upload, the quantity will be specifically tied to that ASN Line. * **Validation Rules**: * System validates if the total uploaded quantity per **PO Item Number** matches the existing ASN quantity. * System enforces that a single **Carton UCC** cannot exist across different **Pallet UCCs**. * If discrepancies are detected (e.g., quantity mismatch or invalid mappings), the upload will fail with a validation error. * **Receiving Integration**: * Upon actual receiving of the ASN using UCC codes from WMS, the system automatically fetches the associated **LPN Attributes** (Lot Number, Batch Number, Expiry Date, Manufacturing Date) into the **ASN Centre → ASN Detail**. * **Additional Enhancements**: * **ASN Detail ID** has been added for better traceability in: * **ASN Centre → ASN Detail** * **Data Export Centre**
{% hint style="warning" %} * This process is strictly **one-time**; uploaded carton data cannot be modified later through the upload interface. * Ensure that ASN records are in the **Open** status before initiating upload. * WMS integration and App Config must be appropriately set before using this feature. {% endhint %} # May 1.0 2025 Release ### Added the ability to Batch Update Default Location in Item Centre We’ve introduced a new Batch Update capability in the Item Centre, allowing users to efficiently update the Default Location for multiple items at once. **How It Works:** 1. Navigate to the **Item Centre**. 2. Select the items you wish to update and go to **Options > Batch Update**.
3. Choose **Default Location** from the update options.
4. Enter the desired default location and click **Update** to apply the change to all selected items.
### Added the ability to Batch Update Expected Ship Date and Expected Delivery Date in Purchase Order Centre We have introduced two new batch update options in the Purchase Order Centre: Expected Ship Date and Expected Delivery Date. #### How It Works 1. Navigate to the **Purchase Order Centre.** 2. Select the orders for which you wish to update the expected ship date or expected delivery date and go to Options > Batch Update.
3. In the "Column Name" field, select the Expected Ship Date or Expected Delivery date from the update options.
4. Enter the desired date in the "Value" field and click "Update" to batch apply the date to the selected orders.
### Enhanced Visibility of Customer Alerts in Apply Credits/Deposits We have enhanced the visibility of Customer Alerts within the Apply Credits/Deposits module to improve user awareness and streamline workflows. #### Feature Details Previously, Customer Alerts were not displayed when processing payments by applying deposits or credits within the Apply Credits/Deposits module. With this update, the Customer Alert will now be shown in the following scenarios: * When a customer is selected manually in the Apply Credits/Deposits module. * When the module is accessed from sales order or invoice payment module and the customer is already selected on the screen.
### Ship Service and Ship Carrier Are Now Mandatory for selected Delivery Methods in Sales Orders To improve shipping accuracy and reduce order processing errors, a new validation check has been added to the **Sales Order (SO) module** related to delivery methods and shipping details. #### Feature Details If Ship Method is set to either Delivery (Own Truck) or Delivery (Third Party) when creating a sales order, the system will now validate that a Ship Carrier or Ship Service has been selected. If neither a carrier nor a service is specified, the system will prevent the sales order from being saved and display a message in the bottom-right corner of the screen, prompting the user to provide the missing shipping information.
### Update Vendor Address Directly from Purchase Order, Item Receipt, and Bill Modules We have introduced a new enhancement that allows users to update vendor addresses directly from the Purchase Order, Item Receipt, and Bill modules. This feature streamlines the process of managing vendor information, ensuring that any updates made during transaction processing are accurately reflected in the vendor's profile. {% hint style="info" %} This is an app-config based enhancement. {% endhint %} #### How it works? * A new application configuration titled **"Enable Vendor Address Update from Purchase Order, Item Receipt and Bill modules"** has been introduced to facilitate this feature.
* When this setting is enabled, users will see **“Update Address in Vendor”** toggle option when editing vendor address details in the Purchase Order, Item Receipt, or Bill screens.
* If users update the vendor address and enable this toggle, the changes will be automatically reflected in the associated vendor’s master record. ### Configure Defaulter Customer Based on Credit Limit or Overdue Invoices We’ve enhanced the customer restriction mechanism by introducing configurable criteria to define **defaulter customers**. This update provides greater flexibility in determining when a customer should be restricted based on their financial standing. {% hint style="info" %} This is an app-config based enhancement. {% endhint %} #### How it works? * A new application configuration setting titled **“Criteria for Restricting Defaulter Customers”** is now available.
* This setting allows users to define the criteria on which a customer is flagged as a defaulter and subject to restrictions in transaction processing. * The config offers the following options: * **Credit Limit**: Customers exceeding their assigned credit limit will be marked as defaulters. * **Overdue Invoices:** Customers with unpaid invoices past the due date will be flagged as defaulters. * Depending on the selection, customers who exceed their credit limit or have overdue invoices will be considered defaulters and will subject to restrictions on sales. ### Image Magnification Support in B2B Portal We have introduced a new enhancement to our B2B platform that significantly improves the user experience for viewing product images. This update introduces an image magnification feature that allows users to zoom in the image and view important details. Users can now zoom in on product images to see intricate details that may otherwise be missed in standard views. **Where You’ll See the Image Magnifier:** 1. **Product Detail Popup** * On the B2B platform, whenever a user views a product in a popup modal, they can now click on the product image to activate the magnifier.
* This enhancement ensures that business customers can better assess product textures, finishes, or packaging before making a decision—especially valuable for industries where visual quality matters. 2. **Customer Portal – Profile Page (Presentation Images)** * Presentation images displayed on a user’s profile page within the customer portal can now be magnified. * Click on the presentation image to magnify it.
* This empowers customers to present their own materials with greater professionalism and provides viewers with a seamless way to explore image content without losing context. ### Added Confirmation Alert When Applying Linked Credit Memos We've enhanced the invoice payment process to provide greater clarity when applying credit memos that are partially linked to Sales Orders. Now, when you attempt a credit memo linked to a sales order to a customer invoice, the system checks the available unlinked credit amount. If the amount you're trying to apply exceeds the unlinked balance (due to part of it already being linked to an SO), a clear alert will appear in the confirmation popup. This alert notifies the user that the portion of the amount being applied is already associated with an SO, helping prevent unintended allocations.
Click "OK" to proceed with applying the credits to the invoice. {% hint style="warning" %} Please note: If only part of the linked credit memo is applied to another invoice, the system will prevent you from quick shipping the associated Sales Order (SO). Quick ship is only allowed when the full amount of the linked credit memo has been used. {% endhint %} ### Free Shipping Functionality for B2B Orders We have introduced a new enhancement that enables **free shipping** on B2B orders based on **cart value-based discount rules** defined in the **Presentation Centre**. This feature allows businesses to offer free shipping incentives without coupling them to existing cart discounts. #### Feature Details * A new **“Free Shipping”** toggle has been added within the **Discount Rules** section of the **Presentation Settings**. * When this toggle is enabled for a specific discount rule, and the **cart subtotal** meets the defined criteria, **free shipping** will automatically be applied to the order. * This functionality is entirely **independent of any discount applied** to the cart — only the **cart subtotal** is considered. **How to Configure** 1. Go to **Presentation Centre** > **Presentation Settings**. 2. Navigate to the **Discount Rules** section.
3. Edit or create a discount rule and enable the **“Free Shipping”** toggle.
### **New Module – Upload Wave Create** #### **Overview** We are excited to introduce a new module in XoroERP called **"Upload Wave Create"**. This utility is designed to streamline wave creation by allowing users to define allocation quantities for sales orders via a structured upload process. It is especially useful for managing bulk allocations efficiently and with precision. This enhancement brings flexibility and automation to the wave allocation process while ensuring full traceability and data validation at every step. *** #### **Key Functionality** The **Upload Wave Create** module allows users to: 1. **Download a pre-formatted template** directly from the module. 2. **Populate wave allocation data** into the template — including sales orders and quantities. 3. **Upload the completed file** back into the system. 4. **Specify item matching logic** via the *Item Identifier Code* dropdown. 5. **Trigger allocation logic** based on grouped records and field values in the file. *** #### **Item Identifier Code** During upload, users must select an **Item Identifier Code** from the dropdown. This value determines how the system interprets the **item number field** in the uploaded file: * For example, if "Item Code" is selected as the identifier, the system will match items based on their internal item code. * This flexibility allows the upload process to work with multiple item identification standards (e.g., SKU, Barcode, or External Item Code). *** #### **Core Validation & Allocation Logic** The module includes built-in validation and allocation mechanisms to ensure robust and error-free processing: #### **Mandatory Field Validation** * The system performs strict checks to ensure all **required fields** in the template are populated before processing begins. * Missing or invalid entries are flagged immediately, preventing partial or incorrect wave creation. #### **Allocation Type Validation** * The system supports and validates **multiple allocation types**, ensuring that all logic paths behave as expected based on selected parameters. #### **Grouping by Third Party Reference No** * Uploaded records are **grouped by `ThirdPartyRef No`**. * Each group is processed **only if all rows within the group pass validation**. * Groups containing errors are skipped, and feedback is provided, allowing users to correct and re-upload only the affected data. *** #### **Field-Level Functional Validations** The module also supports and verifies the correct behavior of the following special flags: * **Auto Close SO Line:** If enabled, this will auto-close the Sales Order line upon full allocation from the wave. * **Lock Flag:** Locks the inventory allocation, preventing changes unless explicitly unlocked. * **AllowInventoryAdj:** Enables inventory adjustment to be made during allocation if discrepancies are found. ### **Bank Reconciliation – Outgoing Payments Integration** **Module:** Bank Reconciliation, Outgoing Payments #### Overview This release introduces enhancements to the **Bank Reconciliation** and **Outgoing Payments** modules within XoroERP. These improvements focus on reducing manual effort, increasing automation, and improving the reconciliation workflow. #### Enhancement Details **1. Outgoing Payment Creation from Bank Reconciliation Options** A new feature has been introduced that allows users to create **Outgoing Payments** directly from the **Bank Reconciliation module**. The option can be accessed by clicking the line-level Options in the Bank Reconciliation module.
**Functionality**\ While reconciling bank transactions, if a matching outgoing payment does not already exist, users now have the option to create one directly from the reconciliation interface. This eliminates the need to navigate separately to the Outgoing Payments module, streamlining the reconciliation workflow and reducing process time. **Effect in System**\ The newly created outgoing payment will be posted and linked to the selected bank transaction, allowing users to continue reconciliation immediately after its creation. *** **2. Auto-Creation of Bank Reconcile Rules on Outgoing Payment Creation** The system now supports **automatic creation of Bank Reconcile Rules** when an **Outgoing Payment** is created from the Bank Reconciliation module as a journal entry. **Functionality**\ Whenever an outgoing payment is created (either directly or through journal entries in the reconciliation module), the system will attempt to auto-generate a bank reconcile rule using the payment details, provided the "Auto Create Rule" toggle is enabled. **Scope and Behavior** * The rule will be generated based on key attributes of the outgoing payment such as bank account, vendor name, amount pattern, and other matching criteria. * Bank Reconcile Rule creation will occur for **all outgoing payment transactions**, **except** when an existing rule match is already found (i.e., in the "Rule Found" scenario), and only if the auto-create toggle is enabled. * This ensures that the system continuously learns from new transactions and builds rules for future automated matching during reconciliation. *** #### System Impact * Reduces manual effort in both payment creation and rule definition during reconciliation. * Improves the efficiency and accuracy of the reconciliation process through automated rule generation. * Ensures consistency and repeatability in transaction matching for recurring payment patterns. {% hint style="warning" %} Ensure that the "**Auto Create Rule**" toggle is enabled in the reconciliation settings to take full advantage of the new automation feature. It is also recommended to review the created rules periodically to maintain rule accuracy and optimize reconciliation results. {% endhint %} ### **Reconcile Bank Account Module – Additional Match Found Columns** #### **Overview** To enhance transparency and provide more contextual information during the bank reconciliation process, new data columns have been added to the **"Match Found"** section of the **Reconcile Bank Account** module in XoroERP. This enhancement is aimed at helping users make quicker, more informed decisions when validating and matching transactions. #### How it works?
#### **New Columns Added to "Match Found" Side** The following columns have been added to provide better visibility into the matched transactions: 1. **Account Code** * **Description:** Displays the **General Ledger (GL) Account Code** associated with the matched transaction. * **Purpose:** Allows users to immediately verify the accounting treatment of a transaction without navigating to the underlying journal entry or voucher. This is particularly useful when reconciling multiple similar entries or validating transactions against specific accounts. 2. **Additional Txn No** * **Description:** Displays the value from **Reference Number 2** of the transaction. * **Purpose:** Enables deeper cross-referencing with internal or external references such as vendor invoices, payment vouchers, or banking reference numbers. This aids in accurate transaction matching and audit trails. #### **Existing Vendor Name Field** * The **Vendor Name** field continues to be displayed (when available), offering an additional point of verification for payables-related transactions. {% hint style="warning" %} * No additional configuration is needed. * The new columns are automatically available in the "Match Found" section for all users with access to the Reconcile Bank Account module. * Existing workflows are preserved; this is an additive enhancement focused on improving visibility. {% endhint %} ## WMS Enhancement ### Item Lookup: Inner Case and Master Case UPC Scanning Support The *Item Lookup* module within the WMS has been enhanced to support the scanning of **Inner Case** and **Master Case** UPCs. Users can now scan UPCs associated with both **Inner Cases** and **Master Cases** during item lookup.
### Multiple Columns Added to Scan ASN Module We have added multiple columns in the Scan ASN module. The following columns are now available and displayed in the **Scan ASN module**: 1. **Vendor** 2. **Tracking#** 3. **Trailer#** 4. **BOL#**
These fields provide essential logistics data directly within the ASN scanning workflow, improving operational efficiency and traceability. #### Restricted visibility of Shipment Info Fields Additionally, a new app config has been introduced to control the visibility of the shipment info fields, Tracking #, Trailer #, and BOL#. **Select Shipment Fields to Display on the Scan ASN Screen:** This config allows users to select which of the newly added shipment info fields (Tracking #, Trailer #, and BOL #) are visible to users in the Scan ASN module.
### **Batch Manufacturing & Wave Processing** #### **Modules:** Sales Order Center, Wave Processing, Manufacturing *** #### **Overview** This release introduces significant enhancements in **XoroERP’s Sales Order Center module** and **XoroWMS**, focusing on **batch manufacturing automation, improved wave processing, and a new Manufacturing module in WMS**. These updates enhance **efficiency, automation, and accuracy** in managing **batch manufacturing orders (BMO), wave assignments, and manufacturing processes**. The key highlights of this release include: * **Automated Batch Manufacturing Order (BMO) creation** from **Sales Order Center**. * **Enhancements to Wave Templates** for **LPN-based selection and prioritization**. * **Optimized MO wave picking and staging** in WMS with a new **Manufacturing tab** in the **Picking module**. * **Introduction of the Assembly module** in WMS for **MO Finished Good assembly**. * **Auto-allocation of linked Sales Orders** after assembly completion. *** #### **Enhancements in XoroERP** #### **A. Batch Manufacturing Order (BMO) Workflow Enhancement** To streamline manufacturing order creation, XoroERP now allows **automated batch MO generation** directly from **Batch Sales Orders**, eliminating the need for **manual MO creation**. **New "Generate Batch MO" Option in SO Centre** * The **Generate Batch MO** feature enables users to create BMOs for **all manufacturable items** present in the selected **Sales Orders (SO)**. * Users can select one of the following methods for batch MO generation: * **Item-Based MO Generation**: Creates **one MO per Item**, aggregating total quantity across all selected SOs. * **Sales Order-Based MO Generation**: Generates **one MO per Item per Sales Order**, keeping MOs linked to their respective SOs. #### **B. Wave Template Enhancements** * **New LPN Selection Capability**: Wave templates now allow **specific selection of LPNs** (lot numbers) during the waving process. * **Configurable Sorting for LPN Attributes**: Items in waves can now be sorted based on attributes like **Expiry Date, Manufacturing Date, or Lot Numbers**. * **Grouping of Manufacturing Orders (MO) by Finished Goods**: XoroERP now enables **grouping of MOs** by finished goods across all associated Sales Orders when generating BMOs. #### **C. Enhancements in Batch MO Subform** * Users can **select Carton Break Rule and Priority Code** when clicking **"Start Picking"** in the **Batch MO subform**.
* The **MO wave automatically applies the correct carton break rule and priority code**, ensuring optimal inventory allocation. *** #### **Enhancements in XoroWMS** #### **A. Wave Assignment Process Enhancement** * Users can now **Pick and Stage MO waves** via the **WMS Pick and Stage Module**. * If **multiple OLPNs** are generated during MO wave picking, they **must be consolidated before the assembly process** to ensure that all raw materials are available in a single OLPN. * **New "Manufacturing" Tab on the Pick Assignment Screen**:
* Allows users to **search and assign OLPNs** by entering either the **Batch Manufacturing Order Number** or **Batch Sales Order Number**. * Introduces a **new "Manufacturing" filter** in **Pick Task Assignment** to filter **MO waves**. * Waves can now be searched based on **Wave Number, Batch Number, or Order Number**. #### **B. New "Manufacturing" Module in XoroWMS – Assembly Process** A new **Manufacturing module** has been added to WMS, enabling users to assemble **MO Finished Goods** efficiently.
**1. Scan OLPN** * Users must scan the **OLPN associated with the MO wave**. * The system validates the OLPN on the **"Enter" event**, ensuring it is linked to an MO. * Displays two tables: * **BOM (Bill of Materials) List** * **Linked Order List** (only if the MO is linked to multiple SOs).
**2. Linked Order Line Selection** * Clicking a **linked order line** updates the **Required Quantity** in the BOM table based on the linked order’s quantity.
**3. Assembly Process & Validations** * **Confirm Assembly**: Clicking **"Accept"** renders a confirmation pop-up displaying: * LPN Attributes * **To-Be-Produced Quantity of MO** * Users can update **LPN attributes** and **reduce the to-be-produced quantity** if needed. * If the **quantity is reduced**, a **Move Residual Quantity to ILPN** modal is displayed. * Upon confirmation: * The **excess raw material** is moved to the designated ILPN. * The **MO Finished Good is assembled**. #### **C. Validations in the Assembly Process** * **All raw materials must be present in a single OLPN** before assembling the MO Finished Good. * **Users cannot increase the "To-Be-Produced" quantity**. * The **OLPN must be at a staging location** for assembly to proceed. #### **D. Auto-Allocation of Linked SO (XoroERP)** * Once the **MO Finished Good is assembled**, the linked **Sales Order (SO) is automatically allocated and marked as "Picked and Staged"** at the same OLPN. * This eliminates the need for **manual allocation**, ensuring faster order fulfillment. *** #### **How to Use These Enhancements?** 1. **Generate a Batch MO from SO Centre**: * Select **Item-Based MO Generation** or **Sales Order-Based MO Generation**. 2. **Apply Wave Template Enhancements**: * Use **LPN selection and sorting criteria** in the wave template. 3. **Pick and Stage MO Waves in WMS**: * Use the **Manufacturing Tab in Pick Assignment** to consolidate OLPNs. 4. **Scan OLPN & Assemble Finished Goods in Manufacturing Module**: * Scan OLPN → Verify BOM & Linked Orders → Confirm Assembly. 5. **Auto-Allocate Linked SO**: * Upon assembly, the linked SO is automatically allocated and staged. {% hint style="info" %} In the case of a partial pick for an MO wave, the system will restrict unassignment of the task. {% endhint %} *** * **For further assistance**, contact the **XoroERP/XoroWMS support team**. These enhancements improve **manufacturing automation, wave efficiency, and warehouse operations**, ensuring a **faster, more accurate, and streamlined fulfillment process**. 🚀 **XoroERP & XoroWMS Team** 🚀 # June 2025 Release {% hint style="warning" %} **This is a Custom Release. Feature availability depends on configuration and rollout status. Some features listed above may not be visible in your environment if they are part of a staged or custom deployment. Please contact your support representative to confirm enablement.** {% endhint %} ### Void Functionality for Cycle Count Detail Line This release introduces the ability to void individual cycle count detail lines directly from the Cycle Count Entry module. A new delete button has been added under the "Action" column to each detail line within the Cycle Count Entry screen, enabling users to mark a line as void. The line is removed from the current cycle count but can be added again in a future cycle count if needed.
### New Columns Added to Invoice Centre We have added two new columns, "Unit Cost" and "Ship Date" to the detail view in the Invoice Centre.
### New Option to Manage Unavailable Quantities in Sales Orders A new option, **Move Un-available Lines**, has been introduced under **Options > Move/Split** option in the Sales Order module to improve handling of partially fulfillable orders. This feature allows users to automatically transfer the unavailable quantity from each sales order line to a new Sales Order.
When the Move Un-available Lines option is selected, the system prompts the user with a confirmation dialog. Within the confirmation dialog, users can also select an alternate store to be assigned to the new Sales Order.
***Important: Please note that if the original sales order contains only one line item and that item is fully unavailable, the original sales order is cancelled after the move is completed.*** ### **New Columns Added for Linked and Not Linked Quantities in Sales Order Module** We have added two new columns to the Sales Order module at the item details level, providing enhanced visibility into linked and not-linked quantities for each item. These additions enhance inventory tracking by offering more detailed insights into the status of linked and unlinked quantities in sales orders. **Feature Details** The following columns has been added to the sales order module: * **Active Linked Qty:** This column displays the calculated active linked quantity. It's determined by the following formula: * `Active Linked Qty = Total Linked Qty - Linked Qty Received` * "Total Linked Qty" is equivalent to the existing "Linked Qty" field. * **Not Linked Qty:** This column displays the calculated not-linked quantity. It's determined by the following formula: * `Not Linked Qty = Remaining to Ship - Qty Allocated - Active Linked Qty`
### **Enhanced Visibility for Inactive Entities in Global Search** We have improved the global search with this release to quickly identify and differentiate inactive records from active ones. Now, when you perform a global search, the inactive entities, such as customer, vendor, items, accounts, etc. will be highlighted in red.
### "Net Available" Column Added to Item Subform We have added "Net Available" column within the Inventory tab of the item subform. This column displays the quantity of an item that is truly available for new orders or allocations. "Net Available" is calculated as: **Available Quantity - Quantity To Pick.**
### Added Vendor Data Export and Import/Export Utility Capability We have enhanced the Data Export Centre by adding a Vendor View, allowing you to easily export detailed vendor information for reporting and analysis.
Additionally, Vendor has now been included in the Import/Export Utility module. This enables you to create, manage, and update vendor data efficiently through bulk import and export processes.
### Auto Email Notification on Marking Invoice As Shipped We have introduced a new app config titled **"Automatically Send Ship Confirmation Email When Invoice Is Marked As Shipped"** under the Sales tab. If this setting is enabled, an email notification is automatically sent to the customer once the order is marked as shipped. You can manage the content of this email through the Email Templates module.
### Updated Permission Requirements for Voiding Sales Orders Previously, sales orders with the status *Cancelled* required special permission to be voided. With this enhancement, *Cancelled* status sales orders can now be voided **without requiring additional permissions**, aligning their behavior with sales orders in *Open* status. All other sales order statuses continue to require appropriate permissions to perform the void action. ### Enhanced Handling of Deposit Refunds with Sales Order Mapping We have introduced a new app config "**Enable Sales Order and Customer Refund Mapping**" that allows you to enable or disable the new deposit refund mapping functionality. When enabled, the system will permit refunds of remaining deposit amounts even if the deposit is linked to another sales order.
### Improved Wave Number Display in Invoice Centre Enhancements have been made to the way **Wave Numbers** are displayed in the **Invoice Centre** to provide more accurate and relevant shipment tracking information at both the header and detail levels. **Feature Details** * **Invoice Header - Wave Numbers Column:**\ If there are multiple waves generated for a sales order, the "Wave Numbers" column now displays **only the wave** that has been **shipped** specifically for that invoice.
* **Invoice Detail - New Wave Number Column:**\ A new **Wave Number** column has been added to the **Invoice Detail** section within Invoice Centre.
### Added Decimal Rounding Options in Custom Pride Formula Profile We have introduced additional precision control for decimal rounding in the Custom Price Formula Profile. Users can now select "Up to 2 decimal places" and "Up to 4 decimal places" as new rounding options.
### New App Config **for Automatic Item Description Updates** A new multi-select dropdown app config, **"Select Item Type for Auto Item Description Update in Existing SO, PO, and BOM"**, has been added. This config works in conjunction with the existing "Allow Item Description Updates on SO and PO" setting. You can now choose description of which item types are automatically updated: Inventory Items, Other Item (Non-Inventory, Labor, and Service), or both.
### Adjustment Account Selection in Inventory Write-Off A new **“Adjustment Account”** dropdown has been added to the **Write-off** popup in the **Inventory by Location** module. The item's **default adjustment account** will be pre-populated automatically. Users can **change the account** as needed before completing the write-off. If no account is selected manually, the system will default to the item's preset adjustment account.
### **Enhancements to Customer Module – Email Configuration & Priority Handling** *** **Overview** In our continued effort to enhance communication flexibility within XoroERP, the **Customer Module** has been upgraded with new email field configurations, improved control over email recipients, and a streamlined logic for sending system-generated and manual emails. These changes empower users to define recipient lists for specific transactional events, eliminate dependency on a single contact field, and bring clarity to outbound communication workflows.
*** **What’s New?** **1. Five Dedicated Email Input Fields**
To better categorize and direct outbound communications, five distinct email fields have been added to the **Customer → Contact Info → Emails Tab**. Each field is associated with a specific operational context: * **Customer Reminder Email**\ For invoice reminders, payment due alerts, and overdue notifications. * **Customer Payment Email**\ Used in cases like payment acknowledgements, deposit emails, and payment link dispatches. * **Customer Shipment Email**\ Specifically for shipment confirmation emails, notifying customers of dispatched orders. * **Customer Order Processing Email**\ Triggers during various sales order workflows like order release, estimate approval, pack and hold release, order cancellation, and wave allocation. * **Customer Statement Email**\ Handles scheduled or on-demand dispatches of customer statements. {% hint style="warning" %} Each of these fields accepts **multiple comma-separated email addresses**, offering flexibility for businesses that need to notify multiple stakeholders per transaction. {% endhint %} *** **2. “Use Contact Email” Toggle – Added Control** Next to each of the above fields is a **toggle switch** labeled **“Use Contact Email”**. This setting determines whether or not the system should include the email address of the contact associated with the order or invoice. * **When Enabled (ON):**\ The system appends the **Contact Email** to the list of recipients defined in the specific email field. This ensures that both **default customer contacts and dynamic order-specific contacts** are informed. * **When Disabled (OFF):**\ Only the email addresses specified in the input field are used. This gives users precise control over who receives which communication. * **Fallback Logic:**\ If both the input field is left **blank** and the toggle is set to **OFF**, the system reverts to the **legacy behavior**, using the main contact email of the customer. *** **3. Visibility in Customer Centre** To enhance visibility and make recipient tracking easier for customer-facing teams, all five new email fields have been added as **visible columns** in the **Customer Centre**. Users can now view, sort, and verify email configurations at a glance without drilling into individual records. *** **Functional Mapping – When Are These Emails Used?** Each of the five fields has been mapped to specific ERP activities: | Email Field | Triggered In These Scenarios | | ----------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Customer Reminder Email** |

- Overdue Reminder
- Due Reminder
- Daily Invoice Reminder

| | **Customer Payment Email** |

- Deposit Acknowledgement
- Combined Deposit Notification
- Payment Link Sharing

| | **Customer Shipment Email** | - Shipment Dispatch / Confirmation | | **Customer Order Processing Email** |

- Order Release
- Estimate Approval
- Pack and Hold Release
- Order Cancellation
- Wave Allocation (Linked SOs)

| | **Customer Statement Email** |

- Monthly Statements
- On-demand Statement Emails

| *** **Email Priority Logic** To ensure clarity and control, the following rules govern how the system selects recipients: * **Primary Preference**: Emails listed in the specific input fields. * **If “Use Contact Email” = ON**:\ → The system uses both: * Email(s) in the input field * Contact Email from the corresponding Order/Invoice * **If “Use Contact Email” = OFF and Field is Empty**:\ → System reverts to the default behavior using the customer’s main email address. * **Special Case – Customer Statement Email**:\ → Priority Order: 1. Input Field 2. If empty, fallback to **Customer Main Email** This logic ensures that communications are never unintentionally missed while providing full autonomy over recipient selection. **Manual Email Queue – Priority Compliance** The same rules apply when emails are sent manually via the **Email Queue**. This ensures consistent behavior regardless of whether the email is system-generated or manually triggered. ### **Notes Feature in B2B Cart** **Overview** To enhance communication and order personalization in the B2B ordering experience, a new **Notes feature** has been introduced at the **line-item level** within the B2B Cart. This allows users to input specific instructions or remarks related to individual products before submitting an order.
*** **Feature Details** * **Notes Button on Each Cart Item:**\ Each item listed in the cart now displays a **“Notes”** option. * **Interactive Textbox for Input:**\ Clicking the "Notes" option opens a **textbox**, where users can **enter or edit** notes specific to that item. * **Persistent & Editable Notes:**\ Once a note is saved, it is **displayed alongside the item** and can be **edited anytime** before order submission by clicking on it again. * **Integration with Sales Order:**\ Upon **order submission**, all saved notes are **automatically included** at the **line-item level** in the **generated Sales Order** within XoroERP. By capturing these details early in the order process, this enhancement improves **order accuracy**, **customer satisfaction**, and **operational efficiency**. ### **Quick Add and Remove Functionality in Create ASN Module** **Overview** To streamline the ASN creation process and improve user efficiency, a new **"Quick Add"** button has been introduced in the **Create ASN** screen under **Purchase Orders**, along with a **Remove** button for easier item management.
**Enhancement Details** * **Quick Add Button in Create ASN Screen:**\ A new **“Quick Add”** button has been added to the **Purchase Orders** section of the **Create ASN** module. * **Functionality Logic:**\ The button functions using the **same logic as the "Quick Add" in the Shipment Delivery** module. It allows users to rapidly add multiple line items from the PO to the ASN without needing to add them individually, manually. * **Remove Button:**\ A **“Remove”** button is also introduced alongside each line, giving users the ability to **easily delete** any added line from the ASN draft before finalizing. ### **Batch Reconcile Option in Item Receipt and Bill Centre** **Overview** A new option titled **"Batch Reconcile"** has been added to both the **Item Receipt Centre** and **Bill Centre** to allow users to reconcile multiple documents simultaneously.
**Feature Details:** * **Batch Reconcile Functionality:**\ Users can now select and reconcile **multiple Item Receipts (IRs)** or **Bills** in a single action, improving processing efficiency. {% hint style="warning" %} The system enforces a validation that **all selected records must belong to the same Vendor**. If the vendor differs across selected IRs or Bills, the batch reconciliation will be disallowed, and the user will be prompted accordingly. {% endhint %} *** **Technical Implications:** * The batch action triggers backend reconciliation logic for each selected IR/Bill record. * Backend validation checks for vendor consistency across selected rows before processing. * This update reduces manual effort and ensures consistency in multi-document reconciliation operations. ### **New Feature – "Assign CC Batch" in Cycle Count Module** **Overview** A new functionality titled **"Assign CC Batch"** has been added to both the **Cycle Count Centre** and the associated **detail sub-form**. This enhancement enables administrators to assign specific users to pending inventory count batches for improved accountability and workflow management.
*** **Key Enhancements** **1. User Assignment at Header Level** * The **"Assign CC Batch"** option is now available at the header level of a Cycle Count Batch. * When used, it assigns the selected user to all **uncounted detail lines** within the batch. * This reduces manual assignment effort and ensures consistency across all open line items. **2. Batch Eligibility Filtering** * Batches that are in **Accepted** or **Void** status are automatically **excluded** from assignment selection. * This ensures only active and countable batches are impacted by the assignment process. **3. Display of Assigned Users** * A new field, **"Assigned Users"**, has been added to the Cycle Count grid view. * This field displays a **comma-separated list** of users currently assigned to each batch, improving transparency and monitoring. *** **Sub-Form Enhancements** **User Assignment in Detail View**
* When the **"Assign"** action is triggered, a confirmation dialog appears allowing the user to select a team member from the list. * Once confirmed, the user is applied to all uncounted detail lines of that batch. **Summary Table** | Area Affected | Description of Change | | --------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------- | | Cycle Count Header | "Assign User" feature added for batch-level assignment | | Detail Sub-Form | Confirmation pop-up and user dropdown for assignment | | Grid View | New "Assigned Users" column added | | Batch Selection Logic | Accepted and Void batches excluded from assignable list | ## WMS ENHANCEMENT ### **New Inventory Adjustment Module in WMS** We have introduced a new module **Inventory Adjustment** within the WMS system. This module allows you to adjust inventory of single or multiple items to single or multiple LPN#/Locations.
To know more about this module, click [here](https://app.gitbook.com/o/Io6LXfHxKCbW4ooKqqMR/s/kf8DNCjEfcSm64PCPcmf/~/changes/3011/xorowms/wms-inventory-adjustment). ### Enhancement to Auto Calculate Weight During Packing in WMS A new enhancement has been introduced to control automatic weight calculation during packing in WMS, based on the App Config **‘Auto Calculate LPN/OLPN Contents Weight’**.
#### **Feature Details** * **Auto Calculate Package Weight:** When the app config is enabled, the system automatically calculates the weight of the LPN/OLPN contents before packing using the item weight and the number of picked items, along with the Ship Package Type. When App Config is disabled, only the Ship Package Type weight is used for weight calculation. * **Manual Override:** Users can manually update the weight during packing if needed. * **Post-Packing Behavior:** After packing, if the Ship Package Type is changed and the weight recalculated, validating the LPN will retain the originally saved packing weight. ### **New App Configuration – Disable Copy Functionality in WMS** **Overview** To address operational control concerns and prevent process circumvention during order picking, a new configuration setting has been introduced in the **Xoro WMS app**. This enhancement provides administrators with the ability to **disable the copy functionality** within the app, while ensuring **barcode scanning remains fully operational**. *** **Key Enhancement** **New App Config Setting:** * **Setting Name:** `Disable copy in WMS app` * **Location:** App Config → WMS tab
When this setting is enabled: * **Users will no longer be able to copy text or data** from input fields within the WMS app. * **Barcode scanning remains unaffected**, ensuring that legitimate operations are not hindered. *** **Purpose of Enhancement** This update was driven by customer feedback highlighting that users were **bypassing barcode scanning** by **copy-pasting item data**, particularly in order picking workflows. This behavior resulted in: * Acceptance of **inaccurate quantities** (e.g., less than inner pack quantities) * **Shipping discrepancies** due to incomplete validation * **Reduced adherence to scanning protocol** By restricting the copy function, this enhancement reinforces **scanning compliance** and promotes **accurate order fulfillment**. *** **Impact and Considerations** * This setting is **optional and configurable** based on customer preferences. * It is **non-intrusive** and does not interfere with barcode scanning, data entry, or operational flow. * Recommended for warehouses requiring **strict adherence to scanning workflows** and **accuracy in item validation**. *** For further information or implementation assistance, please refer to the **Xoro Knowledgebase** or contact your Xoro representative. **Impact and Considerations** * This setting is **optional and configurable** based on customer preferences. * It is **non-intrusive** and does not interfere with barcode scanning, data entry, or operational flow. * Recommended for warehouses requiring **strict adherence to scanning workflows** and **accuracy in item validation**. # July 2025 Release {% hint style="warning" %} **This is a Custom Release. Feature availability depends on configuration and rollout status. Some features listed above may not be visible in your environment if they are part of a staged or custom deployment. Please contact your support representative to confirm enablement.** {% endhint %} ### Multi-Select Support for Custom Fields **Overview:** This release introduces **multi-select dropdown support** for custom fields in both the **Header** and **Detail** sections across applicable modules. Users can now assign **multiple values** to a single custom field, enabling more flexible and comprehensive data capture.
**What’s New:** | Area | Description | | -------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Detail Custom Fields | Multi-select dropdowns are now supported. Users can select multiple values per line item. | | Header Custom Fields | Multi-select functionality has been enabled. Users can apply multiple values at the document level. | | Applicable Modules | Estimate, Estimate Centre, Sales Order, Sales Order Centre, Purchase Order, Purchase Order Centre, Invoice, Invoice Centre, Item Receipt, Item Receipt Centre, Bill, Bill Centre, Sales Receipt, Sales Receipt Centre, Credit Memo, Credit Memo Centre, Bill of Material, Bill of Material Centre, Manufacturing Order, Manufacturing Order Centre, RMA, RMA Centre | ### **Field Sorting in Bank Reconciliation Centre** **Overview:** To improve usability and data navigation within the **Bank Reconciliation Centre**, we have introduced field-level **sorting capabilities**. This enhancement enables users to sort data columns directly within the interface, allowing for faster reconciliation and improved control over large data sets.
*** **Enhancement Details:** * All key fields in the **Bank Reconciliation Centre** are now **sortable**, allowing users to arrange entries in ascending or descending order based on their preferences. * Sorting functionality has been added to fields such as: * **Transaction Date** * **Document Type** * **Document Number** * **Amount** * **Reconciled Status** * **Bank Reference** * **Cleared Date** * (Include other fields here as applicable) {% hint style="warning" %} * This enhancement applies to both **manual** and **auto-reconciled** entries within the module. * Sorting is retained per session but will reset upon page reload. {% endhint %} ### **Brand Field Added to Batch Inventory Movement** We have introduced a new enhancement in the **Batch Inventory Movement** module to improve searchability and categorization of inventory records. **Overview:** * A **"Brand" field** has been added to the **Batch Inventory Movement columns**, enabling users to directly view the brand associated with each batch entry.
* The **"Brand" field** has also been integrated into the **Advanced Search** functionality, allowing users to filter batch inventory movement data based on specific brands.
*** ### Auto-Assign Default Item Location for PO Receiving and MO Operations **Overview:** **New App Config Introduced** A new application configuration named:\ **“Auto-Select Default Item Location for PO Receiving and MO Production/Disassembly”** has been added to the system settings. * **Type:** Multi-select dropdown * **Available Options:** * Receive PO * Produce/Disassemble MO This configuration provides users with greater automation and efficiency during inventory movements.
*** **How It Works:** When this configuration is enabled: * The system will **automatically assign the item’s default location**: * During **PO receiving**, through **Quick Receive** or **ASN**. * During **MO production and disassembly** processes. * Users will no longer be required to manually select the item location; items will be **directly received, produced, or disassembled into their default locations**. *** **Validation Logic:** To ensure data accuracy and consistency, the system performs the following validations: * An error will be triggered if: * The **item’s default store or default location is not defined**, or * The **default store does not match** the store selected in the **PO or MO**. This validation prevents incorrect inventory placement and maintains inventory integrity across the system. *** ### **"Post Selected Lines as New Bill" – Item Receipt Module Enhancement** **Overview:** A new feature, **“Post Selected Lines as New Bill”**, has been introduced in the **Item Receipt module**. This enhancement provides users with greater flexibility and control by allowing them to **selectively post specific item receipt lines to a new bill**, instead of converting the entire receipt at once. This enhancement allows users to select specific item receipt lines for posting as separate \ bills, while maintaining full auditability, status tracking, and financial integrity. This is particularly helpful in scenarios involving **partial receipt billing**, complex vendor invoicing, or staggered item reconciliation workflows.
**How It Works:** **1. Access & Usage** * The **“Post Selected Lines as New Bill”** option is now available under the **Options dropdown** in the **Item Receipt module's Header** section. * Users can select individual item receipt lines and post them to a new vendor bill. *** **2. Line-Level Enhancements** Each item line now includes two new fields: * **Posted:** Indicates whether the line has already been posted to a bill (True/False). * **Posted Bill#:** A hyperlink field referencing the bill number the line has been posted to, allowing direct navigation to the corresponding bill. When a line is successfully posted: * The **Posted** flag is marked as **True**. * The **Posted Bill#** is populated with a clickable link. * The **Item Receipt (IR)** status becomes **Partially Posted**. Once all lines are posted: * The **IR status** changes to **Posted**. These fields are visible on both the **Item Receipt Centre** and **Create/Edit page** views. *** **3. Validation & Data Integrity** Robust validations have been added to ensure consistency and prevent unintended changes: * **Line Locking:** * **Posted lines** cannot be edited (fields like Qty, Unit Cost, UOM, and Tax are locked). * Other non-impacting fields like **Description** or **Memo** remain editable. * **Deletion Restrictions:** * Posted lines cannot be deleted unless the associated bill is voided. * **Duplicate Posting Prevention:** * System checks ensure that a posted line cannot be reposted. * **Accounting Accuracy:** * The posting process respects GL and AP balances to maintain financial integrity. *** **4. Partial Posting Scenarios** * **Partially Posted IR:** * When only some lines are posted, the IR remains editable for **unposted lines**. * **New lines** can be added. * Posted lines remain read-only for protected fields. * **Full Posting:** * Once all lines are posted, the entire IR status is set to **Posted** and becomes non-editable for any transactional changes. *** **5. Voiding Posted Bills** * If a **posted bill is voided**, the corresponding item receipt lines automatically: * Revert the **Posted** status to **False**. * Clear the **Posted Bill#** field. * The IR status is updated based on the remaining posted/unposted lines. **Detailed Expense Breakdown in Posted Bills** **Previously:** * Once an expense bill was posted, **no updates or modifications** were allowed. **Now:** * Users can **update, split, or break down** expense bill amounts even after the bill has been posted. * Specific cost components (like Labour, Material, etc.) can now be separated into individual lines for better clarity and reporting. * **New Addition:** Users can break a single posted bill into multiple lines to make the allocation **more specific and transparent.** **Restrictions:** * The **total posted bill amount cannot be increased or decreased.** * Only redistribution of the existing amount across different lines is allowed. **Example:** * Posted Bill Amount: **$100** * Suppose $10 of this amount was for Labour (previously bundled into the total). * Now, the user can restructure as: * $90 (Material) * $10 (Labour) * Total remains **$100** — only the internal distribution is updated. This ensures users can reprocess or repost such lines as needed without data inconsistencies. *** ### **Vendor Configuration and Suspense Account Integration for IR Generation and Bill Posting** **Overview:** This update enables users to configure a vendor-specific default Suspense Account for Item Receipt (IR) transactions and introduces a controlled bill posting workflow post-IR generation. These enhancements support real-world accounting practices where vendor liabilities are managed through suspense accounts before being formally recognized as payables. **Enhancement Details:** 1. **Vendor Configuration** * A new dropdown field, **Default AP Suspense Account**, has been added under the **Payments** tab in the Vendor module.
* A toggle, **"Use as default for IR?"**, is also introduced.
* When enabled, the system will use the specified Suspense Account for generating Item Receipts instead of the default Accounts Payable (AP) account. * Both the dropdown and toggle are visible on the Vendor UI and supported during bulk upload via vendor import. 2. **Account Setup** * To support this configuration, users are required to create a **Suspense Account** with **Account Type: Accounts Payable** under Account Setup. 3. **Item Receipt (IR) Generation Flow** * Upon closing an ASN for a vendor with this configuration enabled, the IR will be automatically generated using the assigned Suspense Account. * This ensures vendor-specific liabilities are held temporarily in suspense, allowing for staged bill recognition. 4. **Bill Posting Workflow** * Following IR creation, a new action button **“Post as Bill”** appears. * Clicking this opens a pop-up window to: * Select **Bill Date (Transaction Date)**. * Choose the **target AP Account** to transfer the amount to. * Enter the **Post Amount** to be recognized in the bill. 5. **Posting Scenarios** * **Full Posting** (Post Amount = IR Amount or more): * IR Status: **Posted** * The resulting Bill reflects a regular expense entry. * **Partial Posting** (Post Amount < IR Amount): * IR Status: **Partially Posted**
* The Bill displays a negative expense line for the unposted portion. * The remaining amount can be posted later as a separate bill.
**Integration with Prior Enhancements**\ This enhancement complements the previously released **“**[**Post Selected Lines as New Bill**](/whats-new/release-notes/current-release)**”** feature by adding accounting-level flexibility through suspense account handling. Together, these features ensure end-to-end traceability, segmented billing, and accurate financial reporting even in staggered receipt and payment workflows. *** ### **Decimal Formatter Added for Unit Cost, Price, and Landed Cost Fields** **Overview:** To improve consistency and clarity in financial data entry, a **new number formatting logic** has been implemented for **Unit Cost, Price, and Landed Cost** fields across various modules. This enhancement standardizes the appearance of numerical values during transaction creation. **Applicable Modules:** * Bill * Credit Memo * Credit Memo from Invoice * Invoice * Manufacturing Order (MO) * Purchase Order (PO) * Sales Receipt * Sales Order (SO) * Item Receipt * Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) **How It Works:** **1. Formatter Logic** * All price fields in **Create Page, Subform, Centre, and Centre Detail View** will now display **exactly two digits after the decimal point**. {% hint style="warning" %} **Note:** Landed Cost / Amount / Price fields are **excluded** from this change and may continue to display more or fewer than two decimal places. {% endhint %} * All **editable price fields** (especially **Unit Cost / Rate** fields) will display **a minimum of 2 decimal places** but may show more where required. This enhancement ensures uniformity in price display while retaining flexibility for fields that require higher precision. * Examples: * A value entered as **7** will now display as **7.00** * A value like **7.9999** will remain unchanged, as it already exceeds two decimals **2. Field Coverage** The formatting has been applied to the following fields, as applicable to each module: * **Unit Cost** * **Price** * **Landed Cost** **3. UI Locations** Formatting changes are applied in the following sections of the modules: * **Create Page > Detail View** * **Subform > Detail View** {% hint style="warning" %} No changes have been made to how these values appear on the **Centre pages** to ensure consistency in display, without affecting grid-based summaries or reporting views. {% endhint %} *** ### **Linked Orders Tab Added to Credit Memo Modules** \ **Modules Updated:** * Credit Memo * Invoice Credit Memo * Subform (related to above modules) **Overview:** A new **"Linked Orders"** tab has been introduced to the **Credit Memo** and **Invoice Credit Memo** modules, including their respective subforms. This enhancement provides users with direct visibility into any **associated sales or purchase orders**, improving traceability and operational clarity.
**How It Works:** * A new tab titled **“Linked Orders”** is now available on: * **Credit Memo main page** * **Invoice Credit Memo main page** * **Associated Subform views** * When the **Linked Orders** tab is clicked: * All relevant linked orders will be displayed in a structured, tabular format. * This includes references to originating orders connected to the credit transaction. **Validation:** * Ensure that the **Linked Orders** tab accurately displays all related order references. * Validate that tab functionality is consistent across both **main pages** and **subform views**. *** ### "Status" Column Added in Item Centre > Inventory > In Picking Sub-Form \ **Module Affected:** Item Centre **Overview:** A new **"Status"** column has been added to the **In Picking sub-form** accessed from the **Item Centre**. This enhancement allows users to directly view the current **Wave Status** (e.g., *Allocated*, *Picking*, *Closed*, etc.) without needing to click into each wave number. **Navigation Path:** `Item Centre → Double Click on Item → Inventory Tab → Under In Picking column → Click on Quantity Value → Sub-form → Status column`
**How It Works:** * A new **Status** column is displayed in the sub-form that lists picking records. * The status reflects the current progress of the wave related to the selected item line. **Status values include (but are not limited to):** * Allocated * Picking * Closed * Partial * Pending {% hint style="warning" %} * The **Status** field is dynamically pulled from the associated **Wave Management** module. * No changes have been made to existing field behavior or clickable wave number functionality. * Fully **backward compatible**; does not affect data integrity or user permissions. {% endhint %} *** ### **Addition of “Description” Column in Price Centre Export & Master Data Upload File** **Overview:** To improve data clarity and consistency during price management workflows, we have introduced the **“Description” column** in two key areas related to Item Price handling: *** **1. Data Export Centre → Item Search by Dropdown → “Price Centre” Export** * A new **"Description"** column has been added to the file exported via the **"Price Centre"** option under **Item Search By** in the **Data Export Centre**. * This column reflects the **item description** as stored in the system master, providing additional context for each item alongside existing data points like Item Code, Price, and Brand.
**2. Upload Item Prices Module → Master Data File** * The **"Description"** column is now also included in the **Master Data file** generated for uploading item prices.
* This helps users in validating data and ensures consistency between exported and uploaded records, minimizing mismatches. **Impact:** * This change affects only the **exported Excel/CSV file** structure. * No changes have been made to the upload logic or Item Price Centre UI. * The additional column does not disrupt the upload template’s compatibility, as the import logic continues to rely on required fields only. *** ### Quick Add Item Modal – Item Group Filter and Column Enhancement **Overview:** To improve item selection and streamline searchability within transactional modules, a new enhancement has been implemented in the **Quick Add Item** modal across multiple modules. **Enhancement Details:** * **New Filter Added:**\ A **filter for Item Group** has been introduced in the **Quick Add Item modal** used in the following modules: * Estimate * Sales Order * Purchase Order
This filter allows users to quickly narrow down item lists based on the selected Item Group, enabling faster and more relevant item selection.
* **New Column Added:**\ An **Item Group column** has also been added to the item listing table within the same modal.\ This ensures better visibility and categorization of items while browsing or selecting them during transaction creation.
*** ### Default Store and Default Location in Item Page Defaults **Overview:** A new functionality has been introduced in the **Item module** to improve inventory handling and streamline item setup. Users can now define default values for **Store** and **Location** under the **Page Defaults** section of an item.
**Enhancement Details:** * **Default Store Field:**\ Allows users to set a predefined store for the item. This store will be auto-populated in transactions involving the item unless overridden manually. * **Default Location Field:**\ Enables setting a specific storage location within the default store. It ensures consistency in item placement and speeds up transaction processing. *** ### Default Location Column Added to BOM Centre (Detail View) **Overview:** To improve visibility and streamline inventory planning during production processes, a new column has been added to the **Bill of Materials (BOM) Centre – Detail View**. This enhancement allows users to view the **Default Location** of items listed in each BOM line directly within the interface.
**Enhancement Details:** * **New Column Introduced:**\ A **“Default Location”** column is now visible in the **BOM Detail view**, displaying the pre-defined storage location of each component item listed in the Bill of Materials. * **Data Source:**\ The default location displayed is pulled from the **Item Master → Page Defaults** section, where the default storage location is assigned to each item. * **Applies To:**\ This enhancement applies to all records viewed in the **BOM Centre → Detail tab**, ensuring consistency and better planning across different manufacturing scenarios. *** ### Deposit Refund – Sales Order & Customer Mapping Support **Overview**: To provide more flexibility in handling deposit refunds across multiple Sales Orders (SOs), we have introduced an enhancement that allows partial deposit refunds even when the deposit has been applied across different SOs. **How It Works:** * **New App Config Added**\ A configuration toggle named **"Enable Sales Order and Customer Refund Mapping"** has been introduced. When enabled, the system will allow refunds of the remaining deposit amount even if the deposit has been linked or partially applied to a different Sales Order.
* **Refund Logic Enhancement**\ Previously, once a deposit was applied to any other Sales Order, the system restricted refund generation entirely. * With this enhancement, users can now process **refunds for the unapplied portion** of a deposit, regardless of cross-SO application history. *** ### Enhanced Detail View Options in Customer Portal Orders Module **Overview:** To improve transparency and elevate the user experience within the Customer Portal, two new options have been introduced under the **"Type"** dropdown in the **Orders module**. These additions allow customers to view detailed line-item information for **Sales Orders** and **Estimates** directly from the portal interface. *** **New Options Added:**
| Option Name | Description | | ---------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Customer Portal Sales Order Detail | Displays detail-level data for Sales Orders, including individual items, quantities, unit prices, and delivery status. | | Customer Portal Estimate Detail | Presents line-item level information for Estimates, enabling users to view quoted items in full detail. | *** **How It Works:** * When a user selects either of the new options from the **"Type"** dropdown, the portal generates a line-item view corresponding to the selected transaction type. * Each row represents a unique line item tied to a Sales Order or Estimate, with columns displaying fields such as Item Name, Quantity, Unit Price, Subtotal, Status, and more. * Double-clicking any row opens the same detailed report that is available through the header-level Sales Order or Estimate view. {% hint style="info" %} This enhancement is now available in the **Customer Portal**. No configuration is required. Users will see the new **"Sales Order Detail"** and **"Estimate Detail"** options in the **"Type"** dropdown menu. {% endhint %} *** ### "Is BOM Item Active" Column Added to BOM Centre **Overview:** A new column titled **"Is BOM Item Active"** has been added to the **BOM Centre** screen. This enhancement is aimed at providing better visibility into the status of BOM items, enabling users to identify whether a BOM item is currently active or inactive at a glance.
*** **How It Works:** * **New Column Integration:** The "Is BOM Item Active" column clearly indicates the active status of each BOM item. * **Improved Usability:** Users can now easily review, filter, and manage BOMs based on the item status without navigating into individual records. * **Enhanced BOM Management:** Assists in maintaining data accuracy and supports better decision-making during production planning and item reviews. *** ### **Support for Item Rebate in Last Order Item Functionality** **Module(s):** Estimate & Sales Order **Overview:** We are pleased to announce an enhancement in the *Last Order Item* functionality within the **Estimate** and **Sales Order** modules of XoroERP. With this update, users can now view and apply **Item Rebate information** directly when fetching previously ordered items, providing greater pricing consistency, accuracy, and efficiency in order processing. **What's New:** **Item Rebate Support in Last Order Item Lookup**
* When using the **Last Order Item** feature while creating an Estimate or Sales Order, the system now **automatically captures and displays the rebate** applied to the item in the previous order. * Users can choose to **replicate the rebate structure** as it was in the prior transaction, or modify it as needed. **How It Works:** 1. Navigate to the **Estimate** or **Sales Order** module. 2. Use the **Last Order Item** lookup to fetch items previously ordered by the selected customer. 3. The rebate, if any, from the last order will now be displayed alongside the item details. 4. Users can **choose to retain or adjust** the rebate amount before finalizing the transaction. {% hint style="warning" %} * This feature respects all existing rebate rules and validations configured in your ERP system. * Admins can configure access to rebate replication as per role-based permissions if needed. {% endhint %} *** ### Item Category Column Integration in Estimate Module Search Interfaces **Modules Impacted:** * Estimate Centre * Estimate Subform * Estimate Detail * Advanced Search (Estimate) * Search by Estimate Detail **Overview:** To enhance item-level visibility and improve filtering capabilities across estimation workflows, the **Item Category** column has been added to various search and display areas in the **Estimate module** of XoroERP. This addition allows users to **identify, group, and filter items based on their assigned categories**—directly from within the Estimate Centre and associated views. This is particularly useful in businesses managing large volumes of estimations across diverse product categories, enabling refined search criteria, improved reporting, and faster decision-making. **Enhancement Details:** The **Item Category** field has been added to the following functional areas: **1. Search by Estimate Detail (Estimate Centre)** * A new column, **Item Category**, has been included in the **Search by Estimate Detail** results grid. * This allows users to view and filter items within estimates based on their assigned **Item Category** as defined in the Item Master. * The category is visible alongside other line-level details such as Item#, Description, Qty, Unit Price, and more.
**2. Advanced Search – Estimate Centre** * The **Advanced Search panel** in the Estimate Centre now includes **Item Category** as a searchable parameter. * Users can perform targeted queries to retrieve estimates that include items belonging to specific categories. * Supports both exact match and multi-value filtering depending on configuration.
**3. Estimate Sub-Form (Estimate Centre)** * The **Item Category** column is now visible in the **Estimate Subform grid**, enhancing in-line review of item classification within each estimate. * This view helps users quickly identify product groupings and check estimate composition at a glance.
**4. Estimate Detail Level Column Search** * Column-level search functionality has been extended to include the **Item Category** column. * Users can apply direct column filters to narrow down line items based on category. * Improves data handling efficiency in large estimates with diverse item sets.
*** ### **Enhanced Batch Reconciliation in Item Receipt Centre and Bill Centre** **Overview:** A new **Batch Reconcile** option has been introduced in the **Item Receipt Centre** and **Bill Centre** modules to support streamlined reconciliation of multiple item receipts and vendor bills, including those associated with different vendors under specific constraints.
**How It Works:** * Users can now perform **batch-level reconciliation** for multiple bills and item receipts. * **Vendor Constraint**: In the Item Receipt Centre and Bill Centre, batch reconciliation can be initiated even if the bills originate from **different vendors**. * **Store Flexibility**: The associated **store** may differ across the selected transactions, allowing users to reconcile across multiple receiving locations. * **Currency Constraint**: All bills and item receipts included in a batch must have the **same order currency** for reconciliation to proceed. Mixed-currency batches are not supported to maintain financial consistency. This enhancement is particularly useful when handling **purchase orders involving multiple inventory vendors** where a **shared shipment cost** needs to be allocated and reconciled efficiently. It helps automate what would otherwise be a manual, error-prone process, ensuring accurate financial postings while supporting operational flexibility. *** ### **Link Orders API** **Overview:** The **Link Orders API** is used to create, update, or delete links between **Sales Orders (SO)** and **Purchase Orders (PO)**. * To **create or update** a link, provide the SO/PO line IDs along with a **non-zero quantity**. * To **delete** a link, simply set the **quantity to zero**. For detailed request/response structures and additional parameters, refer to the full API documentation here:\ 🔗 [Link Orders API Documentation](https://xorosoft.docs.apiary.io/#reference/purchase-orders/order-linking) *** ### **CreateDropshipPO API** **Overview:** The **CreateDropshipPO** API is designed to create **dropship purchase orders** directly from a **Sales Order**. This is applicable when items must be shipped **directly from a vendor to the customer**, bypassing the internal warehouse process. To use this API, provide the following: * **Sales Order number** * **Sales Order line ID** * **Vendor ID** * **Quantity** For full technical details including request format and payload structure, please refer to the official documentation:\ 🔗 [CreateDropshipPO API Documentation](https://xorosoft.docs.apiary.io/#reference/purchase-orders/create-dropship-po/create-dropship-po)
*** ### DropshipOrder by PO API **Overview**: This API is used to confirm and close a dropship order using the related Purchase Order number. It allows you to post tracking and shipping details, freight, and invoice information for each order line that was dropshipped.\ \ For full technical details including request format and payload structure, please refer to the official documentation:\ # August 2025 Release {% hint style="warning" %} This is a Custom Release. Feature availability depends on configuration and rollout status. Some features listed above may not be visible in your environment if they are part of a staged or custom deployment. Please contact your support representative to confirm enablement. {% endhint %} ### **Enhanced Sales Order Detail View** **Overview**\ Two new clickable columns have been introduced in the Sales Order detail view in the **SO Centre** and **Create SO** module to improve navigation and user experience.
**New Features:** * **Clickable (Linked PO):**\ This column provides direct access to the linked Purchase Order associated with each sales order line. Users can now click on the PO number to quickly navigate to the corresponding PO record. * **Clickable (Invoice Number):**\ This column enables users to click on the displayed invoice number to view the related invoice details instantly.
*** ### **Enhanced Auto Allocation Options in App Config Module** **Overview:** This enhancement introduces three new **Locked Wave** allocation options under the following configuration settings in the **App Config Module's Purchase and Manufacturing section**: * `Auto allocate linked sales orders when stock is received`
* `Auto allocate linked sales orders when linked MO is produced`
These options offer improved control and precision in how inventory is auto-allocated to linked Sales Orders through **Locked Waves**. *** **Enhancement Details:** **New Options Introduced:** 1. **Full Order (Locked):** * Auto allocation will occur **only** when stock is available for **all lines and full quantities** in the Sales Order. * Allocation will be executed through a **Locked Wave**. * Ensures complete shipment readiness before committing inventory. 2. **Full Qty Line (Locked):** * Allocates only those lines where the **entire quantity for the line** is available. * Partial line fulfillment is skipped. * Allocation is performed as a **Locked Wave**, preserving wave integrity and planning. 3. **Allocate What’s Available (Locked):** * Enables allocation of **partial stock** across one or more lines. * Even if full order or line quantities are not available, the system will allocate **what’s currently in stock**. * Allocation is done via a **Locked Wave**, ensuring that the resulting pick wave remains frozen and system-controlled. {% hint style="warning" %} The term **“Locked”** in this context refers to the **wave being locked** once allocation is performed. {% endhint %} **Configuration Path:** To configure: 1. Go to **App Config Module** 2. Locate the settings: * `Auto-allocate linked sales orders when stock is received` * `Auto-allocate linked sales orders when the linked MO is produced` 3. Select from the newly added **Locked Wave** options: * `Full Order (Locked)` * `Full Qty Line (Locked)` * `Allocate What’s Available (Locked)` *** ### **New 'Multi-line Text' Field Type in Custom Field Definition** **Overview:** A new field type – **‘Multi-line Text’** – has been introduced in the **Custom Field Definition** module. This enhancement enables users to capture **paragraph-style, free-form text**, offering greater flexibility for storing detailed information. Additionally, to ensure a clean and user-friendly interface, a **“Show More”** toggle has been implemented for long custom field values. **Enhancement Details:** **New Field Type: Multi-line Text**
* This new field type allows users to define custom fields where **multi-sentence or paragraph-level input** is required. * Useful for storing detailed notes, descriptions, instructions, comments, or any other long-form text. **Auto "Show More" for Long Content** * When the value in a custom field exceeds **12 words**, the field will display a truncated preview with a **“Show More”** link. * On clicking "Show More," the full content becomes visible. * This prevents long text from cluttering list views or detail panels, maintaining UI readability. *** ### **Credit Memo Line Views with Custom Price Columns** **Module(s):** * **Data Export Centre** * **Credit Centre** **Overview:** The Credit Memo Line views in both the **Data Export Centre** and the **Credit Centre module** have been enhanced to provide better visibility and flexibility by incorporating additional **Custom Price** columns.
**Enhancement Details:** **First Five Custom Price Columns Added** * The following columns are now available in the **Credit Memo Line** views of both: * **Data Export Centre**, and * **Credit Centre Module** **→ Custom Price 1**\ **→ Custom Price 2**\ **→ Custom Price 3**\ **→ Custom Price 4**\ **→ Custom Price 5** * These columns will display corresponding custom pricing values defined in the system, ensuring full transparency and control over line-level pricing adjustments. **How to Access:** * Navigate to **Data Export Centre** → Export Type: **Credit Memo Line** * Navigate to **Credit Centre** → View: **Credit Memo Line** * Scroll or customize the view to see the newly added **Custom Price 1–5** columns. *** ### **Addition of “Vendor Internal Notes” Column in Purchase Order Item Line** **Overview:** A new column, **"Vendor Internal Notes,"** has been added to the **Purchase Order Item Line** to improve communication and visibility of vendor-specific information directly within the PO workflow. **Enhancement Details:** * **New Column:**\ **→ Vendor Internal Notes** * **Location:**\ This column is now visible at the **line-item level** in the **Purchase Order** module.
* **Data Source:**\ This column automatically retrieves values from the **Internal Notes** field configured in the Item Vendor Mapping module, maintaining consistency and removing the need for manual cross-referencing.
*** **How It Works:** * Open any **Purchase Order** and navigate to the **Item Line section**. * Look for the new column titled **"Vendor Internal Notes."** * The value shown will reflect the corresponding **Internal Notes** set in the **Item Vendor Mapping** for that Vendor-Item combination. *** ### App Config - Restrict Save on Tax Calculation Error **Overview:** When enabled, this setting prevents saving Sales Order, Invoice, Estimate, Credit Memo, or Sales Receipt if address-based tax calculation returns an error.
**How It Works:** * Applicable to: **Sales Order, Invoice, Estimate, Credit Memo, and Sales Receipt.** * Trigger: Address-based tax calculation error. * Effect: Save action will be blocked until the tax calculation issue is resolved. *** ### **New Upload Budget Module** **Overview:** A new **Upload Budget** module has been added under the **Utilities** section.\ To access: **Menu > Utilities > Data Imports > Upload Budget**.
**How It Works:**\ This module allows users to upload budget data directly into the system, addressing the current limitation where budgets could only be defined manually within the application. *** ### B2B Presentation Filter Control **Overview:**\ This release introduces two major enhancements to improve credit control and B2B presentation usability. **1. Restriction on B2B Presentation Filters Reload**\ A new configuration, **"Restrict auto apply filters in presentation"** has been added under App Config. * **If Enabled:** B2B filters will remain as selected without reloading after choosing any filter in the presentation page while adding an item to the cart. * **If Disabled:** Filters will reload after selection of the product/item, maintaining the existing functionality.
**How It Works:**\ Navigate to any B2B Presentation (Internal or External link) to experience the updated behavior based on the config setting. *** ### **Extended Credit Limit Restriction to B2B Orders** The existing **"Restrict Defaulter Customer Sales"** configuration has been enhanced with multi-select options, giving users granular control over restriction behavior.
**Enhancements:** * If a customer’s **Credit Limit is exceeded** and the relevant config option is enabled, **new orders cannot be created from the B2B portal** (New Functionality). * If **Credit Limit Exceeded** or **Overdue Invoices** options are selected in config **Criteria for Restricting Defaulter Customers**, Sales Orders cannot be released, and Invoices cannot be created from XoroERP modules (Existing functionality remains unchanged).
**Usage:** 1. Open any customer profile → Options → Balance Overview. 2. Check “Defaulter” status, “Has overdue invoices,” and “Credit exceeded” values. 3. Credit limit values can be set from the Customer module. **Impact:** * **B2B orders** will now respect the customer’s credit status, preventing bypass of restrictions through automatically released orders. * **Presentation page filters** can be locked in place for faster and more controlled ordering workflows. *** ### Selective Qty/Price Editing in Advanced Variant Finder **Overview:**\ A new setting **"Update Qty/Price in Edit Advanced Variant Finder"** has been added under **General Settings** to provide more control over which fields can be edited in the Advanced Variant Finder.
**How It Works:** * **Default Behavior:** Both Quantity (Qty) and Price can be updated in the Advanced Variant Finder matrix. * **If “Price” is selected:** * Only Price can be updated. * Qty and Purchase Ratio fields are disabled. * **If “Qty” is selected:** * Only Qty can be updated. * Price and Purchase Ratio fields are disabled. * **Duplicate Items Handling:** * If duplicate items exist at the Sales Order line level, changes to Price or Qty will apply to all duplicate instances. **Dependencies:**\ To use this functionality, both of the following settings must be enabled: 1. **Update Qty/Price in Edit Advanced Variant Finder** 2. **Enable Price Edit in Advanced Variant Finder** **Impact:** * Allows greater precision and control in item editing within the Advanced Variant Finder. * Prevents accidental changes to fields not intended for modification. *** ### Added "Average Unit Cost" Field in BOM Item Line Level **Overview:** * A new field, **"Average Unit Cost"** has been added in the following areas: * **BOM Centre - Search By Bill Of Material Lines**
* **BOM Module - item line level (Detail level)**
* **BOM Subform**
**How It Works:** * The field displays the **average unit cost** of the selected item. ### **Minimum Sell Quantity Feature** **Overview:** 1. **Minimum Sell Quantity Field** * Added to **Product Page** and **Upload Products** sections.
* Allows you to define the minimum number of units a product can be sold in. 2. **Force Product Minimum Sell Qty Checkbox** * Added in the **Presentation Centre**.
* When enabled, the system will enforce the minimum sell quantity rules across the platform. *** **How It Works:** **1. Minimum Sell Quantity on Product Info Popup** * If a product has a **Minimum Sell Quantity** defined, this value will be displayed in the product info popup for user reference. **2. Quantity Validation** * If a user tries to add a quantity **less than the Minimum Sell Quantity**, the system will prevent the action. * Products can **only be added to the cart** if the total quantity is **equal to or greater than** the Minimum Sell Quantity. **3. Handling Zero Quantity** * If the total product quantity in the cart is zero, the user can still update the cart freely. **4. Single Variant Add to Cart** * When using the **Single Variant Add-to-Cart** feature, the system will automatically default the added quantity to the product’s **Minimum Sell Quantity**. This ensures customers are informed about minimum purchase requirements, prevents accidental under-ordering, and maintains consistency across the cart experience. *** ### **Launch Date Column Enhancement in Item Module** **Overview:**\ A new **"Launch Date"** field and column has been introduced to improve product data tracking and management across the Item module. **How It Works:** 1. **Other Attributes Tab – Item Module & Subform** * Added a new field **"Launch Date"** under the *Other Attributes* tab at both the main Item module and its subform level.
* This allows users to record and view the official launch date of an item directly within its detailed attributes. 2. **Item Centre Integration** * The **Launch Date** column is now available in the *Item Centre*, enabling quick visibility of product launch dates in the central listing view without navigating into item details. 3. **Upload Items/Products Module Support** * The **Launch Date** column is now supported in the *Upload Items/Products* functionality. * Users can input and bulk upload product launch dates along with other item details using the existing upload templates. *** ### **Enhancement in Customer Tax Number Handling** **Overview:** We have introduced a new **App Configuration option**: **“Make tax numbers mandatory for taxable customers”** in XoroERP.\ This feature provides flexibility in handling customer tax numbers with the following updates: 1. **App Config (Multi-Select Options)** * Users can configure whether **Tax Number 1**, **Tax Number 2**, or both should be treated as mandatory.
* Once enabled, mandatory validation is enforced in the **Customer Module** under **Sales Tax** details.
* This validation is **only applicable when a customer is marked as taxable** and the app configuration is turned on. 2. **Customer Upload Enhancements** * During customer master uploads, **Tax Number 1 and Tax Number 2** will now be validated as **mandatory fields** (based on configuration). *** **Module Impact** * **Customer Module (Sales Tax Section):** * Ensures proper capture of mandatory tax numbers. * Reduces errors during customer creation and tax reporting. * **App Configurations:** * Provides administrators with flexible control over tax number requirements. * Different business units can tailor compliance settings as per local tax regulations. * **Customer Upload Module:** * Prevents incomplete or invalid customer records during bulk uploads. * Enforces tax compliance from the very first point of data entry. *** ### **Void option** in the **Refund Sub-form** **Overview:** We have introduced a new **“Void” option** in the **Refund Sub-form** of XoroERP.\ This option functions in the same way as the existing **“Delete” option** available in the **Customer Refund Centre**, thereby providing consistency across modules. With this update, users now have greater control and flexibility when managing refund records directly within the sub-form, without navigating back to the main Refund Centre.
*** **How It Works:** * The **“Void” action** can be applied to a refund record in the **Refund Sub-form**. * Once voided, the refund behaves in the same manner as if it were **deleted** from the Customer Refund Centre. * This ensures that incorrect or unnecessary refund entries can be efficiently cancelled at the point of entry. {% hint style="warning" %} If the **original payment was made via Credit Card**, the system will **restrict refunds** for that transaction, ensuring compliance with payment processing rules. {% endhint %} *** **Module Impact** * **Refund Sub-form:** * Gains a new action option (**Void**) to manage refund records more effectively. * Refunds on credit card payments are now blocked for better payment compliance. * **Customer Refund Centre:** * Functionality remains consistent across modules, reducing user confusion. * Credit card refund restrictions ensure financial integrity. *** ### **Enhancement in Item Subform (Vendors Tab)** **Overview:** We have introduced two new columns in the **Vendors tab** of the **Item Subform view**: * **Purchase UOM Name** * **Purchase UOM Code** These fields provide direct visibility into the purchase unit of measure (UOM) settings for each vendor associated with an item. The **Purchase UOM Name/Code** values displayed in the Vendors tab correspond directly to the **UOM Name/Code** defined in the respective **Item-Vendor Mapping**. *** **How It Works:** * When an item is linked to a vendor, its **Purchase UOM** details (Name & Code) will now appear in the Vendors tab of the Item Subform in the Item Centre.
* These values are automatically derived from the **Item-Vendor Mapping**, ensuring consistency across modules. *** **Module Impact:** * **Item Centre > Item Subform (Vendors Tab):** Gains two new columns for improved vendor-specific purchase data visibility. * **Item-Vendor Mapping:** Acts as the source of truth for Purchase UOM information, maintaining consistency in data representation. *** ### **Customer Centre (Alert Note added to Batch Update)** **Overview:** A new field, **“Alert Note”**, has been added to the **Batch Update** functionality in the **Customer Centre**. This enhancement enables users to update the Alert Note for multiple customers simultaneously through the batch update process.
*** **How It Works:** * In the **Customer Centre → Batch Update**, users will now see the **“Alert Note”** field available for selection. * When applied, the entered Alert Note value will be updated for all selected customer records. *** **Module Impact:** * **Customer Centre (Batch Update):** Gains the ability to mass-update the Alert Note field. * **Customer Records:** Ensures consistent and quick updates of important alert information across multiple customers. *** ### **Credit Centre Enhancements** **Overview:** Two key improvements have been introduced in **Credit Centre** modules to provide more flexibility and control in managing customer credits. 1. **Delete Customer Credit (Type: Transfer)** * New functionality has been added to **delete** or **batch delete** customer credits of type **Transfer** directly in the **Credit Centre**.
* This allows for bulk clean-up of erroneous or obsolete transfer credits. {% hint style="warning" %} Customer Credits in **Applied status cannot be deleted directly.** They must be unapplied before deletion. ![](/files/6Gd0TRy97u1vweaU0aEM) {% endhint %} *** **How It Works:** * **Customer Credit Deletion (Transfer Type):** * In the **Credit Centre**, select customer credits with type **Transfer**. * Use the **Delete** or **Batch Delete** option to remove selected records. *** ### **App Config: Additional Required Fields for Company-Type Customers** **Overview:** Introduced a new app configuration setting: *“**Additional Required Fields for Company-Type Customers.**”*
**How It Works:** * Admin users can now configure certain fields to be mandatory when creating or updating company-type customers. * The available fields that can be set as required are: * **Tags** * **Groups** * **Default Project Class** * **Order Type** * Once configured, the system will enforce validation checks on the selected fields across all input methods: * **Create Module** * **Customer Uploads** * **API Integrations** * **Scope:** * These validations apply **only** to customers classified as *Company*. * Customers classified as *Individual* remain unaffected, and no additional validation is applied to them. {% hint style="warning" %} This configuration is only applicable to the selected request type as defined in the **“Enforce Customer Additional Required Fields for Request Type”** setting. {% endhint %} *** ### U.S. 1099 Vendor Tax IDs (SSN & Federal ID) **Overview**: We’ve added two tax-identifier fields for U.S. 1099 vendors across vendor creation and management surfaces: * **Social Security Number (SSN)** * **Federal ID** (commonly EIN) These fields appear **only when**: 1. **Home Country = United States**, **and** 2. **Is 1099 Vendor? = checked** They are also available in **Upload Vendors**, **Data Export**, and **Vendor Centre**.
*** **How It Works:** 1\) Create Vendor >Primary tab * When the vendor’s **Home Country** is set to **United States** **and** **Is 1099 Vendor?** is checked: * **SSN** and **Federal ID** fields become visible and can be captured. * If either condition is not met: * The fields remain hidden (no user distraction, no accidental data capture). 2\) Upload Vendors * **SSN** and **Federal ID** columns are now supported in the vendor upload template. * During upload: * If **Home Country = United States** and **Is 1099 Vendor? = Yes**, the values (if provided) are ingested and stored. * If conditions aren’t met, the columns are ignored (no errors raised solely due to their presence). 3\) Vendor Centre * New columns/fields are available for **viewing** and **editing** vendor records that meet the visibility conditions.
* You can quickly audit or backfill SSN/EIN for existing U.S. 1099 vendors. 4\) Data Export * **SSN** and **Federal ID** can be included in exports for reporting or downstream compliance workflows. > **Note:** These are sensitive identifiers. Restrict export access to authorized roles only. *** ### **Introduction of Multibox Configuration in Item Setup** We are excited to announce the addition of a new feature called **Multibox** on the **Create Item** page. This enhancement provides users with the ability to define multiple cartons (boxes) with dimensions for a single item, enabling more accurate and flexible packing operations. **Overview:** * **Multibox Option:**\ When enabled for an item, a new sidebar tab appears on the Create Item page.
* Users can define **multiple cartons** for the same item. * Each carton can have its own **dimensions (length, width, height)** and associated configurations.
* This makes it possible to map real-world packaging scenarios, especially for items that ship in more than one carton or in cartons of varying sizes. *** **Integration with Express Ship** The **Express Ship** process now leverages the **Default Ship Carton Configuration** (available via App Config) to determine how cartons are created during shipment. The behavior changes depending on the configuration selected:
1. **Single Carton** * Regardless of how many multibox configurations are defined, the system will always create a **single carton** for the item. * **Use Case:** Useful when an item must always be shipped in one container, regardless of its defined multibox structure. 2. **Cartons Per Item** * For each item, the number of cartons created will correspond to the **configured multibox definitions**. * Example: If an item has 3 different cartons defined under Multibox, each time that item is shipped, 3 cartons will be created. * **Use Case:** Ideal for items with a fixed multi-carton packaging standard (e.g., furniture sets shipped in 2–3 cartons). 3. **Cartons Per Quantity** * Each **unit of item quantity** shipped will be assigned the defined number of cartons. * Example: If 2 units of an item are shipped and the item has 3 cartons defined under Multibox, a total of 6 cartons will be created. * **Use Case:** Perfect for scenarios where each unit of the item always requires multiple cartons (e.g., gym equipment, machinery parts). *** ### **Introduction of “Customization Info” Column** **Overview:** We have introduced a new column called **Customization Info** across the following modules: * **Sales Order (Detail) Centre** * **Create Invoice** * **Invoice Centre (Detail)** * **Invoice Subform** * **Sales Order Subform**
*** **How It Works:** * The **Customization Info** column is now visible in the above modules. * On clicking the value in this column, a **modal window** opens up. * The modal displays detailed **customization information** relevant to the selected record, giving users quick and direct access without navigating away from their workflow.
With this enhancement, both **Sales Order and Invoice management** become more efficient, enabling users to make better-informed decisions during order creation, review, and billing. *** ### **Support for Custom Fields in Advanced Variant Finder** **Overview:** Previously, when items were added using the **Advanced Variant Finder**, any associated **custom fields** were not automatically populated. This caused gaps in data consistency and required users to manually re-enter details. With this release, the system now supports **custom field population** during item selection via the Advanced Variant Finder. *** **How It Works:** 1. **Create Custom Field Definitions** * Users can define custom fields for: * **Item** * **Customer** * **Vendor** * **Estimate Detail** * **Sales Order (SO) Detail** * **Purchase Order (PO) Detail** 2. **Establish Custom Field Mappings** * Mapping enables the system to carry values from one entity to another. Supported mappings include: * **Item → SO Detail, Estimate Detail, PO Detail** * **Vendor → PO Detail** * **Customer → Estimate Detail, SO Detail** 3. **Automatic Population** * Once mappings are in place, when items are added through the **Advanced Variant Finder**, the defined **custom field values are automatically populated** into the corresponding detail lines (SO, PO, Estimate). *** ### **Addition of "Ship To First Name" and "Ship To Last Name" Columns in Customer Info** **Overview:** We have enhanced the **Customer Info module** for improved visibility and order tracking. * Under the **"Orders and Estimates"** tab, two new columns have been introduced: * **Ship To First Name** * **Ship To Last Name**
These fields display the recipient's first and last names associated with the order’s shipping address. *** ### **Customer Deposits Column in Sales Order Centre** **Overview:** A new enhancement has been introduced in the **Sales Order Centre** for better financial visibility and quick navigation. * **New Column Added:** *Customer Deposits*
* This column displays all deposit amounts associated with each Sales Order. * On clicking the deposit value, the system redirects directly to the **Customer Deposit page**, allowing users to review full details of the transaction. * The displayed amount is always synchronized with the deposit taken against the order, ensuring accuracy and consistency. *** ### **Auto-Select Default Item Location for PO Receiving and MO Production/Disassembly** **Overview:** A new application configuration has been introduced:\ **“Auto-Select Default Item Location for PO Receiving and MO Production/Disassembly.”** This app config is available as a **multi-select dropdown** with the following options: * **Receive PO** * **Produce/Disassemble MO**
The feature streamlines item location assignment by automatically using the **item’s default location** during key inventory processes, reducing manual effort and ensuring accuracy. **How It Works:** **When Enabled** * During **PO Receiving (via Quick Receive or ASN)** and **MO Production/Disassembly**, the system automatically assigns the item’s **default location**. * Items are directly received, produced, or moved into their default location without requiring manual selection. *** **Validations** The system ensures data integrity by validating against defined configurations: * If an item’s **default store or default location** is not defined, the process will throw an **error**. * If the **default store** does not match the **store selected** in the PO or MO, the system will prevent location assignment and throw an **error**. *** **PO Receiving (ASN) Logic** * If the app config is enabled for **Receive PO**, when a user manually receives an ASN, the system automatically **checks the box**:\ *“Auto-Select Default Location By Item.”*
* This ensures consistency and removes the need for repeated manual location selection. *** **MO – Finished Goods Location Logic** * On **item change**, the Finished Goods Location auto-fills with the item’s **default location**, provided the MO’s store matches the item’s default store. * On **MO save**, Finished Goods Location is updated to the default location. * For **Sub-MOs**: * If a raw material location is defined in a **parent MO** or via the **settings map**, then the Sub-MO’s Finished Goods Location (default location of the Sub-MO item) must match the raw material location of its **previous MO** (through which it was auto-triggered). * This logic applies **only at MO/Sub-MO creation**, not for existing MOs. *** ### Addition of "RefNo" Column and Enhanced Search in Estimate Centre **Overview:** A new enhancement has been introduced in the **Estimate Centre module**, adding improved visibility and search capabilities for users working with estimates.
**Overview:** 1. **Addition of "RefNo" Column** * A new column, **RefNo (Reference Number)**, has been added to both: * **Estimate (header level)** * **Estimate Detail (line level)** * This allows users to quickly identify and reference estimates using a dedicated reference number field. 2. **Enhanced Search Options** * New search parameters have been introduced: * **Reference Number (RefNo)** * **Order Number** * These search options are now available in both: * **Estimate** * **Estimate Detail** **How it works:** * The **RefNo column** serves as an additional identifier, useful when multiple estimates are generated for the same customer, project, or product. * With the enhanced **search capabilities**, users can now quickly locate estimates by either: * System-generated **Order Number**, or * User-defined/externally provided **Reference Number**. * This is particularly valuable in ERP workflows where estimates need to be reconciled against external documents, RFQs, or customer reference codes. **Validations & Considerations:** * The **RefNo field** is displayed as an additional column but does not alter existing numbering sequences or system-generated order numbers. * Both **Order Number** and **Reference Number** are independent search parameters, ensuring flexibility without overlap. * If no **RefNo** is provided, the column remains blank, and the search will return no results for that parameter. *** ### Enhancements to Wave Centre – Wave Header **Overview:** **New Columns Added** * **Ship Service** * **Third Party Ref Name** * **Third Party Notes** **Module:** Wave Centre → Wave Header
*** **How It Works:** 1. **Ship Service** * Captures the shipping service method (e.g., FedEx Ground, UPS Express). * Enables quick visibility and operational clarity on how shipments within a wave are being fulfilled. 2. **Third Party Ref Name** * Stores the reference name for a third-party logistics provider or partner. * Useful for identifying and linking external logistics parties directly within the wave. 3. **Third Party Notes** * Provides a text field for additional instructions, clarifications, or remarks from the third party. * Ensures critical details are logged and easily accessible during the wave process. *** **Validation / Behavior:** * All three columns are **read/write fields** and can be updated during wave creation or editing. * Data entered here flows through reporting and operational dashboards for better tracking. * If left blank, system processes continue as usual (no blocking behavior). *** ### Configurable Print Options After Quick Ship/Express Ship **Overview:** A new App Config has been introduced under the **Sales** tab:\ **“Print Options After Quick Ship/Express Ship.”** This configuration allows users to define which links (e.g., documents, labels, or reports) should appear on the success modal once a shipment is processed via **Quick Ship** or **Express Ship**.
*** **How It Works:** * After completing a Quick Ship or Express Ship, the system displays a success modal.
* The links shown on this modal (such as Print Invoice, Print Packing Slip, Print Shipping Label, etc.) are now fully configurable by the user. * Administrators can enable or disable specific options via the new App Config, tailoring the post-shipment workflow to organizational needs. * For Sales Orders with multiple waves, the system will display **multiple links**, one for each wave. *** ### Default Sales Store and Default Ship Store at Customer Level **Overview:** This release introduces the ability to define the **Default Sales Store** and **Default Ship Store** at the customer level. These defaults apply consistently across both UI and API processes, streamlining store selection and ensuring data integrity. **Modules Impacted:** * **Create Customer**
* **Upload Customer** * **Customer Centre**
**How It Works:** 1. **In Transaction Modules** * Applies to: *Estimates, Sales Orders, Invoices, Credit Memos, and Sales Receipts*. * When a customer is selected: * The system will **pre-select and override** the user’s default store with the **customer’s default store**, if one exists. * If the **customer’s default store is not part of the user’s store mapping**, the system will not assign any default store. **API Enhancements** * A new flag `UseCustomerDefaultStores` has been introduced in the following APIs: * **Upload Sales Order** * **Invoice API** * **Credit Memo API** * **Behavior:** * When `UseCustomerDefaultStores = true`: * The system will prioritize the **customer’s default store** over the store provided by the user in the upload/API payload. * When `UseCustomerDefaultStores = false` or not provided: * The system will continue to use the **store value provided by the user** in the payload. *** **Validations & Constraints** * Default Sales/Ship Stores must exist within the **user’s store mapping** to be auto-selected. * User must have access to the store. * If unavailable, the system will not assign defaults and the user must manually select a valid store. * `UseCustomerDefaultStores` flag is **optional**; backward compatibility for existing API integrations is maintained. *** ### Batch Update for Custom Fields in Sales Order Lines **Overview:** A new option **“Batch Update Custom Fields”** has been added on the **Create Sales Order** page (line items section). *** **How It Works:** * Users can now **Batch Update Custom Fields** on Sales Order lines.
* The functionality mirrors the existing **Batch Update Columns** feature available in the **Sales Order Centre**. * Upon selection, the entered value(s) will be applied simultaneously across multiple or all selected line items, reducing the need for repetitive manual entry. **Validations & Considerations** * Batch updates apply only to **editable custom fields** defined in the Sales Order schema. * User permissions for editing custom fields will continue to apply. * Audit logs will capture batch updates for traceability. * Existing values will be overwritten when batch update is applied. *** ### Void Cheque Date Selection **Module:** **Payments** **Overview:** **Enhancement:**\ Introduced the ability to specify a **Void Cheque Date** when voiding cheque-based payments. **How It Works:** * On initiating a void action for cheque payments, the system will now prompt the user with a pop-up window. * The user can select the desired **Void Date**. * Upon confirmation, the payment will be voided and the system will record the selected date as the **Void Cheque Date**. **Available In:**\ This functionality is now supported in the following modules: * **TaxPayment** * **TaxInstallment** * **TaxInstallmentCentre** * **TaxPaymentCentre** * **CreateRefundReceipt** * **RefundCentre** * **InvoicePaymentViewSubForm** * **BillPaymentChequeSubForm** * **OutgoingPayment** **Impact:**\ This enhancement ensures greater flexibility and accuracy in managing cheque void transactions by allowing users to define the effective date of the void action. *** ### Item Inventory Snapshot Consolidate View Optimization **Overview:** * Performance improvements have been implemented in the **Item Inventory Consolidate** view to make it faster and more efficient. * A new configuration option has been introduced in **App Config**: **General**: **Enable Optimized Views**.
* This is a **multi-select** type configuration (currently, only one option is available: **Inventory Snapshot Consolidate**). * When this view is selected in **App Config**, the system will use optimized functions to enhance performance. **Impact:**\ This enhancement improves system responsiveness and provides administrators the flexibility to enable optimized views, ensuring faster access to consolidated inventory data. *** ### Minimum Order Quantity Enhancements **Modules Impacted:** * **Item Centre** * **Item Module** * **Data Export Centre** * **Presentation Module (Other Attributes)** * **B2B Portal** *** **Overview:** **1. New Column: *****Minimum Order Qty*** * A new column **Minimum Order Qty** has been introduced in the following areas:
* **Item Centre** * **Item Module**
* **Data Export Centre** This field allows users to define the minimum quantity of an item that can be ordered. When maintained, this field ensures consistency between back-office operations and customer-facing portals. *** **2. New App Configuration: *****Min/Max Qty to Show in B2B Portal*** * A new configuration option has been added in **App Config**: * **Min/Max Qty to show for items in the B2B portal**
* **Functionality**: * When enabled, the B2B portal will display the **Minimum Order Qty** and **Maximum Order Qty** (if defined) for each item. * This ensures customers are informed upfront about order quantity restrictions before placing an order. *** **3. New Checkbox Option: *****Force Minimum Order Qty*** * A new checkbox option **Force Minimum Order Qty** has been introduced in the **Presentation Module → Other Attributes** section.
**How It Works:** * When checked, the system will **enforce the Minimum Order Qty** during order entry (both internal ERP orders and B2B portal orders). * Orders cannot be placed for quantities lower than the defined minimum. *** ### **Deposit Link in Sales Order and Order Release Confirmation Email Templates** **Overview**\ A new enhancement has been introduced to improve the customer communication process. The **Deposit Link** is now available within the email templates for the following entities: * **Sales Order Email Template** * **Order Release Confirmation Email Template** **How It Works:** 1. **Deposit Link Integration** * The Deposit Link has been added to both Sales Order and Order Release Confirmation email templates. * This enables customers to conveniently access the payment deposit link directly from the email they receive. 2. **Customer Experience Improvement** * With the link included, customers no longer need to log in separately or request deposit details. * It simplifies the payment process, reduces follow-up communication, and enhances overall customer experience. 3. **Template Usability** * The Deposit Link will appear dynamically in the respective email templates, ensuring that the correct link is populated for each order. * Administrators can review or customize the placement of the link within the email content as needed. # September 2025 Release {% hint style="warning" %} This is a Custom Release. Feature availability depends on configuration and rollout status. Some features listed above may not be visible in your environment if they are part of a staged or custom deployment. Please contact your support representative to confirm enablement. {% endhint %} ### **BOM (Bill of Materials) Centre** — **RM Item Filter** at the **Detail Level**. This release introduces a new enhancement in the **BOM (Bill of Materials) Centre** — **RM Item Filter** at the **Detail Level**.\ The feature allows users to filter BOM details based on specific **Raw Material (RM) Items**, enabling faster data access, better traceability, and improved operational control when analyzing complex product structures. *** **Overview:** **Feature Added:** *RM Item Filter (Detail Level)* **Location:**\ `Manufacturing → Bill of Materials → BOM Centre → Detail Level` **Description:**\ A new dropdown filter labeled **“RM Item”** has been added within the BOM Centre Detail View. Users can now refine BOM detail listings by selecting a specific RM Item. This enhancement is particularly useful in identifying where a particular raw material is used across multiple BOMs, improving visibility in production planning and material management.
*** **Key Enhancements:** | Feature Area | Description | | ------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **New Filter Field** | A filter labeled **“RM Item”** has been introduced at the BOM Detail Level. | | **Filter Functionality** | Enables filtering of BOM records that contain the selected RM Item. | | **Data Scope** | Applies only to the detailed BOM view, ensuring granular visibility of raw material associations. | | **Dynamic Results** | BOM detail grid updates instantly upon RM Item selection. | | **Integration** | Works seamlessly with existing filters like Finished Item, BOM Code, and Revision. | *** **How To Use:** 1. Navigate to **BOM Centre**. 2. Switch to the **Detail Level** view. 3. Locate the new filter **“RM Item”** on the filter panel. 4. Select an RM Item from the dropdown list. 5. The BOM Detail grid will automatically refresh to show only entries where the selected RM Item is used. *** **Example Scenario** A production planner needs to verify where *RM-102 – Aluminum Sheet (3mm)* is used before approving a material change.\ By applying the **RM Item Filter**, the planner instantly sees all BOMs that depend on this specific raw material. This eliminates the need for manual verification and ensures accurate downstream planning. ### **Enhancement to Item-Vendor Mapping Display** **Overview:**\ In the **Item** subform, under the **Vendors** tab, the table previously displayed data sourced from the *Item-Vendor Mapping*. With this update, **custom fields** defined in the *Item-Vendor Mapping* module are now also displayed in the same table. **Key Enhancements:** * Custom fields configured in the *Item Vendor Mapping* module will now automatically appear under the **Vendors** tab in the **Item** subform.
* This enhancement provides improved visibility and accessibility of vendor-specific custom data directly within the Item record. * Users can now view all relevant item-vendor information—including both standard and custom fields—without switching modules. **Impact:**\ This update enhances data consistency and user efficiency by allowing seamless access to custom vendor mapping information from the Item interface. *** ### Update to Create Purchase Order Module **Overview:**\ New columns — **Option3Name**, **Option3Value**, and **Option3Code** — have been added to the *Create Purchase Order* module to improve data visibility and variant tracking.
The new columns will reflect across the following workflows: * **Add Item** * **Quick Add** * **Last Order** * **Advanced Variant Finder**
**Impact:**\ This enhancement ensures consistency in variant management and provides users with comprehensive option-level details during the purchase order creation process. *** ### **Addition of 'Revision' Column in** Update BOM Items **Module** **Overview:** This release introduces a new enhancement in the **Update Bill of Materials** Items module. A new column — **‘Revision’** — has been added specifically for the update type **‘Bill of Materials’**.\ This addition allows users to view and verify the revision level of each Bill of Material directly within the update interface, improving traceability and accuracy during BOM updates.
*** **Key Enhancements:** 1. **New ‘Revision’ Column Added** * The **‘Revision’** column is now available when the **Update Type** is set to **‘Bill of Materials’**. * It displays the current revision number or identifier associated with each BOM record. * This provides greater visibility into version control during updates. 2. **Improved Traceability** * Users can now easily track which revision of a Bill of Materials is being updated. * This reduces the risk of applying changes to an outdated or incorrect BOM version. 3. **Data Verification** * The system allows users to **verify the column values** to ensure that the correct revision data is displayed and mapped for each BOM. * This step ensures data consistency between the BOM Master and the Update BOM interface. 4. **Applicable Scope** * The enhancement applies only to the **‘Bill of Materials’** update type within the **Update BOM** module. * Other update types remain unaffected. *** **How To Use:** To verify the update: 1. Navigate to **Update BOM Items**. 2. Select **Update Type = Bill of Material**. 3. Confirm that the new **‘Revision’** column is visible in the grid. 4. Verify that the **Revision values** match the data in the corresponding BOM Master records. *** ### **Addition of “Last Landed Cost” in Pricing Rules** **Overview:** This release introduces a new option, **“Last Landed Cost”**, in the Pricing Rule setup. This enhancement ensures that both **standard price** and **cost calculations** in Purchase Orders (PO) and Sales Orders (SO) can now leverage the last landed cost of items, improving accuracy in pricing, margin calculations, and overall financial reporting.
**Key Enhancements:** 1. **Pricing Rule Update** * A new option, **“Last Landed Cost”**, has been added to the pricing rule configuration. * Users can now select “Last Landed Cost” as the basis for calculating standard price and cost for inventory items. * This ensures consistency across all procurement and sales operations. 2. **Impact on Purchase Orders** * When creating a purchase order, if the pricing rule is set to **Last Landed Cost**, the system will automatically calculate the item cost based on the most recent landed cost recorded in the system. * Ensures accurate costing for inventory valuation and vendor payments. 3. **Impact on Sales Orders** * When creating a sales order, item pricing and standard cost will also consider the **Last Landed Cost** if selected in the pricing rule. * This helps in accurate margin calculation and ensures pricing consistency between procurement and sales processes. 4. **Reporting & Financial Accuracy** * All related financial and inventory reports, including Profit & Loss, Stock Valuation, and Cost Analysis, now reflect the Last Landed Cost wherever applicable. * Reduces manual intervention and discrepancies in cost calculations. **How It Works:** 1. Navigate to **Pricing Rule Module**. 2. Add or edit a pricing rule. 3. Select **Last Landed Cost** in the Pricing Rule Criteria section as the basis for cost calculation. 4. Apply the rule to relevant items. 5. Standard prices in Purchase Orders and Sales Orders will now reflect the Last Landed Cost automatically. *** ### **Addition of ‘Hide Pricing’ Toggle at Presentation Level in B2B Portal** **Overview:** This release introduces a new **‘Hide Pricing’** toggle at the **Presentation level** in the B2B Portal. The feature allows users to control the visibility of product prices across the portal, offering greater flexibility for business presentations, catalog sharing, and customer demonstrations. *** **Key Enhancements:** 1. **New ‘Hide Pricing’ Toggle** * A **‘Hide Pricing’** toggle has been added at the **Presentation level** in the B2B Portal interface. * The toggle allows users to temporarily hide all product prices from the portal view. 2. **Default Behavior** * The toggle is **OFF by default**, ensuring that prices are visible to users unless manually hidden. 3. **State Retention on Refresh** * The toggle’s selected state (ON/OFF) is **retained after page refresh**, providing a consistent user experience without requiring repeated configuration. 4. **Functionality When Toggle is ON** * When **‘Hide Pricing’** is enabled: * All product prices across the portal are hidden from view. * Prices remain invisible during browsing, search, and product detail views. * Prices become **visible only at the time of checkout**, ensuring necessary visibility for transaction confirmation.
**How It Works:** 1. Navigate to the **Presentation level** in the B2B Portal. 2. Verify that the **‘Hide Pricing’** toggle is visible and **OFF by default**. 3. Turning the toggle ON ensures: * All product prices across the portal are hidden. * Prices appear only during checkout. 4. On refreshing the page, the toggle’s state is **retained**. *** ### **Addition of ‘MO Number’ Filter in MO Centre** **Overview:** This release introduces a new **‘MO Number’** filter in the **MO Centre** module. This enhancement enables users to easily search and filter Manufacturing Orders (MOs) by their unique MO Number, providing quicker access to relevant records and improving efficiency in managing manufacturing operations. *** **Key Enhancements:** 1. **New Filter – ‘MO Number’** * A dedicated **‘MO Number’** filter has been added to the filter section of the **MO Centre** screen. * The filter allows users to directly search for specific Manufacturing Orders using their MO identifiers. * Supports both **exact** and **partial** MO Number searches for enhanced flexibility.
2. **Improved Usability** * Simplifies navigation in the MO Centre, especially when working with large datasets. * Helps users instantly locate target MOs without scrolling or manual lookup. 3. **Consistent Functionality** * The filter behaves consistently with other existing filters in the module. * Works seamlessly with other applied filters to refine search results further. *** **How It Works:** 1. Navigate to the **MO Centre** module from the main menu. 2. Locate the new **‘MO Number’** field in the filter panel at the top of the screen. 3. Enter an **MO Number** (full or partial) into the field. 4. Click on the **Search/Apply Filter** button. 5. The system will instantly display all Manufacturing Orders that match the entered MO Number. 6. You can clear or adjust the filter to perform a new search. ***
### **Addition of ‘Customer PO’ Field in Invoice Credit Memo** *** **Overview:** A new **‘Customer PO’** text box has been added to the **Credit Memo Header i**n the **Invoice Credit Memo** module. This enhancement ensures that the Customer Purchase Order (PO) information from the original invoice is automatically carried over when the invoice is pulled into the credit memo. *** **Key Enhancement:**
1. **New Field – ‘Customer PO’** * A **Customer PO** text box has been introduced in the **Invoice Credit Memo** form. * When an invoice is selected or pulled into the credit memo, the system will automatically populate this field with the **Customer PO** value from the linked invoice. 2. **Improved Data Consistency** * Ensures that the **Customer PO** details remain consistent between the original invoice and the associated credit memo. * Reduces manual data entry errors and improves traceability between documents. *** **How It Works:** 1. :Navigate to the **Invoice Credit Memo** module. 2. Create or open a new Credit Memo. 3. Pull or link an existing Invoice. 4. The system automatically copies the **Customer PO** from the selected Invoice and displays it in the **Customer PO** field on the Credit Memo. 5. The user can review or modify the **Customer PO** if required (based on configuration) *** ### **Added “Other” Tab in Create Estimate Page** **Feature:** New “Other” Tab in Create Estimate Page **Overview:**\ A new **“Other”** tab has been added to the **Create Estimate** page. This tab includes the following fields: * **Order Tags** * **Order Type** * **Brand** * **Risk Analysis** * **Custom Comment** **Key Enhancements:** * When converting an **Estimate to Sales Order (SO)**, the newly added fields from the “Other” tab are now carried forward into the Sales Order.
* The **Estimate Centre’s view subform** has been updated to display the **“Other” tab**, ensuring visibility of all related fields.
**Impact:** Improves data consistency and visibility by allowing additional order-related information to be recorded and transferred seamlessly from Estimate to Sales Order. *** ### **Added New Fields to Batch Update in Manufacturing Order (MO) Centre** **Module:** Manufacturing → Manufacturing Order (MO) Centre\ **Feature:** Batch Update Enhancement *** **Overview:** A new enhancement has been introduced to the **Batch Update** functionality within the **Manufacturing Order (MO) Centre** in XoroERP.\ This update allows users to efficiently update key fields across multiple MOs simultaneously, improving workflow speed, data consistency, and operational control. *** **Newly Added Fields:** The following fields have been added to the **Batch Update** window of the MO Centre: * **Default Finished Goods Location** * **Default Raw Material Location** * **Memo** * **Custom Fields**
*** **How It Works:** 1. Navigate to **Manufacturing → MO Centre.** 2. Select multiple Manufacturing Orders from the grid.
3. Click on **Batch Update** from the toolbar.
4. The newly added fields — *Default Finished Goods Location*, *Default Raw Material Location*, *Memo*, and any *Custom Fields* — will now be available for update. 5. Enter the desired values for the Column Name(in this case, **Default Finished Goods Location)** and execute the batch update. **The screenshot below illustrates how to update the Default Finished Goods Location.**
The system will automatically validate and update the selected fields for all eligible MOs. *** **Validations** To maintain data integrity and ensure alignment with manufacturing workflows, the following validations are applied: 1. **Default Raw Material Location** can only be updated when the MO is in **Open** or **Released** status. * If the MO is in any other status, the system will restrict the update and display an appropriate error message. 2. **The Default Finished Goods Location** cannot be updated if the MO is in the **Produced** status. * This ensures that once production is complete, the output storage location remains fixed. 3. **Location Validity Check:** * The system validates that the selected location exists and is active within the ERP. * Invalid or inactive locations will trigger an error. 4. **Valid Location Types:** * Only the following location types are permitted for updates: * **Warehouse** * **Store** * **Manufacturing** * **Stage** (*applicable only for Default Finished Goods Location when WMS is enabled*) *** ### **Added Project/Class to Batch Update in Item Centre** **Module:** Inventory → Item Centre\ **Feature:** Batch Update Enhancement **Overview:**\ The **Batch Update** functionality in the **Item Centre** has been enhanced to include the following fields: * **Project/Class** Users can now update the **Project/Class** attributes for multiple items simultaneously, improving efficiency and data consistency in inventory management.
**How It Works:** 1. Navigate to the **Item Centre**. 2. Select one or more items from the grid. 3. Click on **Batch Update**. 4. The newly added field **Project/Class** are now available for update. 5. Enter or select the desired values and execute the batch update. ### **Added “Is Reconciled?” Column in BILL and ITEM RECEIPT Centre Pages** **Overview:**\ The following enhancements have been made to improve the visibility of reconciliation status in XoroERP: 1. **Bill Centre:** * A new column, **“Is Reconciled?”** has been added to display the reconciliation status of each bill.
2. **Item Receipt Centre:** * A new column, **“Is Reconciled?”** has been added to indicate whether the item receipt has been reconciled.
**How It Works:** * Users can now easily identify which bills and item receipts have been reconciled directly from the centre pages without opening individual records. ### **Added “Expiry Date” and “Quality” Columns in Item Inventory Snapshot** **Module:** Inventory → Item Inventory Snapshot **Overview:**\ The **Item Inventory Snapshot** module has been enhanced to provide more detailed information about inventory quantities. * In the **Item Inventory Quantity Detail** subform, (accessible by clicking *Available Qty*), the following columns have been added: * **Expiry Date** * **Quality**
**How It Works:** 1. Navigate to **Item Inventory Snapshot**. 2. Click on **Available Qty** for any item to open the quantity detail subform. 3. The newly added **Expiry Date** and **Quality** columns will now be visible, providing better visibility into inventory status. *** ### **Added “Item Sub Category” Field in Short Inventory Planner** **Module:** Inventory → Short Inventory Planner *** **Overview:** The **Short Inventory Planner** module has been enhanced with the addition of a new field, **“Item Sub Category,”** to provide better classification and filtering of inventory data.\ This improvement allows users to analyze shortages more efficiently by item grouping and sub-category segmentation. *** **Key Enhancements:** * A new field, **“Item Sub Category”** has been added in the **Short Inventory Planner** view. * The field displays the **sub-category** linked to each item’s master record. * Users can now sort, filter, or group inventory records based on **Item Sub Category** for deeper insights.
*** **How It Works:** 1. Navigate to **Inventory → Short Inventory Planner.** 2. Open the planner view to display inventory shortage data. 3. The **Item Sub Category** field is now visible in the grid alongside other item attributes. 4. Use it to: * Filter items belonging to specific sub-categories. * Analyze shortage trends by product grouping. * Improve purchasing or production planning based on sub-category data. *** ### **Added “Total Producible ATS” Columns to the Data Export Centre** **Module:** Inventory / Data Export Centre **Overview:** The **Data Export Centre** has been enhanced to provide better visibility into producible inventory by adding two new columns: * **Total Producible ATS** * **Total Producible ATS (Inc PO)** These columns can now be included as fields in data exports, enabling more comprehensive reporting and analysis of producible stock levels.
*** **Key Enhancements:** * **Total Producible ATS:** Displays the producible available-to-sell stock based on current inventory and BOM. * **Total Producible ATS (Inc PO):** Displays producible stock, including open Purchase Orders (POs), giving a complete view of potential production capacity. * Both fields are now exportable directly from the **Data Export Centre**. *** **Prerequisite / App Configuration** To enable this functionality, the following app configuration must be turned on: * **Enable BOM Producible Inventory Levels** * This setting allows the system to maintain BOM producible inventory levels. * It activates the **BOM Producible Inventory Sync Job**, ensuring accurate calculations. * The BOM producible levels can also be accessed via the **Inventory Snapshot** module.
*** **How It Works:** 1. Navigate to **Data Export Centre**. 2. Select the desired export template or create a new one. 3. Include the newly added fields: **Total Producible ATS** and **Total Producible ATS (Inc PO)**. 4. Execute the export to generate a file containing the producible inventory data. *** ### **Support for Multi-Select Custom Fields in B2B Order Cart (Header Section)** **Module:** B2B Portal → Order Cart *** **Overview:** The **B2B Order Cart** has been enhanced to support **multi-select custom fields** at the **order header level**. This addition provides users with greater flexibility in capturing complex order-specific information directly from the B2B interface. *** **Key Enhancements:** * The system already supports **custom fields at the order line level** when the app configuration **“Enable Custom Fields in B2B in Order Summary”** is turned on. * With this update, **multi-select custom fields** can now be defined and displayed in the **header section** of the order cart. * Users can select multiple values for a single custom field, making it easier to record additional data such as multiple delivery preferences, tags, or order attributes.
*** **Configuration Requirement:** To enable this feature: 1. Go to **App Configurations** and ensure **“Enable Custom Fields in B2B”** is turned **ON**. 2. Define custom fields (including multi-select types) under **Custom Field Setup** for the Order Header entity. *** **How It Works:** 1. Navigate to the **B2B Order Cart** page. 2. When the above app configuration is enabled, the header section will display the newly defined **multi-select custom fields**. 3. Users can select multiple values from the dropdown while creating or editing an order. 4. The selected values are saved with the order and can be accessed or edited later as needed. ### **Added Custom Field Mapping Support from SO Detail to MO Header** **Module:** Manufacturing → Manufacturing Order (MO)\ **Related Module:** Sales Order (SO) *** **Overview:** A new enhancement has been implemented to extend **custom field mapping capabilities** between the **Sales Order Detail** and **Manufacturing Order Header**.\ This allows seamless transfer of custom field data from sales orders to manufacturing orders during MO creation, ensuring data consistency and reducing manual entry. *** **Feature Details:** * Added support for **mapping custom fields** from the **SO Detail** to **MO Header**. * When a Manufacturing Order is generated from a Sales Order, the defined **custom field values** from the SO Detail level will automatically populate the corresponding fields in the MO Header. * This enhancement enables better control and automation of data flow between sales and production modules. *** **How It Works:** 1. Define custom fields at both **Sales Order Detail** and **MO Header** levels. 2. Configure the **custom field mapping** between these two entities in the system setup. 3. When an MO is created from an SO, the mapped custom field values from the SO Detail will be automatically copied to the MO Header. 4. Users can review or modify these values in the MO Header as needed before processing. *** ### **Customer PO Field Added to Invoice Credit Memo** **Module:** Accounts Receivable → Invoice Credit Memo *** **Overview:** A new **Customer PO** field has been added to the **Invoice Credit Memo** form. This enhancement ensures better traceability and alignment between invoices and credit memos, simplifying financial and customer reconciliation processes. *** **Feature Details:** * **Customer PO Text Box:** A new text field named **Customer PO** is now available in the Invoice Credit Memo.
* **Automatic Population:** When pulling an invoice into a credit memo, the system automatically populates the **Customer PO** field with the value from the original invoice. * **Consistency and Accuracy:** This eliminates manual entry errors and ensures that customer purchase order references remain consistent across invoices and credit memos. Users can check the corresponding entry in the Credit Memo Centre.
**How It Works:** 1. Open the **Invoice Credit Memo** form. 2. Pull an existing invoice to create a credit memo. 3. The **Customer PO** field in the credit memo will automatically inherit the Customer PO from the pulled invoice. 4. Users can verify or edit the field if required before saving the credit memo. *** ### **Auto-Select Default Item Location for Item Receiving and MO Production/Disassembly** **Overview:** A new App Config — **“Auto-Select Default Item Location for Item Receiving and MO Production/Disassembly”** — has been added to XoroERP. When this configuration is enabled, the system automatically places items into their **default location** during: * **Quick Receive** * **ASN Receiving** (both regular and RMA) * **MO Production** * **MO Disassembly** Items are received, produced, or moved **directly into their default location** without manual selection. *** **Configuration Details:** * **App Config Name:** Auto-Select Default Item Location for Item Receiving and MO Production/Disassembly * **Type:** Multi-select Dropdown * **Available Options:** * Receive PO * Produce/Disassemble MO Users can enable one or both options depending on operational requirements.
*** **Functionality When Enabled** * The system **auto-assigns the item’s default location** during PO receiving, ASN receiving, MO production, and MO disassembly. * Manual location selection is no longer required, ensuring faster and more accurate operations. *** **Validation Rules** * If the item’s **default store** or **default location** is **not defined**, the system will throw an error. * If the **default store** does not match the **store selected** in the PO or MO, the system will also throw an error. These validations ensure items are only placed in valid and correctly mapped locations. *** #### **PO Receiving (ASN) Logic** * When the app config is enabled for **Receive PO**, and a user manually receives an ASN: * The checkbox **“Auto-Select Default Location By Item”** is **checked by default**. * The system automatically fills the item location field with each item’s default location. *** #### **MO – Finished Goods Location Logic** * **On Item Change:** * The *Finished Goods Location* auto-fills with the item’s default location if the MO’s store matches the item’s default store. * **On MO Save:** * The Finished Goods Location is set based on the item’s default location. * **Sub-MO Logic:** * If a **Raw Material Location** is defined in the parent MO or in the Settings Map,\ then the **default item location of the Sub-MO** (Finished Goods Location)\ must match the raw material location of its **parent MO** (through which it was auto-triggered). * This logic applies **only during MO/Sub-MO creation**, not for existing MOs. *** ### **Sales Order – Copy Selected Line to Existing PO Enhancement** **Overview:** In the **Create Sales Order** module, the **“Copy selected line to existing PO”** functionality has been enhanced. Previously, the Select Existing PO pop-up displayed **only POs** with an **Open** status.\ With this update, it now shows **both Open and Released POs**, providing greater flexibility when copying lines to existing purchase orders.
*** **Key Enhancements:** * Users can now copy sales order lines to **released POs** in addition to open POs. * Streamlines the process of linking sales orders to purchase orders, reducing the need for manual adjustments. * Improves efficiency and visibility when managing orders and inventory. *** ### Restrict Price Recalculation on Customer Change **Feature Name:** Restrict Price Recalculation on Customer Change\ **Module:** Sales\ **Type:** New App Configuration **Overview:** A new App Configuration setting, **“Restrict price recalculation on customer change”** has been introduced to provide better control over how prices are managed when changing customers in Sales Orders and Estimates.
**Description:** When this configuration is **enabled**, the system restricts **automatic price recalculation** based on pricing rules whenever the customer is changed in a Sales Order or Estimate. * This ensures that the existing item prices remain unchanged even if the selected customer has different pricing rules or discount structures. * The feature is useful for users who need to preserve the originally entered prices while switching customers during order entry or quotation preparation. When the configuration is **disabled**, XoroERP will continue to follow the standard behavior — i.e., **prices will be recalculated automatically** according to the pricing rules defined for the newly selected customer. {% hint style="info" %} This configuration **does not impact other pricing restrictions** or validations already in place within the system. {% endhint %} *** ### **New Fields in Wave Header** **Overview:** New informational fields have been added to the **Wave Header** section in both **Wave Centre** and **Data Export Centre** to provide better visibility into customer and order details. *** **Key Enhancements:**
* **Customer Account Number:** Displays the customer’s unique account identifier from the master record. * **Customer Ship To Fields:** Capture detailed shipping address information for the order, including: * **Ship To Address Name** – Name associated with the shipping address. * **Ship To Company Name** – Customer’s company or business name. * **Ship To Address 1 & 2** – Primary and secondary address lines. * **City, State, Country, Zip Code** – Geographical details of the shipping location. * **Customer PO:** Reflects the **Purchase Order number** provided by the customer for cross-reference and tracking. * **Payment Terms:** Displays the payment agreement or terms defined for the customer (e.g., Net 30, Prepaid). * **Memo:** Shows any additional notes or comments related to the wave or order for quick reference.
{% hint style="info" %} These fields will **only display values when a wave contains a single order**.\ For **multi-order waves**, the fields will remain **blank** to avoid conflicting or combined data. {% endhint %} *** **Impact:** This enhancement improves **data visibility, export accuracy, and operational traceability** in both **Wave Centre** and the **Data Export Centre**, making customer and order-level insights more accessible to users. *** ### **Scan to Verify – Enhancements to Pick Wave Module** **Overview:** A new **Scan to Verify** feature has been added to the **Pick Wave** module in XoroERP to improve accuracy, control, and operational efficiency in the picking and shipping process. With this release, you can enforce full verification before shipping, control how scanned items update quantities, and directly manage shipment creation from the wave interface. *** #### 1. New Access Control **1.1 App Module Access: Scan to Verify Mode** * New **App Module Access** permission, **Scan to Verify Mode**, determines whether the feature is visible and usable. * The feature will only appear for users/roles with this access enabled. *** #### 2. New App Configurations **2.1 Enforce Full Verification Before Shipping**
**Title:** **Enforce Full Verification Before Shipping** **Tab: Warehouse** **Behavior:** * **Enabled:** * The **Close Wave** button in the **Scan to Verify** modal is **disabled** until **all picked quantities are verified**. * **Shipping** tab fields are enabled only when **Verified Qty = Picked Qty**. *** **2.2 Scan Verification Mode** **Title:** Scan Verification Mode\ **Description:** Determines how scanned items update quantities on wave detail lines. **Tab: Warehouse**
**Options:** 1. **Pick & Verify** * Updates both **Picked Qty** and **Verified Qty**. * Validation: **Verified Qty cannot exceed Allocated Qty**. * Partial picks are aligned automatically before updating scanned quantities. 2. **Verify Only** * Updates **Verified Qty** only. * Validation: **Verified Qty cannot exceed Picked Qty**. *** #### 3. UI Enhancements in Pick Wave Module **3.1 Toolbar Buttons** * **\[Scan to Verify]** * Appears when **Scan to Verify Mode** access is enabled. * Opens the Scan to Verify modal with the verification section.
* **\[Print Labels]** *(if shipping integrator is connected)* * This opens a modal displaying the shipment information for the order. The modal is available only for orders or wave lines that have been closed. * **Sub-button: \[Print Multiple Labels]** * Opens freight modal sub-form. * Enables creating multiple cartons manually. {% hint style="info" %} **Print Label** is enabled only for closed wave lines or orders. {% endhint %} *** **3.2 Scan & Verify Modal Behavior** * **Search / Scan Input:** Search by **Item #**. * **Verify Button:** Updates quantities based on Scan Verification Mode. * **Detail View:** Displays line-level details: Item #, Allocated Qty, Picked Qty, Verified Qty, and status messages.
*** #### 4. Shipment Creation & Shipping Section **4.1 Automatic Shipment Creation** * Closing a wave automatically closes the order and creates a shipment for it. After the shipment is created, the **Shipment** tab is enabled, where shipment information can be reviewed and updated.
**4.2 Shipping Section Details**
* **Fields**: Address, Header Fields, Carton Fields (from the Pack Ship Freight modal), Shipping Terms, Ship Service, Confirmation Type, Tracking #, Ship Date, Carton Weight, Rate, Shipping Notes. {% hint style="info" %} In the case of multiple cartons, these fields are automatically disabled and cannot be edited. {% endhint %}
* Creates shipment for **closed wave lines only**. * Supports **single carton creation** from the Shipping Section. * For **multiple cartons**, use the **\[Print Multiple Labels]** sub-form. **4.3 Shipping Tab – Print Label**
The **Print Label** functionality in the Shipping tab allows users to view and edit shipping-related information for an order, depending on the carton configuration. * **Single Carton Orders:**\ If the order contains a single carton, all shipping information fields can be edited directly using the **Print Label** option. * **Multiple Carton Orders:**\ If the order includes multiple cartons, shipping details must be edited using the **Print Multiple Label** option, available from the **Print Label** dropdown. This enables users to manage and update shipping information for each carton associated with the order as shown in the case below.
**4.4 Independent Toolbar Button for Print Label**
* Rendered in the Pick Wave module toolbar **after \[Scan to Verify]**. * Opens modal with **Shipping Section only**: 1. Works independently of the "**Scan to Verify"** process. 2. Handles **Print Label Request** or **Print Request** based on the number of cartons.
*** **5. Functional Impact** * **Access-based visibility:** Scan to Verify appears only for the authorized users. * **Config-driven verification:** Enforce full verification or use flexible verification modes. * **Enhanced workflow:** Combines scanning, verification, and shipment creation in one module. * **Shipping flexibility:** Single-carton shipments directly or multiple-carton shipments using the sub-form. * **Operational benefits:** Reduces shipping errors, ensures compliance, and streamlines label printing and shipment management. *** ### **Ship Service Auto-Population Enhancement** **Module:** Shipment / Delivery\ **Feature:** Ship Service Auto-Population Logic Update **Overview:**\ The system behavior for auto-populating the *Ship Service* field has been enhanced to ensure better consistency with the related Sales Order (SO). **New Logic:** * If the **selected carrier** matches the **carrier from the related Sales Order (SO)**: * The system will now **automatically populate the Ship Service** from the corresponding Sales Order. * *(Previously, the system always used the default Ship Service associated with the selected carrier.)* * If the **selected carrier** is **different from the SO’s carrier**: * The system will continue to **populate the default Ship Service** linked to the newly selected carrier.
**Pick Wave Module > Pack and Ship > Pack and Cartonize section**
**Impact:**\ This update ensures that shipments created using the same carrier as the Sales Order maintain consistent Ship Service information, reducing manual edits and improving operational accuracy. # October 2025 Release {% hint style="warning" %} This is a Custom Release. Feature availability depends on configuration and rollout status. Some features listed above may not be visible in your environment if they are part of a staged or custom deployment. Please contact your support representative to confirm enablement. {% endhint %} ### **Addition of “Split Term” Payment Term Type** **Overview:** This release introduces a new **Payment Term type – “Split Term”**, allowing invoices and bills to be automatically divided into multiple child documents based on configured day intervals and percentages. This enhancement improves flexibility in payment scheduling, supports instalment-based transactions, and ensures accurate accounting treatment for both **Sales Orders / Invoices** and **Purchase Orders / Bills**. *** **Feature Added:** Payment Term Type – **Split Term** **Location:** `Menu → Admin → Payment Term → Create Payment Term` **Description:** When this type is selected: * A configuration table appears at the bottom of the Payment Term page. * A **Preset** dropdown menu is displayed, allowing users to quickly generate predefined split structures (for example, 2-part split, 3-part split, etc.). * When a Preset is selected, the system automatically populates the configuration table with the corresponding day intervals and percentage values. * After using a Preset or choosing to configure manually, users can define: **Day intervals** and **Percentage allocation per interval** **Example:** | Days | Percentage | | ---- | ---------- | | 30 | 50% | | 60 | 50% | As users add rows: * The system automatically recalculates the remaining percentage. * Saving is allowed only when the total equals **100%**.
*** **App Configuration Requirement for Split Term Invoices:** A new mandatory configuration "**Non-Inventory Item for Split Term Invoices"** has been added. The item specified here is used as the **offset line** in the parent invoice. **Configuration Location:** Sales → Non-Inventory Item for Split Term Invoices
**How It Works (Split Term Invoices):** **Step 1:** When a parent invoice with the Payment Term Type **“Split Term”** is created, a negative non-inventory offset line is added to the parent invoice for the split amount.
**Step 2:** The system automatically generates **child invoices** based on configured day intervals and percentage allocation per interval. Each child invoice represents one instalment.
*** **App Configuration Requirement for Split Term Bills:** A new mandatory configuration has been added "**Expense Account for Split Term Bill"**. **Configuration Location:** Purchase → Expense Account for Split Term Bill
**How It Works (Split Term Bills):** **Step 1:** When a parent bill with the Payment Term Type **“Test Split Term”** is created is created, an offset expense line is added in the Expenses tab.
**Step 2:** The system automatically generates child bills based on the split configuration.
*** **Validation Rules:** * Amount-related changes are allowed on offset rows. * Child invoices and bills cannot be voided individually. * If the parent invoice or bill is voided, or if its payment terms are changed, the related child invoices/bills will be automatically deleted and recreated — provided all of them are still in Open status. *** ### **Royal - Vendor RMA process enhancement** **Overview:** This release introduces a new module called **Vendor RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)**, enabling users to manage returns to vendors with full operational and accounting control. Previously, RMA functionality was limited to customers and could only be linked to invoices. With this enhancement, users can now create RMAs for vendors, associate them with bills, generate warehouse waves for returned items, and automatically post vendor credits once the process is completed. This ensures accurate inventory movement, proper financial reconciliation, and streamlined warehouse processing. *** **Feature Added:** New Module – **Vendor RMA** **Location:** `Purchase → Vendor Credit → Vendor RMA` **Description:** The Vendor RMA module allows users to: * Create RMAs against vendor bills * Release RMAs to generate warehouse waves * Ship items back to vendors * Move inventory through **In Transit** locations * Post vendor credits *** **App Configuration Requirement:** **App Config Name:** **Clearing Inventory Account for Vendor RMA** **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → Accounting → Clearing Inventory Account for Vendor RMA This config allows users to select the account that will be used as the default clearing account for Vendor RMA inventory adjustments and transactions.
*** **How It Works:** **Step 1: Open Vendor RMA** Initiate a Vendor RMA for defective, excess, or incorrect goods. You can create a Vendor RMA in **two ways**: **1. Create directly from Vendor RMA module** If RMA Type is **Vendor RMA-Direct** then fields to be entered: * **Vendor** * **Account** * **Return Inventory Store** * **Item along with quantity** After entering these details, click on Save and RMA is generated with **Open** Status.
**2. Create from Vendor Bill (Bill No.)** One can also create a Vendor RMA directly from the Vendor Bill using the built-in option by following the below steps: 1. Navigate to **Purchase → Bill Centre**. 2. Open the required **Vendor Bill**. 3. Click the **Options** dropdown menu (top right). 4. Select **Create Vendor RMA**.
5. The system will automatically open a new Vendor RMA screen with: * Vendor auto-populated * Bill reference linked * Items prefilled from the bill Review the details, check how many items you want to return, adjust their quantities and click on **Save**.
**Step 2: Release Vendor RMA** * Click the **Release RMA** option from the Options dropdown menu. The RMA status will change from **Open** to **Released**. * This automatically creates a wave for the RMA, which is also visible in the Wave Centre.
**Step 3: Wave Creation & Processing** * After the wave is generated, the next step is to perform: Picking and Packing
**Step 4: Ship Wave** * When the wave is successfully shipped, items are moved from the original warehouse location to the In Transit location, and the RMA status is automatically updated to **Shipped** (if all quantities sent) or **Partially Shipped** (if partial quantities sent). * The **Inventory Cleaning Account** is then credited with the corresponding amount.
**Step 5: Post Vendor Credit** * After the vendor confirms receipt of the returned items, click **Post Vendor Credit**. The system creates a vendor credit record, permanently removes the returned items from the system, and clears the in-transit inventory balance. * The Inventory Cleaning Account is cleared and the Vendor Accounts Payable balance is adjusted accordingly. * RMA status gets updated to **Credited** and is visible in the **Vendor Credit Centre**. You can either apply this credit to pay another bill or refund it back to the customer.
{% hint style="info" %} If the RMA Type is set to **Vendor RMA-Linked**, the **Receipt** field becomes accessible, allowing you to enter the **bill number** for which you want to create the RMA. {% endhint %} *** ### **Post Selected Lines as New Bill – Partial Posting enhancement** **Overview:** This enhancement extends the existing **Post Selected Lines as New Bill** functionality introduced earlier by adding **partial posting** support at the line level with automatic expense adjustment. It allows users to post selected Item Receipt (IR) lines to a new Vendor Bill with a different **Post Amount** than the original receipt amount, while maintaining accurate AP and expense accounting. *** **New Enhancement:** Open the Item Receipt to be processed, then select the **Post Selected Lines as New Bill** option from the **"Options"** drop-down menu. **1. New Fields added in Post Bill Form** * Item# (lines selected from the receipt) * Amount (original unit cost in the receipt) * Partial Post Amount (editable)
**Changes:** * The Post Amount field at header level is disabled. * Enter the Partial Post Amount individually for each selected item line.
**2. Partial Posting Calculation Logic** * If Post Amount is greater than Item Amount: \ The cumulative sum of additional amount per line is posted to the selected expense account. * If Post Amount is less than or equal to Item Amount: \ The amount is posted to the Accounts Payable(AP)account *** **Impact:** * Expense lines can be updated or split * Cost components (Labor, Material, etc.) can be separated into individual lines * Multiple expense lines are allowed * Total bill amount must remain unchanged *** ### **Addition of ASN Header as an exportable dataset in the Data Export Centre** **Overview:** This release introduces the **ASN Header** as a new exportable dataset in the **Data Export Centre**. Previously, only **ASN Details** were available for export. With this enhancement, users can now export **ASN Header–level data**, enabling better integration, reporting, and automation for inbound logistics and supplier coordination. All standard export options are now supported for the ASN Header, including: * Export to Local * Export to FTP * Export to Email * Scheduled Export * Selected-record exports for all the above options *** **Feature Added: ASN Header** – Exportable Dataset **Location:** `Data Export Center → Search field for Dataset Selection → ASN Header` **Description:** ASN Header data is now available as a selectable dataset in the Data Export Centre. Users can: * Configure export templates for ASN Header * Download files locally * Send files to FTP servers * Email exported files * Schedule recurring exports * Export all records or selected records only This enhancement allows organizations to share shipment-level ASN information with external systems without relying solely on line-level ASN details.
*** **Supported Export Options for ASN Header:** All export mechanisms available for other datasets are now supported for the ASN Header.
**1. Export To Local** Exports ASN Header data directly to the local system. **Flow:** * Open ASN Header dataset * Click **Options → Export To Local** * System opens **Select Import/Export Utility Template** screen * Click **Download**
**2. Export To Local – Selected** Allows exporting **only selected ASN Header records** to local system.
**3. Export To FTP** Exports ASN Header data to a configured FTP server. **Flow:** * Options → Export To FTP * Select Utility Template * Click **Send To FTP** * Enter FTP details * Click **Export Now**
**4. Export To FTP – Selected** Exports only selected ASN Header records to FTP. **5. Export To Email** Sends ASN Header export as an email attachment. **Flow:** * Options → Export To Email * Select Utility Template * Click **Send To Email** * Enter recipient details * Click **Export Now**
**6. Export To Email – Selected** Emails only selected ASN Header records. **7. Schedule Export** Allows scheduling automatic ASN Header exports. **Flow:** * Options → Schedule Export * Select Utility Template * Click **Schedule** * Configure frequency & timing **8. Schedule Export – Selected** Schedules export for selected ASN Header records only. *** ### **Addition of 'Ref Number' Field in Inventory Snapshot Module** **Overview:** This release introduces a new enhancement in the Item Inventory Snapshot module. A new column — **‘Ref Number’** — has been added to the **On PO Details** sub-form. This enhancement allows users to view the reference number of the corresponding Purchase Order directly from the item-level inventory view, improving traceability and visibility into the source of incoming stock. *** **Feature Added:** A new column **'Ref Number'** has been added to the **On PO Details** sub-form. **Location:** `Inventory → Item Inventory Snapshot → Item Details → Inventory Tab → On PO/On PO(Draft)` `Purchase → Purchase Order → Purchase Order Centre` **Description:** When users view an item’s inventory details and navigate to the **On PO** or **On PO (Draft)** quantities, the system displays the **On PO Details** sub-form containing purchase order–level information. A new column labelled **'Ref Number'** has now been added to this sub-form. This column displays the Ref Number value of the corresponding Purchase Order, enabling users to quickly identify linked Sales Orders or external references without opening the PO record.
*** **How to view the 'Ref Number' field in On PO Details Sub form:** There are two ways to access the On PO Details sub form**:** 1. **Item Inventory Snapshot Module** * Navigate to **Inventory → Item Inventory Snapshot**. * Locate the item line you want to analyze and double-click on either **On PO** or **On PO(Draft)** quantity. The user gets navigated to the **On PO Details** screen.
* A new column labelled **‘Ref Number’** is now available in the **On PO Details** sub form. This column displays the reference number of the corresponding Purchase Order.
2. **Item Sub Form** * Navigate to **Inventory → Item Inventory Snapshot** * Right click on the item line you want to view the PO Details for and click on the **Item Details** option
* The **Item sub form** opens. Go to the **Inventory** tab and click on either **On PO** or **On PO (Draft)** quantity * This opens the **On PO Details** screen. A new column labelled **‘Ref Number’** is available in the **On PO Details** sub form. This column displays the reference number of the corresponding Purchase Order for quick traceability.
*** ### **Direct Access to Item View Form from the Inventory by Location Module** **Overview:** A new enhancement has been introduced in the **Inventory by Location** module that allows users to directly open the Item information screen by double-clicking on an Item Number. This improvement provides faster access to complete item details without navigating away from the inventory analysis workflow, helping users review product information more efficiently while performing location-based inventory checks.
*** **Impact:** * Enhances visibility into item configuration while reviewing stock at specific locations. * Supports faster decision-making for replenishment, transfers, and inventory adjustments. * Reduces dependency on switching between modules for item validation and reference. *** ### **Automatic DDP Assignment via Shopify Order Tags using API Integration Connector** **Overview:** This release introduces a new automation using the **API Integration Connector** to handle Delivery Duty Paid (DDP) orders from Shopify more efficiently. When a Shopify order contains the tag **“DDP”** (case-insensitive), the system will now automatically: * Set **Duty Payment Terms = Delivered Duty Paid** on the Sales Order, and * Control the behavior of the **DDP toggle** during shipment creation. This enhancement eliminates manual intervention, improves consistency between e-commerce and ERP data, and ensures accurate handling of international duty responsibilities. *** **Feature Added:** Auto-set Duty Payment Terms to “Delivered Duty Paid” based on order tags **Location:** `Menu → Admin → API Integration Connector Menu → API Integration Connector` (Script applied to Shopify “Create / Update Sales Order” connector) *** **Description:** **Sales Order Auto-Update via API Connector** * When creating or updating Sales Orders from Shopify, if the order tags include “DDP” or “ddp”, the Duty Payment Terms are automatically set to “Delivered Duty Paid”. * This logic is implemented through a custom script in the API Integration Connector and applies regardless of whether the existing app configuration **“International Shipment Default for Delivery Duty Paid”** is enabled or disabled, as shown below.
*** **Shipment DDP Toggle Behaviour:** During shipment preparation, the behavior of the DDP (Delivered Duty Paid) toggle is controlled by the app configuration “International Shipment Default for Delivery Duty Paid” and the Sales Order’s Duty Payment Terms. * When the configuration is **enabled**, the DDP toggle is automatically set to ON for all international shipments, regardless of the Sales Order value. * When the configuration is **disabled**, the DDP toggle is set to ON only if the Sales Order Duty Payment Terms are “Delivered Duty Paid”; otherwise, it remains OFF. *** **How It Works:** **Sales Order Creation (Shopify → XoroERP)** **Step 1:** Shopify order is received in XoroERP. **Step 2:** API Integration Connector script checks order tags. * If tag contains `DDP`, Sales Order field **Duty Payment Terms** is set to **Delivered Duty Paid**.
**Shipment Creation (Pack & Ship Module)** **Step 3:** Open the **Pack & Ship** module of the Sales Order. Click the **Freight** icon to navigate to the **Prepare Shipment** page.
**Step 4:** Enable the toggle **“International Shipment?”** The system evaluates the app configuration **“International Shipment Default for Delivery Duty Paid”** and the Sales Order’s **Duty Payment Terms**. **Step 6:** Based on this evaluation, the system automatically sets the **DDP toggle** to ON or OFF. Here, the DDP toggle is set to ON since the Sales Order Duty Payment Terms are “**Delivered Duty Paid**”
*** **Impact:** * Automates international duty handling from Shopify to shipment execution * Prevents incorrect duty responsibility assignments * Reduces manual errors in cross-border shipping * Improves operational speed for high-volume e-commerce integrations * Strengthens consistency between Sales Orders and Shipment configuration *** ### **Addition of “Account GL Code” Column in Audit Trail Detail View** **Overview:** This release introduces a new enhancement in the Audit Trail module with the addition of a **“Account GL Code”** column in the Audit Trail **Detail View**. The new column allows users to directly view the General Ledger (GL) code associated with each transaction line, improving financial traceability, audit accuracy, and reconciliation efficiency. *** **Feature Added:** GL Code Column in Audit Trail Detail **Location:** `Accounting → Audit Trail → Expand transaction(Detail View)` **Description:** A new column labelled **“Account GL Code”** has been added to the expanded transaction detail grid within the Audit Trail module. The column displays the General Ledger account code linked to each debit or credit entry. This provides clearer identification of the exact ledger account impacted by every transaction change.
*** **How to View "Account GL Code” Column in Audit Trail Detail View:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Accounting → Audit Trail**. **Step 2:** Locate the required transaction in the list. **Step 3:** Click the **“+”** icon to expand the transaction details. **Step 4:** View the newly added **Account GL Code** column in the detail grid. **Step 5:** The system displays the GL code corresponding to each transaction line automatically. *** ### **Merge Vendors – Vendor Centre Enhancement** **Overview:** This release introduces a new **Merge Vendors** feature in the Vendor Centre, enabling users to consolidate duplicate vendor records into a single primary vendor. This enhancement helps maintain clean vendor data, improves consistency across procurement and inventory workflows, and prevents fragmentation of vendor references across modules. *** **Enhancement:** The **Vendor Centre** now includes a **Merge** option under the **Options** menu. **Location:** `Menu → Purchase → Vendor Section → Vendor Centre` **Description:** Users can now select multiple vendors from the Vendor Centre and merge them into one primary vendor record. After a successful merge, the primary vendor automatically replaces the secondary vendor across all relevant modules, including Item Centre (default vendor mappings), Purchase Orders, Item Receipts, Item–Vendor Mapping and any other references where the secondary vendor was previously used.
*** **Pricing Rule Protection** If a pricing rule exists for **any selected vendor**, the merge operation is blocked. Users must remove or update the pricing rule before proceeding. **Example:**\ If Vendor 403 has a pricing rule, it cannot be merged with Vendor 401 until the rule is cleared. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Purchase → Vendor Section → Vendor Centre** and select two vendors that you want to merge from the vendor list. **Step 2:** Click the **Merge Vendors** option from the **Options** dropdown menu (top right).
**Step 3:** The system validates the following before proceeding: * Both vendors use the same currency. * Both vendors are in Active status. * No pricing rule exists for either vendor.
**Step 4:** A popup window appears prompting you to select the **Primary Vendor**. Select the vendor to be retained as the primary record and confirm the merge.
**Step 5:** The system merges the records and replaces the secondary vendor with the primary vendor in the Vendor Centre.
*** **Impact:** This enhancement improves vendor master data accuracy, system-wide data consistency and long-term database cleanliness. It also reduces manual reconciliation efforts caused by duplicate vendor records. *** ### **Added Wave Template Support in Manufacturing Order** **Overview:** Wave Template support has been extended to the Manufacturing Order (MO) workflow. Users can now manually select a wave template when creating waves for both **Production** and **Disassembly** type MO. Previously, the system always applied the store’s default wave template automatically. With this enhancement, users gain full control to choose the appropriate wave template at the time of wave creation, similar to the Sales Order waving process. This improvement provides greater flexibility in inventory allocation, picking optimization, and warehouse operations for manufacturing workflows. *** **Feature Added:** Wave Template Selection for MO Picking (Production & Disassembly) **Location:** `Menu → Manufacturing → Manufacturing Order` *** **Key Enhancements:** Wave template selection is now available in the following scenarios: **1. Manual Wave Creation from Create MO Page** When a user initiates the picking process for a Manufacturing Order in **Released** status by clicking **Start Picking**, the system first opens the **Item Inventory by Location** popup. This screen allows the user to review available inventory by location and confirm the quantities to be picked.
After clicking **Apply**, the system then opens the **Assign Wave Template** pop-up, where the user can optionally enter comma-separated LPN numbers and select a Wave Template. Once confirmed, the wave is created using the selected template.
This workflow applies to both **Production Manufacturing Orders** and **Disassembly Manufacturing Orders**. **2. Batch MO Processing from MO Centre** When one or more Manufacturing Orders are selected in the MO Centre and the user clicks **Quick Produce** or **Quick Disassemble**, the system opens the same **Assign Wave Template** popup, allowing users to select the desired wave template before creating waves.
**3. Batch MO Order (Sub-Form)** When a user clicks on a **Batch MO Number** from the Manufacturing Order Centre, the **Batch Manufacturing Order** sub-form opens. * On Clicking the **Action** dropdown and selecting **Start Picking** opens the **Assign Wave Template** popup.
* Similarly, clicking **Quick Produce** from the same screen also opens the **Assign Wave Template** popup.
In both cases, users can optionally enter comma separated multiple LPN numbers and select the desired Wave Template before confirming wave creation. **4. Options Menu on Create MO Page** When the user clicks the **Options** dropdown on the Create MO page and selects **Quick Produce,** or **Quick Disassemble**, the system also opens the **Assign Wave Template** popup. This ensures consistent behavior and wave template selection regardless of how the picking process is initiated. *** ### **Optimization to Item Price Upload & Shopify Sync** **Overview:** A new App Configuration, **“Enable Item Currency Price Value Comparison on Update,”** has been introduced to optimize how Item Custom Prices (ICPs) are processed and synced with Shopify during batch uploads and API updates. This enhancement ensures that only **actual price changes** are processed and sent to Shopify, reducing unnecessary database updates, webhook triggers, and external sync operations. *** **Configuration Details:** **Configuration Name:** Enable Item Currency Price Value Comparison on Update **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → General → Enable Item Currency Price Value Comparison on Update
*** **Functionality:** **When App Config Is Enabled:** * When this configuration is **enabled**, the system compares uploaded Item Custom Prices with existing values in the database before processing them. If the uploaded value differs from the existing value, the record is updated and if the uploaded value is identical, the record is skipped and no update is performed. *** **Functionality When App Config Is Disabled:** * When the configuration is **disabled**, the system follows the previous behaviour. All ICPs will be updated and the updated records count in Batch Upload Item Prices show that. *** ### **Create or Update Customer Address – Enhancement in SO modules** **Overview:** A new App Configuration, **“Allow Option to Create/Update Customer Address in Sales Order,”** has been added to seamlessly add or modify billing and shipping addresses without \ leaving the workflow. Users can create new addresses or update existing customer addresses directly from Sales Order, Estimate, and Invoice modules. It reduces navigation, improves data accuracy, and ensures address consistency across customer records and transactions. *** **Configuration Details:** **App Config Name:** Allow Option to Create/Update Customer Address in Sales Order, Estimate and Invoice Modules **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → Sales → Allow Option to Create/Update Customer Address in Sales Order, Estimate and Invoice Modules
*** **Functionality:** 1. **Functionality When App Config Is Enabled:** • The **Create New Address** option appears in both **Bill To** and **Ship To** address dropdowns.
• Selecting this option opens the address modal with the currently selected address prefilled. Users can update the details as needed and save it as a new address. • If the **Set As Default** toggle is enabled, that address will be automatically populated in the **Bill To** address for future Sales Orders created for the same customer. The same behavior applies to the **Ship To** address as well.
• The newly created address becomes immediately available in the dropdown after saving.
• Users can also edit the details of an already existing address and save the changes.
• An **Update in Customer** option is also available in both Bill To and Ship To address modals to update the existing address in the customer record.
• This allows users to update the selected address directly in the customer master record.
{% hint style="info" %} **The Address Name field is editable only when creating a new address. The field remains read-only and cannot be modified when updating or editing an existing address.** {% endhint %} **Key Enhancements:** • **Create New Address from Dropdown**\ Users can add a new billing or shipping address directly from the Bill To and Ship To dropdown lists across Sales Orders, Estimates, and Invoices. The address creation modal opens with the current customer context, and the saved address is instantly available for selection. • **Update Existing Address in Customer Record**\ The new **“Update in Customer”** option allows users to modify an existing address and sync the changes back to the customer master record from the same modal. • **Mandatory Field Validation**\ Address Line 1, City, Country, and Zip/Postal Code are required when creating a new address to ensure data completeness and accuracy. • **Immediate Availability**\ Newly created addresses appear in the dropdown instantly, without requiring a page refresh. • **Cross-Module Consistency**\ The feature works consistently across Sales Orders, Estimates, and Invoices, ensuring system-wide address accuracy. *** ### App Configuration: **Void Credit Memo Linked with ASN** **Overview:** A new App Configuration, **“Allow Credit Memo Void with Linked ASN,”** has been introduced to provide controlled flexibility when voiding Credit Memos that are linked to an ASN. This enhancement applies only when the **"Use RMA ASN Process"** app configuration is enabled and ensures inventory integrity while allowing legitimate void operations. *** **Configuration Details:** * **App Config Name:** Allow Credit Memo Void with Linked ASN * **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → General → Allow Credit Memo Void with Linked ASN
* **Prerequisite:** This configuration will function only when app config **"Use RMA ASN Process"** is enabled. *** **Functionality** **When the App Configuration “Allow Credit Memo Void with Linked ASN” Is Disabled:** * Credit Memos linked to an ASN cannot be voided. * The system behavior remains unchanged, and the existing restriction continues to apply. *** **When the App Configuration “Allow Credit Memo Void with Linked ASN” Is Enabled:** * If **"Use RMA ASN Process"** is enabled, then the Credit Memo can be voided, even if it is linked to an ASN. * If **"Use RMA ASN Process"** is disabled, then the Credit Memo cannot be voided when it is linked to an ASN, and the system displays a validation error.
*** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Enable **"Use RMA ASN Process"** from App Configuration. Then enable **"Allow Credit Memo Void with Linked ASN"**. **Step 2:** Go to **Menu → Sales → Credit & Deposit → Credit Memo Centre** and open the Credit Memo you want to void that is linked to an ASN.
**Step 3:** Before voiding, manually reverse the inventory that was returned. This step is mandatory otherwise the system will throw an error message.
**Step 4:** From the **Options** menu, select **Void** option. If both the app configurations are enabled then the system allows the void action and confirms successful completion.
**Step 5:** Go to the **ASN Centre**. The status of the linked ASN changes to **Void**, after the Credit Memo is voided.
*** **Impact:** * Provides controlled flexibility for finance and returns teams. * Preserves inventory accuracy by enforcing a clear prerequisite. * Eliminates hard blocking while maintaining data integrity. * Ensures consistent behaviour across Credit Memo and RMA ASN workflows. *** ### **Auto-Population of Shipping Notes in Estimate Module - Enhancement** **Overview:** Shipping Notes handling in the **Estimate module** has been enhanced as the system now automatically pulls Shipping Notes from the selected customer into the Estimate, ensuring consistency across customer records, estimates, and downstream sales documents. In addition, a **Shipping Notes column** has been introduced in the **Estimate Centre**, along with support in **Advanced Search**, improving visibility and searchability at the list level.
*** **Key Enhancements:** * When a customer is selected on an Estimate, the Shipping Notes field is automatically populated from the customer record. * During conversion of an Estimate to a Sales Order—including **Convert Selected Lines to Sales Order**—the Shipping Notes are carried forward. * When an Estimate is duplicated, the Shipping Notes from the original Estimate are copied to the new one. * If the selected customer does not have Shipping Notes defined, the Shipping Notes field remains blank. *** ### **Update in Tax Calculation Logic for Pick Up Orders** **Overview:** A new App Configuration, **“Auto Copy Store Address to Ship To Address,”** has been introduced to ensure accurate tax calculation for **Pick Up** orders. When enabled, the system automatically copies the selected **Ship Store address** to the **Ship To address**, ensuring taxes are calculated based on the store location instead of the customer’s address. This enhancement improves tax accuracy and maintains consistency across all sales channels and order creation methods. *** **Configuration Details:** * **App Config Name:** Auto Copy Store Address to Ship To Address * **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → Sales → Auto Copy Store Address to Ship To Address * **Prerequisite:** Ship Store address must be configured.
**Functionality:** **When App Config "Auto Copy Store Address to Ship To Address" Is Enabled:** * When the Ship Method is set to **Pick Up**, the Ship To Address is automatically populated with the Ship Store address. * The existing customer Ship To Address is overridden. * Taxes are recalculated based on the updated Ship To Address if the already existing configuration **"Calculate Taxes Based on Address"** is enabled. * On customer change, the Ship To Address is refilled with the Ship Store address. * On store change, the Ship To Address is updated with the newly selected Ship Store address and taxes are recalculated accordingly. *** **When App Config "Auto Copy Store Address to Ship To Address" Is Disabled:** * The Ship To Address remains unchanged when the Ship Method is set to **Pick Up**. * The system continues to use the customer’s Ship To Address for tax calculation. * System behaviour remains unchanged (existing logic applies). *** **Impact:** * Ensures accurate tax calculation for Pick Up orders based on store location. * Eliminates reliance on customer Ship To address for Pick Up scenarios. * Maintains consistent behaviour across UI, API, upload, and Shopify workflows. * Reduces manual corrections and tax discrepancies. *** ### **Addition of Defaulter Evaluation Criteria for Sales Orders and Invoices** **Overview:** A new App Configuration, **"Select Customer Defaulter Evaluation Criteria",** has been introduced to provide control over how customer credit limit and overdue Invoice checks are evaluated. This enhancement allows businesses to define whether defaulter evaluation should be based on Sales Orders, Invoices, or a combination of both—ensuring more accurate and flexible credit enforcement across sales workflows. This configuration works in conjunction with existing defaulter controls and enhances transparency when determining customer eligibility during Sales Order release and Invoice creation. *** **Configuration Details:** * **App Config Name:** Select Customer Defaulter Evaluation Criteria * **Type:** Multi-select Dropdown * **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → General → Select Customer Defaulter Evaluation Criteria * **Available Options:** * Sales Order * Invoice
* **Prerequisite:**\ The following existing configurations must be enabled for this feature to function: * **Criteria for Restricting Defaulter Customers** * **Restrict Defaulter Customer Sales** If neither Sales Order nor Invoice is selected, the system follows the default defaulter evaluation logic. *** #### Functionality **When Only Sales Order Is Selected** * Select **Sales Order** from the available options in the *Select Customer Defaulter Evaluation Criteria* app configuration. * Only Sales Orders in **Released** or **Partially Shipped** status are considered. * Estimates are included where applicable. * Invoice balances are **not** considered for credit limit evaluation. * If releasing a Sales Order causes the evaluated balance to exceed the credit limit, the system displays a **Defaulter Permission** prompt. *** **When Only Invoice Is Selected** * Select **Invoice** from the available options in the *Select Customer Defaulter Evaluation Criteria* app configuration. * Only **open invoice balances** are considered. * Sales Order balances are **not** included in the credit limit evaluation. * If a direct invoice exceeds the remaining available credit, a **credit limit restriction** is triggered immediately. *** **When Both Sales Order and Invoice Are Selected** * Select both **Sales Order** and **Invoice** from the available options in the *Select Customer Defaulter Evaluation Criteria* app configuration. * The system evaluates the **combined balance** of: * Sales Orders in **Released** or **Partially Shipped** status, and * **Open invoice balances**. {% hint style="warning" %} If only Invoice is selected as the **Customer Defaulter Evaluation Criteria**, invoices generated from Sales Orders are allowed even if they exceed the limit, but the customer is marked as a defaulter afterward. {% endhint %} *** **Impact:** This enhancement provides precise control over customer credit enforcement, aligns defaulter logic with business policies, reduces false positives, and ensures consistent behaviour across Sales Orders and Invoices—without disrupting existing workflows. *** ### **Addition of Customer Deposit Refund Email Notification** **Overview:** A new App Configuration has been introduced to automatically notify customers via email when a **Customer Deposit Refund** is processed. This enhancement ensures timely communication with customers and improves transparency around refund transactions—without requiring any manual email action from users. Once enabled, the system sends a refund notification email using the newly added 'Customer Deposit Refund (Default)' email template whenever a customer deposit is refunded. *** **Configuration Details:** * **App Config Name:** Send Customer Deposit Refund Email * **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → General → Send Customer Deposit Refund Email
*** **How It Works:** **Step 1: Enable the App Configuration:** Enable **"Send Customer Deposit Refund Email"** from the Application Configuration. **Step 2: Configure the Email Template:** Navigate to Email Templates Configuration and follow the below steps: * Select **Refund** as the Entity * Choose the **Customer Deposit Refund Receipt (Default)** template * Customize the subject and email body if required
**Step 3: Process a Customer Deposit Refund:** When a customer deposit refund is completed, the system automatically triggers the refund email.
**Step 4: Email Delivery Logic** * The email is sent to the customer’s **Billing Email**
* If the Billing Email is not available, the system sends the email to the customer’s **Main Email** *** #### Impact * Ensures customers are automatically informed about deposit refunds * Reduces manual follow-ups and support queries * Improves customer communication and financial transparency * Fully configurable through App Config and Email Templates without impacting existing workflows *** ### **Extension of Credit Card Expiration Year** **Overview:** The Credit Card Expiration Date selection has been extended to support future years beyond the previously available range. This enhancement ensures users can add or update customer credit card details with longer-valid expiration dates, aligning the system with current card issuer standards and reducing the need for frequent updates. *** **New Enhancement:** The **Expiration Year** dropdown in **Credit Card Info** now includes additional future years (up to **2045**). **How to View it:** * Navigate to Customer Centre → Customer → Payments → Credit Card Info * This opens up **Add / Update Credit Card** modal.
*** **Impact:** * Prevents validation issues for long-valid credit cards. * Improves compatibility with modern payment providers. * Reduces administrative overhead caused by limited expiration year ranges. *** ### **Addition of Fee and Discount Handling Option in Card and Direct Debit Payment Services** **Overview:** Charge management capabilities have been extended across the **Manage Credit Card Payment Services**, **Manage Direct Debit (ACH) Payment Services**, and **Create Payment Method** pages. Additionally, users can manually add charges using the **Add Charges** button in the new **Fees & Discounts** tab added in both **Sales Order** and **Invoice** modules. This update allows businesses to configure fees or discounts directly at the payment service level and ensures these charges are automatically calculated, applied, and reflected during payment processing—without requiring any manual intervention. *** **New Enhancement:** A new **Manage Charges** option has been added to the **Options** dropdown menu in: * Manage Credit Card Payment Services
* Manage Direct Debit (ACH) Payment Services
* Create Payment Method page
Selecting **Manage Charges option** opens a sub form where charge rules can be defined for the selected payment service. The following fields are displayed in the sub form: * **Charge Type** – Fee or Discount * **Charge Value Type** – Flat or Percentage * **Charge Value** – Numeric value of the fee or discount * **GL Account** – GL account used for posting the charge
This sub form appears when the **Manage Charges** option is selected in the **Manage Credit Card Payment Services**, **Manage Direct Debit (ACH) Payment Services**, or **Create Payment Method** page. Once saved, the charges are applied as part of the total invoice payment. *** **How It Works:** Charges can be applied in two different ways: 1\. **Invoice Payment Module** **Step 1:** Navigate to the **Invoice Payment Module** and select the invoice(s) to be paid. **Step 2:** Choose a **payment method**. If charges are configured for the selected payment service, the system automatically calculates the applicable fee or discount.
**Step 3:** Once payment is completed, these charges can be viewed in the **Fees & Discounts** tab.
**2. Manual Addition of Charges via Fees & Discounts Tab** Charges can also be added manually during Sales Order or Invoice creation. 1. **Sales Order Creation** **Step 1:** Create or edit a Sales Order and navigate to the **Fees & Discounts** tab. **Step 2:** Click **Add Charges** and enter the sub form details.
2. **Invoice Creation** **Step 1:** Create or edit an Invoice and go to the **Fees & Discounts** tab. **Step 2:** Click **Add Charges** and define the required charge details.
In both cases, once saved, the charges are automatically reflected in the total order or invoice balance. *** ### **Added Process Association at Bill of Material Level** **Overview:** Previously, manufacturing processes could only be defined at the **Batch Manufacturing Order (Batch MO)** level. Manufacturing Orders (MOs) created as part of a batch would inherit the same set of processes from the Batch MO. With this enhancement, processes can now be defined **directly at the Bill of Material (BOM) level**, ensuring that **every Manufacturing Order created using that BOM automatically receives the defined processes**, even when the MO is created independently (outside of a batch). This update improves consistency, reduces dependency on Batch MOs, and ensures standardized process execution across all Manufacturing Orders. *** **Feature Added**: A new **Processes** tab in the **Bill of Material** module. **Location:** `Menu → Manufacturing → Bill of Materials`
Users can add or remove processes in the BOM module. One can reorder the sequence of processes using drag-and-drop functionality. *** **Key Enhancements:** 1. **Manufacturing Order module** * The following new tracking fields have been added in the **Processes** tab: * **Started At** * **Started By** * **Finished At** * **Finished By** * **Is Completed?** * Processes can only be started or finished in the sequence in which they are defined. * If the **Finish** button is clicked directly, the system automatically starts and finishes the process at the same time.
* Added a **Timeline View toggle** to visually track process progression. 2. **Manufacturing Order Centre** * A new **Processes** column has been added in the Manufacturing Order Centre that displays the associated processes for each MO, improving visibility and tracking.
3. **Batch MO Sub Form** * Added line-level **Start** and **Finish** buttons in Batch MO. * Starting or finishing a process in a Batch MO applies the same action to all related Manufacturing Orders (if applicable).
*** ### **Auto-Creation of Item Sub Categories via Upload Items/Products** **Overview:** Item upload and API workflows have been enhanced to automatically handle Item Subcategories. When uploading items/products (via upload or API), the system now **auto-creates Item Sub Categories** if they do not already exist in the system. Additionally, while creating Item Categories or Subcategories, the **Code field is automatically populated with the same value as the Name**, ensuring consistency and reducing manual input. If the Category Name or Sub Category Name provided during item upload or API integration already exists in the system either as a **Name** or as a **Code** the system will automatically assign the corresponding existing Category or Subcategory to the item. *** **Impact:** * Removes the need to manually create Item Sub Categories before item uploads * Prevents duplicate Category and Subcategory records * Ensures seamless mapping using either Name or Code * Improves upload accuracy for bulk and API-driven item creation {% hint style="info" %} Name and Code values of Item Category/ Item Sub Category must be unique across the system to ensure correct mapping. {% endhint %} *** ### **Addition of Address-Based Tax Fallback Control for Forced Item Tax** **Overview:** A new App Configuration, **“Address-Based Tax Fallback for Forced Item Tax,”** has been introduced to provide greater control over tax determination for items with **Force Sales Tax Code** enabled. This enhancement refines the tax priority logic by allowing businesses to control whether address-based tax calculation should be used as a fallback when item state tax mapping is unavailable. It ensures more predictable tax behavior and provides flexibility in how item, address, and customer tax codes are prioritized during sales transactions. This functionality applies across **Sales Orders, Invoices, Sales Receipts, and Credit Memos**. *** #### **Configuration Details** **App Config Name:** Address-Based Tax Fallback for Forced Item Tax **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → General → **Address-Based Tax Fallback for Forced Item Tax** **Functionality:** Controls whether address-based tax calculation is used as a fallback when item state tax mapping is not available.
*** **How It Works:** **Scenario: App config “Address-Based Tax Fallback for Forced Item Tax” Is Enabled** 1. **Force Sales Tax Code toggle is ON** (available in the **Tax Settings** tab of the Item edit page) **and a** **Tax Mapping by State** **exists**. The system determines the tax code using the following priority sequence: * **State Mapping Tax Code**\ Applied when a matching item state tax mapping exists for the Ship-To state. * **Address-Based Tax Code**\ Applied when no matching state mapping is found and an address-based tax code is available. * **Item Default Tax Code**\ Applied when neither state mapping nor address-based tax is available. * **Customer Tax Code**\ Applied only if none of the above tax sources are available. 2. **Force Sales Tax Code toggle is ON but no Tax Mapping by State exists** * The system directly applies the Item Default Tax Code. 3. **Force Sales Tax Code toggle is OFF** * The system follows the existing tax calculation behavior (no change). *** **Scenario: App config “Address-Based Tax Fallback for Forced Item Tax” Is Disabled** 1. **Force Sales Tax Code toggle is ON with an existing Tax Mapping by State.** The system determines the tax code using the following priority sequence: * **State Mapping Tax Code**\ Applied when a matching state mapping exists. * **Item Default Tax Code**\ Applied when no matching state mapping is found. *** **Impact:** * Provides configurable control over address-based tax fallback behavior. * Ensures predictable tax calculation when item state mappings are unavailable. * Prevents unintended tax overrides from address-based logic when not required. * Improves consistency and flexibility in tax handling across sales transactions. *** *** ### **Addition of Default Payable Account in Vendor Page Defaults** **Overview:** The Vendor module has been enhanced to allow users to define a **Default Payable Account at the Vendor Page Defaults level**. This ensures that newly created vendors automatically inherit the correct Accounts Payable (AP) account, eliminating incorrect defaults and reducing the need for manual corrections during vendor setup and payables processing. This enhancement improves accounting accuracy and ensures consistency across vendor-related transactions. *** **New Enhancement:** A new **'Default Payable Account'** field has been introduced in the **Vendor Page Defaults** settings. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Purchase → Vendor Section → Vendor**. **Step 2:** Open **Page Defaults** by clicking on the **vertical ellipsis (⋮)** in the top‑right corner of the XoroERP interface. **Step 3:** The **Default Configuration** form opens, allowing users to define default values for Vendor-related fields. Set the **Default Payable Account** you want to apply and save the configuration.
**Step 4:** Now, whenever a new Vendor is created, the **Default Payable Account** is automatically populated in the **Payments** tab, eliminating the need for manual selection.
*** **Impact:** * Ensures newly created vendors are consistently assigned the correct Accounts Payable account. * Reduces manual corrections and rework in payables and accounting workflows. * Improves accuracy and consistency in vendor-related financial transactions. * Saves time during vendor setup, especially in high-volume or multi-currency environments. *** ### **Added 'Is Active?' Column to Batch Update in BOM Centre** **Overview:** Previously, users could not modify the Active status of multiple Bills of Material (BOMs) at once. Each BOM had to be opened individually to mark it active or inactive, making bulk maintenance time-consuming—especially when managing large BOM libraries. This enhancement introduces batch-level control over BOM activation status directly from the Bill of Material Centre. *** **New Enhancement:** The **Batch Update** functionality in the **Item Centre** has been enhanced to include **'Is Active'** field.
*** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Manufacturing → Bill of Material → Bill of Material Centre**. **Step 2:** Select one or more Bill of Materials from the grid.
**Step 3:** Click **Batch Update** from the options drop-down menu located next to the header search fields.
**Step 4:** In the Batch Update window, select **'Is Active?'** as the column to update and set the desired value (Yes/No).
**Step 5:** Click **Update** to apply the change. The selected BOMs are updated in bulk with the new active status.
*** **Impact:** * Enables bulk activation or deactivation of multiple Bills of Material from a single screen. * Eliminates the need to open and update BOMs individually, significantly reducing manual effort. * Improves efficiency when managing large BOM libraries or performing mass clean-ups. * Ensures faster and more consistent BOM maintenance directly from the Bill of Material Centre. *** ### **Addition of Printed Cheque# Column in Account Register** **Overview:** The Account Register has been enhanced to include the **Printed Cheque#** column, providing greater visibility into cheque-based payment transactions. By surfacing the Printed Cheque Number directly in transactional views and exports, users can more easily trace payments, reconcile accounts, and audit cheque-related activity without navigating into individual records. *** **New Enhancement:** Added **Printed Cheque#** column in **Account Register**, **Account Register report**, and the **Account register(data Export)**.
*** **Impact:** * Finance teams can instantly identify cheque numbers associated with bill payments directly from the Account Register. * Eliminates the need to open individual transactions to verify cheque details during bank or AP reconciliation. * The Printed Cheque# is now available in reports and exported datasets, ensuring downstream systems and analyses retain complete payment references *** ### **Auto-Select Default Location Toggle – Enhancement to Quick Receive Module** **Overview:** Previously, automatic assignment of an item’s default location during **PO receiving** was entirely controlled by the App Config **“Auto-Select Default Item Location for Item Receiving and MO Production/Disassembly.”** However, if the **Receive ASN** option was not selected in this configuration, there was no way to auto-populate the item’s default location when **Quick Receiving a PO**. As a result, locations had to be selected manually for each item—even when the intent was to receive items into their default locations—making the process unnecessarily time-consuming. *** **Enhancement Added:** * A new toggle **“Auto-select default location by item”** is now available in the **Quick Receive PO** modal. * When this toggle is turned on, it will automatically use the receiving location based on the default location of the item.
*** **Impact:** * Enables faster receiving workflows when default locations are desired only in specific cases. * Reduces manual errors while preserving flexibility for mixed operational scenarios. * Improves usability for teams that rely on **Quick Receive** but do not want Receive ASN automation enabled system-wide. *** ### **Added Dedicated Default Location Support in Sales Receipt** **Overview:** A new App Configuration, **“Allow Dedicated Location in Sales Receipt,”** has been introduced to provide greater control over inventory location handling during Sales Receipt creation. When this configuration is enabled, a **Default Location** dropdown is displayed on the Sales Receipt form, allowing users to assign all inventory items to a single, dedicated location and streamline the receiving process. *** **Configuration Details:** **Configuration Name:** Allow Dedicated Location in Sales Receipt **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → Sales → Allow Dedicated Location in Sales Receipt
**Prerequisite:** * This configuration can only be enabled when config **"Enable LPN Tracking"** is off, and vice versa. It will work only under the following conditions: * **Warehousing** is **enabled** * **LPNs** is **disabled** *** **Functionality:** **When Warehousing is enabled and a Default Location Is Selected:** * The **Item Detail** sub form is displayed, allowing users to simply select the item and click **Add Item** to add it to the Sales Receipt. The pop-up for selecting items from multiple locations will not appear.
* This behaviour will be the same as when **Warehousing is off**, where only a single location setup is used. * Once a **Default Location** is selected and inventory items are added, the Default Location cannot be removed or changed. The location can only be modified by deleting the existing inventory lines. *** **When Warehousing is enabled and no Default Location Is Selected:** * The pop-up for adding items from multiple locations will appear immediately after entering the item details and clicking the **Add Item** option in the **Item Detail** subform. * If items are added without selecting a Default Location, we will not be able to select a Default Location until the previously added items are deleted. *** **Impact:** * Prevents accidental mixing of inventory locations during item addition * Reduces operational errors in warehouse-enabled environments * Provides clearer, rule-based control over location selection behaviour *** ### **Addition of 'Third Party Ref No' field in Estimate Module** **Overview:** The **'Third Party Ref No'** field has been introduced to the **Estimate module**, improving cross-document traceability and strengthening validation when converting Estimates to Sales Orders. This enhancement ensures consistency of third-party references across sales workflows while maintaining existing upload and API behaviour. In addition, the Third Party Ref No. is now searchable via **Global Search**, allowing users to quickly locate both Estimates and Sales Orders using external reference numbers. *** **Feature Added:** A **Third Party Ref No** Field in **Sales** tab of Estimate Module **Location:** `Menu→ Sales → Estimate → Create Estimate`
*** **Validation Rules:** * When converting an Estimate to a Sales Order, the system validates that the **Third Party Ref No. does not already exist in any Sales Order**. * If a duplicate Third Party Ref No. is detected in an existing Sales Order, the system blocks the conversion and displays a validation error. * This validation applies to both **Convert to SO** and **Convert Selected Lines to SO**. This ensures that Third Party Reference Numbers remain unique at the Sales Order level. *** **Impact:** * A new column for **Third Party Ref No.** is available in the **Estimate Centre**, ensuring visibility at the listing level.
* Improves traceability by extending third-party references to Estimates. * Enhances searchability across sales documents using Global Search. * Maintains backward compatibility for uploads and APIs. *** ### **Addition of Zip Code–Based Tax Calculation for Canada** **Overview:** A new App Configuration, **“Calculate Tax for Canada Zip Code,”** has been introduced to improve tax calculation accuracy for Canadian transactions. When enabled, the system calculates sales tax based on the Ship-To postal code for Canada, ensuring precise, address-level tax determination. The enhancement also introduces validation to alert users when tax calculation cannot be completed due to missing or invalid postal codes. This feature works in conjunction with existing tax configurations and applies consistently across multiple sales modules. *** **Configuration Details:** **Configuration Name:** Calculate Tax for Canada Zip Code **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → System → Calculate Tax for Canada Zip Code
*** **Functionality:** **When App Config Is Enabled:** * If the Ship-To address contains a valid Canadian postal code, tax is calculated based on the [**priority logic**](#addition-of-address-based-tax-fallback-control-for-forced-item-tax). * If the postal code is missing or invalid, the system displays an alert indicating that tax cannot be calculated due to an invalid zip/postal code.
* If App Config **“Restrict Save on Tax Calculation Error”** is enabled then the sales order cannot be saved and a blocking error message is displayed stating that the request cannot be completed due to a tax calculation error.
**When App Config Is Disabled:** * If the postal code is invalid or missing, tax defaults to the item’s configured sales tax (for example, GST). * If the postal code is valid, the system follows the existing tax calculation priority flow. *** **Impact:** This enhancement improves tax accuracy for Canadian customers by enforcing postal-code-based tax calculation while giving businesses control over whether tax errors should block transaction saving. It reduces incorrect tax application, improves compliance, and ensures consistent behaviour across all sales workflows. *** ### **Added Exchange Rate Adjustment Account App Setting in Sales Channel** **Overview:** A new app setting, **“Exchange Rate Adjustment Account,”** has been added to the Sales Channel to properly handle exchange rate differences received from Shopify. This enhancement ensures that currency-related adjustments are clearly identified, correctly posted, and accounted for during payout processing. Previously, exchange rate differences received in Shopify payout data lacked a clear identifier, making it difficult to track and post these adjustments accurately. This update introduces a dedicated configuration to resolve that gap and improve financial clarity. *** **App Setting Details: Exchange Rate Adjustment Account** app setting **App Setting Location:** `Menu → Apps → Sales Channel → Settings → Payouts` **Description:** A new field, **Exchange Rate Adjustment Account**, is now available in the Sales Channel settings. Users can select a GL account that will be used specifically to record exchange rate differences arising from multi-currency transactions. The selected account is automatically applied whenever the system detects an exchange rate adjustment during payout processing.
*** **How It Works:** * When an order is placed in Shopify using a currency different from the store’s base currency, the exchange rate difference is included in the Shopify payout data. * During payout processing, the system evaluates the transaction for any exchange rate variance. * If a difference is detected, the system posts the adjustment to the **Exchange Rate Adjustment Account** selected in the sales channel settings. * This logic applies consistently across core financial workflows, including Invoice Payments, Customer Deposits and Refunds. *** ### **Addition of Flinks Bank Connection Support** **Overview:** Flinks has been introduced as an alternative bank connection provider to Yodlee and Plaid, ensuring uninterrupted bank feed connectivity when other providers face availability or compatibility issues. This integration enables secure, real-time bank connections for both Canadian and U.S. financial institutions, allowing users to link bank feeds, sync transactions, and manage reconciliations directly within XoroERP. Flinks uses encrypted open-banking standards to safely import financial data, improving reliability, visibility, and control over bank transactions. *** **Feature Added: Flinks Bank Integration** **Available Providers: Flinks Canada**, **Flinks USA** **Location:**\ `Menu→ Connect Banks → Connect Bank Accounts → Link Bank Feeds → Manage Added Accounts` *** **How It Works:** **1. Connect Bank Accounts** * Select **Flinks Canada** or **Flinks USA**
* Accept the Flinks Privacy Statement and proceed. A list of supported banks will appear based on the selected country. * Log in using your Flinks Capital credentials.
* Complete any other security verification
* On successful authentication, the bank account is securely connected to XoroERP **2. Link Bank Feeds** * Select a connected bank feed from the dropdown * Map it to the appropriate XoroERP Chart of Account
* Choose a transaction start date and save
* Click **Link Bank Feed** to enable synchronization
**3. Manage Added Accounts** * Navigate to **Manage Added Accounts** * **Edit Credentials:** Allows updating stored login details if required * **Delete Account:** Unlink the mapping first, then delete the account connection **4. Bank Statement Centre** * Navigate to **Bank Statement Centre** * View imported debit and credit transactions * Switch between Header View and Detailed View * Monitor reconciliation status * Users can download or delete statements and transactions if required *** **Impact:** * Provides a reliable fallback bank integration option * Improves transaction visibility and reconciliation accuracy * Ensures secure handling of banking credentials * Enhances overall stability of bank feed operations within XoroERP *** ### **Addition of Tag Update Restriction During Shopify Re-Sync** **Overview:**\ A new App Setting, **"Restrict Item Tag Updates",** has been introduced to give teams control over how item tags are handled during Shopify re-syncs and item updates. This enhancement addresses scenarios where businesses want to maintain different tag values in Shopify and Xoro for the same item—without having Shopify overwrite Xoro tags during subsequent updates. **App Setting Details:** * **App Setting Name:** Restrict Item Tag Updates * **Scope:** Item sync from Shopify to Xoro * **Setting Location:**\ `Menu → Apps → Sales Channel → Settings → Products & inventory`
*** **Functionality:** **If the "Restrict Item Tag Updates" Setting Is Enabled:** * Item tags in **Xoro are not updated** during item updates or re-syncs from Shopify. * Existing tags in Xoro remain unchanged, even if Shopify tags differ. *** **If the "Restrict Item Tag Updates" Setting Is Disabled (default behavior):** * Item tags are updated in Xoro based on Shopify during item updates and re-syncs. *** **Impact:** * Prevents unintended overwrites of Xoro item tags during Shopify re-syncs. * Supports workflows where Shopify and Xoro require different tagging strategies. * Reduces manual correction after updates while preserving accurate initial item creation. *** # October 2.0 2025 Release (WMS) {% hint style="warning" %} This is a Custom Release. Feature availability depends on configuration and rollout status. Some features listed above may not be visible in your environment if they are part of a staged or custom deployment. Please contact your support representative to confirm enablement. {% endhint %} ### Auto-Skip “Enter Pick Location” for Virtual Allocations An enhancement has been introduced in the **WMS Picking workflow** related to the **Require LPN# Scanning** app configuration. When this configuration is disabled, and a wave is allocated entirely to virtual location(s), the **Enter Pick Location** page will now be skipped during the picking process. This change applies to the **Pick Wave module and WMS Picking flow**, ensuring smoother navigation when physical location scanning is not required.
*** **How It Works:** **Configuration Behavior** The system behavior depends on the **Require LPN# Scanning** app configuration: * **When Enabled:**\ The picking process functions as usual. The Enter Pick Location page appears as part of the standard workflow. * **When Disabled:**\ If the wave allocation is done exclusively through one or more virtual locations: * The **Enter Pick Location** page is automatically skipped. * The picking process continues directly to the next applicable step. This behavior applies only when the allocation is entirely virtual. *** **Picking Actions Compatibility** When the Enter Pick Location page is skipped, the following actions continue to function correctly during picking: * New Carton * Split Allocation * Consolidate * Palletize * Edit Qty * Revert Quantity All these actions remain fully operational without requiring the Enter Pick Location step. *** **For example:** * In multi-carton picking, once a carton is accepted, the Enter Pick Location page will not appear again. * If the Enter Pick Location page is set to be disabled for a task, it will not be accessible through any redirection or action. *** **Impact:** This enhancement streamlines the picking process in scenarios where allocation is fully virtual, and LPN scanning is not required. Operational Impact: * Reduces unnecessary screen steps in virtual allocation workflows. * Maintains full compatibility with carton management and quantity adjustment actions. * Ensures consistent navigation behavior across different picking scenarios. * Prevents accidental access to the Enter Pick Location page when it is intentionally disabled. No additional configuration changes are required unless users want to modify the behavior by enabling or disabling the **Require LPN# Scanning** setting. This update improves workflow efficiency while preserving all existing picking functionalities.
*** ### WMS Receiving – Auto Generate Pallet Number Enhancement **Overview:** A new **“Auto Generate”** feature has been added to the **Scan Pallet** page in the WMS Receiving module. This enhancement allows the system to automatically generate a pallet number during the receiving process, eliminating the need for manually entering the pallet number and improving operational speed.
*** **How It Works:** On the **Scan Pallet** page within the Receiving workflow: * A new **Auto Generate** button is available. * When clicked, the system automatically generates a new pallet number. * Once the pallet number is generated, the workflow automatically moves to the next step, which is the **Staging Location** page. This functionality removes the requirement to manually scan or enter a pallet number before proceeding. *** **Impact:** This enhancement simplifies the pallet scanning process during receiving operations. Operational Impact: * Reduces manual data entry during pallet creation. * Speeds up the receiving workflow. * Ensures consistent pallet numbering. * Minimizes user errors related to manual pallet number input. No additional configuration changes are required to use this feature. *** ### WMS Cycle Count – LPN Attributes Visibility Enhancement **Overview:** LPN attributes have been added to the cycle count line display in **Cycle Count by Batch (CC by Batch)** and **Cycle Count by Location (CC by Location)**. This enhancement improves visibility of LPN-related information during the cycle counting process. *** **How It Works:** Within both the **CC by Batch** and **CC by Location** screens: * LPN attributes are now displayed at the cycle count line level. * Users can view LPN-specific details directly within the count interface. * No changes have been made to the existing counting workflow. The enhancement adds additional information to the display without altering validation logic or counting steps.
*** **Impact:** This update improves transparency during inventory verification. Operational Impact: * Provides better visibility of LPN-related information during counting. * Reduces the need to navigate to separate screens for LPN details. * Supports more accurate reconciliation during cycle counts. No configuration changes are required to use this enhancement. *** ### Track Master Case Dimensions Enhancement **Overview:** A new app configuration, **“Track Master Case Dimensions”**, has been added under the WMS tab. When enabled, this configuration tracks and manages master case dimensions (Length, Width, Height, and Weight) at the ILPN level across ASN creation, receiving, packing, and inventory movement processes. This enhancement ensures consistent dimension tracking throughout warehouse operations.
*** **How It Works:** **App Configuration** When **Track Master Case Dimensions** is enabled, the system activates dimension tracking behavior across the following modules: *** **A. Create ASN** * During ASN creation, the item’s **Master Case Length/Width/Height/Weight** are automatically passed to the corresponding Master Case fields in the **ASN Detail**. * This ensures dimension consistency between item master data and ASN records. *** **B. Receiving in ERP** When receiving an ASN in ERP: * The dimensions from the **ASN Detail** are passed to the corresponding **ILPN Length/Width/Height/Weight** fields. * This behavior applies to: * Batch Receive * Quick Receive * Receive * Receive by Uploads *** **C. Receiving in WMS** Behavior during WMS receiving depends on configuration and process type: 1. If **“Suppress LPN Attributes Page in Receiving”** is enabled and all LPN attribute toggles for the item are disabled:
* A pop-up displaying ILPN dimensions is rendered. 2. Otherwise, LPN dimensions are displayed on the **LPN Attributes page**. 3. Dimension Prefill Rules: * Dimensions are prefilled only in **Receive by Item**, based on the ASN Detail Master Case dimensions. * If ASN dimensions are empty or 0, the item’s Master Case dimensions are displayed instead. 4. Receive by UCC: * The ILPN Dimensions pop-up is always rendered, regardless of the **Suppress LPN Attributes** configuration. *** **D. Packing** * For **Full Case LPN**, Length/Width/Height/Weight values are automatically prefilled based on the stored LPN dimensions. *** **E. Inventory Movement** **ERP** * LPN Dimensions have been added to the **Inventory Movement** module. * During inventory movement: * “To LPN” dimension fields take priority if provided. * If not specified, dimensions from the source LPN are passed to the destination LPN. **WMS** * During **Move Inventory by Item**, dimensions are automatically passed from the From LPN to the To LPN. *** **F. Inventory by Location** * Support has been added to edit LPN dimensions directly from the **Inventory by Location** screen. *** **Impact** This enhancement standardizes dimension tracking across receiving, packing, and inventory movement workflows. **Operational Impact:** * Ensures consistent ILPN dimension data from ASN to final storage. * Reduces manual dimension entry. * Improves accuracy for full-case packing and pallet handling. * Enhances traceability of physical case dimensions during inventory transfers. * Provides flexibility to update LPN dimensions directly from Inventory by Location. No additional workflow changes are required beyond enabling the **Track Master Case Dimensions** configuration. *** ### Edit Qty Enhancement – Multi-Wave & Master Case Handling **Overview:** The **Edit Qty** functionality has been enhanced to provide greater flexibility when managing picks across multiple waves under the same OLPN. This update improves visibility, control, and accuracy during quantity edits, especially for Master Case and Each Pick scenarios. *** **How It Works:** **1. Multi-Item, Multi-Wave Support (Same OLPN)** * Edit Qty now supports multiple items across multiple waves, provided they belong to the same OLPN. * If an item is part of multiple picked waves under the same OLPN: * A pop-up window will be displayed. * The pop-up lists all picked waves associated with that item. * The table includes the following columns: * Item# * Wave# * Qty To Edit This ensures clear visibility of wave-level quantity distribution before making edits.
*** **Master Case Picks – Edit Qty Behavior** The system handles Edit Qty for Master Case Picks based on the destination entered in the **To Location/LPN# field.** * If a non-virtual location is entered: * The entire case will be moved to the specified location. * Partial quantity editing is not permitted in this scenario. * If a virtual location/LPN# is entered: * The Enter Item and Qty for Edit Qty page is displayed. * The user can define the specific quantity to edit. *** **Each Pick Behavior** * For **Each Pick** cases, the Enter Item and Qty for Edit Qty page is always displayed. * Users must manually select and adjust the required quantity. *** **Impact** * Improved handling of multi-wave scenarios under the same OLPN. * Increased visibility into wave-level allocations. * Clear distinction between Master Case and Each Pick behavior during quantity edits. * Reduced risk of incorrect quantity adjustments. *** ### New Field Added – Consolidate in “Restrict LPN(s) in WMS Using Regular Expressions” App Config **Overview** A new field "**Consolidate"** has been added under the App Configuration **Restrict LPN(s) in WMS Using Regular Expressions**. This enhancement enables users to restrict LPNs specifically during the **consolidation process** by applying regular expression-based validation rules.
*** **How It Works:** * When the App Configuration **Restrict LPN(s) in WMS Using Regular Expressions** is enabled, the system validates LPN values based on the defined regex pattern. * The newly added **Consolidate** field ensures that the validation rule is also enforced during LPN consolidation. This provides greater control over which LPN formats are allowed during consolidation activities. *** **Example Validation Rule** To allow only LPN values that start with **OLPN** or **LPN**, the following regular expression can be configured: ``` ^OLPN|LPN.*$ ``` **Explanation:** * `^OLPN` → Allows values that start with “OLPN” * `LPN.*$` → Allows values that start with “LPN” Any LPN that does not match this pattern will be restricted during consolidation. *** **Impact:** * Prevents invalid or incorrectly formatted LPNs during consolidation. * Ensures standardized LPN naming conventions. * Enhances data integrity within WMS operations. *** ### App Config – Blocked operations for Locked Orders **Overview** A new application configuration setting, **"Block operations for locked orders"**, has been introduced. When enabled, this setting restricts specific operations from being performed on **locked Sales Orders**, ensuring order integrity and preventing unintended changes.
*** **Blocked Operations** When a Sales Order is locked and this configuration is enabled, the following actions will be restricted: * Release SO * Update SO * Create Wave * Pick Wave * Close Wave * Print Wave * Ship SO * Void Wave Users attempting any of the above actions on a locked Sales Order will be prevented from proceeding. This enhancement strengthens process control by safeguarding locked Sales Orders from operational modifications. *** #### 3PL Account Dropdown in ASN View (ASN Center) **Overview:**\ Added support for a **3PL Account** dropdown field in the **ASN View** screen within the **ASN Center**. This enhancement enables users to directly view and select the associated 3PL Account from the ASN details screen, improving visibility and operational control when managing inbound shipments linked to third-party logistics providers.
**Key Highlights:** * Introduced a new **3PL Account** dropdown in the ASN View. * Allows selection and visibility of associated 3PL accounts directly within ASN details. * Enhances traceability and accuracy for 3PL-based inbound processing. * Streamlines ASN management workflows within the ASN Center. *** #### App Config – Restrict Wave Creation Without Carton Break Rule **Overview:**\ A new application configuration setting, **"Restrict Wave Creation Without Carton Break Rule,"** has been introduced. When enabled, this setting prevents wave creation for **Sales Orders (SO)** and **Manufacturing Orders (MO)** if a **Carton Break Rule** is not selected. This ensures proper cartonization logic is enforced before proceeding with wave processing.
*** **How It Works:** **When App Config is Enabled:** * Wave creation is **restricted** if no Carton Break Rule is selected. * System displays appropriate UI validation message. * User must select a valid Carton Break Rule before proceeding. **When App Config is Disabled:** * Wave creation proceeds without requiring a Carton Break Rule. * No validation is enforced for Carton Break Rule selection. *** ### LPN Attributes Added to ILPN Lookup and OLPN Lookup **Overview:**\ LPN Attributes have been added to both **ILPN Lookup** and **OLPN Lookup** screens. This enhancement provides greater visibility into LPN-level attribute details directly from the lookup screens, improving traceability, validation, and operational decision-making during warehouse processes. *** **Key Highlights** * LPN Attributes are now displayed in: * **ILPN Lookup** * **OLPN Lookup** * Enhances transparency of LPN-specific information. * Reduces the need to navigate to additional screens for attribute verification. * Supports better operational accuracy during inbound and outbound processes.
*** ### Sales Order Batch Generation Enhancement **Overview:** Sales order batches can now be generated for orders with allocation status **“Closed”** without requiring users to manually undo the **“Ready to Ship”** status. This enhancement improves operational flexibility in batch creation workflows. *** **How It Works:** Previously, if a sales order was marked as **Ready to Ship** and had allocation status **Closed**, users were required to manually reverse the "Ready to Ship" status before generating a sales order batch. With this update: * Sales order batches can be generated directly for orders with allocation status **Closed**. * The system no longer requires the removal of the **Ready to Ship** status before batch creation. * Existing allocation and shipping validations remain unchanged. This ensures batch generation can proceed without additional manual intervention. *** **Impact:** This update simplifies batch processing for closed allocations. Operational Impact: * Eliminates unnecessary manual status adjustments. * Reduces processing time during batch creation. * Minimizes the risk of workflow errors caused by status toggling. * Improves efficiency for teams managing high-volume shipping operations. No configuration changes are required to use this enhancement. *** # November 2025 Release {% hint style="warning" %} This is a Custom Release. Feature availability depends on configuration and rollout status. Some features listed above may not be visible in your environment if they are part of a staged or custom deployment. Please contact your support representative to confirm enablement. {% endhint %} ### **Added Batch Update Functionality For Emails in Customer Centre** **Overview:** The **Customer Centre** serves as a centralized hub for managing customer data, enabling users to efficiently maintain and update customer-related information. The Batch Update feature further streamlines this process by allowing bulk updates across multiple customer records. To enhance communication management and reduce manual effort, three new columns have been introduced in the **Batch Update** options within the Customer Centre: * **Email CC** * **Default Billing Email** * **Default Shipment Updates Email** These fields can now be updated in bulk for multiple customers through the Batch Update process.
*** **Key Enhancements:** * **Improved Efficiency:** Enables users to update email-related fields for multiple customers in a single action, reducing repetitive manual updates. * **Better Communication Management:** Ensures consistent and accurate email configurations across customers for billing and shipment communications. * **Time Savings:** Eliminates the need to open individual customer records for updating email details. * **Reduced Errors:** Minimizes the chances of inconsistencies in email data by allowing standardized bulk updates. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu** → **Sales** → **Customer Section** → **Customer Centre** and select the customer(s) for which you want to perform updates.
**Step 2:** Click on the **Header Level Options** button and select **Batch Update**. A popup will appear displaying batch update options.
**Step 3:** In the **Column Name** dropdown, select one of the newly added fields—**Email CC**, **Default Billing Email**, or **Default Shipment Updates Email**—and enter the required value in the **Value** field.
**Step 4:** Click on **Update**. The changes will be reflected in the corresponding email fields for the selected customer records.
*** ### **Enhanced Bill Search Logic in Bill Payment Module** **Overview:** The **Bill Payment module** allows users to search and filter unpaid bills based on various criteria, such as due date and discount eligibility. These filters are critical for identifying bills that need immediate payment or qualify for early payment discounts. The new logic in Bill Search in the Bill payment module uses **"OR"** when searching using both the filters: **"Due on or Before"** and **"Discount Date On Or Before."**
*** **Key Enhancements:** * **Improved Visibility of Bills:** Users can now view all relevant bills that are either due soon or eligible for discounts, instead of only those meeting both conditions. * **Better Cash Flow Management:** Enables users to identify and prioritize bills based on due dates or discount opportunities more effectively. * **Reduced Risk of Missed Discounts:** Bills with valid discount dates are no longer excluded if they don’t meet the due date criteria simultaneously. * **More Flexible Filtering:** The updated OR logic provides a broader and more practical search result set aligned with real-world payment workflows. *** ### **Addition of "Hazmat Code" Column in Item Centre** **Overview:** The **Item Centre** acts as a centralized repository for managing item-related data, offering a wide range of columns to help users analyze inventory, attributes, and compliance-related information. As businesses deal with regulated or hazardous materials, having quick access to safety and compliance data becomes increasingly important. To support this need, a new column, **“Hazmat Code”**, has been added to the **Item Centre**. This column displays the hazardous material classification code associated with each item, enabling users to easily identify and manage items that fall under hazardous categories.
*** **Key Enhancements:** * **Improved Compliance Visibility:** Users can quickly identify hazardous items directly from the Item Centre without navigating into individual item records. * **Enhanced Operational Awareness:** Provides better insight into items requiring special handling, storage, or transportation. * **Streamlined Decision-Making:** Helps teams make informed decisions related to logistics, shipping restrictions, and regulatory requirements. * **Reduced Manual Effort:** Eliminates the need to open each item to verify hazmat-related information, improving efficiency. *** ### **Global Search Support Added for Overpayment Reference Numbers** **Overview:** The **Invoice Payment** module allows users to process customer payments, including handling overpayment scenarios where excess amounts can be recorded as credits or refunds with a Reference Number for tracking. With this enhancement, the **Reference Number** entered during overpayment is now searchable via the global search. This improves visibility and makes it easier to quickly locate related payment and credit records across the system.
*** **Key Enhancements:** * Improves traceability of overpayment transactions through reference numbers. * Enables faster search and retrieval of payment and credit records. * Enhances auditability and financial tracking. * Reduces dependency on manual lookup or navigation across modules. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Invoice Payment Centre → Invoice Payment**. Select the customer and choose the invoice(s) for which payment is to be made. **Step 2:** Enter the **Payment Amount** such that it exceeds the **total due amount**, triggering an overpayment scenario.
**Step 3:** An **Over Payment pop-up** appears. Enter the **Reference Number** and Memo, and select the required action (e.g., *Create Credit* or *Issue Refund*).
**Step 4:** Click **OK**, then proceed to **Save & Apply Payment** to complete the transaction. A credit record is generated with the entered Reference Number.
**Step 5:** Use the **Global Search** and enter the same Reference Number. The system will now successfully display the related **Invoice Payment/Credit** record, confirming that the reference is searchable.
*** ### **Inventory Snapshot Optimization with “Show In-Transaction Items” Toggle** **Overview:** This enhancement addresses performance issues and timeouts experienced in the **Inventory Snapshot (Short Inventory Planner)** view. To improve load times and system efficiency, optimizations have been introduced along with a new toggle that allows users to control the dataset being displayed. This ensures faster rendering, especially for large inventories. *** **Enhancement Added:** A new toggle, **"Show In Transaction Items,"** has been introduced in the **Item Inventory Snapshot** module.
*** **Prerequisite:** App Config **“Enable Optimized Views”** must be enabled, and **Inventory Snapshot** must be selected as the optimized view.
*** **Functionality:** **When App Config “Enable Optimized Views” Is Enabled and Inventory Snapshot Is Selected:** * The system displays the **“Show In-Transaction Items”** toggle in the **Inventory Snapshot** module. * If the toggle is **ON** (default), only items involved in transactions (SO, PO, TO, Inventory, etc.) are displayed. This reduces data load and helps prevent timeouts. * If the toggle is **OFF**, all items and store combinations are displayed, including those not involved in any transactions. *** **When App Config “Enable Optimized Views” Is Disabled:** * The **“Show In-Transaction Items”** toggle is not available. * All items and store combinations are displayed in the **Inventory Snapshot** view, which may lead to slower performance or timeouts for large datasets. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → App Config → General → Enable Optimized Views**, and select **Inventory Snapshot** as the optimized view from the available options. **Step 2:** Go to the **Inventory Snapshot** module and locate the **“Show In-Transaction Items”** toggle. **Step 3:** Use the toggle based on your requirement: turn it **ON** to view only transaction-related items, or turn it **OFF** to view all items. {% hint style="info" %} If any option other than **Inventory Snapshot** is selected as the optimized view in the **“Enable Optimized Views”** app config, the system treats the **“Show In-Transaction Items”** toggle as **enabled (TRUE)** by default from the backend, and only transaction-based items are displayed in those views. {% endhint %} *** ### **Auto Print Sales Orders via Upload/API** **Overview:** This enhancement enables automatic printing of Sales Orders when they are created through Upload or API. By leveraging the **Print Service** integration, users can directly send Sales Orders to the **Print Queue** without manual intervention, improving operational efficiency and reducing processing time. *** **Enhancement Added:** * Two new fields, **AutoPrintSalesOrder** and **PrintRequesterName**, have been introduced in the Sales Order upload file. * Sales Orders are automatically added to the **Print Service Queue** based on the provided inputs in the fields in the uploaded file/API. * A new column, **“Is Printed?”** has been added in the **Sales Order Centre**. The **“Is Printed?”** icon is clickable and redirects to the **Print Service Queue** with the **respective Sales Order** filtered using **Entity Ref#**. *** **Prerequisite:** App Config **"Enable Xoro Print Service"**, available under **Menu → App Config → System**, must be enabled for this enhancement to work.
*** **Functionality:** **When App Config is Enabled:** * If **AutoPrintSalesOrder** is set to **Y/True** and a valid **PrintRequesterName** is provided in the **upload file** or API, the Sales Order is automatically added to the **Print Service Queue**. * The **“Is Printed?”** column in the Sales Order Centre is updated with a check icon, indicating that the print request has been generated. * Clicking the **“Is Printed?”** icon redirects you to the **Print Service Queue**, with the respective **SO#** populated as the **Entity Ref No.** in Advanced Search. * If **AutoPrintSalesOrder** is set to **N/False** or not provided, the Sales Order is created normally and is not added to the Print Queue. * If **PrintRequesterName** is missing or invalid, the Sales Order is created successfully, but is not added to the Print Queue. *** **When App Config is Disabled:** * The Sales Order is created normally via Upload/API. * No print request is generated, regardless of the **AutoPrintSalesOrder** value, and the **“Is Printed?”** column remains unmarked. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Enable the App Config **"Enable Xoro Print Service"** from **Menu → App Config → System**. **Step 2:** Go to the **Batch Upload Sales Orders** module. Download the Sales Order template and populate the required details, including **AutoPrintSalesOrder = Yes/True** and **PrintRequesterName** with a valid value.
**Step 3:** Upload the updated file. Once the upload is processed, the Sales Order is created in the **Sales Order Centre**.
**Step 4:** Verify the **“Is Printed?”** column in the **Sales Order Centre** for the **respective Sales Order**. A check icon indicates that the print request has been generated.
**Step 5:** Double-click the **“Is Printed?”** (check) icon. The system redirects to the **Print Service Queue**, displaying the respective Sales Order with the **Entity Ref#** pre-populated in Advanced Search.
*** ### **Batch Update To Be Shipped Date for Sales Order Lines** **Overview:** This enhancement allows users to update the **To Be Shipped Date** at the line-item level in Sales Orders using the Batch Update functionality. It provides greater flexibility by enabling selective updates without modifying the entire Sales Order. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Enables **line-level update** of the To Be Shipped Date without affecting other items in the same Sales Order. * Introduces support for updating the field via **Batch Update**, improving efficiency for bulk operations. * The field is displayed as **“To Be Ship Date”** in the Sales Order line grid and mapped as **“Line Date To Be Shipped”** in the Batch Update modal. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Sales Order Centre**. In the **Search By** field, select **Sales Order Detail**, then choose the required Sales Order line items.
**Step 2:** Click on **Batch Update** from the **Options** dropdown.
**Step 3:** In the Batch Update pop-up, select **“Line Date To Be Shipped”** as the Column Name and enter the required date in the Value field.
**Step 4:** Click **Update**. The **To Be Shipped Date** is updated for the selected line items.
*** ### **Added Support for Vendor Mapping Fields in Product Upload** **Overview:** This enhancement introduces new vendor-related fields in the **Product Upload template**, allowing users to create products along with their associated item-vendor mappings directly during upload. It eliminates the need to manually configure vendor mappings after product creation, streamlining the purchasing setup process. The system now supports capturing vendor pricing, discounts, part numbers, and lead times at the time of upload, ensuring that items are immediately purchase-ready with accurate vendor details. *** **Key Enhancements:** * Added new columns in the **Product Upload template**: * Vendor List Price * Vendor Discount * Vendor Part Number * Lead Time (days) * Vendor mapping is automatically created if any of the following vendor-related fields contain values in the upload file: **Vendor List Price, Vendor Discount, Vendor Part Number, or Lead Time (days)**. * **Default Vendor** is mandatory for mapping creation; vendor-related data will only be processed if a valid Default Vendor is provided in the upload. * Ensures seamless integration between uploaded items and the **Item Vendor Mapping Centre** without manual intervention. * Products (and their variants, if applicable) are created upon successful upload of the Product template. * Uploaded vendor pricing and discount values are reflected directly in purchasing transactions (e.g., Purchase Orders). *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Utilities → Data Imports → Upload Products** and download the latest Product Upload template by clicking on **“Download Template.”**
**Step 2:** Populate the template with product details.
**Step 3:** If item-vendor mapping is required, enter values in the vendor-related fields such as **Vendor List Price, Vendor Discount, Vendor Part Number, and Lead Time (days)**. Ensure that a valid **Default Vendor Name** is provided.
**Step 4:** Upload the completed CSV file by clicking **“Upload Products.”**
**Step 5:** Once the upload is processed successfully, the products (and their variants, if applicable) are created in the system.
**Step 6:** If vendor-related fields contain values and a valid **Default Vendor** is provided, the system also automatically creates the item-vendor mapping.
*** ### **Added Default Order Type Field at Vendor Level** **Overview:** This enhancement introduces a **Default Order Type** field at the vendor level. It allows users to define a default order type for each vendor, which is automatically applied when creating Purchase Orders, reducing manual effort and improving consistency. *** **Key Enhancements:** * **Vendor-Level Default Order Type:** A new **Default Order Type** dropdown has been added under the **Other Info** tab in the **Create Vendor page**, allowing users to configure a default value per vendor. * **Automatic Population in Purchase Orders:** When a vendor is selected while creating a Purchase Order, the system automatically fetches and applies the **configured Default Order Type** to the Order Type field in the header. * **Consistency Across Transactions:** The selected Order Type flows through subsequent transactions such as **Item Receipts** and **Bills**, maintaining data consistency. * **Vendor Centre Visibility:** A new **Default Order Type** column has been added to the **Vendor Centre** grid, enabling users to view and track the configured default value for each vendor directly from the listing. * **Data Export Support:** Order Type is included in the **Data Export Centre**, allowing users to export and reuse this information during data imports. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → Purchase → Vendor Section → Vendor Centre**. Double-click on the vendor for whom you want to set the **Default Order Type**.
**Step 2:** Set the **Default Order Type** in the *Other Info* tab for the selected vendor, and update the vendor record.
**Step 3:** Navigate to **Menu → Purchase → Purchase Order → Create Purchase Order**. Fill in the header details and select the required vendor. **Step 4:** The system automatically populates the **Order Type** field in the Purchase Order header based on the vendor’s Default Order Type.
This value is also carried forward to subsequent transactions such as **Item Receipts and Bills**, ensuring consistency across documents. *** ### **Allow Creating Bank Reconcile Rules During Reconciliation** **Overview:** This enhancement updates the existing app configuration to allow users to create **Bank Reconciliation Rules** directly during the reconciliation process. It improves usability by enabling rule creation at the point of transaction entry, reducing manual steps, and improving automation for future matches. *** **Enhancement Added:** * The existing app configuration, available under **Menu** → **App Config** → **Accounting**, has been renamed to **“Allow Creating Bank Reconcile Rules During Reconciliation.”** * Additionally, users can now create Bank Reconciliation Rules **directly from the Journal Entry module**. A new prompt allows users to define rule parameters (such as **Payee**, **Amount**, **Category,** and **Reference**) at the time of saving the Journal Entry.
*** **Functionality:** **When App Config is Enabled:** * During Bank Reconciliation, if **no matching rule is found**, users can proceed to create a Journal Entry * On clicking **Save** in the Journal Entry module, a toggle **“Remember this rule for future?”** is displayed. This pop-up allows users to define rule criteria such as Rule Name, Payee, Amount, Category, and Reference No. * Once saved, the rule is created and stored. The system automatically detects and applies the rule while reconciling the payments. (shown by **“Rule Found”**) *** **When App Config is Disabled:** * No **rule creation pop-up** is shown after saving the **Journal Entry**, and users must manually create reconciliation rules from the **Bank Reconcile Rule Centre**. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → App Config → Accounting** and enable app config **“Allow Creating Bank Reconcile Rules During Reconciliation.”** **Step 2:** Go to the **Reconcile Bank Account** module and select the account whose transactions you want to reconcile.
**Step 3:** Create a **Journal Entry** for the selected transaction by clicking on **Create Journal Entry** from the **Options menu**, and balance the journal entry lines.
**Step 4:** Click **Save**. A pop-up appears prompting you to enable/disable the **“Remember this rule for future?”** toggle.
**Step 5:** Enable the toggle to remember the reconciliation rule for future transactions. Enter the rule details, such as **Rule Name** and required parameters (**Payee, Amount, etc**.), then confirm.
**Step 6:** The rule is saved and can be viewed in the **Bank Reconcile Rule Centre**.
**Step 7:** Going forward, whenever transactions match the defined criteria, a **“Rule Found”** indicator is displayed, allowing you to reconcile the transaction accordingly.
*** ### **Enable Raw Cost & Overhead % in Item** **Overview:** This enhancement introduces a new app configuration that allows users to control the visibility and behavior of **Raw Cost** and **Overhead (%)** fields within the **Item module**. It enhances pricing transparency and flexibility by enabling detailed cost breakdowns and automatic profit calculations across item pricing and multi-currency configurations. *** **Enhancement Added:** * A new app configuration, **“Enable Raw Cost fields and Overhead % in Item,”** has been introduced under **Menu → App Config → General**.
* Additionally, the **Recalculate Standard Unit Price** field has been added to the CSV template in the **Upload Products** module.
* The following fields have been added to the **Create Item page** under the **Primary** tab and in the **Multi Currency Pricing section** of the **Advanced Pricing** tab. * Raw Cost * Overhead(%) * Standard Unit Price * Gross Profit * Gross Profit Margin (%) * Markup (%) These fields are available in **Item Centre**, **Item sub form**, **Upload Items**, **Upload Products**, **Upload Item Prices**, and **Batch Update** in **Item Price Centre.** *** **Functionality:** **When App Config Is Enabled:** * The **Raw Cost** and **Overhead (%)** fields are editable in the **Create Item page** under the **Primary** tab and in the **Multi Currency Pricing** section of the **Advanced Pricing tab**. **When App Config Is Disabled:** * **Raw Cost** and **Overhead (%)** fields are visible but non-editable in the Item module. In this state, Raw Cost defaults to **Standard Unit Cost**, and Overhead (%) is set to **0**. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu → App Config → General** and enable the app config **“Enable Raw Cost fields and Overhead % in Item.”** **Step 2:** Go to the **Item Centre**, then right-click on the item record and select **“Edit in New Window.”**\ Alternatively, you can go to the **Create Item** page to create a new item.
**Step 3:** In the **Primary** tab, enter the **Raw Cost** and **Overhead (%)** values.
**Step 4:** Navigate to the **Advanced Pricing** tab. In the **Multi Currency Pricing** section, click **Add New** to open the **Add New Currency Price** subform, where you can also enter the **Raw Cost** and **Overhead (%)** fields.
**Step 5:** Save the item. The system will calculate and update the pricing fields across all relevant modules. **Step 6:** To update the **Raw Cost** or **Overhead (%)** fields for an existing item, go to the **Item Price Centre**, select the required item, click on the **Options** dropdown, and choose **Batch Update**. Then select the column you want to update and apply the changes.
*** ### **Enhancement to Fixed Asset Fields and Depreciation Calculation Logic** **Overview:** This enhancement introduces additional fields in the **Fixed Asset module** to improve the accuracy and transparency of asset valuation and depreciation tracking. The update separates the **original asset acquisition details** from the **registered asset values used for depreciation calculations**. These changes provide clearer visibility into asset history, improve depreciation accuracy, and ensure better alignment with accounting practices when registering assets that already have depreciation applied. *** **Newly Added Fields:** The following fields have been added to the **Fixed Asset module**: * **Original Purchase Date:** Stores the original purchase date of the asset. * **Original Purchase Cost:** Stores the original purchase cost of the asset. * **Original NBV (Net Book Value):** Represents the current net book value of the asset. * **Accumulated Depreciation Amount:** Represents the depreciation amount accumulated in the current year up to the asset register date.
*** **Enhancement Added:** To better reflect the purpose of the fields during asset registration, the following fields have been renamed: * The **Purchase Date field** has been renamed as **Register Date** * **Purchase Cost** has been renamed as **Register Purchase Cost**
*** **Calculation Logic Changes:** * **Register Purchase Cost:** The **Register Purchase Cost** field is now automatically calculated by the system. * **Formula:** Register Purchase Cost = Original NBV – Accumulated Depreciation Previous Amount * This field is **read-only** and cannot be manually edited. *** **Depreciation Calculation Update:** * All depreciation calculations within the **Fixed Asset module** will now use the **Register Purchase Cost** instead of the original purchase cost. * This ensures that depreciation calculations reflect the **correct asset value at the time of registration**. *** **Key Enhancements** * **Improved Asset Value Tracking**\ The addition of original purchase and depreciation-related fields provides clearer visibility into the asset’s historical acquisition value and its current net book value. * **Accurate Depreciation Calculations**\ Depreciation is now calculated based on **Register Purchase Cost**, ensuring accurate depreciation when assets are registered after partial depreciation has already occurred. * **Better Accounting Transparency**\ Separating original purchase values from registered asset values allows businesses to maintain a clear audit trail for asset valuation and depreciation history. * **Reduced Manual Calculations**\ The system automatically calculates **Register Purchase Cost**, eliminating manual adjustments and reducing the risk of calculation errors. # December 2025 Release {% hint style="warning" %} This is a Custom Release. Feature availability depends on configuration and rollout status. Some features listed above may not be visible in your environment if they are part of a staged or custom deployment. Please contact your support representative to confirm enablement. {% endhint %} ### **Enhanced Batch Update Functionality for Estimate Centre** **Overview:** The **Estimate Centre** serves as a centralized hub for managing all sales estimates, enabling users to efficiently track and update quotation data. To further streamline operations, the **Batch Update functionality** has been enhanced to support bulk updates of custom fields at the **Estimate Header** level. This enhancement eliminates the need to manually edit individual estimates when updating custom field values. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to **Menu** → **Sales** → **Estimate Centre** and select the estimate record(s) you want to update.
**Step 2:** Click on the **Header Level Options** button and select **Batch Update**. A popup will appear displaying the batch update options.
**Step 3:** In the **Column Name** dropdown, select the required **Estimate Header Custom Field**. Enter the desired value in the **Value** field.
**Step 4:** Click on **Update** to apply the changes to all selected estimate records.
*** **Key Enhancements:** * **Improved Efficiency:** Enables bulk updates of custom fields, reducing manual effort and time spent editing individual estimates. * **Better Data Consistency:** Ensures uniformity of custom field values across multiple estimates. * **Scalable Operations:** Supports businesses handling large volumes of estimates by simplifying mass updates. * **Reduced Errors:** Minimizes the risk of inconsistent or missed updates when managing multiple records. *** ### **Line-Level Enhancement: Master Case Qty and Case Qty Columns Added in Transaction Modules** **Overview:** The **Sales Order**, **Estimate**, and **Invoice modules** capture item-level transaction details, including quantities, pricing, and fulfillment status. With this enhancement, two new columns, **Master Case Qty** and **Case Qty,** have been added to the line-level detail grid across the Sales Order, Estimate, and Invoice modules. * **Master Case Qty** is derived from the item configuration and indicates the number of units packed in a single master case. * **Case Qty** is automatically calculated based on the entered item quantity and Master Case Qty, ensuring accurate representation of both full and partial cases required for the transaction. Furthermore, a **Total Case Qty** has been introduced in the footer section, which aggregates the case quantities of all line items, providing a clear and consolidated view of total cases for better operational and logistical planning.
*** **Key Enhancements:** * **Automated Case Calculation:** Case Qty is system-calculated based on item quantity and Master Case Qty, eliminating manual effort. * **Accurate Handling of Partial Cases:** Ensures correct calculation even when quantities do not fully fit into complete cases. * **Improved Packaging Visibility:** Provides clear insight into how ordered quantities translate into case-level packaging. * **Enhanced Operational Planning:** Helps warehouse, shipping, and logistics teams plan packaging and dispatch more efficiently. *** ### **Cancel Sales Order with One Click and Auto Void Linked Records** **Overview:** The **Sales Order module** allows users to manage order lifecycle activities, including cancellation of orders and handling of related transactions such as customer deposits and waves. With this enhancement, users can cancel a Sales Order and automatically handle associated operational records in a single action. This eliminates the need for manually voiding each linked transaction, simplifying the cancellation process and improving operational efficiency. *** **Enhancement Added:** * A new option, **“Cancel Sales Order with One Click,”** has been introduced in the Options dropdown of the Sales Order module. * When this option is used, the system automatically voids linked records such as **Customer Deposits** (**Open**, **Refunded**, or **Partially Refunded**) and Waves in **UnAllocated**, **Allocated**, **Picked**, or **Closed** status as part of the cancellation process.
*** **App Configuration Requirement:** **App Config Name:** Cancel Sales Order with One Click **Configuration Location:** Menu → App Config → General → **Cancel Sales Order with One Click**
*** **Functionality:** **When the App Config is Enabled:** * Users can cancel a Sales Order and automatically void related operational records, such as Customer Deposits and Waves, in a single action. *** **When the App Config is Disabled:** * Users must manually void all linked records before cancelling the Sales Order, following the existing process. *** **How It Works:** **Step 1:** Navigate to Menu → Sales → **Sales Order** and open the required Sales Order.
**Step 2:** Click on the **Options** dropdown and select **Cancel Sales Order with One Click**.
**Step 3:** A confirmation dialog appears informing that all eligible linked records (Customer Deposits and Waves) will be automatically voided. Click **OK** to proceed or **Cancel** to abort the action.
**Step 4:** A **Cancel Reason** dialog is displayed. Select the appropriate **Cancel Reason Code** and enter additional details if required.
**Step 5:** Once the process is complete, the Sales Order status is updated to **Cancelled,** and the system automatically voids all eligible linked records based on defined validation rules.
*** **Impact:** * **Single-Click Cancellation:** Enables users to cancel Sales Orders and handle linked transactions in one action. * **Built-in Validations:** Certain validations are enforced to prevent voiding of deposits or refunds under specific conditions (e.g., processed via credit card, reconciled transactions, or shipped wave lines). * **Controlled Handling of Linked Records:** If a Customer Deposit or Wave is associated with multiple Sales Orders, only the relevant mappings or line items are affected instead of voiding the entire transaction. * **Access-Controlled Execution:** Feature is available only when the required permission and app configuration are enabled, ensuring controlled usage. {% hint style="info" %} The **Cancel Sales Order with One Click** option will be available only when both of the following conditions are met: * The user has the **“One Click Cancel Sales Order”** permission granted through the Access Manager. * The **Cancel Sales Order with One Click** App Configuration is enabled in the system. {% endhint %} # 2024 # December 2024 Release ### Reconcile Bank Account: Added the option to sort the transactions We have introduced a new sorting feature in the Reconcile Bank Account module to enhance your experience in reconciling bank accounts. This enhancement aims to make it easier to navigate and analyze bank reconciliation records, saving time and reducing the likelihood of errors during the reconciliation process. **Feature Update:** 1. **Introduction of Sort By Dropdown:** * A new **Sort By Dropdown** has been added to the **Reconcile Bank Account** module, allowing users to sort records in **ascending** or **descending** order. 2. **Flexible Sorting Options:** * Users can now sort the reconciliation data based on the following fields: * **Date:** Sort transactions by date to quickly identify recent or past activities. * **Amount:** Organize transactions by amount to easily identify large or small transactions. * **Reference Number (Ref No):** Sort transactions by reference number to quickly locate specific transactions. * **Check Number (Check No):** Organize transactions by check number to easily identify and verify transactions.
This enhancement provides a streamlined and customizable view, enabling users to quickly organize data for efficient reconciliation. ### Introducing Product Customization Profile module We have introduced a new module, "Product Customization Profile" in XoroERP. This new feature empowers users to create and manage detailed customization profiles, allowing for a more tailored product experience. By offering various input types such as Logo Upload, Single Select Options, Multi-Select Options, and Notes, users can easily configure and customize their products to meet specific needs. #### Key Features **1. Customization Profiles:**\ Users can create profiles that define specific customization options for products. You can easily manage these profiles, including associating costs that will directly influence product pricing during checkout. **2. Profile Application:**\ Customization profiles can be applied to individual products (base parts) through the Product module or in batches via product/item uploads. After assigning the profile to the products, the customization can then be defined for the item(s) associated with the products during the sales process. * **Sales Order:** A new column, "Customization Info" has been added to the Sales Order module and SO subform, allowing users to view and edit customization options directly. * **B2B:** During the checkout process in the B2B portal, these profiles will be selectable at the SKU/Item level, providing flexibility and ease of use. **3. Checkout and Cost Calculation:** * **Sales Order:** The total cost linked with each customization profile will seamlessly transfer to the VAS cost column in the sales order line item. Any modifications made to customization options within the Sales Order module will trigger an automatic recalculation of the total cost, ensuring all values are up-to-date. * **B2B:** When customization profiles are selected, the total cost of add-ons will be transparently displayed at both the product level and in the cart summary. If multiple profiles are chosen for a single order, each will appear as a separate line in the checkout summary, ensuring clarity in cost breakdown. ### Enhanced Bulk Update Functionality for Selected Line Items In Multiple Modules We have introduced the option to apply changes to selected items at the header level for specific fields, streamlining the management of orders across the platform. This update allows for greater efficiency in managing and updating orders by enabling users to apply changes to multiple selected items simultaneously. #### **Feature Update** The ability to apply changes to *selected* items has been added for specific header-level fields in the following order types: **Sales Orders (SO)** * **To Be Shipped:** Now allows bulk updates to the "To Be Shipped" status for selected items. * **Project/Class:** Now allows bulk assignment of Projects/Classes to selected items. **Purchase Orders (PO)** * **Expected Delivery Date:** Now allows bulk updates to the "Expected Delivery Date" for selected items. * **Expected Ship Date:** Now allows bulk updates to the "Expected Ship Date" for selected items. **Transfer Sales Orders (TSO)** * **Date To Be Shipped:** Now allows bulk updates to the "Date To Be Shipped" for selected items. * **Project/Class:** Now allows bulk assignment of Projects/Classes to selected items. **Transfer Purchase Orders (TPO)** * **Expected Ship Date:** Now allows bulk updates to the "Expected Ship Date" for selected items. * **Expected Delivery Date:** Now allows bulk updates to the "Expected Delivery Date" for selected items. * **Project/Class:** Now allows bulk assignment of Projects/Classes to selected items. #### How It Works To apply the bulk update functionality, follow these steps: 1. Open the specific module and select the item(s) you want to update. 2. At the header level, update the specific field you want to apply the changes to. 3. Click on the "Gear" icon and select "Apply to selected items". 4. The details will be updated for the selected items at the line-level. ### Auto-Generate ASN for Transfer Orders With this release, we have introduced a significant enhancement in the processing of transfer orders. We have added the feature to automatically generate an ASN for the TPO (Transfer Purchase Order) once the items on the TSO (Transfer Sales Order) are shipped. This functionality streamlines the shipping process by automatically generating an Advanced Shipping Notice (ASN) for the quantity shipped on the wave as soon as the wave is shipped for the TSO (Transfer Shipping Order). This enhancement aims to improve efficiency and accuracy in managing shipments. {% hint style="info" %} This is an app config based enhancement {% endhint %} #### Key Features * **New App Config Setting:** A new app config, "**Auto generate ASN in case of TSO**" has been added to enable automatic ASN generation for TSO shipments. When this config is enabled, the system will automatically generate an ASN for the shipped quantity on a wave as soon as the wave is shipped for a TSO.
* **Existing Open ASNs:** If a TPO line already has an open ASN, no new ASN will be created, even if the quantity is updated. This prevents duplicate ASNs. * **Single ASN per TPO Line:** Only one ASN can be generated per TPO line from a corresponding TSO line at any given time. * **New ASN for Updated TSO Lines:** If the quantity on a TSO line is updated and the line is shipped again, a new ASN will only be generated for the corresponding TPO line *if* the previous ASN for that line has been closed. ### Added a new column in BOM subform A new **Description** column has been introduced in the Bill Of Material subform accessed from the BOM Centre. This column has been added in the Costing section of the BOM subform. This column displays the description of each item line, providing better visibility and context for BOM components.
The addition of item descriptions enhances the clarity of BOM details, making it easier for users to interpret the information and make informed decisions. ### Custom Field Support Added for Item Vendor Mapping We have added custom field support for item vendor mapping. This update allows users to define and manage custom fields for item vendor mapping, providing greater flexibility and control over their data. With this update, users can now define and manage custom fields for item vendor mapping, enhancing their ability to capture and track relevant data. **Defining Custom Fields** To define custom fields for item vendor mapping, follow these steps: 1. Navigate to the **Custom Field Definition** module. 2. Select **"Item Vendor Mapping"** from the **"Transaction Type"** dropdown. 3. Define the custom field(s) you want to create for item vendor mapping. 4. Click **"Save"** to apply the changes.
**Entering Custom Field Values** To enter values for the custom fields, follow these steps: 1. Navigate to the **"Custom Field Tab"** in the **Item Vendor Mapping** module. 2. Here, you will find all the custom fields defined for item vendor mapping. 3. Enter the values for the custom fields. 4. Click **"Save"** to apply the changes.
### Added Custom Field Tab in Invoice Credit Memo We have added **custom field support** for the header level in the **Invoice Credit Memo** module. This enhancement enables users to define and manage custom fields for Invoice Credit Memos, improving flexibility and customization. #### Feature Details **1. Custom Fields Tab for Invoice Credit Memo (Header Level):** * A new **Custom Fields Tab** has been introduced in the **Invoice Credit Memo** module at the header level. * Users can now define custom fields for the invoice credit memo tailored to their unique requirements.
2. **Custom Field Definition** The definition of custom fields for Invoice Credit Memos is the same as for Credit Memo, ensuring consistency across the platform. So, users don't have to define the custom fields for invoice credit memo. The custom fields defined for credit memo will apply to invoice credit memo. 2. **Custom Field Mapping** The following mappings have been added for custom fields in Invoice Credit Memos: 1. **Invoice to Invoice Credit Memo**: Custom fields defined for Invoices can be mapped to Invoice Credit Memos, allowing for seamless data transfer. 2. **Customer to Invoice Credit Memo**: Custom fields defined for Customers can be mapped to Invoice Credit Memos, enabling personalized and relevant data capture. * **Priority for Custom Field Mapping** If there are mappings from both Invoice and Customer, the **Custom Field Mapping from Invoice** takes precedence. ### Invoice Detail View Added in B2B Portal We have added "Invoice Detail" view in the B2B portal. This enhancement provides users with a detailed overview of their invoice records, making it easier to track products they have previously purchased and to determine when these products were last purchased. This functionality is designed to improve order management, facilitate quick decision-making, and enhance the overall user experience. #### **How to Access the Invoice Detail View** To access the Invoice Detail View, follow these steps: 1. Log in to the B2B portal. 2. Navigate to **Menu > Invoice**. 3. In the Invoice module, select **"Customer Portal Invoice Detail"** from the **"Type"** dropdown.
### **Enhanced Search Functionality in B2B Portal** We have introduced significant enhancements to the search functionality within the B2B Portal. These updates are designed to simplify the search process for users, making it easier to find products while ensuring accuracy and relevance in search results. **1. Enhanced Search Functionality** The product search feature has been improved to provide greater flexibility when entering search keywords. Users can now: * Search for products even if keywords are entered with **missing special characters**. * Search effectively with **extra spaces** included in the query. * Retrieve results regardless of the **order** of keywords entered. This enhancement means that users no longer need to type exact keywords to successfully search for products, significantly improving the user experience and efficiency. **2. Filter Application with Search** The search results are now further refined by the application of filters. The results returned will be restricted to those that match both the entered keywords and the applied filters, ensuring users receive the most relevant products based on their criteria. ### Upload ASN Receipt: Added the ability to partially close ASN We are pleased to introduce a new enhancement in the **Upload ASN Receipt Template** to improve flexibility and control over ASN management. This enhancement provides greater control by enabling partial closure of ASNs, offering flexibility to manage specific line items efficiently. #### Feature Details * **New Column: `AllowPartialCloseAsn`** * A new column, **`AllowPartialCloseAsn`**, has been added to the **Upload ASN Receipt Template**.
* This column is visible **only** when the app configuration **"Close Selected ASN line(s)"** is enabled.
* **Partial Close ASN Functionality** * Set the value to **"Y"** for specific lines to allow partial closure of the ASN for those lines. * When the user select the **"Receive and Close ASN"** option, the ASN will be partially closed for the lines with "Y" in the "**`AllowPartialCloseAsn`**" column. * The status of the ASN will be updated to **"Partially Closed"**. ### Added "**Season" Column in Data Export Centre** We have added "Season" column to various functionalities in the Data Export Centre. This enhancement is aimed at improving the user's ability to filter and analyze data related to invoices and sales orders. #### Feature Details 1. **Invoice Detail - Data Export Centre** * The "Season" column has been added to the **Invoice Detail** section in the Data Export Centre. This allows users to export invoice details while also capturing the relevant season information. * The "Season" column is now included in the **Advanced Search** functionality, providing users with the ability to filter invoice details based on specific seasons. * The "Season" column is also added to the export file invoice detail enabling seasonal data to be included in exported reports. 2. **Sales Order Detail - Data Export Centre** * The "Season" column, which was already present in the **Advanced Search** for Sales Orders, has now been integrated into the **export file** for Sales Order Details. This will enable users to export vital seasonal data alongside other sales order information. ### Enhanced BOM Deletion for Non-Manufacturable Items This release enhances the behavior of deleting Bills of Materials (BOMs) for items where the "Is Manufacturable" flag for the BOM item is set to false. Previously, deleting a BOM regardless of the manufacturing order (MO) status was possible. This update introduces improved error handling and prevents accidental data loss. **Feature Details** 1. **When "Is Manufacturable" Flag is Set to False:** * The BOM for the item can be deleted **only if**: * There are **no Manufacturing Orders (MOs)** for the item. * Any existing MOs for the item have been **produced** or **disassembled**. * If any MOs associated with the item are in a status other than "Produced" or "Disassembled", a specific error message will be displayed, preventing the deletion and preserving data integrity. This prevents accidental deletion of BOMs linked to active manufacturing processes. 2. **When "Is Manufacturable" Flag is Set to True:** * No changes have been made to the existing functionality. BOM deletion will continue to work as before, without additional validation. 3. **Items with Existing MOs:** * Regardless of the MO status, an **error message** will be displayed if an attempt is made to delete the BOM of an item with active or historical MOs. ### Enhancements to Promise Date Functionality in Sales Order Management We are excited to announce the following updates to improve the handling and visibility of the **Promise Date** in the **Sales Order Centre**: **1. Promise Date in Batch Updates (Sales Order Centre):** * The **Promise Date** field is now included in the **Batch Updates** functionality, allowing users to update it directly for multiple sales orders.
* **Important Note:** For sales orders with the **Order Type** set to **"Transfer"**, the Promise Date will **not** be updated. **2. Promise Date in Upload Sales Order:** * The **Promise Date** field has been added to the **Upload Sales Order** template. Users can batch upload the promise date from here. * Please note that when a CSV file contains multiple records with the same reference number, the Promise Date from the **first record** will be applied to the **Sales Order Header**. **3. Promise Date in Export Files:** * The **Promise Date** field is now included in the export files for both: * **Sales Order Detail** * **Sales Order** These enhancements improve data management, ensure consistency across batch updates and uploads, and provide greater visibility of the Promise Date in export reports. ### **Automated Bank Reconciliation Rule Creation** We have implemented an enhancement to the Bank Reconciliation module that streamlines the process of creating and applying bank reconciliation rules. This update introduces an automatic rule creation feature, improving efficiency and accuracy in managing reconciled transactions. {% hint style="info" %} This is an app config based feature. {% endhint %} #### Feature Details 1. **Auto Create Bank Reconcile Rule**\ \ **New App Config:** A new config, **Auto Create Bank Reconcile Rule**, has been added. When this setting is enabled, the system will automatically create bank reconciliation rules whenever a journal entry is created using the reconcile module.
2. **Conditions for Auto Rule Creation:** \ Rules will be auto-created for **Reconciled Transactions** that meet the following criteria: * Only **one transaction** is present. * A **Match** is found for the transaction. 3. **Auto Application of Created Rules** \ The auto-created rule will be **applied automatically** for subsequent transactions that match the specified conditions, reducing manual effort in repetitive reconciliation tasks. 4. **Creating the Rule** \ To create the rule follow these steps: * Go to the Reconcile Bank Account module and navigate to **Options** > **Journal Entry** of any transaction with a match.
* Clicking on the option will display a "Create Bank Reconcile Rule?" pop-up window, prompting users to select the Bank Reconcile Rule search criteria fields to create the rule.
* The selected field values will automatically align with those in the **Reconciled Transactions**, allowing for precise rule customization. If the selected search criteria(s) have no value, they will be excluded from the Bank Reconcile Rule. * Click "OK" to create the rule. ### Added Alert Prompt for Previously Printed Waves With this release, we have added an alert that notifies users when attempting to print a wave that has been printed before. This enhancement improves user awareness by notifying them when attempting to reprint previously printed waves, without restricting the action. {% hint style="info" %} This is an app config based feature. {% endhint %} A new app configuration setting, **Alert Prompt for Already Printed Wave(s)**, has been added to the system.
When this setting is enabled, a pop-up alert will be displayed if a user attempts to print a wave that has been printed previously. The alert will inform the user that the wave has been printed before, but it will not restrict the user from printing the wave again. ### Introducing Multi-Item Reconciliation We are pleased to announce the introduction of Multi-Item Reconciliation functionality in the Create Item Receipt and Create Bill modules. This enhancement enables users to add multiple reconciliations to an item receipt or bill, streamlining the reconciliation process and improving overall efficiency. 1. **Multi-Item Reconciliation:** * Users can now add multiple reconciliations to an item receipt or bill, allowing for more flexible and accurate tracking of item movements. * To access this feature, complete the initial reconciliation process, then click on the down arrow next to the "Undo Reconciliation" button and select the "Add Reconciliation" option. * This will initiate a new reconciliation process, enabling users to add another item reconciliation.
2. **Reconciliation Details:** * An option has been added to the Item Line to view Reconciliation Details in both Item Receipt and Bill modules. * This feature provides easy access to reconciliation information, allowing users to quickly review and verify item reconciliation data.
3. **Undo Item Line Reconciliation:** * An option to undo item line reconciliation has been introduced in both Item Receipt and Bill modules. * This feature enables users to easily revert a reconciliation if needed, providing more control and flexibility in managing item reconciliations.
### Introducing Batch Upload Funds Transfer module We have added a new upload module in the system, **Batch Uploads Funds Transfer** module. This new functionality streamlines the process of transferring funds between accounts by allowing users to easily upload transfer details using a standardized template. {% hint style="info" %} To upload transfer funds, go to **Menu > Utilities > Data Import > Upload Transfer Funds** {% endhint %} #### How It Works 1. **Download the template** Start by downloading our Funds Transfer template (CSV) file. This file has correct column headings that are required to perform the import operation.
2. **Fill in the template** Open the template and input the required details into the template.
**Upload Transfer Funds Fields**
FieldDescription
**TxnDateEnter the date of the transaction.
**TransferFromAccntNameEnter the name of the account from where funds are being transferred.
**TransferToAccntNameEnter the name of the account to which the funds are being transferred.
**TransferAmountEnter the amount to be transferred.
ExchangeRateEnter the exchange rate, if dealing with foreign currency. If currency of "transfer to" and "transfer from" is same as the home currency, system will consider the exchange rate as 1, regardless of any value provided in the CSV. If exchange rate is not provided in the CSV, it will be automatically fetched from the backend.
MemoThis field allows you enter any additional notes for the transaction.
ImportErrorIf there any errors from an upload, they will be listed in this column.
{% hint style="info" %} Please note:\ \- Column headings marked with double asterisk (\*\*) are mandatory fields. \- All the date fields should be in MM-DD-YYYY format. \- Do not change the column headings provided in the template. These needs to be unchanged for import to work. {% endhint %} After filling in the details, save the file. 3. **Upload the template** After saving the updated file, return to the **Bank Uploads Funds Transfer module**, "**Browse**" and select the updated file.
Click the **"Upload"** button to initiate the upload process for the funds transfer.
### Clickable Header Fields in Quantity Details Subform The Item Inventory Snapshot module has been updated to make it easier to see where your inventory is. The quantity header fields (except for ATS quantities) in the **Quantity Details** subform are now clickable, allowing users to quickly access relevant transaction details.
**How It Works** * In the Item Inventory Snapshot module, click on any quantity value to open the Qty Details Subform. * Within the subform, users can now click on quantity fields in the header section (e.g., "In Picking," "Allocated," "On Hand") to access specific transaction details. * Upon clicking a header field, the system will display a corresponding subform with detailed information. * For example, if you click on the "In Picking" header, the system will present the In Picking Details subform. This subform shows details about the sales orders linked to items that are currently being picked, ensuring you have all necessary transaction details at your fingertips. # November 2024 Release ### Enhancement to ASN Search Centre **Module**: ASN Search Centre\ **Feature Update**: Addition of BOL# and Tracking# Fields We are excited to announce a new enhancement to the ASN (Advanced Shipping Notice) Search Centre in the XoroERP system. **Key Updates**: 1. **BOL# and Tracking# Fields**: * These fields have been added to the ASN Detail screen to provide more comprehensive shipment details. * Users can now view and manage Bill of Lading (BOL) and Tracking numbers directly within the ASN details for enhanced visibility and traceability. 2. **New Columns in Search Field**: * The ASN Search Centre now includes two additional columns in the ASN detail field. * These columns correspond to the newly added BOL# and Tracking# fields, enabling users to search and filter records more effectively.
### New App Config for Allocated Quantity Change on Locked Waves **Module**: App Config **Feature Update**: Added an App Config option to allow updates to allocated quantities on locked waves.
**Details**: * A new **App Config** setting **Allow Operation On Locked Wave** has been introduced to enhance flexibility in managing wave allocations. * When this configuration is enabled, users can update the allocated quantity of items even when the wave is locked. The systems allows you to select from the following actions 1. Void Full Wave 2. Void Wave Line 3. Update Allocated Quantity 4. Spilt Quantity 5. Merge Wave. * This feature ensures better adaptability to changes in inventory or order requirements without needing to unlock the wave. **Configuration Steps**: 1. Navigate to the **App Config** settings in the system. 2. Go to the **Warehouse** tab. 3. Locate the new option "**Allow Operation On Locked Wave"**. 4. Click the edit button to select the options from the dropdown. 5. Click the checkmark in green to update the record successfully. ### Enhancement to the "Generate Variants" Feature in the Product Module **Module**: Product **Feature Update**: Improved functionality for the **Generate Variants** option in the Product module.
**Details**: * **Previous Behavior**: * The "Generate Variants" option was only visible when no variants had been created for a product. * Once variants were generated, this option disappeared, restricting further variant creation. * **New Enhancement**: * If variants already exist for a product, and the product is updated with additional option values, the **Generate Variants** option will now reappear. * This allows users to generate variants for the newly added options while retaining the data of previously generated variants. * The system uses the existing variant data as a reference to generate the new variants seamlessly. **Use Case**: * When creating a product, users can generate variants using the product matrix generation. * With this enhancement, users can add new option values (e.g., new sizes, colors) to the product and generate additional variants without duplicating effort.
### New Entity Dropdown Feature in Bill and Item Receipt Modules **Module**: Expense Management (Bill and Item Receipt) **Feature Update**: Addition of an **Entity** option in the **Expense** tab at various levels.
**Details**:\ This update introduces a new **Entity** dropdown to the **Expense** tab in the **Details** section of **Bill** and **Item Receipt** modules, providing users with enhanced functionality and control over selecting associated entities. #### New Functionalities: 1. **Entity Dropdown**: * A new dropdown menu allows users to select either **Customer** or **Vendor** at the expense level in both the **Bill** and **Item Receipt** modules. * If an entity is not selected, the system will default to using the **Vendor** value in transactions. 2. **Entity Column**: * An **Entity** column has been added to the table at the expense level, enabling users to view and manage entity data directly. 3. **Integration with Centres**: * The **Entity** field has been added to the Centres of both the **Bill** and **Item Receipt** modules for better data consistency and visibility. 4. **Subforms and Transactions**: * The **Entity** field is now available in the subforms for both modules. * It is also integrated into general transactions, ensuring entity details reflect in records seamlessly. 5. **CRUD Operations**: * Full support for **Create**, **Read**, **Update**, and **Delete** operations has been implemented for the new **Entity** field, ensuring flexibility and reliability in managing records. ### New Columns Added to Invoice Payment Centre (Detail View) **Module**: Invoice Payment Centre **Feature Update**: Enhanced visibility with new columns in the **Detail View**. **Details**: The following columns have been added to the **Invoice Payment Centre (Detail View)** to improve data access and reporting capabilities: 1. **Customer Name**: Displays the name of the customer associated with the invoice payment. 2. **Sales Rep Name**: Shows the name of the Sales Representative linked to the transaction. 3. **Sales Rep Code**: Provides the unique code for the Sales Representative. 4. **Payment Date**: Indicates the date on which the payment was made. 5. **Sales Order Number**: Lists the associated Sales Order Number for better reference. ### Enhancement to Default Shipping Terms in Vendor Module **Module**: Vendor Management **Feature Update**: Removal of Restrictions on Default Shipping Terms
**Details**:\ This update enhances the functionality of the **Shipping** tab in the Vendor module by removing restrictions previously applied to the **Default Shipping Terms** field. 1. **Key Changes**: * **Default Shipping Terms** will now remain enabled regardless of the selected default shipping method. * When the **Default Shipping Method** is set to **"Own Truck"**, the selected value in **Default Shipping Terms** will automatically carry forward to the **Purchase Order (PO)**. 2. **Previous Behavior**: * Restrictions on the **Default Shipping Terms** field limited user flexibility. * This enhancement ensures seamless configuration and application of shipping terms in vendor-related transactions. ### Introduction of New Modules for Specifications, Lab Records, Templates, and Catalyst in XoroERP We are excited to announce the addition of several new modules in XoroERP to provide users with comprehensive tools for managing item specifications, lab records, templates, and catalyst profiles. These modules offer a structured approach to handle product details and manufacturing-related records efficiently. These modules are grouped under a single app configuration named **Enable Lab Record Module**, which can be enabled from **General → Enable Lab Record Module**.\ Once the setting is enabled, you can find these modules here : **Manufacturing > Manufacturing Lab Report module.**
*** #### **Overview of New Modules** **1. Item Specification Property / Centre** * **Purpose**: To define and store various property names associated with item specifications. * **Features**: * A single Name field to input the property name. * Allows users to manage all property names in a centralized location for seamless integration into specifications. **2. Item Specification Class / Centre** * **Purpose**: To categorize item specifications into distinct classes. * **Features**: * A single Name field to input the class name. * Provides a way to group similar specifications under a specific class for better organization. **3. Item Specification UOM / Centre** * **Purpose**: To define and manage Units of Measurement (UOM) related to item specifications. * **Features**: * A single Name field to input the UOM name. * Standardizes the measurement units used in specifications. **4. Item Specification Test Method / Centre** * **Purpose**: To define and store test methods applicable to item specifications. * **Features**: * A single Name field to input the test method name. * Ensures consistency in how items are tested and validated. **5. Item Specification / Centre** **Purpose** The **Item Specification / Centre** module is designed to facilitate the creation and management of comprehensive item specifications. This module enables users to seamlessly integrate critical details such as item properties, units of measurement (UOMs), and test methods, ensuring a streamlined and organized approach to specification management. *** **Header Section** The header section provides the foundational fields required for defining item specifications: * **Name**: Input the unique name of the specification. * **Item Specification Class Dropdown**: Select the appropriate class for categorizing the item specification. *** **Detail Section** The detail section offers fields to capture specific attributes of the item specification: * **Item Specification Property Dropdown**: Choose from a list of pre-defined properties relevant to the item. * **Item Specification UOM Dropdown**: Select the appropriate Unit of Measurement for the specification. * **Item Specification Test Method Dropdown**: Define the test method applicable to the specification by selecting from available options. * **Required Value Input Field**: Specify the required value for the item specification, ensuring precise documentation. **Key Features of the Detail Section**: * All fields are mandatory to ensure completeness and accuracy of data. * Fields are editable, allowing for adjustments when necessary. * Built-in validation prevents duplicate entries, maintaining the integrity of the data. * An **Add** button facilitates the seamless addition of entries to the specification table. *** **Centre Section** The Centre section consolidates the information from both the header and detail sections, providing a unified view for efficient management of item specifications. **Features of the Centre Section**: * A search field for quick retrieval of specific specifications. * Tools for **Batch Delete** operations, allowing users to remove multiple records simultaneously. * An **Edit in New Window** feature to modify records in a separate, dedicated interface for better clarity and focus. **6. Item Specification Class Template / Centre** * **Purpose**: To manage templates for item specification classes. * **Header Section**: * Field: **Item Specification Class Dropdown** for selecting the relevant class. * **Detail Section**: * Fields: * **Item Specification Property Dropdown**: Select a property. * **Item Specification UOM Dropdown**: Choose the appropriate UOM. * **Item Specification Test Method Dropdown**: Select a test method. * Features: * Ensures mandatory fields are filled. * Prevents duplicate entries, ensuring one class has a unique template with multiple lines. * An **Add** button allows for adding entries to the table. * **Centre Section**: * Includes both header and detail sections for streamlined management. * Batch Delete and Edit in New Window functionalities available. **7. Catalyst Property Profile / Centre** * **Purpose**: To define and manage catalyst property profiles. * **Features**: * Fields: * A **Name** field (unique) for the profile. * Five fields for Property Names. * Prevents duplicate entries, ensuring each profile is distinct. * Includes Search functionality and options for Batch Delete and Edit in New Window. **8. Catalyst / Centre** * **Purpose**: To manage detailed information about catalysts. * **Features**: * Fields: * A **Name** field (unique). * **Catalyst Property Profile Dropdown** to link a profile. * Five fields for Property Values. * Search functionality and options for Batch Delete and Edit in New Window included. **9.** [**Manufacturing Lab Record / Centre**](/xoroerp-1/manufacturing/manufacturing-lab-report/manufacturing-lab-record) * **Purpose**: To manage lab records for manufacturing operations with detailed specifications and catalyst usage. * **Header Section**: * Fields: * MO Number Dropdown, Lab Record Number, Item Specification Dropdown, Catalyst Dropdown. * Five Property Values based on Catalyst (editable). * Manufacturing Date and Expiry Date (with validation). * Shelf Note and Statement Note (stored as inputs initially, then as dropdowns). * Flags: **Shelf Life Show on Report** and **Statement Note Show on Report**. * **Record Lines Section**: * Fields: * **Item Specification Property Dropdown**, **Item Specification UOM Dropdown**, **Item Specification Test Method Dropdown**, Required Value Input, Actual Value Input. * Features: * An **Add** button to create new entries. * Prevents duplicate entries to maintain accuracy. ### **New Dropdown in Sales Order Detail**: XoroERP has introduced significant enhancements to the **Sales Order Detail** and **Manufacturing Order (MO) Centre**, aimed at streamlining operations and ensuring seamless integration with the **Item Specification / Centre** module. These updates enable better management and traceability of specifications throughout the sales and manufacturing processes. * A dropdown field has been added to the **Add Item** tab in Sales Orders, allowing users to assign item specifications to sales order line items. * The dropdown dynamically pulls its values from the **Item Specification / Centre** module (using the **Name** field). * The dropdown is editable at the line-item level, providing flexibility to modify specifications for individual items within the sales order. 1. **New Column in Sales Order Centre**: * A new **Item Specification** column has been introduced in the **Sales Order Centre** details.
* This column displays the assigned specifications for each line item, ensuring visibility and traceability of specifications directly from the Sales Order Centre. 2. **Specification Flow to Manufacturing Order Creation**: * When a Manufacturing Order is created from a Sales Order (via **Options → Copy → Create Manufacturing Order**), the assigned **Item Specification** from the sales order line is automatically passed to the Manufacturing Order. * This ensures that specifications tied to a sales order are carried forward to the manufacturing stage without manual intervention. 3. **Integration with Manufacturing Lab Record Creation**: * In the **Manufacturing Order Centre**, users can now create a **Manufacturing Lab Record** for a selected MO by either right-clicking or using the options menu. * The system auto-populates the Lab Record module with the **MO Number** and the associated **Item Specification** from the selected Manufacturing Order. * If a Lab Record already exists for the selected MO Number, it opens in edit mode for updates; otherwise, a new record is created, maintaining smooth and efficient record management. **Link to the Item Specification Module** These enhancements are closely tied to the **Item Specification / Centre** module: * The dropdown in Sales Order Details fetches values from the **Name** field in the **Item Specification / Centre** module, ensuring consistency and standardization. * The automated population of specifications in Manufacturing Orders and Lab Records relies on the centralized data management provided by the **Item Specification / Centre** module. * The enhancements strengthen the use case for the **Item Specification / Centre** module by extending its functionality into Sales and Manufacturing workflows, creating an interconnected ecosystem. *** **How to Use These Enhancements** 1. **Assign Specifications in Sales Orders**: * Navigate to the **Add Item** tab in a Sales Order. * Use the **Item Specification** dropdown to assign a specification to the line item. 2. **Monitor Specifications in Sales Order Centre**: * View assigned specifications directly in the **Item Specification** column of the Sales Order Centre. 3. **Create Manufacturing Orders with Specifications**: * From the Sales Order, go to **Options → Copy → Create Manufacturing Order**. * The assigned specifications will automatically carry over to the Manufacturing Order. 4. **Generate Manufacturing Lab Records**: * In the **Manufacturing Order Centre**, right-click or use the options menu to create a Lab Record. * The Lab Record will auto-populate with the MO Number and its associated specifications, ready for review or editing. #### **New Modules and Enhancements in XoroERP – Introducing Specifications, Lab Records, and Catalyst Management** XoroERP is excited to announce the release of new modules and key enhancements designed to enable comprehensive management of item specifications, lab records, templates, and catalyst profiles. These additions and updates are aimed at streamlining workflows, enhancing traceability, and improving efficiency across manufacturing and sales operations. *** #### **Module Overview** All newly introduced modules are grouped under a single app configuration, **Enable Lab Record Module**, which can be accessed via **General → Enable Lab Record Module**. Activating this configuration provides access to the following modules: **Specification Modules** 1. **Item Specification Property / Centre** * Purpose: To store and manage property names. * Features: Includes a **Name** field to define and manage individual properties. 2. **Item Specification Class / Centre** * Purpose: To categorize item specifications into classes. * Features: Includes a **Name** field to assign class names. 3. **Item Specification UOM / Centre** * Purpose: To manage units of measurement (UOM) specific to item specifications. * Features: Includes a **Name** field to define UOM names. 4. **Item Specification Test Method / Centre** * Purpose: To document test methods associated with item specifications. * Features: Includes a **Name** field to define test methods. 5. **Item Specification / Centre** * Purpose: To manage detailed item specifications by integrating properties, UOMs, and test methods. * **Header Section**: * Fields: **Name** and **Item Specification Class Dropdown**. * **Detail Section**: * Fields: * **Item Specification Property Dropdown** * **Item Specification UOM Dropdown** * **Item Specification Test Method Dropdown** * **Required Value Input Field** * Features: * All fields are mandatory and editable. * Duplicate entries are prevented to ensure data integrity. * Entries can be added to the table via an **Add** button. * **Centre Section**: * Combines header and detail sections. * Includes functionalities for **Batch Delete** and **Edit in New Window**. 6. **Item Specification Class Template / Centre** * Purpose: To create reusable templates for item specification classes. * **Header Section**: * Fields: **Item Specification Class Dropdown**. * **Detail Section**: * Fields: * **Item Specification Property Dropdown** * **Item Specification UOM Dropdown** * **Item Specification Test Method Dropdown** * Features: * Ensures no duplicate templates are saved. * Allows one class template per class, with multiple detail lines. * **Centre Section**: * Combines header and detail sections. * Includes **Class Search**, **Batch Delete**, and **Edit in New Window** functionalities. **Catalyst Management Modules** 7. **Catalyst Property Profile / Centre** * Purpose: To define catalyst properties. * Features: * Fields: * **Name** (must be unique). * Five fields for property names. * Includes search functionality and options for **Batch Delete** and **Edit in New Window**. 8. **Catalyst / Centre** * Purpose: To manage catalysts and their properties. * Features: * Fields: * **Name** (must be unique). * **Catalyst Property Profile Dropdown**. * Five fields for property values. * Includes search functionality and options for **Batch Delete** and **Edit in New Window**. **Lab Record Module** 9. **Manufacturing Lab Record / Centre** * Purpose: To manage lab records tied to manufacturing operations. * **Header Section**: * Fields: * **MO Number Dropdown** * **Lab Record Number** * **Item Specification Dropdown** * **Catalyst Dropdown** * Five property value inputs (editable based on catalyst selection). * **Manufacturing Date** and **Expiry Date** * **Shelf Note** and **Statement Note** * Flags for **Shelf Life Show on Report** and **Statement Note Show on Report**. * **Detail Section**: * Fields: * **Item Specification Property Dropdown** * **Item Specification UOM Dropdown** * **Item Specification Test Method Dropdown** * **Required Value Input Field** * **Actual Value Input Field** * Features: All fields are mandatory and editable, with duplicate entries prevented. * **Centre Section**: * Includes search functionality for **Lab Record Number**. * Options: **Batch Delete**, **Edit in New Window**, and **Print** (reporting in progress). *** ### **Enhancements Linked to the New Modules** 1. **Sales Order Detail Integration**: * A dropdown has been added to the **Add Item** tab in Sales Orders to assign item specifications at the line-item level. * Values are fetched dynamically from the **Item Specification / Centre** module. * A new **Item Specification** column has been introduced in the Sales Order Centre for improved visibility. 2. **Seamless Specification Flow to Manufacturing Orders**: * Assigned specifications in Sales Orders are automatically carried over when creating Manufacturing Orders via **Options → Copy → Create Manufacturing Order**. 3. **Lab Record Creation for Manufacturing Orders**: * Users can create a **Manufacturing Lab Record** for a selected MO via right-click or the options menu in the MO Centre. * The **MO Number** and **Item Specification** are auto-populated in the Lab Record module. # October 2024 Release ### Last Landed Cost Per Store Added in Item Subform We have introduced a new column, **Last Landed Cost Per Store** in the item subform accessed from the Item Centre. This field displays the unit cost of the item as recorded in the most recent item receipt or bill, providing users with quick access to the latest landed cost information for each store. This enhancement supports better cost tracking and financial visibility at the store level, allowing for more informed decision-making in inventory and pricing management.
### Enhancements in Pack and Ship Module for International Shipments We have introduced some enhancements to the Pack and Ship module, focusing on improving the handling of international shipments. These enhancements streamline the process for international shipments and enhance printing capabilities. #### Key Feature of the enhancement 1. **New App Configurations for Default Values in International Shipments** We have added the following three new app configs under the warehouse tab of the App Configs.
* **International Shipment Default For Contents:** This config allows users to set the default shipping content type for all the newly created international shipments in the pack and ship module. * **International Shipment Default For Non Delivery Return:** This config allows users to set the default Non Delivery Return for all the newly created international shipments in the pack and ship module. * **International Shipment Default For Delivery Duty Paid:** This config allows users to set the default Value for DDP (Delivery Duty Paid) for all the newly created international shipments in the pack and ship module. These values will be reflected in the Prepare Shipment section when users select the "Freight" option in the Pack & Ship module and the International Shipment option is enabled.
2. **Label Printing for International Shipments** Now, when creating a label for international shipments, the label will automatically be added to the print queue if the Xoro Print Service is enabled. This improvement simplifies the label management process, reducing manual steps and supporting a smoother shipping workflow. ### Duplicate Item Alert in Sales Order A new **info alert** feature has been added to the **Sales Order** module to notify users whenever duplicate items are present in a sales order. This alert is displayed as a div at the top of the screen and specifically identifies items that have multiple entries within the sales order.
The alert is triggered in real-time as users interact with the sales order: * **When a duplicate item is added,** the alert appears, highlighting the issue. * **When duplicate items are removed,** the alert is automatically cleared. This feature ensures users are immediately informed of duplicate entries, enabling them to address potential issues promptly. By providing real-time notifications, it helps maintain clean and accurate sales orders while reducing the time and effort needed to manually review and identify duplicates. This ultimately improves workflow efficiency and minimizes errors in order management. ### Multiple columns added to Pack & Ship Freight module We have introduced new columns in the **Pack & Ship Freight Module** to provide enhanced shipment detail visibility. This enhancement improves shipment transparency, particularly for international shipping, by providing critical customs and pricing information directly within the module. #### Feature Details We have added the following columns to the **Pack & Cartonize** section: * **HS Code**: Displays the Harmonized System Code associated with the items in the carton. * **Custom Description**: Provides a detailed description of the items for customs purposes. * **Unit Price**: Shows the per-unit price of the items in the carton. * **Country of Origin**: Indicates the origin country of the items being shipped. #### How It Works: * Navigate to the **Pack & Ship Module** and click on the freight icon to view shipment details.
* In the **Pack & Cartonize** section, expand the carton details by clicking the **"+" symbol**.
* The newly added columns will now appear, offering a comprehensive view of item-level shipment data.
### Account Sorting in the Account Register Module We have implemented a new sorting mechanism in the **Account Register** module to streamline navigation and simplify account selection. This update ensures that accounts are displayed in a logical and organized order in the **Account Name** dropdown, making it easier for users to find the desired account. #### Account Sorting * Accounts are grouped by **account type** for better organization. * Within each account type, accounts are sorted as below: * **Accounts without GL codes** appear first and are listed in ascending order by **Account Name**. * **Accounts with GL codes** follow, sorted in ascending order by their **GL Code**.
### PO number made clickable in ASN subform The **ASN Centre** has been enhanced to improve navigation and access to purchase order details. The PO# column in the ASN Subform is now clickable. Users can click on the Purchase Order Number to directly open the corresponding Purchase Order Subform for detailed information.
### **Enhanced Email Templates with New Placeholders** We have enhanced the **Email Template Configuration** module with the addition of three new placeholders to improve the personalization of your email communications. #### **New Placeholders Added** The following placeholders have been introduced for use in the email templates: 1. **Brand Name** - Insert the name of the brand associated with the order. 2. **Presentation Code** - Include the specific presentation code relevant to the order. 3. **Order Type** - Specify the type of order placed (e.g., standard, rush, special). **Affected Email Templates** These new placeholders can be utilized in the following email templates: * **Order Placed Confirmation Email In B2B For Customer** * **Order Placed Confirmation Email In B2B For Customer For Sales Rep** **How to Use** Users can easily incorporate these placeholders into their email templates by selecting them from the **"Select Placeholder"** dropdown field within the Email Template Configuration module.
## XoroWMS Enhancements ### Location Suggestions in User-Directed 'Putaway by Item' We’ve enhanced the *Putaway by Item* process with a **location suggestions** feature to simplify and accelerate the putaway workflow. This enhancement streamlines the putaway process by providing users with a list of suggested locations where an item can be put away. The feature is designed to reduce the time spent searching for locations, minimize potential errors, and improve the overall putaway experience. #### How does it work? To access the location suggestions feature, follow these steps: * Begin the putaway process and select the **"User Directed"** process.
* Choose the Putaway by Item option.
* Fill in the required fields for LPN, Item, and Quality details, and click "Accept". * The system will prompt you to enter the Putaway Location. * On the *Putaway Location* prompt, a new **"Hamburger"** icon now appears beside the location field. * Clicking on the icon will trigger a popup displaying a table of suggested locations where the item can be put away. * The first location from the list will be displayed at the top of the Putaway Location field, offering a recommended starting point. * Users can click on any row in the pop-up table to select a location, which will then be populated in the Putaway Location field. ### Added Order# Column in LPN Contents Table and Order# Detail List Popup The **Packing** module in XoroWMS has been enhanced to improve order management during the packing process. With this release, we have added an **Order# column** in both the LPN Contents table and the Order# Detail List popup. This enhances the packing process by prominently displaying the Order# for OLPNs associated with multiple orders, offering a more intuitive and efficient way to select the correct order, thereby reducing errors and saving time. #### **Key Enhancements:** 1. **New Order# Column in LPN Contents Table:** * A new **Order#** column has been added to the **LPN Contents** table (displayed on the right section of the screen). * This column is visible only if the entered **OLPN#** is associated with multiple orders. 2. **Order# Detail List Popup:** * When users input an **OLPN** linked to multiple orders, an **Order# Detail List** popup is generated. This popup provides users with a list of associated orders, allowing them to easily select the order that they need to pack. * Users can now view the newly added **Order#** column in this popup. This provides clear visibility of each associated order, further simplifying the order selection process. # September 2024 Release 2.0 ### Sales Order Centre: **Combined Deposit Payment Link Generation for Multiple Sales Orders** The "Take Deposit" feature in the Sales Order Centre has been enhanced to allow users to generate a single payment link for multiple sales orders from the same customer. Previously, only one payment link could be generated per order. This enhancement provides more flexibility in managing deposits for customers with multiple orders, streamlining the payment process. {% hint style="info" %} This is an App Config-based enhancement. {% endhint %} A new configuration option, "Send or generate a single payment link for multiple sales orders," has been added under the Sales tab in App Config. This config must be enabled to use the multi-order link functionality. #### How does it work? * Enable the "Send or generate a single payment link for multiple sales orders" app config.
* In the Sales Order Centre, select multiple orders for the same customer and go to *Options > Take Deposit > Generate Pay Deposit Link*.
* In the Generate Deposit Link pop-up, check the box next to "Generate single link for multiple orders" and click OK to continue.
* A combined link for deposit payment will be generated for all the selected orders.
#### Key Features 1. **Link Visibility and Data:** * The combined link will display the Order Numbers for all included orders in a comma-separated list under the Ref# column in the pop-up message.
* The payment page will also display the Order Numbers and Customer POs in a comma-separated list.
* The report will include data for all combined orders in a single PDF file. 2. **Amount and Breakdown:** * The total amount displayed on the payment page will be the sum of all deposit amounts for the combined orders. * Users will not be able to change the amount on the payment page. * A table will be included (only for combined links) to break down the deposit amount for each individual order.
3. **Deposit Allocation:** * Payments made through the combined link will be allocated correctly to each individual order and reflected on their respective SO pages. 4. **Sales Order Centre Updates:** * A new column **"Deposit Links Combined?"** has been added to the Sales Order Centre. This column will display a checkmark for all orders included in a combined deposit link.\
5. **Combined Link Management:** * If a user tries to create a single link for one or more or all deposits in a combined group, a new link will be generated for the deposit payment and every deposit link in the combined group will turn into a single link deposit. * If a user tries to create a new combined group but chooses one deposit from another combined group, then the new combined group will be formed, and the remaining deposits in the old combined group will turn into single-link deposits. {% hint style="info" %} **Please Note:** Although each order will have a unique link in the *Deposit Links* column in the SO Centre , they will lead to the same payment page if part of a combined group. {% endhint %} ### Added Vendor Bill# and Date Columns in Item Reconciliation Process We have added two new columns, **"Vendor Bill#"** and **"Date"**, to the Item Reconciliation process, improving the workflow for generating Expense Bills or creating liabilities during reconciliation. These new columns provide enhanced visibility and control over vendor billing information, making the reconciliation process more streamlined. When performing reconciliation, if you uncheck the **"Add to Vendor Bill?"** option, and proceed to create an Expense Bill or generate a liability by entering the Accrual Account and Vendor details, the **"Vendor Bill#"** and **"Date"** columns will now appear on the **"Select Accrual Account & Vendor"** screen.
* **Vendor Bill#:** This field allows users to input the unique identification number assigned to the vendor’s bill. It ensures that each vendor bill can be easily tracked and referenced during reconciliation. * **Date:** This field lets users enter both the bill date and receipt date for the associated expense bill. It's important to note that the date entered here must be earlier than the parent bill's Receipt Date (for Expense Bills) or Item Receipt Date (for Item Receipts). This rule ensures that the reconciliation follows the proper transaction sequence, maintaining your records' accuracy and integrity. #### Handling Duplicate Vendor Bill Numbers Users can enter duplicate Vendor Bill# for the same vendor if the "Allow duplicate Vendor Bill Numbers in Bill" app configuration is enabled. This enhances flexibility for users who may receive multiple bills with the same identification number from the supplier. ### Enhanced ASN Splitting: Added the ability to move selected item quantity We have introduced the ability to specify the quantity of items to move when splitting an ASN and transferring those items to a new ASN. This enhancement adds flexibility in managing item transfers within the Receive ASN module. #### How it works 1. **Select an ASN:** Navigate to the Receive ASN module and choose the ASN you want to split.
2. **Access the "Move Selected Lines to a New ASN" option:** Select the ASN lines you want to move and go to the Options menu and select "Move Selected Lines to a New ASN".
3. **Review the "Move ASN Lines" window:** A new window will appear, displaying the details of the selected ASN, including the store and items.
4. **Specify the quantity to move:** In the "Qty to Move" column, enter the desired quantity of each item you want to transfer to the new ASN.
5. **Confirm and create the new ASN:** Once you've defined the quantities, click "Move ASN" to confirm the changes, and the system will generate a new ASN with the specified items and quantities.
### Credit Card Decline Notification via Email A new feature has been introduced to notify users via email when a credit card transaction is declined. This enhancement ensures timely communication, allowing users to address declined payments promptly. {% hint style="info" %} This is an App Config-based enhancement. {% endhint %} Users will now receive an email notification whenever a credit card transaction is declined. This provides immediate awareness of payment issues. A new app configuration, **"Credit card declined - additional emails"**, has been added. In this app config, users can specify additional email addresses that should also receive notifications in case of a card decline. When a credit card is declined, an email will be sent to all the listed recipients, ensuring that the right personnel are informed. ### Added the ability to add tax discount to the payment term The Payment Term module now offers greater flexibility in calculating discounts. A new toggle button has been added, allowing users to choose whether the discount provided as per the payment term should be calculated **including** or **excluding** tax.
**Functionality:** * **Toggle ON:** Discount is calculated on the total amount, which includes both the original amount and the tax. * **Toggle OFF:** Discount is calculated only on the original amount, excluding the tax. This enhancement provides increased accuracy in discount calculations, and enhanced control and flexibility for businesses to manage their payment terms. ### **Enhanced Purchase Order (PO) Functionality with Newly Added Detail-Level Fields** We are pleased to introduce a significant update to the XoroERP system, bringing new flexibility and control to the Purchase Order (PO) module. To further streamline the procurement process and ensure consistency across modules, we have added three new columns at the PO detail level: 1. **Season** 2. **Item Category** 3. **Item Group** #### What’s New? These columns, which were previously mapped only to Sales Order (SO) Detail Items, are now available at the detail level of the Purchase Order (PO) as well. By introducing this enhancement, you can now track and manage these item attributes directly within your purchase orders, enabling more efficient workflows and better inventory management. #### Feature Details: 1. **Season** – This field helps you categorize products by their seasonal relevance, such as Spring, Summer, Fall, or Winter. It ensures that seasonal products are easily traceable through both the sales and purchasing processes, allowing for better forecasting, planning, and management of inventory that is time-sensitive. 2. **Item Category** – By mapping the Item Category at the PO level, users can now organize and group items based on predefined categories. This provides a structured way to manage products and enhances reporting capabilities, making it easier to generate analytics around different product categories, and further improving purchasing strategies. 3. **Item Group** – The Item Group column helps you classify products into broader groups for better organization. This field offers increased flexibility in tracking item group performance and makes reporting more consistent across both the PO and SO modules, facilitating better coordination between sales and purchasing teams. #### Benefits of the Update: * **Enhanced Consistency Across Modules**: By having the same fields in both Sales Orders and Purchase Orders, users can maintain uniformity in data handling and reporting, reducing the chances of errors and discrepancies. * **Improved Reporting and Analytics**: These newly added fields allow for more detailed and organized reports, which will help businesses track item-level details more effectively, offering insights for better decision-making. * **Streamlined Procurement Process**: With Season, Item Category, and Item Group now part of the PO detail level, managing procurement becomes more intuitive, leading to more efficient workflows and reduced manual data entry. ### Introducing Vendor Prepayment Receipt Email Confirmation We have introduced the ability to send vendor prepayment receipt confirmation via email. This enhancement is designed to streamline communication with vendors and improve the overall efficiency of your prepayment processes. With this enhancement, a payment receipt confirmation email will be sent to the vendor whenever the prepayment is made by the vendor. Additionally, any update made to the vendor prepayment will trigger an email to the vendor. **Key Features:** 1. **Vendor Prepayment Receipt Entity in Email Templates** A new entity, "**Vendor Prepayment Receipt**," has been added to the email template system. This allows users to define the email details (email subject, body, cc receipts) and make the process automated.
2. **Targeted Email Delivery** When a Vendor Prepayment is made, an email notification is automatically sent to the vendor's **Billing Email Address**. If the Billing Email is empty or unavailable, the email is sent to the vendor's **Main Email Address** instead. ### ACH Payments (Direct Debit Payment Service) Support Added in B2B We have added the support for direct debit payment services in B2B. This update enables businesses to offer direct debit payment services to their customers, further simplifying the checkout process and reducing the complexity of payment transactions. #### Key Features: 1. **Direct Debit Payment Services**\ A new setting, "Use Direct Debit Payment Services," has been added to the **Other Attributes** tab in the Presentation Centre. When this option is checked, the Direct Debit payment method will appear on the checkout screen, allowing customers to process ACH payments seamlessly.
2. **Direct Debit Payment Option**\ To process the ACH payments, Direct Debit option has been added to the B2B checkout page to take the advance payment required for placing the order. As you select this option, the system will initiate you to select the direct debit service and account. \ With this enhancement, we have integrated Fuze (i3 Verticals) Payments and GoCardless direct debit payment options with B2B to make payments easier for customers. Select the service and account and click "Confirm".
3. **Automatic Disabling of Other Payment Services**\ If ACH is enabled for a B2B presentation, the following options will be automatically disabled in the Presentation Centre: * "Use Default Payment Service" * "Payment Service" option {% hint style="info" %} Please note that this feature will only function for presentations where the **Payment Required** amount is greater than zero. {% endhint %} ### Introducing Activity Tracking Data Centre We have introduced a new module named "Activity Tracking Data Centre" in XoroERP. This new module is designed to provide complete visibility and auditability of changes made across all modules within the system. With this enhancement, users can track specific modifications, ensuring greater accountability and control over ERP activities. The **Activity Tracking Data Centre** module captures and records every significant change made within XoroERP, detailing the modifications with precision. Whether it's an update to a record or a field change, this module allows users to monitor all system interactions in real-time, ensuring a robust audit trail.
#### Key Features: 1. **Comprehensive Tracking Across Modules**: This module monitors and logs activities performed in all modules of XoroERP. It captures every field update, showing both the old and new values, allowing for a clear understanding of changes. This ensures that no change goes unnoticed, enhancing data integrity and transparency. 2. **Detailed Fields Captured**: Each tracked activity is logged with the following details: * **Txn Type**: Type of transaction that was modified. * **Txn Ref#**: Reference number associated with the transaction. * **Field Name**: The specific field within the module that was updated. * **Old Value**: The original value before the update. * **New Value**: The value after the update. * **Line Identifier**: Identifies the specific line item affected (if applicable). * **Operation Type**: The type of operation performed, such as create, update, or delete. * **Modified Datetime**: The exact date and time when the modification occurred. * **Modified By**: The user who made the change. * **Activity Tracking ID**: A unique identifier for each tracked activity. 3. **Access Control via Access Manager**: To ensure the module is available only to authorized users, **Admins** can grant or restrict access to the **Activity Tracking Data Centre** using the Access Manager. This provides flexibility and security, ensuring only relevant personnel have access to sensitive tracking information. 4. **"Show Activity" Option on Create Pages**: Every module in XoroERP now includes a **"Show Activity In"** option on its Create page. When this option is selected, users are automatically redirected to the **Activity Tracking Data Centre**. The module will display the activity data corresponding to the selected record, offering quick access to the relevant changes.
### Upload Bills: Added Project/Class Column We have introduced an enhancement to the **Upload Bill Template** in XoroERP, aimed at improving project classification and error validation during bill uploads. The enhancement involves adding a new **'ProjectClassName'** column in the bill template and a corresponding **Project Class** dropdown in the **Bill File Preview**, providing greater flexibility and control in managing project-related billing data. #### Feature Details 1. **Addition of the 'ProjectClassName' Column**: * A new column titled **'ProjectClassName'** has been introduced in the **Upload Bill Template**. This allows users to associate bills with specific project classes directly through the template, ensuring better categorization and tracking of bills according to projects.
2. **Project Class Dropdown in Bill File Preview**: * After uploading the bill template, users will now see a **Project Class** dropdown in the **Bill File Preview** screen. This dropdown auto-populates with the valid project class options from the uploaded data.
* This feature allows users to review and confirm the uploaded project class details before finalizing the upload, ensuring accuracy and reducing potential errors. 3. **Error Handling**: * If any record in the uploaded CSV file contains an invalid or unrecognized **ProjectClassName**, an error alert will be triggered, displaying a message that outlines which record(s) contains the error.
* This real-time error validation ensures that users can correct invalid project class entries before proceeding with the upload, thereby preventing faulty data from entering the system. ### Addition of Wave Details in Invoice Centre Subform We have introduced that adds **Wave Details** to the **Invoice Centre** **Subform**. This update brings improved visibility and traceability of wave-related information for each invoice. The **History Tab** within the **Invoice Subform** now includes detailed information about the **Wave** associated with the invoice. This allows users to track which wave the invoice is connected to, providing greater transparency in the invoicing process.
### Enhanced Sales Order Cancellation: Auto Removal of PO Linking We have introduced an enhancement to our sales order cancellation process, aimed at streamlining the workflow and improving user efficiency. This update introduces a new feature that allows for the automatic removal of linking with Purchase Orders (PO) when canceling a sales order. When users cancel a sales order from the Sales Order module and Sales Order Centre, a new **Auto Remove Linking** toggle has been added to the **Cancel** confirmation pop up.
If this option is enabled, the system will automatically remove all the linked POs to the sales order. *Please note: If the app configuration setting **"Restrict SO Cancellation, if SO is linked with PO"** is enabled, the sales order cannot be canceled if it is linked to a PO. Therefore, in this case, the auto-remove linking toggle will not be visible, as the system will prevent any cancellation action.* ### Enhancements to Custom Fields in Transfer Purchase Order We have introduced several enhancements to the **Transfer Purchase Order (TPO)** functionality in XoroERP, focusing on custom fields management at the header level. These updates provide users with greater flexibility in handling custom fields during the TPO lifecycle, including updates and deletions. #### Key Features: 1. **Addition of Header Level Custom Fields**: * Users can now define and manage **custom fields** at the **header level** of a **Transfer Purchase Order**. This allows for more detailed customization and tracking of TPOs with specific business needs or project requirements.\
2. **Update Custom Fields After Saving TPO**: * After saving a Transfer Purchase Order, users now have the ability to **update custom fields**. This ensures that any necessary modifications or additional information can be added post-save, providing better flexibility in managing TPO data.\
3. **Deletion of Custom Field Values Upon Voiding TPO**: * When a **Transfer Purchase Order** is voided after being saved, the system now supports the **deletion of custom field values** associated with the TPO. This ensures that unnecessary custom data is automatically cleaned up upon cancellation. 4. **Enhancements in the Purchase Order Centre**: * **Autofill Custom Field Values**: When users click **Edit in New Window** or double-click on a row within the **Transfer Purchase Order** in the **Purchase Order Centre**, the **header level custom fields** will now autofill with their corresponding values. This allows for seamless review and editing of custom fields. * **Batch Deletion of Custom Field Values**: Users can now perform a **batch deletion** of custom field values when voiding multiple Transfer Purchase Orders at once. By selecting multiple rows and clicking the **Void** button, all custom fields associated with those TPOs will be deleted in one action. ### Added new placeholders to Order Placed Confirmation Email in B2B We have introduced an enhancement to the **Order Placed Confirmation Email** functionality (for both Customers and Sales Rep) in the B2B portal, improving the communication process for both customers and sales representatives. #### Key Features: 1. **Brand Placeholder**: * The confirmation email now includes a **brand placeholder**, allowing the brand name associated with the order to be dynamically inserted into the email. This helps provide clarity and ensures that the recipient is aware of the specific brand tied to their purchase.
2. **Presentation Code Placeholder**: * A **presentation code placeholder** has been added to the email template. This code represents the format or structure associated with the order, providing additional details that enhance the order summary for the recipient.
3. **Order Type Placeholder**: * The **order type placeholder** has been introduced, enabling the email to specify the type of order placed. This helps both the customer and sales rep easily identify the nature of the order at a glance.
### Added the ability to Auto-Update of Sales Order Ship Date Based on Linked Purchase Order Delivery Date We have added the ability to update the ship date of the sales order based on the delivery date of the purchase order linked to the sales order. When a purchase order is linked to the sales order, and the delivery date is updated at the item level on the purchase order, the ship date at the item level of the corresponding sales order is updated. #### Key Features 1. **Auto-Update of Sales Order Ship Date** * When a **Purchase Order** is linked to a **Sales Order**, and the delivery date is updated at the item level on the purchase order, the **ship date at the item level** of the corresponding sales order will now automatically update to match the new delivery date. * This ensures synchronization between the sales order and the purchase order, reducing manual adjustments and potential errors in shipment scheduling. 2. **Notification Management** Two new app configurations have been added to enhance notification management for this process: * **Update SO Ship Date Notification - Additional Emails**: This app config allows you to add comma-separated email addresses (e.g., , ) for internal users who should receive a notification when the sales order ship date is updated. Apart from the customer, additional email recipients will be notified of the ship date change.
* **Update SO Ship Date Notification Type**: This app config allows you to select the **notification types** (email watchers and/or internal notification) for sending a comment notification to the users. If **internal notification** is selected, users will receive a notification directly within the system.
### Now Auto Apply Vendor Prepayment on Linked PO Bill We have introduced an update to streamline vendor payment processes, reducing manual errors and increasing efficiency. This enhancement allows for the automatic application of vendor prepayment to bills linked to the corresponding PO. {% hint style="info" %} This is an app config-based enhancement. {% endhint %} When a bill is created that is associated with a Purchase Order (PO) which has a recorded vendor prepayment, the system will automatically utilize that prepayment to pay the bill. This not only saves time but also minimizes the risk of human error that can occur during manual payment processes. With this improvement, accounts payable practices become more efficient and reliable. Here’s a brief overview of how to utilize this feature: 1. **Activate the App Config:** To utilize this feature, enable the "***Auto Apply Purchase Order Linked Vendor Prepayment(s) On Bill***" app config. When this app config is on it will auto apply vendor prepayment on linked PO bill.
2. **Bill Generation:** Once this configuration is enabled, whenever a bill is generated—whether through item receipt or directly—the system will check for any vendor prepayments associated with the linked PO. 3. **Automatic Application:** If a vendor prepayment exists, it will be automatically applied to the generated bill, effectively completing the payment process without additional user intervention. ### **First and Last Name Search in Global Search** **Feature Overview:** We are excited to announce a new XoroERP Global Search functionality enhancement. Users can now search using vendor first and last names directly from the Global Search bar. This new feature streamlines the process of locating vendor-specific records, improving efficiency and overall user experience. **Key Highlights:** * **Search by Vendor First Name and Last Name:** Users can now input a vendor's first and last name in the Global Search bar to access relevant records quickly. * **Improved Vendor Record Accessibility:** This enhancement allows users to locate vendor-related data, including purchase orders, invoices, and account details, more easily. * **Time-Saving:** This new search option minimizes the time spent on locating vendor information and navigating multiple modules, improving workflow efficiency. **How It Works:** 1. Navigate to the **Global Search** bar at the top of the XoroERP interface. 2. Enter the **first name**, **last name**, or a combination of both for the vendor you wish to search.
3. The system will return all relevant records associated with the vendor, including purchase orders, vendor accounts, and any other linked documents. ### **Customer Credit Restrictions for Auto-Released Sales Orders** **Feature Overview:** We have introduced a crucial update to the Sales Order (SO) management process in XoroERP to enhance control over customer credit limits and ensure better compliance with financial restrictions. This update adds a permission-based restriction when auto-releasing SOs for defaulter customers, similar to the existing manual release process. **Key Enhancements:** 1. **Customer Credit Restriction in Auto-Release:**\ Previously, the system enforced credit restrictions only during the manual release of SOs for defaulter customers. With this update, the same restriction is applied when SOs are **auto-released** for defaulter customers. A permission dialog now appears, ensuring that only authorized users can proceed with the release. 2. **Permission Dialog for Defaulter Customers:**\ The system now prompts users with a **"Permission Required"** dialog when attempting to auto-release a Sales Order for a defaulter customer. This ensures compliance with credit restrictions and prevents unauthorized release of restricted SOs. 3. **Item Restrictions in Released Sales Orders:** * Once a Sales Order is in **Released** status, **restricted items** (based on customer credit or system-defined rules) **cannot be added** to the SO and saved. * **Non-restricted items** can still be added to the released SO and saved, providing flexibility while maintaining compliance. **How It Works:** * When attempting to **auto-release** an SO for a defaulter customer, a **permission required** dialog will appear, requiring authorized user intervention to continue with the release. * After the SO is in **Released** status: * **Restricted items** cannot be added or saved. * **Non-restricted items** can still be added to the order and saved without issues. {% hint style="info" %} **Note:** This is an **App Config** based feature. The following App Config needs to be turned on, and **Release SO** needs to be selected. {% endhint %}
**Memo Field Support in Account Register for Outgoing Payments** **Feature Overview:** We are pleased to announce an enhancement to the **Outgoing Payment** module that provides support for the **Memo** field in the **Account Register**. This feature allows users to seamlessly track and record important notes associated with outgoing payments, improving financial transparency and record-keeping. **Key Enhancements:** * **Memo Field in Outgoing Payment:**\ The existing Memo field in the **Outgoing Payment** module, where users can enter notes related to payments, is now integrated with the **Account Register**. * **Automatic Population in Account Register:**\ Memo details entered in the Outgoing Payment module will now automatically populate in the **Account Register**, ensuring that any payment-related notes are easily visible and accessible in both modules.
**How It Works:** * Users can add relevant notes or details in the Memo field while processing an outgoing payment in the **Outgoing Payment** module, users can add relevant notes or details in the **Memo** field while processing an outgoing payment. * Once the payment is recorded, the memo information will automatically appear in the **Account Register** alongside the corresponding payment entry, enabling easier reconciliation and auditing. This enhancement improves financial tracking by ensuring that any notes related to outgoing payments are consistently reflected in the **Account Register**, reducing the need for manual entry or cross-referencing between modules. ### **Item-Customer Mapping Display in Wave Center** **Feature Overview:** We are pleased to announce an update to the **Wave Center** in XoroERP. This update ensures that the **Customer Item Number** associated with a particular item, as defined in the **Item-Customer Mapping**, is displayed directly in the Wave Center under a dedicated column, improving visibility and ease of access to customer-specific item information. **Key Enhancements:** * **Customer Item Number in Wave Center:**\ The **Customer Item Number** is now fetched from the **Item-Customer Mapping** and displayed in the **Wave Center**. This allows users to view the customer-specific item reference directly within the Wave Center, streamlining order fulfillment and inventory management processes.
* **New Column in Wave Center:**\ A new column titled **'Customer Item Number'** has been added to the Wave Center, where the customer-specific item numbers will be reflected based on the mappings defined in the **Item-Customer Mapping** settings. **How It Works:** * The **Customer Item Number** mapped for a particular item in the **Item-Customer Mapping** module will automatically populate in the new **'Customer Item Number'** column within the Wave Center.
* This ensures customer-specific item references are readily available when processing waves, improving accuracy and reducing manual lookups. {% hint style="info" %} **Note:** If the **Customer Item** on Sales Order (SO) details and **Item-Customer Mapping** are enabled, priority will be given to the **Item-Customer Mapping**. {% endhint %} This enhancement improves the efficiency of wave processing by providing immediate visibility into customer-specific item numbers, reducing errors, and simplifying operations for businesses managing large inventories with customer-specific item mappings. ### Avalara Tax Integration for B2B Orders We have integrated Avalara tax calculation for B2B orders, enhancing the tax management process for B2B orders. Previously, Avalara tax calculations were not available for B2B transactions. With this release, if the Avalara tax service is configured for your XoroERP instance, Avalara will automatically calculate and apply the appropriate tax to the items in B2B orders within the customer portal. To activate this feature, users need to enable the **"Charge Tax on Order Items"** option found in the "Other Attributes" section of the Presentation settings. Once enabled, the Avalara tax will be applied to order items in real-time, ensuring tax accuracy and compliance.
#### **Key Features of this Enhancement** * **Real-time Avalara Tax Calculation:** When creating a new B2B order in XoroERP, the system will now automatically calculate and display the Avalara tax amount on the order summary page. This provides immediate visibility into the total cost, including taxes, ensuring transparency for both you and your clients.
* **Dynamic Tax Updates:** The calculated tax amount will dynamically update in response to changes in the order. This includes: * **Quantity Changes:** Modifying the quantity of items in the order will trigger a recalculation of the Avalara tax. * **Address Changes:** Altering the address (the state or city) will also initiate a recalculation, ensuring accurate tax based on the correct location. * **Seamless Tax Display on Sales Order (SO):** Once a Sales Order is created from the B2B order, the calculated Avalara taxes will be accurately reflected on the SO itself. This maintains consistency and ensures that all relevant tax information is readily available throughout the order lifecycle.
# September 2024 Release ## **XoroERP Enhancements** ### **New Carton Details View in Packing Slip Centre** We have introduced a new view called **"Carton Detail"** in the Packing Slip Centre. This view allows users to access carton-level details associated with a packing slip, providing valuable insights into shipping and packaging information. #### Details Available in Carton Detail View The Carton Detail view includes the following critical information for each carton: * **Packing Slip Number:** The unique identifier for the packing slip. * **Carton Label:** A label associated with the carton for easy identification. * **SSCC (Serial Shipping Container Code):** The globally recognized shipping code that identifies the contents of the carton. * **Tracking #:** The tracking number provided by the carrier for shipping. * **Master Tracking:** The overarching tracking number for related shipments. * **Cost Charged:** The cost attributed to the specific carton. * **Declared Cost:** The value declared for shipping purposes. * **Carrier Cost:** The shipping cost charged by the carrier. * **Shipping Cost:** Total cost for shipping the carton. * **LPN Number (License Plate Number):** The unique identifier for the carton in the warehouse management system. * **Is Full Case?:** Indicates whether the carton contains a full case of products. * **Is Mixed LPN?:** Specifies if the carton contains mixed items with different LPNs. * **Is Sealed Case?:** Designation of whether the carton is sealed. * **Is Master LPN?:** Indicates if the carton is marked as a master license plate number. * **Packing Slip Batch #:** The batch number associated with the packing slip. #### How to Access the Carton Detail View Users can easily access the Carton Detail view by selecting the **"Packing Slip Carton Detail"** option from the **Search by** dropdown menu within the Packing Slip Centre. #### Data Export Centre Updates Additionally, the **Packing Slip Carton Detail** view has been integrated into the Data Export Centre, allowing for improved data extraction and reporting capabilities. ### "Received Quality" column added to PO Centre (Detail view) and RMA Centre (Line view) A new column, **"**Received Quality**"** has been added to the following views: * **PO Centre (Detail view)**: Displays the quality of items received in the purchase order.
* **RMA Centre (Line view)**: Specifies the quality of items returned through the Return Merchandise Authorization process.
This column will enable users to specify and track the quality of items received into the system. By documenting quality upon receipt, users can better manage inventory quality, enhance supplier communication, and streamline return processes. ### Added custom fields in the RMA center and 3PL customer portal (RMA Centre), at both header and detail levels We have added **custom fields** to the RMA Centre at both the **header and detail levels**. These custom fields are available in the RMA Centres of both **XoroERP** and the **3PL Customer Portal**, providing additional flexibility and customization for RMA management.
### 3PL Account Portal: Added the "Global Search" feature We have implemented a **Global Search** feature in the 3PL Account Portal, offering users a streamlined search experience similar to the one available in XoroERP. The global search option is conveniently located at the top of the portal screen for easy access.
#### Key details of the Global Search feature * **Search Scope**: The search is limited to the 3PL orders of the same account. It does not include orders from other 3PL accounts. * **Item Data Search**: When searching for items, the system will navigate to the **Item Centre**, automatically filtering results by the searched item number. * **Report Access**: For all other searches, the system will generate relevant reports instead of opening sub-forms. This enhancement provides users with a faster, more efficient way to access critical 3PL account data, ensuring quick navigation and report generation while maintaining account-level security. ### Signature Requirement for Shipping in Sales Orders A new checkbox labeled "**Required Signature**" has been added to the **Shipping** tab of the Sales Order interface. This enhancement allows users to specify whether a signature is necessary upon delivery.
#### How It Works * When creating or updating a Sales Order, users can select the "Required Signature" checkbox. * After allocating and picking waves for the Sales Order, proceed to the Ship Order 2 ship to initiate the shipment process. * If the "Required Signature Shipping" option is set to true, the "Service Filter" tab will automatically adjust to reflect this requirement: * The "Signature Required" field will be set to true * The "Signature Option" field will be set to "Default". ### Manual **Webhook Generation and Retriggering Capabilities** Several new features have been added to the Webhook management system to simplify and streamline the process of generating and managing webhooks. #### Webhook Generation in Item Receipt Centre, Bill Centre, Invoice Centre, and Packing Slip Centre A new option has been added to the **Options Menu** in the following centres to manually generate specific webhooks: * **Item Receipt Centre** and **Bill Centre**: The option "Generate Close Asn Webhook" has been added to the Options menu in the Item Receipt and Bill Centres, and generates a webhook for **Close ASN** of selected item receipts and bills.
* **Invoice Centre:** The option "Generate Ship Confirmation Webhook" has been added to the Options menu in the Packing Slip Centre. This option is available when the "3PL Mode App" access is turned Off for the system and generates a webhook for **Order Fulfillment** of selected invoices.\
* **Packing Slip Centre**: The option "Generate Ship Confirmation Webhook" has been added to the Options menu in the Packing Slip Centre. This option is available when the "3PL Mode App" access is turned On for the system and generates a webhook for **Order Fulfillment** of selected packing slips.
{% hint style="info" %} **Please Note:** A new webhook entry will be created on generating the webhook. User can see this entry in the Webhook Log in the Webhook Centre. {% endhint %} #### **Webhook Centre - Retrigger Webhook Functionality** A new action button, **"Retrigger Webhook"**, has been added to the **Action Column** of the Webhook Log view in the Webhook Centre.
This feature allows users to retrigger the following webhooks: * **Ready To Ship** * **Order Fulfillment** * **Close ASN** After retriggering the webhooks, changes made to the ASN or wave will be updated in the same webhook, as opposed to generating a new webhook log. For example, users can update certain **Sales Order** values for the **Order Fulfillment Webhook** to reflect changes in fulfillment details. ### Enhanced Custom Field Functionality for ASN in XoroERP We are pleased to introduce an enhancement to XoroERP that improves the flexibility and functionality of custom fields related to **Advanced Shipping Notices (ASN)**. This update is designed to streamline the management of ASN data and improve the cross-referencing of Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) ASNs. *** #### **Key Features of the Update:** **1. Introduction of "ASN Detail" Custom Field** A new custom field labeled **"ASN Detail"** has been added in the **Custom Field Definition** module. This field is critical for cross-referencing and searching RMA ASNs in the ASN Centre, making it easier to filter and manage ASNs related to RMAs.
* **Benefit:** This feature allows users to efficiently search and cross-reference RMA ASNs, speeding up workflows and improving accuracy when managing returns. *** **2. Custom Field Mapping for PO and RMA** We have introduced functionality that allows mapping between custom fields at different levels in the Purchase Order (PO) and RMA processes, ensuring a seamless connection with ASN Detail fields. * **Mapping Options:** * **PO item line → ASN Detail line:** Custom fields defined at the PO item level are now mappable to the corresponding ASN Detail line. * **RMA item line → ASN Detail line:** Custom fields for RMA item lines can be mapped directly to the ASN Detail line. * **RMA header → ASN header:** Custom fields at the RMA header level can be mapped to the ASN header for easy reference. * **Benefit:** This mapping functionality ensures that information from POs and RMAs can be accurately carried over to ASNs, reducing manual data entry and the risk of errors. *** **3. Automatic Custom Field Mapping** If custom fields are not explicitly mapped by users, the system will automatically map ASN Detail custom fields **one-to-one** with their corresponding PO/RMA item line custom fields. This automatic feature ensures that data is linked without needing manual intervention. * **Handling Data Type Mismatch:**\ If a mismatch occurs between the data types of custom fields (e.g., a text field being mapped to a numeric field), the value of the mismatched field will **not** be added, preserving data integrity and avoiding potential errors in the workflow. * **Benefit:** This ensures that data is automatically and accurately transferred, streamlining operations and reducing the chances of mapping errors. *** **4. Custom Fields Support in Data Export Centre** We have also added support for exporting **ASN Detail custom fields** in the **Data Export Centre**. Users can now include these custom fields in their exports, providing more detailed and customizable reports. * **Benefit:** This feature empowers users to create more specific and tailored reports, enabling better data analysis and reporting. ## XoroWMS Enhancements ### Virtual Location Popup for Inventory Movement in XoroWMS We are excited to announce a new enhancement in XoroWMS, designed to improve the user experience and increase operational clarity when managing inventory within **Virtual Locations**. This update introduces a **popup message** that alerts users when they attempt to move or Putaway inventory to a virtual location, ensuring they are fully informed about the nature of the virtual location before proceeding. *** #### **Key Features of the Update:** 1. **Virtual Location Confirmation Popup** * When users attempt to move or putaway inventory to a virtual location, they will now see a popup message asking:\ *“Do you want to proceed with transferring the inventory to a virtual location?* * This popup ensures that users are aware they are interacting with a virtual location and that inventory moved there will be consumed. *** #### **Applicable Scenarios:** **1. Move Inventory by LPN**
* **Process:** Scan LPN → Scan Virtual Location * **Update:** A popup will appear, asking the user if they want to proceed with the transfer to the virtual location.
* **Process:** Scan LPN → Scan Pallet → Scan Virtual Location * **Update:** An **error message** will be displayed:\ *“Pallet cannot be placed in a virtual location.”*\ This is because virtual locations cannot be assigned to a pallet during its creation. **2. Move Inventory by Pallet** * **Process:** Scan Pallet → Scan Virtual Location * **Update:** A popup will appear to confirm whether the user wants to proceed with the transfer. **3. Receiving Module** * **Move Pallet:**\ **Process:** Scan Pallet → Scan Virtual Location\ **Update:** A popup will appear, asking the user if they want to proceed. * **Putaway (System or User Directed):**\ **Process:** When scanning a virtual location during putaway, a popup will appear to confirm the action. **4. Picking Module** * **Replenishment Putaway:**\ **Process:** When scanning a virtual location, the popup message will appear, asking the user if they want to continue with the putaway. *** #### **Benefits of this Update:** * **Improved Decision-Making:** The popup message provides users with critical information about the virtual location before completing the inventory movement, preventing unintended transfers. * **Error Prevention:** The system helps prevent errors by ensuring pallets are not mistakenly assigned to virtual locations. * **Streamlined Workflow:** The user experience is enhanced by prompting important information, ensuring that operations are conducted with full awareness of the virtual location's purpose. ### New "Move LPN" Module in Receiving for XoroWMS We are excited to introduce a new module, **"Move LPN,"** in the receiving process for XoroWMS. This module enhances the flexibility of handling LPNs (License Plate Numbers) that are associated with ASNs but not yet in a closed status, allowing users to move LPNs to pallets or specific locations efficiently.
*** #### **Key Features:** **1. Move LPN to Pallet or Location** * **Scan LPN:** The process begins by scanning the LPN. * **Scan Pallet/Location:** After scanning the LPN, users have the following options: * **Location:** Move all contents of the LPN to a designated location. * **Random String (Invalid Location):** If a random string is scanned (i.e., not a valid location), a pallet will be generated with that name, and a pop-up will appear asking for the actual location. The LPN contents will then be moved to this newly created pallet at the specified location. * **Existing Pallet:** If a valid pallet is scanned, the contents of the LPN will be transferred to the existing pallet and the corresponding location.
*** #### **Handling Virtual Locations:** * **Virtual LPN:** If a user scans a virtual location, the LPN is converted into a virtual LPN. * **Virtual Pallet Restrictions:** If a user attempts to move a pallet to a virtual location, an error will be displayed as pallets cannot be moved to virtual locations. * **LPN Attribute Check:** When moving an LPN to a virtual location, the system checks if the LPN attributes match the requirements. If the attributes differ, an error will be displayed, preventing the move. *** This new module simplifies and improves the efficiency of inventory management within XoroWMS, providing enhanced control over LPN movements. For further assistance or inquiries, please reach out to our support team. # August 2024 WMS Release ### Pack & Ship: Now search using the LPN Number You can now search for sales orders directly using the LPN Number in the Pack & Ship module.
This addition allows you to: * **Quickly locate specific orders**: Easily find orders associated with a particular LPN. * **Streamline shipping**: Ship items based on their assigned LPN, ensuring accuracy and reducing errors. * **Enhance warehouse management**: Gain greater control over inventory movement and tracking with the ability to filter orders by LPN. ### Manufacture Order: Provided the ability to auto-generate "LPN Info" based on the starting sequence In the Manufacture Order module, we have introduced a new feature that enables users to auto-generate "LPN Info" based on a starting sequence. This feature is particularly useful for manufacturers who need to generate multiple LPNs for a single production order. #### Prerequisite To use this feature, ensure that the app config "**Use raw materials lot and batch number for finished good item"** is enabled.
#### **Feature Overview** * At the final stage of the MO process (Work In Progress), when you click on the **"Edit LPN"** option under the Finished Good section, you will see a new "**Auto Generate**" option.
* Upon clicking this button, a modal will open, allowing you to enter the initial sequence details for Batch Number, Lot Number, Priority Number, and the number of LPNs you want to create.
* After entering the required information, clicking on **"Generate"** will take you to the **"Edit LPN Info"** modal. Here, you can view the incremented Batch Number, Lot Number, and Priority Number. Click "Save" to generate the LPNs.
* You have the option to make any necessary changes before saving to generate the LPNs. #### Quantity Distribution The total quantity will be distributed equally across the LPNs. In cases where the quantity does not divide evenly, the remaining quantity will be added to the last LPN. For example, if there are 9 units in the order and you choose to create 5 LPNs, the first 4 LPNs will each contain 1 units, while the final LPN will hold 5 units.
### **Update to XoroWMS - Putaway by Item** **Overview:** We have introduced a new feature, Putaway By Item, in the XoroWMS system. This enhances the **Puta way** process within User-directed workflows in the Putaway submodule. This update allows users to efficiently put away items based on scanned License Plate Numbers (LPN) and received quantities.
**Key Features:** * **Putaway by Scanned LPN:**\ Users can now put away items by scanning the LPN, followed by the item and quantity, ensuring accurate and efficient inventory management.
* **Virtual Location Support:** * If the scanned Putaway location is virtual, the items are automatically assigned to that virtual location. * **Non-Virtual Location Handling:** * For non-virtual locations, users can scan both the Putaway location and the associated LPN. * If the LPN exists, the items are put away under that LPN. * If the LPN does not exist, users can either manually enter a new LPN or use the auto-generation feature to create one. This update is designed to streamline the Putaway process, improve inventory accuracy, and offer greater flexibility in managing warehouse operations.\
### **Item Details Popup in Picking and Receiving Modules** **Overview:** We are excited to announce the addition of a new **Item Details Popup** feature in the Picking and Receiving modules of XoroWMS. This enhancement provides users with quick access to crucial item information, improving workflow efficiency and accuracy. **Key Features:** * **New Info Icon:** * A new info icon has been added to both the Picking and Receiving modules. * Clicking this icon will open a popup displaying detailed information about the selected item.
* **Item Details Popup:** * The popup includes essential item information, including a new field for **Total Order Quantity**. * **Total Order Quantity** is calculated as follows: * **Total Order Qty = Order Qty - Cancel Qty**
* **Note:** * The **Total Order Quantity** field is currently available only in the Picking module. This update enhances user experience by providing instant access to item details during picking and receiving operations, ensuring more accurate processing and decision-making. # August 2024 Release ### **Batch Update for Weight UOM in Item Centre** We are pleased to announce a new enhancement in the Item Centre: a batch update option for Weight Unit of Measure (UOM). This update aims to streamline your item management process and improve efficiency. **Feature Highlights:** * **New Batch Updates Option:** A new option has been introduced to Batch Updates in the Header Options of the Item Centre.
* **Enhanced Batch Update Pop-up:** In the Batch Update pop-up window, under the 'Column Name' tab, 'Weight UOM' has been added to the dropdown list.
* **Seamless Integration:** Once the Weight UOM is updated, it will automatically reflect in the Sales Order (SO) under the Shipping tab. **Important Note:** Please be aware that this update will not affect any Sales Orders that have already been created before this setting change in the Item Centre. This enhancement is designed to provide greater flexibility and control over your item data, ensuring that your inventory information remains accurate and up-to-date. We are committed to continuously improving XoroERP to meet your business needs. ### **New Column "Custom Fields" added in the SIP Inventory Report** We are excited to introduce a significant enhancement in the Short Inventory Planner module, designed to provide a more comprehensive and customizable inventory reporting experience for our clients. **Feature Highlights:** * **Custom Fields in Inventory Report:** The inventory report generated by the system now includes all custom fields. This enhancement ensures that the report is tailored to meet the specific needs of each client, providing detailed and relevant information. * **Custom Script Integration:** To incorporate custom fields into the inventory report, a custom script must be written within the email template titled "Short Inventory Notification." This allows for a high degree of customization, enabling clients to specify exactly which fields should be included in their reports. This improvement empowers clients to receive more detailed and personalized inventory reports, enhancing their ability to make informed decisions based on the most relevant data. ### **Added Vendor Type Column in** Bill Centre We are pleased to announce an important enhancement to both the Bill Payment module and the Bill Centre in XoroERP, aimed at providing more detailed and organized information management. **Feature Highlights:** * **Vendor Type Column:** A new column, "Vendor Type," has been added to the Bill Payment module and the Bill Centre. This addition allows users to categorize and manage vendor information more effectively.
This enhancement is designed to help users gain better insights into their vendor relationships and streamline their payment processes. By categorizing vendors, businesses can achieve more organized financial records and more efficient vendor management. This update reflects our ongoing commitment to improving XoroERP to better serve your business needs. ### **Added Void Date Column in Cheque Centre** We are excited to introduce an enhancement to the Void Cheque Centre in XoroERP, designed to improve tracking and record-keeping of voided cheques. **Feature Highlights:** * **New Void Date Column:** A new column, named "Void Date," has been added to the Void Cheque Centre. This addition allows users to easily view and track the specific dates on which cheques were voided, enhancing the accuracy and comprehensiveness of financial records.
This improvement aims to provide users with better insights and control over their voided cheque transactions, ensuring precise and organized financial management. ### **Added Default Manufacturer to Columns in Short Inventory Planner and Item Inventory Snapshot** We are excited to announce a significant enhancement to the Short Inventory Planner (SIP) and Item Inventory Snapshot modules in XoroERP, designed to provide greater clarity and organization in managing your inventory data. **Feature Highlights:** * **Default Manufacturer Column:** A new column, "Default Manufacturer," has been added to both the SIP and Inventory Snapshot modules. This column will display the default manufacturer associated with each item, providing a clear and organized view of your inventory sources.
* **Item Attributes Integration:** To utilize this new feature, the "Default Manufacturer" value must be filled in the "Item Other Attributes" section. This ensures that the information is accurately captured and reflected in the SIP and Inventory Snapshot modules. This enhancement allows users to easily identify and manage their inventory by vendor, improving the overall efficiency and accuracy of inventory management. This update underscores our commitment to continuously enhancing XoroERP to better serve your business needs. ### **New Features and Improvements to Pricing Rule Centre** We are delighted to announce a series of enhancements to the Pricing Rule Centre in XoroERP, aimed at streamlining your pricing management processes and enhancing usability. **Feature Highlights:** * **Duplicate and Edit Price Rules:** The context view(right click) options in the Pricing Rule Centre now allow users to duplicate existing price rules. This feature enables you to easily create new rules based on existing ones, saving time and effort. Once duplicated, you can make the necessary modifications to the new rules as needed.
* **Enhanced Search Functionality:** A new column, "Recipient," has been added to the search field in the Pricing Rule Centre. This enhancement facilitates more efficient and targeted searches, allowing you to perform multiple searches using pipe operators. This ensures you can quickly find the specific pricing rules you need.
* **Batch Update Activation:** You can now activate or deactivate pricing rules in the Batch Update feature. This provides greater control over your pricing strategies, enabling you to easily implement or suspend rules as required. These enhancements provide greater flexibility, control, and efficiency in managing your pricing rules. ### **Delivery Date and Shipment Date Synchronization Enhancement** We are pleased to announce a significant enhancement in the synchronization of delivery dates in the Purchase Order (PO) and Sales Order (SO) modules within XoroERP, designed to provide more precise and flexible control over your order management process. **Feature Highlights:** * **Detailed Level Delivery Date Update:** Previously, changing the delivery date at the header level in a Purchase Order triggered an email notification and updated the shipment date in the corresponding Sales Order. With this enhancement, the delivery date synchronization has been shifted to the detail level. Now, if the delivery date is changed at the line item level in a Purchase Order, it will automatically update the shipment date in the corresponding Sales Order. * **Conditional Functionality:** This enhanced synchronization functionality is dependent on the Application Configuration setting "Allow Update of SO Shipment" in the General tab. {% hint style="info" %} Ensure the above-mentioned setting is enabled to utilize the new Detail-Level delivery date update feature. {% endhint %} This improvement provides users with more granular control over delivery and shipment dates, ensuring that changes at the item level in Purchase Orders are accurately reflected in the corresponding Sales Orders. This update demonstrates our commitment to enhancing the precision and efficiency of XoroERP to better support your business operations. ### **Landed Cost Column Added in Inventory Tab Subview** We are excited to introduce a new enhancement in the Item Centre module of XoroERP, designed to provide greater detail and transparency in inventory cost management. **Feature Highlights:** * **Subview Pop-up Window Enhancement:** Now, when you double-click on an item in the Item Centre to open the subview pop-up window, you will find a new addition to the Inventory tab. * **Landed Cost Column:** A new column has been added that displays the landed cost of items, broken down by store. This feature allows you to view the comprehensive cost associated with each item, including shipping, handling, and any other additional expenses incurred to bring the item into inventory, specific to each store location.
This enhancement provides users with valuable insights into the true cost of inventory, enabling more informed pricing and inventory management decisions. ### **Added Return Income Account Column at Detail Level** in the Credit Memo and Invoice Credit Memo We’ve enhanced the Credit Memo and Invoice Credit Memo modules in XoroERP to provide you with greater flexibility and control over financial management. **Feature Highlights:** * **Return Income Account Column:** A new, editable column titled "Return Income Account" has been added at the detail level within both the Credit Memo and Invoice Credit Memo modules. This column allows users to specify the return income account for each line item individually.
* **Default Value - "Auto Select":** The default value for this dropdown is set to "Auto Select," which automatically selects the appropriate return income account for the item. However, users can edit this field to select a different return income account as needed. Previously, the option to select an income return account was not available. With this enhancement, users now have the flexibility to specify the return income account at the line item level, ensuring more accurate and tailored financial records. This improvement allows for detailed and precise financial tracking, enhancing the overall functionality and usability of the Credit Memo and Invoice Credit Memo modules. ### **Added New Search Option and Updated Capabilities in Sales Order module** We are excited to announce several key enhancements in the Sales Order Items module of XoroERP, designed to provide greater flexibility and improved functionality. **Feature Highlights:** * **New Search Option "Search By \[Item Basepart]":** A new search option "Search By \[Item Base Part]" has been added to SO detail level advanced search. This feature allows users to search for the base part and retrieve item lines of all Sales Orders for all product variants. This is particularly useful for managing and tracking variants of a product.
* **Basepart Search Condition:** For the "Basepart" search option to function, the product variant setting must be enabled in the app configuration. This ensures that users can efficiently search and manage items based on their base parts. * **Update Sales Order Items with Zero Quantity:** Users can now update the quantity of Sales Order items to zero. When a quantity of zero is entered, the system will automatically mark the line as cancelled but will not remove the line from the Sales Order. This new capability provides greater control over order modifications and cancellations. These enhancements are designed to streamline your order management processes, making it easier to search for and update Sales Order items. ### Enhanced Note Management in SO, PO, and Estimate Modules We are pleased to announce a new enhancement in the Sales Order (SO), Purchase Order (PO), and Estimate modules within XoroERP, aimed at improving efficiency and user control. **Feature Highlights:** * **Batch Selection and Deletion of Notes:** Previously, users could not select multiple notes for deletion within these modules. With this enhancement, you can now Batch Select multiple notes and delete the selected rows at once. This functionality streamlines the process of managing notes, saving time and effort.
This enhancement allows users to efficiently manage and organize their notes within the SO, PO, and Estimate modules, ensuring a more streamlined workflow. ### **Added Project Class Column to Template for Outgoing Payment Module** We are excited to announce an enhancement in the Outgoing Payment module of XoroERP, designed to provide more detailed financial tracking and project management capabilities. **Feature Highlights:** * **New Project Class Column:** A "Project Class" column has been added to the outgoing payment template. This new column allows users to categorize and track outgoing payments according to specific project classes, providing a clearer understanding of project-related expenses.
This enhancement ensures that users can accurately assign and monitor expenses by project, improving financial management and reporting capabilities. ### **Expanded Email Capabilities for Customer Payments and Receipts** We are pleased to announce a significant enhancement in the Email Interceptor module of XoroERP, designed to improve communication and documentation related to financial transactions. **Feature Highlights:** * **Enhanced Email Functionality:** The Email Interceptor module now supports sending emails for various financial documents. Users can send customer payment emails, invoice payment receipts, and deposit payment receipts directly through the system. This enhancement streamlines the process of communicating payment confirmations and receipts, ensuring timely and efficient delivery of important financial information to customers. ### New Stock Visibility Options in B2B Module We are excited to introduce a new feature in the B2B module of XoroERP, designed to enhance how stock visibility is displayed, providing users with greater flexibility in managing their inventory presentation. **Feature Highlights:** * **Stock Visibility Options:** We have introduced two new stock visibility options: "In Stock/Not in Stock" and "Quantity." * **Quantity Option:** When the "Quantity" option is selected, the system will display the actual quantity of items in stock. * **In Stock/Not in Stock Option:** When the "In Stock/Not in Stock" option is selected, the system will display a simple status of "Yes" or "No" to indicate whether items are in stock, without showing the exact count.
* **Easy Configuration:** This feature is accessible through the "Other Attributes" tab on the Presentation page. To configure stock visibility, navigate to this tab, click on the Stock Visibility field, and select your preferred option from the dropdown menu. This enhancement provides users with flexible options for presenting inventory status, allowing for a more tailored and user-friendly display. ### New Upload Budget Module **Simplifying Budget Management with Excel Integration** We are excited to announce a new module in XoroERP called Upload Budget, aimed at making budget management more efficient and user-friendly. **Feature Highlights:** * **Upload Budget Module:** This module enables users to manage their budgets by filling in an Excel sheet with budget details and uploading it directly into the system. To access Upload Budget module, go to **Menu > Utilities > Data Import > Upload Budget**
This enhancement provides a streamlined approach to budget management, facilitating quick and accurate data entry and integration. We are committed to continuously improving XoroERP to better support your financial planning and management needs. Shipping Account Number Priority Enhancement and New Carrier Field ### **Priority Setting for Shipping Account Number and New Field Addition in Carrier** **Overview:** We are excited to announce a significant update to the XoroERP system that enhances the handling of Shipping Account Numbers across various shipping functions. This update introduces a new priority setting for Shipping Account Numbers, ensuring a more efficient and accurate shipping process. Additionally, a new field, "Default Shipping Account Number," has been added to the Carrier module, providing users with greater flexibility and control. **Key Enhancements:** 1. **New Priority Setting for Shipping Account Numbers:** * We have introduced a new priority system for handling Shipping Account Numbers within the ERP. This priority setting ensures that the Customer's Shipping Account Number takes precedence over the Carrier's Shipping Account Number. * **Priority Details:** * **Customer Shipping Account Number:** High Priority * **Carrier Shipping Account Number:** Low Priority 2. **New Field in Carrier Module: Default Shipping Account Number:** * A new field, "Default Shipping Account Number," has been added to the Carrier module. This field allows users to set a default Shipping Account Number at the carrier level, which will be used when a customer-specific Shipping Account Number is not available.
3. **CRUD Implementation for the New Carrier Field:** * The "**Default Shipping Account Number**" field in the Carrier module is fully integrated with Create, Read, Update, and Delete (CRUD) operations, allowing users to manage this field effectively. 4. **Implementation Across All Shipping Functions:** * The new priority setting and the "Default Shipping Account Number" field have been implemented across all relevant shipping functions within XoroERP, including: * **Shipment** * **Pack & Ship** * **Other Shipping Functions:** Any function where the Shipping Account Number is utilized will now follow the newly established priority rules. The newly implemented priority setting for Shipping Account Numbers is now reflected across several modules in XoroERP. Here’s how it functions within each module: #### **Sales Order:** 1. **Customer Selection and Ship Method:** * When a customer is selected, the system automatically populates the Ship Method based on that customer's details. * The selected Ship Method determines the "Ship Via" or Carrier, which in turn influences the Third Party Account Number associated with the order. 2. **Third Party Account Number Priorities:** * The Third Party Account Number now follows a defined priority order: * If the application configuration (App Config) for "Enable Address Level Shipping Account Number" is activated, the Shipping Account Number linked to the "Ship To" address is given the highest priority. * The priority order is as follows: **Shipping Account# (Address Level) > Customer Shipping Account > Carrier Shipping Account.** * If the configuration is not enabled, the priority order defaults to: **Customer Shipping Account > Carrier Shipping Account.** 3. **Maintaining Third Party Account Number:** * If the Third Party Account Number is populated using either the Customer's Shipping Account or the Shipping Account# (from the Address Level setting), it will remain unchanged even if the Ship Method or Carrier is modified. * Conversely, if the Third Party Account Number is based on the Carrier's Shipping Account, it will be updated automatically when changes are made to the Ship Method or Carrier. #### **Estimate:** 1. **Handling of Shipping Account Numbers:** * The handling of Shipping Account Numbers in the Estimate module mirrors the process in the Sales Order module, relying on the Ship Method and Carrier to determine the appropriate Shipping Account Number. 2. **Estimate to Sales Order Conversion:** * During the conversion of an Estimate to a Sales Order, and when selecting lines for the Sales Order, the system adheres to the same priority settings for Shipping Account Numbers. * These priorities are then verified within the Sales Order to ensure consistency. #### **Invoice:** 1. **Invoice Creation and Shipment Info:** * Upon creating an Invoice, selecting "Shipment Info" will trigger an update where the Shipment is created. The system then inserts the Shipping Account Number into the backend based on the customer's details. * If the customer does not have a Shipping Account Number, the system will default to using the Carrier's Shipping Account Number, based on the Ship Method and Carrier, in the backend. #### **Pack and Ship:** 1. **Saving Third Party Account Number:** * Within the Pack & Ship module, the system saves the Sales Order's Third Party Account Number in the backend, following the established priority. This ensures that either the Customer's Shipping Account or the Carrier's Shipping Account is correctly associated with the shipment. **Impact on Users:** This update streamlines the shipping process by ensuring that the correct Shipping Account Number is always used based on the defined priorities. The addition of the "Default Shipping Account Number" field provides users with more control, reducing the chances of errors during shipping and improving overall operational efficiency.\
### New App Config Option - Restrict Defaulter Customer Sales **Feature Update: Restriction on Sales Operations for Defaulter Customers** **Overview:** We are pleased to announce the addition of a new configuration option in XoroERP’s App Config settings. This update introduces a powerful control mechanism that allows businesses to restrict sales operations for customers who have overdue invoices or have exceeded their credit limit. This enhancement is designed to help organizations manage credit risk more effectively and ensure financial stability. **Key Features:** * **New App Config Option: "Restrict Defaulter Customer Sales":** * This newly added configuration setting enables businesses to restrict certain operations when dealing with customers who are flagged as defaulters. * A customer is considered a defaulter under two conditions: 1. The customer has one or more overdue invoices. 2. The customer has exceeded their pre-defined credit limit.
* **Operational Restrictions:** * When the "Restrict Defaulter Customer Sales" option is enabled, the system will automatically block or restrict specified operations for any customer identified as a defaulter. This ensures that sales transactions are carefully controlled and that credit risks are minimized. * The specific operations affected by this restriction can be selected within the App Config settings, providing flexibility based on business needs. **Impact on Users:** * This feature empowers users to enforce stricter credit control policies, reducing the likelihood of further credit exposure to customers who are already in arrears or who have exceeded their credit limit. * By implementing these restrictions, businesses can safeguard their cash flow and minimize potential financial losses. **Actions Required:** * Administrators should review and update the App Config settings to enable and configure the "Restrict Defaulter Customer Sales" option according to their credit control policies. * Sales teams should be informed of the new restrictions to ensure they are aware of the conditions under which sales operations may be restricted. \
# July 2024 Release ### Auto Allocation of SO Waves Without SO-PO Linking We are pleased to announce a new feature in XoroERP that allows for the automatic allocation of Sales Order (SO) waves without the need for Sales Order-Purchase Order (SO-PO) linking. This enhancement is designed to streamline the allocation process and improve efficiency in order management. **Conditions for Auto Allocation** For the auto allocation feature to function correctly, the following conditions must be met: 1. **Auto Allocation App Config**: The Auto Allocation App Configuration must be enabled. 2. **Autolock Partially Allocated SO Flag**: This flag must be checked or set to true. To ensure the flag is true, an API connector integrator is created. **How It Works** Whenever a third-party application drops an order into the ERP system with the `Autolock Partially Allocated SO` flag set to true, the system will handle the allocation process as follows: * **Partial Allocation**: If there is a partially allocated wave, it will be automatically moved to a locked status. This ensures that partially allocated orders are secured and no further modifications can be made until the allocation is complete. The created partial wave will be according to the SO Create Date Time.
* **Full Allocation**: If the wave is fully allocated, it will not be locked, allowing for further processing and fulfillment. {% hint style="info" %} **This feature works as per Order Date and Time. SO with the oldest Create Date Time is allocated first.** {% endhint %} Additionally, if a Purchase Order (PO) is received for the same item, the system will handle the allocation without the requirement for the SO to be linked to the PO. This is a significant improvement over the previous functionality, where auto allocation was contingent upon the SO being linked to a PO. **Summary of Changes** * **Old Functionality**: Auto allocation requires the Sales Order to be linked with a Purchase Order. * **New Functionality**: Auto allocation is now independent of SO-PO linking. The system will allocate items to Sales Orders regardless of their linkage status. By removing the dependency on SO-PO linking for auto allocation, we have simplified the process, making it more flexible and efficient. This update ensures that inventory allocation is handled smoothly, reducing manual intervention and potential errors. This feature enhances the overall workflow and provides greater flexibility in managing orders and inventory. We encourage users to enable this configuration and leverage the benefits of automated allocation in their operations. ### Enhanced Lot Number Management and LPN Integration in Ship Confirmation We are excited to announce a new feature in XoroERP designed to improve inventory management and accuracy during the shipping process. This enhancement ensures that lot numbers provided by third-party logistics (3PL) partners during ship confirmation are utilized by the system to consume inventory accurately from the specified lots. **Key Enhancements** 1. **Lot Number Management**: * The system will now consume inventory based on lot numbers shared by the 3PL in the ship confirmation. * This ensures precise inventory tracking and reduces discrepancies during the shipping process. 2. **New Columns in Upload Wave Module**: * Three new columns have been added to the Upload Wave module: Lot Number, LPN, and Location Name.
* These columns facilitate detailed specification of inventory during wave picking. **Conditions for Column Visibility** * **LPN (License Plate Number) Enabled**: * When LPN is enabled, all three columns (Lot Number, LPN, Location Name) will be available. * **LPN Disabled**: * When LPN is disabled, only the Location Name column will be visible. **Functionality During Wave Picking** * **Defining Specific Lots or LPNs**: * At the time of picking waves via the upload function, users can now define specific lot numbers or LPNs from which quantities will be picked, regardless of where the inventory was originally allocated. * This ensures flexibility and precision in fulfilling orders, accommodating specific inventory management strategies. * **Similar Functionality to Split Quantity**: * This new feature operates similarly to the existing split quantity feature, allowing for granular control over inventory consumption during the picking process. * LPN swapping is also supported, provided that the specified LPN has an available quantity. **Summary of Changes** * **New Columns**: * Added Lot Number, LP Number, and Location Name columns to the Upload Wave module. * Visibility of these columns is conditional based on the LPN configuration. * **Improved Inventory Accuracy**: * Lot numbers provided by 3PLs during ship confirmation are now used for inventory consumption, ensuring accurate inventory tracking. * **Enhanced Picking Flexibility**: * Users can define specific lot numbers or LPNs during wave picking, improving control over inventory management and order fulfillment. This feature is designed to enhance the accuracy and efficiency of inventory management processes, particularly in environments where detailed tracking of lot numbers and LPNs is critical. We encourage users to leverage this new functionality to optimize their inventory operations and ensure seamless coordination with 3PL partners. ### **Added Selective Import Support in Uploading Products** **Description**: This enhancement introduces the ability to perform sectional uploads by selectively updating specific columns for products. The feature aims to improve the flexibility and precision of product data management by allowing users to choose which fields to update or exclude during the upload process. #### How It Works The enhancement includes three new fields in the Upload Product module: **IsSelectiveImport**, **ColumnsToUpdate**, and **ExcludeColumns**. 1. **IsSelectiveImport**: * This field indicates whether the selective import feature is being utilized. If set to true, the system will proceed with the selective import logic based on the provided columns. 2. **ColumnsToUpdate**: * When fields are provided in this column, the system will exclusively update these specified columns from the upload file. All other properties of the products will remain unchanged. * **Example**: If you specify `Price, StockQuantity` in ColumnsToUpdate, only the price and stock quantity columns in the product data will be updated according to the upload file. Other product attributes like description, category, etc., will not be altered. 3. **ExcludeColumns**: * If fields are listed in this column, the system will exclude these specified columns from being updated, leaving them unchanged while updating all other properties from the file. * **Example**: If you specify `Description, Category` in ExcludeColumns, these columns will be left unchanged, and the rest of the product data will be updated according to the file. 4. **Conflict Resolution**: * If both **ColumnsToUpdate** and **ExcludeColumns** are provided with values, the system will prioritize **ColumnsToUpdate** and ignore **ExcludeColumns**. * **Example**: If you have `Price` in ColumnsToUpdate and `StockQuantity` in ExcludeColumns, the system will only update the price column and disregard the exclusion of the stock quantity column. #### Example Scenario * **Scenario 1**: You want to update only the pricing information for a list of products. * Set `IsSelectiveImport` to true. * Specify `Price` in the **ColumnsToUpdate** field. * Upload the product file with the new prices. The system will update only the price column and leave other attributes unchanged. * **Scenario 2**: You want to exclude the stock quantity and description columns from being updated. * Set `IsSelectiveImport` to true. * Specify `StockQuantity, Description` in the **ExcludeColumns** field. * Upload the product file. The system will update all columns except for stock quantity and description. #### Error Handling * When uploading the complete product file, there can be errors or formatting issues that could cause data integrity problems. This feature mitigates such risks by allowing selective updates, thereby avoiding unintended changes to the product data. This new feature enhances the product upload functionality, providing users with greater control and flexibility in managing their product data in Xoro ERP. ### Enhanced Wave Merge Confirmation We have introduced an enhancement to the wave merge confirmation pop-up screen within the Wave Centre, providing increased clarity and transparency regarding field matching during wave merging.
Currently, the "Fields" label displays two fields: * **Customers:** Indicates whether the customer names of the waves being merged match. * **Addresses:** Indicates whether the ship-to-addresses of the waves being merged match. When you see a green tick sign, it indicates that the fields match. Conversely, a red cross sign signals that the fields don't match.
This additional information allows users to quickly identify potential discrepancies in customer and address data before proceeding with the wave merge, improving data integrity and reducing the likelihood of errors. ### Last Wave Number and Last Wave Datetime columns added to multiple modules Two new columns Last Wave Number and Last Wave Datetime have been added to multiple modules. Users can refer to these columns in case when multiple waves have been created for the sales order. These columns display the details of the most recent wave created for the order. * **Last Wave Number:** This new column displays the most recent wave number associated with the sales order. * **Last Wave Datetime:** This column displays the date and time of the most recent wave created for each sales order, helping you stay on top of order processing. These columns have been added to the following modules: #### Sales order Centre (Detail View)
#### Sales Order In the sales order module, these columns have been added at the item line details level.
#### Data Export Centre (Sales Order Detail View)
#### Sales Order Subform
### Enhanced Funds Transfer Module with Custom Final Amount Control and Extended Exchange Rate \ We have introduced significant enhancements to the Funds Transfer module, providing users with greater control over transfer amounts and increased precision in exchange rate calculations. #### **Customizable Final Transfer Amount** We've added a new "Final Transfer Amount" field to the Funds Transfer module. This field empowers users to manually enter a custom amount for their transfers, allowing for greater flexibility and tailored transactions.
In addition, we've introduced an "Auto calculate final amount using exchange rate?" checkbox. Selecting this checkbox will automatically calculate the final transfer amount based on the current exchange rate. When unchecked, the "Final Transfer Amount" field will become unlocked, allowing users to input their desired custom amount.
{% hint style="info" %} Please note that to enable this feature, the "Transfer Currency" should be the Home Currency. {% endhint %} #### **Extended Exchange Rate Precision** To further enhance accuracy, we have expanded the number of digits allowed for exchange rates. You can now enter up to 16 digits in the exchange rate field, ensuring precise calculations even for complex transactions involving currencies with high decimal places.
### Added the option to add logo URL in Item Group and Product Category modules We have added two new fields in the Item Group and Product Category modules, enhancing the visual representation of your data. * **Item Group Logo Url:** A new field has been added to the Item Group module where you can enter the URL for the logo of the item group. The format for the URL should be "".
* **Category Logo Url:** Similarly, a new field has been added to the Product Category module where you can enter the URL for the logo of the product category. The format for the URL should be "".
**Enhanced Presentation Preview** These logos will be displayed in the presentation preview when items are grouped by item group and item category, providing a more visually appealing and organized presentation of your data. ### Multiple enhancements in the Presentation Preview We have introduced several exciting enhancements to the presentation settings, focusing on improving the presentation preview and offering greater flexibility in how you present your products. These enhancements aim to make your presentations more visually appealing and customizable, improving overall user experience. #### Enhanced Preview for Categories When grouping your presentation by Category, Item Group, and Item Brand, the logo added for the specific group will be displayed on the Presentation landing page. This feature allows customers to get a glimpse of what each category has to offer, making it easier for them to navigate and find what they're looking for. If no logo is added for the category, group, or brand, the image of the first product in the category will be displayed as a fallback. #### Added the ability to update Group Title We have introduced a new feature that allows you to add a custom title to the grouping of items\ in the presentation. For this, we have introduced a new field, "Group By Title" in the "Other Attributes" tab of the presentation settings.
When you provide a title in this field, the shop by {title} will be overridden and the title mentioned in this field will be displayed on the presentation landing page where items are grouped. For example, if you group items by category, the default title on the homepage will be "Shop By Category". However, if you enter a custom title, such as "Style", in the "Group By Title" field, the homepage will display "Shop By Style" instead. This feature gives you more flexibility in how you present grouped items to your users.
#### Default Title for Featured Products If you have not provided a title for the featured products in the presentation settings, "Featured Products" will be used as the default title to display these products. #### Streamlined Resources Navigation with dropdown menu We've converted the Resources option into a dropdown menu, replacing the previous pop-up screen. This makes accessing and managing resources much easier and more intuitive.
#### Added Item Images in the Grid layout We've added item images to the "Options" column of the Item Details page when using the grid layout. This makes it easier for users to view and manage the products and makes browsing the presentation even more engaging.
# June 2024 Release ### Restriction on shipping the wave for unpicked lines We have implemented a restriction on closing and shipping the wave when no quantity is picked from the wave. This feature is enabled based on the app config, "**Prevent Shipping of Waves with Unpicked Lines**".
When this configuration is turned on, the system will prevent users from shipping a wave that contains unpicked line(s). This ensures that all quantities are accounted for before a wave is closed. To proceed with shipping, the user must first void the unpicked line(s). By restricting the closure of waves with unpicked lines, this feature helps maintain the accuracy and reliability of your inventory and order management processes. ### Multiple columns added in the Invoice Payment Centre (Detail View) The detail view in the Invoice Payment Centre now displays several new columns. To provide greater clarity and detail within the Invoice Payment Centre, we have added the following columns to the detail view: * Customer Name * Sales Rep Name * Sales Rep Code * Payment Date * SO Number
This increased data visibility enables users to analyze invoice payments with more comprehensive context. ### **Batch Update Option for Order Type and Expected Ship Date in Purchase Order Centre** We have added the option to batch update the order type and expected shipping date in the Purchase Order Centre. * **Batch Update Order Type**: Users can now select multiple purchase orders and update their order type simultaneously. This is particularly useful for scenarios where the order type needs to be standardized or changed.
* **Batch Update Expected Ship Date**: Users can also update the expected ship date for multiple purchase orders in one action. This is beneficial for aligning shipment schedules or in case of new delivery deadlines. Please note that the expected ship date will be updated at both the header level and the item line level.
### **Third Party Ref Name Column Added to Wave Centre and Pick Wave Module** To provide better tracking and reference, we have added the Third Party Ref Name column to both the Wave Centre and Pick Wave module. This column contains the name of the third party associated with the shipment process. This enhancement allows for more detailed information management within these modules and help in better tracking and coordination with the third parties involved in the shipment. ### New Shipping Details Columns added in Upload Purchase Order Template We have expanded the Upload Purchase Order template by adding new shipping details columns: * ShipToCompanyName * ShipToFirstName * ShipToLastName
These additional columns allow users to directly input essential shipping information during the upload process, further streamlining the order management workflow. ### Introducing Global Date Format We have introduced the ability to change the date format for your XoroERP instance, providing greater flexibility and consistency in how dates are displayed across the system. A new app configuration, "**Global Date Format**," has been added to facilitate this customization. In this configuration, you can choose between the following date formats; Once selected, the chosen date format will be applied to all dates throughout the system, ensuring a uniform date representation. This enhancement simplifies the process of managing date formats, reducing confusion and improving overall usability for users across different regions with varying date format preferences. ### Enhanced Sales Order Processing with Customer to Sales Order Header Custom Field Mapping We have added a new custom field mapping and introduced the ability to map custom fields from the customer to the sales order header. This allows for the seamless transfer of customer-specific information directly to the sales order header when an order is received from your B2B platform. This means that when a B2B order is received, any custom fields you have established for your customers will now be automatically displayed on the sales order center for the order, providing a more comprehensive view of the customer's details and preferences. # May 2024 Release 2.0 ### **1. Custom Field Support Added in Bill of Material at Header Level** **Overview:** We are excited to announce the addition of custom field support at the header level of the Bill of Material (BOM) module. This enhancement is designed to provide greater flexibility and customization options, enabling users to tailor the BOM module to better fit their specific business needs.
**Details of the Enhancement:** 1. **Integration with Custom Field Definition:** * The "Bill of Material" has been added as a new option in the Transaction Type dropdown within the Custom Field Definition module.
This allows users to create and define custom fields specific to the Bill of Material, enhancing the ability to capture and manage additional information that is pertinent to their business processes. 2. **Visibility of Custom Fields in BOM Creation:** * Once a custom field definition is created for the Bill of Material, a new Custom Field Tab will be displayed when creating a new Bill of Material.
* This tab allows users to input and manage custom field data directly within the BOM creation process, ensuring that all relevant information is captured from the outset. 3. **Enhancements in BOM Centre and Data Export:** * Custom fields are now fully supported within the BOM Centre, enabling users to view, edit, and manage custom field data alongside standard BOM information. * The upload templates for Bill of Material and Bill of Material Lines in the Data Export Centre have been updated to include custom fields. This ensures that custom field data can be imported and exported seamlessly, facilitating easier data management and integration with other systems. 4. **Custom Field Mapping between BOM and Manufacturing Orders:** * A mapping feature has been implemented to link custom fields between the Bill of Material and Manufacturing Orders.
* When an item is selected in the Create Manufacturing Order module, the custom field values from the associated Bill of Material will automatically populate in the corresponding custom fields of the Manufacturing Order. This reduces manual data entry and ensures consistency across related documents.
### **2. Custom Field Support in Create Bill of Material at Line Level and Create Manufacturing Order at Line Level** **Overview:** We are excited to introduce a robust enhancement in Xoro ERP, enabling custom field support at the line level in both the Create Bill of Material (BOM) and Create Manufacturing Order modules. This enhancement is designed to provide users with unparalleled flexibility and precision in managing detailed data for individual line items, thereby optimizing the manufacturing and inventory processes. **Detailed Functionality:** 1. **Expanded Transaction Type Dropdown:** * The Transaction Type dropdown in the Custom Field definition has been expanded to include "Bill of Material Item Line" and "Manufacturing Order Item Lines". This expansion allows users to define custom fields specific to line items within BOMs and Manufacturing Orders.
2. **Custom Fields in BOM Centre:** * Custom fields can now be added to the Bill of Material Item Line within the BOM Centre. This allows users to input detailed and specific information for each line item, enhancing data accuracy and customization. * The capability to upload BOMs with line-level custom fields has been integrated, ensuring that all relevant details are captured during the BOM creation process. 3. **Data Export Centre Integration:** * Line-level custom fields for Bill of Material Item Lines are now supported in the Data Export Centre. This ensures that detailed custom field data can be seamlessly exported for reporting and integration purposes.
4. **Custom Field Mapping:** * Users can now create custom field mappings for Bill of Material Item Lines and Manufacturing Order Item Lines. This functionality allows for the precise alignment of custom fields between BOMs and Manufacturing Orders, ensuring consistency and accuracy in data handling. * Additionally, custom field mapping between Items and Bill of Material Item Lines has been enabled, further enhancing the flexibility and specificity of data management. 5. **Automatic Population of Custom Fields:** * When a Manufacture Item Number is selected in the Create Manufacturing Order module, the custom field values of the corresponding BOM are automatically populated into the custom fields of the Manufacturing Order at the line level. This automation streamlines the data entry process, reducing manual effort and the potential for errors. ### **3. Custom Field Support in Create Bill at Line Level and Create Item Receipt at Line Level** **Overview:** We are pleased to announce a significant enhancement in Xoro ERP that introduces custom field support at the line level for both the Create Bill and Create Item Receipt modules. This new feature provides users with the capability to manage detailed, line-specific data, enhancing the customization and accuracy of financial and inventory transactions. **Detailed Functionality:** 1. **Expanded Transaction Type Dropdown:** * The Transaction Type dropdown in the Custom Field Definition module has been expanded to include "Item Receipt Detail Line" and "Bill Item Line". This expansion allows users to define custom fields specific to line items within Item Receipts and Bills.
2. **Custom Field Mapping at Line Level:** * Users can now create custom field mappings at the line level between various modules, ensuring seamless data consistency and integration across the system. The following mappings are supported: * **Item and Bill Detail Line:** Custom fields can be mapped between Items and Bill Detail Lines, allowing detailed item-specific information to be captured on each Bill line.
* **Purchase Order Detail and Item Receipt Detail Line:** Custom fields can be mapped between Purchase Order Details and Item Receipt Detail Lines, ensuring that purchase order-specific data is accurately reflected in Item Receipts.
* **Purchase Order Detail and Bill Detail Line:** Custom fields can be mapped between Purchase Order Details and Bill Detail Lines, facilitating the accurate transfer of purchase order data to Bills.
* **Item Receipt Detail Line and Bill Detail Line:** Custom fields can be mapped directly between Item Receipt Detail Lines and Bill Detail Lines, ensuring data consistency between received items and billed items.
3. **Item Custom Fields in Item Receipt Lines:** * Custom fields defined for items are now visible in the Item Receipt Line section within the Item Receipt Centre, Create Item Receipt, and Item Receipt subform. This ensures that item-specific custom data is readily available and accurately recorded during the item receipt process. 4. **Item Custom Fields in Bill Lines:** * Custom fields defined for items are now displayed in the Bill Line section within the Bill Centre, Create Bill, and Bill subform. This enhancement ensures that detailed item-specific information is captured and accessible during the bill creation process. ### **4. Custom Field Support in Create Sales Receipt at Line Level** **Overview:** We are excited to introduce a new enhancement in Xoro ERP that adds custom field support at the line level for the Create Sales Receipt module. This feature enables users to manage detailed, line-specific data for sales transactions, enhancing customization and accuracy in sales documentation and reporting. **Detailed Functionality:** 1. **Custom Field Mapping at Line Level for Sales Receipts:** * Users can now create custom field mappings at the line level between Items and Sales Receipt Detail Lines in the CustomFieldMapping module. This capability allows for detailed, item-specific information to be captured and utilized within each line of a sales receipt, ensuring that all relevant data is accurately recorded and easily accessible. 2. **Integration with Sales Receipt Line Details:** * Custom fields defined for items are now seamlessly integrated into the Sales Receipt Line section. This ensures that any custom data associated with items is visible and can be used directly in the creation and management of sales receipts. This integration enhances the precision of sales documentation and allows for more detailed tracking and reporting. **Additional Enhancements:** 3. **Item Custom Fields in Short Inventory Planner:** * Custom fields for items are now incorporated into the Short Inventory Planner. This enhancement ensures that all custom data defined for items is taken into account during inventory planning, providing a more comprehensive view of inventory needs and facilitating better decision-making. 4. **Item Custom Fields in Item Inventory Snapshot:** * Item custom fields are now displayed in the Item Inventory Snapshot. This addition provides users with detailed, item-specific information at a glance, improving the accuracy and usefulness of inventory snapshots and enabling more effective inventory management. ### 5. Inventory Change Log**: Advanced Search Functionality** We have introduced the following enhancements to the Inventory Change Log module:
**Added Advanced Search Functionality:** * **Lot Number (Lot#):** You can now search for inventory changes using the Lot Number, providing precise tracking of specific inventory lots. * **Batch Number (Batch#):** The advanced search now includes the ability to filter inventory changes by Batch Number, allowing for better management of batch-specific inventory. * **Manufacture Date:** This enhancement allows you to search inventory changes by the Manufacture Date, enabling easier tracking of items based on their production date. * **Expiry Date:** You can now search for inventory changes by Expiry Date, ensuring efficient monitoring of inventory items with expiration dates. These enhancements aim to provide more granular and efficient search capabilities within the Inventory Change Log module, improving overall inventory management and traceability. ### 6. Introducing the Cancel Reason Module We are excited to announce the release of the Cancel Reason module, designed to streamline the order cancellation process and enhance data collection. {% hint style="info" %} To enter a cancel reason, go to *Menu > Admin > Cancel Reason* {% endhint %} #### Entering Cancel Reason You can enter a reason for cancellation by entering the basic details, such as name, code, and description for the cancellation reason. After filling in the details, click "Save" to create and save the cancel reason in the system.
#### **Simplifying the Cancellation Process** Previously, when cancelling a sales or purchase order, users were required to manually input a reason for cancellation each time. This process often involved typing out the reason in a text box provided for order cancellation. However, with the introduction of the Cancel Reason module, we have significantly enhanced this experience. Now, when cancelling an order, users will be presented with a convenient dropdown menu that lists all the cancel reasons created within the system. This improvement eliminates the need for manual entry, saving time and effort for users.
In cases where the desired reason for cancellation is not listed in the dropdown menu, users still have the option to enter a custom reason in the text box provided. To enable this feature, the "**Disable Cancel Reason Textbox"** app config should be disabled. When this setting is turned on, it will disable the cancel reason textbox, preventing users from entering a cancellation reason.
The Cancel Reason module is designed to improve efficiency and communication within the organization. By standardizing the reasons for cancellations and providing a centralized location to manage them, users can quickly and easily select the appropriate reason when cancelling an order. This not only saves time but also helps to maintain accurate records of cancellations for future reference. #### Cancel Reason Centre In addition to the Cancel Reason module, a new Cancel Reason Centre has been added, providing a centralized location where all created cancel reasons are listed. This hub allows for easy review and management of all cancellation reasons within the system.
### 7. Added Linked Order columns in the Sales Order Centre and Purchase Order Centre We have added "Linked PO" and "Linked SO" in both the Header and Detail views of the Sales Order Centre and Purchase Order Centre respectively to streamline the process of tracking linked orders. This enhancement provides users with quick access to view and reference related orders with ease.
In the Detail view, linked SOs or POs are shown next to their corresponding item lines when multiple orders are associated. This feature allows users to efficiently track and manage related orders at the item level, aiding in a more streamlined order management process. #### Linked Orders Tab in Subforms In addition to including the columns in the centres, we have introduced a new "Linked Orders" tab in subforms as well. This tab displays all linked orders associated with a particular transaction, offering a consolidated overview of interconnected orders for better context and decision-making.
### 8. Updating Item Account In Past Transactions We have introduced a new feature allowing users to update item accounts (Income, Expense, and Income Return) in past transactions. This improvement offers greater flexibility and accuracy in managing your financial records. Previously, when updating item accounts, the changes would only apply to future transactions while past transactions remained unchanged, reflecting the earlier accounts. However, our latest update now allows users to update item accounts in past transactions as well. When making changes to item accounts and saving them, the system will prompt users to select whether they want to update past transactions. By enabling the "Do you want to update the past transactions?" toggle, users can ensure that past transactions reflect the updated item accounts.
{% hint style="info" %} Please note that this prompt will only appear if the item accounts have been changed. {% endhint %} ### 9. Added "Total Qty" Column to Item Receipt and Bill Centres We have added a new column, "Total Qty" on the Item Receipt Centre and Bill Centre at the header view. With the addition of the "Total Qty" column, users can now easily see the total quantity of items being received or billed at a glance. This will help streamline the workflow, improve efficiency, and provide a more comprehensive overview of the transactions being processed.
### 10. Vendor Info: Added "Bills" tab We have added a new tab in the Vendor Info module called "Bills." This feature is designed to provide users with a comprehensive overview of all bill details associated with a particular vendor.
#### Bills Tab Search Fields Users can easily search for specific bills using the following search fields:
* **Select Status:** This field allows you to filter bills based on their status. * **Bill Number:** This field allows you to search bills by their unique bill number. * **PO Number:** This field allows you to search bills by the purchase order number. * **From Date:** The date option allows you to filter the bills for a particular date range. Specify a starting date for bill search in this field. * **To Date:** The date option allows you to filter the bills for a particular date range. Specify an end date for bill search in this field.
#### Bills Tab Right Click Options In addition to viewing bill details, users also have a range of right-click options available to manage bills efficiently: * **Pay Bill:** Allows users to pay outstanding bills directly from the Bills tab. * **Show Payments:** Displays a summary of payments made for the selected bill. * **Show Credits Applied:** Shows any credits applied to the bill amount. * **Show Prepayments Applied:** Shows any prepayments made towards the bill. * **Edit in New Window:** Opens the bill details in a new window for easy editing and review.
### 11. Inventory Change Log: Added "Customer Name" column We have added a new column, "Customer Name" in the Inventory Change Log module. With this new column, users can now easily see which customer is associated with each inventory change. This will help businesses better understand their inventory movements and monitor any changes made by specific customers.
### 12. Purchase Order Centre: Added "Payment Term" column We have added a new column, "Payment Term" in the purchase order centre. This column allows users to easily view and track the payment terms associated with each purchase order. This information is crucial for ensuring timely payments and managing cash flow effectively. By having this information readily available in the purchase order centre, users can quickly identify any outstanding payments or upcoming due dates.
### 13. Bill Of Material: Added the option to select Sub-BOM revision We have added a new column, "Revision" in the Bill Of Material Components section. With this column, users now have the ability to select the revision of the sub-BOM for manufacturable raw materials.
This dropdown column provides a convenient way for users to specify the BOM revision for raw materials that are manufacturable. By selecting the appropriate revision, users can ensure that the correct version of the sub-BOM is used in the production process.
#### Addition of "Revision" Column in Manufacture Order In addition to the enhancement in BOM module, we have also added a new column called "Sub-BOM Revision" in the manufacture order module at the MO Lines level. This column is designed to reflect the revision selected at the BOM component level. This additional column provides users with a clear overview of the revision selected for each individual component.
These enhancements improve the precision and efficiency of managing BOMs and manufacturing orders, enabling better control over the manufacturing process. ### 14. Added Support for Checkbox Display Type in Kits We have introduced a new "Checkbox" display type for kit items, providing users with flexibility and customization when dealing with kits. **What is the Checkbox Display Type?** The Checkbox Display Type is designed to provide users with the ability to add multiple items of the kit to an order. This feature allows users to select one or all items from the kit to add to their order. By selecting the Checkbox Display Type when adding items to a kit, you can ensure that only the selected items from the kit are added to the order, providing customers with a more personalized and controlled ordering experience. This feature is available across all modules that support kits. **How Does it Work?** To utilize the Checkbox display type, follow these steps: 1. When creating a kit, select the Checkbox display type for the kit items.
2. Add multiple "**Checkbox**" display-type items to the kit.
3. When adding the kit to an order, customers will be prompted to select the checkbox items to add to the order.
This enhancement simplifies and accelerates the process of adding multiple kit items to an order. The Checkbox display type is particularly useful in scenarios where customers require flexibility in their ordering options. For example: a fashion retailer may offer a "Choose Your Own Accessory" kit, allowing customers to select the accessories from various options to add to their order. ### 15. Added Multi UOM Support For Kits We have added support for the use of kits when the multi-UOM (Unit Of Measurement) feature is enabled. This update is designed to provide greater flexibility and consistency in handling kits within orders. #### Key Features: **Support for Kits with Multi UOM Enabled:** * Kits can now be used when the multi UOM feature is turned on. This enhancement ensures that items added through kits are managed effectively within the multi UOM framework. **Items Added with Base UOM:** * When items are added by kits in orders, they will be added using their base UOM. This approach standardizes the unit of measure for kit items, ensuring consistency across orders. **Fixed UOM in Order Lines for Kit Items** * The UOM for items added through kits cannot be changed in the order lines. This restriction helps maintain the integrity of the kit structure and simplifies order management. **UOM Factor Set to "1":** * The UOM factor for items added by kits is set to "1". This ensures that the quantity of items within a kit remains consistent and aligns with the base UOM. ### 16. Item Inventory Snapshot: Enhanced Search Functionality with "All Reference" Field We have added a new search field named "All Reference" at the header level in the Item Inventory Snapshot module. This enhancement is designed to improve the search capabilities within the module, making it easier and more efficient to locate specific items based on various criteria.
#### App Config Based The search functionality is governed by two app configs: **Advanced Item Search** and **Item Search Criteria**. * **Item Search Criteria:** In this config, users can select specific columns that can be used to perform the search. This allows for customized and targeted searches based on your specific needs.\
* **Advanced Item Search:** This app config is used to enable the item search criteria. When this config is enabled, the search functionality will utilize the columns specified in the Item Search Criteria config.
#### **Multi-Keyword Search Capability** The "All Reference" search field supports multi-keyword searches. Users can enter multiple search terms separated by spaces. For example, if the **Item Search Criteria** includes `item#` and `UPC`, you can search for an item using both the item number and UPC separated by a space. This multi-faceted search capability enhances the ease and efficiency of finding specific items within the inventory. ### 17. Item: Addition of "Revision" Column in Manufacturing Info Section A new column labelled "Revision" has been added to the item subform. This column can be found in the "Used As Raw Material" tab under the Manufacturing Info section of the item sub-form. This update is specifically designed for manufacturable items used as raw materials, enabling users to easily track and identify the specific revisions used in a bill of material. When you double-click on an item to open it in read mode, you'll notice the new "Revision" column added to the Manufacturing Info section.
This column is specifically designed for manufacturable items used as raw materials, providing a clear view of the revision numbers associated with the sub- BOM used in the main bill of material. **How does it work?** The "Used As Raw Material" tab shows all the bill of materials in which the item has been used as a raw material. When revisions are created for the BOM of a raw material item, this column will display the corresponding revision number. This means that users can easily track and identify the specific revision that are used in a bill of material in which the item has been used. ### 18. Optimized Refund Process: "Process Card" Checkbox disabled for Refunds We have introduced a new enhancement to our refund process, aimed at improving the overall user experience and reducing errors. As part of this update, we have disabled the "Process Card" option when initiating a customer refund, if a card was used for the original payment during a customer deposit. #### How does it work? If a card was used to process the customer deposit payment and the payment needs to be refunded, when you go to refund the customer deposit, in the "Customer Deposit" screen you will see that the "Process Card" checkbox is disabled under the "Refund Via" field.
# May 2024 Release We are excited to announce the release of WMS integration in our ERP website, bringing a host of new features and enhancements to our system. As part of this integration, we have made several changes to various modules in the system. In this version of the release notes, we have outlined the enhancements made to different modules as a part of the WMS integration. ### Carrier As part of the WMS integration into our system, we have enhanced the Carrier module by introducing two new fields designed to improve carrier classification and management. #### New Fields Added * **Carrier Type:** We have introduced a new field called "Carrier Type" in the Carrier module. This field allows users to classify carriers within the system based on different types such as Truckload, Air Freight Carriers, Ocean Freight Carriers, Rail Freight Carriers, etc., making it easier to manage and organize carriers according to their specific characteristics and capabilities.
**Functionality:** * This field is a dropdown that displays various carrier types available in the system and allows you to select the type of carrier. * Users can manage and add carrier types from the "Carrier Type" module.
* **Service Group Code:** We have added another field called "Service Group Code" in the Carrier module. This field is designed to categorize services based on predefined codes. For example, services could be grouped into express, standard, and economy categories. Each group would have its own code.
**Functionality:** * This field is a text input where users can enter specific codes representing different service groups. * This helps in organizing and managing services provided by carriers, enabling better service differentiation and selection.
### Carrier Centre As a part of the WMS integration, we have introduced an option to enter more detailed information about the carrier by specifying its type. This information has also been added to the carrier centre making it easier to manage carriers by type. #### New column added A new column, "Carrier Type" is added to the carrier centre. This field shows the type of the carrier, such as Truckload, Air Freight Carriers, Ocean Freight Carriers, Rail Freight Carriers, etc.
### Store As part of the Warehouse Management System (WMS) integration with the XoroERP, the Store module has been enhanced to improve inventory management and distribution capabilities. This new feature allows users to specify the physical location where inventory is stored, managed, and distributed within the store. #### New field added A new dropdown option, "Facility" has been added to the Store module. This field allows you to add a facility to the store. This is the physical where inventory is stored, managed, and distributed. This can include warehouses, distribution centres, fulfillment centres, and any other storage facilities used to store products.
### Location With the latest WMS integration, some exciting enhancements have been made to the Location module. One of the key additions is the option to create Virtual LPNs, providing a convenient solution for locations without assigned LPNs. #### Added the option to create Virtual LPN An "Add Virtual LPN" toggle button has been added in the Location module. Enabling this option creates a virtual LPN for the location. This Virtual LPN will serve as a substitute for locations that do not have an assigned LPN.
{% hint style="info" %} To enable this option, make sure to activate the "**Enable Virtual LPN**" and "**Enable LPNs**" app configurations. {% endhint %} ### Item As part of the Warehouse Management System (WMS) integration with the XoroERP, significant enhancements have been made to the Item module to streamline and enhance item management capabilities. These improvements include the addition of multiple columns and new fields designed to provide comprehensive information and better control over inventory. #### Multiple columns added Several new fields have been added to the Item module to enhance item management capabilities, including: * **Master Case Qty:** This field shows the quantity of items contained within the master case, which is a larger packaging unit used for shipping and handling. * **Master Case UPC:** This field shows the Universal Product Code (UPC) assigned to the master case, used for scanning and tracking the larger packaging unit. * **Item Sub Category:** This field shows the sub-category associated with the item. * **Item Sub Category Code:** This field shows the code of the sub-category associated with the item. * * **Custom Description:** This field shows the custom description of the item. * **MID:** This column refers to the Manufacturer Identification Number. This number is a unique identifier assigned to each manufacturer for their products. * **Manufacturer:** This field captures the manufacturer of the item. * **Is 3PL Account Item?:** This field indicates whether the item is 3PL item. * **3PL Account:** This field indicates the 3PL account associated with the item. #### LPN Attributes tab A new tab, LPN Attributes has been added to the module. This tab allows you to enable or disable these five attributes of the LPN:
* Lot Number * Batch Number * Quality * Manufacture Date * Expiry Date If you enable the attributes, you will be prompted to fill in these details when receiving an item on WMS app. ### Item UOM As a part of the integration of XoroERP with WMS (Warehouse Management System), we have introduced a noticable enhancement in the Item UOM module. This feature aims at enhancing the user experience and functionality of the Item UOM module, making it easier for you to manage your products effectively. #### Addition of Measurement Type field A new "Measurement Type" dropdown option has been added to the Item UOM module. This allows the users to select the preferred system of measurement for their products. **Options Available:** * **Metric**: Select this option if your products are measured using the metric system (e.g., meters, kilograms, liters). * **Imperial**: Select this option if your products are measured using the imperial system (e.g., feet, pounds, gallons). ### User As a part of the WMS integration, one of the most significant enhancements has been made to the User module. With the user module, the system now provides an option to create a user specifically for warehouse management. Furthermore, there's an option added to link the warehouse user with the ERP user. #### New Fields Added * **User Type added:** A significant enhancement as a part of WMS integration is the addition of support for WMS users. Previously, the system only supported ERP users, but now users can be designated as WMS users when creating new user accounts, providing a more tailored experience for users who specifically work with the WMS module.
Creating a WMS user involves entering essential user information, such as user name, role, user ID, and the warehouse facility associated with the user. Please note that associating a user with a specific facility allows them to access and manage inventory, orders, and other warehouse-related tasks within that particular location. Additionally, on selecting the WMS user option, there's an option to "Link ERP User". Enabling this option allows for linking a WMS user with an existing ERP user. This ensures a seamless experience for the user. To link an ERP user, you can select the user from the "Linked ERP User" from the dropdown menu, enter the User ID and facility, and then click "Save" to create the user. This new feature streamlines the user management process and enhances the system's overall functionality.
* **Print Requester:** This dropdown field allows you to select the user who is responsible for initiating and managing print requests within the WMS for the specified user, such as labels, packing slips, and other essential documents. * **Facility:** This dropdown option allows you to select the physical location or site where the user operates. This field associates the user with a particular warehouse, distribution centre, or other logistics facility within the organization. ### Item Centre In line with the Warehouse Management System (WMS) integration with XoroERP, the Item Centre module has been significantly enhanced to improve item tracking and management capabilities. #### Header Search Dropdown Added A new dropdown search option, "3PL Account" has been added at the header level in the Item Centre. This option allows you to filter the items that are associated with the selected 3PL account(s).
#### Multiple Columns Added The Item Centre module has been updated with the addition of several new columns, including: * **Master Case Qty:** This field shows the quantity of items contained within the master case, which is a larger packaging unit used for shipping and handling. * **Master Case UPC:** This field shows the Universal Product Code (UPC) assigned to the master case, used for scanning and tracking the larger packaging unit. * **Item Sub Category:** This field shows the sub-category associated with the item. * **Item Sub Category Code:** This field shows the code of the sub-category associated with the item. * **Last Counted Dttm:** This column displays the date and time of the most recent inventory count for a specific location, ensuring you have up-to-date information on stock levels. * **Last Counted By:** This column identifies the user responsible for the last item count. * **Custom Description:** This field shows the custom description of the item, * **MID:** This column refers to the Manufacturer Identification Number. This number is a unique identifier assigned to each manufacturer for their products. * **Manufacturer:** This field shows the manufacturer of the item. ### Location Centre These are the enhancements made to Location Centre. #### Header-level search option added In the Location Centre module, we have introduced a **"Store"** dropdown search option at the header level. This dropdown contains a list of all stores in the system, giving users the ability to select multiple stores at once to view location details. This feature will save users time and effort by allowing them to easily switch between stores and access the information they need without having to navigate through the entire location records.
#### Added a new column We have added the **"Virtual LPN"** in the location centre. This column indicates whether the location is set up as a virtual LPN or not.
#### Added new options * **Batch Delete:** This option allows you to batch delete multiple locations.
* **Batch Update Virtual LPN:** This field allows you to batch update the virtual LPNs.
This enhancement streamlines the process of managing and monitoring locations across different stores, providing users with greater flexibility and efficiency in their operations. ### Customer Significant enhancements have been made to the Customer module as a part of the WMS integration. These enhancements include adding several new fields designed to meet the specific needs of WMS operations, particularly for third-party logistics (3PL) customers. #### Added new fields * **Added 3PL Customer Type (Primary Tab):** We have introduced a new field, "3PL Customer Type" in the customer module in the primary tab. If the customer is associated with 3PL operations, you can use this field to define the type of 3PL customer. Users can select from two options: * **3PL Account:** Select this option if the customer operates a 3PL account. * **3PL Account Customer:** Select this option if the customer is a client of a 3PL account.
* **Billing Account (Other Info Tab):** This dropdown field is displayed if the "3PL Customer Type" is set to "3PL Account." This field allows users to select the billing account associated with the 3PL account.
* **3PL Account (Other Info Tab):** This field appears if the "3PL Customer Type" is set to "3PL Account Customer." This field allows you to specify the 3PL account to which the 3PL account customer belongs.
* **Is VAS required? (Other Info Tab):** Enable this option if Value-Added Services (VAS) are required for the customer.
* **Define Carton Break Rule (Other Info Tab):** This option allows users to select the carton break rule for the customer, which determines how cartons are handled and broken down during warehouse operations. Additionally, the users can perform the following actions: * **Edit Carton Break Rule:** Allows users to edit the details of the selected carton break rule. * **Add Carton Break Rule:** Redirects the users to the "Carton Break Rule" module to add a new carton break.
* **Is Pack & Hold Required? (Other Info Tab):** This field allows users to specify whether Pack & Hold services are required for the customer, streamlining order fulfillment processes. Users can indicate whether orders for this customer need to be packed and held for a specific period.\ \ Please note: To access this feature, it is important to enable the "Enable Pack & Hold Order(s) Feature" app config.
* **Is Residential? (Contact Info Tab)**: This toggle field is added to the Ship To Address details tab. Enabling this option helps in identifying whether the customer's address is a residential one. This information is crucial for planning deliveries to residential addresses efficiently.
### Customer Centre As part of the Warehouse Management System (WMS) integration with our system, we have introduced several enhancements to the Customer Centre module. These changes are designed to streamline operations and provide users with more flexibility and control over their 3PL customer accounts. #### Header Search Dropdown * **3PL Customer Type:** This dropdown option allows you to filter and view details based on the type of 3PL customer. Available options are: 3PL Account and 3PL Customer Account. * **3PL Account:** This dropdown option enables you to select a specific 3PL account to view its associated details.
#### Header Level Columns
* **Shipping Notes:** This column displays any special notes or instructions related to the shipping requirements of the customer. * **Is Pack And Hold Required?:** This field indicates whether the "Pack and Hold" service is required for the customer. * **3PL Account Name:** This field displays the name of the 3PL account associated with the customer. * **3PL Account Code:** This field shows the unique code assigned to the 3PL account. * **3PL Account Description:** This field shows the description of the 3PL account to offer additional context and details about the 3PL account to assist in understanding its scope and operations. * **3PL Customer Type:** This field indicates the type of 3PL customer (either 3PL Account or 3PL Customer Account). * **Default Carton Break Rule:** This field displays the default rule for breaking down cartons for the customer. ### Sales Order #### Sales Order Module Enhancements with WMS Integration XoroERP has introduced significant enhancements to the Sales module by integrating it with the Warehouse Management System (WMS). These enhancements bring a range of new features and functionalities to streamline operations and improve user experience. **Addition of Fields in Sales Header's Other Tab** In the Other tab of the Sales Header, several new fields have been added to provide more comprehensive information and improve data accuracy.
These include: 1. **Duty Payment Terms:** This field captures the payment conditions agreed upon between business partners regarding duties applicable to supplied goods or provided services. The options in the dropdown are: * Delivered Duty Unpaid: * Delivered Duty Paid
2. **Subbrand:** Enables users to specify subbrand details related to the sales transaction, enhancing product categorization and tracking. Users can selected from the options present in the dropdown 3. **EIN Number:** Facilitates the inclusion of Employer Identification Numbers, crucial for regulatory compliance and business identification purposes. Within the Sub Brand module, users can assign specific Sub Brand Names to items. These names seamlessly integrate into the dropdown menu within the Sub Brand field of the Sales module.
4. **Custom Comment Field Addition:** Another addition in the Other tab of the Sales Order Module is the Custom Comment field. This field provides users with the flexibility to add custom comments or notes to sales orders, enhancing communication and order customization capabilities.
5. **Min Fill Rate% Field Addition:** In the Other tab of the Sales Order Module, a new field called Min Fill Rate% has been added. This field allows users to set a minimum fill rate percentage for sales orders, ensuring that orders meet a specified level of fulfillment before processing.
**Quality Module Integration** A notable addition to the Sales module is the integration of the Quality module, a specialized feature developed due to WMS integration.
The Quality module empowers users to select and assign quality attributes to items within Sales Orders (SO). Here's how it works: * **Quality Selection:** Users can now choose quality attributes for items selected and added to an SO. This functionality is particularly beneficial for industries where product quality variations are significant. * **Quality Name and Code Assignment:** Within the Quality module, users can assign specific quality names and codes to items. These assigned codes and names seamlessly integrate into the dropdown menu within the Quality field of the Sales module. By integrating the Quality module, XoroERP ensures greater flexibility and accuracy in managing product quality within sales transactions, enhancing overall operational efficiency and customer satisfaction. | Quality Name | | | ----------------------------------- | -------- | | BBC - Defective Inventory | BBC-DFCT | | BBC - First Quality / New Inventory | BBC-FRST | | BBC - On Hold Inventory | BBC-HOLD | | BBC - Samples | BBC-SAMP | | BLV - Defective Inventory | BLV-DFCT | **Is Residential Toggle in Ship to Address Field:** A new toggle called Is Residential has been added to the Ship to Address field in the Sales Order Module. This toggle, pre-filled from customer data, helps identify whether the shipping address is a residential or commercial location, aiding in shipping logistics and delivery planning. **Quality Dropdown at Item Detail Level:** At the item detail level, a Quality dropdown has been added in the Sales Order Module. This dropdown allows users to select the quality or condition of specific items within the order, providing detailed information for order processing and fulfillment. **Require Pack & Hold Toggle in Sales Order Header:** XoroERP has introduced a new feature in the Sales Order header called Require Pack & Hold toggle. When activated, this feature makes the Sales Order marked as Pack & Hold required. The picker will stage all cartons in the staging location, streamlining the packing and holding process for orders.
**Release Pack & Hold / Pack and Hold Order in Header Options Dropdown:** Additionally, a new option called Release Pack & Hold / Pack and Hold Order has been added to the Header Options dropdown menu. This option allows users to release or hold orders as per their requirements, providing flexibility and control over order processing and fulfillment stages.
### Sales Order Centre XoroERP has made significant improvements to the Sales Centre module by integrating it with the Warehouse Management System (WMS). These enhancements introduce a variety of new features and functionalities aimed at streamlining operations and enhancing the user experience. 1. **Header Options Dropdown Menu:**
* **Generate Sales Order Batch:** This option allows users to generate a batch of sales orders, streamlining the process of creating multiple orders simultaneously. * **Remove Pick Exception:** This option enables users to remove pick exceptions, which are situations where items cannot be picked from inventory for various reasons, helping to resolve inventory management issues efficiently. * **Pack & Hold Option:** A new option, Pack & Hold, has been added to the sales header dropdown menu. This option allows users to mark sales orders for packing and holding, ensuring that the order is held until further instructions are provided for shipment. * **Remove Pick Exception Option:** Another new option, Remove Pick Exception, is now available in the sales header dropdown. This option enables users to remove any pick exceptions associated with sales orders, streamlining order fulfillment processes. * **Toggle Lock Status Option:** The Toggle Lock Status option has been introduced in the sales header dropdown. This option allows users to toggle the lock status of sales orders, providing flexibility in managing order locks for editing or processing purposes. * **Allocation Status Option:** Users can now access the Allocation Status option in the sales header dropdown. This option displays the current allocation status of sales orders, providing visibility into order allocation processes. * **3PL Dropdown Option:** A new 3PL Dropdown option has been added to the sales header dropdown menu. This dropdown provides users with access to 3PL (Third-Party Logistics) options or functionalities, enhancing logistics and order fulfillment capabilities within the ERP-WMS system. 2. **Header Icons - Sales Order Header Columns:** * **Sales Order Batch#:** A unique identifier for a batch of sales orders. * **Is Lead Order?:** Indicates whether the order is a lead order, typically referring to an order that initiates a series of subsequent actions or processes. * **Is Exception Order?:** Indicates whether the order is an exception order, often related to orders that deviate from standard processing procedures. * **Last Wave Attempt Date:** The date of the last attempt made to process the order within a wave in the warehouse. * **Picked Date:** The date when items from the order were picked from inventory. * **Staged Date:** The date when items from the order were staged or prepared for shipment. * **Packed Date:** The date when items from the order were packed for shipping. * **Ready To Ship Date:** The date when the order is ready for shipment. * **Lock Flag:** Indicates whether the order or specific elements within it are locked for editing or processing. * **Minimum Fill Rate%:** The minimum acceptable fill rate percentage for the order. * **Fill Rate%:** The actual fill rate percentage achieved for the order. * **Fill Rate Failed Flag:** Indicates if the fill rate for the order failed to meet the minimum requirement. * **Last Location Name:** The name of the last location where items from the order were located. * **Duty Payment Terms:** The terms and conditions related to duty payments for the order. * **EIN (Employer Identification Number):** A unique identification number assigned to a business entity for tax purposes. * **Carton Count:** The number of cartons or packages associated with the order. * **Pallet Count:** The number of pallets associated with the order. * **Custom Comment:** A customized comment or note related to the order. * **Is Residential:** Indicates if the shipping address is a residential address. * **Priority Code:** A code indicating the priority level or urgency of the order. 3. **Sales Order Detail Level Columns:** * **3PL Account Name:** The name of the third-party logistics provider associated with the order. * **Quality Name:** The name assigned to the quality attributes of items in the order. * **Quality Code:** A code representing specific quality attributes of items in the order. * **Allocation Status:** Indicates the status of item allocation within the order. * **Last Wave Attempt Date:** Same as in the header section, indicating the last attempt date within a wave for specific order items. * **Picked Date:** Same as in the header section, indicating the date when specific items were picked for the order. * **Packed Date:** Same as in the header section, indicating the date when specific items were packed for the order. * **Ready To Ship Date:** Same as in the header section, indicating the date when specific items in the order are ready for shipment. * **Staged Date:** Same as in the header section, indicating the date when specific items were staged for the order. * **Line Allocation%:** The allocation percentage of items on each line within the order. * **Item SubCategory:** The subcategory to which specific items in the order belong. * **Lock Flag:** Same as in the header section, indicating whether specific elements within the order are locked. * **Minimum Order Fill Rate%:** The minimum acceptable fill rate percentage for specific items within the order. * **Fill Rate%:** The actual fill rate percentage achieved for specific items within the order. * **Fill Rate Failed Flag:** Indicates if the fill rate for specific items in the order failed to meet the minimum requirement. * **Duty Payment Terms:** Same as in the header section, indicating the duty payment terms for specific items in the order. * **EIN:** Same as in the header section, indicating the Employer Identification Number for specific items in the order. * **Priority Code:** Same as in the header section, indicating the priority code for specific items in the order. ### User Centre XoroERP's release notes for its ERP integrated with WMS system highlight significant improvements in the User Centre module. One notable enhancement is the addition of new columns in the Header Icons section. **Columns Added** Let's delve into these enhancements and define the terms mentioned under each column:
1. **Linked ERP User:** This column refers to users who are linked or associated with the ERP system. These users may have specific permissions, roles, or access levels within the ERP environment. 2. **UserType:** This column indicates the type or category of users within the system. User types can vary based on roles such as administrators, managers, employees, or other custom-defined categories. 3. **Facility:** In the context of the User Centre module, the Facility column likely refers to the physical or virtual locations associated with users. This could include offices, branches, warehouses, or other organizational units. 4. **Print Requester:** This column pertains to users who initiate print requests within the system. Print requesters may generate documents, reports, or other printable materials as part of their workflow or operational tasks. These additions to the Header Icons columns section provide enhanced visibility and management capabilities related to user profiles, types, locations, and printing functionalities within the User Centre module. Users can now access and manage these aspects more effectively, contributing to improved user experience and streamlined operations. ### Vendor XoroERP's release notes for its ERP integrated with WMS system showcase notable enhancements within the Vendor module. Specifically, the module now includes additional dropdown options in specific fields.
1. **3PL Vendor Type Dropdown(Primary Tab):** This dropdown menu allows users to select the type of vendor associated with third-party logistics (3PL) services. The options available are: * **General Vendor:** Refers to vendors who provide general goods or services but may not be specialized in 3PL services. * **3PL Account Vendor:** Indicates vendors specifically engaged in providing 3PL services, such as warehousing, transportation, or fulfillment services. 2. **3PL Account Dropdowns:** These dropdown menus are likely associated with the 3PL Account Vendor type. They enable users to select specific 3PL accounts or service providers within the system. Users can choose from a list of available 3PL accounts, each representing a distinct vendor or service provider offering 3PL services. By introducing these dropdown options, XoroERP enhances the Vendor module's functionality by providing more granularity in vendor classification, particularly regarding 3PL services. Users can now categorize vendors based on their 3PL capabilities and easily associate specific 3PL accounts with relevant transactions or operations within the ERP system. ### ASN Centre WMS integration has brought about significant changes in the ASN Centre, enhancing the functionality and user experience for managing Advanced Shipping Notices (ASNs). These changes range from the addition of a new view to the addition of multiple columns in the header and detail view. #### ASN Detail Location view added A new view, the ASN Detail Location view, has been introduced to provide a detailed overview of the location where items in the ASN have been received. This view includes essential information such as store, location, and LPN# details, with ASNs recorded item-wise for a comprehensive record per item. The module also features new search dropdowns for efficient filtering of results. * **3PL Account Dropdown:** This option allows users to select a 3PL account within the system to view items received, choosing from a list of available accounts representing distinct vendors or service providers offering 3PL services. * **Status Dropdown:** This option enables users to select the ASN line status for which they wish to view records. #### ASN Header view The integration has led to several changes in the ASN header view, including the addition of multiple new columns for improved data visibility and management. 1. **Addition of columns:** Multiple new columns have been added in the ASN Header view, providing detailed information on shipments, including: * **Third Party Ref#:** This field captures the unique reference number assigned by the third party (vendor or service provider) for tracking and identifying the shipment within the system. * **Third Party Source:** This field shows the origin or source associated with the third party. * **Third Party Display Name:** This field shows the name displayed for the third party vendor or service provider, used for easy identification within the ERP system. * **Third Party Image:** This field captures the image or logo associated with the third party vendor or service provider, enhancing visual identification. * **Notes:** This field shows any additional information or comments related to the shipment, provided for context or specific instructions. * **Expected Carton Count:** This field specifies the anticipated number of cartons or packages expected in the received shipment. * **Actual Carton Count:** This field records the actual number of cartons or packages received in the shipment, allowing for comparison with the expected count. * **Expected Pallet Count:** This field indicates the projected number of pallets expected in the shipment. It helps in planning and allocating space for the incoming goods. * **Actual Pallet Count:** This field shows the actual number of pallets received, facilitating comparison with the expected pallet count. * **Dock Location:** This field specifies the designated location or dock where the shipment is expected to arrive, aiding in the logistical handling of the delivery. * **Shipment Arrived?:** This field indicates whether the shipment has reached its destination or it is still in transit. It serves as a status indicator to track the progress of the shipment. * **PO Third Party Ref#:** This field indicates the purchase order reference number provided by the third party, linking the shipment to a specific purchase order in their system. * **Carrier:** The Carrier field identifies the transportation company or carrier responsible for delivering the goods. * **3PL Account Name:** This field specifies the name of the third-party logistics provider account managing the shipment, used for tracking and accountability. * **LPN Count:** This field denotes the total number of License Plate Numbers (LPNs) associated with the received items. * **Line Count:** This field indicates the total number of item lines included in the shipment. It helps in verifying the completeness of the order and ensures all items are received as expected. * **Total Qty Received:** This field indicates the total quantity of items received in the shipment. * **Received %:** The field shows the percentage of the total shipment that has been received compared to the total expected quantity, providing a quick overview of receipt completeness. * **RMA Third Party Ref#:** This field represents the Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) number associated with the third party involved in the shipment. It links the return process to the original shipment for efficient handling of returns. * **Bill#:** This field contains the bill number or reference associated with the shipment. 2. **Update ASN Notes:** Users now have the option to update ASN notes when editing shipment information, enhancing communication and record-keeping capabilities.
#### ASN Detail view In the ASN Detail view, additional columns have been included to offer a more comprehensive view of ASN details and facilitate efficient tracking and management of shipments. * **Account 3PL Name:** This field specifies the name of the third-party logistics provider account managing the shipment, used for tracking and accountability. * **Item Sub Category:** This field shows the sub-category associated with the item. * **LPN Count:** This field denotes the total number of License Plate Numbers (LPNs) associated with the received items. * **Received %:** The field shows the percentage of the total shipment that has been received compared to the total expected quantity, providing a quick overview of receipt completeness. * **Master Case Qty:** This field shows the quantity of items contained within the master case, which is a larger packaging unit used for shipping and handling. * **Master Case UPC:** This field shows the Universal Product Code (UPC) assigned to the master case, used for scanning and tracking the larger packaging unit. * **Received Quality:** This field shows the quality of the item received in the shipment. * **Expected Quality:** This field indicates the expected quality level of the items as specified in the ASN, against which the received quality will be compared. * **Carton UCC:** This is a unique identifier assigned to individual cartons or packages within the shipment. This code helps in accurately identifying and tracking the movement of individual units, enhancing inventory visibility and accuracy. * **Pallet UCC:** This is a unique identifier assigned to pallets used for transporting goods. Tracking Pallet UCC facilitates efficient handling and storage of palletized shipments, streamlining the logistics and distribution processes. * **Bill#:** This field contains the bill number or reference associated with the shipment. * **Packing Slip#:** This field shows the reference number of the packing slip that accompanies the shipment, detailing the contents and quantities of the items shipped. * **RMA Third Party Ref#:** This field shows the Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) reference number provided by the third party, used to track and manage returned goods. * **PO Third Party Ref#:** This field indicates the purchase order reference number provided by the third party, linking the shipment to a specific purchase order in their system. #### ASN Subform Significant enhancements have been made to the ASN subform view. * **Added Shipment Info tab:** We have added the Shipment Info tab in the ASN subform. This tab provides detailed shipment information to the user, including shipment arrival date, BOL#, Tracking#, Dock Location and Type, Carton Count, and Pallet Count.
* **Added new options:** We have added two new options in the ASN subform to allow the users to update the shipment details and keep them updated.
* **Edit Shipment Info:** This option allows you to add or edit shipment info for the ASN, such as Shipment Arrival Date, BOL#, Tracking#, Dock Location, Dock Location Type, Carton Count, and Pallet Count.
* **Update ASN Notes:** This option allows you to update the ASN Notes to ensure any updated information regarding the ASN shipment is conveyed to the concerned person. ### Receive ASN As a part of the WMS integration, significant enhancements have been made to the Receive ASN process. When entering the location details for receiving items, many essential details have been added. In addition to that, multiple columns have been added in the Receive ASN module. These new columns have been added to help track the shipment process from the warehouse more efficiently. #### Multiple Additions to the Receive Item to Location modal Several additions have been made to the "**Receive Item to Location**" modal used to receive a single item in the ASN. * **Added support of LPN attributes:** We have added the option to show/hide LPN attributes based on the item mapping. This means that the LPN attributes enabled for the item in item details will be shown here. * **Added Quality column:** We have also added the "Quality" column in the item details. This is an editable field and can be updated when receiving the item. * **Added Quantity Received column:** We have also added the "Qty Received" column in the item details section. This is an editable column that allows you to manually enter the quantity received for an item, in case you have received less quantity. #### Additions of columns in ASN Item Details The following columns have been added to the ASN Item Details section in the Receive ASN module: * **Putaway Complete Qty:** This column shows the item quantity that has been successfully put away in their designated storage locations within the warehouse. * **In Putaway Qty: T**his column shows the number of items that are currently in the process of being put away in the warehouse. * **LPN Count:** This field denotes the total count of unique LPNs linked to the specific item being received. * **Master Case Qty:** This column displays the total quantity of items in the shipment's master case carton. * **Master Case UPC:** This field shows the Universal Product Code (UPC) assigned to the master case, used for scanning and tracking the larger packaging unit. * **Expected Quality:** This field indicates the expected quality level of the items as specified in the ASN, against which the received quality will be compared. * **Received Quality:** This field shows the quality of the item received in the shipment. ### Inventory Movement As a part of the latest enhancement, a new field has been added to the Inventory Movement module that allows users to define the quality of the item. **Quality Field Added** A notable addition to the Inventory Movement module is the integration of the Quality module, a specialized feature developed due to WMS integration. With this update, a new dropdown field, "Quality" has been added to the Inventory Movement module. Users can now easily select the quality of the item from the options provided in the Quality module. This addition will streamline the process of tracking and managing inventory based on its quality.
#### Added Support To Show/Hide LPN Attributes We have added the support to show or hide LPN attribute fields in the "Move Inventory To" section of the Inventory Movement module.
The LPN attributes will be displayed based on the LPN attributes mapping in the item details. This means that only the LPN attributes enabled for the item in the item details will be displayed here.
### Inventory By Location Several new columns have been added to the Inventory By Location module as part of the WMS integration. These columns provide valuable information that will streamline inventory management processes and improve overall efficiency within your warehouse operations. **Multiple Columns Added** Let's delve into each new column and its purpose: 1. **Quality**: This column displays the quality associated with each column. 2. **Pallet**: This column indicates the specific pallet on which an item is stored, facilitating quick retrieval and tracking of products within your warehouse. 3. **Case Qty**: This column displays the number of items contained within a master case, aiding in accurate inventory counts and replenishment planning. 4. **Virtual LPN**: This column displays the Virtual LPN (Virtual License Plate Number) assigned to the item, helping you track and manage inventory movements efficiently. 5. **Is Sealed Case**: This field indicates whether the case is a sealed case or not. A sealed case represents a case that has a single type of item and the case is completely filled. 6. **Last Counted Datetime**: This column displays the date and time of the most recent inventory count for a specific location, ensuring you have up-to-date information on stock levels. 7. **Last Counted By**: This column identifies the user responsible for the last inventory count. 8. **PTO Id**: The PTO Id column represents the Product Transfer Order identification, allowing you to track and manage inventory transfers between locations accurately. These new columns aim to enhance visibility, accuracy, and efficiency in managing your warehouse inventory. By leveraging these additional data points, you can make informed decisions, optimize stock levels, and streamline your overall warehouse operations. **Multi-Select Store Dropdown in Inventory By Location:** We have introduced a new multi-select store dropdown feature in the Inventory By Location functionality. This enhancement allows users to select multiple stores simultaneously, making it easier to view and manage inventory across different locations. By selecting multiple stores, users can efficiently compare stock levels, streamline inventory management processes, and ensure better accuracy in tracking inventory movement between various stores. This improvement aims to save time and enhance the user experience by providing a more comprehensive and flexible inventory overview. **Batch Edit LPN Info Option in Header:** A new option for batch editing License Plate Number (LPN) information has been added to the header options. This feature allows users to update LPN details for multiple items at once, significantly improving efficiency in inventory adjustments. With the batch edit functionality, users can quickly and accurately modify LPN information, reducing the likelihood of errors and ensuring that inventory records are up-to-date. This enhancement is particularly beneficial for large-scale inventory operations where managing LPNs individually can be time-consuming and cumbersome. ### Inventory Adjustment As a part of the latest WMS integration, a new column has been added to the Inventory Adjustment module that allows users to view the item quality. **Quality Field added** We have introduced the "Quality" field to the Inventory Adjustment module. This new feature provides the following capabilities: * **Add New Location Screen:** When adding an item to a new location, users can now select the quality of the item using the "Quality" dropdown option.
* **Adjustment Details Section:** The quality column has been added, allowing users to view the quality of items directly within the adjustment details.
These enhancements ensure better tracking and management of item quality during inventory adjustments, improving overall inventory accuracy and control. ### RMA XoroERP's release notes for its ERP integrated with WMS system highlight a notable improvement in the RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization) module, specifically focusing on enhancements related to the ASN (Advanced Shipping Notice) process. Let's elaborate on these enhancements and define the terms mentioned in the context of the RMA module: 1. **Main Tab of RMA Header:**
* **Added Order Type:** This field refers to the type of order associated with the RMA, such as a sales order, purchase order, or transfer order. It allows users to select the Order Type from the field dropdown and categorize RMAs based on their originating order types. * **Brand:** The brand field identifies the brand or manufacturer of the returned item, providing crucial information for inventory management, quality control, and vendor relations. It allows users to select the Brand from the field dropdown. * **Quality:** This field pertains to the quality or condition of the returned item, allowing users to classify RMAs based on quality issues or reasons for return. 2. **RMA Detail Columns:**
* **Alternative Item Number1, Alternative Item Number2, Alternative Item Number3:** These columns refer to alternative item numbers or codes that can be associated with the returned item. They may represent different versions, substitutes, or variants of the same product, offering flexibility in managing returned inventory. * **Quality:** Similar to the quality field in the main RMA tab, this column in the detail section allows users to specify the quality of individual items within the RMA, providing detailed information for processing and disposition. * **Pto Id:** This term refers to a Product Tracking Order (PTO) identification number or code associated with the RMA, aiding in tracking and tracing returned products throughout the supply chain or return process. These enhancements in the RMA module streamline the ASN process by providing additional fields and dropdown options to capture detailed information about returned items, including their types, brands, qualities, alternative identifiers, and tracking details. This level of granularity improves accuracy, efficiency, and visibility in managing RMA transactions within the ERP integrated with WMS system. ### RMA Centre XoroERP's release notes for its ERP integrated with the cWMS system highlight significant enhancements in the RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization) Centre module. These improvements focus on streamlining processes and enhancing user experience. Let's delve into these enhancements and define the terms mentioned under various columns in the context of the RMA Centre module: 1. **Multi-Select Store Dropdown in Store Field:** * The Store field in the RMA header now supports multi-select functionality, allowing users to choose multiple stores simultaneously. This enhancement facilitates more flexible and efficient store selection during RMA creation or processing. 2. **Columns Added in RMA Header:**
* **Quality Name:** This column refers to the name or description of the quality attribute associated with returned items. It helps categorize RMAs based on quality issues or conditions. * **Ship To First Name:** The first name of the recipient or destination contact associated with the shipment of returned items. * **Ship To Last Name:** The last name of the recipient or destination contact associated with the shipment of returned items. * **Ship To Address1:** The primary address line of the recipient or destination where returned items should be shipped. * **Ship To Address2:** The secondary address line of the recipient or destination, if applicable. * **Ship To City:** The city of the recipient or destination address. * **Ship To State:** The state or region of the recipient or destination address. * **Ship To Country:** The country of the recipient or destination address. * **Ship To Postal/Zip:** The postal code or ZIP code of the recipient or destination address. * **Order Type Name:** The name or description of the order type associated with the RMA, providing context to the type of transaction. * **Customer Account#:** The unique account number or identifier associated with the customer initiating the RMA. * **Account 3PL Name:** The name of the third-party logistics provider associated with the RMA. * **Brand:** The brand or manufacturer of the returned item, crucial for inventory management and quality control. 3. **Columns Added in RMA Detail:** * **PTO Id:** This column represents the Product Tracking Order identification number or code associated with specific items in the RMA. It aids in tracking and tracing returned products throughout the supply chain or return process. * **Account 3PL Name:** Similar to the header column, this column in the detail section displays the name of the third-party logistics provider associated with specific items in the RMA. * **Quality:** Refers to the quality or condition of individual items within the RMA, providing detailed information for processing and disposition. ### Vendor Centre XoroERP's release notes for its ERP integrated with WMS system showcase notable enhancements within the Vendor Centre module. These improvements aim to streamline vendor management processes and provide users with more comprehensive options and information. Let's dive into these enhancements and define the terms mentioned under various columns in the context of the Vendor Centre module: 1. **Field Dropdowns Added to Vendor Centre Header:** * **3PL Vendor Type:** This dropdown field allows users to select the type of third-party logistics (3PL) vendor from the available options in the dropdown menu. The options include: * **All Type:** Represents all types of vendors, including general vendors and 3PL account vendors. * **General Vendor:** Refers to vendors providing general goods or services but not specialized in 3PL services. * **3PL Account Vendor:** Indicates vendors specifically engaged in providing 3PL services, such as warehousing, transportation, or fulfillment services. * **3PL Account:** This dropdown field enables users to select the type of 3PL account associated with the vendor. 3PL accounts are created using the Accounts module and can vary based on the services and capabilities offered by the third-party logistics provider. 2. **Columns Added in the Header Icons Field:** * **3PL Account Name:** This column displays the name of the 3PL account associated with the vendor. * **3PL Account Code:** Represents the unique code or identifier assigned to the 3PL account. * **3PL Account Description:** Provides a brief description or details about the 3PL account's services, capabilities, or specialization. * **3PL Vendor Type:** Indicates the type of vendor, specifically focusing on the 3PL aspect, whether it's a general vendor or a 3PL account vendor. These additions in the Vendor Centre module offer users enhanced flexibility in categorizing and managing vendors, especially those involved in third-party logistics services. ### Generate Cycle Count Generate Cycle Count module enhancements in XoroERP's integrated ERP with WMS system are designed to improve inventory management processes. Let's elaborate on these enhancements and define the terms mentioned under various columns: 1. **If the WMS OFF:** Two new options have been added to the Generate Cycle Count Field dropdown:
* **Item & Location:** This functionality generates cycle counts based on the combination of items and their respective locations in the warehouse. It helps in accurately tracking inventory levels and ensuring stock accuracy. Suppose a company operates multiple warehouses and wants to conduct a thorough inventory audit for specific products across different locations. In such a scenario, the Item & Location cycle count option enables them to target specific items at precise locations, ensuring comprehensive inventory accuracy checks and effective stock management. 2. **If the WMS ON:** * Added new Option (Cycle count queue): * This option generates cycle counts specifically for missing items that are part of the WMS feature. It focuses on reconciling discrepancies and maintaining inventory integrity within the warehouse management system. 3. **Store Dropdown:**
* This dropdown allows users to filter data based on a particular store. It enables targeted analysis and management of inventory across different store locations, improving operational efficiency and inventory control. 4. **Introduction of Break Cycle Count By Option:** XoroERP has introduced a new feature in the Generate Cycle Count Pro Module called "Break Cycle Count By." Users can access this option by clicking on the "Generate Cycle Counts" link, which opens a popup window with the "Break Cycle Count By" option. When generating cycle counts using the Break Cycle Count By, users can select a criteria, such as Zone, from the popup window. Choosing the Zone option will break down the data based on location zones within the warehouse. Subsequently, multiple cycle counts will be generated, each corresponding to a specific location zone. This functionality offers a more granular approach to cycle counting, allowing for targeted inventory management and accuracy improvements. These enhancements in the Generate Cycle Count module offer advanced functionality for inventory tracking and reconciliation, particularly in the context of item-location combinations and missing items within the WMS environment. The addition of the store dropdown further enhances usability and data filtering capabilities for efficient inventory management. ### **Cycle Count Centre** 1. **Cycle Count Detail View in Search Field Dropdown:**
* XoroERP has enhanced the Cycle Count Centre by introducing a new Cycle Count detail view option in the Search field dropdown. This feature enables users to access a detailed view of cycle counts directly from the search interface. Users can quickly review essential information such as item quantities, locations, and status without navigating to separate screens, enhancing productivity and data accessibility. 2. **SubForm for Cycle Count:** * A SubForm has been added to the Cycle Count Centre, providing a structured and organized view of cycle count-related data. This SubForm feature enhances data presentation, allowing users to view and manage cycle count details more efficiently. Users can navigate through cycle count information seamlessly, improving overall usability and workflow management. 3. **Edit in New Window Feature in Context View Options:**
* XoroERP now includes an Edit in New Window feature accessible via right-click options in the context view. This feature allows users to open cycle count details in a new window for editing purposes. It streamlines the editing process, providing a focused environment for making changes without disrupting the main interface. This feature enhances user experience and productivity during cycle count management. 4. **Status Options in Cycle Count Centre:**
* The Cycle Count Centre now includes status indicators such as open, in progress, accepted, and void. These status options provide valuable insights into the progress and status of cycle counts. Users can easily track ongoing counts, identify completed counts, and manage exceptions effectively. This feature enhances visibility and control over cycle count activities within the ERP-WMS system. 5. **Store Filter for Data Filtering:**
* XoroERP has introduced a Store filter in the Cycle Count Centre, allowing users to filter cycle count data based on specific stores. This filter functionality enhances data analysis and organization by enabling users to focus on cycle counts related to particular stores. ### **Cycle Count Entry** 1. **Cycle Count Generation Functionality:** XoroERP has introduced a significant functionality enhancement in the Cycle Count Entry Module. When generating cycle counts, the Count Id field is now configured to start from 1 for every cycle count. This ensures a systematic and organized approach to cycle count identification, simplifying tracking and management of cycle count records. 2. **Added Columns:** The Cycle Count Entry Module now includes additional columns for enhanced data capture and analysis: * **Recounted Count:** This column records the count obtained after a recounting process, providing visibility into discrepancies and accuracy improvements. * **Is Moved?:** Indicates whether the inventory item has been moved or relocated during the cycle count process, helping to identify potential inventory discrepancies. * **Adjustment After Count:** Records any adjustments made to inventory levels after the cycle count is completed, facilitating accurate inventory reconciliation. * **Is Adjustment Exists After Count?:** This column flags whether adjustments exist in inventory levels after the cycle count, alerting users to potential discrepancies or changes post-count. ### Pack & Ship With the recent integration of our Warehouse Management System (WMS) into the XoroERP, we have added a new field and search option in the Pack and Ship module. This update is designed to streamline your workflow and improve efficiency in order processing and shipment. #### **New Field Added** **SO Batch #:** This field shows the unique identifier of the batch for a sales order. Orders assigned to a batch will be shipped together as a batch.
#### **Enhanced Search with SO Batch #** The SO Batch # option has also been added to the Search By dropdown in the Pack and Ship Centre. Users can now search by the batch number to retrieve all order lines within that batch, facilitating batch packing and shipping.
### Wave Centre Following the integration of our Warehouse Management System (WMS) with XoroERP, we have implemented several enhancements to the Wave Centre to improve the tracking and management of wave processes. These updates include new statuses, additional columns, and a new header-level option, designed to provide better visibility and control over warehouse operations: #### New Statuses Added To better track the wave process, we have introduced four new statuses:
* **In Staging:** This status indicates that the items have been picked from the shelves and are now waiting in the staging area to be processed further. In staging, the items are typically grouped together based on their destination or order. * **Staged:** Once the items have been organized in the staging area, they are considered to be staged. This means that they are ready to move to the packing step in the process. * **In Packing:** This status indicates that items are currently being prepared for shipment. This could involve placing the items in boxes, adding packing materials, and labeling the packages. * **Packed:** This status indicates that the items have been successfully packed and are ready to be shipped out to customers. Once the items reach this status, they are typically moved to a shipping area for further processing. #### New Columns Added In addition to the new status, a few new columns have also been added to better indicate the wave details.
* **Carton Break Rule:** This column displays the selected carton break rule for items in the wave. * **Replen pending?:** This column indicates if the replenishment is pending. * **Total Un-Picked Replen Qty:** This column shows the total quantity of items that have not been picked for replenishment. * **Missing Item Qty:** This field captures the quantity of any items that are missing from the order. * **Original Missing Item Qty:** This field shows the original quantity of missing items recorded by the picker. #### New Header Level Option Added A new option has also been added at the header level: * **Reassign Picking Task:** This option allows you to change the assignee of the picking task. \ \ When you click on this option, the "Reassign Picking Task" screen will appear. On this screen, you will see the **Task number** and the **Current Assignee**. To reassign the task, select a new assignee from the **New Assignee (WMS User)** dropdown, then click **Assign Tasks** to update the task with the new assignee. This allows for flexible task management and ensures the picking process is handled by the appropriate personnel.
{% hint style="info" %} Please note that you can only reassign the picking task from the "Wave Allocation Detail" view. {% endhint %} ### Packing Slip Centre With the integration of our Warehouse Management System (WMS) into XoroERP, we have introduced several enhancements to the Packing Slip Centre to improve the tracking and management of packing slips. These updates include a new detailed view and additional columns in the header view, designed to provide more comprehensive and actionable information: #### Introduced Packing Slip Detail view We have added a new view, "Packing Slip Detail" in the view. Users can access this view through the "Search By" dropdown. This view displays item-wise records of all items in the packing slip, offering a more detailed perspective compared to the header view.
#### Header view columns added New columns have been included in the header view of the packing slip centre to provide additional information.
* **Carton Weight:** This column indicates the total weight of all the cartons associated with the packing slip. It helps in ensuring accurate shipment weight calculations and compliance with carrier weight limits. * **Total Carton Count:** This field shows the total number of cartons included in the packing slip. It provides a quick overview of how many cartons are being shipped for the respective order. * **Lead Order Number:** This field displays the order number of the primary order number of the sales order batch associated with the packing slip. * **Sales Order Batch:** This field shows the unique identifier of the batch for the sales order associated with the packing slip. ### **Create inventory Adjustment** We've introduced a significant enhancement: Support for LPN attributes within the "Add New Location" popup. This refers to a dialog or window within the XoroERP interface where users can input details when creating a new location for inventory management. Let's break down this update: **LPN Attributes Support**: LPN stands for "License Plate Number." In inventory management, LPNs are unique identifiers assigned to individual units of stock, often used in warehouse operations to track items throughout their lifecycle. By adding support for LPN attributes, XoroERP now enables users to include specific information related to these unique identifiers when making inventory adjustments. {% hint style="info" %} The visibility of LPN attributes in the "Add New Location" popup is determined by the mapping configured for each item. This means that the presence of LPN fields in the popup is dependent on how items are mapped within the system. In other words, when setting up or editing an item, administrators define which attributes, including LPNs, are relevant to that specific item. Consequently, when users interact with the "Add New Location" popup to create new inventory locations, they will only see LPN fields if the item being associated with the location has been mapped to include LPN attributes. {% endhint %} ### Data Export Centre
1. **Added Export Query for Packing Slip Detail in Search Dropdown:** * The Data Export Centre now includes an export query option for Packing Slip Detail within the Search dropdown. This enhancement enables users to efficiently extract detailed information about packing slips, including item specifics, quantities, and shipment data. By providing a straightforward way to export this information, users can streamline their reporting and analysis processes, making it easier to manage and track shipping operations. This feature is designed to enhance operational efficiency by simplifying access to comprehensive packing slip details for better decision-making and record-keeping. 2. **Added Export Query for 3PL Charge Entry Detail in Search Dropdown:** * We have introduced an export query option for 3PL Charge Entry Detail in the Search dropdown of the Data Export Centre. This new feature allows users to export detailed records of third-party logistics (3PL) charge entries, which include information on various fees and charges associated with 3PL services. By facilitating the export of these detailed entries, users can better analyze and reconcile 3PL costs, improve financial accuracy, and enhance overall cost management. This improvement is aimed at providing greater transparency and control over 3PL-related expenses. 3. **Added Export Query for 3PL Storage Inventory Snapshot in Search Dropdown:** * The Data Export Centre now supports an export query for the 3PL Storage Inventory Snapshot within the Search dropdown. This feature enables users to export a snapshot of inventory stored with third-party logistics providers, capturing data such as inventory levels, storage locations, and associated details. With this enhancement, users can easily obtain a comprehensive view of their 3PL storage inventory, facilitating better inventory management, planning, and reporting. The ability to export this snapshot data is intended to improve inventory oversight and help users maintain accurate and up-to-date inventory records. ### Sales Order Batch Centre #### Here are the enhancements in the Sales Order Batch Centre due to WMS Integration - 1. **Store Dropdown for Data Filtering:** A new Store dropdown feature has been added to the Sales Order Batch Centre, allowing users to filter data based on a specific store. This enhancement enables more precise management of sales orders by isolating information relevant to individual store locations. By filtering data through the Store dropdown, users can quickly access and manage store-specific sales orders, improving efficiency and accuracy in processing and tracking orders.
2. **Batch Delete Sales Orders in Header Options:** We have introduced the ability to batch delete sales orders directly from the Header Options. This new feature streamlines the process of removing multiple sales orders at once, saving valuable time and reducing the effort required for order management. With batch deletion capabilities, users can maintain a cleaner and more organized sales order system, ensuring that outdated or unnecessary orders are efficiently removed.
3. **Carton Count and Pallet Count in Header Icons:** The Columns section in the Header Icons now includes Carton Count and Pallet Count. This addition provides users with immediate visibility of the total number of cartons and pallets associated with sales orders, enhancing inventory tracking and logistics planning. By displaying Carton Count and Pallet Count, users can better manage packaging and shipping requirements, leading to more effective and informed decision-making in the sales order fulfillment process.
### Carrier # April 2024 Release 2.0 We have revamped our B2B interface designed to make your experience smoother and more intuitive. This update brings significant enhancements aimed at improving your user experience with a revamped interface. With this update, we have updated the landing page, added a cart view, and improved the navigation in the B2B interface. Let's take a closer look at these updates. ### Updated Landing Page We have updated the landing page to make it more appealing and user-friendly. * **New Look & Feel**: As soon as you enter the Presentation Home, you'll be greeted by a sleek modern and user-friendly layout. The page is designed to give you all the information you need at a glance.
### Style Upgrades * **Text Tweaks**: We’ve spruced up the size and color of the text for better readability and a more modern look.
* **Select Customer Option Relocation**: The “Select Customer” dropdown has moved from the top-left to join the options on the right side, ensuring a more intuitive and streamlined navigation. Furthermore, instead of dropdown, clicking on this now opens a "Select Customer" pop-up window to select the customer. \
### Easy Navigation * **Interactive Icons**: We’ve added a fun twist to our category image icons! If you have grouped the presentation items by brand, category, or item group, hover over them and watch as they pop up, displaying the category name and a handy “**Shop Products**” button. It’s an interactive experience designed to save you time and enhance your browsing.
If the products are not grouped, you will see a "**View Details**" option as you hover over the product. Additionally, you will see the "Add To Cart" button if the products have a single variant. From here, you can directly add the item to your cart for faster checkout.
* **Updated Price List View:** Previously, the prices of the items were shown upfront. We have also updated the price list view for the items with this update. You can see the price range on the screen, and as you hover over the item, the price details can be seen.
* **Enhanced Options in Item Details View:** To make your purchase seamless, we’ve added a couple of options in the Item Details screen. For products with multiple items without variants, scroll down and you’ll see "**Add To Cart**" and "**Continue Shopping**" options for smoother and faster shopping experience.
For products with variants, as you add an item to the cart, you’ll see "**View Cart**" or "**Continue Shopping**" options just above the "**Update Cart**" button.
### Added Cart View We have introduced a cart view in the Presentation Preview. Previously, clicking on the cart option would take you to the checkout page. But, now with the cart view, you can see an overview of the items added to the cart before proceeding with the purchase. This update enhances your shopping experience by allowing you to conveniently review and manage the items in your cart. Here's a detailed look at what you can expect: #### Cart Overview * **Quick Access**: Click on the cart icon at any time to instantly view the product details of the items in your cart. This feature gives you a comprehensive overview without interrupting your shopping experience.
* **Comprehensive Info**: Your Cart screen displays the product name, quantity, and total cost of the items in your cart. This clear presentation helps you keep track of your selections and manage your budget.
#### Manage Your Cart * **Delete with Ease**: Need to remove an item? Just hit the “**Delete**” button next to the product you want to remove.
* **Keep The Cart Updated**: If you’ve made any changes to your cart, click “**Update Cart**” to refresh and see the latest details. This ensures that your cart is always up-to-date with your latest selections.
* **Seamless Checkout**: When you’re ready to finalize your purchase, simply click “**Checkout**” to proceed smoothly through the payment process. Our enhanced checkout flow is designed to be quick and hassle-free.
### Added the ability to update Group Title We have introduced a new feature that allows you to add a custom title to the grouping of items in the presentation. For this, we have introduced a new field, "Group By Title" in the "Other Attributes" tab of the presentation settings.
When you provide a title in this field, it will be displayed on the Presentation Home page where items are grouped. For example, if you group items by category, the default title on the homepage will be "Shop By Category". However, if you enter a custom title, such as "Style", in the "Group By Title" field, the homepage will display "Shop By Style" instead. This feature gives you more flexibility in how you present grouped items to your users.
# April 2024 Release ### 1. Enhanced Visibility of Linked Quantities in Order Linker Module #### Order Linker - Display Qty Linker: In this latest enhancement, users can now seamlessly track quantities linked via the Order Linker feature. Previously, the absence of a linked quantity column in the Order Linker module led to default quantities remaining at 0 until linked Purchase Orders (POs) were received. **Details**: With this enhancement, a significant improvement is introduced. Linked quantities are now displayed on both the SO and PO line/detail levels, offering users clear insights into linked quantities at various stages of the order process. **How it works?** **1. Enter PO# to Link:** * Begin by entering the Purchase Order (PO) number that you wish to link within the Order Linker module. **2. Enter SO# to Link:** * Similarly, input the Sales Order (SO) number that you intend to link to the PO. **3. Select Correct Lines in PO and SO:** * Next, carefully select the appropriate lines within both the PO and SO that you wish to link together. **4. Enter Quantity to Link in PO:** * If necessary, manually input the quantity you want to link in the PO. This step ensures accurate linking of quantities between the PO and SO.
{% hint style="info" %} **This step can also be accomplished automatically, as the system offers this feature.** {% endhint %} **5. Add Linking:** * Finally, initiate the linking process by selecting the "Add Linking" option. This action establishes the connection between the selected PO and SO lines, facilitating seamless order management. ### 2. **Expanded Search Functionality in Order Linker Module** #### Search By Item Option: In the latest update to XoroERP, we are pleased to introduce a significant enhancement within the Order Linker module. This enhancement expands the search functionality, providing users with increased flexibility and efficiency in locating and linking Purchase Orders and Sales Orders. **Details:** Prior to this enhancement, users were constrained to searching for orders exclusively by their Order # within the Order Linker module. However, with the implementation of this latest feature, users now can perform searches using Item Numbers as well. **How It Works?** Upon accessing the search dropdown within the Order Linker module, users will now find an additional option available alongside the traditional Order # search field. This new option enables users to select Item Number as a search parameter.
### **3. Restriction on Voiding PO Operation with Existing Links** **Overview:** In this latest enhancement to the Order Linker module, we have implemented a restriction on Void Purchase Order (PO) operations when existing links are present. This enhancement aims to streamline the PO voiding process by ensuring that linked POs are managed appropriately. **Details:** Previously, users were able to void a PO regardless of its linking status. However, with this enhancement, a restriction has been put in place. Now, in order to void a linked PO, users must first void the existing linking associated with the same PO. Only after voiding the linking can the linked PO be voided. **How it works?**\ Upon attempting to void a linked PO, users will be prompted with a notification informing them of the existing links associated with the PO. They will then be required to navigate to the Order Linker module to void the linking before proceeding with the void operation for the linked PO. ### **4. Restriction on Quantity Update in PO (Lesser Than Linked SO Quantity)** **Overview:** In this latest enhancement to the Order Linker module, we have implemented a restriction on updating quantities in Purchase Orders (POs) when the updated quantity is lesser than the quantity linked to a Sales Order (SO). This enhancement ensures alignment between PO and SO quantities, enhancing order accuracy and process integrity. **Details:** Previously, users could update quantities in POs without regard to the linked SO quantities, potentially leading to discrepancies and fulfillment issues. With this enhancement, the system now validates the quantity update in PO against the linked SO quantity. If the updated quantity in the PO is lesser than the quantity linked to the SO, an error will be displayed, preventing the update until the discrepancy is resolved. **How it works?** When attempting to update the quantity in a PO to a value lesser than the linked SO quantity, users will encounter a system-generated error message. This message prompts users to review and adjust the quantity by the linked SO quantity before proceeding with the update.
### **5. App Configuration for Auto-Update of SO Ship Date with PO Delivery Date** **Overview:** In this latest update to XoroERP, there is a new application configuration that allows for the automatic update of Sales Order (SO) shipment dates when modifying Purchase Order (PO) delivery dates. This feature enhances order management efficiency and ensures synchronization between PO and SO timelines. **Details:** With the addition of this feature, any changes made to the delivery date of a PO will trigger an automatic update to the shipment dates of linked SOs. This ensures that the SO shipment dates remain aligned with the revised PO delivery schedule, minimizing disruptions in order fulfillment. **How it works?**
1. **Accessing the App Configuration Module:** Begin by navigating to the General tab within the App Config module. 2. **Activating the Setting:** Once in the General tab, locate the setting titled "Allow auto-update of SO ship date while updating PO delivery date." Toggle the setting to activate it, enabling the functionality for automatic updates of SO shipment dates when modifying PO delivery dates. 3. **Automatic Update Process:** With the aforementioned setting activated, any changes made to the delivery date of a PO will trigger an automatic update to the shipment dates of all linked SOs. The system seamlessly synchronizes the SO shipment dates with the revised PO delivery schedule, ensuring alignment between PO and SO timelines. 4. **Customer Notification:** In addition to updating shipment dates, the system also promptly notifies customers associated with the affected SOs via email. Customers are informed about the updated changes, maintaining transparency and keeping them informed about any adjustments to their orders. ### **6. New Column Additions (across modules)** **Overview:** In this latest update to XoroERP, several modules have been enhanced with the addition of new columns, providing users with improved visibility and functionality across various aspects of order and inventory management. **Details:** **Order Linker Module:** * **New Column:** Linked Qty * **Location:** Order Linking Detail Line
* **Functionality:** This new column displays the linked quantity alongside the existing quantity information, facilitating easy reference and management of linked orders. **Sales Order Centre/ SO Module** * **New Columns:** Customer, Customer PO, Linked PO Qty * **Location:** Sales Order Centre > Context View Options > Sales Order Module(pop up) > Linked Orders Tab > Purchase Order Tab:
* **Functionality:** These columns provide essential information related to linked purchase orders within the SO Entry module, enhancing visibility and streamlining order tracking processes. **SO Module** * **New Column:** Linked PO Qty * **Location**: **SO Detail Line:**
* **Functionality:** This column displays the linked purchase order quantity on the SO detail line, enabling users to quickly assess the associated purchase order quantities for each sales order. **Purchase Order (PO) Module** * **New Columns:** Customer, Linked SO Qty * **Location**: Purchase Order (PO) Module > Linked Orders Tab > Sales Order Tab: * **Functionality:** These columns offer insights into linked sales orders within the PO Entry module, allowing users to view customer information and associated sales order quantities. **PO Module :** * **New Column:** Linked SO Qty * **Location**: PO Detail Line
* **Functionality:** This column displays the linked sales order quantity on the PO detail line, providing users with visibility into associated sales order quantities for each purchase order. **Item Inventory Snapshot Module :** * **New Column:** SO PO Linked Qty * **Location**: Header Icons - Columns
* **Functionality:** This column presents the linked quantity between sales orders and purchase orders at the header level of the Item Inventory Snapshot module, offering a comprehensive overview of inventory linkages. **Item Inventory Snapshot Module -** * **New Column:** Linked PO Qty * **Location:** On SO and On SO (Draft)
* **Functionality:** These columns showcase the quantity linked to purchase orders within the inventory snapshot entries related to sales orders, aiding in inventory management and planning. **Item Inventory Snapshot Module:** * **New Column:** Linked SO Qty * Location: **On PO and On PO (Draft)**
* **Functionality:** These columns display the quantity linked to sales orders within the inventory snapshot entries related to purchase orders, providing users with insights into order linkages. **Short Inventory Planner Module:** * **New Column:** Linked Qty * **Location**: Header Icons - Columns
* **Functionality:** This column highlights the linked quantities within the inventory short planner, assisting users in identifying and addressing inventory shortages related to linked orders. ### **7. Restriction on Duplicate SO-PO Linking** **Overview:** In this latest enhancement to XoroERP, we have implemented a restriction on the linking of duplicate Sales Orders (SOs) and Purchase Orders (POs). Previously, users could link duplicate SOs and POs, but with this enhancement, such duplicate linking is no longer permitted. **Details:** * **Previous Behavior:** * Users were previously able to link duplicate SOs and POs within the system, potentially leading to data inconsistencies and errors in order management. * **Enhanced Behavior:** * With this enhancement, the system now prohibits the linking of duplicate SOs and POs, ensuring data integrity and accuracy in order management processes. * Attempts to link duplicate SOs and POs will be met with a system-generated error message, prompting users to review and rectify the duplicate linking attempt. **How it works?** * The restriction on duplicate SO-PO linking is automatically enforced within the system, requiring no additional configuration from users. * Users will be notified of any attempted duplicate linking actions through clear error messages, guiding them toward compliant order management practices.
# March 2024 Release ### 1. Write Off Inventory in Bulk Users can now write off "Non Available" inventory in bulk within the **Inventory by Location** module. This feature streamlines the inventory management process, allowing users to quickly remove non-available items from their inventory records. To write off inventory, navigate to Inventory By Location module, select the item lines you wish to write off, and choose the **Batch Write Off Not Available Inventory** option from the Options menu. This streamlined process saves time and effort for users who need to quickly update their inventory records.
### 2. Split ASN Lines to a New ASN We have introduced the ability to split the ASN and move the selected item lines in the ASN to a new ASN within the **Receive ASN Module.** This gives users enhanced flexibility in managing received shipments, improving overall workflow efficiency. To split the ASN, select the item lines you wish to move in the ASN lines section of the Receive ASN module. Then, go to Options > Move Selected lines to a New ASN. A new ASN will be automatically generated with the selected lines, and the item line(s) will be removed from the original ASN. {% hint style="info" %} Please note: * Only ASN lines in OPEN status are eligible for this action. Attempting to select lines with any other status will result in an error. * Selecting all the lines from an existing ASN (in OPEN status) for this operation will void the old ASN. * This option will not be available for ASNs associated with credit memos. {% endhint %} ### 3. Create Recurring Bills in Advance We've introduced a new feature that allows you to create recurring bills in advance, ensuring timely payments and smoother financial management. To utilize this feature, a new app config, "**Use Days in Advance for Recurring Bills"** has been introduced under the Accounting section in app config module.
Once the app config is enabled, the field, "Days In Advance" is enabled when defining Recurring Criteria. Users can specify the number of days in advance they want to generate recurring bills.
For instance, setting it to generate bills "2 days in advance" for a weekly recurring bill will trigger the bill generation 5 days in advance, while keeping the next occurrence date unchanged. The primary benefit of this feature is its ability to facilitate timely payments without disrupting the existing bill payment cycle. By allowing users to proactively create bills in advance, it ensures that payment deadlines are met efficiently and effectively. ### 4. Select the pick location when creating a manual wave We have introduced a new enhancement in our manual wave creation process to make the process of creating waves even more efficient. With this new feature, users now have the ability to select the exact location from where they want the items to be picked when creating a manual wave. To facilitate this, a new app config, "**Enable picking item qty location while creating wave**" is added under the warehouse tab. When this setting is turned on, the system will allow the user to select a location to pick inventory from the location while creating a wave.
#### How does it work? * Enable the app config and proceed to create a manual wave. * In the Create Wave module, after moving the required item lines to wave, click on "Create Wave".
* Upon selecting the option, an "Item Inventory By Location" window will populate. Here, you can view the net available quantity of the item based on the LPNs and decide how many units to pick from a specific LPN, enhancing your control over inventory movement.
* Under the "To Wave" column, you can enter the quantity you want to pick from a specific LPN and click "Apply" to start picking.
* Click on the "Tick" button against a record to assign the entire quantity to wave, i.e., pick all the available units from that location.
{% hint style="info" %} Please note that if the pick location isn't chosen for every unit ordered of an item, the system will automatically designate a pick location for any remaining quantity. {% endhint %} This update is designed to streamline your picking process, reduce manual errors, and improve overall warehouse efficiency. ### 5. Added multiple columns in Data Export Centre We have added multiple columns in the Data Export Centre under various sections. Bill Items Detail Three new columns, "Sent by Scheduler", "Line Sent by Scheduler", and "PO Third Party Ref No"have been added in the Bill Items Details section of Data Export Centre.
#### Inventory By Item We have added "UPC" columns in the Inventory By Item section of Data Export Centre.
### 6. Added multiple columns in Bill Centre We have added multiple columns in the Bill Centre. #### Bill Centre We have added four new columns, "Sent by Scheduler", "Line Sent by Scheduler", "PO Third Party Ref No", and "HS Code" in the Bill Items Details in the Bill Centre.
### 7. Added HS Code column in Item Receipt Centre #### Item Receipt Centre We have added a new column, "HS Code" in the Item Receipt Centre at the Item Receipt Detail view.
# February 2024 Release ### 1. Introducing the Update Sales Order Items module We have introduced a new module, "Update Sales Order Items". With this module, users can now perform batch updates on Sales Order Items, streamlining the process for managing multiple orders simultaneously. Key features include: * **Quantity Updates**: Users can update the quantity of items within the sales order, enabling seamless adjustments to order quantities as needed.
* **Item Replacement**: This module allows users to replace items within a sales order with other items specified in the Replacement Item column. \ However, replacements are subject to the following conditions: * The item type of the replacement item must match that of the original item. * The Sell Unit of Measure (UOM) of the replacement item must be the same as that of the original item. * Both "Qty Shipped" and "Qty Allocated" for the specific SO Item line must be zero. After successfully replacing an item, the sales order detail line will display the Description, UOM, and Item Number of the new replacement item.
* **Recalculate Prices**: Additionally, users have the option to "Recalculate Prices" against each item. When this option is selected, item prices are recalculated based on the pricing rules defined in the sales order at the detail level. If an item is replaced and the "Recalculate Prices" checkbox is ticked, prices for the replacement item will be recalculated accordingly.
#### How does it work? * To access the module, go to Menu > Sales > Sales Order > Update Sales Order Items. * Search and select the item from the "Item Number" dropdown.
* In the details section, you can see the list of all the orders containing the searched item. * Make the necessary changes (adjust quantities, replace items, and recalculate prices).
* After the changes have been made, click on "Update Selected Records" to apply changes to selected rows. Alternatively, choose the "Update All Records" option from the dropdown to update all records.
Please note: The Sales Order number is clickable and provides access to the sales order sub form for further details. ### **2. Introducing Product Tags and Enhanced Product Management** We have introduced "Product Tags" in the system. Now you can add tags to the products. With this enhancement, users can now categorize and organize products more efficiently than ever before. #### Adding Product Tags You can add the tags to the product directly from the "Product" module. A new dropdown field "Tags" has been added here. You can select the desired tag(s) to associate with the product from this dropdown menu.
The product tags column has been added to the Product Upload template. So, you can create the tags via upload as well.
**Key Features:** 1. **Product Tag Management:** We have added a new tag type, "Product," to the Tag Management module. This allows users to easily view, edit, and add product tags directly from the Tag Management interface.
2. **Auto-Create Tags:** The "**Allow to auto create Tags**" app configuration now includes the Product Tags option. If this config is enabled for product tags, entering a new tag for a product will automatically create it within the system. This streamlines the tagging process and ensures consistency in tag management.
3. **Product Tag Support in B2B:** The product tag feature has been extended to B2B functionalities, enhancing product organization and accessibility across different modules. * Added Product Tags filter in Presentation for more refined product filtering.
* Integrated Product Tags into Advanced Search in the Showroom center, enabling users to quickly locate products based on specific tags.
4. **Product Count Display:** In addition to the above enhancements, we have also added a Product Count feature to the Presentation and Showroom. Now, when accessing the Showroom and Presentation, users will see the number of products displayed directly alongside the Product tab, providing valuable insight into product availability and inventory.
### **3. Manufacture Order: Add multiple Batch and Lot numbers for Finished Items** We have added the ability to add multiple batch numbers and lot numbers for finished items during MO production, allowing for detailed tracking and management of inventory. This is particularly useful for scenarios where the raw material is stored across different locations, and you want to produce the finished goods at different locations as well. To utilize this feature, please enable the app config, "**Use raw materials lot and batch number for finished good item".**
#### How does it work? * Enable the above-mentioned app config. * Create a manufacturing order, proceed with releasing the order, complete the picking process, and transition to the "Work In Progress" stage. * Click on the newly introduced "Edit LPN" button. It's important to note that this button will only be available if the raw material is in multiple locations.
* This will redirect you to the Edit LPN screen. Users can easily add or remove lots and batches using the intuitive +/- buttons, ensuring precise control over inventory quantities. \*\* It is important to note while you can add as many lots as you want, the quantity sum of all the lots should be equal to the quantity to be produced.
* To store the finished goods at the same location, simply click "Save" without altering any information. If you intend to place the finished goods in a different location, adjust the LPN and Batch number details before clicking "Save".
{% hint style="info" %} *Please note that this option is only available when your Bill of Materials (BOM) encompasses more than one inventory item.* {% endhint %} ### 4. Auto-send Customer Statements We have added the ability to automatically send customer statements to the customers. Please note that this option will only be available for customers with "Enable Automatic Monthly Statements**"** option turned ON.
You can use the batch update option in the Customer Centre to enable automatic monthly statements. We have also added three new app configs to determine how this feature works: 1. **Auto-Send Monthly Customer Statements:** If this setting is on it will automatically send statements to customers covering the previous month's activity. This will dispatch statement emails to those customers with the "Enable Automatic Monthly Statements" option activated in the Customer module.
2. **Customer Statement email intervals in days**: This app config is multi-select and has three options specifying from and up to what dates we want to send a statement.\ \ If this setting is enabled it will send the email notification of customer statements to the customer automatically based on value provided. \ For example: When option "First day of month" is selected it will send statement from previous month's first day to last day. If the option"15th day of month" is selected, it will send current month's first day to fifteenth day. Similarly, if the option"Last day of month" is selected, it will send statement from current month's first day to last day of month.
3. **Customer statement Email Time:** This will allow you to specify the time at which the email will be sent to customers.
### 5. Auto-Produce Items in Manual Wave Creation We have added the ability to automatically produce manufacturable items when inventory levels are insufficient during manual wave creation from a sales order. When creating a manual wave from a sales order and encountering insufficient inventory for a manufacturable item, our system now generates a Manufacturing Order (MO) to fulfill the demand automatically. This allows you to manage inventory more efficiently, reduce manual effort, and accelerate order fulfillment processes. You can easily track the generated MO from the "MO#" column at the item line level of the sales order.
**Key Requirements** To enable this feature, please ensure the following conditions are met: * The "**Enable auto produce when having insufficient inventory**" app config must be enabled. This setting allows automatic production of items when there is insufficient inventory to fulfill demand.
* The item in question must be marked as "Auto Producible". Only items with this designation will trigger the automatic MO creation process.
* Raw materials must be in stock. In instances where the necessary raw materials are not in stock, the MO will be generated, but not produced. You will need to manually produce the MO once the raw materials are secured.
### 6. FTP credentials verification while creating an Export/Import Job We have introduced the ability to test the FTP/SFTP credentials in our import/export job creation process. With this update, users now have the option to test the validity of FTP/SFTP credentials directly when creating import or export jobs. To initiate the validation process, input their FTP credentials on the "Job Scheduler" page and click on the "Test Credentials".
The system will promptly verify the provided credentials. If the credentials are valid, a success message will be displayed, confirming the successful validation of the FTP/SFTP connection.
In instances where the provided credentials are invalid or incorrect, the system will generate an error, alerting users to potential issues before attempting data transfers.
### 7. Preserving Secondary Wave Headers and Status Update in Merged Waves When merging two waves, the header of the secondary wave will now be retained in the merged wave. Upon merging, the status of the secondary wave will be automatically updated to "Merged." This helps users track the lifecycle of their waves and easily identify those that have been merged.
**Read-Only Access to Merged Waves:** You can open the merged wave for viewing purposes. However, the merged wave will not contain any lines due to the complete transfer of information to the primary wave. Additionally, no actions can be performed on merged waves, ensuring data integrity and control over the wave merging process.
### **8. Vendor: Duplicate Contact Number Support** Added You can now add duplicate phone numbers for different vendors. An app config, "**Allow duplicate phone numbers in vendors"** has been added to facilitate this.
Enable this config to allow duplicate phone numbers for vendors. This feature is designed to accommodate scenarios where multiple vendors may share the same contact number, ensuring your vendor management process is as seamless and efficient as possible.
# January 2024 Release ### **Updating Customer On-Hold Flag in Batch Mode** The Customer Center now offers a batch update option to efficiently manage and update the on-hold status of customers in bulk, streamlining the process and saving time for users. **How it works?** * Navigate to the Customer Centre and choose the specific customer account you wish to manage. * Once you've selected the customer, access the Options tab located in the header menu. * From the dropdown menu within the Options tab, choose Batch Update to open the Batch Update popup window. * In the Column field of the popup window, locate and select the On Hold option.
* Check the Yes checkbox in the value column next to the **On Hold** option.
* Click the **Update** button to apply the batch update to the selected items. * Return to the Customer Centre page and open the **Columns** dropdown menu. * Tick the checkboxes for **On Hold** and **On Hold Message** options to display them for the selected customer, alongside other options.
As you've previously selected the **On-Hold** option as "yes" during the Batch Update, this status will now be reflected in the **On-Hold** field for the customer. You'll notice the update by the presence of a [**checkmark**](#user-content-fn-1)[^1] indicating that the customer's account has been placed on hold.
### **Enhanced Customer Upload Module** Users can now upload On-Hold status and On-Hold message columns via the customer upload module, providing a convenient way to update customer information in bulk and ensuring accuracy and consistency across the system. **How to do it?** * Access the **Customer Upload** module within the ERP system. * Choose the option to download the **Customer Import Template** from the module. * Open the downloaded template, which is an Excel sheet, to view its contents. * In the Excel sheet, locate the newly added columns for uploading **On Hold f**lag and On Hold message
* Fill in the On Hold and On Hold Message columns with the desired information for specific customers. * Save the changes made to the Excel sheet. * Upload the updated Excel sheet containing the filled-in information back into the Customer Upload module. * The updated details will now reflect in the **Customer Info** module for the respective customers. ### **Introducing New Bank Integration: Basiq** XoroERP now integrates with Basiq, a new bank integration tool, enabling users to fetch transactions from Australian bank accounts seamlessly. This feature allows users to view detailed transaction information directly within XoroERP, enhancing visibility and control over financial data. You can use the newly integrated Bank Transaction Provider BASIQ to fetch transaction status from Australian Banks. **How to do it?** * Open the **Connect Bank Account** module in XoroERP. * Click on **Connect Bank Accounts** tab and select BASIQ as bank transaction provider.
* Click on **Approve** on the share Financial Data screen. After giving your approval, select your institution as **Hooli.**
* Fill in your Bank Login credentials and click **Login**.
* After the bank is successfully connected, click on **Link Bank Feeds**. * Select your XoroSoft account along with the Bank Account Feeds that you intend to link and click **Link Bank Feed**.
* Set the Transaction Date to fetch bank transactions and click **Save**. * Navigate to the **Bank Statement Centre** and select the linked bank account for which you want to check the Feed. * Click on the **Bank Account** populated after the search result and you will be able to view the transaction status in the Bank Statement Details. ### **Auto-allocation of GS1 Codes to SKUs** XoroERP now supports the allocation of GS1 (GTIN-13 or EAN) codes to SKUs, providing a unique identifier for each product. This update introduces three new functionalities, including support for GS1 GTIN checksum, dropdown selection for GTIN type, and automatic addition of checksum value during item creation. **How to do it?** To configure GS1 (GTIN-13 / EAN) codes for products in XoroERP, follow these steps: * Go to the **Universal Code Series** module within XoroERP. * Complete the Mandatory Fields, including the Code Name (GS1), Start Range, End Range, and Current Value. * Under Code Type, choose both UPC and GTIN from the dropdown menu to enable the code to serve as both UPC and GTIN. (GTIN Type has been added to the dropdown to Universal Code Series Module as an enhancement).
* Enter the UPC Prefix, GTIN Prefix, and select the GTIN Type as required. * Toggle the **Check Digit** option to green to ensure proper validation of the GTIN current value and addition of the checksum suffix to GTIN. (Check digit toggle has been added to **Universal Code Series** module as an enhancement).
* Click on the **Add Series** button to save the code series.
* Now, proceed to create your product in the **Product** module of XoroERP.
* Once the product is created successfully, navigate to the **Generate Variants** option. * Fill in the mandatory fields for variant generation and click on **Generate Variants**.
Once the variants are generated, follow these steps to view the updated UPCs and GTINs for the product items: * Navigate to the **Item Centre** within XoroERP. * Select UPC and GTIN from the column field.
* Use the search field to locate the desired product. In this case, "**Bottle 14**". * Upon successful search, the system will display the updated UPCs and GTINs associated with the items of the specified product.
### **Vendor Centre Enhancement - Seamless Vendor Creation With Auto-Filling Address Feature** The Vendor Center has been enhanced to automate the auto-filling of vendor address fields, similar to the customer module. After entering primary details, such as first name, last name, company name, and contact info, the system now automatically populates address fields based on previously entered values, simplifying the vendor creation process. **How it works?** Seamlessly set up a vendor using the newly added functionality in XoroERP. Follow these steps: * Access the **Create Vendor** module by navigating through the menu: Purchase > Vendor Section > Vendor Centre > Vendor. * Complete the required fields in the Primary tab, including First Name, Last Name, and Company Name.
* Proceed to the **Contact Info** tab and provide the vendor's address details, such as the Main Phone Number and Main Email Address**.**
* Switch to the **Address Info** tab and click on the edit button to add the **Bill to Address**. * The system automatically retrieves and populates the First Name, Last Name, Company Name, Main Phone Number, and Main Email Address in the Bill to Address Fields.
* Similarly, for the Ship to Address section, the system fetches and auto-populates the same details: First Name, Last Name, Company Name, Main Phone Number, and Main Email Address.
### **Advanced Variant Finder Support** XoroERP now supports advanced variant finder configuration for option 1 and option 2 values, with option 1 set as the default value. Users can easily access option 1 and option 2 values in the advanced search option for Sales Orders (SOs) and Purchase Orders (POs) using the newly available criterion, facilitating the creation of orders and enhancing usability. The enhancement also makes the item easily searchable using the Base Part as both option 1 and option 2 are displayed as per the App Config setting. {% hint style="info" %} This is an App Config based feature {% endhint %} How it works? * Access the **App Config** module and locate the Advance Variant Finder settings within the **General** tab.
* Enable the feature **Share Option Values in Advance Variant Finder** to showcase the selected option values within the **Advanced Variant** finder. * **Activate** both option one and option two by marking their respective checkboxes.
* Navigate to the **Create Purchase Order** page. * Once the Vendor is selected, access the Advanced Search feature situated in the **Purchase Order Details header.**
* Within the **Product Variants Finder** popup window, you can now view the inclusion of option 1 and option 2 as subtext within the product dropdown menu of the advanced variant finder.
**Sales Order** * Navigate to the **Create Sales Order** page. * Once the Customer is selected, access the **Advanced Search** feature situated in the Sales Order Details header.
* Within the Product Variants Finder popup window, you can now view the inclusion of option1 and option2 as subtext within the product dropdown menu of the advanced variant finder.
### **Expanded Item Inventory Snapshot and Sales Order Details** Additional columns, including "Is Sellable," "Is Purchasable," "Is Manufacturable," and "Standard Unit Cost," have been added to Item Inventory Snapshot, Sales Order Details, and Sales Order Subform, providing users with comprehensive information for better decision-making. **How to view it?** The above changes can be seen in the following modules - **Item Inventory Snapshot** * Go to the **Item Inventory Snapshot** module. * Locate the header menu and click on the "**Columns**" option. * From the **Column** dropdown menu, select the options for Is Purchasable, Is Sellable, Is Manufacturable, and Standard Unit Cost by checking the respective boxes.'
Once selected, the columns for these options will be displayed on the main page alongside the existing columns.
**Sales Subforum** * Go to the **Sales Order Centre** and open the SO subforum by double-clicking on the **SO** row. * In the **Sales Order Subforum** popup window, click on the "columns" option. * From the **Column** dropdown menu, select the options for Is Purchasable, Is Sellable, Is Manufacturable, and Standard Unit Cost by checking the respective boxes.
* Once selected, the columns for these options will be displayed on the main page alongside the existing columns.
**Sales Order Detail Custom Fields in Order Summary:** Sales Order Detail custom fields, limited to the first four custom fields, are now visible on the Sales Order Detail level when creating sales orders from the Order Summary in presentation mode, improving visibility and customization options. * Go to the **Sales Order Centre**. * Locate the header menu and select the Sales Order Detail option from the in header's second tab's dropdown.
* From the **Column** dropdown menu, select the options for Is Purchasable, Is Sellable, Is Manufacturable, and Standard Unit Cost by checking the respective boxes.
* Once selected, the columns for these options will be displayed on the main page alongside the existing columns.
### **Seamless B2B Experience with Custom Field Mapping with Presentation Checkout** Xorosoft introduces an exciting enhancement to streamline order processing within the B2B module. This new functionality empowers users to tailor their order experience by seamlessly mapping custom fields from Sales Order details to the Presentation checkout stage. Through the intuitive interface of the Custom Field Definition Centre, users can effortlessly create and manage their own set of custom fields, providing a personalized touch to their order management process. Each item has its fields and there can be different values for each item. These custom fields play a vital role in tailoring each item, allowing for unique values to be assigned to individual products. With this feature, users have the flexibility to select the top four custom fields from their defined list, which will then appear on the Sales Order Detail level when creating orders from the Order Summary in the presentation stage. It's worth noting that only the fields defined specifically for Sales Order Detail within the custom field definition will be visible among the first four selected fields, ensuring clarity and relevance in the order creation process. **How to do it?** * Go to the **App Config** module within XoroERP. * Select the B2B module from the navigation menu on the left-hand side. * Locate the option "**Enable Custom Fields** **for B2B in Order Summary**." * Toggle the button to enable this setting.
* Navigate to the **Custom Fields Definition** module. * Define the Custom Fields as per your preference. The first four fields will be reflected on the Sales Order detail page and Order Summary.
Navigate to the **Sales Order Details** page to view the Customer Fields at Sales Order Detail level.
### **Streamlined Vendor Management:** Added "Copy to All" and "Copy to Selected" options on Manufacturing Orders (MOs) to populate the default vendor field efficiently, simplifying vendor management tasks and ensuring consistency across orders. **How to do it?** * Create a Manufacturing Order (MO) and proceed to the **default vendor section** within the MO lines.
* Choose the desired vendor from the available options. Then, select the lines within the MO and click on 'Copy to Selected' from the vendor associated with the first line.
* The selected vendor will now be copied to the chosen lines, ensuring uniformity and consistency in vendor selection across the order.
* Alternatively, select the vendor and lines within the MO, then click on '**Copy to All**' from the first vendor listed.
* This action automatically populates the Vendor field for all lines with the default vendor initially selected in the first line, streamlining the process and maintaining coherence in vendor management.
{% hint style="info" %} When considering the scenario where different default vendors are required for items added, and a Purchase Order (PO) needs to be created for the selected lines within a Manufacturing Order (MO), it's crucial to understand the system's response. In such instances, the system ensures operational efficiency by automatically generating distinct POs for each item, each with its designated vendor. Consequently, each PO receives a unique identification number, facilitating clear tracking and management of procurement activities. {% endhint %}
### **Enhanced Recurring Transaction Management** The Day in Advance functionality within the Recurring Transaction Centre Module has been unlocked, offering users greater customization options through the newly added App Config feature in the Accounting Section. This enhancement empowers users with increased flexibility and control over the scheduling of recurring transactions. This feature proves particularly beneficial in scenarios involving the creation of recurring bills. Users now have the capability to input bill information in advance, enabling them to anticipate payable amounts at the time of payment. This is especially useful for bills with fixed due dates, such as rent payments typically due on the first of each month. With the unlocking of the 'Days in Advance' option, users can conveniently access and utilize this feature to manage recurring transactions more effectively. **How to do it?** * Access the **App Config** module and locate the "Use Days in Advance for Recurring Bills" option within the Accounting Section. * Toggle the option on to activate the **Days in Advance** feature.
* Proceed to the **Recurring Transaction Centre m**odule. * Hover over the Transaction row to reveal the "**Edit Recurring Criterion**" option. * Click on "**Edit Recurring Criterion**" to open the pop-up window. * Within the Recurring Criterion window, locate the **Days in Advance** option.
* Select the desired number of days in advance based on your requirements. * The transaction will now be scheduled to occur on the next receipt date, which corresponds to the next occurrence date. [^1]: # 2023 # November 2023 Release ### 1. Manufacturing Order: Added the ability to **align Finished Goods Location with Raw Materials** We have added the capability to use the same Lot and Batch number for the finished goods as theraw materials. A new app config, "**Use raw materials lot and batch number for finished good item"** has been introduced to facilitate this feature.
***\*\*Please note that this feature is specifically designed for scenarios where there is only one raw material in the production process.*** This enhancement allows you to align your finished goods with their raw material location, optimizing your inventory management, and providing greater flexibility in production. For instance, when manufacturing 20 units of a finished good with 10 units of raw material available at locations A and B respectively, you can now conveniently store 10 units of the finished good at location A and the remaining 10 units at location B. #### How does it work? * Enable the above-mentioned app config. * Create a manufacturing order, proceed with releasing the order, complete the picking process, and transition to the "Work In Progress" stage. * Click on the newly introduced "Edit LPN" button. It's important to note that this button will only be available if the raw material is in multiple locations.
* This will redirect you to the Edit LPN screen, where the LPN and Batch numbers for the raw material, along with their respective quantities, will be pre-populated.
* To store the finished goods at the same location, simply click "Save" without altering any information. If you intend to place the finished goods in a different location, adjust the LPN and Batch number details before clicking "Save".
### 2. Restriction on voiding MO waves We have added a restriction on voiding the manufacturing order waves, even when the order is in picking status. If you attempt to void the MO wave, the system will throw an error.
To void the MO wave, you will have to void the manufacturing order directly. # October 2023 Release ### 1. Introducing 'Item Unit Price' Column for Enhanced Sales Order Management We have introduced a new column, “Item Unit Price” at the Sales Order Detail Level.
The 'Item Unit Price' column will display the standard unit price of the item.
This will come in handy in case of any price adjustments made on the sales order. With this feature, you can easily view the registered standard price for each item while working on your sales orders., thereby fostering consistency and precision in your order pricing. **Key notes:** * The 'Item Unit Price' column will only be visible when the Multi UOM feature is turned off. * In cases where item prices are defined in multiple currencies, this column will fetch the price in the currency of the customer for which the sales order is being placed. However, if item prices are not defined in multiple currencies, the registered standard unit price of the item will be fetched in this column, irrespective of the currency of the customer. ### 2. Added the ability to link the Brand in the Presentation with the Sales Order We have added the ability to select a brand directly in the presentations. This new feature allows you to associate a particular brand with each product showcased in your presentation. The selected brand will be seamlessly linked to any subsequent sales order created from the presentation. This brand information will automatically populate in the corresponding Sales Order, eliminating the need for manual input of brand details for each product. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the "Other Attributes" tab within your Presentation. * Locate the "Brand" dropdown option and choose the desired brand from the available options.
* Save your Presentation. * Create a Sales Order from the Presentation, and the selected brand will automatically populate on the Sales Order.
### 3. You can now validate the Company Email Configuration We are delighted to announce the ability to validate company email configuration. With this enhancement, you can verify that the company email has been set up properly. This proactive step prevents issues with sending out automated emails, enhancing communication reliability. How does it work? * Navigate to the "Company Email Configuration Setup" module. * Fill in all the necessary email configuration details accurately.
* After entering the details, click on the "Validate" button located at the top-right corner of the screen.
* A test email will be sent out to verify that the email setup is functioning correctly.
This feature empowers you to proactively identify and resolve email configuration issues, ensuring that your automated email communications run smoothly without interruption. ### 4. New Search Columns added in the Packing Slip Centre We have introduced two new search columns in the Packing Slip Centre: Invoice Number and SO Number.
This gives you the ability to quickly locate packing slips based on invoice numbers and sales order numbers, simplifying the process of finding essential shipping information. We've also made the Invoice Number underlined and clickable, allowing you to effortlessly access the associated invoice directly from the Packing Slip Centre.
These enhancements are designed to boost your efficiency and provide you with easy access to essential shipping and invoicing information within the Packing Slip Centre. ### 5. Navigating Chart of Accounts Made Easier with Pagination We have introduced a pagination feature in the Chart Of Accounts module, which allows for the display of a limited number of records per page. This replaces the previous system, where all records were loaded onto a single page, regardless of the number.
The introduction of pagination ensures that you can now view your Chart of Accounts records in a more organized and user-friendly manner. Additionally, by limiting the number of records displayed on a single page, our system will perform more efficiently, even when dealing with a large volume of data ### 6. Real-Time Date Synchronization in Recurring Invoices We have introduced an update in the functioning of recurring transactions. We have added an automatic date synchronization when viewing or running recurring invoices. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Recurring Transaction Centre. * When you click on "View/Edit Transactions" or "Run Manually" on a recurring invoice, the Date and Ship Date fields on the Invoice subform/Create Invoice module will automatically reflect current date.
This enhancement is designed to simplify your recurring transaction management and improve the accuracy of your records. ### 7. Restriction on auto application of filters in Presentation We have introduced a new feature gives you greater control over filter application within the Presentation module. A new app config, “Restrict auto apply filters in presentation” has been added to facilitate this feature.
When this config is enabled, filters will only take effect when you explicitly click the "Apply Filters" button. This gives you full control over when and how your filters are applied.
If this config is off, filters behave as they did before, with results automatically updating as soon as you select a filter option. This enhancement allows you to customize your filter experience, making it easier to fine-tune the items in your presentations. ### 8. Introducing Custom Price Formula Profile Module We have added a new module "Custom Price Formula Profile" for creating custom price formulas more easily and precisely.
Alongside this module, we've also introduced the Custom Price Formula Profile Centre, a centralized hub for your custom price formulas.
You can learn more about creating custom price formula in this article. Here are the key highlights of this exciting enhancement: * **Simplified Item Pricing:** You no longer need to define custom price formulas for every item individually. We've streamlined the process by adding the option to select a custom price formula directly on the item. This means you can choose from the custom price formulas you've created, saving you time and reducing complexity.
* **Precision Pricing with "No Rounding" Option:** We've introduced the **"No Rounding"** option in the Decimal Rounding dropdown when defining a custom price formula. When selected, this option ensures that the resulting custom price is not rounded off and the exact value is captured with up to six decimal places, providing you with exact pricing accuracy.
For example, let’s say the Standard Cost of an Item is $12.69. If you create a custom price formula for 10% markup in the standard cost with no rounding, the calculated standard unit price will be 13.958888. ### 9. Multiple columns added on the On SO Details screen We have added Ship-To address and Custom Fields On SO Details subforum in the Item Inventory Snapshot module. This upgrade equips you with a more comprehensive view of shipping information.
The following columns have been added to the On SO Details screen as a part of this enhancement: * Ship To First Name * Ship To Last Name * Ship To Address Line 1 * Ship To Address Line 2 * Ship To Company * Ship To City * Ship To State * Ship To Country * Ship To ZIP/Postal Code * Ship To Phone * Ship To Email * Ship To Address Name * All Custom Fields ### 10. Streamlined Reference Handling in Customer Deposit and Bank Deposit We have streamlined the handling of References in the Customer Deposit Centre and Bank Deposit Centre. We have added “**Ref 2**” column in the Customer Deposit Centre. This column displays the specific reference information related to your deposits.
The "Ref2 No#" field is also added to the Undeposited Payment screen when adding Customer Deposits to the Bank Deposit Centre.
This column fetches the data entered in the Reference Number 2 field of the Customer Deposit. This streamlines your workflow and ensures that you can easily track the correct deposit, reducing the margin for error in your deposit management process. **Please Note:** If the "Ref 2" column in the Customer Deposit Centre is left blank, the system will populate the data from the "Ref No" column into the "Ref 2" column in the "Undeposited Payments" section of the Bank Deposit module. # September 2023 Release ### 1. Batch Delete Option for Item Receipts Now Available We have introduced the feature to batch delete item receipts from the item receipt centre. This will help streamline your workflow and save you valuable time and effort. #### How does it work? * Go to Item Receipt Centre and select the item receipts that you want to delete.
* Then, go to Options > Batch Delete.
* The selected Item Receipts will be deleted, and the status of the linked purchase order(s) will automatically change to "Released".
#### Important: * The batch delete functionality will only operate when LPNs are disabled. Please ensure that LPNs are turned off before utilizing this feature.
### 2. B2B: Now pay for multiple invoices in a single transaction We are excited to introduce a more efficient way to manage your payments in our B2B modules: Batch Payment for Invoices. This enhancement streamlines your payment process, saving you the hassle of paying each invoice separately and allowing you to make payments for multiple invoices in a single transaction. #### How does it work? * **Navigate to the "Invoices" Module:** In the Customer Portal, access the "Invoices" module.
* **Select Invoices to Pay:** Choose the invoices you want to pay by selecting the checkboxes next to each invoice.
* **Initiate Batch Payment:** Click on the "Pay Selected Invoices" option, which will navigate you to the payment screen.
* **Make Payment:** On the payment screen, you will see the invoice numbers of the selected invoices for reference. Please note that the payment option is limited to card payments for this feature.
Fill in the card details and make the payment.
It is also important to note this feature does not support partial payment. The pay amount field has been disabled, so you won’t be able to update the amount. This ensures that the payment aligns with the total invoice amount.
* **Get Payment Receipt:** Once the payment is successfully processed, the payment receipt will be generated, confirming the transaction. The customers will receive a copy of the payment receipt on your registered email.\ \
### 3. Introducing Universal Code Series Module We are excited to introduce a new module, the Universal Code Series, designed to automate the generation of UPC (Universal Product Code) and GTIN (Global Trade Item Number) numbers for your items, providing greater flexibility and control in your inventory management.
#### How does it work? * Navigate to the Universal Code Series. * Give a name to the series and choose the Code Type from the dropdown menu.
Please note that you can create either "UPC" or "GTIN" type series, or you can choose a "Both" type series that applies to both UPC and GTIN numbers. * Then, fill in the Start and End Range for the series. Setting a range for the series allows you to control the scope of your code generation. This feature ensures that your codes remain organized and within your specified limits. For example, if your start and end range is set as '400' and '500' respectively, generating 4 variants will yield UPC numbers: 400, 401, 402, and 403.
* You can also define the UPC Prefix or GTIN Prefix for the series. However, prefixes are optional. The prefix will be added in front of every UPC/GTIN number generated. For instance, if you set the prefix as '111' and use the above example, your UPC numbers will be generated as: 111400, 111401, 111402, and 111403.
* Click on “Add Series” to create the series.
* The series will be added below in the details section.
* Whenever new product variants are created, the series defined in this module will be used for UPC/GTIN.
* Please note that all the columns in the series are editable except the “Current Value” column. This column defines the value of the last UPC/GTIN generated. The current value will be auto-incremented based on how many items are created using the generate variant option from the Product module.
> ***Important Note:*** Only one series can remain active in this module, which will be used when creating the product variants. It is important to note here that series of type “Both” takes precedence over “UPC” or “GTIN” type series.\ > When a series of type "BOTH" is created, all other series will be automatically set to inactive, ensuring that only one series is active at a time.\ > Additionally, if a Both Type series is already active and you try to create a “UPC” or “GTIN” type series, the system will throw an error. ### 4. B2B: Now add VAS Item to your orders We have added the ability to add VAS Item to your B2B orders. #### How does it work? **Step 1: Enable VAS** * Navigate to the “Other Attributes” tab of the Presentation. * Scroll down and select the “Enable VAS” checkbox to enable this feature.
* You can enter a title for your VAS, if desired, to help you easily identify and manage it.
**Step 2: Adding VAS** * Add the items to the cart and proceed to checkout. * On the Order Summary page, you will find the VAS dropdown under the list of Items. Please note that this dropdown will contain the list of VAS Items registered in the system.
* Select the desired VAS item and click on “Update Cart”.
* The VAS Item will be added to the Order.
### 5. Introducing the “Upload Invoice Payment” module We are excited to announce a new upload module “**Upload Invoice Payment**”. This module is designed to simplify and streamline your payment processes by allowing you to batch-upload invoice payments effortlessly. **How to Use the "Upload Invoice Payment" Module:** \ 1\. **Download the template** * Navigate to the Upload Invoice Payment module. * Click on “**Download Template**“ to obtain the upload file.
#### Copy the information into the template * Open the downloaded template file, which comes in CSV format. * Fill in your payment data in the template. There are mandatory fields, marked with a double asterisk (\*\*) prefix, that you must complete. Other fields are optional.
**Upload the invoice payments** * Once you have filled the CSV file with your data, you can follow the steps below to upload it into Xoro: * Click Browse to select the saved CSV template file.
* After the file has been selected, click on “**Upload**”.
* After the import has been completed, the result will be displayed with the message for success or error (if any). * Invoice Payment will only get uploaded into the system if there are no errors in the file.
* If the upload is successful, the invoice payments will be created in the system and the corresponding invoices will be paid.
* If there are errors in the file, you can download the error file, fix the errors in the original file, and upload it back into Xoro. ### 6. Auto-Close Item Lines on ASN/Wave Completion We have introduced a new auto-close item line(s) feature for Purchase Orders and Sales Orders, which automatically closes the item line(s) when the corresponding Advance Shipment Notice (ASN) or Wave is processed. This feature is particularly useful when you want to restrict any changes on the item level in the order. **How does it work?** **ASN** * Create and Release a Purchase Order. Then, proceed to create the Advance Shipping Notice (ASN) * In the “Create ASN” module, you will find the “Auto Close PO Line?” option located in the ASN Lines section.
* Toggle on this option to activate the “Auto Close PO Line” functionality for the current PO and continue with the ASN creation process and receiving process. * Once all the selected Items have been received and closed through the ASN, the system will automatically close the Purchase Order Lines, restricting any changes to the PO line.
**Wave** * Create and Release a Sales Order. Then, proceed to create the Wave. * In the “Create Wave” module, the “Auto Close SO Line?” option has been added in the Wave Lines section.
* Turn on this toggle option to activate the “Auto Close SO Line” functionality for the current SO, then proceed to create and receive the Wave. * Once all the selected Items have been shipped, the Sales Order lines will be automatically closed, restricting any changes to the SO line.
### 7. Display Customer/Vendor Alert Note on Orders We have added the ability to promptly display the alert note added to a customer or vendor on the Sales Order and Purchase Order respectively. To facilitate this, a new app config, "**Display Alert Notes for Orders in Edit State**" has been added.
If this config is enabled, the alert note will be automatically populated whenever an already existing order is opened. This ensures that you are always aware of any special instructions, preferences, or important information related to the customer or vendor, enabling you to make more informed decisions. **How does it work?**\ \ **Sales Order** * Open a sales order from the Sales Order Centre. * If an Alert Note is added for the Customer, it will be populated automatically on the bottom right corner of the screen.
**Purchase Order**
* Open a purchase order from the Purchase Order Centre. * If an Alert Note is added for the Vendor, it will be populated automatically on the bottom right corner of the screen.
### 8. Wave Date column added to the Sales Order Centre We have added a new column, "**Last Wave Date**" in the Sales Order Center. This new column displays the date and time of the most recent wave created for each sales order, helping you stay on top of order processing.
### 9. Data Export Centre: Added multiple columns We have added multiple columns in the Data Export Centre in the Inventory by Item and Sales Order headers. **Inventory by Item** We've added two new columns, **ATS(Inc MO )** and **ATS(Inc PO & MO)** under the Inventory by Item header in the Data Export Centre. These columns allow you to gain a complete picture of your Available to Sell (ATS) inventory and enable you to make more accurate inventory forecasts and purchasing decisions. **Sales Order** We have added four new columns: **Customer Group**, **Third Party Notes**, **Default Location**, and **Customer Service Rep** in the Sales Order section in the Data Export Centre.
# August 2023 Release ### Effortless Purchase Order Management with Auto Close Feature We have added the ability to close the PO automatically once all the Items in the orders have been received. For this, an option to “Auto Close PO” has been added to the Create ASN module. How does it work? * Create and Release a Purchase Order. Then, proceed to create the Advance Shipping Notice (ASN) * In the “Create ASN” module, you will find the "Auto Close" option located at the top right corner of the interface.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64cd2db9a5f74.png) * Toggle on this option to activate the "Auto Close PO" functionality for the current PO and continue with the ASN creation process and receiving process.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64cd2d8e7caac.png) * Once all the Items associated with the Purchase Order have been received through the ASN, the system will automatically close the Purchase Order, streamlining your workflow. * Please note that if there are multiple ASNs created on the PO, this option will only work when receiving the last batch of Item(s).
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64cd2fbb98969.png) * If you turn on this option before you are receiving the last batch, the system will throw an error.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64cd302ac58d9.png) ### Effortless Sales Order Management with Auto Close Feature We have added the ability to close the SO automatically once all the Items in the orders have been received. For this, an option to “Auto Close SO” has been added to the Create Wave module. How does it work? * Create and Release a Sales Order. Then, proceed to create the Wave. * In the “Create Wave” module, the “Auto Close” option has been added at the top right corner. Turn on this toggle option, then create and receive the Wave.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64cd334a75f75.png) * Please note that in the Auto Wave process, an "Auto Close SO(s) checkbox has been added.
* Once all the Items have been received, the Sales Order will be automatically closed. * Please note that if there are multiple Waves created on the SO, this option will only work when shipping the last batch of Item(s).
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64cd34abd0385.png) * If you turn on this option before, the system will throw an error.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64cd35808b3e2.png) ### Generate Variants Directly from the Product Module We are excited to introduce a new feature in our ERP website that allows you to generate product variants directly from the Product module. This enhancement streamlines the process of creating and managing product variants, making it easier and more efficient for you to handle your inventory. How does it work? * Create a Product: To enable the "Generate Variants" option, first, you need to create a product in the Product module. Once the product is created, the option will become available.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64cd4d99c5764.png) * Generate Variants: Clicking on the "Generate Variants" option will take you to the Item module, where you can generate the product variants.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64d0e70317ced.png) * Set Variant Sequence: In the Item module, you have the flexibility to define the sequence for the Item name and description. For example, the sequence could be set as Basepart-Option1-Option2. Using this sequence, all the product variants will be generated automatically. However, if you leave these attributes blank, the system will use the existing sequence for generating variants. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64d0e786d9c41.png)
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64d0e949d90be.png) After setting the pattern, enter the "Standard Unit Cost" and "Standard Unit Price" and click on "Generate Variants" to create the Item variants for the product. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64d0e97733d7c.png) ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64d0eac4d72df.png) * Automatic UPC Generation: Additionally, we have introduced an automatic UPC (Universal Product Code) generation feature. By providing an initial UPC number, the system will automatically generate UPC numbers for the variants in an incremented manner. For instance, if you input "100" as the initial UPC number, the UPC numbers for the variants will be generated as 101, 102, 103, and so on.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64d0eca50d7a2.png)
### Streamlining the ordering process with the ability to set Purchase Ratios for Variants We have added the ability to set Purchase Ratios for the Product option. You can now set how the quantity of a product is distributed among its variants when placing an order. With this new ability, you can now define the distribution ratio for each variant of a product. When placing an order, the system will automatically allocate quantities based on the specified ratios. For example, let's say you have a product with three variant options, and you set the ratio as 1:2:3. If you order 60 units of the product, it will be distributed as 10, 20, and 30 units among the respective variants. For this, an App Config “Enable Purchase Ratio for Product Variants” has been added. When this config is ON, it will enable the Add/Update Purchase Ratio button in the Product module. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64d0edc68ec4f.png) How does it work? * To get started, navigate to the App Config and switch ON the "Enable Purchase Ratio for Product Variants" option. * Now, head to the Product module to create or update a product. Look for the "Add/Update Purchase Ratio" option and click on it.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64d0ee672e7c1.png) * You will be directed to the "Purchase Ratio" page, where you can set the desired distribution ratio for each variant.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64d0f463c730c.png) * Once the Purchase Ratios are defined, you can proceed to create an Order (Sales or Purchase) or a Purchase. * In the advanced variant finder, you will find an option to add quantities in front of each row.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64d0fcdb7037a.png) * You can use the (+) and (-) buttons to adjust the quantities or directly enter the desired quantity in the input box and hit enter.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64d0fd23d517c.png) * The system will distribute the quantity according to the predefined Purchase Ratios for each variant.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64d0fd61649bf.png) ### Introducing Price Editing on the Advance Variant Finder in Estimate and Sales Order We have introduced a new feature in our ERP system that allows you to update pricing directly from the Advance Variant Finder in Estimate and Sales Order. This enhancement streamlines the pricing management process, providing you with greater flexibility and control over your sales transactions. We have added an app configuration setting called "Enable Price Edit in Advance Variant Finder" for this feature. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64d1020b2a1d9.png) When this configuration is turned ON, a new price field will be displayed in the Advance Variant Finder pop-up. How does it work? * Open the Estimate/Sales Order module. Fill in the necessary fields and use the Advance Variant Finder to add the Item(s) to the Estimate/Sales Order. * Upon opening the Advance Variant Finder, the price field will be automatically pre-filled with the minimum price obtained from all items with the same Option 1. For example, if the Option 1 code is "XL" and there are 5 items with "XL," the minimum price from those items will be set as the default value in the price field.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64d103af13734.png) * Users have the liberty to modify the price in the field as needed. You can update the price according to your specific requirements.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64d103d9b1ba2.png) * However, please note that, after updating the price, when you open the advance variant finder open in the edit state then the price field will be disabled.

![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64d104e8e0573.png) ### Added the ability to edit the Product Variants in Estimate and Sales Order We have added the functionality for updating the qty and price in Advance Variant Finder. When an Item is added to the order, there is a pencil icon added at the item level line. On clicking on this icon, the variant finder pop-up will open with prefilled data of the item related to that product. So the user can update the qty (add a new item or remove any item(set the qty to 0 to remove it)). If the “Enable Price Edit in Advance Variant Finder” app config is on, then there will also be an option to edit the price in the advance variant finder. How does it work? * Create an Order (Sales/Purchase) or an estimate. * In the Item line level, click on the pencil icon to edit the product variant.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64d1066777734.png) * This will open the “Product Variant Finder” page. From here you can edit the quantity and/or the price and apply the changes.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64d106d714911.png) * The quantity and/or price will be updated on the Sales Order/Estimate.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64d107a0bab51.png) ### Wave Centre: Added "Order Date" column We have added a new column, “Order Date” in the Wave Centre. This column will display the sales order date. This enhancement provides a quick snapshot of the order creation date associated with the wave. This column is accessible at both the Header and Detail levels of the Wave Centre module. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64da48e3c6c59.png) ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64da4ae2b8542.png) ### Purchase Order Centre: Added the option to Batch Update Store We have implemented a new capability that allows to batch update the purchase order store, right from the Purchase Order Centre. A new config, “Enable store change after saving Purchase Order” has been added for this. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64da4eca879ad.png) The option to batch update the store from the Purchase Order Centre will only be available if this config is enabled. How does it work? * Navigate to the Purchase Order Centre and select the purchase orders you wish to update. Then, go to Options > Batch Updates.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64da4f4fa0669.png) * In the Batch Updates window, select “Store” from the column dropdown and select the desired store from the Value dropdown and click on “Update”.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64da4fe9abe54.png) * The store in the selected purchase orders will be updated.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64da5155a7650.png) **Please note:** * The store update option is applicable only to purchase orders with **open** and **released** statuses. * For released orders, store updates are allowed only if an **ASN (Advanced Shipping Notice)** has not yet been created for that particular order. ### Journal Entry detail level now available We have added the detail level view in the Journal Entry module to provide you with comprehensive insights into your transactions and enhance your ability to manage your financial data effectively. You can access this view using the dropdown menu in the Journal Entry Centre. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64da557328001.png) In the detail view, you can see all the transactions in the Journal Entry. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64da580eb7cd6.png) ### Invoice Centre: Added Customer Tags column A new column, “Customer Tags” has been added to the Invoice Centre. This column will display the tags associated with the customer. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64da5b8c09a4a.png) ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64da5bd5d80bb.png) ### Invoice: **LPN#, Lot#, Manufacture Date, and Expiry Date Columns Now Available** We have introduced four new columns to the Add/Change Invoice Qty screen. These columns include LPN#, Lot#, Manufacture Date, and Expiry Date. These additions cater to businesses that manage inventory through LPNs (License Plate Numbers), providing enhanced visibility into your invoicing and quantity management. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64da5fd5ad55b.png) Please note that these columns will only be displayed if the LPNs are enabled. ### Manufacturing Order linked to a cancelled Sales Order can not be processed We have introduced the ability to restrict the processing of manufacturing orders that are linked to cancelled sales orders, ensuring a seamless and error-free workflow. In conjunction with this feature, we have introduced a new app configuration setting: **"Disable picking/processing in Manufacture Order when linked sales order is cancelled."** ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64da63de8b46c.png) When this configuration is enabled, the system will automatically prohibit the processing of manufacturing orders if their linked sales order is in a cancelled status. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64da640eec717.png) If you attempt to process a manufacturing order linked to a cancelled sales order, the system will promptly alert you with an error message. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64dca86c479d6.png) ### **Item Sorting Enhancements in Multiple Modules** We have introduced a feature at the Item Detail Level to sort items across several key modules. With this enhancement, managing your orders and transactions becomes even more efficient and user-friendly. **Modules with Sorting Feature:** The following modules now include a comprehensive sorting feature at the item details level: * Estimate * Sales Order * Transfer Sales Order * Purchase Order * Transfer Purchase Order * Invoice * Item Receipt * Bill * Sales Receipt **Sorting Options:** The sorting options available include: * **Item Number:** Arrange items either in ascending or descending order based on their item numbers. * **Total Price:** Sort items based on their total price, helping you quickly identify high-value transactions. (Please note that this sorting option is not available in transfer orders as these orders do not involve pricing.) * **Quantity:** Arrange items by quantity, aiding in inventory management and fulfillment tracking. **Module-Specific Sorting:** In addition to the general sorting options, some modules offer specialized sorting criteria to cater to specific needs: **Variant Sequence:** For Sales Orders and Purchase Orders, variant sequences are factored in. You can sort the items in sales and purchase orders by variant sequence, ensuring a smooth flow in ordering processes involving variants. **How to Use:** 1. Open the desired module (e.g., Purchase Order). 2. Navigate to the Item Details section. 3. Look for the new sorting options added besides the Options dropdown menu.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64dcfb414eee0.png) 4. Choose the sorting criteria (item number, total price, quantity, or variant sequence).
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64dcfba64956d.png) 5. Enjoy the improved ability to organize and manage your data effortlessly.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64dcfbbdb6271.png) ### RMA: Get Enhanced Insights with "Third Party Notes" Column We have added the “Third Party Notes” column in the RMA module, designed to streamline communication across various stages of the return process. This column enables you to input relevant notes specific to third-party interactions, such as vendors, suppliers, or external partners. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64dcb4e50ae41.png) The notes entered in the "Third Party Notes" column will automatically synchronize with other connected modules and documents, enhancing communication across various touchpoints. Here's how it works: 1. **Invoice Credit Memo/Credit Memo:** Any notes entered in the RMA module's "Third Party Notes" column will be seamlessly reflected in the associated column in Invoice Credit Memo or Credit Memo. This ensures that all parties involved have access to the same information, promoting transparency and reducing the risk of miscommunication. 2. **ASN Centre (Detail Level):** Additionally, the "Third Party Notes" entered in the RMA module will also be visible within the ASN Centre at the detail level. This comprehensive visibility ensures that key information is accessible throughout the supply chain process. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64dcb5d587929.png) ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64dcb602b8f78.png) ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64dcb62068e95.png) ### Upload Accounts: Added “ActiveFlagStr” column We've added the "ActiveFlagStr" column to the Upload Accounts file. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64e3ab0d7e644.png) With the addition of this column, you now have the ability to set the status (Active or Inactive) of an account directly within the Upload Accounts file. This new feature simplifies and expedites the process of managing account statuses, allowing you to clearly define whether an account should be considered active or not. If you leave the "Is Active" column empty, our system will assume you want the account to be active by default and the account status will be set as “Active” in the Chart Of Accounts. ### Now choose the encoding type for the export We are introducing the ability to select the encoding type when trying to export data from the data export centre or when trying to download masterdata from any upload module. With the introduction of the Encoding Type selection feature, you can now customize the encoding format when exporting data, ensuring compatibility with various systems and applications. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Data Export Centre and select the data to export. * From the Options tab, select the desired export option.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64e3ad0ca925f.png) * In the “Select Import/Export Utility Template” screen, you'll notice the newly added "Encoding Type" option.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64e3ad328173d.png) * Click on the dropdown menu to reveal a list of available encoding types. The list includes the following types: ASCII, UTF8, UTF7, Unicode, UTF32, and ANSI.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64e3ad4b2f8d5.png) * Select the encoding type that aligns with your needs and export the data.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64e3ad7277acc.png) * Additionally, you will also find this option when trying to download master data from any upload module.
![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64e3ac863dfdb.png) ### Reconcile Bank Account: Search Transactions in Xoro to make the reconciliation process easier We have added the ability to search the system transactions while reconciling an account. With the newly added feature, you can now effortlessly search and match system transactions, paving the way for more accurate and efficient account reconciliation. How does it work? * Navigate to the “Bank Reconciliation” module and click on the "Options" dropdown menu.
* Among the options, you'll notice the newly added "Xoro Txns Advance Search." Select this option to access the advanced search interface.
* This feature allows you to user various parameters to perform an advance search on the transactions registered in Xoro.
* Utilize the search parameters to narrow down the transactions you're looking for. * Once you've refined your search, review and match the identified transactions with bank feed entries to reconcile your accounts effectively. * Let's understand this with the help of an example. Let's say that you pay a maintenance fee of $600 each month. Now, when you are performing the reconciliation for the previous month, instead of an exact match, you are shown 2 similar transactions (of this and the previous month).
* In this case, you can utilize the advance search feature to filter the transaction by date and you will get an exact match, making the reconciliation process easier and faster.
# July 2023 Release ### **1. Item Centre: Added the ability to batch update custom fields and alert note** We have added the ability to batch-update custom fields and alert notes in the Item Centre. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Item Centre. * Select “Batch Updates” from the Options.
* From here, you can update all the alert notes and custom fields created for the Item.
### **2. Batch Manufacturing Order: Added the column for item description** We have added a new column, “**Description**” in the Batch Manufacturing Order module. The Item description will be displayed under this column.
### **3. B2B: Backorders are now “Pending Orders”** We have changed the name of the “Back Orders’ tab to “Pending Orders”. The Pending Orders tab will show the details of the Released and Partially Received Orders.
### **4. Added the ability to set “default” offset dates on estimate and sales orders** We have added an App Config, "**Date offsets for Sales Order, Estimate and Invoice Date**"that allows you to set the dates for Estimate, Sales Orders, and Invoices as required.
With the help of this Config, you can set an offset specified in days for different date types. #### Estimate For an Estimate, by default, the Follow Up Date is 7 days and the Valid Until Date is 60 days from the date of the Estimate respectively. If the above-mentioned config is defined, the Estimate dates will be automatically calculated based on this offset.
Let’s understand this will an example: Let’s assume that the offset for Follow up Date is set to ’10’ and Estimate vaild Date is set to ’30’.
Now, when you create an Estimate, the Follow Up Date will be set to 10 days from the date of the Estimate, and the Valid Until Date will be set to 30 days from the date of the Estimate.
#### **Sales Order** The “**Promise Date**” and “**To Be Shipped**” date for a Sales Order and Invoice is the same as the Order date by default, and you can select the “Date to be Cancelled” manually. With this Config, you can set the offset for ‘**Date to be Shipped**’, ‘**Promise Date**’, and ‘**Date to be Cancelled**’ for the Sales Order and Invoices.
Let’s assume that the offset for “Promise Date” is set to ’12’, “Date To Be Shipped” is set to ‘10’ and “Date To Be Cancelled” is set to ’40’.
Now, when you create a Sales Order, the Promise Date will be 12 days from the date of the Order, Date To Be Shipped will be 10 days from the date of the Order and the To Be Cancelled date will be 40 days from the date of the Order.
### **5.** **Pricing Rule Enhancement: Added the ability to set priority for the pricing rules** We have added the ability to set the priority for pricing rules. To accomplish this, a new field “Priority Number” has been added to the Pricing Rule module and the Pricing Rule upload file.
With this ability, you can define the priority for the different pricing rules. The **bigger** number takes more priority over smaller numbers. So, if there are three pricing rules defined for an Item and the priorities 1, 2 and 3 has been assigned to these rules, then the pricing rule with “3” priority will take precedence over the other two. Take a look at the example below where 3 Pricing Rules have been created. The priorities of the Rules are set to 1, 2 and 5.
When this Item is added to the Sales Order, the rule with the highest priority (The Limited Edition Discount rule in this case) takes precedence and the price of the Item is reduced by 25%.
### **6. Upload Products: Added the ability to define option sequences per product (optional)** We have added the ability to define the option sequence per product in the “Upload Products” file. A new app config, “Use product option sequence in upload product” has been added for this.
If this app config is On, the product options will be uploaded in the sequence defined in the file. If the config is off, the product options will be uploaded in the sequence of the variants in which they are entered in the upload file.
### **7. Expanded Description Box Size for Enhanced Viewing** We’ve implemented an enhancement that increases the size of the Item description box within the Sales Order and Invoice module. This improvement allows for effortless viewing and editing of more extensive descriptions.
### **8. Introducing the ‘Shipping’ Tab in the Vendor Module for Streamlined Data** We’ve introduced a new “**Shipping**” tab within the Vendor module. This tab incorporates the following fields: * Default Ship Method * Default Carrier * Default Service * Default FOB * Default Shipping Terms * Shipping Account Number This enhancement eliminates the need to repeatedly input shipping information into each Purchase Order, significantly streamlining the process.
### **9. Added Lot# and Batch# across multiple modules** The Lot# and Batch# columns have been added to the Wave Detail Centre, Pick Wave, and Receive ASN module. These columns have also been added to the “Inventory Log” tab of the Invoice, Item Receipt, and Bill modules.
# June 2023 Release ### **1.** Upload Commission Rule: Introduced the ability to create Commission Rule via Upload We have added a new module, “Upload Commission Rule”. This module provides users with the convenient capability to create Commission Rules in bulk. Additionally, it also allows for the update of existing Commission Rules. How does it work? * Go to the Upload Commission Rule module and download the Template provided in the module.
* In the template, you can use the “HeaderIdentifierType” column to decide whether you want to create a new rule or update an existing rule. HeaderRefNumber represents the creation of a new commission rule. Id represents the updation of an existing commission rule. * To create a new Commission Rule, enter the term “HeaderRefNumber” in the “HeaderIdentifierType” column. Then, specify any reference number in the “HeaderIdentifier” column.
* Fill in the remaining details and upload the file into the system. Remember, fields marked with asterisks (\*) are mandatory and cannot be left blank. * You can also update an existing Commission Rule. To do that, download the master data file from the Upload Commission Rule module.
* The term “Id” will be mentioned in the “HeaderIdentifierType” column. Subsequently, the specific Id from the Commission Rule Center will be mentioned in the “HeaderIdentifier” column.
* Make the needed updates and upload the file. ### **2. Quick Receive: Added the ability to quick receive selected lines** We have added the ability to quick receive selected lines of a PO. **How does it work?** * Create a Purchase Order and release it. Then, proceed to Quick Receive the Purchase Order from the Options. * On the “Quick Receive Orders” page, the Items in the Orders have been listed. * Select the Items that you want to Quick Receive and then select the “Quick Receive Selected Item Lines” from the “Quick Receive” dropdown.
* The selected Item(s) would be received and a corresponding Item Receipt would be created for the received Item(s).
### **3. Added the ability to use parent’s credit on a child customer and vice-versa** Now you can use the parent’s credit for the child and vice versa. This means you can pay a child customer’s invoice using the parent’s credit and vice versa. The system also shows available credits for both parent and child customers when paying invoices with credits
### **4. MO Disassemble: Added the ability to set a default offset account** We have added the ability to set a Disassemble Offset Account when creating a “Disassemble” type Manufacture Order. For this, a new App Config named “Disassemble Offset Account” has been added under the Manufacturing tab. \*\*You can also set this option for specific MO in the Manufacture order module using a dropdown menu.
The account selected here would be automatically added as an offset account for disassembly-type manufacturing orders. ### **5. Added Sent-by-Scheduler column to Bill of Material Centre and Data Export Centre** We have added a new column, “Sent by Scheduler” to the Bill of Material Centre and Data Export Centre (Bill Of Material Lines). When the file is exported using Data Export Centre in the case of Job Scheduler, this column will be marked as Y.
### **6. Chart of Accounts: Added the ability to deactivate the accounts** We have added the ability to deactivate an account. For this purpose, an active toggle button is added to the Account module. Turn the toggle off to deactivate the account.
Please note that only accounts with no transaction or zero balance can be deactivated. ### **7. Item Inventory Snapshot: Added Sales Rep column in the On SO Details and On SO Draft Details** We have made an update to the On SO and On SO Draft Details modules fetched from the Inventory Snapshot by adding the “Sales Rep” column. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Inventory Snapshot module and click on the quantity under the “On SO” or “On SO Draft” column\ .
* This will open up the Details module. Here, you will notice the addition of a new column called “Sales Rep”.
* This column provides information about the sales representative associated with the SO. With this addition, you can check the associated Sales Rep for an SO directly from the Item Inventory Snapshot module. ### **8. ASN Centre: Added Vendor column** We have added a new column, “Vendor” in the ASN Centre. This will fetch the Vendor linked to the PO.
### **9. Receive ASN: Added the “Expiry Date” column** We have added a new column, “Expiry Date” in the Receive ASN module. **How does this work?** * Navigate to the Receive ASN module. * Click on the “Action” button\ .
* A “Receive Item to Location” window will populate. The “Expiry Date” column has been added here.
### **10. Manufacture Order Template: Added Customer Name** We have added the Customer Name in the template of Manufacture Orders that are linked to a Sales Order. This will be populated under the “Linked SO’s” column in the template.
### **11. Added Customer Statement Section in the Customer Portal** We have added a new section, “Customer Statement” in the B2B Portal. From here your customers can view and print their statements.
### **12. Data Export Centre: Added Item Price Centre** We have added the “Item Price Centre” option in the Data Export Centre. With this addition, you can view the Item Price Centre details from the Data Export Centre and export the data as per your requirement. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the “Data Export Centre”. * From the “Search by” dropdown, select the “Item Price Centre” option.
* You can view and export this data as required.
### **13. Upload Pricing Rule: Added the ability to schedule the upload** We have added the ability to schedule an upload for the Pricing Rule. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Upload Pricing Rule module. * Browse and select the file to be uploaded. * From the “Verify & Upload” dropdown, select the “Schedule Import” option.
* You will be taken to the “Job Scheduler” page. Enter all the details here and click on “Save”.
* You can see the job in the “Job Scheduler History” module and the Pricing Rule will be uploaded as scheduled.
### **14. Added “Alternative Item Numbers” on multiple modules** We have added Alternative Item Numbers in the Item Receipt Centre (Detail level), Bill Centre (Detail level) and on the Create ASN module.\
### **15. Added ASN Info tab in the Item Receipt and Bill modules** We have added a new tab, “ASN Info” in the Item Receipt and Bill modules. This contains ASN details, like the ASN Number, Status and PO Number.
Additionally, you can click on the ASN number and PO number to get more details.
### **16. Introducing Bill Approval Functionality** We are introducing a new feature for bill approval, along with the ability to limit payments for bills that haven’t been approved. To achieve this, a new app configuration named “Restrict Payment for Unapproved Bills” has been added under the Purchase tab.
**How does it work?** * When the above-mentioned app configuration is turned on, bills will be generated with the status “Waiting for approval.”
* Approval is required before proceeding with bill payments. You can achieve this by going to Options > Approval > Mark as Approved.
* Attempting to pay an unapproved bill will trigger the following system error.
* Furthermore, a new column titled “Approval Status” has been incorporated into the Bill Centre. This column will indicate whether a bill has been marked as “Approved” or is still “Waiting For Approval”.
### **17. Vendor: Added the ability to choose the default payment method** We have added the ability to set a default payment method for a Vendor. With this addition, you can select the default payment method used to pay the bill to the Vendor. **How does it work?** * Open the Vendor for which you want to add the default payment method. * Under the “Payments” tab of the Vendor, we have added the option to select the “Default Payment Method”. Select the method from the dropdown and click on “Update”/”Save” to apply the changes.
* You can also set the default payment method via upload. For that, a new column, “DefaultPaymentMethodName” had been added to the upload vendor file.
* The default payment method set for the vendor will be registered in the respective Item Receipt and Bill and you can use this while making the bill payment. ### **18. Added the ability to view multi-company inventory in Sales Order, Purchase Order and Item Inventory Snapshot modules** We have introduced a new feature that streamlines the process of tracking inventory across multiple integrated companies. A new app config, “Show Inventory Info (Multi Company)” has been added for this.
Additionally, a new access level has been added in the Access Manager module under the Admin tab. This helps you to select which user have the multi company access. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64e4f00fc68d1.png) This feature is now available within both the Sales Order, Purchase Order and Item Inventory Snapshot modules, allowing you to effortlessly access and assess inventory information from different companies, all within a single instance. \*\*Note: This option is only applicable for the instances setup as multi-company and connected to each other * **Sales Order and Purchase Order** To check the inventory levels for multiple companies on Sales Order and Purchase Order, follow the steps below: * Navigate to the Item Details section of the order and right-click on the desired Item to access the Inventory Details. * From the menu that appears, select the “Inventory Info (Multi-Company)” option. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64e4ecff6b1ed.png) * Upon clicking, a new window named “Qty Detail Multi-Company” will appear. This window displays a detailed breakdown of the available inventory by location for the selected item across all integrated instances.
* **Item Inventory Snapshot** To check the inventory levels for multiple companies on Sales Order, follow the steps below: * Navigate to the “Item Inventory Snapshot” module. * Click on the quantity displayed under any Inventory level. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64e4e99dc607a.png) * In the ensuing “Qty Details” window, a new tab has been introduced labelled “Inventory Info (Multi-Company).” ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64e4e9e35ade2.png) * Click on this tab to view the “Qty Detail Multi-Company” window. Here, you will find a comprehensive view of the inventory available by Location for the Item across all integrated instances. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/img_64e4eb834fcb6.png)
# May 2023 Release ### **1. Credit Memo: Added the ability to link Invoice** We have added a new column, “Invoice Number” in the Credit Memo. This column allows you to link a Credit Memo to the corresponding Invoice. When you only refund the amount, this enhancement simplifies the process of refunding the invoice amount without using the inventory item. **How does it work?** * Go to the Credit Memo module. The “Invoice Number” column has been added here.
* You can then enter the Invoice Number in this column to link it to the Credit Memo.
* If you have used a credit card to pay for the Invoice, you can now refund the Credit Memo amount to the same card.
### **2. Customer Centre: Added a new column to show the status of the Credit Card** We have introduced a new feature in the Customer Centre called “Card Exp Status”. This feature is added to the Credit Card Report, which is accessible from the Customer Centre Options. The “Card Exp Status” column displays the current status of your credit card, whether it is valid or expired. **How does it work?** * In the Customer Center, go to Options>Show Credit Card Report.
* The “Card Exp Status” column has been added to this report, which displays the current status of each card.
* This feature helps you keep track of the validity of your credit cards and ensures that you are using the correct card for your transactions. ### **3. Short Inventory Planner: Added the column, “Alert Note”** We have added a new column, in the Short Inventory Planner module. This will show the Alert Note added to the Item.
### **4. Added multiple columns in Item Centre, Item Inventory Snapshot, and Short Inventory Planner modules** We have added the following columns in Item Centre, Item Inventory Snapshot, and Short Inventory Planner modules: Last Unit Cost, Last Landed Cost, Last Landed Cost Home Currency, Last Purchase Qty, Last Receipt Date, Last Receipt Currency Code, and Last Receipt Reconciled.
### **5. Receive ASN: Added the column Lot#** We have added a new column, Lot# in Receive ASN module. This column displays the lot number of items received in the ASN. **How does it work?** * Create an ASN and proceed to receive it. * In the Receive ASN module, click on the “Action” button to navigate to the “Receive Item to Location” screen.
* On this screen, you will find the new “Lot#” column added.
### **6. Purchase Order: Added “Qty Remaining” and “Received%” columns** We have made an enhancement to the Purchase Order module by introducing two new columns, “Qty Remaining” and “Received%”, at the Item line level. The “Qty Remaining” column displays the number of units for each Item that are still to be received. It indicates pending or outstanding units of an Item. On the other hand, the “Received%” column represents the percentage of units that have been received for each Item. It shows the progress or fulfillment status of the order in terms of the received units. To illustrate this, let’s consider an example. Suppose you placed an order for 10 units of a particular Item. If you have received 2 units so far, the “Qty Remaining” column would display 8 because there are still 8 units left to be received. In the “Received%” column, it would show 20% because you have received 2 out of the total 10 units, which is equivalent to 20% of the order.
These columns are also added to the Purchase Order Centre at the detail level.
### **7. Manufacture Order: Added two fields, “PPE Notes” and “Instructions”** The Manufacture Order module has been updated with two new fields called “PPE Notes” and “Instructions” added under the “Other” tab.
These fields are taken from the Bill of Material (BOM).
When the BOM is added to the Manufacture Order, the same information from these fields in the BOM will be automatically populated in the corresponding fields in the Manufacture Order. Additionally, both of these new fields are also available in the Manufacture Order Centre and the Data Export Centre. However, in the Data Export Centre, the “Instruction” column has been labeled as “MO Instruction”.
### **8. B2b Presentation: Added the option to select auto wave method** We have introduced a new feature in the Presentation tool that allows users to select an auto-wave method. This feature is designed to streamline the process of creating waves for orders. **How does this work?** * Navigate to the “Other Attributes” tab of the Presentation. Here, you will find a new dropdown option called “Wave Method.”
* If the Auto-Wave option is selected, you can further specify how the order should be waved using three different methods: “Full Order(s) Only,” “Full Qty Line(s) Only,” or “Allocate What’s Available.”
* This works similarly to the auto-wave process in the regular Sales Order process. As an example, if you select the “Full Order(s) Only” option, the system will create a wave only if there is enough inventory available to fulfill the entire order. ### **9. Sales Order Centre: Added the ability to batch update “Date to be Cancelled”** We have added the ability to batch update “Date to be Cancelled” in the Sales Order Centre. This new functionality is available at both the header and detail levels within the Sales Order Centre.\
### **10. Upload Vendor: Add the ability to upload Custom Fields** We have implemented the ability to upload Custom Fields for Vendors. **How does it work?** * Define the Vendor Custom Fields in the Custom Field Definition module.
* Navigate to the Upload Vendor module and download the provided template.
* In the template, you will find that the Custom Fields have been added. You can define the Custom Fields and upload the file. (Please note that in the Upload file, the field name for Custom Fields will be CustomFieldH1, CustomFieldH2, CustomFieldH3… It will not contain the name you have given to these fields).
* The Custom Field data can be accessed in both the Vendor module and the Vendor Centre.
* ```
``` ### **11. Purchase Order: Adding Vendor Custom Field Mapping with the PO** We have added the ability to map Vendor Custom Fields with the Purchase Order Details Custom Fields. With this added ability, the Custom Fields created for Vendor will be retrieved in the Purchase Order at the Item line level. **How does it work?** * Define the Custom Fields for the “Vendor” and “Purchase Order Details” Transaction Types.
* Navigate to the Custom Field Mapping module and establish the mapping between the Custom Fields for Vendor and Purchase Order Detail.
* Once the mapping is done, the Custom Field data will be fetched in the Purchase Order at the Item line level, provided it has been added to the Vendor.
### **12. B2b Presentation Centre: Added the ability to select from multiple addresses on the Order Summary page** You can now select from multiple addresses on the Order Summary page in the Presentation Centre. This enhancement provides you with the flexibility to choose the desired Shipping and Billing addresses when dealing with customers who have multiple addresses. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the B2B Portal, add Item(s) to your cart and proceed to checkout. * In the Order Summary page, a dropdown has been added for Shipping and Billing Addresses.
* ```
``` * You can select the Shipping and Billing address for the particular order from here. ### **13. Journal Entry: Added the ability to add Journal Entry without any Entity** When creating a Journal Entry, it was mandatory to add the Entity name for AP and AR accounts (like Vendor or Customer). We have enhanced the Journal Entry functionality and added the ability to add the Journal Entry without any entity.
This functionality is enabled from the backend. If you would like to utilize this feature, kindly reach out to us, and we will activate it for you. ### **14. Transfer Purchase Order: Added the ability to update Transfer Purchase Order via Upload** We have added the ability to update the Transfer Purchase Order via upload. To facilitate this functionality, we have introduced two new columns, “VoidandCreate” and “KeepOriginalOrderNumber” in the upload template. Please note that only orders in the Open or Released status can be updated. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Upload Transfer Purchase Order module. * Download the template and fill in the details of the TPO that you want to update.
* In the “VoidAndCreate” column, input the value “Y”. This will void the existing Order and create a new order with the updated information. * If you want to keep the original Order number, input the value “Y” in the column “KeepOriginalOrderNumber”. Alternatively, input “N” to change the Order number.
* Upload the file, and the Order will be successfully updated. ### **15. Short Inventory Planner: Added the column “Tags”** We have added the column “Tags” in the Short Inventory Planner. Now, you can see the tags associated with an Item in this module and well as filter the Item using the tags.
### **16. Payment Gateway: Xoro has integrated with Fuze Payments** Xoro now supports an additional payment gateway, Fuze Payments to provide you with a more diverse and convenient option to make your payments. **How to connect Fuze payments with Xoro** * In the Manage Payment Services module, under the “Add Services” tab, “Connect” with the “3 Verticals” (Fuze Payment) Payment Gateway.
* You will be prompted to choose an “Account Name” and fill in the “Fuze Account ID” provided to you. After filling in the details, hit “Connect”. (Please note that currently Fuze Payments only supports USD payments.
* Once Fuze Payments is integrated into Xoro, it will be shown under “Active Services”.
* From here, you can set up the Payment Account.
* Additionally, there are options to set the service as default or to delete it under the Actions column.

# April 2023 Release ### **1. Upload ASN Receipt: Added columns Lot Number, Batch Number, Manufacture Date, Expiry Date** We’ve included four additional columns in the Upload ASN Receipt template that correspond to LPN details. These columns are LotNumber, BatchNumber, MfgDate, and ExpDate.
**Please note:** These columns will only be available if the app config, “Enable LPNs” is ON.
These details can be verified from the Inventory Change Log module.
### **2. Inventory Adjustment: Added LPN Number, Lot Number, Batch Number, Manufacture Date, and Expiry Date columns** When creating an Inventory Adjustment, we’ve incorporated five new fields: To LPN#, Lot#, Batch#, Manufacture Date, and Expiry Date. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the “Inventory Adjustment” module. * Select the Store and search for the Item and click on the “Add New Location” button.
* An “Add New Location” window will populate. The columns have been added here.
* Enter the details and click on “Add”.
* Click on “Adjust Inventory” to create Inventory Adjustment.
**Please Note:** * These columns will only be shown if the “**Enable LPNs**” app config is ON.
* If the “**Auto generate LPNs in case of No LPN location”** app config is ON, the LPN will be generated automatically, if not entered. If this app config is OFF and the LPN# is not entered, the LPN will not be generated for the adjustment.
### **3. Manufacturing Order: Added the ability to create the Manufacturing Order in the Released status** We have added the feature to create a Manufacturing Order in Released status. A new app config, “**Auto Release Manufacturing Order”** has been created for this.
If this config is enabled, the MO will automatically be created in Released status. If disabled, the MO creation will work as usual and the order will be created in “Open” status. ### **4. Item Reconciliation: Added the ability to calculate the Reconciliation by CBM** We have added the ability to calculate the Reconciliation by CBM. **How does it work?** * Set the CBM value in the Item Details.
* In the Item Receipt or Bill, start the Reconciliation process. * In the third step of the Reconciliation process, select “CBM” under the Calculated By dropdown and click on “Calculate” to calculate the Landed Cost. * Complete the Reconciliation process.
* The Landed Amount will be calculated by the CBM value.
### **5. Sales Order: Added the option to view and link incoming inventory** We have added the ability to view the Incoming Delivery of an Item in Sales Order and link that to the particular quantity in SO to the quantity on PO. **How does it work?** * In the SO Details section of the Sales Order, right-click on an Item and select the “Inventory Info” option.
* This will open the “Qty Details” window. An “Incoming Deliveries” tab has been added here.
* Click on this tab to see the PO Number on which the Item has been ordered and the expected delivery date of the Item as per the PO.
* Using this you can link the Item Qty on the PO to the SO. * To do that, click on the PO Number and you will be redirected to the Order Linker module. Click on “Add Linking” to link the PO to the SO.
* The PO will be linked to the SO. You can see the link on the “Linked Orders” tab on the SO.
### **6. Upload Bill Of Materials: Added the ability to Schedule BOM Import** We have added the ability to schedule BOM import. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Upload Bill Of Materials module. * Under Step 4: Upload Data, click on the upload dropdown and select “Schedule Import”.
* The Job Scheduler window will populate. Fill in the details and click “Save” to schedule the BOM import.
### **7. Added Sales Notes alert on Sales Order and Invoice** A new feature, Sales Note alert has been added to the Sales Order and Invoice modules. This function allows the Sales Note, which is added in the Item Detail, to populate as soon as an Item is added to the Sales Order or Invoice. **How does it work?** * Open the Item to which you want to add the Sales Note. Under the “Other Attributes” tab of the Item, enter the Sales Note in the respective field and click on Save.
* Navigate to the Sales Order or Invoice module. Click on the “Add Item” option.
* In the SO Detail window, select the Item to which the Sales Note has been added. The Sales Note alert would populate at the bottom right corner of the screen.

# February 2023 Release ### **1. Customer Portal Links: Added this new module to include external Resources in the Customer Portal** We have added a new module “Customer Portal Links” to add external resources to the Customer Portal home page and the Presentation View page. **How does it work?** * Use the Search menu to navigate to the “Customer Portal Links” module. * Here, you can add the details of the external links that will be added to the Customer Portal.
* Add the information in the “Title” and “Description” fields. In the “Link” field, add the link to which you want to redirect the user. Then, click on “Save”
* You can check all the links added in this module in the “Customer Portal Links Centre”
* These links will be shown on the Customer Portal home page. On the Customer Portal home page, a new menu “Resources” has been added. The Portal Users can access these external links from here.
* A “Resources” tab has also been added to the Presentation View screen. The user can also access the external links from here. * ```
``` ### **2. Added a feature to check incoming PO units for the Back Ordered Items** We have added the ability to see the units that will be received for the items that have been placed on back orders. **How does it work?** To access information regarding upcoming deliveries for items on back order, follow these steps: * Go to the “Back Order Info” module in the Customer Portal. A new column, “Incoming Deliveries,” has been added here.
* To view the details of incoming deliveries, click on the search icon underneath this column.
* This will take you to the “Incoming PO Deliveries” page, where you can see the quantity of the item that is expected to be delivered in the future, along with the expected delivery date.
### **3. Added the ability to show a range of prices, instead of a single price** The Presentation now includes a range of prices (minimum-maximum) to indicate the variation in prices of different variants of the Product. This marks a deviation from the previous approach, which involved displaying only the lowest price of the Product. For instance, suppose you have a T-shirt in three colors, each with a different standard price: Red ($30), White ($35), and Blue ($35). [![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/04/Screenshot_633.png)](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/04/Screenshot_633.png) Previously, only the minimum price ($30) would have been displayed. But now, the price of the item will be shown as a range ($30-$35). Note that if all the variants have the same price, only a single price will be displayed.\
### **4. Added a new “Item Info” view in the Customer Portal** We have introduced a new view called “Item Info” in the Customer Portal that can be accessed from various locations. Depending on your preferences, this view provides details about the item. To configure which tabs are displayed in this view, a new app config called “**Show/Hide Item Info Tabs In Customer Portal Item Info View**” has been added to the system.
Only the tabs selected in this App Config will be shown to the Customer. **How does it work?** You can access this view in the following ways: * **Search Products module** * You can see this info when you search for a Product.
* In the Customer Portal, search for a Product. A new “Show Details” button has been added to the “Search Products” page.
* When you click on this, the “Item Info” page will be populated. Here, you can see the details of the Item. There are 4 tabs available: “Primary”, “Weights & Dims”, “Inventory”, and “Incoming Deliveries”. Only the tabs selected in the above-mentioned app config will be shown.
* **Add Product module** * You can access the “Item Info” view from the “Add Product” module. * Click on a Product to see the details and add it to the cart. * If you click on the Item quantity, the “Item Info” page will be populated.\
* **Checkout module** * The “Item Info” view can be accessed from the Checkout module as well. * On the Order Summary page, click on the available quantity under the Item price to see the “Item Info” view.
\*\*Please note that when the Item Info pop-up is opened from qty, the inventory tab is displayed by default. If the inventory tab is not selected in the app config, the quantity will not be clickable. ### **5. Added the feature to display the inventory as either lower or higher than a specific value** We have included a new feature that enables users to view their inventory as either above or below a particular quantity. This can be configured based on whether the inventory is shown on the Portal or Presentation View. **Portal:** For the inventory shown in the Customer portal, a new app config, “**Min/Max Qty to Show for Item in B2B Portal”** has been added, allowing users to define the maximum and minimum quantities. [![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/04/Screenshot_643.png)](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2023/04/Screenshot_643.png) So, if the inventory is less than the minimum value, then it will be shown as less than the specified value and if the inventory is greater than the maximum value, then it will be shown as greater than the specified value.
**Presentation View:** For the inventory shown in the Presentation View, the maximum and minimum quantities are defined in the Presentation attributes.
So, if the inventory is less than the minimum value, then it will be displayed as less than the specified value and if the inventory is greater than the maximum value, then it will be displayed as greater than the specified value.
\*\*Please note that if the quantity is equal to or between the maximum and minimum quantity, the exact quantity will be displayed.
### **6. Item Centre: Added the ability to Batch Update HS Code and Material** We have added the ability to batch update the HS and Material of the Item in the Item Centre. **How does it work?** \*Please note that the values in the dropdown will be fetched from the data saved in HS Code and Material Centre modules.\
### **7. Manufacture Order: Added the “Save & New” dropdown option** We have now added the “Save & New” dropdown option on the Manufacture Order create page. With the "Save & New" option, users can efficiently save their current manufacturing order and redirect to a new, blank order creation page. This feature eliminates the need to navigate back to the order creation page, saving valuable time and reducing the likelihood of errors.
### **8. B2B: Added the ability to make the Customer PO mandatory** We have now added the option to make Customer PO mandatory for creating a B2B order. This feature is designed to simplify the ordering process, ensuring that all necessary information is captured at the outset. To enable this feature, follow these steps: 1. Navigate to the "Other Attributes" tab within the presentation settings. 2. Select the option labeled "Make Customer PO mandatory."
3. "Save" the presentation to apply the changes.
Once this setting is enabled, you will be required to provide the Customer PO on the Order Summary page in order to complete the creation of a B2B order. ### **9. Task: Added the ability to create Task from Sales Order** A new tab, “Task” has been added to the Sales Order module. You can now create and manage tasks directly from the Sales Order. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the "Task" tab in the sales order module and click "Create Task" to begin creating a task.
* You will be redirected to the Task module. Fill in the details and click "Save" to create the task.
* Once the task is created, you can view and access the task from the "Task" tab.
**Please note:** 1. If you are creating the task from the Sales Order, the Sales Order number will be automatically added as the Ref# of the task and the task will be linked to the Sales Order. 2. The “Visibility” of the task created from the Sales Order will be “Public” by default.
# January 2023 Release ### 1. Sales Order: Added the ability to update Sales Order via Upload We have added the ability to update the Sales Order via upload. To facilitate this functionality, we have introduced two new columns, “VoidandCreate” and “KeepOriginalOrderNumber” in the upload template. If both of these fields are set to true, the existing Sales Order will be voided and a new Sales Order will be created with the same Order number. Additionally, you can set the “KeepOriginalOrderNumber” field to false to update the Sales Order number as well.
Please Note: To update, the Order must be in “Open” or “Released” status and must be Unallocated. How does it work? * Navigate to the Data Export Centre and search by “Sales Order Detail”.
* Now, select the lines of the Sales Order you want to update and click on Options > Export To Local – Selected.
* Open the download file, make the desired updates and save the file. Make sure to set the “IsVoidAndCreate” field to “Y”. This will void the existing Order and create a new order with the updated information. * If you want to keep the original Order number, input the value “Y” in the column “KeepOriginalOrderNumber”. Alternatively, input “N” to change the Order number. * Now, go to the Upload Sales Order module and upload the file. * The existing Sales Order will be voided and a new Sales Order will be created in the system with the same number and updated details. The new Order will be created with “Open” status.
Here’s a look at the old and updated example Sales Order: **Old:**
**Updated:**
### 2. Purchase Order: Added the ability to update Purchase Order via Upload We have added the ability to update the Purchase Order via upload. To facilitate this functionality, we have introduced two new columns, “VoidandCreate” and “KeepOriginalOrderNumber” in the upload template. If both of these fields are set to true, the existing Sales Order will be voided and a new Sales Order will be created with the same Order number. Additionally, you can set the “KeepOriginalOrderNumber” field to false to update the Purchase Order number as well. Please Note: To update, the Order must be in “Open” or “Released” status. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Data Export Centre and search by “Purchase Order Detail”.
* Now, select the lines of the Purchase Order you want to update and click on Options > Export To Local – Selected.
* Open the download file, make the desired updates and save the file. Make sure to set the “IsVoidAndCreate” field to “Y”. This will void the existing Order and create a new order with the updated information. * If you want to keep the original Order number, input the value “Y” in the column “KeepOriginalOrderNumber”. Alternatively, input “N” to change the Order number. * Now, go to the Upload Purchase Order module and upload the file. * The existing Purchase Order will be voided and a new Purchase Order will be created in the system with the same number and updated details. The new Order will be created with “Open” status.
Here’s a look at the old and updated example Purchase Order: **Old:**
**Updated:**
### 3. Restricting Allocation and Shipping based on Order Cancel Date We have added a new feature to restrict the allocation and shipping of orders if the Order is older than the “To Be Cancelled” date. A new app config, “Restrict Wave/Pack and Ship Operation for Orders that have passed their cancellation dates” has been added for the same.
* If this setting is On, the user won’t be able to wave the Order after the cancellation date has passed.
* If the order has already been waved before turning on this App Config, the user won’t be able to Ship the Order.
### **4. Added Advanced Customer Search option in the Sales Flow** We have added the ability to directly search the Customer from Customer Centre in the entire Sales flow. Now, the user can use this advanced Customer search option in addition to the current functionality of searching and adding the Customer through the dropdown option. **How does it work?** * Navigate to any module in the Sales Flow where you can search Customer to add, for example, a Sales Order. * A “Search” icon has been added beside the “Select Customer” field to perform advance Customer search.
* Click on this option. The Customer Centre window will open that will display the list of Customers. * From here, you can Search and add the Customer. You can also use the Advance Search option to filter the results.
* After selecting the Customer, click on ‘Apply’ at the top-right corner and the Customer will be added to the Sales Order.
**Please note:** If no Customer is selected, the system will throw an error as shown below.
### **5. Manufacture Order: Added the ability to choose the Raw Material Location** A new column “Raw Material Location” has been added at the line level in the Manufacture Order. If location is selected, then the Raw Material Item will be picked from the specified location.
If the selected Location does not have inventory available, the system will throw the “Not sufficient qty available to allocate” when trying to Pick the Items.
### 6. Outgoing Payment: Automatic Tax Code Update in alignment with the Entity We have introduced a new enhancement in the outgoing payment process that simplifies tax code management and ensures accuracy in financial transactions. When selecting a payee for an outgoing payment, the system will now automatically fill in the tax code with the default tax code associated with the payee. Upon selecting the entity, the respective default tax code will be populated in the tax code field. By using the default tax code associated with the payee, the chances of errors in tax code entries are minimized, ensuring compliance and accuracy in financial reporting. ### 7. Batch MO: Added the ability to edit the Process And Services in the "Release" status to add or update service line items in a Batch Manufacturing Order (MO) even when the MO is in "Released" status. Previously, service line item modifications were only permitted when the MO was in "Open" status. This enhancement provides greater flexibility and control for users managing Batch MOs. Now, users can: * **Add new process and service line items:** Add additional services and/or processes to a Batch MO after it has been released. * **Update existing process and service line items:** Modify details of existing processes and service line items, even after the MO has entered the "Released" status.
### 8. Added the ability to select the default carrier for Ship Service and Ship Package Type We have added the ability to select a default carrier for both the ship service and ship package type modules. This includes a new "Set As Default" column, providing greater control and efficiency in the shipping process.
Users can now designate a default carrier in the "Ship Service" and "Ship Package Type" modules by selecting the "Set As Default" checkbox. This chosen carrier will become the default option for the respective ship service or ship package type. If a customer has been assigned a default carrier, this carrier will take precedence and be used in order processing. If a customer has not been assigned a default carrier, the system will use the default carrier associated with the selected ship service and ship package type. # 2022 # December 2022 Release 1. Prepare Tax Return: Added option to void the existing Filed Tax Return 2. Item: Updated ability to change SKU UOM of an existing Item 3. Email Centre: Updated with sent emails. 4. Implemented TSO/TPO new auto-update process 5. Option to Exclude PDF Attachment in the Order-related emails 6. App Config: Create Shipping Expense Bill directly from Invoice ### **1. Prepare Tax Return: Added option to void the existing Filed Tax Return** * Now, if a tax return has been filed from the “***Prepare Tax Return***” module it can be voided. A user can now revert the filed tax return from the “**Tax Return Centre**” module. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Tax Return Centre module. * Right-click on the Void option on line level
* This will Void the filed Tax Return only if there is no Refund or Payment recorded for it.
* If payment is done or a Refund is recorded, then it cannot be voided.
* Delete the payment/refund in order to void the tax file. * Lastly, the User can void the last Tax file header.
### **2. Item: Updated ability to change SKU UOM of an existing Item** A user can now update the UOM of an item. * Navigate to the Item Centre, and open an Item for which the UOM is to be changed.
* When changing the UOM of an existing Item, the system will give the following warning message: > You are changing the UOM from Each to cm. This can cause issues in the existing orders/invoices where the UOM was used to enter Each quantities. * The message will only come if the type is changed from decimal flag true to false type. * Save the changes made. ### **3. Email Centre: Updated with sent emails** The successfully sent emails can now be seen in the sent email User Email Centre.
Added the following sent emails: * Release Sales order * Deposit Link * Ship Confirmation. * B2B Order. * Invoice Payment The above emails will be displayed in the Email Centre under the “Sent Email” tab. * Click on an email to get the details. ### **4. Implemented TSO/TPO new auto-update process** Now, the system will not re-create TSO/TPO on the update, instead, it will update the values of the corresponding TPO/TSO. Make changes accordingly, and the changes will be updated in the corresponding TPO/TSO. **How does it work?** * Changing the TSO Ship Date header or line level will automatically update the corresponding TPO Ship Date, and vice versa. * Line level Qty changes (add/update/delete) will always attempt to sync with the corresponding TSO/TPO. * Adding a new line or deleting an existing line will automatically be reflected in the corresponding TSO/TPO after the order is re-opened. * Voiding TSO/TPO will void the corresponding TPO/TSO. **Please Note:** * When updating TPO Line quantity it cannot be less than the sum of Qty allocated & Qty shipped of corresponding TSO. * Same in the case of TPO, Quantity cannot be less than the sum of Qty received & qty receiving. ### **5. Option to Exclude PDF Attachment in the Order related emails** The emails can now be sent without the PDF template. * The option to **“Exclude PDF Attachment”** has been added in the **Default document Template**, and the Customer module. * The option is applicable for the following emails: 1. Release Order Confirmation. 2. Order confirmation in B2B for Customer 3. Order Confirmation in B2B For Sales Rep 4. Deposit Link Email 5. Invoice Payment 6. Ship Confirmation Email 7. Estimate approval. 8. Due Invoice 9. Overdue Invoice 10. Bill Payment #### **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Default Document Template module. **Added “Exclude PDF Attachment” in the pdf template dropdown.** * When this is selected for any action then a pdf attachment will not be sent for that particular email for that action. * A similar option of **“Exclude PDF Attachment”** is added in the pdf template dropdown in the Customer Module. * Preference will be given to the customer-level selection. **If nothing is selected on the customer level then it will work according to the default document template module setting.** ### **6. Create a Shipping Expense Bill directly from the Invoice** * Added functionality to **create a separate Shipping Expense Bill from the Invoice**. For this purpose, the ***“Generate Shipping Bill”*** option is **added in the Invoice Centre and the Invoice module.** #### **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Invoice Centre. * Select the Invoices for which the Shipping Bill is to be created. * In the options hit on the “**Generate Shipping Bill**” option.
* A popup will appear.
* There will be three options available: 1. **Individual Bill:** When this option is selected then for each invoice 1 Bill be generated, e.g.; if 3 Invoices are selected, 3 Bills will be generated (1 for each line). **The Vendor selected in the Carrier will be used.** 2. **1 Bill Per Carrier (Vendor): For** e.g.:- 3 Invoices are selected, and two Invoices have the same Carrier (1 Vendor), and one Invoice has a different Carrier with a different Vendor, then 2 Bills will be generated (1 Bill for each Vendor). 3. **Single Bill: The user can select a common** Vendor for the Invoices selected, and a single Bill will be generated.
* In the **Invoice module**, when the “**Generate Shipping Bill**” option is clicked, the Bill will be generated with the **default option (Individual Bill).** **Please Note:** 1. For creating a shipping expense bill, the Invoice(s) must have a third-party Shipping Carrier with the Vendor assigned to it and must have an Accrual Account. 2. The Shipping Cost should be greater than 0. 3. The feature will only work if the “***Enable accrual transaction for third party carrier shipping***” App Config is on. 4. On voiding an Invoice, if there is any shipping bill linked with the invoice then the user has to delete the shipping bill first. Related columns are added in the Bill Centre, and the Invoice Centre. * Added **Shipping Invoice numbers** column (clickable) in the **Bill Centre.**
* Added **Shipping Bill number**(clickable) column in the **Invoice Centre.**
# November 2022 Release ## **Wave Centre: Added ‘Sales Rep’ and ‘Sales Rep Group’ columns** Two new columns, “Sales Rep” and “Sales Rep Group” have been added in the Detail level of Wave Centre.
These columns display the Sales Rep and the corresponding Sales Rep User Group for the Sales Order for which the Wave has been created.
## **Estimate module: Ability to change the number of days for ‘Valid Until Date’ and ‘Follow up Date’** When creating an Estimate, by default, the Follow Up Date is 7 days from the date of Estimate, and the Valid Until Date is 60 days from the date of the Estimate. We have added an App Config, **Date offsets for Sales Order, Estimate and Invoice Date** that allows you to set the Estimate dates as required.
If this setting is enabled, you can set an offset specified in days for different date types, based on which Estimate dates will be automatically calculated.
Let’s understand this will an example: Let’s assume that offset for Follow up Date is set to ’10’ and Estimate vaild Date is set to ’30’.
When you create an Estimate, the Follow Up Date will be set to 10 days from the date of the Estimate, and the Valid Until Date will be set to 30 days from the date of the Estimate.
Additionally, with the help of this Config, you can also set the offset for ‘Date to be Shipped’, ‘Promise Date’, and ‘Date to be Cancelled’ for the Sales Order and Invoices.
## **Item Inventory Snapshot: Added two columns, Ref Number and Third Party Reference Number** Two new columns, “Ref#” and “Third Party Ref#” have been added in the Item Inventory Snapshot module. These columns are populated in the ‘On SO Details’ when you click on the quantity under “On SO”. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Item Inventory Snapshot module. * Click on the quantity under “On SO”.
* It will open the On SO Details page. * “Ref#” and “Third Ref#” columns have been added here.
## **Upload SO Shipment: Added a new “Invoice Date” column** A new column “Invoice Date” has been added in the Upload SO Shipment template.
**How does it work?** * If the column is left blank: If the Invoice Date column is empty, then the current date (i.e. the day of the upload) is picked up as the Date of the Invoice.
* If a Date is added to the column: If a date is added to the Invoice Date column, then uploaded date is picked up as the Date of the Invoice.
* If multiple Invoice Dates are added In case, multiple dates are added, the first date added will be picked as the Date of the Invoice.
## **Added All Ref# Search Field in Item Inventory Snapshot and Short Inventory Planner modules** A new Search Field, “All Ref#” has been added in Item Inventory Snapshot and Short Inventory Planner modules.
The functionality of this field is slightly different in both modules. **How does it work?** * **Item Inventory Snapshot** In the Item Inventory Snapshot module, you can use Item#, Alt Item#1, Alt Item#2, Alt item#, UPC, and Item Barcode to perform a search using this field. * **Short Inventory Planner** In the Item Inventory Snapshot module, you can use Item# and Item Barcode to perform a search using this field. **Please Note:** The OR operator can be used with the mixed parameter to search in this field. This means that you can search for Item# or Item UPC and it will display the results matching both criteria.
## **Added the ability to mark Net Available inventory as Not Available in ‘Inventory by Location’ and ‘Batch Inventory Movement’ modules** We have added the ability to move Net Available Inventory from Available to Not Available in ‘Inventory by Location’ and ‘Batch Inventory Movement’ modules. A toggle has been added for this in both the modules.
If you turn this toggle On, then the Net Available quantity will be set as Not Available for the selected rows. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the ‘Inventory by Location’ or ‘Batch Inventory Movement’ module. * Select the Items whose inventory you want to move. * Now, go to the ‘Options’ tab and click on ‘Batch Change Not Available Qty’.
* A ‘Change Not Available Qty’ window will populate. * Turn on the toggle, ‘Mark Net Available Qty as Not Available.
* The inventory will move from Net Available to Not Available, the ‘New Not Available Qty’ field will be disabled and the Net Available quantity will be set to 0. * Inventory Changed Successfully message will be shown at the bottom of the page.
## **Data Export Centre: Added ‘Brand Name’ in the Invoice Detail report** We have added a new field, ‘Brand Name’ in the Invoice Detail export report. This field will display the Item Brand. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Data Export Centre and Search by ‘Invoice Detail’.
* Choose the desired Export Option.
* The field ‘Brand Name’ has been added in the Invoice Detail Export.
## **Added Expiry Date in the Credit Card information** We have added the Expiry Date in the Credit Card information of the customers. With this, when adding a new card, you can see the Expiry Date.
If you have a saved card, then the Expiry Date will be displayed in the Credit Card information.
## **Sales Receipt: Added the ability to use Textbox for Item Search for Scanning Items.** In the Sales Receipt module, we have replaced the Drop-down option with a Textbox for the Item Search.
A new App Config, “Use Textbox for Item Search in Sales Receipt” has been added for this under the General tab.
**How does it work?** * If this App Config is disabled, you can search for the Item using the Item drop-down as usual. * If this setting is turned on, then the system will use the plain textbox to search for items instead of dropdown using the “Add Item” popup. You have to type the search keyword (Item#) and press Enter. Once the Item details are fetched, click on Add Item.
**Please Note:** If the Item Number is incorrect or no Item is added in the Textbox, it will show an error as shown below.
## **ASN Reference Number column has been added in the Item Centre and Item Inventory Snapshot module** A new column, “ASN Reference Number” has been added in the In Receiving Details module in both the Item Centre and Item Inventory Snapshot module. **How does it work?** **Item Centre module** * Go to the Item Centre and double-click on any Item. * Navigate to the Inventory tab in the Item Detail page. * Click on the quantity under ‘In Receiving’ column. * ASN Ref Number has been added in the ‘In Receiving Details’ page.
**Item Inventory Snapshot module** * Navigate to the Item Inventory Snapshot module. * Click on the quantity under ‘In Receiving’ column. * ASN Ref Number has been added in the ‘In Receiving Details’ page.
## **Manufacturing Order: ‘Is Manufacturable’ and ‘Ref#’ columns made clickable** Two columns, ‘Is Manufacturable’ and ‘Ref#’ are made clickable in the Manufacture Order module. **Ref# column** * The Reference Number column contains the Sub MO number (if any) related to the Manufacture Order. * On clicking, this will open the Sub MO.
**Is Manufacturable? column** * The Funnel icon in the Is Manufacturable? column is made clickable. * On clicking, this will open the BOM of the respective raw material.
## **Sales Order: Added Inventory Info pop-up** We have added an Inventory Info pop-up in the Sales Order Detail section. This will populate the Qty Details page that shows the Inventory by Location and Store.
This info was previously only accessible by clicking on the Available quantity in the Item Inventory Snapshot module. **How does it work?** * Open a Sales Order. In the SO Details section, right-click on any Item line. * Inventory Info has been added in the list of options.
* Clicking on this will open the Qty Details page.
* This pop-up is also added in the Availability Icon in the SO Detail Item line.
* This pop-up is also added in the Availability Icon when we add Item through ‘Add Item’ in So Details.
## **Item Centre: Added Custom Fields in the Advance Search** We have added Custom Fields in the Advance Search option, so now you can search the Items using the Custom Field values.
The Custom Fields have also been added as columns in the Item Centre.
## **Added “Sales Rep Email” column in Customer Centre and Customer Statement module** We have added the “Sales Rep Email” column in the Customer Centre and Customer Statement module.
## **Commission Rule: Added Base Part in the Rule Condition and offset** We have added the ability to set the condition and offset of the Commission Rule based on the Base Part.
## **B2B: Added ‘Producible Levels’ in the Inventory Type of Presentation** We have added all the Producible type levels in the ‘Inventory Type’ drown-down of the Presentation.
* Inventory will be shown in the Presentations based on the option selected in the Inventory Type dropdown.
Please note that these options will only be shown if Manufacturing App Module access is On and ‘Show BOM inventory levels in inventory snapshot’ App Config is On.
## **Bill Of Material Centre: Added a toggle button to hide Inactive BOMs** A new Toggle button, “Show Active Only” is added the Bill Of Material Centre. If this toggle is ON, only active BOMs will be displayed in the Centre.
## **Manufacture Order: A New column, “Description” added in the Picking step** A new column “Description” has been added in the MO Lines section of the Manufacture Order. This column is added in the ‘In Picking’ step of the Manufacture Order.
The Item Description will be fetched in this column.
## **Email Template Configuration: Added Payment Link Placeholder in the Due Invoice & Overdue Invoice Email Template** We have added a ‘Payment Link’ Placeholder in the Due Invoice & Overdue Invoice Email Templates. Now you can send the payment link to the Customers directly in the reminder emails. **How does it work?** * Go to Email Template Configuration module. * Select ‘Due Invoice’ or ‘Overdue Invoice’. * ‘Payment Link’ placeholder has been added in the Select Placeholder drop-down.
## **Data Export Centre: Added OrderThirdPartyRefNo and ThirdPartyRefName in SO Detail Export** We have added two new columns, OrderThirdPartyRefNo and ThirdPartyRefName in the SO Detail export file. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Data Export Centre. * Search by ‘Sales Order Detail’.
* Export the data by choosing the desired option from the ‘Options’ tab.
* OrderThirdPartyRefNo and ThirdPartyRefName have been added in the exported file.
* The Third Party Reference Number will be populated in the OrderThirdPartyRefNo column and Reference Number will be populated in the ThirdPartyRefName column.
## **Customer Info: Added Alert for ‘On Hold’ Customers** When we put a customer ‘On Hold’, the On-Hold status and On-Hold Message is seen in the Customer Centre.
Now, we have added the On-Hold Message Customer Info. In the Customer Info, this message is displayed as an alert just below the Customer Name in the following format: “This customer is currently put ON HOLD due to following reason – \*On-Hold Message\*”
## **Short Inventory Planner: Added the ability to show the “To Order” quantity in whole number** We have added the ability to round the decimals and show “To Order” in whole number in the Short Inventory Planner module.
A new App Config, ‘Show whole number “To Order” quantities in Short Inventory Planner’ has been added for this.
* If this setting is On, the decimals won’t be rounded off and the “To order” quantities will be shown as whole numbers.
* If this setting is Off, “To order” quantities will be shown in decimals (wherever applicable).
With this added ability, you don’t have to manually override the quantity to whole numbers before placing an order. ## **Inventory Change Log: Added a new column ‘Memo’** A new column ‘Memo’ is added in the Inventory Change Log module.
The Memo value of the following transaction types will be populated in this field: * Manufacturing Order * Bill * Vendor Credit * Credit Memo * Invoice * Sales Receipt * ASN * Inventory Adjustment * Inventory Movement * Refund Receipt * Invoice Credit Memo ## **VAS Item enhancement: Added the ability to automatically apply the VAS Item** We have added the ability to auto-apply VAS items based on the Ship to County, State/Province, Customer Group, Customer Tags, Item Number, and Item Tags. This ability is added to the following modules: * Estimate * Sales Order * Invoice * Invoice Credit Memo * RMA (Only Read Only) * Upload Sales Order **How does it work?** * Navigate to the VAS Item Centre and define a VAS Item. Here, two new tags, “Item Tags” and “Customer Tags”, have been added.
* Go to any module in the Sales Flow and Add an Item. * As you select the Item, the VAS will be applied automatically.
**How is VAS Item applied?** The VAS Item is applied based on the priority given to the custom VAS Rules defined in the system. These priorities are set according to how many fields are filled while defining the VAS Item Rules.
* First priority is given to the VAS Item in which all the fields (Country, State/Province, Item Number, Item Tags, and Customer Tags) are defined. * Second priority is given to the VAS Item in which Country, State/Province, Item Number, and Item Tags are defined. * Third priority is given to the VAS Item in which Country, State/Province, and Item Tags are defined. * The fourth priority is given to the VAS Item defined by Country and State/Province. * Fifth priority is given to the VAS Item in which the Country is defined. * Sixth and the least priority is given to any other case apart from the ones defined above. As an example, suppose you have defined 2 VAS Item Rules as below:
Here, 2 Rules are created for the same Item. In the first rule all the fields are defined, while in the second rule, Item Tags and Customer Tags are not defined. So, when you add this Item, the priority will be given to the first rule and the VAS amount applied will be $2.11.
Auto Apply VAS Item in Sales Order Uploads * An additional step, Step 8 has been added to the Upload Sales Order module. An “Auto apply VAS Item rule” has been added under this step.
* If this box is checked when uploading Sales Orders, then the VAS Item will be automatically applied to the Order lines based on the custom VAS Rules defined in the system. If this option is selected, then the system will ignore the VAS Item provided in the upload file. * Please note that in the Sales Order template, you can only add VAS Item already defined in the system. If you input an undefined VAS Item, the system will throw an error and the Orders won’t be uploaded.
**Note:** 1. You can see the VAS Item amount in a separate summary. A new App Config, “**Show VAS Item Total Amount In Separate Summary Line**” has been added for this.\ \ If this Config is enabled, then the VAS Item amount will also be shown separately.
2. The VAS Item auto-apply feature only works when Items are added through “Add Item” option. This feature is not applied when Item are added through “Quick Add Items” and “Last Ordered Items” options.

# July 2022 Release ### **1. ASN Centre: Ability to add Custom Field to ASN** * The Users can now define and add Custom Fields to the ASNs. For this added a **new transaction type ‘ASN’** in the Custom Field Definition module. **How does it work?** * Define Custom Field Definition for ASN in the Custom Field Definition module. * Navigate to the ASN Centre. * Right-click on ASN then Add Custom Field. * It will show a pop-up with the custom fields defined for ASN. * Here the Custom Fields can be added. * Save the ASN. This will save the custom fields for that ASN. * Open sub form of ASN. Here, added a tab of custom fields. * The users can add or edit custom fields from the ASN subform by clicking on the pencil icon. * Added custom fields in ASN Centre (Header Level). ### **2. Sales Order Centre: New columns added** **1st Addition: In the Sales Order Center under SO Detail, the following new columns have been added.** * Ship Service * Carrier * These columns are also added to the Advanced search option. **2nd Addition: In the SO Centre in the Header section, added the following columns in the Allocation % option.** * Tags * Carrier * Ship Service * The above-mentioned columns are also added to the advance search option. **3rd Addition: In Allocation % Preview option, now provided the Quick Ship functionality for the SOs in Release Status.** ### **3. New Feature: Apply Pricing Rules to the Purchase Order module** * ***Now with this enhancement, users can create and define the Pricing Rules for the Purchase module in the Pricing Rule module.*** * A pricing rule can control how prices are retrieved and saved in various modules. Pricing Rules can be set for the various Purchase Order modules such as creating PO, IR, and Bill. **What’s new?** * Added a Config setting ‘***Advance pricing rule for purchase order***‘ under the purchase order tab of the App Config module. If this setting is on, the ***item pricing rule (if available) will be used instead of item vendor mapping or Purchase Price Calculation Logic.*** * The Pricing Rule module is upgraded with the ability to select the required module for which the Rule is to be set. * Added “**Rule For**” dropdown in the Pricing Rule module. * The user can select the type of order: **Sales or Purchase.** * Select the Rule for Purchase for setting the Pricing Rule for the Purchase module. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Pricing Rule module. * Select the option value as “***Purchase***“. * *When the Purchase option is selected then the Tag Type, and Address Type dropdowns will be disabled.* * *By Default, Rule Type will be selected as Pricing Level, as the Restriction type is only applicable in the case of Sales.* * Select the Recipient Type and Item Type. **Pricing Rule Criteria:** * **Price Currency:** Select the Price Currency from the dropdown. * **Price Adj Type**: Select the pricing equation to apply for this rule. * **Operator**: Select the equation’s operation to apply this rule. * **Value**: Select the value to use in the pricing equation. * **Cost Type**: Select the cost type to use in the pricing equation. * **Date Range**: Enable this feature and select a date range if you want this pricing rule to be seasonal and should only apply for certain days of the year. * **Qty Range**: Enable this feature and enter a quantity range if you want this pricing rule to only apply to select quantities. **Price Adj Types in case of Price Level Rule Type:** 1. **Markup.** New Price has to be equal to \[Cost Type + \[Value % \* Cost Type]] 2. **Markdown**. \[Cost Type – \[Value % \* Cost Type]] has to be equal to New Price 3. **Margin.** \[New Price – Cost Type] has to be equal to \[Value % \* Input Price] 4. **Percentage.** New Price has to be equal to \[Value % \* Cost Type] 5. **Amount.** New Price has to be equal to \[Value + Cost Type] 6. **Fixed.** New Price has to be equal to the Value **It is recommended when setting up Pricing Rules or Levels to do it on a single item first and test it on a Purchase module to ensure it behaves as expected. If it is set up correctly, then it can be applied to the desired item(s).** **How to apply Pricing Rules in the PO module?** * Go to the Purchase Order module, and add the Vendor and the Items. * While adding the Item, the Price of the Item will be reflected according to the defined Pricing Rules. If there are multiple Pricing Rules set in the system, the prices will be applied to the items in the following Priority: * Priority 1: The Rule that is applicable to Both Vendor and Item. * Priority 2: The Rule that is applicable to Vendor only. * Priority 3: The Rule that is applicable to Items only. * The Pricing Rule to be applied can also be selected from the Item detail level with a right-click. * The Options dropdown of the Pricing Rule Detail gives the feature to Remember the Pricing and Recalculate the pricing Rule which will apply the default Pricing Rule amount to the Items. \*\*If this setting is on and the ***item pricing rule (Purchase) is not available then Item vendor mapping will be used else Purchase Price Calculation Logic.*** **Read More:** * [**What is a Pricing Rule? How can I use it to restrict prices on an item or give specific customers an automatic discount?**](https://help.xorosoft.io/index.php/knowledge-base/what-is-a-pricing-rule/) * [**How do Pricing Restrictions & Levels work?**](https://help.xorosoft.io/index.php/knowledge-base/how-do-pricing-restrictions-and-levels-work/) * [**Ability to show Pricing Rules as Discount**](https://help.xorosoft.io/?post_type=ht_kb\&p=10989\&preview=true) ### **4. Credit Memo Centre: Added column “Ship to Name”** * A new column “***Ship To Name***” is added to the Credit Memo Centre Header level. * This column shows up the Ship to Address Name of the Customer that is selected in the Credit Memo. **How does it work?** * Create a Credit Memo. * Select the ship to address and save the Credit Memo. * Added Ship-To Name in the Credit Memo Centre (Header Level). * It will show the Ship-to-Address name as saved in the Credit Memo. * The Column is also added to the Advanced Search options. ### **5. Custom Field Definition Enhancement: Added Multi-Select List option** * Added support of **multi-select list** and Custom Source in the Custom Field Definition module. * A new Data Type “***Multi-Select List***” added to the Custom Fields. This will allow users to select multiple options from the custom fields list type. * Also, added a Toggle button “***Custom Source***“ ***in case of List and Multi-Select List data types for writing custom Scripts.*** * When the Custom Source option is selected, the user can add the Key, and the Value pair in the modal having the text area. * Custom script format, example; \[{“1″:”One”},{“2″:”Two”},{“3″:”Three”},{“4″:”Four”}] ### **6. User module: Select Commission Rules for Sales Rep/Sales Management** * Added a multi-select dropdown in the user module “Commission Rules”. This dropdown is only shown if the user role is Sales Rep or Sales Manager. * It will be easier and faster to run the commission reports with this enhancement. How does it work? * Navigate to the User Centre, and open a User with the role of either Sales Rep or Sales Management. * Added Commission Rules dropdown. * It will only be shown if the role type is Sales Rep or Sales Management. * Select a Rule from the dropdown. * Now open the “Run Commission” module. * When running a commission report, if the commission rule criteria is set to “Auto”, then only the selected commission rules will be applied to the reps. * If nothing is defined then all the commission rules will run. ### **7. Item Module: Tax State Mapping Profile** * This enhancement will allow the User to define the item’s forced sales tax by state/province in the Item module. * Created a New module ‘***Tax State Mapping Profile’ and*** its Centre ‘***Tax State Mapping Profile Centre***‘. * To enable this module, turn ON the App Config setting under the sales tab ‘***Enable Item sales tax by state mapping***‘ in the App Config module. **How does it work?** * Define Tax State Mapping in the ***Tax State Mapping Profile*** module. * Create a new item, or edit an existing Item. * Go to the tax settings tab. * Turn On Collect Taxes On Sales, and turn on Force Sales Tax Code. * There is a dropdown of Tax Sate Mapping. It has two values: **1. Manual(existing):** It will show the Tax, State, and country dropdowns. Users can manually create tax State mapping. **2. Tax Profile(new):** It will show a dropdown that has the Tax State Mapping Profile saved in the system. On selection, it will populate the values of that selected tax state mapping in the table below. Users cannot delete data from that mapping if ‘Tax Profile’ is selected. * Now, go to the Sales Order module. * Add Item, if the address of that Sales Order state matches with the Tax State Mapping Profile defined on that item then it will apply the tax defined for that state. The enhancement has been implemented in the following modules: 1. Estimate, 2. Invoice, 3. Sales Receipt, 4. Sales Order, 5. Upload Sales Order. * **Item Centre:** The **‘Tax State Mapping Profile’** option added for batch updating Items in the Item Centre. * **Upload:** Added **‘TaxStateMappingProfile’** column in the Product/Item upload templates for bulk updating items with Profile. #### ### **8. Added the Reference number to the Wave Center Module for the MO Wave** Added SO Ref Number in the Ref# field for the MO Wave in the Wave Centre. \ How does it work? * Create a Sales Order for a manufacturable item having a BOM. * Save and release the SO. * Click on options, and Create Manufacture Order. * Pop will appear to confirm MO, click on OK to confirm, and the linked MO will be created. * When MO is produced or a wave is created, go to the Wave Centre. * ***The linked SO number will be shown under the Ref No column with quantity in type Manufacturing (same as the Linked SO# column in the MO Centre).*** * The Ref# consists of the SO# followed by qty in brackets. # June 2022 Release ### **1. Outgoing Payment module: Vendor’s default Expense Account is auto-populated** When the Payee is a Vendor in the Outgoing Payment module, then the Expense Account will be filled with the Vendor’s Default Expense Account. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Outgoing Payment module. * Select a Vendor from the Payee dropdown. * The Expense Account will automatically pick up the Vendors Default Expense Account added in the Vendor info. ### **2. Sales order Module: Added Tracking Number and Third-Party Account Number in the Sale Order subview form** Tracking Number and Third-Party Account Number can now be seen in the SO Subview form. **How does it work?** * Create a Sales Order. * Add Third-Party Account number. * Create Wave, Pick Wave, Ship, and Add a Tracking Number. * From the Sales Order Center, double click on the created Sales Order. * In the subview under the Shipping tab, both the Third-party Account numbers and Tracking Numbers are added. ### **3. Added the “On PO” column to the “Short Inventory” and the “Re-Order Point Inventory” Email Notification** In the Short Inventory Planner module if the Qty of an Item reaches below the Re-Order point qty and if the related config settings are ON, then it will send an email notification. Read more about this feature in the following Help Article: * [How can I get notified if the quantity of an item falls below the Re-Order point/Short Qty?](https://help.xorosoft.io/index.php/knowledge-base/how-can-i-get-notified-if-the-quantity-of-an-item-falls-below-the-re-order-point-short-qty/) * A new column “On PO” has been added to the list in the Email. * On PO are the units of Items that are on released Purchased Orders. ### **4. Added Project Class dropdown in the Bank Reconcile Rule module** * In the Reconcile Rule module, a Project Class dropdown has been added. * The project class will be saved in the added lines. * The Project Class can also be viewed in the Subform opened by the double click in the Bank Reconcile Rule Centre. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2022/05/img_6272a2108f04e.png) For example, if the bank rec rule is defined to create JE then all the lines of JE will have this project class, once this rule is applied using the Bank Rec Rule. The same is true for the other modules. ### **5. Added a new column “Order Type Name” in the Wave Center** Added new column “Order Type Name” in the Wave Center.
* This column will pick the data added in the “***Order Type***” field in the SO under the “Other” tab. ### **6. B2B Customer Portal: Added columns in the Order Info, and Invoice pages** In the B2B Customer Portal, the user can directly access the Order PDF from the Invoices Page. Similarly, the Invoice PDF can be opened from the Order Info Page. * Added new column “SO#” in the Invoices. * Added new column “Invoice#” on the Order Info page. * Both SO# and Invoice# columns are clickable. **Order Info Page: Opens Invoice PDF.** **Invoice Page: Opens SO PDF.** ### **7. ASN Centre: Added quick search options** In the ASN Centre, the following Quick search filter options are added: * ASN Number * PO Number * Packing Slip Number * Ref Number * Invoice Number. * Invoice Ref number ### **8. Ship Confirmation Email Template: Added a new placeholder** * Added Order Ref Number placeholder in the Ship Confirmation Email Template. ***This is the Ref Number of the linked Sales Order.*** ### **9. Chart of Account: Added ability to check the Balance “As of Date” for the selected Account** * In the Chart of Accounts module, the balance of the Account can be viewed according to the selected date. * The “Balance” option is replaced with the “Balance As of” Date in the Account Summary section. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Chart of Account module. * Select an Account. * In the Account Summary section, the Balance of the account can be viewed as per the selected Date Balance As of (date). * Click on the date and here the “As of Date” can be selected by which the balance of the Account can be viewed till the selected date. * When the date is selected, the balance will be refreshed accordingly. ### **10. Ability to update the Item Number in all the existing transactions** * While updating the Item Number of Items that are used in transactions, the system will show a confirmation message saying that the “***Item already exists in transactions***“.
If confirmed, this will update the Item number in all the transactions such as: * Estimate Center * SO Center * Wave Center * Invoice * PO Center * ASN Center * IR * Bill * TSO & TPO * ICM | CM * Vendor Credit * Manufacturing Order * Sales Receipt * Refund Receipt * RMA Center * Item Center * Inventory snapshot, changelog, by location * Reports ### **11. Added lock icon for the locked Waves in the SO history tab** * If the Wave of an SO is in the locked status, a lock icon will be shown in front of the Wave Number in the SO history tab. ### **12. Quick Receive: Ability to change the quantity while Quick Receiving a PO** * Now the users can change the units to be received when a POs is received via the “Quick Receive” option. * The Quick Receive Qty column is made editable in the Quick Receive Orders pop-up. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Purchase Order module, create a new PO, or edit an existing PO in the Released status. * Go to the Options menu, and select the option to quick receive.
* In the Quick Receive Orders screen, the ***Quick Receive Qty column is made editable.***
* If an ASN already exists for a PO line, then the following tooltip message will appear on the quick receive screen.
* If no ASN is created for other lines, the user can “Quick Receive” them. ### **13. Project Class priority levels defined for B2B Order** * Sales Order detail level will display the Project Class for the Items in the following Priority: **Item > Presentation > Customer** **Case 1**: If both the Item and the Presentation have Project/Class defined for them, then the SO detail level will pick up the Project/Class of their respective Items. **Case 2**: If the Item doesn’t have any Project/ Class, but the Presentation has got its own project/class then the Sales Order, detail level will show the project/class of the Presentation. **Case 3**: If the Item and Presentation both don’t have a project class but the Customer has its own Project/Class then in the Sales Order, the detail level of the project/class will have the Project/Class of the Customer. ### **14. Added ability to sort Variant sequences in the Item details** With this enhancement, the Items can be sorted based on their variant’s values. * This update is available while adding Items in different modules. * Also, added ‘Variant Sequence (Low to High)’ in the sort options in the Sales Order module. This will sort the Items added through the advanced variant finder. * This feature is app config based: Turn on the config “***Display item variants in sorted order***” under the general tab in the App Config module. * If this setting is turned on, all the item dropdowns will display the items in the sorted order of variant options like size, color, etc. * The enhancement is implemented in the following modules: Sales Order, Purchase Order, Inventory by Location, and Create Inventory Adjustment.
* The sorting Sequence will be: First by **Base Part Number** then by **Opt 1 Value** then by **Opt 2 Value.**
***Please Note:*** * ***It will only be shown if Product Variants are On.*** * ***This can make the item search slightly slower in dropdowns*** ### **15. Added Item Vendor Mapping option in the Item Identifiers for Upload modules** The Item identifier code column ***specifies how the Item number field value of the file will be used to match the Item in the system.*** * The Item Vendor Mappings created in the system can also be used as Item Identifiers while uploading data. * The Item Identifier Code-8 will represent Item Vendor Mapping during Uploads. Use the **Item Vendor Mapping module** to create Item Vendor Mappings. The Vendor Part Number added in the mapping will be used as an identifier for the Item.\ [What is an Item Vendor Mapping?](https://help.xorosoft.io/index.php/knowledge-base/what-is-an-item-vendor-mapping/) Added Item Vendor Mapping option in the Item Identifiers for Upload modules This has been implemented in the following upload modules: * Upload Purchase Order * Upload ASN Create * Upload ASN Receipt * Upload Dropship Receipt ### **16. Data Export Centre: Added Columns in the Wave Detail export file** In the Wave Detail export file, the following new columns are added: * Product Options (1,2,3) * Base Part Number, * Product Title, and * Product Handle.
# April 2022 Release ### **1. Sales Order Module: Linked MO, PO, and Credits can be viewed from the Options dropdown** * Added “Show Manufacture Order(s)”, “Show Credit(s)”, and “Show Purchase Order(s)” in the Options dropdown of the Sales Order. This option is available under the Reporting dropdown. * When clicked it will take to the respective Centre and show the linked MOs, Credits, or Purchase Orders. * These options are also available in the SO Centre. * Added New column Linked Sales Order in Purchase Order Centre. * This will show the linked Sales Order with the Purchase Order. ### **2. Item module: Added new account Income Return Account** * Added the “***Income Return Account***” field in the Item module. * This field is added in the Account tab of the Item module. * The “***Income Return Account***” is also added to the Product Matrix Generator module.
* Also added in the Item upload file and API(Create/Update). ***Note: Income return account must be of primary type – Income*** ### **3. Manufacturing Order enhancement: Ability to create BOM revisions without a Date Range** * The users can create BOM revisions with an empty date range. * For this purpose, added an App Config setting “***Create BOM revisions with empty date range***” under the manufacturing tab in the App Config module. * **If this setting is enabled then the user will be able to create revisions with an empty date range** * **The user can also create revisions with the same date range.** **Consider the following examples for different scenarios:** * If the user-created 5 revisions for BOM without any date range then the last created revision will be used automatically.0 * If the user-created 5 revisions have the same date range then the last created revision will be used. * If the user-created 5 revisions and 2 have the same date range then out of 2 the last created revision will be used. * If the user-created 5 revisions and 2 have a date range and the date range is not between the current date then out of empty revisions date last created revision will be used. ### **4. Issue Fixed: Prefix “#” is accepted for Item Number in Uploads** There was an issue while uploading Items in the system, that if the user adds “#” in front of the Item number it won’t upload that line. This issue has been fixed The same issue has been fixed in the following uploads: * Upload Items/Products * Upload Inventory * Upload Location ### **5. Added new column “ASN Number” in the Purchase Order Centre** * Added new column ASN Numbers in the Purchase Order Centre (Detail Level) * Create a Purchase Order, Release the Order, and create ASN. This ASN Number will be shown in the Purchase Order Centre Detail Under the “ASN Numbers” column. ### **6. Commission Report: Added Qty column in the Commission Report subform** In the Commission Report Centre, a new column is added to display the qty of the Items. **How does it work?** * Go to the Run Commission module. * Make a Commission Report. * Open that Commission Report by double-clicking on the Commission Report in the Commission Report Centre. * **Open the subform. Here added the Qty column in the Commission Report, that shows the qty of the Item.** ### 7. **Email Template: Added Placeholders** Added below-mentioned placeholders in **der Release Confirmation Email**, **Ship Confirmation Email**, **Overdue Invoice Email**, **Due Invoice Email** * Ship To Address * Sip To Address2 * Ship To Zip Code * Ship To City * Ship To State * Ship To Country * Ship To Name * Customer Main Phone Number * Customer Email * Sales Order Type * Third-Party Source * Third-Party Account Added the following Placeholders in the **Dropship Purchase Order** (Create/Update) Email template. * Ship To Name * Ship To PhoneNumber * Ship To Address * Memo * Vendor Part Number * Total Qty Order ### **8. Added Exempt Tax support in the Customer Upload File and API** Introduced Customer-specific SalesTax Exempt options for the following: * BC PST: **British Columbia** **Provincial Sales Tax (PST)** * SK PST: Saskatchewan **Provincial Sales Tax (PST);** Provincial Sales Tax (PST) is a retail sales tax that applies when taxable goods or services are purchased, acquired, or brought into different Provinces of Canada. * MB RST: **Manitoba Retail Sales Tax;** The Retail Sales Tax (RST) is a tax applied to the retail sale or rental of most goods and certain services in Manitoba. * QB QST: The Québec Sales Tax; Provincial level sales tax is typically referred to as PST or as QST in the case in Quebec. #### **How does it work?** * Create Customer from the Customer Upload module or through API. * Under the Sales Tax tab of the Customer module, the following tax exemptions will be updated through API & Upload. 1. Is Customer BC PST Exempt? 2. Is Customer SK PST Exempt? 3. Is Customer MB RST Exempt? 4. Is Customer QB QST Exempt? * These columns are also added to the Customer Upload File. * This will be only applicable if the following conditions are met: 1. The Home currency of the Customer is CAD, 2. The “Calculate Taxes based on Address” App Config is on, 3. The “Auto Create New Customers” App Config is on. # February 2022 Release ### 1**. Invoice Payment module: Added Comment option & Quick link for the IP details** * Added new functionality where on paying an Invoice from the Invoice Payment module, a pop-up appears on the screen showing **Clickable Payment Number.** On clicking Payment Number an Invoice Payment sub-view will be opened showing the payment details. * Here, the User can add **Comments and Attachments by clicking on the Comment button** next to the options button. ### **2. IR/Bill: Quick link added to get the reconciliation details** * A quick link has been provided in the reconciled IR & Bills, where the User can view the reconciliation details such as reconcile method name, etc. in case the reconciliation amount is not added to the Vendor Bill. **How does it work?** * Navigate to IR/Bill Centre. * Open the IR/Bill that is to be reconciled, or is reconciled. * After reconciling the IR/Bill, an informatory line is seen at the top of the page. * If the reconciled amount is not added to the Vendor Bill by unchecking the “Add to Vendor Bill” option, the informatory line will show a “Click Here” option. * Hit on “Click Here”.
* This will open a pop-up. * The pop-up shows all the information regarding the reconciliation. * The reconciliation method used Unit Cost/Qty/Amount can be checked from this pop-up. ### **3. Invoice: Option to Generate Payment Link** * **Added an option to Generate Payment Link under the options dropdown in the Invoice module.**
* This will not send the link to the customer automatically. * The User can manually email the link. * **The payment link can be copied from the copy link provided.**
* **Batch Payment Links can be generated from the Invoice Centre.**
* **The generated Payment links can be retrieved from the Invoice Centre.**
### **4. Email Templates: Added new Placeholders (a)** * Added new placeholders in the Email Templates. The following two placeholders have been added: * First Name * Last Name The above two placeholders are added for the following entities: * Estimate * Sales Order * Invoice * Sales Receipt * Credit Memo
**How does it work?** * Navigate to the Email Template module.
* Select these placeholders (First Name & Last Name) and use them in an email template. * To use this email template, go to the Estimate/Sales Order/Invoice/Sales Receipt/Credit Memo. * Click in Options > Add to Email Queue> Preview & Send. * The Email Centre window will appear. * Selected placeholders in the email template will be visible with specific line data you have selected from the Centre.
### **5. Short Inventory Planner: Added new columns** * A new column **“Order Date”** is added in the **Short Inventory Planner module for On SO and On PO** to their respective snapshots. ### **6. Invoice module enhancement: Added History tab** * Added History tab in the Invoice module. The History tab will show the following details: 1. Invoice Credit Memo 2. Credits/Deposits 3. Invoice payments 4. Invoice 5. SO info 6. RMA 7. RMA ASN * This can also be accessed in the Invoice subview from the Invoice Centre. ***Please Note: The Invoice must be saved to check the history.*** ### **7. Sales Order Module: Ability to sort Variant sequences in the Item details** * Added ‘Variant Sequence (Low to High)’ in sort options in the Sales Order module. This will sort the Items added through the advanced variant finder.
* The sorting Sequence will be: First by **Base Part Number** then by **Opt 1 Value** then by **Opt 2 value.**
***Please Note: It will only be shown if Product Variants are On.*** ### **8. BOM Centre: Functionality to Batch Delete Bill Of Materials** * The Bill of Material Centre has been updated with the ability to Batch Delete the BOMs. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the BOM Centre. * Select the BOMs to be deleted. * Under the Options dropdown, the User can Batch Delete.
* If a BOM has been used in one or more Manufacturing Orders, it cannot be deleted.
### **9. Email Templates: Added new Placeholders (b)** Added new placeholders in the Email Templates. The following two placeholders have been added: * Payment Terms * Memo * Payment Link * The above placeholders are added to the Email Template. These placeholders can be added and used in the Invoice Email template.
**How does it work?** * Navigate to the Email Template module. * Select these placeholders (Payment Terms/Memo/Payment Link) and use them in an email template. * To use this email template go to the Invoice Centre. * Click in Options > Add to Email Queue> Preview & Send. * The Email Centre window will appear. * Selected placeholders in the email template will be visible with specific line data you have selected from the Centre. In case of **Payment Link** placeholder: * Case 1: For Invoice status “Open” and “Partially Paid ” this button will appear in the email Centre. * Case 2: For Invoice status “Paid” this button will not appear in the email Centre. Whenever this email is sent to a customer this button will be used to make a payment.
### **10. SO Centre: Added new column** * Added new column “***Main Email***” in the SO Center. This shows the main email of the Customer, filled in the Customer account. ### **11. Advanced Variant Finder: Added Item Inventory detail while adding Items using the advance variant finder.** * Added snapshot to the Advance variant Finder same as in the Item Inventory Snapshot module. This snapshot shows a detailed view of the Inventory according to the Inventory level selected. **How does it work?** * Click on a single quantity to get a detailed view of the quantity. * Accordingly, snapshots will appear. These snapshots are added in the following modules: 1. Estimate, 2. Sales Order, 3. Purchase order, 4. Transfer sales order, 5. Transfer Purchase order #### **12. Email Template: Added Placeholders (c)** In the **Sales Order,** the Email Template added **Carrier Name** Placeholder.
* In the **Purchase Order, the** Email Template added **Carrier Name** & **Expected Ship Date** Placeholder.
These placeholders can be added to the template through the **Email Template Module.** #### **13. Item Centre: Ability to Batch Update Country of Origin** * Added functionality for batch updating the column “Country of Origin” in the Item Centre. * The User can update the Country of Origin for the created Items using the batch update option.
**14. New App Config added: Open Customer Info when clicked on the Customer in the global search** Added app config ‘***Open Customer Info when clicked on the customer in global search***‘ in the general module.
* When this config is true then while searching for any customer in global search and clicking on that customer **it will open the customer info module with the Customer data.** **If this config is OFF then it will open the Customer module with the Customer data.** ### **15. Run Sales Commissions: Ability to include or exclude Credits/Returns from the report** Added ‘Do not include credits/returns’ on the Run Commission page.
* If this is true then while creating the commission report, the Credit Memo will not be included in the commission report. * If this is false then the Credit Memo will be included in the Commission Report. ### **16. Purchase Order Enhancement: The PO Approval Process** The Purchase Order module has been enhanced by the addition of the ability to be able to restrict the PO workflow on several levels through the PO Approval Process. **What’s New?** 1. New modules have been created: “**PO Approval Rule**“, “**PO Approval Rule Centre**“, & “**PO Approval Request Centre”** 2. Added App config ‘***Enable PO Approval Restriction***‘ and ‘***PO Approval Restricted Actions***‘. 3\. **Access level ‘PO Approval Request”**, under Purchase
**How does it work?** * Through the Access manager module, grant access for “***PO Approval Request***” to logged users. * Turn On the setting “***Enable PO Approval Restriction”*** in the app config module, under the PO tab. * Define the ***“Approval Restriction Actions”*** in the Config. * Navigate to the module “***PO Approval Rule”.*** * Create the rule for any *specific Vendor or Vendor group or Any Vendor* and enter the *amount range* and select the *user who can approve* the Purchase Order. * Set the Notification Type: Internal Notification/Email. * The Vendor Groups can be added from the Vendor Group module. * The PO Approval Rule created can be seen in ***PO Approval Rule Centre.*** * Create a Purchase Order **within the amount range of the PO approval rule and with the vendor selected in the PO approval rule.**
* Save the Purchase Order. * A caution message will be displayed at the top of the Order, saying that approval is required. * On the side of the PO#, an Approval Status icon will be displayed. * **If the Notification is selected then the notification will be sent to the users selected in the PO approval rule or if send email is selected then an email will be sent to the users.** * And if both are selected then both will be sent to the users. * The user can either approve the PO from the **PO approval Request Centre or from the email, or from the Order options.** * The authorized User can mark the PO as approved by opening the PO itself. * POs can also be approved/rejected from the PO Approval Request Centre. * If the PO is approved then ‘*Approved*‘ will come with the Order Number. * In the PO Centre, columns are added to view the Approval Status of the Order: “***Is Approval Required***“, “***Is Approved?***“. * Once PO is approved then the actions will not be blocked for that Purchase Order. * The system will give an error if an unauthorized user tries to approve the PO. * PO will be restricted to only those actions which are selected in App Config. * In case, “Enable PO Approval Restriction” is ON and in “PO Approval Restricted Actions”, no restriction is selected, then, in this case, PO will restrict all the available actions in the App config: PO Approval Restricted Actions. **Please Note:** * After changing the vendor in the PO approval rule, just click on update on the PO created from the previous rule. This will cancel the Approval Request and the approval will not be required for the PO. * If a PO is approved the system will send an email to the source user, that the PO has been Approved. * If a PO is rejected then it will send an email to the source user that PO has been rejected. ### **17. Item Enhancement: Formula-based Custom Prices calculation** * Added a new feature to auto calculate Custom Prices of the Items based on a defined formula in the Item module. This will omit the need to manually update the Custom Prices when the Standard Unit Cost is changed for an Item. * An App Config setting has been added for this purpose. Turn On the setting “**Enable item price formula calculations“,** under the General Tab. If this setting is turned on, the system will allow the users to enter interdependent formulas to calculate prices. For example, the Standard Unit Price formula can be defined as a 30% markup to Standard Unit Cost. . These options will be available in the Item module, Item Centre, and the data uploads: Upload Products and Upload Item Prices. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Item module. * There is an option to define the formula under the advanced Pricing Tab. * Click on the “**Formula**” button. * This will show a popup where the Formula can be defined. * Select the Currency for which the formula will be applicable. * The toggle “***Use the same formula for all Currency Prices***” if set true then the same formula will be used for all the Currencies. If this is set to false then multiple formulas can be defined for different currencies. * Set the Markup%, the Pricing Level, and the Decimal Rounding. * The calculation Let’s see an example of how the calculation will work: * **Price level**=Standard Cost, = 100 * **Markup %**= 10, (Use – sign for markdown percentages) * **Price level**=Standard Price, * **Decimal Rounding**= 0.50 The Calculations: **Standard Cost/100 \* (100 + markup%) + Decimal Rounding Based** on the formula Standard Unit price will be calculated from Standard Unit Cost with markup -10% and after calculations, 0.50 Decimal Rounding will be added to the Calculated Standard Unit Price.***100/100\*{100+(10)} + 0.50 =110.50*** * Added a Re-calculate button to calculate the Custom Prices based on the formula.
* In the Item Centre, under the options drop-down, the Custom Prices can be Re-calculated. * Here are the options to “Recalculate for USD (home) Prices” or “Recalculate All Currency Prices”.
### **18. Sales order Module: Create the MO using the revisions from SO** * The process of creating MO/Batch MOs from a Sales Order has been updated. **How does it work?** * Create a Sales Order with manufacturable items. * Go to the Create Manufacture Order option.
* Added **Auto Wave** on the pop-up. * When this auto wave is true then **the MO that is made will be in “In Picking” status.**
* Added **Revision** On the Pop-Up. It is an editable dropdown. * It has two values: **Auto Select** & **Custom.** * By default, Auto Select will be selected. * **When Custom is selected** it will show a table with the item, description, & Revision. * Revision has all the revisions of that items. * The User can select the revision and MO will be created according to that selected revision. * The same is applicable while creating Batch MOs. ### **19. Purchase order: Purchase items only from the mapped Vendor(in Item vendor mapping).** * The enhancement provides the ability to restrict the Purchase of Items from only the Vendors that are mapped using Item Vendor Mapping. * Added a new Toggle button in the Item module “**Restrict To Be Purchased**” under the “**Other Attributes**” tab.
* When this setting is ON for the selected item, it can only be purchased by the “Mapped Vendor”. * The mapping is created through the *Item Vendor mapping module.* * If the setting is ON for a particular Item and an attempt is made to Purchase the Item from an un-mapped Vendor, the following error message will be received.
* The toggle is applicable only if the item is marked “Purchasable”.
### **20. Sales Order: Create duplicate SO’s as a revision** * Added a checkbox ‘***Create as revision***‘ in the “Create Duplicate SO” pop-up. * This will create a duplicate of the current SO with the revision number as a suffix. * If this checkbox is true then **changing store editable will be disabled and the store of SO will be set in that.** * It will create a new child SO with the order number same as a parent SO but the **number-1 will be added as a suffix to that order number.** * If again child SO is created from the same parent SO always the suffix of the new order number will be increased by one. ### **21. Notification: Receive Email notification on getting tagged in Comments** * Implemented a feature when a user is tagged in a comment the email is sent to the tagged user. (Based on App Config). An App Config is added under the General settings in the App Config module. * **Email:** It will send an email notification to the Watchers. * **Internal Notification**: It will send an internal notification to the User * **Email (@ Mention Only)**: It will send mail notification to @ Mention(s) only. The tagged users will get notified along with the Ref#. In case a user is a watcher, as well as is mentioned in the comment, and we have selected the option “Email (Mention Only)” then a single email will be sent. ### **22. Ability to access B2B Presentations based on Customer Groups** * By assigning Customer Groups to Presentations, users can access the B2B Presentations. Users can be made eligible or can be restricted to access B2B presentations based on their Customer Groups. The Customer Group can be defined from the Other Info tab in the Customer module.
* The feature is based on an App Config setting under the B2B tab: “*Show all Presentations in the Customer Portal*“ **How does it work?** * View presentations in the Presentation Centre. **Case1: The** App Config “*Show all Presentations in the Customer Portal*” under the B2B tab **is ON.** * All the Presentations that are Active will be visible in the Presentation history window. In this case : * If the presentation is Active and Is Public and if the user wants to open any presentation in the history view, then it will redirect you to the selected presentation. * If the presentation is Active and is Not Public and if you want to open any presentation in history view then it will redirect you to the error page. * If the presentation is not Active then the presentation will not appear in the Presentation history. **Case2:** The App Config “*Show all Presentations in the Customer Portal*” under the B2B tab **is OFF.** In this case, the presentation will be visible on the basis of the below cases: * For a Presentation for which the “***Is Public” box is checked***, the Customer Group will be disabled. * On the other hand, if the Presentations has the “***Is Public” box unchecked*** then the Customer group will be enabled for the presentation.
* If the presentation is Public, will be accessible/visible to all the customers. **Otherwise, the Presentations will appear on the basis of the specific Customer group selected.** * **Whenever a customer logs into the Customer Portal, only the Presentations that are linked to their customer group will appear in their presentation history,** and they will have access to that presentation in the history window.
When a customer logs with the particular presentation’s link then the following presentations will appear in the presentation history window: * Linked presentation (from which the user logged in) * The Presentation that “Is Public” * The presentation with a Specific customer group selected ### **23. Customer module: Added Process Card checkbox** * Added a process card checkbox in the Customer module and process card as the default column in the customer Centre. *It will only be shown if the default payment method type is Credit Card.* * If the process card checkbox is set to true for the Customer, then in the payment modules (like invoice payment, customer deposit) the customer default payment will be set in the payment method and the process card will be checked to true automatically. * No card will be selected automatically. The user has to add the card manually. * It will show an info option on the right of the payment method “***No card selected***“.
The functionality has been implemented in the Invoice Payment, Customer Deposit, and Sales Receipt. ### **24. Enhancement made to be able to recalculate Pricing Rule on SO detail level** * Added ‘***Recalculate Pricing Rule***‘ in the options dropdown in the Sales Order detail level. This feature will recalculate the Pricing Rule of the Item(s), according to the defined Pricing Rules. * Open an SO, go to the detail level, and select the lines for which the Pricing Rule is to be updated.
* Click on the ‘***Recalculate Pricing Rule***‘. The following will be implemented: * If the pricing rule for that item exists then it will recalculate the pricing for that item. * If there are multiple pricing rules for the item then the pricing rule with minimum value will be applied. * If no pricing rule is available then it will set the unit price of the item. ### **25. Quick Item: Added Category Search field in Quick Add Item pop up** * New Column *“Category”* added to the Quick Add Items Popup while adding Items in the Orders. This column takes the Item Category. * The User can search and add items by category. ### **26. Shipping Method: Enabled Shipping Details for Pick-up method** With this enhancement, even if the shipping method is selected as “Pick Up” the User can still enter the Shipping Details. This work is based on the App Config setting “***Enable Shipping Details for pick up shipping method”.*** * Turn ON the app config ‘***Enable Shipping Details for pick up shipping method***‘ in the Sales tab. * Go to the Estimate/SO module and select a customer. * Go to the shipping tab. * Select the shipping method as Pick Up then the Carrier, Shipping term, Ship service, F.O.B, Ship Package type will be enabled and the user can select as per the requirement. ### **27. MO: Restrict auto-creation of Sub-MO for an Item, even when allowed in the App Config** * The auto-creation of Sub MOs can be restricted for particular manufacturable Items, even when the “Force Sub MO” App Config or the toggle in the MO is true. For this purpose, added ‘***Prevent Sub MO***‘ in the Bill of Material, and Manufacturing Order modules. * This checkbox is only enabled for raw material lines that are manufacturable. * If this field is checked, then this will not auto-create sub-MOs for this line if inventory is short while releasing. * This check has a higher priority than the **“*****Force Sub MO”*** checkbox on the MO header level. **How does it work?** * Make this flag true for a BOM Item. * Turn on the app config “***Enable Force Sub MO(s)”***. * Go to the Manufacture Order module and add the Bill of Material. * ‘Prevent Sub MO’ is added to the MO Item level. * It will be auto-checked if this flag is true for that bill of material line. * Enable the “force Sub MO” Flag. * Create MO with the ‘Prevent Sub MO’ flag true. * **It will not create the Sub-MO for the line for which Prevent Sub Mo flag is true.** * *The Priority of the ‘Prevent Sub MO’ flag is the highest.* This **“*****Force Sub MO”*** is Implemented in the following areas: * BOM Module and Centre (Line level) * MO Module and Centre (Line level) * Upload BOM * Anywhere the MO is created, it will pick up the **“*****Force Sub MO”*** flag from the BOM line level (for example – Short Inventory planner, Batch MO, etc) *Please note that this may impact the auto producible function as the picking stage may not be completed due to insufficient inventory of these items.* ### **28. User: Restrict the ability to Change User Password** * Provided the ability to restrict the User to change the Password. * Added the “***Restrict Password Change***” switch in the User module. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2022/03/img_622214b21bb34.png) **How does this work?** * Navigate to the User Centre, and open the User. * Turn ON the “***Restrict Password Change” toggle*** button and save the user. * The user will not be able to change the password. * Go to the change password module. * Enter the new password and click on the change password button. * It will show the error message that ‘User ‘UserID’ is not authorized to change the password.’ * It will not provide access to the “Change Password” of the user. ### **29. Added “PO Sub Type Name” Column in Upload PO Template.** * Added POSubTypeName Column in the Upload PO Template. * This column picks up the OrderType of the PO.
### **30. Global Search enhancement** * While searching for any Order# in the Global search, previously the result was showing the memo field. * It has now been replaced with the Customer Name. * It will show Customer Name when searched for SO, Invoice, Sales Receipt, and in other modules related to the Customer. ### **31. Credit Memo: Ability to select the required Ship-To Address of the Customer** While creating a Credit Memo for a Customer with multiple Ship to Address, the Ship to Address dropdown will show all the available Addresses of the Customer. **How does it work?** * Go to the Credit Memo module. * Select customer with multiple Ship to addresses. * Search the address by name. * It will search the address and that address will be selected. * On the default address, there will be a check.
### **32. Purchase Order: Added Item Description in Linked orders SO detail** Added Item Description in the Purchase Order’s Link Order tab for SO. * This column is also added to the PO subform
# January 2022 Release ### **1. Sales Order enhancement: Ability to define Back Order Qty on the Item** On a Sales Order, an Item Quantity can be specified, indicating how much should be waved and how much should be kept on backorder. The item can be placed on backorder even if it is in stock. **What’s New?** * Added a new column at sales order line level i.e. BackOrder Quantity. * Added BackOrder Qty column in the sales order Centre (SO Detail). * Added batch backorder qty options under options in the sales order module(SO Detail). * Added **2 app config’s under the sales tab:**
1. **Enable BackOrder Qty on SO:** If this setting is on the User can block the item qty to be waved/shipped. 2. **Block Operations on the item to be waved/shipped for BackOrder Qty:** Block Operations on the item to be waved/shipped for BackOrder Qty. This config has two options i.e. **Create Wave, Ship**
**a) Create Wave:** If the user selected this option, then the user can only allocate the remaining qty (qty-backorder) qty. * **Full Order Only** – User cannot create wave if backorder qty > 0 * **Allocate full lines –** User cannot create wave if backorder qty > 0 * **Allocate what’s available lines –** Allocate (remaining qty – backorder qty) * **Manual Wave** – Only allow remaining (qty – qty backorder) to add to the wave For Example, * **Order Qty=10,** **Back Order Qty= 6,** **Output (10 – 6) = 4 (User can allocate 4 units).** * **Order Qty= 10, Back Order Qty= 6, Qty Shipped= 3, Output (10 – 6 – 3) = 1 (User can allocate 1 unit).** **Add Item Popup**
**SO Details**
**b) Ship:** If the user selected this option, then the User can allocate full qty but **can only ship/pick the remaining (qty-backorder) qty.**
For Example, * **Order Qty=10, Back Order Qty= 6, Qty Allocated=10, Output: 4 (User can ship/pick 4 units).** **c) In case** **both options are selected in the app config i.e. Create Wave & Ship:** For Example, * **Order Qty=10, Back Order Qty= 6, Qty Allocated= (10 – 6= 4), Output= 4 User can ship/pick 4 units.** ### **2. Batch update Custom fields in the PO & SO Centres** * Added functionality to batch update the custom fields in Purchase Order and the Sales Order Centres. * The custom fields for PO/SO are created in the Custom Field Definition module. * These Custom Fields will automatically populate in the Batch update option in the SO/PO Centre. * Update the column name in the Batch Update option. * This will update the Custom field column for the selected Orders.
**\*\*The feature is available in the SO Centre as well.** ### **3. ASN Centre: Added Invoice Ref# column** * Added the “Invoice Ref#” column in the ASN Centre (header level). ***Please Note: Invoice Ref number will be populated when RMA is created using invoice.*** Read more about [The new RMA Process](https://help.xorosoft.io/index.php/knowledge-base/the-new-rma-process/). ### **4. ASN Subview: Batch update Ship Date and Delivery Dates** Added feature to batch update Ship Date and Delivery Dates in the ASN subview form. * Open subform of ASN from ASN Centre, or from the PO History Tab. * Select the record to update the ship date/delivery date. ### **5. Customer module enhancements: Ability to directly create Invoice & Sales Receipt** * Added “**Create Sales Receipt**” and “**Create Invoice**” options in the **Create Customer, Customer Centre, and Customer Info** modules. When Create Sales Receipt is clicked it will go to the Sales Receipt module and the Customer details will be auto-filled. Similar will be the case when “Create Invoice” is clicked. * **Customer module:** In the Options dropdown. * **Customer Centre**: On the right-click.
* **Customer Info module:** In the Options dropdown. ### **6. SO Allocation %age Preview: Added Memo column** * Added Memo field in the Allocation Preview in the Sales Order Centre. The memo field can be added from the nine-dots option. ### **7. Sales Order Centre: Batch update option updated with Payment Term** * Added **Payment Term** under the batch update option in the Sales Order Centre. * The Value dropdown will show all the existing Payment Terms in the system. * Select the Value, and hit “Update”.
### **8. Invoice Centre: Added new fields** The following new columns are introduced in the Invoice Centre: * “Main Email” of the Customer * “Main Phone” of the Customer * “Order Type” * “CC On File” ### **9. Option to Exclude PDF Attachment in the Order related emails** The emails can now be sent without the PDF template. * The option to “Exclude PDF Attachment” has been added in the Default document Template, and the Customer module. * The option is applicable for the following emails: 1. Release Order Confirmation. 2. Order confirmation in B2B for Customer 3. Order Confirmation in B2B For Sales Rep 4. Deposit Link Email 5. Invoice Payment 6. Ship Confirmation Email 7. Estimate approval. 8. Due Invoice 9. Overdue Invoice 10. Bill Payment #### **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Default Document Template module. **Added “Exclude PDF Attachment” in pdf template dropdown.** * When this is selected for any action then a pdf attachment will not be sent for that particular email for that action. * A similar option of “Exclude PDF Attachment” is added in the pdf template dropdown in the Customer Module. * **Preference will be given to the customer-level selection. If nothing is selected on the customer level then it will work according to the default document template module setting.** ### **10. Manufacturing Order module-related enhancements** The following new features are introduced in the manufacturing process in Xoro: 1. **Added “Is Raw Material” and “Is Manufacturable” columns in the Inventory Snapshot module.** 2. **Added BOM Inventory level columns to the Short Inventory Planner module.** 3. **Added Checkbox “Create Sub MOs” to the Manufacture Order module.** Let’s know these in detail. **1. Added “Is Raw Material” and “Is Manufacturable” columns in the Inventory Snapshot module.** * These columns can be added from the nine dots option. **2. Added BOM Inventory level columns to the Short Inventory Planner module.** * ATS(Ins MO), * ATS(Ins PO\&MO), * Producible ATS Qty, * Producible ATS Qty (Inc PO), * Producible Available, * Producible Net Available, * Producible On Hand, * Producible ATS Qty (Inc MO), * Producible ATS Qty (Inc PO & MO), * Total Producible ATS Qty, * Total Producible ATS Qty (Inc PO), * Total Producible Available, * Total Producible Net Available, * Total Producible On Hand, * Total Producible ATS Qty (Inc MO), * Total Producible ATS Qty (Inc PO & MO))
#### **3. Added Checkbox “Create Sub MOs” to the Manufacture Order module.** * In the App Config, a new setting is added under the Manufacturing tab **“Enable Force Sub MO(s)”.** **Enable Force Sub MO(s):** This setting will enable the “Force Sub MO” checkbox in the manufacture order module. * This check box will create sub-MO’s for all the manufacturing items whose raw material is also manufacturable irrespective of inventory is short or not. * ***If this is checked, the child BOMs will be always created even if the inventory is available.*** * Also added to page defaults of the MO module.
# 2021 # December 2021 Release ### **1. Invoice Centre: Added columns to show ICM details** Added two columns in the *Invoice detail view* of the Invoice Centre; ***Credit Amount,** and **Credited Qty.*** If Credit Memo is created against the Invoice, the details (***Credit Amount,** and **Credited Qty)*** of the ICM will be displayed in these two columns. * **Credit Amount** is Credit Qty \* EUP. * **Credit Qty** is the Qty received via the Invoice Credit Memo. #### ### **2. Data Export Centre Enhancement: Customer Deposit Export** * Added the ability to *export Customer Deposits* in the Data Export Centre. ### **3. Purchase Order: Ability to change the Store** The Store can be changed for a saved PO with the help of an App Config **“Enable changing store in Purchase Order”.** This Config is located under the Purchase Order Tab. * *If this setting is ON, then the store in the Purchase Order can be changed if the **Purchase Order is in open and Released status.***
### **4. Sales Order Module: Sort the Items in the SO Detail level** In the Sales Order module, the Sales Order Detail now has a Sort dropdown. Sorting the Item lines is possible based on a variety of options. The sorting dropdown has the following values: 1. Item Number (Ascending) 2. Item Number (Descending) 3. Total Price (Low to High) 4. Total Price (High to Low) 5. Qty (Low to High) 6. Qty (High to Low) * Clicking any value in the dropdown will sort the item lines of the sales order accordingly. * When a sales order is saved it will save the order of item lines as per the sorting. * If the sorting is changed then to maintain the order of item lines the Sales Order has to be saved again. ### **5. Exchange Rate App Config: Manage Currency Exchange Rates per day\*\*** * If this setting is turned on, the currency exchange rates in all modules will be fetched based on the date of transaction/order. The system will start maintaining the history of exchange rates on a daily basis. An App Config “***Manage currency exchange rates per day for invoice***” is added in the General tab. #### **How does it work?** *Note: The Exchange Rates are stored/updated in the Exchange Rate Centre.* If the App Config is ON: * The system will ask to recalculate the exchange rate if needed when creating an SO/Invoice of a date other than the current date. * As an example, refer to the screenshot of an Order.
The same will be the case with the Exchange Rates while processing Purchase Orders. * While creating PO/IR/Bill of the Order Date other than the Current Date, the system will ask to recalculate the Exchange rate if required. **\******Exchange Rate Centre maintains the history of exchange rates on a daily basis if app config is on.*** #### **6. Enhancement to Ship Confirmation Emails: Allow ship confirmations once per day.** The auto-sending of Invoices to Customers provides the user with the **ability to schedule the time at which Invoices are automatically sent to them.** Added two App Config in the Sales Tab ‘**Enable Daily Invoice Emails**‘ and ‘**Daily Invoice Emails Time**‘ in the Sales Tab of the App Config module.
* If this setting is on, ***the system will auto-send Invoice emails*** ***every day*** to the Customers ***at the time specified in the App Config***. This will only send Invoice emails created on the same day that was not sent manually. * You can disable this feature per customer by disabling this setting on the customer level. (Note: **This is helpful for the situation where order tracking information is entered at the later stage after marking the order as shipped.)** **Note: This is applicable when the ‘Auto email ship confirmation on Pack & Ship’ config is off.** * The Time has to be entered in HH: MM format in the ‘**Daily Invoice Emails Time**‘ config.
* You can disable this feature per customer by disabling this setting on the customer level.
### **7. SIP Enhancement: Create Purchase Order from the Short Inventory Planner module** Purchase Order can now be created for the selected Items from the Item Inventory Snapshot module. **What’s New?** * Three new options in the Item inventory snapshot: 1. Create a new PO, 2. Add to existing PO, and 3. Create a new PO by Default Vendor. * ***Select Qty to add in the PO based upon the Re-Order Point Qty of the selected Item.*** **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Item Inventory Snapshot module. * Select the item(s). * From the Options dropdown, select one of the options:
**Option selected: Create a new PO:** * Popup will open: select the Vendor.
**Option selected: Add to existing PO** * Select the PO to which the item(s) is to be added, and use filters to search the Order if required. * While adding the Item(s) to the PO, a popup will appear to add the Qty of the item(s). The following options are available in the popup for adding Qty: * 1 Unit, * Re-Order ( ***“Re-Order Point Qty” + “Re-order Qty” – “Available***“), Here if the “is available qty” is sufficient enough, or the Items has no re-order point data, they will not be added to PO, * The user can enter the quantity manually.
### **8. Vendor Module: Add multiple emails to Vendor Contact** * In the past, only one email could be set up in the CC email when creating a Vendor. * As a result of the enhancement, multiple comma-separated email addresses can now be entered in the CC field.
### **9. Create ASN: Added Receipt Date field in the Upload/Import Utility** * Added Receipt Date column in Upload ASN Create Template.
* The receipt Date Column can now be used as mapping in Import/Export Utility module (Import).
#### ### **10. Purchase order Module:Function to batch update Ship/Delivery Dates** The Purchase Order Details section of the PO module is updated with new options of Batch Update: * Batch Update **Ship Date;** * Batch Update **Delivery Date**
* In the Purchase Order Centre under the *Purchase Order Detail* the “Ship Date” and “Delivery Date” will display the updated dates. ### **11. Added *****Third Party Ref Name***** column in Wave Detail Export** While exporting “Wave Detail” data from the Data Export Centre module, the “Third Party Ref Name” will be exported. * The column can be added & accessed in the Centre.
* The column will be exported.
### **12. Sales order Module: New feature to Show Deposit Refunded & Remaining amount in the Sales Order** In the Sales Order Payment detail section at the bottom, two new amount details can be added & viewed: ***Deposit Refunded & Deposit Remaining.*** **How does it work?** * An App Config setting is added in the Sales Tab: ‘***Show Deposit & Refunded Amount in Sales Order***‘.
* This setting will show the Deposit refund amount and Deposit remaining amount in the Sales Order. * When this config is on, the Deposit Remaining and Deposit Refunded amounts will be visible in the SO. * **Deposit Refunded** is the total refund made on the linked Deposit to that Sales Order. * **Deposit Remaining** is the total Deposit amount remaining on the linked Deposits to that Sales Order. **Please Note:** * The remaining amount of the Deposit and the refund will only be displayed if they are larger than zero. * When a Sales Order is split, the deposit applied is split as well. * When a deposit is split and if the total amount is different from the linked amount, then the Total Amount will be shown in brackets. ### **13. Inventory Snapshot and Short Inventory Planner modules: Added columns; Forecast (Current Year & Next Year)** * Added Forecast (Current Year) and Forecast (Next Year) columns in Inventory Snapshot and Short Inventory Planner modules. **What is the Sales Forecast?** **A Sales Forecast** is a prediction/target of the quantity of an item to be sold over a specific period of time, under a given month. It can be added from the “Sales Forecast” tab of the create Item module. This enhancement now allows users to view the Sales Forecast of the Items for the Current and Next Year in the column provided in the Inventory Snapshot and Short Inventory Planner modules.
* **The Forecast (Current Year) column:** To see the sum of the total forecast Qty of that year. * **The Forecast (Next Year) column:** To see the sum of the total forecast Qty for next year. * Click on the Qty of the column. * This will open a subform that shows the forecast Qty and forecast amount of that year according to months. ### **14. Add Items: Option to Quick Add Items in different modules** Several modules have been enhanced to provide Quick Add Items options. Multiple items can be added to the order quickly and easily using the Quick Add Items option. The Option is added in the following modules: **Sales Order, Purchase Order, TSO, TPO, & Estimate** * Added an App Config: – “***Quick Add Item”*** under the General tab. * Use this setting to show/hide the Quick Add button in all modules
* Up to 5 Custom, Fields Custom Fields can be added Search will show u. #### **How does it work?** * Navigate to the App Config module, and turn on the config “***Quick Add Item”*** in the General tab. * Now, navigate to any of the modules, let’s say the “Sales Order” module. * The “Quick Add Items” can be seen in the SO Detail section.
* Click on the option and a pop-up screen will be displayed on the screen. * At the top, several Quick search options can be seen. * Select/filter the Items and add Quantity in the Qty field. * The availability of the item is calculated on the basis of the App Config: – **Inventory Type for Availability Column.**
* *Sales Order and Estimate modules filter item availability based on the “Ship Store” and TSO filters it based on the “From Store”.* * The item inventory summary for the Item can be viewed by clicking on the “Availability” button. * Right-click on the Qty and the **Qty can be copied to all, or for the selected Items.**
* Finally, add the selected Items to the Order.
# October 2021 Release ### **1. Sales Order Module: Auto-calculation of the Deposit amount after linking a Credit Memo to an SO** The process of linking a Credit Memo to an SO has been improved. What’s new? * The new feature will automate the calculation of linking the remaining Deposit amount based on the already linked Credit Amount. * The Deposit amount to be sent out in the Deposit link will subtract the Credit amount linked to it. * Added the Credit line under the Total Amount and Deposit section of the Sales Order. How does it work? * Create a Sales Order and link Credit to that Sales Order. * Added Credit column under the Total Amount and Deposit in the Sales Order. It will show the total credit amount linked to the Order. * Now go to option and Record Deposit. * The amount in the Record Deposit will be the **total amount of Sales Order – linked Credit Amount.** * Now mark the Sales Order as advance payment required and apply Credit to that Sales Order. While sending the Deposit link the amount will be the **Total Deposit Amount required – Linked Credit Amount.** * Similarly, while generating a deposit link the amount in the link will be the **Total Deposit Amount required – Linked Credit Amount.** ### **2. Purchase Order Module: Create a Transfer Sales Order directly from a Purchase Order** The Purchase Order module has been enhanced by **adding the ability to copy a PO to TSO.** The following two options are provided under the “Copy” section: * Copy to Transfer Sales Order (TSO) * Copy Selected Lines to TSO ### **3. Enhancement: Added App Config to Set default Carton while Shipping an Order** A User can now specify the default usage of the carton during the Shipping (Pack & Ship, Express Ship, Quick Ship) of an Order, whether to use a single carton or one carton per item. **What’s new?** * Added an app config under the Sales tab “***Default carton in pack and ship***”. * It has two values: ***1. Single Carton, 2. One Carton Per Item.*** * This allows you to use one Carton for one Item during the Pack & Ship process of an Order. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the App Config module. **Under the Sales tab, select the “Single Carton” Option in the “Default carton in pack and ship”** setting. * This setting will decide how many default ship carton(s) are created when shipping the order. * When a single Carton is selected in the App Config then while shipping a Sales Order, a single carton will be created and functionality will work as it has been working before. * Now **if One Carton Per Item is selected then while shipping the Sales Order One Carton Per item will be created.** * **In case when SO has multiple lines of the same item then one carton for that item will be created and will have multiple lines of the same item.** ### **4. Create Estimate:Added option to create Estimates from the various modules** It is possible now to **create an Estimate directly from the following modules:** 1. Sales Order, 2. Customer/ Customer Centre, and 3. Customer Info The Estimate can be created from the “Options’ dropdown of these modules. * **Sales Order: Copy to Estimate in the Options**
* **Customer module:** In the Options
* **Customer Centre:** On Right-Click
* **Customer Info:** In the Options
### **5. Inventory by Location module: Write Off the Not-Available Qty in the Inventory by Location module without affecting any Inventory levels** With the added feature the User will now be able to write off the Not Available Qty in the Inventory by the Location module without affecting any Inventory levels. What’s New? Added an App Config setting under the inventory tab **“*****Enable write-off feature for Not Available Inventory*****”**. This feature **will allow users to write off not Available Inventory without making it Available.** \ **How does it work?** * Turn on the App Config **“Enable write-off feature for Not Available Inventory”** from the App Config module. * Go to **the Inventory by Location module.** * Right-click on the item whose Not Available Quantity is greater than 0. * Click on the Write off Inventory option.
* Enter the **write-off not Available Quantity.** * The entered QTY must be less than or equal to the Not Available Quantity of that Item.
* **New Not Available Qty will be (Not Available qty – Write-Off Qty).** * On Clicking the Write-Off, it will automatically create an Inventory Adjustment entry in the Inventory Adjustment Centre. ### **6. Sales Order Centre: Batch Update “Date to Be Shipped” in the SO Centre** Added option to the batch updates the “**Date to Be Shipped”** in the Sales Order Centre both on the **Header and the Detail level.** **How does it work?** * Go to the Sales Order Centre. * Select the Sales Orders and go to Batch update in Options and select **“Date to Be Shipped”** and update the date.
* It will update the Date to be Shipped of the selected Sales Orders.
### **7. Data Export Centre: Export Manufacturing Order** * Added **option to export Manufacture Orders in the Data Export Centre.** * Search by ***Manufacture Order Detail.*** * Advanced Search can be made for the required Batch MO/MO number. * Click on the options for Exporting the MO. ### 8. Editing the Transfer Order will automatically edit the corresponding TPO/TSO * TSO and TPO modules have been updated with new functionality. We know that as soon as a TSO/TPO is created and released, it generates the associated TPO/TSO. * Earlier if any changes related to the item QTY are made or a new item is added or changes are made in the address, the corresponding TPO/TSO was required to be manually updated. * Now, this will automatically update the existing TPO/TSO and will create a new one with updated data. The **changes can only be made in the Released Status** and the change will be reflected in the corresponding Order. * After creating a TPO/TSO, while releasing the Order the following pop-up will be visible stating that **“Any modifications to the TSO(TPO) after Release will be automatically reflected on the respective TPO(TSO)”.** * **After a Wave or an ASN has been created the TSO/TPO will not** further allow any changes. #### **9. Purchase Order Module: Option to Move or Copy PO or selected PO line to a new PO** In the Purchase Order module, new options to Split PO or copy and move to a new PO have been added. The following two options are provided: **1. Option to Copy lines to New PO** **2 Option to Move lines to New PO** #### 10. **Customer Address: New module added to the Data Export Centre** * The “**Customer Address module**” is added to the **Data Export Centre module** in the search by option. #### **11. App Config for Auto Allocation SO from PO/MO: Added app config to Auto Allocate the linked SO when the Inventory is back-in-stock, or the linked MO is produced, get alerts via email** **What’s New?** * **PO: As soon as the Inventory is available and received on the PO, the linked SO will be Automatically Allocated.** * **MO: The Sales Order linked to an MO will automatically create and pick Waves on the production of the Manufacturing Order.** * **An alert can be sent via internal notification/email or both to notify regarding the auto-allocation of the Order.** **This enhancement will automate the processing of the linked Sales Orders.** To accomplish this, **new App Configs are added to the Purchase Order tab.** * Auto Allocate linked Sales Orders when stock is received * Send email notifications when PO linked Sales Orders are auto-Waved/Allocated * Linked SO & MO Stock Availability Notification Type * Linked SO Stock Availability Notification – Additional Emails * Linked MO Stock Availability Notification – Additional Emails ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2021/10/img_61782c579e990.png)**Manufacturing Order-related App Config settings under the MO tab** * **Auto-allocate linked sales orders when linked MO is produced** * **Send email notifications when MO-linked sales orders are auto-waved** **How does it work?** Let’s understand how these App Configs are going to work. **Auto allocate linked sales orders when stock is received** * Auto Allocate linked Sales Orders when stock is received If this setting is on then the system will automatically Allocate the Sales Order(s) linked to the Purchase Order. You can specify the Wave Allocation type 1. Do not wave, The Order will not be auto-allocated 2. Full order(s) only, (Which means the order will wait to allocate until the complete order is available in stock.) 3. Full qty line(s) only, 4. Allocate what’s available. When this App Config contains any value, **the system will automatically create a Wave for the linked Sales Orders of PO or MO** based on the App Config value. * Send email notifications when PO linked Sales Orders are auto-Waved/Allocated If this setting is enabled, the system will **notify the Sales Rep or Customer, or both** (based on the selection) when the linked PO is received and the Sales Order is automatically Waved for Picking. This app config contains 4 values: 1. Do not send, 2. Customer, 3. Sales Rep, and 4. Customer & Sales Rep. If this config contains any values, then the email notification will be sent to the customer or sales rep based on the app config value. This feature will work when PO received/ MO is produced, then the wave will be created for linked SO’s. * Linked SO & MO Stock Availability Notification Type If this setting is enabled, the system will send internal or email notifications to the Sales Rep assigned to the Sales Order or additional emails provided in the App Config Types = Internal Notification (Sales Rep), Email (Sales Rep), Email (Additional Emails). In this app configuration now, the user can select which notification type he wants to use (Internal/ Email) If an email notification is selected in this app config, the email notification (item availability notification) will be sent to the email mentioned in the app config. * Linked SO Stock Availability Notification – Additional Emails If this setting is enabled, then the system will send additional email notifications to the email addresses specified in the App Config when a PO linked to SO is received. For SO: “Send PO receiving notification for linked sales orders to the following emails” under the purchase tab. **Auto allocate linked Sales orders when linked MO is produced** * Linked MO Stock Availability Notification – Additional Emails If this setting is enabled, then the system will send additional email notifications to the email addresses specified in the App Config when raw materials PO linked to MO are received. For MO: “Send MO receiving notification for linked sales orders to the following emails” under the purchase tab * **Auto-allocate linked sales orders when linked MO is produced** If this setting is on then the system will automatically allocate the sales order(s) linked to the manufacturing order being produced by auto-creating pick waves. You can specify the Wave Allocation type 1. Do not wave, The Order will not be auto-allocated 2. Full order(s) only, (Which means the order will wait to allocate until the complete order is available in stock.) 3. Full qty line(s) only, 4. Allocate what(s) is available. * **Send email notifications when MO-linked sales orders are auto-waved** If this setting is enabled, the system will notify the **sales rep or customer, or both (based on the selection)** when the linked MO is produced and the sales order is automatically waved for picking. This app config contains 4 values: 1. Do not send, 2. Customer, 3. Sales Rep, and 4. Customer & Sales Rep. **Along with this, a new Email Template for this has been created with the Entity Name: Wave Allocation.** This template will be used in the notification email when the Order is automatically Allocated on Receiving the inked PO. #### **12.** Customer Centre: Customer Info shortcut from the Customer Centre The User can now directly access Customer Info from the Customer Centre. How does it work? * Navigate to the Customer Centre. * Right-click on the Customer for which you wish to see the info such as Customer’s Transactions, Orders & Estimates, Invoices or Customer’s Balance details, etc. * On right-click, an option is provided that will directly navigate the user to the Customer Info module. #### **13. Sales Order Detail Export from the Data Export Centre: Added Line Status and Ship Status** The Sales Order Detail file when exported from the Data Export Centre contains two new columns to show the Ship Status of the Order: * **Line Status & Ship Status** #### **14. Item UPC: Item UPC Validation during Creating/Editing/ Items & Uploading Products** * Added an App Config setting **‘Item UPC Validation’** in the general section. * Item UPC column will allow values only as per the expression defined in the App config setting. Users can specify the regular expression that which system will use to validate Item UPC when creating/updating Items(s). For example (\[0-9]{12}). This means the Item UPC should be 12 digits from 0 to 9. **How does it work?** * Navigate to Item UPC Validation App config from App config Module and Enter a Regular Expression (Reg-Expression). * Now Navigate to Item Centre Open any Existing Item or Create New Item, in Inventory Tab, enter values in UPC column. It should be according to the Expression filled in App config. * This also applies while Uploading Products. * If the entered Values are not as per App config, it will give an Error **“Cannot complete request, Item UPC validation defined in-app config does not match with entered Item UPC”.** * If no expression is defined in the config, then it will work as it was working before. #### **15. Sales Order Upload: Restricted SO creation for “In-Active & Non-Sellable” Items** While uploading Sales Orders, the system will **not allow the upload if the Items have their Active & Sellable flags turned Off.** Only the Orders with Active and Sellable Items will be uploaded successfully. You may refer to the following scenarios with different types of Items. 1. Item is **Active and Sellable \[**Will be **uploaded successfully**] 2. Item is **Not Active and Sellable** \[Will give **error**] 3. Item is **Active and Not Sellable** \[Will give **error**] 4. Item4 is **Not Active and Not Sellable** \[Will give **error**] #### **16.** Bill of Material Enhancement: Ability to Update the Items of the BOM * Added a feature for replacing the item in a Bill of Material. A new column “**Replacement Item Number**” has been added to the “**Update BOM Items**” module. How does it work? * Navigate to the Update BOM Items module. * Select the Raw Material Item Number from the drop-down. * This will show all the BOMs in which the raw material is used. * Replace the raw material with any other raw material by adding the Item in the “Replacement Item Number” field. * Select: Update “All Revisions” or the “Last Revision” * This will update the raw material Item in the Bill of Material. **Please Note: The system will give an error in the following cases:** * The Item that was added to the Replacement Item Number does not exist. * The Item is not a raw material. #### **17. Upload Bill of Material Revision via upload** * Added a new feature to **create BOM revisions through the Bill of Material upload.** * Added a new column **“Is Revision”** in the BOM upload CSV template. If this is set to “Y”, then the **Bill of Material will be uploaded as a revision to the existing BOM.** **Please Note:** * If “Is Revision” is marked as true, **then the columns “Revision”, “Valid from Date”, and “Valid to Date” fields are required**. * The revision will only be created if a Bill of Material exists. \***Upload Bill of Material only creates the BOM/BOM revision not used for Updating existing BOMs.** #### **18. New Upload: MO Quick Produce via Upload** * Created a new Module “**Batch Upload MO Quick Produce**“. * Use this module to Batch Quick Produce the MO’s that are already created in the system. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the **“Batch Upload Quick Produce”** module. * Download the template CSV file. * Fill in the MO numbers with the Qty to be produced. * Upload the file. * This will Quick Produce all the MOs that are uploaded. * You can check the status of the MOs from the MO Centre. **Please Note:** * **The raw materials associated with the MOs should have sufficient Qty.** * **The Qty uploaded cannot be greater than the Manufacture Order Qty.** #### **19. Manufacturing Module Enhancement: Introduced the “Production Offset Qty” feature in the Manufacturing Order module** While creating a Manufacturing Order the users can now increase/decrease the Qty to be Produced while producing any MO. **Please Note:** The change will not impact the Raw material factor value according to the offset. Factors will remain the same, only the Produced QTY will be impacted, and Raw Material will not be increased or decreased for any Item. **What’s new?** * A new column ‘Production Offset QTY’ was introduced in the MO module to update the total Produced QTY. The Production Offset Qty entered here will post the transaction in the Shrinkage/Swell offset account and will affect the final Qty produced. * New App Config is introduced for adding ‘Production Offset Qty’ in the MO tab of the App Config module. Config name – ‘Production Offset Account’. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/plugins/image-elevator/assets/admin/img/circle-preloader.gif) This account will be used as an offset account for the shrinkage/swell transactions in producing manufacture orders when production offset qty is entered. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Manufacturing Order module and create an Order. * A new box field is added in the header “Production Offset Qty”. * The User can fill in the Offset Qty in this column any time during the processing of an Order, till the “Work in Progress”. * The user can enter QTY in positive or negative value. * Save the MO and Produce it. * Check the Produced QTY. * The QTY will be increased/decreased according to the Production Offset QTY. **The final QTY Produced will be equal to QTY TO PRODUCE + PRODUCTION OFFSET QTY** I.e. **If Qty to Produce = 10, Production Offset QTY = 8, then 18 units will be Produced.** * In the event of increasing the QTY, the output will add the total Debit value and a corresponding Credit entry will be present for balancing the transaction in the Production Offset Account. And **If Qty to Produce = 10, Production Offset QTY = -8, then 2 units will be produced.** * In case of decreasing the Qty, the output will decrease the total in Debit value and a new Debit value will be added for balancing the transaction in the Production Offset Account. # September 2021 Release ### **1. Wave Centre Enhancements: Added new Columns** New Columns have been added to the Wave Centre. In the Wave Centre module, the following new columns have been introduced: * Customer PO number, * Date To Be Shipped, * Date To Be Cancelled, and * Total Wave Amount
* The Column can be added from the Nine Dots dropdown.
The Total Wave Amount column shows the sum of Amounts of all the Wave lines altogether. ### **Enhancement: Update the “Reason Code” on Credit Memo through ASN Receipt Upload** *The* *Reason Code on the Warehouse Type Credit Memo/Invoice Credit Memo can be updated through the Upload ASN Receipt file*. **How does it work?** * Create a Warehouse Type Invoice Credit Memo or a Credit Memo. * After saving the ASN can be generated. * Now, the “R” Code on the Credit Memo can be updated while receiving the ASN through the “*Upload ASN Receipt*” file. * A ***column “Reason Code” is added*** in which the new R Code can be filled. * The upload will Receive/Close the ASN and the R Code will get updated on the Credit/Invoice Credit Memo. ### **3. Sales Order Centre: Added Columns to access the Return information** The Sales Order Centre has been improved by adding columns to view and directly access the linked invoice credit memo(s). The following columns are added to the SO Centre * ***SO: Invoice Credit Memo#*** * ***SO Detail: Quantity Returned*** **How does it work?** * Create Sales Order -> Create Invoice -> Create Invoice Credit Memo. * In the SO Centre add the new column “***Invoice Credit Memo#***” from the nine dots option. * The column will display the quick link to the ICM, and the Status of the ICM. * The column will show all the linked ICMs to the particular SO In the SO Detail view under the SO Centre, added column “***Quantity Returned***“. This column shows the total **Qty Returned** on the SO. ### **4. Manufacturing Order Enhancements: Duplicate MO, create SO to MO for selected Items, change Qty on an MO** **Update 1. Ability to Duplicate MO** **How does it work?** * Create a Manufacturing Order. * Under the Options dropdown, there is an option to “Create Duplicate”.
* This will duplicate the MO. * If the current MO is associated with a Batch MO, the duplicate MO will be in the Open state and will not be related to any Batch MO. **Update 2: Create SO to MO for selected Items** * Navigate to the SO Centre, open any existing SO, and from the Options dropdown, under the Copy option, select Create Manufacturing Order.
* The new option ‘***Selected Items’** has been* introduced in SO. MO can be created here like other options. * Also, the Item’s description will be copied into the MO Memo field after the new MO is created.
**Update 3: Change the Qty on an MO** The Qty on an MO can now be increased/decreased while the MO is in Open/Release status. #### ### **5. Sales Order Module: Added Link Credit Memo option and Sales Order directly from their modules** Enhancement has been made to the Sales Order and the Credit Memo modules to create a direct link between the two. **Linking from the Sales Order module:** **How does it work?** * Create a Sales Order. Save it and go to “Link Credit Memo” in the Options dropdown.
* It will open a “Credit Memo Linking” Subform. * In the “Credit Memo Linking” Sub form the Sales Order dropdown will be auto-filled with the Sales Order number. * In the Credit Memo dropdown, only the Credit Memo numbers with the same Customer and Store selected in the Sales Order will be retrieved. * Once the Credit Memo# is filled, other details like the Customer Name, Ref#, Linked Sales Order(Linked amount), and total amount will get auto-filled. * Hit “Link” and the link will be saved. * Only the amount equal to or less than the sales order total amount can be linked. * Link the Credit Memo to Sales Order and save the SO to save the mapping. * The linked Credit memo can be seen under the “Credits/Deposits” tab of the SO. * This tab will show the linked Credit Memo and linked Customer Deposits with that Sales Order. * After the Sales Order is Shipped, **the credit amount linked with the Sales Order will be automatically applied to the Invoice.** * Added a new column “***Linked Credit Memo Amount***” in the Sales Order Centre. The Total Linked Amount will be fetched in this column. **Linking from the Credit Memo module:** The process of Linking Credit memo with SO on the Credit Memo module works in the same way as explained above. * Navigate to the Credit Memo module and save the Credit Memo. * Now go to Link Sales Order in the Options tab. * The linking Subform will open and the Credit Memo number will be auto-filled and the drop-down will be disabled. * In sales order drop down the sales order number of the selected customer and the store will come. * On change of sales order the data Customer name, Ref no, Total amount, and Linked credit memo (Linked amount) will be shown. ### **6. Ability to search items using multiple keywords** We have improved the Item searching options in various modules. A new feature is added to search Item numbers using multiple keywords in the Item Number dropdowns in the modules where the Item search is used. An App Config **“*****Advanced Item Search*****”** has been added **under the General tab.** ***If this setting is turned ON, the Item dropdown in various modules can search the Item by providing multiple keywords in an arbitrary sequence separated by a ‘space’.***
For example, **the Item Number name is “Test\_Item\_Red”** if the user **searches “Test Item” or “Test Item Red** then if the App **Config is OFF, the user will not be able to search** Item number with these parameters. If the App **config is ON, the User will be able to find** Item numbers with these parameters in the dropdown. ***\*\*Note:** This feature can make the Item search slower if the number of items in the Item Centre is greater than 500.* **How does it work?** * Navigate to the App Config Module and under the General Settings, turn on the setting “*Advanced Item Search*“. * Now, navigate to any module where the Item search has to be applied. * Let’s say we create a Sales Order. While selecting the Item Number from the dropdown, just write the initials of the Item number (separated by space, if using multiple words). * The complete Item number will appear in the dropdown list. * See the screenshots below.
If the App Config is turned OFF, the old functionality will work and the dropdown will not show all the items containing the keyword mentioned in the search.
### **7. Job scheduler: Ability to generate/split multiple export files (CSV)** Introduced a feature to split the Data Export Files, based upon the Identifiers when scheduling a Job. An Identifier is a key value of the data belonging to a particular module. Following are few a examples of Xoro modules with their Identifiers. * Wave Detail: **Order Number** * ASN Detail: **PO Number** * SO Detail: **Third-Party Ref No** * PO Detail: **Third-Party Ref No** * Item Product Header: **Base Part Number** **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Data Export Center module. * Select the file to be exported; here we take the example of exporting the Wave detail. * Selected **6 Waves, out of which 2 have the same SO#**, (Please Note: **SO# is the Identifier of the Wave Detail** data). * Now, schedule Export from the options.
* Fill in the required details. * A checkbox has been added in the Job Scheduler, “***Split Files By Identifier***“.
**Please Note: This check box will only show in the case of exports.** * If this checkbox is set to true, the file will be divided/split into multiple files based on the Identifier (SO# in this case). * In the above example out of 6 Waves, 2 Waves belong to the same SO. * Thus the total number of files exported will be 5. * The multiple files exported will be based upon the identifier on the FTP path and also for Emails. ### **8. Job scheduler: Ability the filter out CSV import files within a folder based on the file name pattern** We have added an ability to import files with the specified filenames or a pattern for scheduled jobs in FTP integrations. This way the system will only fetch the targeted CSV files in the FTP folder matching the pattern specified in the job **How does it work?** * Navigate to any Batch upload module, for example, “Batch Upload Sales Order”. * Schedule an Import. * A new textbox called “***File Expression***” has been added to the Import job type. * You can provide the file name pattern if required with the help of \* character. For example: abc\*.csv will pick the files starting from ABC and have an extension .csv.
* Fill in the details for the job scheduler. * Enter the keywords specifying the name of the file to be imported in the File Expression box.
* For example, the name of the file to be imported is *SalesOrderImportTemplate(15).csv* * If the user enters the expression: *Sal\*tem\*15\*.csv*, then only the file with the name starting with “*sal*“, ending with .*csv*, and that contains “*tem*” will be imported.
### **9. Batch Upload Modules: Implemented Item Identifier Codes** The Item Identifier Code support has been provided in various Uploads modules in Xoro. The Item identifier code column ***specifies, how the Item number field value of the file will be used to match the Item in the system.*** Below are the **valid identifier codes** to be used in the Batch upload modules: **0** will represent Not Applicable.\ **1** will represent Item Number.\ **2** will represent Item UPC.\ **3** will represent Item Barcode.\ **4** will represent Alternate item number 1.\ **5** will represent Alternate item number 2.\ **6** will represent Alternate item number 3. Item identifier support was previously provided in only the Upload Inventory module, now this feature is provided for the following uploads: * Upload Wave (Ship confirmation file) * Upload ASN receipt * Upload Sales order * Upload Purchase order * Upload Create wave * Upload Create ASN * Inventory movement **How does it work?** * Navigate to, for example, the “Batch Upload Inventory movement” module. * Scroll down and find Step# 6: “**Select Item Identifier Code”.** * Click on the drop-down in front.
* Select what information you want to upload regarding the Item: Item Number, Item UPC, Item Bar Code, Alternate Item number, etc. * If the Code value is empty in the Upload file, it will take the dropdown value else the File value will get uploaded. * If both the Upload file and the dropdown values are not specified, the system will by default pick up “Item Number”.
* The system will give an error in upload if the “Item Number” column entry doesn’t match the valid “Item Identifier Code” value. * Also if any other value other than 1-6 is provided in the upload file, an error will be received while uploading the Inventory. ***Please Note: The ItemUPC column has been removed from Upload Wave, and Upload ASN with the replacement of “Item Identifier Code”. Also, the related App Configs have been removed.*** ### **10. Various Email Template Enhancements** We have added the ability to set **Default Document Templates** where the Default **PDF Template**, **Email body,** and the **Send From Email** can be defined on the application or **customer/vendor** level. With this, You will now have the ability to create multiple “Send from” email configurations to be used for different types of actions. For example, a different company email address can be used for **sending Invoices** vs **sending ship confirmation** emails and so on. This new feature is currently available for the following templates Customer * Invoice * Packing Slip * Sales Order * Estimate * Credit Memo * RMA Vendor * Purchase Order * Item Receipt * Bill **What’s New?** **1. Added the “*****Add Template*****” button on the “Email Template”**. * Enter the template name and then save it. * This will automatically get selected in the template dropdown and can modify the email sending template accordingly. * Also provided the button to delete the email template.
The added Email Template will be available in the “Email Template Body” dropdown in the “Default Document Templates” module. **Please Note:** 1. Only Admin can delete the ‘Application-level template. 2. The user-level template can only be seen by the User who created the template. 3. Roles other than Admin can only delete their User level template. 4. Application-level templates can only be created by the Admin. 5. Select template dropdown will be filtered according to User-level and Application-level templates. **2. Added, “*****Add Template*****” on the “Company Email Configuration setup” module.**
* Multiple Company emails can be set up using the template names. * **Added the “*****Set default template*****” button which will make the selected template the default template.** * Added the “Delete” button which will delete the selected template. **3.** Added the “***Select Email Template***” option on “**Add to email queue**” in the Centres. Here the email sending template can be selected. The priority sequence in which the templates will be picked is as below: 1. Customer 2. Default Document template 3. Document Template Centre **4. Added the “*****Email Template*****” tab in the Customer/Vendor module.** Here you can define the following: 1. Document (PDF) that will be attached to the email, 2. The Email Template(Email Template Body) is to be used, and 3. The “Send From” Email (Company/user).
When emailing, the template (PDF, Email Body & Send from E-mail) that was provided to the Customer will take precedence. * Similarly for the Vendor, the information can be defined. **5. Created a new module *****Upload Email Template*****.** Use this module to Batch upload the Default Document type, PDF Template, Email Template Dody, and Send from Email to the Customers or Vendors.
**The Priority flow: Sequence of usage of the PDF, Template Body, and the “Send From Email” in different cases.** **Eg;** Sale Order Centre **(Add to Email Queue)** * **PDF** | **Document Template Centre (A)** | **Default Document Template (B)** | **Customer/Vendor (C)** | ***The Priority flow:*** | | -------------------------------- | --------------------------------- | ----------------------- | ------------------------ | | Defined | Defined | Defined | C->B->A | | Defined | Defined | Not Defined | B->A | | Defined | Not Defined | Not Defined | A | * **Email Body** | **Application Level template (Default) (A)** | **User Level Template (Default) (B)** | **Default Document Template (C)** | **Customer/Vendor (D)** | ***The Priority flow:*** | | -------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------- | --------------------------------- | ----------------------- | ------------------------ | | Defined | Defined | Defined | Defined | D->C->B->A | | Defined | Defined | Defined | Not Defined | C->B->A | | Defined | Defined | Not Defined | Not Defined | B->A | | Defined | Not Defined | Not Defined | Not Defined | A | * **“Send From Email”**
| **Default Send From Email (Implicit, Not defined anywhere) (A)** | **Default Document Template (B)** | **Customer/Vendor (C)** | ***The Priority flow:*** | | ---------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------- | ----------------------- | ------------------------ | | Defined | Defined | Defined | C->B->A | | Defined | Defined | Not Defined | B->A | | Defined | Not Defined | Not Defined | A | ### **11. Pricing rule module: Ability to show Pricing Rules as Discount** The Pricing Rule module has implemented an option to show/use a rule as a discount. A check box in the Pricing Rule module allows users to display the rule as a discount. The rule will be implemented in the following modules. * Estimate * Sales Order * Invoice * Sales receipt **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Pricing Rule module. * Create a Pricing Rule with **Percentage Price Adj type** and check the “***Show as Discount***” checkbox.
* The “Show as Discount” column has been added to the Pricing Rule Centre.
* When an Item is added while creating an SO, the **Discount** column will show how much percentage discount is applied and EUP will show the discounted price.
* Discounts can be applied to Orders as necessary according to the different Pricing Rules.
* The “**Show As Discounted Flag**” column has been added to the “Pricing Rule Import Template”.
### **12. Option to Disable Auto-filling of the Item-Qty in the Modules** When entering the Item information in the modules like SO, PO, etc., this feature will allow you to disable the auto-population of the Item Quantity. * An App Config setting **“*****Disable Default Quantity of Item on Add Item in Sales Order*****“** has been added under the Sales tab. * When enabled, it will blank the Quantity field while adding an Item to the Sales Order. * This means that if this config is true, the “Quantity” input box of the “Item Detail” popup will be blank and the User has to enter the Qty manually. ### **13. Sales Order: Added column “Qty Remaining to Allocate”** The Sales Order module now includes the “***Qty Remaining to Allocate***” column. * This column **shows how much quantity is left to be Allocated.** * Add this column from the nine dots option.
* The Qty remaining to Allocate column is also available on the **SO subview form.** #### ### **14. Upload Wave Enhancements: Introduced BOL number, Master BOL number, Master Tracking Number** Added BOL number, Master BOL number, Master Tracking Number, and new fields are included in the Waves Upload file. Also, included the ability to add Per Carton Cost for Freight and Carrier to the Shipment. * The Shipment Info of an Order now includes three new fields: 1. BOL Number(Bill of Landing#) 2. Master Tracking Number 3. Master BOL Number * Fields added in the Upload Wave Template: 1. BOL Number(Bill of Landing#) 2. Master Tracking Number 3. Master BOL Number 4. Carton Number 5. Serial Shipping Container Codes (SSCC) is used to identify shipments/cartons/logistics units as they travel through the supply chain. 6. Also, now the Per Carton Cost for Freight and Carrier can be calculated and added to the Shipment. **How does it work?** * Added BOL Number(Bill of Landing#), Master Tracking Number, Master BOL Number, SSCC, Carton Number fields in the **Upload Wave file.**
* Added BOL Number, Master Tracking Number, Master BOL Number columns in the **Invoice module, Invoice subform, Sales Receipt, and Sales Receipt** **subform.** * Under the Shipping Tab of the Invoice.
* **Invoice Centre**
* **Invoice subform**
* Added BOL Number, Master Tracking Number, and Master BOL Number columns in the **Carton info tab of the Invoice Subform.**
* Added BOL Number, Master Tracking Number, Master BOL Number fields in **edit carton to create and update shipment.**
* When a Wave is uploaded with these values, it will auto-fill the Invoice, Invoice subform, and Carton info values. * ***If uploaded Waves have different values than these fields then values of these fields will be entered separated by pipe operator “|”.*** **Calculating Shipping in case of multiple Cartons used in the Shipment when Ship API or File Upload is used.** **Works with the App Config: *****Override Invoice Shipping with API Freight Amount.*** This Config Use the freight provided in API call during Ship API or File Upload. **How does it work?** **Let’s take an example of an SO with the Shipping Charges=100** #### **The App Config: Override Invoice Shipping with API Freight Amount. = OFF** **Case 1:** * **SO with the Shipping Charges=100** * **Freight add Carrier Cost = *****Available,*** * **Per Carton Cost = *****Not Available*** | **Item Number** | **Freight** | **CarrierCost** | **FreightPerCarton** | **CarrierCostPerCarton** | | --------------- | ----------- | --------------- | -------------------- | ------------------------ | | A | 10 | 151 | – | – | | B | 20 | 152 | – | – | | C | 30 | 153 | – | – | | D | 40 | 154 | – | – | **The result of the Invoice:** * Shipping Cost (Shipment Info) = 100 * Carrier Cost (Shipment Info) = 151; Picks only First line * Available Shipping = 100 (Picks the SO shipping cost as per App config) * Charge to Customer = 100 * Shipping Cost in the Invoice shipping tab = 100 **Case 2:** * **SO with the Shipping Charges=100** * **Freight add Carrier Cost = *****Not*** ***Available,*** * **Per Carton Cost = *****Available*** | **Item Number** | **Freight** | **CarrierCost** | **FreightPerCarton** | **CarrierCostPerCarton** | | --------------- | ----------- | --------------- | -------------------- | ------------------------ | | A | – | – | 10 | 151 | | B | – | – | 20 | 152 | | C | – | – | 30 | 153 | | D | – | – | 40 | 154 | **Result:** * Shipping Cost (Shipment Info) = 100 * Carrier Cost (Shipment Info) = 610; Sum-up of all lines * Available Shipping = 100 (Picks the SO shipping cost as per App config) * Charge to Customer = 100 * Shipping Cost in the Invoice shipping tab = 100 **Case 3:** * **SO with the Shipping Charges=100** * **Freight add Carrier Cost = *****Available,*** * **Per Carton Cost = *****Available*** | **Item Number** | **Freight** | **CarrierCost** | **FreightPerCarton** | **CarrierCostPerCarton** | | --------------- | ----------- | --------------- | -------------------- | ------------------------ | | A | 50 | 151 | 5000 | 500 | | B | 60 | 152 | 6000 | 600 | | C | 70 | 153 | 7000 | 700 | | D | 80 | 154 | 8000 | 800 | **Result:** * Shipping Cost (Shipment Info) = 26000 * Carrier Cost (Shipment Info) = 2600; Sum-up of all lines * Available Shipping = 100 (Picks the SO shipping cost as per App config) * Charge to Customer = 100 * Shipping Cost in the Invoice shipping tab = 100 #### **The App Config: *****Override Invoice Shipping with API Freight Amount. = ON*** **Case 1:** * **SO with the Shipping Charges=100** * **Freight add Carrier Cost = *****Available,*** * **Per Carton Cost = *****Not Available*** | **Item Number** | **Freight** | **CarrierCost** | **FreightPerCarton** | **CarrierCostPerCarton** | | --------------- | ----------- | --------------- | -------------------- | ------------------------ | | A | 10 | 151 | – | – | | B | 20 | 152 | – | – | | C | 30 | 153 | – | – | | D | 40 | 154 | – | – | **Result:** * Shipping Cost (Shipment Info) = 10 * Carrier Cost (Shipment Info) = 151; Picks only First line * Available Shipping = 10 (Picked from the **Freight**) * Charge to Customer = 10 * Shipping Cost in the Invoice shipping tab = 10 **Case 2:** * **SO with the Shipping Charges=100** * **Freight add Carrier Cost = *****Not*** ***Available,*** * **Per Carton Cost = *****Available*** | **Item Number** | **Freight** | **CarrierCost** | **FreightPerCarton** | **CarrierCostPerCarton** | | --------------- | ----------- | --------------- | -------------------- | ------------------------ | | A | – | – | 50 | 151 | | B | – | – | 60 | 152 | | C | – | – | 70 | 153 | | D | – | – | 80 | 154 | **Result:** * Shipping Cost (Shipment Info) = 260 * Carrier Cost (Shipment Info) = 610; Sum-up of all lines * Available Shipping = 260( sum-up the **FreightPerCarton)** * Charge to Customer = 260 * Shipping Cost in the Invoice shipping tab = 260 **Case 3:** * **SO with the Shipping Charges=100** * **Freight add Carrier Cost = *****Available,*** * **Per Carton Cost = *****Available*** | **Item Number** | **Freight** | **CarrierCost** | **FreightPerCarton** | **CarrierCostPerCarton** | | --------------- | ----------- | --------------- | -------------------- | ------------------------ | | A | 50 | 151 | 5000 | 500 | | B | 60 | 152 | 6000 | 600 | | C | 70 | 153 | 7000 | 700 | | D | 80 | 154 | 8000 | 800 | **Result:** * Shipping Cost (Shipment Info) = 26000 * Carrier Cost (Shipment Info) = 2600; Sum-up of all lines * Available Shipping = 50(Picked from the **Freight**) * Charge to Customer = 50 * Shipping Cost in the Invoice shipping tab = 50 ### **15. Added new column “Location Zone” in Inventory By Location and Wave Centre** A new column “***Location Zone***” is added in the “Inventory By Location” Centre and “Wave Centre” (Wave Detail Allocation). *Note: Location Zones are created from the Location Zone module. Warehouses are divided into zones to help manage their operations, especially large ones.* * **Inventory By Location** * **Wave Centre (WaveDetail Allocation)**
* **Wave Subview**
#### ### **16. Custom Field Mapping Enhancements: New Centre was created along with the ability to Map Header to Detail Level Fields** Now Users can make the **Mapping from Header to Detail level**. Before this, the mapping was only available from header to header and detail to detail. * The User can make custom field mapping for the **Customer to SO header and also for SO Detail** (Same for Estimate and Invoice). * **Item can be mapped to SO Detail, Estimate Detail, and Invoice detail.** * Now User can also make a **mapping for Sales to invoice(header and detail or both).** Created a new ***Centre for Custom Field Mapping.*** * The Description column shows “Mapping Type” of the Custom Fields, for example; SO to Invoice Detail, Customer to SO Header, etc. * Added a new option “***Priority***” in the **Custom Field Mapping module**. * If the User has made a mapping for the Customer to the SO detail (having Priority 1) and also for Item to SO Detail (having Priority 2) then the SO line will be mapped based on the minimum priority (Customer to SO line (Priority 1)). * The “Priority” column is also included in the Custom Field Mapping Centre. *Please Note: Custom field mapping has also been implemented in the Upload Sales Order.* ### **17. Reports: Dynamic Reports Enhancements** The Report library module has been upgraded to be more efficient and user-friendly. There are several new features added to the Dynamic Reports and to the Reporting module. Following are the upgrades: * Able to save (***Save as New***) filters (dropdown, textbox values) along with the layout of the Dynamic Reports. * This shows the original Component Name under the Saved Component Name while saving. * Provided the option to “Edit” the User added Report. * Able to update the Name, Description, and Report Group. * Able to delete the New Report Component.
* Access level permissions can be defined to Save/Delete the new components by only the User who created them. * Added the ***Search dropdown in the Report library.***
* For PDF Reports search, the search dropdown will show the Reports based upon the access granted to the User in the Access Manager. * In the case of the Dynamic Reports, it will only show the Report if the User has access to the **R**eport Group in the Access Manager. # July 2021 Release ### **1. Ability to auto-create and produce manufacturing orders when creating invoices with insufficient qty** While creating an invoice for a manufacturable Item, if the Item’s qty is not available, then the item can still be added to the Invoice and will be automatically produced. The system will allow adding the Item in the Invoice even when the qty is not sufficient. * This is based on an App Config setting “**Enable auto produce when having insufficient inventory**” under the Manufacturing tab. **How does it work?** * When the App Config setting is turned OFF in the normal scenario, the system will have a usual behaviour of not allowing adding more than the available qty in the invoice. * On the other hand, **if the App Config setting is turned ON, you can add the manufacturable Items to the Invoice/Wave,** even if the On Hand qty on the Location is not sufficient. * After you turn on the app config, the **Items** with the **“Auto producible”** flag marked as **“Yes”** will get **auto-manufactured** and **produced** when the Inventory is insufficient during the following operations: 1. Create Invoice, 2. Create Wave. With the setting turned ON, the following notification message will appear while creating the Invoice with insufficient qty. **“You have marked this item as auto producible which means that this item will be auto manufactured/produced to make inventory available when creating Invoice if inventory is not sufficient. This will eliminate the need to manually create and produce manufacture orders”.** * **After the Invoice is created/saved, the MO will be generated and Auto Produced.** * The MO is auto-created and Produced along with the Sub-MO’s. **Please Note:** * The ***manufacturable Item** should be **“Auto-Producible” in nature.*** If this flag is turned Off, it will not get produced. * The added ***manufacturable Item** should have the **BOM Items associated*** with it. * The ***BOM raw material Items** should have a **sufficient*** ***inventory** available*. ### **2. Ability to post “Home Currency Only” Journal Entries** In the Journal Entry module, added a new checkbox called “**Home Currency Adjustment**” which posts only the home currency amount, keeping the foreign amount as 0. **Why do we need Home Currency Adjustment?** When a business is done in multiple currencies and hence the transfer of funds takes place between different accounts, for example, USD/CAD, etc., the fluctuation in exchange rates can cause differences in home currency equivalents for foreign amounts. This issue can be fixed by doing the Home Currency Adjustment against the Exchange rate gain and loss account. Below is an explanation with an example of how home currency adjustment works. Please see the screenshot for reference. * Sales with fluctuations in exchange rate cause the difference in USD and CAD * \*\* see the Bank Deposit with a 1.1 exchange rate and the fluctuation in the total.
Hence, in order to match the home currency with USD, home currency JE is required. In the JE module a flag for “**Home Currency Adjustment”** is introduced. * If the flag “Home Currency Adjustment” is unchecked, the “Journal Transaction View” will show the “Foreign Amount”. * While if the flag “Home Currency Adjustment” is checked, the “Journal Transaction View” will show the “Foreign Amount” column values as “0”.
***Please Note:-** The “Home Currency Adjustment” Flag can be updated for all the accounts other than the **Account Receivable** and **Accounts Payable.*** ### **3. Add product variant options easily from the item module** An “Add” button has been provided to the option value dropdowns on the Item module under the variant info tab. This has given the advantage of editing the “Product” information of the Item directly from the Item module. #### **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Item module, or open an item to edit. * Under the Variant info tab, click on a Product Value dropdown. * Here is the “***Add New Option***” feature provided to this tab. * With a click, it opens the Product module. * The new **option(s)** can be added and saved. * This will update the Item options dropdown menu. ***Please Note:** This feature applies only if the Product Variants are enabled for your instance.* ### **4. Order Linker Module: Added Alternative Item Number columns** Added Alternative Item Number1, Alternative Item Number2, and Alternative Item Number3 columns in the Order Linker Module. * The columns can be added from the nine dots option. **Order Linker:** * The Alternate Item# fields have also been added under the linked Orders tab of SO and PO subviews. **Sales Order subview:**
**Purchase Order Subview:** ### **5. Batch Update Permission Groups in Customer & Vendor Centres** The Customer and Vendor Centres have been enhanced to include **batch updating options for the “Permission Groups”.** **Please Note:** “*Permission Groups” was a feature recently added that gives the ability to limit Customers and Vendor access to certain users in the Company based upon the Permission Groups.* ***This enhancement applies only if the feature is activated for your instance.*** Know more about this feature in the following Help Article link: * [**Limit Customers/Intercompany Customers and Vendor access to certain Users in the Company based upon the Permission Groups**](https://help.xorosoft.io/index.php/knowledge-base/limit-customers-intercompany-customers-and-vendor-access-to-certain-users-in-the-company-based-upon-the-permission-groups/) ### **6. Ability to restrict viewing/accessing the Inventory/Store per user** With the new feature, you can limit a User’s access into different Inventory modules to be able to view only those Inventory/Stores they’ve been granted permission to access. Created an App Config “***Restrict Inventory By User Store-Mapping***” under Inventory Tab. #### **How does it work?** * Navigate to the App Config module. * Under the Inventory tab look for the setting “**Restrict Inventory By User Store-Mapping**“. * If this setting is enabled, only then the stores will be restricted by User-Store mapping. **The setting is currently implemented in the following inventory modules only:** 1. Inventory Movement, 2. Item Inventory Snapshot, 3. Inventory By Location, 4. Inventory Change Log, 5. Short Inventory Planner, 6. Inventory Adjustment Centre ### **7. Ability to convert Non-Inventory/Service POs directly to an IR/Bill** **When Warehousing is enabled, conversion directly from PO to IR/Bill is now made possible** for the Non-Inventory and the Service Items. Before now, this could only be achieved if the warehousing option was turned off. #### **How does it work?** * Navigate to the PO module. * Create/Open a PO and from the Options, “Convert To Item Receipt”.
* When the PO contains Non-Inventory and Service Items, a pop-up box will open to confirm the action. * This pop-up contains a toggle switch to “Convert To Bill”. * When the toggle is switched ON it will convert the PO item to Bill, and **if let OFF an IR will be created.**
* The Status of the PO will get updated after saving the Bill. ### **8. Customer Page: Added access levels per section/tab** The Customer Module will now provide access to Customer Details tabs based on the User’s Permissions defined from the Access Manager module. This will give you more control over setting access restrictions when setting user permissions for creating/updating customers. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Access manager module. * Select the “Access Recipient Type” and the “Recipient”. * Go to the “Sales Tab” > “Customer Section” > “Customer Tabs”
* The User will not be able to view the tabs un-selected and hence the information provided in them. ### **9. Manufacturing Order Enhancements: Order Linking, Split Qty on Batch MO** #### **Update 1: Manufacturing Order Detail: Added Item Default Vendor column.** Added the Item Default Vendor column on line-level in the Manufacturing Order module. **How does it work?** * Open the Manufacturing Order module. * Select Item in the MO header. * Save the Manufacturing Order. * Added a default Vendor column on the MO detail level. ***The default Vendor populating here will be the default Vendor of that Item.***
* If required, the Default Vendor can be changed/edited for the Item on the MO.
***NOTE: If changing the default vendor please save the page.*** #### **Update 2: Ability to create Purchase Order directly from a Manufacturing Order.** The Manufacturing Order module now includes a new option to create/link Purchase Order(s). **How does it work?** * Select lines from MO that ***have default Vendors*** and create PO for them from the Options.
* The confirmation pop-up box will open asking to save the MO.
* The confirmation will create the Oder.
* The PO’s will be created separately for each Vendor. * Created PO’s from the MO will be shown in the MO Centre in the column ‘Linked PO’.
* Click on the PO number, the subview will open. * Under the linked Order tab, the linked Manufacturing Order is added. * Similarly in the PO Centre, a new column “Linked MO” is added which shows the parent MO from which the PO is created. * Click on that MO number, the MO subview will open. * Under the linked order tab, the linked Purchase Order row will be there. #### **Update 3: Create MO from PO** * Open Purchase Order, add Items that have BOM Items associated with it. * Save the Purchase Order and go to the options and select “Create MO” under the “Copy/Move dropdown.
* Enter/Select the details. * MO(s) will be created.
* Similarly, Batch MO can be created from the PO module.
* Created MO(s) will be shown in the MO Number column in the Manufacturing Order Centre. * Click on the MO number, in the MO subview under the linked Order tab linked Purchase Order row will be there. * Similarly in the MO Centre, the parent PO number will be shown. * Click on that PO number PO sub-view will open in that under the “Linked Order” tab linked Manufacturing Order row can be viewed. #### **Update 4: Ability to directly link a PO/SO from the Manufacturing Order module.** * Go to the Manufacturing Order module and create an MO, and save it. * Go to options and click “Link Orders”. * The Order Linker module will open. * The linking of the Orders for the common Items can be created. * Added Two new “Order Type” options on the left side of the Order Linking Header. 1. **“Manufacturing Order(FG)”**: For linking the Final Item produced in the MO, the Manufacturing order finished Product. 2. **“Manufacturing order(RM)”**: For linking the Manufacturing order Raw Material Item(s). * Added a new Order Type on the right side: **“Purchase Order”.** * Link any Manufacturing Order(FG)/(RM) with the PO. * The linked PO will be shown in MO Centre. * The PO/MO details can also be accessed from the “Linked PO” and “MO Number” columns respectively. #### **Update 5: Ability to update the Qty to Produce and Split the Batch Manufacturing Order** * Open Batch MO from MO Centre. * MO table has a new column, “**Qty To Produce**“. This can be added from the nine dots option. * This is **editable when the MO is in “Open/Release” and in “In-Picking” status.** * Qty to Produce can not be greater than the original Qty on the MO. * When any Qty is changed in the “Qty to produce” column, new buttons and the checkbox for creating new MO(s) will appear. * Select whether Qty has to be updated for all the MO’s or only for the selected MO’s. * If the checkbox is selected and Qty to Produce is updated then a new MO will be generated under the same batch with the remaining Qty (Qty-“Qty to Produce”).
* The existing MO Qty will also be updated with the Qty = Qty Produce Qty. * On the Other hand, if the “Create New MO(s) for the remaining Qty flag is unchecked, no new MO will be created and the Qty and Qty to Produce columns will get updated with the new Qty. * A batch Release option is also introduced for Open orders from the Action button.
***Please Note:*** * If any MO is linked with PO then PO linking will also be updated, and in the same case if a new MO is created then that will also be linked with an already linked PO. #### **Update 6: Added linked MO in the Sales Order Centre.** In the Sales Order Centre, added tabs “Linked Orders” to access the Linked MO(s) & PO(s). * Click on the linked MO, the MO subview can be viewed. * MO(s)/Batch MO(s) can be created from the SO screen and SO with MO linking will be created and can be seen on the corresponding modules subview. * Qty of linked Orders will be updated the same as MO-PO linking. * New created linked MO will be shown in the SO Centre. * In the MO Centre, added the “Customer PO#” in the Linked SO column.
# June 2021 Release ### **1 Added search option for the “Alternate Item Number” in the Global Search menu and “Quick Search” in the Item Centre** The Alternate Item number can be searched by different advanced and quicker methods. * Now the Alternative Item Number can be searched into the “Global Search” menu. * The Alternative Item Number can now be “Quick Searched” in the Item Centre. * Added the feature to search into multiple columns through a single quick search. **How does it work?** **Alternative Item Number search in the “Global Search” menu.** * In the “Global Search” menu type in the “Alternate Item Number”. * The system will look for the Alternative Item Number and will show the Item related to it. **The Alternative Item Number can now be “Quick Searched” in the Item Centre.** * The “Quick Search” menu has been provided in the Item Centre to filter out the Items based on the **Alternative Item Number(s).** **Added the feature to search into multiple columns through a single quick search.** * This single Quick Search will search for the “Alternate Item# into all 3 Alternative Item Numbers columns. * The Quick Search menu for the Alternative Item Number is **available in the Item Centre, Item Inventory Snapshot, Inventory Change Log, and Inventory by Location modules**. **Item Inventory Snapshot:** **Inventory Change Log:** **Inventory by Location:** ### **2. Added Item Description and Net Available columns in the Short Inventory Notification Email** In the Short Inventory Notification email, two new columns have been added: * **Description:** The Item Description * **Net Available Qty:** Available – Allocated (this can never be a negative quantity). This is essentially the units left after Allocation/Waving. ### **3. “Show Active Only” toggle button and Page Default options in Item Inventory Snapshot and Product Centre modules.** In the Product Centre, and Item Inventory Snapshot modules added “Show Active Only” toggle button to show the Active Products/Items only. Also, the option to set the Page Defaults for showing only the active Products/Items in both these modules have been provided. **How does this work?** * Navigate to the Product Centre module. * Select the “Is Active” column for display. * When the “Show Active Only” toggle is off, all the Products (Active & Inactive) will be visible. * Turn On the “Show Active Only” toggle, now only the Active Products will be shown. * The same can be Default set from the “Page Default” configuration settings. * This feature has also been added in the “Item Inventory Snapshot” module.
### **4. Upload Item Sales Forecast: New module has been created** A prediction/target can be set for a particular Year, under a given Month for the quantity of the Item to be sold through the “**Sales Forecast” feature for Items.** A new module has been added for **batch uploading the Item Sales Forecast.** This upload works concerning the “Sales Forecast” tab of the Item module. You can either individually set the Sales Forecast for the Items from the Item module or Batch Upload from the “**Upload Item Sales Forecast”** module. **How does it work?** * Search for “***Upload Item Sales Forecast***” in the search menu. * This Will navigate you to the “***Batch Upload Item Sales Forecast***” page. * You can also download the existing data to view/edit from the “Download Master Data File” option. * Download the template and add/copy in your data using any spreadsheet software and upload the CSV file on the same page. **Below are the valid Identifier Codes to be used in Upload Item Sales Forecast.** * 1 will represent Item Number * 2 will represent Item UPC * 3 will represent Item Barcode * 4 will represent Alternate item number 1 * 5 will represent Alternate item number 2 * 6 will represent Alternate item number 3 If there are errors in the file, you can download the error file, fix the errors in the **original file,** and upload it back into Xoro. ### **5. Added the Item Sales Forecast Qty column in the Short Inventory Planner module.** **Added Forecast Qty field** in Short Inventory Planner module which shows the Forecast Qty of the Item for the selected month and Financial Year. Also, **added Sales Forecast Graph** same as the History Trend graph in the SIP module. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the **Short Inventory Planner** module. * From the nine dots option, select the “Forecast Qty” column to display. * The Sales Forecast Trend graph and the Table view can also be accessed from the “On PO” and “On SO” details. ### **6. Setting to Enable/Disable Bill Date validation** A new setting has been added in the App Config module, “**Enable Bill Date Validation**“. **If this setting is ON, the Bill Date cannot be set before the Item Receipt Date.** #### **How does it work?** * Navigate to the **App Config module.** * Under the Purchase tab find the setting “**Enable Bill Date Validation**” and turn it ON. When App Config is ON it will not allow selecting the Bill Date to an older date than the receipt date * Now turn this setting OFF. When the setting is turned OFF, any date greater than the receipt date can be selected. ### **7. Added ABA files for making payments to the Vendors using the Banks** An ABA number (also known as routing number or routing transfer number) is a sequence of nine numeric characters used by banks to identify specific financial institutions. We have introduced payments through the ABA files for making payments to the Vendors using the Banks. Added the Bank Transfer info tab in the Account module (In case of Bank Type account) and Vendor Page. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the **Account module**. * Enter the Bank Transfer Information in the “**Bank Transfer Info**” tab. * Similarly, add the Bank Transfer Information for the ABA type Bank Transfer in the “**Bank Transfer Info” tab of the Vendor details.** * Navigate to the **Bill Payment module**. * **Select the Vendor** to be paid with the ABA type Bank Transfer. * **Select the Account** to be used to make the Payment. * **Pay the selected Bill.** * You can view the “**Bank Transfer detail” and the “ABA file”,** from the Bill Payment Centre. * Select the Bill and from the Options choose “**Generate Bank Transfer Detail**“. * **Generate/download the ABA file.** ### **8. Changed the Batch Delete logic in the Customer Centre:** Changed the Batch Delete logic in the Customer Centre. Suppose if you select 5 Customers to batch delete and 1 Customer can’t be deleted because of reasons like “the Customer is involved in one or more transactions” then the rest 4 of the Customers will be deleted. Previously, when we would batch delete 5 Customers and 1 Customer couldn’t be deleted, no Customer would get deleted from the selected Customers. ### **9. Sales Order Centre: Added Carrier and Ship Service columns.** Added **Carrier, and Ship Service** Columns in the **Sales Order Centre at the Detail Level.** * These fields can also be searched from the “Advanced Filter” option. * They are also located under the Shipping Tab of a Sales Order. ### **10. Added “Modified By” and “Modified Date” columns in the SO Centre** Added **Modified By” and “Modified Date-Time”** Columns in the **Sales Order Centre.** * **Modified By:** Shows the Name of the User who has recently made changes to the Order. * **Modified Date:** Shows the Date along with the Time of modification. These fields can also be searched from the “Advanced Filter” option. ### **11.Added Support of Ship to address Field and Dropdown in Credit Memo, Invoice Credit Memo, RMA** In the Credit Memo, while Selecting a Customer, the Customer’s Default Address will be filled in Ship to Address fields. The address can be changed by selecting from the Ship to Address dropdown in the Credit Memo. Similarly, in the Invoice Credit Memo and RMA while Selecting an Invoice, by default it will fill the Ship to Address field from the data saved in the Invoice. The address can be changed by selecting from the Ship to Address dropdown. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the create **Credit Memo** module. * Fill in the Customer, and the Default Ship to Address of the Customer will be picked up automatically by the system. * **Customer’s Default Ship to Address:** * **The Credit Memo picks up the Customer’s default Ship to Address:** * **The address can be changed by selecting from the Ship to Address dropdown in the Credit Memo.** **For Invoice Credit Memo and RMA:** * Navigate to the Invoice Credit Memo module. * Fill in the Invoice Details. * The ICM will automatically fill in the Ship to Address that is specified on the Invoice. * **Ship to Address on the Invoice:** * **The ICM picks up the Address:** * **This address can also be changed by selecting from the Ship to Address dropdown in the Invoice Credit Memo.** ### **12. Ability to limit Customers/Intercompany Customers and Vendor access to certain Users in the Company based upon the Permission Groups** A new property has been added in Xoro to restrict the access of Customers/Vendors to the Users. The following new features have been introduced for the purpose: 1. The new module “**Permission Group**” has been added. 2. Added **Permission Group dropdown in Customer and Vendor module** under the “Other info tab”. 3. Added **new tab in user module i.e. Advanced Permissions.** **How does this work?** * Navigate to the Permission Group Module. * Give a name and add a “Permission Group” by saving it. * Look for all the “Permission Groups” created from the “Permission Group Centre”. * Navigate to the Customer/Vendor and open the “**Other Info” tab.** * From the “Permission Group” dropdown select the Permission Group that has to be assigned to the Customer/Vendor. * Hit “Update”. You can assign a “Permission Group” to multiple Customers/Vendors. * Now, navigate to the User Centre. * Select-open a User. * Shift to the “Advanced Permission” tab. * Under that tab, there is an option “Enable Advanced Permissions”.
When this is checked, it will show 2 dropdowns **a.** **Restriction Type Dropdown**: There are 2 options in this dropdown: 1. **Restrict These**, and 2. **Allow Only these** * **Selecting “Restrict these”**, the permission group mentioned in the permission group dropdown will not show in the Customer and Vendor module. * For Example; there is a permission group named “Permission Group Test” and a few Customers and Vendors are added to this Permission group then those Customers/Vendors will not be shown in the Sales and Purchase modules and their respective Centres. * On the other hand, **by selecting the “Allow Only these”** option, only the Customers/Vendors added to the Permission Group can be accessed by the User. **b. Permission Group Dropdown:** This is a multi-select dropdown you can select multiple Permission Groups. ### **13. Ability to limit the Costing Fields access on the PO** Added a feature to show/hide the Costing field in Item Center, Subform, Purchase Order, Item Receipt, Bill, and their respective Centres. The following 2 access levels are added under Purchase in the Access Manager module to facilitate this functionality. * **Inventory Costing** * **Non-Inventory/Service Costing** #### **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Access Manager module. * Select a “Recipient Type” and the “Recipient” * **Check both the “Inventory Costing” and “Non-Inventory/Service Costing”** levels under the Purchase module. * The Inbound module (PO/IR/Bill) will function normally showing both Inventory & Non-Inventory/Service Costings. * When Inventory costing is Unchecked & Non Inventory costing is Checked, it will not show the Cost for Inventory Items and will not show the total amount on PO/IR/BILL.
* When Inventory costing is Checked & Non-Inventory costing is Unchecked, it will not show the cost for NON-inventory Items and will not show the total amount on PO/IR/BILL.
* When both Inventory costing & Non- Inventory costing are Unchecked, it will not show the cost for both Inventory and Non Inventory Items, and it will also not show the total amount on PO/IR/BILL.
If the access is revoked for any of the Inventory types, the rate couldn’t also be seen in the subview form. ### **14. Introducing “Multi-factor” authentication** Xoro now supports multi-factor authentication (MFA) in the login process. Multi-factor authentication (MFA) is used to ensure that digital users are who they say they are by requiring that they provide at least two pieces of evidence to prove their identity. Each piece of evidence must come from a different category: something they know, something they have or something they are. If one of the factors has been compromised by a hacker or unauthorized user, the chances of another factor also being compromised are low, so requiring multiple authentication factors provides a higher level of assurance about the user’s identity. **Please note: The user should have a valid phone number and Email Id in order to use MFA.** **How does it work?** * Go to the Login page. * The user can select the method desired for the OTP (One time password). * If email and phone both are set up then it will show all the options. * If the phone number doesn’t exist then it will show the option of email.
* Select the option to sign in to the account. * The following page will be displayed to enter the security key. * Enter the Security Code sent to your email id/phone number. * When the option “Don’t require OTP on this browser” is checked, the system will ask to enter the Device Name. * Enter the Device Name and the details like Device name, IP Address will be saved under the “**My Trusted Devices**” module. * Saving the Device will remove the need to generate OTP next time when the same user logs in from the saved Device. **Please note:** * **The OTP expires in 45 seconds.** * **If the information is deleted from “User Trusted Devices”, the browser will ask for the OTP again while logging in.** * **If the User’s Email or Phone number is updated, the authorization Code/OTP will be received on the updated email/phone number.** * **Phone number is mandatory in user information and User Upload if using the 2 Factor Authentication process.** ### **15. Ability to “Set Default Wave Template for a Customer”** Added option to assign a **Default Wave Template** to a **Customer.** The Default Wave Template can be added from the Customer module under the **Other Info tab**. While creating an SO, if the Customer selected has a Default Wave Template linked to it, and the particular Store is selected, the Inventory will be Allocated according to the linked Wave Template when a Wave is created. **Please Note: This feature is enabled if the App Config setting “Wave Template Selection Type” under the Warehouse tab is set to “Default Template”.** **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Customer module/Customer Centre. *Example: Customer name: Xoro\_Test\_Org ABC.* * Open the “Other Info” tab, there is a new dropdown added, “Default Wave Template”. * Choose the Wave Template to Allocate to the Customer. * The new feature in the Customer module allows you to **select, edit and create/add a new Wave Template.** * Update the Customer information. **Please Note: In the Wave-Template a Location & Seq field has been added. In this field add the Sequence of Locations from which is to be used to Allocate the Inventory.** * Now, navigate to the Sales Order module and create an Order with the Customer *Xoro\_Test\_Org ABC* * Select the Store used in the Wave Template assigned to the Customer. * Add Item, Save and Release the Order. * *Example; Item# Testing\@2611-Blue-L, Qty; 50.* * *The Wave Template Location & Sequence:* * Create Wave, and check the Inventory by location module for the selected Store and Item. * The Allocation of the Item is according to the Pick Sequence defined in the Wave Template. # May 2021 Release ### **1. Sales Order Centre: Option to Cancel the Order(s)** Added option to “Cancel” the Order(s) under the “Option dropdown” in Sales Order Centre. This could be used to Cancel single or multiple Orders together. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Sales Order Centre. * Select multiple “Unallocated” Orders. * From the Options dropdown, hit on “Cancel”. * Confirm the action. * Mention the “**Reason for Cancellation**“, hit ok and the Order(s) will be canceled. The Orders can not be canceled in the following cases: * If they are Allocated * If the Orders are Shipped * A Credit/Deposit is linked to them.
### **2. Invoice Centre: Added Currency Code/Currency Name Columns to the Invoice Detail** In the Invoice Centre, the **columns to view the Currency Codes/Currency Names i**n the Invoice detail level have been added. * The Invoices can be filtered with particular “Currency Codes” from the Advanced Search ### **3. Customer Deposit module: Added option to Refund Balance** The Refund of the Customer Deposit can now also be processed from the Customer Deposit module. Added “**Refund Balance”** under the **“Option”** dropdown in the **“Customer Deposit”** module. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the **Customer Deposit Centre**, and **open a Customer Deposit.** * Under the “Options” dropdown there is an option “**Refund Balance**“, click on it. * A pop-up box will open to **enter all the details** required to process the refund. * After the details are added, click on “**Refund Deposit**“. * The Deposit will be refunded. ### **4. Purchase Order: Added “Notes” on the line level** Added “**Notes” column at line level in the Purchase Order** module. * Navigate to the Purchase Order module, on the line level a new column for adding “Notes” is created. * You can add the column from the “nine dots” option. * Click on the pencil icon and add the Notes. * Enter the Notes. * These Notes will be **carried forward to the Item Receipt** **and the Bill of the same PO.** * See the screenshots below for your reference. ### **5. User Store mapping: User cannot create a Sales Order or perform Wave operations like Lock/Unlock Wave, Pick Wave if not mapped to the Store** If a User is not mapped to a Store, then all the Sales Order functions like creating SO or modifying an SO will not be allowed with the Un-mapped Store on the SO. Only if the access is granted to the User by the User Store mapping, the User shall be able to perform the SO process. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the User-Store Mapping module. * Select the User and the Store. * Grant the access. * The User will be able to carry forward all the Sales operations with the Mapped Store. On the other hand, if the **Un-Mapped Ship Store is selected for a Sales Order**, the User will **not be able to do the following:** * Create a Sales Order, * Create Wave, * Pick/Pack the Wave, * Ship an Order. * Void a Wave/SO * Modify an existing Order If an attempt is made to process an Order with the Un-Mapped Ship Store, the User will be shown a message that the user doesn’t have access to the Ship Store. Refer to the screenshots below as an example: ### **6. Alert Note for “Adding Multiples of Sell Package Qty” of an Item while creating an Estimate/SO/Sales Receipt/Invoice** There is a sell package quantity in every Item that says the Item should be preferably sold in the mentioned “Package Qty”. While adding items on the Estimate/Sales Order/Invoice/Sales Receipt if the quantity entered is not the multiple of the “Sell Package Quantity” of that item, the system will just show the warning message. Refer to the example below to illustrate this feature. * The Item: **TEST\_ITEM\_CMs has the “Sell Package Qty” set as 5.** * Tried adding **Qty 6 for this Item, which is not a multiple of 5.** * The system will pop up an Alert Note on the screen. **Please Note: This will not restrict adding the Item in a different Qty.** The same will be the case while creating an Estimate/Invoice and Sales Receipt. ### **7. Wave Centre: Option to “Merge the Waves”** In the Wave Centre, an enhancement has been made by providing the option to “Merge Waves”. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Wave Centre. * Select multiple Waves with the same Store. * Click on the “Options” tab above and hit “Merge”. * Select the “Primary Wave” and hit “Merge”. all secondary wave is going to be deleted. * The Waves will be Merged into one single Wave.
* After Merging the Waves, the Line Count and the Unit count will sum up and show the Primary Wave selected. * Also, the Invoice is created separately for each Wave when Shipped together after merge. **Please Note: In the following cases the Waves cannot be merged:** * Users cannot merge Shipped, Void, Closed, and Produced Wave. * The Waves cannot be merged if the lock status of all waves selected does not match. ### **8. Invoice Email Template enhancements: Added Customer PO#** Following changes/enhancements have been made to the Invoice Email Template: * Added Customer PO in the Invoice email template placeholder. * The total amount fields format has been modified. E.g if the total is 1000. Then the email field will display $1,000.00. ### **9. Ability to create an RMA without the Invoice number** Added a new functionality in the Create RMA module, now the User can **create a Direct RMA.** In Direct RMA- An invoice number is not required. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Create RMA module. * A new field is created, “RMA Type”. * From the dropdown select “Direct RMA”. * When a Direct RMA Type is selected, the User can add any Customer & Item and RMA can be created. * The search invoice button will be disabled in the case of Direct RMA. * Sales Rep can be changed in case of Direct RMA. * **Add Items** from the Detail level will be used for adding Items. * Discount and shipping tabs will be hidden in case of direct RMA. ### 10**. Sales Order Centre: Added option to filter data by “Allocation Status”** In SO Centre added the Allocation Status dropdown. The SO’s can be quickly searched based on the “Allocation Status”. * Now User can filter the data based on Wave Allocation Status such as Un-Allocated/Partially Allocated/In-Picking/Shipped etc. * Also added in Page Defaults Setting. ### **11. Added “Ship To” placeholders in the Sales Order and Invoice Email templates** Email Templates added a placeholder for the “Ship To” address details in the Sales Order and Invoice. The following details are added: * SalesRepFullName * ShipToState * ShipToAddr * ShipToAddr2 * ShipToCity * ShipToState * ShipToCountry * ShipToZpCode * ShipToFirstName * ShipToLastName * ShipToName * ShipToCompanyName * CustomerFirstName * CustomerLastName Check out the following screenshots for more details. **Sales Order email template:**
**Invoice email template:**
#### ### **12. Added Custom Fields in the Chart of Accounts module** In the Chart of Account module, the Custom Fields are added. * Custom Fields for the “Accounts” can be created from the “Custom Field Definition” module. * Columns for the “Custom Fields” are added in the “Batch Upload Accounts” template. ### **13. “Address Instructions”: “Batch upload Address Instructions”- New module added** New Upload for batch uploading the Address Instructions is created in Xoro. Use this module, in case you need to upload multiple “Ship To” or “Bill To” Address Instructions to Xoro. **How does it work?** * Download the latest CSV template from the “**Batch** **Upload Address Instructions**” module. * Fill in the Address Instructions plus other details related to the Address like “Entity Name” (Customer Name), Address Type, etc. into the CSV template. * Upload the updated CSV template into Xoro. ### **14. Increased the number of “Address Instruction Fields” in the “Address Instruction module and the Upload** Address Instruction Fields are increased to 12, earlier only 7 was supported. **The “Batch Upload Address Instructions” template:** **The “Address Instructions” module:** **The “Address Instruction Centre”:** ### **15. Export “Ship-To Address Instructions” while exporting Wave detail** While ***Exporting Wave Detail*** from the ***Data Export Centre***, the “***Ship To Instructions***” fields will also be exported. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Data Export Centre. * Search by “Wave Detail”. * From the “Options” select the method to export the data. * The exported file will contain the “Ship To Instruction” columns. #### ### **16. Sales Order Allocation based on “Sell Package Qty”** While creating a Sales Order, the system will Allocate (Wave) Orders in the multiple of Sell Package Quantity available on the Locations. Two new settings are created in Xoro for this functionality to work: * App Config Setting: “**Enable sell package allocation”** under the Warehouse tab of the App Config module.
* **Advanced Configuration setting “Disable Sell Package Allocation”** of the Customer module. **How does it work?** * If the App Config is Off, there will be no change in the Allocation process. * If both the App Config and the Customer settings are “ON”, there will be no change in the Allocation process. * If the **App Config is ON and the Customer setting is OFF and also a Sell Package Qty for the Item is set**, the system will Allocate (Wave) Orders in the multiple of Sell Package Quantity available on the Locations. The sequence of the Allocation will depend upon the “Wave Template” selected. Let’s understand the mechanism in detail: * The Item has the “Sell Package Qty” set as 4. **The Appconfig is ON and the Customer setting is OFF** **Case1:** Wave Template defined for the **Store- Stop1:** * **Item sell package Qty=4** * **Qty to Allocated=20** * The system will automatically Pick the Inventory **first from the Active location of the Store.** * After the Active location is exhausted the Inventory will be **Picked from the Reserved locations.** See the Table below to have a better understanding of this: | **Location Display** | **Class** | **Pick Seq** | **Qty** | **Sell Package Allocation** | **Allocation Sequence** | | -------------------- | --------- | ------------ | ------- | --------------------------- | ----------------------- | | A | Active | 1 | 1 | 1 | 3 | | B | Active | 2 | 3 | 3 | 4 | | C | Active | 3 | 4 | 4 | 1 | | D | Active | - | 3 | 0 | - | | E | Active | - | 4 | 4 | 2 | | A-R | Reserve | 1 | 3 | 0 | - | | B-R | Reserve | 2 | 4 | 4 | 5 | | C-R | Reserve | 3 | 3 | 0 | - | | D-R | Reserve | - | 4 | 4 | 6 | | E-R | Reserve | - | 3 | 0 | - | **Case2:** Wave Template selected: * **Item sell package Qty=4** * **Qty to Allocated=20** | **Location Display** | **Class** | **Pick Seq** | **Qty** | **Sell Package Allocation** | **Allocation Sequence** | | -------------------- | --------- | ------------ | ------- | --------------------------- | ----------------------- | | A | Active | 1 | 1 | 0 | - | | B | Active | 2 | 3 | 0 | - | | C | Active | 3 | 4 | 4 | 5 | | D | Active | - | 3 | 0 | - | | E | Active | - | 4 | 4 | - | | A-R | Reserve | 1 | 3 | 3 | 3 | | B-R | Reserve | 2 | 4 | 4 | 1 | | C-R | Reserve | 3 | 3 | 1 | 4 | | D-R | Reserve | - | 4 | 4 | 2 | | E-R | Reserve | - | 3 | 0 | - | * Segregation of location-wise Qty Allocated can be seen in the “Pick Wave Document”. ### **17. Added Pick Location and Pick Sequence in the Pick Wave Module** In the “Pick Wave” module, on the line level added two new columns: * Pick Location, and * Pick Sequence The “Pick Seq” column defines the priority of location for Allocating the Qty. ### **18. Data Export Centre: Export the “Sales Summary data”** From the Data Export Centre, now you can **export the “Sales Summary Data”.** **How does it work?** * Navigate to the “**Data Export Centre**” module. * Search by “Sales Summary Data”. * This summarizes Sales by Customer, Year & Month. * The fields like; **Customer Name, Currency Code, Year, and Months can be Exported**. ### **19. Export Data from the Data Export Centre with the required settings** Under Options on Data Export Center, a menu option is added to “Export Settings”. Following are the available settings: * Include Headers (If false, File will not be having column headers, such as CustomerName, MainEmail, etc) * Export File Format (CSC, TXT) * Delimiter (Column separator Comma(,) or Tab) **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Data Export Centre and from the Options select the settings required to export. **The Include Header setting** * If the setting is ON: **The file will be exported with the “Header”.** * If the setting is OFF: **The file will be exported without the “Header”.** **File extension Type** * CSV Format: * TXT Format: **The Delimiter (Column separator)** * Separate by “Commas” ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2021/05/img_60a669f1d930c.png) * Separate by “Tab”/”Space” We can also specify these settings on Job level, which will override generic Export Settings.
# April 2021 Release ### **1. Bug Fixed: Shipping Cost gets applied on one Invoice in case of multiple Waves of one SO** One SO, multiple Waves, Shipping Cost applied on only one Invoice after the SO is Shipped. **How does it work?** If more than one Wave is created on a single Sales Order and having a Shipping amount linked to it, the Shipping amount will be applied only on one Invoice after the SO is Quick Shipped rather than being applied to all the Invoices generated. Previously, the Shipping amount was being applied to all the Invoices created on a SO. Now, the Shipping Cost will be applied to only the first Wave created. For example, we have an SO in which we Waved the Items separately, creating 4 Waves. The SO has a Shipping amount of 500$ applied to it. After the SO is Shipped, the Shipping amount will be applied only to the first Invoice Created. ### **2. ASN Import Template: Added the Column “Credit Memo#”** Added a new column, “***Credit Memo Number***” to the *ASN Import Template*. This is required in case to receive ASN generated from an RMA, or Credit Memo or an Invoice Credit Memo. When an ASN is received from an RMA or an Invoice Credit Memo, the ASN Receipts information would need to have the “Credit Memo number” field. Hence the “Batch Upload ASN Receipts” template has a new column, the “Credit Memo Number”. ### **3. Batch Upload Inventory Enhancement: Added Item Identifier Code** Added Item Identifier Code, and the dropdown for Codes in the Upload Inventory module. **Item Identifier Code column specifies, how the Item Number field value of the file will be used to match the Item in the system.How does it work?** * Navigate to the “Batch Upload Inventory” module. * Scroll down and find Step# 6: “**Select Item Identifier Code”.** * Click on the drop-down in front. * Select what information you want to upload regarding the Item: Item Number, Item UPC, Item BarCode, Alternate Item number, etc. **Below are the valid Identified Codes to be used in Upload Inventory.** * 0 will represent Not Applicable * 1 will represent Item Number * 2 will represent Item UPC * 3 will represent Item Barcode * 4 will represent Alternate item number 1 * 5 will represent Alternate item number 2 * 6 will represent Alternate item number 3 * If the Code value is empty in the Upload file, it will take the dropdown value else the File value will get uploaded. * If both the Upload file and the dropdown values are not specified, the system will by default pick up “Item Number”. * The system will give an error in upload if the “Item Number” column entry doesn’t match the valid “Item Identifier Code” value. * Also if any other value other than 1-6 is provided in the upload file, an error will be received while uploading the Inventory. ***Please Note: If the App Config “Use Item UPC code to upload inventory” is turned ON, the system will always pick up the “Item UPC” under the “Item Number” column.*** ### **4. Activity Tracking Module Enhancement: Log on Viewing the Items** On accessing/viewing saved Item a log entry will be made in the Activity Tracking module. The log can also be seen when batch deleting and batch updating the Item. ### **5. Activity Tracking Module Enhancement: Tracking the Activity of the Purchase module** Now you can Track the activities like Creating, Viewing, Ūpdating, or Deleting/Voiding under the Purchase Order module. Implemented Activity Tracking in the Inbound module (Vendor, PO, Item Receipt, Bill, Vendor Credit, Vendor Prepayment, Item Vendor Mapping). The search filter can be applied to view only the particular type of transactions. Whenever the transactions under the Inbound module, for example, PO/IR/Bill/Vendor, etc will be viewed, the system will record a log of it. The Activity Tracking log will also be maintained for the “Batch Void” and the “Batch Update” options for the PO. You can view any changes/updates made in the Bill, IR, or Vendor, etc. #### **6. ASN Centre Enhancement: Added “Total Qty” column** A new column is added in the ***ASN Centre, the “Total Qty”.*** This shows the total quantity that is present on the ASN. Goto the Asn Centre -> Search by (ASN) -> check the “Total Qty” column. You can add the “Total Qty” column from the “nine dots” option. #### **7. Bill Of Material(SubView): Added Description Column under Inventory Planning** The existing BOM in the system has a new column added to them under the “Inventory Planning” tab. This is the “Description” column that can be added from the nine dots option under the Inventory Planning tab in the SubView from of the BOM. To access it, navigate to the Bill Of Material Centre, and double click on any BOM. The Subview form has the “Description” column under the Inventory Planning Tab. ### **8. Invoice Centre: Added the “Reporting” section** In the Invoice Centre, few changes are made for viewing the Reporting details of an Invoice. Now the Reporting option is available in the Invoice Centre on right-clicking an Invoice. Shifted “Show Payments/Deposits/Credits” details to be viewed under this Reporting option. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Invoice Centre. * Right-click on any Invoice. * Find the “Reporting” option. * Click on the “Reporting” and the dropdown will be pulled. In the Reporting dropdown, added options to view “Invoice Credit Memo”, “RMA”, “Packing Slip”, and “Sales Order” under the Reporting dropdown. Also, shifted “Payments”, Deposits, and Credits details to be viewed under this Reporting option. ### **9. Added Alternative Item# and Barcode to the Estimate module** In the Estimate module, new fields are added- ***Alternative Item Number (1,2,3) and the Barcode.*** * These fields are added under the Line level of the Estimate. * You can also add and view them in the Estimate Centre. These fields will get updated on creating/adding/updating/deleting them in the item Centre. ### **10. Bug Fixed: Moving Kits on the Sales Order** The Item Kits from a Sales Order can be moved to a different SO from the “Move/Split Order” functionality. This is applicable for both the “Move Lines” and “Move Lines to SO” options. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Create Sales Order module. * After adding the SO header details, add kit(s) into the Sales Order. * Select the Kit and click on “Move Lines”. * It will move the kit with its entire components to a new SO.
* Now select the kit and click on “Move Lines To So”. * It will move the kit components to a specific Sales Order.
### **11. Ability to view BOM detail in the Item module** The BOM of a manufacturable Item can now be viewed under the Item details. If the Bill of Material is defined for a manufacturable Item, it is possible to directly access the BOM details from the Item details. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Item Centre and open a manufacturable Item. * In the Item Subview, under the Primary Tab, check the “Is manufacturing Item” detail. * Click on the “Beaker” Icon. * A popup will open showing the Bill of Material detail of the Item. * If the BOM Items are not defined, the following notification will be displayed on clicking on the “beaker” icon. ### **12. Auto pull up the default Deposit/Payable Accounts in the financial transactions under Sales and Purchase modules** The Deposit and Payable Account set up for the Customer and Vendor will be automatically picked up by the system under their respective fields while making any kind of transaction like paying an Invoice/Bill or recording a transaction in the system. **How does it work?** **For the Outbound transactions:** If the Default Deposit Account for the Customer is set up, it will auto-populate in its field. * Navigate to the Customer Deposit module, select the Customer and you will see that the default Deposit Account is auto-populated. * Navigate to the Invoice Payment module and select Customer, the default Deposit Account will be filled on its own. **For the Inbound transactions:** If the Default Payable Account for the Vendor is set up, it will auto-populate in its field. * Navigate to the Bill module, select the Vendor and you will find that the default Payable Account is populated (in Select Account dropdown) on the header level. * Also, the Default Expense Account is populated in the Account dropdown (Bill Detail’s Expense tab). * Navigate to Outgoing Payment (At Line Level). * Change Entity Dropdown and see that the default Expense Account is populated for the entity. ### **13. Third-Party Field Mapping: Removed the one-to-one validation** In the Third-Party Field mapping module, previously the system would not allow mapping multiple External values with the same Xoro Value. This one-to-one validation from the Third part field mapping has been removed. This will allow creating the mapping of multiple external fields with one Xoro value. ### 14. The Logged in Sales Rep/Sales management gets auto-filled in the Sales Order/Sales Receipt details While creating a Sales Order or a Sales Receipt, if the Logged-in User’s Role is a Sales Rep or a Sales management, the system will automatically fill in the field of the Sales Rep with the logged-in user. An App Config is made under the outbound module, which will ensure the auto-fill of the Sales Rep column in the Sales Order/ Sales Receipt. How does it work? * Navigate to the App Config module. * Under the “Sales” Tab find the Setting *“Use logged in user as Sales Rep”.* If this is enabled the system will check the currently logged-in users role, and if it is “Sales Rep/Sales Management” and default Sales Rep is not defined for the Customer, then it will be automatically selected as Sales Rep for the Sales Order & Sales Receipt header details. * Turning the above setting “ON” and if the default Sales Rep is not defined for the Customer, the Sales Rep field will auto pick the logged in Sales Rep/Sales Management while creating a Sales Order/Sales Receipt. * If the default Sales Rep is defined for the Customer, it would be shown as the Sales Rep for the Order to be created.
### **15. Inventory falls Short while creating a Wave? “Auto-Adjust the Inventory” with a Config setting** An enhancement has been added to the Sales module wherein the Inventory will get adjusted automatically if it short while creating a Wave in a Sales Order. This feature works on: * Creating a Wave(Auto) for “Full Order(s) Only”/”Full Qty Line(s) Only” options. * Uploading a Shipment. * For a Shopify Order. An App Config Setting has been created for the functionality. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the App Config Setting module. * Under the Sales tab, find the setting, “Auto Inventory Adjustment”. * Turn ON the setting. * Navigate to the Create Sales Order module, fill in the details and enter an Item that is not available in the location selected in the Order. * Save and Release the Order. * You can check the availability of the Inventory from the “item Inventory Snapshot” module. * Create the Wave through the “Full Order(s) only” option. * A Pop-up will open, with an “Auto Inventory Adjustment” flag. * Confirm and create Wave.
* Now again navigate to the “Item Inventory Snapshot” module and check the availability of the Item. * The Available Qty will change by the qty added on the Sales Order. You can also check the Inventory change log to have a clear view of the change in the Inventory status. The same will be the case while creating a Wave through the “Full Order Qty Line(s) option. *Note: If the default location is set for the Item, the inventory is going to adjust on that particular location.* Similarly, when the Orders are dropped from Shopify to Xoro, the Auto Inventory Adjustment will happen in the same manner. Also, note the below-mentioned cases when the manufacturable/producible Item is used while creating an Order. * If Item is Producible/Manufacturable and the App Config setting “AUTO QUICK PRODUCE” is “ON” and the setting “Auto Inventory Adjustment” is checked, then it is going to adjust the Inventory. *Note:- This will not Produce the Item.* * If Item is Producible/Manufacturable and the App Config setting “AUTO QUICK PRODUCE” is “ON” and the setting “Auto Inventory Adjustment” is not checked then this is not going to Adjust the Inventory *Note:- This will Produce the Item.* ### **16. Enabled Shipping details for the Pick Up Shipping method** Now, even if the Shipping method for a Sales Order is selected as “Pick Up” you can still enter the Shipping Details. An App Config setting under the Sales Tab is added for this functionality.
Turn On the setting and you can add in the Shipping details, even if the shipping method selected is “Pickup”. When this config is ON, the Shipping fields such as Carrier, Ship Service, Shipping Terms, FOB will be enabled when the Ship method is PICK-UP.
When the App Config setting is OFF, the option to add the Shipping details on the Pick-Up as the Shipping Method will not be allowed.
### **17. Vendor Price List Value under the Item-Vendor mapping: Increased the limit for the number of decimal digits** Made Vendor Price List value up to 6 decimal digits. Previously it was possible to add only 3 digits after the decimal point. * Navigate to the Item-Vendor Mapping module. * In the Price list column, now you can add a value with a maximum of 6 digits after the decimal point * If a value of more than 6 digits is attempted to add after the decimal, the system will prompt an error message. ### **18. Wave: Added the Description Column** In the Wave subform, a new column, “Item Description” is added. * Navigate to the Wave Centre and double-click on a Wave to open and see the wave subform. * In the Item line, you can view the “Item Description” column. * This column can be added from the nine dots option in the Wave. #### ### **19. Title search box for Product and Item Center** Added the “Title” search box in the Product Centre and the Item Centre. The Item/Product can be “Quick searched” on the basis of their Title. ### **20. Chart of Account: Added “Is Inter-Company?” flag** In the Chart of Account module, a new flag; “***Is Inter-Company”*** is introduced. This can be searched from the Advance Filter option. It will take “Y” and “N” values for the search. The value under the “Is Inter-Company” can be batch updated. ### **21. Create Sales Receipt: Customer Tax Code & Sales Rep fields moved to the Sales tab** The two fields: ***Customer Tax Code & Sales Rep*** are moved to the Sales tab from the “Others” tab. Previously, it was under the “Others” tab. ### **22. Credit Memo: Added functionality to set the default “Refund Account”** When initiating Refunds from the Credit Memo Centre, now you can pre-set a default for the “Customer Refund Account” that will be automatically displayed under the “Refund Account” fields in the Customer Refund view-form. An App Config setting has been created for the same: “**Customer Refund Account”.** If any value is set in this, then it will be set as the Customer Refund Account. **How does it work?** * Goto the App Config module. * Under the “Accounting” section, find the setting: “**Customer Refund Account”.** * Choose an account to be used for paying the Refund. * Now, navigate to the Credit Memo Centre. * Right-click on a Credit Memo, and hit “Refund Balance”. * The Customer Refund form will open up. * The “Refund Account” will be auto-selected, as defined in the setting. If nothing is selected in the App Config setting, then it will work with the old functionality and any account will be picked up randomly. ### **23. Added the Title column in TPO/TSO detail level** In the create Transfer Sales Order and create Transfer Purchase Order modules added the “Title” column in their details. The column can be added from the nine dots option. ### **24. Upload Pricing Rules: New module added** A new module is introduced in Xoro to Batch upload the Pricing Rules. This upload works in relation to the already existing module “Pricing Rule”. You can either individually create the Pricing Rules from the “Pricing Rule” module or Batch Upload the Rules from the “Upload Pricing Rule” module. **How does it work?** * Search for “***Upload Pricing Rule***” in the search menu. * This Will navigate you to the “***Batch Upload Pricing Rule***” page. * You can also download the existing data to view/edit from the “Download Master Data File” option. * The file upload “Defaults” can also be set. * Download the template and add/copy in your data using any spreadsheet software and upload the CSV file on the same page. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2021/04/img_606dfb71087b7.png)If there are errors in the file, you can download the error file, fix the errors in the **original file,** and upload it back into Xoro. ### **25. Short Inventory Planner Enhancement: Quick access for BOM of the Manufacturable Item** In the Short inventory Planner module, the Bill of Materials for the Manufacturable Items can be viewed. If the Manufacturable Item has a BOM associated with it, it can be viewed under the SIP module. Clicking on the Beaker Icon with the Manufacturable Item will open a pop-up window displaying its BOM details. If the BOM is not defined, clicking on the Beaker icon will give an error. ### **26. Sales Order/Purchase Order: Enhancement made in the option to add Items from the previous Orders.** 1. Added images to the “Order History” popup. 2. Ability to view the “***Restriction Icon”*** if applied to the Item. 3. Added feature to view “***Invoice lines***” and “***IR/Bill lines***” for the SO and PO respectively under the “Order History” screen. * While creating Sales Order and Purchase Order, in the detail section, there is an option to add SKUs from the previous Orders. After adding the “Customer” the system can fetch in the details of the last Ordered Items by the Customer. * After adding the “Vendor” the system can fetch in the details of the last Ordered Items from the Vendor. * Added Item Images to the “Order History” popup. The “Item Image” column is added under the “Order History” screen. If images are added to the Items, they will be displayed under this column. * Ability to view the “Restriction Icon” if applied to the Item. * Added feature to view and add “***Invoice lines***” and “***IR/Bill lines***” for the SO and PO respectively under the “Order History” screen. * A toggle button is added to switch between Sales Order lines and Invoice lines * A toggle button is added to switch between Purchase Order lines and IR/Bill lines * Also added “Last Order Date” column under the “Order History” screen for both Sales and Purchase modules. ### **27. Ability to temporarily allow to add “Expense Accounts in Income Account and vice versa” in the Item module** ***Please note: Log a Ticket if you want to use this functionality.*** **How does it work?** * While creating/updating an Item in Xoro, the Income account for a Non-Inventory Item can be added to an Expense Account. Also, an Expense Account can be added to an Income Account. * Similarly, for an Inventory Item, both Income and Expense Accounts can be added under the “Income Account” field. * You can also add COGS and Sales Account under both Income and Expense Accounts. ### **28. Short Inventory Planner: Get notified through an Email if the quantity of an Item falls below the Re-Order point/Short Qty.** Whenever an Item goes below its Re-Order point, it will get added to the email notification from the Short Inventory Planner. New App Config settings are added for this functionality to work. **How does it work?** In the Short Inventory Planner module if the Qty of an Item reaches below the Re-Order point qty and if the config setting is ON, then it will send an email notification and also it will be shown in the Short Inventory Planner with the Re-Order QTY button. 4 new App Config settings are added under the Inventory tab. * Navigate to the App Config module, under the Inventory tab, find these three settings: 1. **Enable short Inventory email notifications**: If this setting is enabled only then the email will be sent. This setting works in coordination with the below 2 settings. 2. **Short Inventory email notifications time**: The short inventory emails will be sent to the emails specified in “Short inventory email notification to following emails” at this time daily (Format – HH:MM). 3. **Short Inventory email notification to following emails**: Enter here the emails to send Short Inventory Notification – You can add comma separated emails 4. **Short inventory notification level:** The User can set the Inventory level in this config based on which the Short Inventory notification emails will be sent. For Example, if “Re-Order & Short Qty” is selected then all the items which are short by quantity or below the re-order point will be sent in the notification email. Please note, only those Items will be added to the email which are Short By the ReOrder Point. With the App Config OFF, it will not send an email notification. Let us understand in detail the functioning of these new settings. * Turn On the App Config setting and fill in the details for time and email ids. * Also, select the Short Inventory notification level: Re-Order & Short/ Re-Order Point. * The Item should have a Re-Order point and Re-Order Qty set. * Check the Availability of the Item: * Create and Release the SO with the Item and with the Qty so that the “Available Qty” of the Item falls below its Re-Order point and can be seen in the “Short Inventory Planner” module. * According to the App Config settings created, you will get notified about the “ReOrder Qty/ Short Qty”. ### **29. Un-Reconcile the Transactions.** Now you can Un-Reconcile the Transactions from all the modules in Xoro. Previously it was possible only to un-reconcile the transactions from the Account Register. For this functionality, the option to “Un-Reconcile” the transactions has been provided in the following modules: 1. Bank Deposit, 2. Fund Transfer, 3. Journal Entry, 4. Outgoing Payment, 5. Customer Deposit, 6. Invoice Payment, 7. Refund Subform, 8. Sale Receipt, 9. Tax Installment, 10. Vendor Prepayment, 11. Vendor Refund Centre. **How does it work?** This action to un-reconcile the transactions would require User-level Access. The access can be provided from the Accounting section of the “Access Manager” module. Let’s see how it works for the “Bank Deposit” module. * Navigate to the Bank Deposit module, and open a Re-Conciliated transaction. * From the “Options” dropdown, hit on the option to “Unreconcile”. * The Bank Deposit will get unreconciled. Similar will be the case with the modules like Funds Transfer, Outgoing Payment, Customer Deposit, etc. ### **30. Customer module: Added the Email setting Tab to restrict the auto-generated outgoing Emails.** An enhancement is made to the Customer module, now all the outgoing Emails related to the Sales workflow can be managed from the Customer module itself. Toggle buttons for the restriction of the following auto-generated outgoing emails have been added to a newly created tab “***Email Settings***” under the Customer module: 1. Auto release SO email, 2. Invoice overdue reminder email, 3. Due Invoice reminder email, 4. Auto Ship Confirmation on Pack and Ship email **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Customer module, or open an existing Customer’s data from the Customer Centre. * Open the new tab “Email Settings”. * You will find the following toggle button settings: 1. Restrict “Auto release SO email”, 2. Restrict “Invoice overdue reminder email”, 3. Restrict “Due Invoice reminder email”, 4. Restrict “Auto-Ship Confirmation on Pack and Ship email”. ***Please note: The above settings will override their corresponding App Config settings only for the Customer selected.*** ### **31.** Added Alternative Item numbers and Item Barcode in the Bill of Material module and Centre. * In the BOM module, new columns are added: ***Alternative Item Number 1,2, and 3, and Barcode.*** * These fields are added under the Line level of the Bill of Material Sub-view. * Available under the Inventory Planning tab. ### **32.** Deposit Account can auto change based on the Customer Currency. The Deposit Account in the Create Customer module is populated according to Currency and will show the first selected account according to Currency. In case there is a Default Account selected from the “Page Defaults” option, then the selected Default account will be populated irrespective of any Currency chosen for the Customer. **How does it work?** * Goto Create Customer module. * On selecting a Canadian Dollar currency for example from the “Primary tab”, the Deposit Account selected will be the first Canadian Account from the list under the “Payments” tab. * The same will be the case with any other Currency selected. See the screenshot below as an example. In case when the Default Deposit Account is set from the Page defaults and the Customer’s Deposit Account is not set, the system will pick up the Default Deposit Account. Please Note: If the Deposit account is once manually changed, it won’t get changed further on changing the Currency. #### **33. New config added: Customer dropdown to show Customers only mapped to logged in Sales Rep.** A Sales Rep will only be able to see their linked Customer on the Sales workflow modules such as create Sales Order/Estimate/Invoice/Sales Receipt. The Sales Rep user can see their linked customer from the Customer Centre. For this functionality, a new App Config setting is added under the Sales section: ***“Sales Reps to be able to see only their Customers to Create Orders”.*** If the App Config is On, the Customer dropdown will show only Customers- which are mapped to that logged-in sales Rep/Sales Management. i.e the Sales Rep will only able to see their linked Customer on the Sales Order/Estimate module’s Customer dropdown section. #### **34. Option to Import/Export files in “txt” format through the Job Scheduler.** Added “txt” field in format dropdown in the Job Scheduler. Before this, the files were imported or exported only in CSV format through the Job Scheduler. Now the added txt format supports import or export files in text format also. #### **35. B2B Login Process enhancements made and Bugs fixed.** The following changes have been made to the Customer Portal’s Login Page: * Customer portal UI changed: Company Logo is displayed. * Changes in the UI of the Sign-up process. * Bugs fixed for the “**Forget Password**” functionality. * Email Config error will generate an internal notification and Email to all the Admins. * Toggle button to see the “Inactive Users” in the **Portal User Centre.** * Validate the Portal Account directly from the Portal User Centre. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Customer Portal log-in page. * If the Account is already set, the login page will look like this with the “Company’s Logo displayed. **Changing the password/Forgot the Password process:** * Click on the “Forgot Password” option. * Enter the registered email id. * You will receive the following message: * The link to reset the password will be sent to the registered email id. * Click on the Link, and you can generate a new password. * Enter the new Password and Confirm the password. Now the login to the Customer Portal can be made. Validate the new Portal Account * On the Sign-up page, fill in the details; Email and Password. * Also, you can check the option for a Multi-Account if required. * The pop-up message asking for validating the email through a link emailed will appear. * Verify the Email. * After validating the Email, a request is sent to the approver’s email that is set in the App Config. * This is how the Approver receives the email. * After approval, the requester (portal user) receives another email confirming the sign-up. ***Note: If email errors out on the customer side, this Email config error will generate an internal notification and Email to all the Admins, that this customer email was unable to register.*** Now you can see the Inactive Users using the toggle button in the portal user Centre **Validate the Portal Account directly from the Portal User Centre.** The Inactive Customer’s Portal Account can be directly validated from the Portal User Centre. **How does it work?** * Go to the Portal User Centre. * Turn On the Toggle button to see all the Inactive Users. * Select the Customer account that you want to validate. * From the Options, check “Validate Portal Accounts”. * This will mark the Customer Portal account emails as validated for the Selected customer(s). * Also, this will auto-generate passwords that can be used to sign in to the Customer Portal After you hit “OK” it will verify the account. #### #### **36. B2b: Ability for B2b Customers to upload bulk Items using the upload order option.** Now you can add multiple items to the Cart using the Upload File option. \ **How does it work?** * Pull up the Presentation. * Click on the Upload Order button from the top right corner. * Download the template. * Enter the Item Number and the Qty. * Then click on the Browse button. * And then on the upload. * It will automatically add the items to the cart. #### **37. B2B Enhancements: Advanced features provided to the B2B module** The following new abilities are added for the improved functionality of the B2B and the Customer Portal: * **Replace Presentation keyword** * **Presentation Centre: Reorder the Presentation.** * **Presentation: Added the Filter tab** * **In Customer Portal: Option to see the Presentation History** **How do they work?** * **Replace the Presentation name:** An App Config setting has been added under the B2B tab for this. This will allow the user to replace the Presentation keyword from B2B.
* **Reordering the Presentation** In the presentation Centre, a User can reorder the Presentation. * **Presentation: Added the Filter tab** Under any Presentation, a “Filter” tab is added. This contains a toggle button to give an option to Apply the filters like, “Product Filter”, “Brand Filter”, “Tag Filter”, etc; in the Presentation. Also, the option to “Collapse” the filters has been provided. * If The “Show” toggle is OFF, the User cannot ON collapse. * If collapse is ON, the filter will collapse. * If the “Show” toggle is off, the filter is not going to show. **In Customer Portal: Option to delete the Presentation from the History** If the Customer is not linked to the Presentation, the option to remove/delete the Presentation will not be available, if the App Config setting under the B2B tab “**Show all presentations in customer portal**” is ON. #### **38. Set up the “Offset days” to auto calculate “dates” in case of Sales Orders, Estimates, and Invoices** The dates, such as “To be Shipped” for the Sales Order can be calculated on the basis of the pre-set “offset days” and will be calculated on the basis of the “Order date. A new App config setting is added under the Sales tab to pre-set the Offset days for: * Date to be Shipped, * Promise Date, * Date to be Cancelled, * Follow up Date, * Estimate valid Date If this setting is enabled, Order/Estimate dates will be automatically calculated based upon the offset specified in days for each date type. For example: If the offset for “Date To Be Shipped” is set to 30 and the order date is Jan-01 then it will be set to Feb-01 based on offset calculations. # March 2021 Release #### **1. The approval process for validating the B2B/Portal users** An App Config setting has been added to authorize the new user while signing up for the B2B presentation. This enhancement allows only the approved portal users to sign up in the application. When a user signs up or registers for the B2B presentation, the system will send a notification to the approver for signup approval. **How does it work?** * In the App config module under the B2B tab, find the setting “***Use Portal signup authorization***“. * By allowing this, a notification will be sent to the portal signup approver, to approve the portal signup. * **“Portal signup approver email(s)”** in the App Config defines the email of the approver to whom the notification will be sent. Validating the new Portal Account * On the Sign-up page, fill in the details; Email and Password. * The pop-up message asking for validating the email through a link emailed will appear. * Verify the Email. * After validating the Email, a request is sent to the approver’s email that is set in the App Config. * This is how the Approver receives the email. * After approval, the requester (portal user) receives another email confirming the sign-up. #### **2. Data Export format: Added Custom fields.** ***Added Custom Fields*** into the Export templates in the following modules: * Sales modules, (header, & detail), * Customer, * Item, * Invoice (header, & detail), * Wave detail, and * Purchase Order When exporting the data from the “***Data Export Centre***“, the “***Custom Fields***” column will be available for the above modules in the exported data. See the examples of these templates below: **Sales Order:** **Invoice:** **Item:** **Customer:** **Wave:** ***Note: The Sales Order detail custom fields are added into the Wave detail template.*** **Purchase Order:** The “Custom fields” column can be searched from the “Advance Search” option in the Data Export Centre module. This applies to all the above-mentioned modules. #### **3. Sub-Total by Section** An App Config setting has been added to ***calculate the Sub-Total amount*** for the specific lines after the previous subtotal row. If this app config is not turned on, the system includes the previous subtotal amount in the new subtotal whereas in this case, the system will group lines and show subtotal by each section. **How Does it Work?** * Turn ON the setting from the “App Config” module under the “general settings”. * Now Open/Create a Sales Order. * Add an Item with the Item Type “Sub Total” from the Add Item option. * The Subtotal amount can be calculated by adding the subtotal type row. **This feature is available in the Estimate, Invoice, Purchase Order, Bill, Item Receipt modules.** #### **4. Ability to send Packing Slip along with Invoice** New functionality is provided to send the Invoice and the Packing slip together while shipping or adding to the email queue from the Invoice Centre**.** An App Config has been added to achieve this. Search for this Config called “***Auto email packing slip along with the Invoice”*** under the Sales tab. When this app config is ON, it will give an ability to email Packing Slip and Invoice at the same time from Invoice Center. * Use the ‘Add to email Queue’ feature from the Invoice Centre. * A new dropdown for ‘***Packing Slip Template***‘ will be available while selecting the Reporting Template. Also, when any Sales Order is Shipped the Packing Slip is sent with the Invoice email. ***Note: Invoice emails are sent when the “Auto Email ship confirmation on Pack and Ship” setting is on in the Config.*** #### #### **5. Added a new Column in Item Inventory snapshot: Customer PO on SO detail** Added Customer PO number column under the “On SO” detail in the Item Inventory Snapshot module. #### #### **6. New App Config for Waving to Sales Rep** A new setting is created in the system to notify the Sales Rep when an Order is Waved in Xoro. **How does it work?** * Added an App config setting under the Sales Module “***Auto email send confirmation on SO allocation***“. * When this config is ON, an email will be sent to the Sales Rep with the Pick Wave document on Sales Order Allocation. When this config is ON another config “***Send additional email on SO Allocation***” will come into play to define the Emails which will receive the allocation details in addition to Sales Rep. * Multiple Emails can be added by comma-separating the Email ids. * Sales Order allocation email with the Pick Wave document will be sent to users defined in this setting. * Mail will be sent to all the comma-separated email Ids along with the Pick Wave document. ***Note: Even if there are no Email Ids added, the Sales rep will receive the Allocation Confirmation Email.*** #### **7. Value Added Service Items now support GL coding** Providing the ability to add a separate Account for the VAS (Value Added Services) items. We can now add the “***Income Account***” and the “***Expense Account***” under the VAS Item details. Select the Income Account and the Expense Account from the dropdowns available under these fields. ***Note: Income and Expense Account is an optional field while creating a VAS item.*** A separate Income transaction will be created for the Item and VAS Item if an Income Account is defined for the VAS Item. On the other hand, if the Income Account for the VAS item has not been defined, the system will add the cost of the VAS item into the item for accounting transactions. #### **8. Add Item: The Kit Header dropdown** In Sales Order, after adding a kit, the “Add Item” popup shows a ***“Kit Header” dropdown.*** A Toggle Button has been added to add or remove the Kit Header. If the Toggle button is turned Off, the Kit Header dropdown will show nothing selected or all the Item Types. Previously, that dropdown would automatically pick up the kit name for all the Item Types. #### **9. B2B: Address Change/Update permission to Customers** Added new functionality to Hide/View the option to “**Update the Shipping/Billing address under the B2B online Customer portal”**. Based on the setting, the Billing/Shipping address can or cannot be accessed. ***How does it work?*** * Navigate to the App Config module under B2B, look for the “***Show customer default address***” setting. * When the setting is turned **ON, the option to update the shipping address is available in the customer portal.** * When the setting is turned **OFF, the option to update the shipping address will not be available in the customer portal.** #### **10. Ship Package Type: “Active” column** Added an”***Is Active?***” checkbox in the “**Ship Package Type**” module. This allows you to make certain Ship package types inactive. This “Is Active?” column is also available in the Ship Package Type Centre. ***Note: If the existing Ship Package Type is being utilized in any Sales Order, then it can’t be changed to inactive.*** The system will give the following error: #### **11. Cheque Centre: “Is Reconciled”? flag** Added “I***s Reconciled***?” column in the Cheque Centre. This column will be checked for the reconciled payments. Also, from the Advanced Search option, the reconciled cheques can be searched. #### **12. Ability to create a customer with the same name & email (with different currency codes)** Added functionality to Add/Update the Customer, even if the **C*****ustomer with the same Name and Email Ids*** already exists in the system provided the currency codes are different. This will Shopify etc Customers to be synced properly even if they order in different currencies. **How does it work?** Navigate to the Create Customer module, create a Customer with the same Name and Email. The system will allow creating this Customer. This functionality also works while uploading the Customers from the “Upload Customers” module. ***Note: Xoro will accept different Customers with the same Name and Emails only if they have a different Currency Code.*** #### **13. Inventory Change Log: SO number** Added ***SO number*** column into the ***Inventory Change Log*** module for the Transaction Type “Invoice”. This will show the respective SO’s for that particular Invoice. #### **14. Customer Portal Branding** Providing the ability to add/update the company logo within the Customer Portal along with the Xorosoft logo. The Company logo can be added from the Company info page. To add/update the Company logo, follow the steps below: * Navigate to the “Company Info” module. * At the bottom right of the page, there is the option to upload the Company logo. * Uploading it will add the logo to the Customer Portal. #### **15. Bill payment: Memo field** Added a MEMO field in the Bill Payment module. The column for the memo field is also available in the Bill Payment Centre. Added memo field to Bill Payment Receipt as well. #### **16. Serial Number Centre** Serial numbers can be tracked easily in Xoro and can be found in “***Serial Number Centre”.*** You can Grant Access to this module from the Access manager. The serial numbers added in the Invoice and Credit Memo can be viewed in the Serial Number Centre. In the Invoice Centre, right-click on the Invoice and click on ***Show Serial Number(s),*** it will redirect to the **Serial Number Centre** with the filtered data for that particular Invoice. #### **17. Manufacturing Order: The Title column** Added “***Title***” column in the Manufacturing Order Centre. This corresponds to the Title of the Item added in the Manufacturing Order. #### **18. Notification for manually created Item Receipt** A notification email can now be sent for the manually created Item Receipts. **How does it work?** We have created a new App Config setting, “***Send notification for manually created Item Receipt to following emails***.” Find this App Config under the Purchase tab. This App config accepts comma-separated emails. Enter the emails that will receive the Item Receipt notification. When a new Item Receipt is manually created in the system, an email will be sent to all those emails which have been entered in the app config. #### **19. Sales Order: Presentation and Campaign columns addition** Added ***Presentation and Campaign*** dropdown fields in the Sales Order. You can assign/update Sales Orders to existing/new presentations and campaigns for tracking purposes. An App Config setting, ***‘Allow editing Presentation/Campaign name in Sales Order’***. This will allow editing the Presentation/Campaign name in Sales Order. When this config is turned ON, these fields (***Presentation/Campaign )*** will be editable in the SO. If this config is turned OFF, these fields (***Presentation/Campaign )*** will not be editable in the SO. ***Note: This dropdown will be enabled only in the case of saved Sales Orders. For unsaved SOs, these will be disabled by default.*** #### **20. Commission Report Centre: Customer Name & Payment Date** Added ***Customer Name (Entity)*** & ***Payment Date*** columns in the Commission Report Centre. You can add these fields from the nine dots icon on the right side of the report. #### **21. B2B – Notifying B2B customers when their Total checkout amount is approaching the next Discount Tier** Based on the Discount Rule defined in the Presentation, we have added a new field “***Amount For Alert***” (It will always be less than the “From Amount”). Find this feature in the Discount Rules tab of the B2B Presentation. For example, if a 10% discount is allowed for the purchase above 1000$, a notification will be given to the Customer if the total amount added in the Order reaches 800$ (the amount added in the “Amount for Alert” column). Based on the discount rule, a popup will be shown while submitting the Order in the Customer portal. The alert message would be – **“You can get a 10% discount if you shop more “the amount” (From Amount – Cart Amount)”.** #### **22. Item Centre/ Customer Centre: Batch Update options** Few new Batch Update fields have been added in the Item and the Customer Centres. * The following fields are added under the **Batch update option of the Item Centre:** **Brand, Item Category, Group, & WIP Account** ***Note: In the case of the WIP account, if the Item is a raw material only then it can be batch updated.*** * The following fields are added under the **Batch update option of Customer Centre:** **Payment Terms, Customer Group, Order Type, Tags, & Shipping Terms** ***Note: The Batch Update Shipping Terms will not be allowed if the Shipping Method is “Pick Up”.*** #### **23. Ship Confirmation Emails: Company Email/User Email** An App Config setting has been made to allow sending the Ship Confirmation Emails from the User or the Company Email. While sending the Ship confirmation email to the Customers, you can now select which Email to be used to send it; **the User Email or the Company’s Email.** **How does it work?** Navigate to the “App Config” module, under the Sales tab, find the setting “**Ship Confirmation Email Source**“. The Ship Confirmation email will be sent to the Customer, according to the App config setting- User/Company. ***Note: If the User email is not defined, all the Ship Confirmation emails will be sent through the Company email.*** #### **24. Item: Save button for Item pricing** In the Item Subview form, the newly added fields under the **Pricing Tab can now be saved**. This table will have a save button for saving added fields. #### **25. Customer PO # added to Pack\&Ship and Pick Wave module** Added Customer PO number in the Pack and Ship, and the Pick Wave modules. **Pack & Ship** ***Note: In the Pick Wave module, if there is more than 1 Customer PO# then they will be placed in comma-separated format.*** **Pick Wave** #### **26. Product Matrix Generator: The “Title” column** Added “***Title***” Column in the Product Matrix Generator module. The Title column will be visible for the Product having the same base part number. #### **27. Pack and Cartonize: The “Title” column** Added Title column in the Pack and Cartonise Section. ***Note: The title column will only show when “variants” are enabled.*** #### **28. Manufacturing: Changed Lot# Nomenclature** The nomenclature of the Lot number, generated on creating an MO has been changed to the **combination of Month and Year of the “Production date” in the MO.** #### **29. Item Inventory Snapshot – Function to Download** Added the function to download the information in the Item Inventory Snapshot when we click on the ” On SO” and the “On PO” columns. You can now download all the information under the “On SO” and “On PO” details. #### **30. Batch LPN Auto Merge from Inventory By Location Centre** Added an option to select multiple records and auto-merge LPN by grouping Item & Location. Earlier we have given the functionality to merge LPN for the same Item and Location. Now an additional feature of Batch merging the LPNs is also provided. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the “Inventory By Location” Centre. * Select multiple records. * Click Options, and select “Merge LPNs”. * Select the Primary LPNs for the different Items and Locations. * Click Save. * The LPNs will be merged. ***Note: This feature will work with the “Enable LPN” app config turned ON.*** The LPNs cannot be merged if: 1. Secondary LPN is with allocated Qty is more than 0. 2. LPN is linked to an MO. #### **31. Block SO for Inactive Customers** ***The SOs cannot be created for the InActive customers.*** The system won’t allow creating SOs for the Inactive Customers from the “Customer Info” or “Customer Centre” modules. **Customer Info:** **Customer Centre:** #### **32. Access Key for Customer Info: Communication Tab** Added access key for the “Communication” tab in the “Customer info” module. In the “Access Manager” module, under the Sales–Customer section, find the “**Communication Tab**“. Uncheck the “Communication” box, to deny access to the Communication Tab. The Access can be granted or denied to the different Recipient Types: Users, Roles, or Profiles. #### **33. ASN Enhancement** While exporting data from the “Data Export Centre” certain new fields are introduced under the “ASN Detail” downloads. **How does it work?** Navigate to the “Data Export Centre” Switch to ASN Detail. The following columns have been added in the **export files under the ASN detail**. 1\. Customer. 2\. Customer Email. 3\. Return Code. 4\. ASN Type. ***Note: This column will be applicable only to the ASNs generated from the RMAs.*** #### **34. Short Inventory planner SO detail: Address Columns** Added, “Ship to Name”, “Bill to Name”, “Promise Date”,& “Address Instruction notes”(Custom Notes) in the SO details. The “Ship To Name” and the “Bill To Name” will be the names mentioned in the Ship to & Bill to addresses respectively. #### **35. Data Export : PO Details ETA Date** A new column is added in the PO export format- “***PO Line Date Expected Delivery***“. On creating a Transfer Purchase Order, if the Expected Delivery Date is different for header Level and Item line level, the exported data from the “Data Export Centre” will have the Item Line level ETA date under the “**PO Line Date Expected Delivery**” column. #### **36. Bug Fixed: Create Customer, Address field** When a new customer is created from an existing Customer’s page, by clicking the “Create New” tab, the State dropdown will populate on changing the country from the dropdown. Previously the State dropdown was not populating on changing of a country. #### **37. Added Item Barcode field to Advanced Search in Various Centers** Added Item Bar Code Search field under the “**Advance Search**” and “**Quick Search**” options in the following modules: * **Item Inventory snapshot module** * **Short Inventory Planner** * **Inventory by location** #### **38. Short Inventory Planner – Item Category** Added “***Item Category***” field in the Advance Search under the Short Inventory Planner module. #### **39. Data Export: Invoice Detail (Memo)** Added Memo field under the ***“Invoice Detail***” export template when downloading from the ***Data Export Centre.*** #### **40. Brand Level access for B2B portal customers** Added functionality to ***restrict customers from selecting certain Brands in the B2B module*** Also added two fields in customer uploads “***Is Restricted***” and “***Brands***“. **How does it work?** * Open the Customer page, under the Portal tab. * Select Brands from the “Brands” dropdown for restricting the Brands. * Below is the checkbox. * If checked, it will restrict the Customers to see the products belonging to the above-selected Brands in the B2B ordering module. * Navigate to B2B > Presentation Centre. * Brands will show up according to the restriction checkbox. * If checked then it will restrict the selected brands. * If unchecked then it will show the selected brands. Also added “Brands” and “Is Restricted” fields in the Advanced search option, on the Customer page. #### **41. Short Inventory Planner Enhancements** Enhancements have been made in the Short Inventory Planner module. Find the detailed information below: * Added ***options to quick search by Default Vendor and Base Part#*** in the SIP module. * Added a ***dropdown to switch between the Purchasable Items and Manufacturable Items under the “All Items” column*** in SIP. * Added an ***option to create PO by default vendor*** from SIP. ***Note: if the multiple items have different default vendors then it will create multiple POs as per their default vendor.*** ***Also, If the items have a different store it will show an error that the “store must be the same”.*** * In the case of creating PO by default vendor, it will get directly linked to the SO. * This linking can be seen from the “Order Linking Centre”. * In the case of creating a new PO added a checkbox (“***link SO to PO”***) if the checkbox is checked then that PO will be linked to SO if the checkbox is unchecked it will not. * Added a column “Purchasable Item” in SIP also added in the Advance Filter for the same. #### **42. Automatic Payment Reminders for Due Invoices** AR tasks can be handled easily and customers can be reminded of the automation schedule in regards to their unpaid Invoices. In addition, you can customize the email templates for reminders in the “Email Templates” module Created 3 App Configs **Enable invoice due reminder emails** If this setting is enabled, the customers will receive the invoice due reminder emails daily at the time specified by “Due/Overdue Invoice Reminder Time”. You can also specify the number of days the email should be sent before the email is due using the app config “Invoice due reminder email interval in days”. **Invoice due reminder email interval in days** You can specify the interval at which the system should send the email reminders for due invoices in the upcoming days. You can send multiple reminders by entering the days represented by the comma. For example (7,3,0). This means the system will remind the customer 7 days before, then 3 days before, and then on the due date until the invoice is marked as paid. **Due/Overdue Invoice Reminder Time** The Due and Overdue Invoice reminder emails will be sent to the customers at this time daily (Format – HH:MM). #### **43. Bug Fix: Column reset for Saved Tables** We have added a fix to prevent the auto-resetting of columns after the update. #### **44. Reverse Bank Reconciliation** We have added a feature to allow reverse bank reconciliation from Xoro to the Bank. This allows one Xoro Line to be reconciled against multiple bank lines. #### **45. Edits in Shopify Orders are automatically synced to Xoro** Following edits in Shopify are now automatically synced to Xoro * Add Qty * Reduce Qty * Add a Line * Removing a Line #### **46. Automatic Payment Reminders for Overdue Invoices** **Enable invoice overdue reminder emails** If this setting is enabled, the customers will receive the invoice overdue reminder emails daily at the time specified by “Due/Overdue Invoice Reminder Time”. You can also specify the number of days the email should be sent after the email is due using the app config “Overdue invoices reminder email interval in days”. **Overdue invoices reminder email interval in days** You can specify the interval at which the system should send the email reminder for overdue invoices. For example: If you enter 3, the system will remind the customer every 3rd day until the invoice is marked as paid. The first email will be sent on the 3rd day after the due date of the invoice. **Due/Overdue Invoice Reminder Time** The Due and Overdue Invoice reminder emails will be sent to the customers at this time daily (Format – HH:MM). In addition, you can customize the email templates for reminders in the “Email Templates” module # February 2021 Release ### **1. Customer Module: Address Instructions** Added an “***Address Instruction***” field for “Ship To” and “Bill To” address in the “Create Customer” module. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Customer centre. Open a customer account. * Navigate to Contact Info Tab. Switch to Address Info Tab. * Select the Address from the Address list. Click on the “Address Instruction” button to add/ modify address instruction for the selected address. The “Address Instruction” popup will open where you can add the Instructions. The option to add multiple Address Instructions is available. You can also view this info in the “Address Instructions Centre”. **Note: *****We can add/ modify Address Instruction for the Existing Customers only or you need to save the Customer to add the Address Instructions to it.*** ### **2. B2B: Block Invoice/Credit/Deposit** An App Config has been added to Hide or Show the Invoices/Credits/Deposits in the Customer portal. **How does this work?** * In the App config module, under the B2B section, look for “Show Invoices/Credits/Deposits in the customer portal” and turn it off. * Open customer portal and check left side menu. * It will not display the “Credits, Deposits, and Invoices.” **When the setting is turned ON:** ![](https://cdn.xorosoft.io/xo10106/20201201160134_AA53202B.png) **When the setting is turned OFF:** ![](https://cdn.xorosoft.io/xo10106/20201201155357_F0A413E4.png) * To give the Customer independent access to be able to see or hide the Invoice/Credit/Deposit, irrespective of the setting in the App Config a CheckBox has been added in the Create Customer module. * Goto Create Customer or open an existing Customer, under the Portal tab – “***Is Portal User?***” check the “***Show Invoice Credit Deposit?***” check box. ***This check will override the App Config setting of “Show Invoices/Credits/Deposits” in the customer portal.*** ### 3. Inventory Transfer Centre: Log for the Inventory Movement A new Centre; “***Inventory Transfer Centre***” is created for showing Inventory Movement Records. This Centre will maintain a record for all the Inventory movements that were created in the system from the Inventory Movement Module. Also, the details of the Inventory Transfer can be viewed by double-clicking on the Transfer record. **Also, the “Memo” field is added to the Inventory Movement module.** Check the Inventory Change Log & Inventory Transfer centre to view the added Memo. ### 4. Multi-Currency Support in PO Reconcile Process Added Multi-Currency Support in PO Reconcile Process. **How does it work?** Xoro is now giving a feature to Reconcile in a different currency than what’s on the PO. This applies to both IR & BilReconciliation. * Added currency dropdown and Exchange rate field in “Add items” and removed from “Select Items”, as it was earlier. * Vendor and Account dropdown will be populated on the basis of Line level Reconcile currency. * Also, an Alert function has been provided when the Reconciliation is finished. Note: There cannot be more than 1 Foreign Currency per Bill/IR. Example – Home Currency = USD Vendor = USD Freight (Service 1) = CAD Customs (Service 2) = USD/CAD, cannot be in any other currency Duty (Service 3) = USD/CAD, cannot be in any other currency **Another feature added in the IR Reconciliation:** We already have the feature to add the Reconciled Items to the Vendor Bill and thus the reconciled amount will be included in the accounts payable for the Vendor. If the “***Add to Vendor Bill***” option is unchecked, the reconciled amount will not be added to the Vendor Bill and a separate liability will be created. **Now, an App Config setting is added to *****allows creating Expense Bills***** in Item Reconciliation *****when the reconciled amount is not added in the Vendor Bill.***
If this App Config is turned ON, the “***Create Expense Bill***” flag in the “Select Accrual Account & Vendor” section will be automatically checked. ### **5. Item: Batch update Tags, add new Tags.** The Items can be batch updated from the Item Centre to “Add New Tags”. **How does it work?** * Go to Item Centre and select the Items for which you wish to update/add tags. * From the “Options” tab select “Batch Update” and select “Tags” under the “Column Name” dropdown. * Add Tags to update. **Note: *****Use ‘+’ prefix to append to the existing tag(s) eg, +tag1,tag2*** * The Tags will be updated in the selected Items. Also, please note that you will only be able to add or update the tags if the “Allow auto-create tags” setting in the App Config setting module is turned ON.
### **6. Edit description on the Credit Memo.** The Item Description in the Credit Memo can now be edited. In the Item line of the Credit Memo, click on the “Item Description”, write a new description, hit the “check” and the Item Description will be updated ### **7. Commission Rules: Added features** Added few new features in the “Commission Rule” module. * *Revenue deduction –* Rule * *Revenue per Invoice –* Condition * *Cumulative amount –* Offset Criteria/Condition Let’s understand these. **Revenue Deduction** This will reduce the revenue per item by the amount/percentage added before calculating commissions. **Revenue per Invoice** You can add this condition to your current rule with the desired operator & value. **Cumulative amount** New commission criteria/Offset criteria have been added “*Cumulative Amount (Monthly)*“. This will have the total amount since the start of the fiscal year for that Sales Rep including the month of the Invoice/Credit Memo. These are also available in the commission report centre. ### **8. Harmonized System (HS) Code: New Module** HS code can now be created and stored in the system. Created a new module for the same. In the Create Item module, the HS code can be added from the dropdown list of the stored HS codes. **Note: *****If any HS Code is being used in one or more Items, it cannot be deleted or inactivated from the HS Code module.*** In case you try to delete/Inactivate the HS code that is already being used, the system will give the following error. ### **9. Estimate: Restrict duplicating the expired Estimates** Duplication of the expired Estimates can now be restricted. App Config setting is added to keep a check on this. **How does it work?** * Goto App Config module, under the Sales tab, look for the setting “**Duplicate Expired Estimate”.** * If the app config is off then the system will not be able to create a duplicate of an estimate if the “valid until date” is less than the current date. * Turning ON this setting will allow creating the duplicate(s) of an expired estimate. **Note: This setting will be based on the “Valid Until Date” set on the Estimate.** ### **10. New fields added: Short Inventory Planner & Item Inventory Snapshot** Added new columns in the “Short Inventory Planner” & “Item Inventory Snapshot” modules: **“On MO+” and “On MO-“** Navigate to Short Inventory Planner and Item inventory module. From the “Add Columns dots” add MO+ and MO- fields. **MO-** will give information about the **qty short on the MO of the particular Item.** Similarly, **MO+** will tell about the **qty available for that particular Item in the MOs.** Click on an item under these columns and a pop-up will open to show the details like MO#, qty to produce and the BOM title in case of MO- Items. **\*\*The same feature is added to the Item Inventory Snapshot module.** ### **11. Pick Wave module: Added Lot#** Added Lot# coulmn in Pick Wave module in the wave lines. **How does it work?** If the “Enable LPN” setting is turned ON in the App Config settings, and the Lot number is provided to the location where the item is available, you can ***see the assigned Lot# of the Item in the “Pick Wave” module.*** ### **12. Add Items from the previous Orders** A new property has been added to the Sales Order, Purchase Order, and Estimate modules. While creating a new SO/PO/Estimate, the Item lines can be added from the previous Orders. **How does it work?** * Create a new Sales Order, add a Customer. * In the “Order Details” click on “***Add Item from Order(s)***“. * A popup will open displaying all the Item details added in the previous orders. * Select the Item lines that you want to add to the current Order. * Hit “Add to Order”. * Item details like Unit Price, Discount, Qty will be applied from the previous Orders. **Note: *****Orders in Void, Open, and Cancelled status will not be shown in this case.*** The same is the case while creating Purchase Order, and Estimate. ### **13. Customer Centre: Added columns- Last Comment & Date** In the Customer Info module, when a comment is posted, the ***last posted comment with the comment date*** can be seen in the Customer Centre. ***“Last Comment”, “Last Comment Date”.*** In the Customer Centre, you can add these two columns in the view from the nine dots. The last posted comment and the Comment date can thus be seen. ### **14. Copy SO to PO: The Pricing sequence** When an SO is converted to a PO from the “Selected Lines” option, the Pricing is defined according to the Vendor Currency in the PO. The Pricing sequence will be as follow: * If the Item-Vendor Mapping is present, then item vendor mapping pricing will be applied. * If there is no Item-Vendor mapping present and multicurrency has been defined for the Item, then the multicurrency “Standard Cost” will be picked. * If multicurrency doesn’t exist for the Item, then the item “standard Unit Cost” will be applied to the new PO copied from the SO. ### **15. Batch Inventory Movement: Save Columns** Added *batch **update option for changing the not available quantity in batch inventory movement*** and save button on the table. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the batch inventory movement module. * Select row(s) for which you want to update the quantity. * Now from the Options tab select “Batch Update Not Available Quantity”. * Enter the Qty and hit “Change Qty”. * The “Not Available” Qty will be changed for the selected lines. * Also, the option to “Save” the added columns has been provided in the module. ### **16. Project Class: Active/Deactivate** Added Active/Deactivate checkbox in the Project/Class module. Only the Active Projects will be visible under the “Project/Class” dropdown while creating a Sales Order. If an Active Project/Class already exists in one or more Order/database, it cannot be deactivated. The system will give the following error. ### **17. Create Store: Restrict Sale Store/Ship Store** Now a particular Store can be restricted to be available as a Ship Store or a Sales Store while creating a Sales Order. **How does it work?** In the Create Store module, the functionality to “Restrict as Sales Store” and “Restrict as Ship Store” has been added. If the Store is restricted as Ship Store, it won’t be seen under the Ship Store drop-down, while creating a Sales Order. Similarly, if the Store is Restricted as Sales Store, it won’t be seen under the Sales Store dropdown while creating the Sales Order. The two features of the Store are visible in the Store Centre module. Also Batch Update option to update “Is restricted as Sales Store” or “Is restricted as Ship Store” has been provided. ### **18. Item: Auto Produce flag** Xoro has added an ability to the manufacturable Item, if it goes short while creating an MO(during Waving), the Item will be Auto Produced. For this, a check is added in the Create Item module, “***Is Auto Producible***‘. This option is available under the “Manufacturing” tab of the Item. If this setting is ON, this item will be auto manufactured/produced to make the inventory available during the Waving process if the inventory is not sufficient. This will eliminate the need to manually creating and producing manufacturing orders. This flag can be viewed under the Item Centre, Item Subview form, and in the Product matrix generator page columns. The “Is Producible” column is also added in the Product Upload Template. ***Note: This flag, on the manufacturable Item, will override the App Config setting of “Auto Quick Produce MO from Wave”.*** If the “Is Auto Producible” flag is turned ON for the Item, it will get Auto Produced on creating the Wave, even if the App Config setting is turned OFF. ### **19. Commission Report: Select Report Criteria** A “***Report Criteria***” dropdown has been added in the “***Run Sales Commission***” module. This will give the option to run the Commission Report for a particular Sales Rep or Sales Rep group. Select the **“*****Criteria value”***, if Sales Rep or Sales rep group is selected as the Report Criteria. If “Auto” is selected from the Report Criteria dropdown then the Commission Report will work in the normal way. ### **20. Item Brand & Category** Added search option fields “***Item Brand***” and “***Category***” in the Item Inventory Snapshot, Inventory by Location, and Inventory Change Log modules. Also added Option 3 (Name, Value & Code) columns in the Inventory Snapshot module. ### **21. B2B: Force Item Sell Package Qty** Added a new field in the B2BPresentation “***Force Item Sell Package Qty***” for forcing an item’s sell pack qty. This field is available under the “Other Attributes Tab” in the B2B presentation. The Item’s Sell Package Qty can be set from the Create Item module, under the Inventory tab. **When this check box is checked the Qty can be added in the multiple of Item’s Sell Package Qty only.** **If a different Qty is added, the system won’t allow the creation of the Order and will give an error.** ### **22. Access Manager: Hide Standard Cost and Average Cost** Added an Access level on the Standard Cost and Average Cost fields instead of on the Pricing/Advance Pricing tab of the Item detail. Now, these fields hide and show on “Access revoking” and “granting” respectively. **How does it work?** Navigate to Access manager > Purchase> **Item Costing layer -revoke the Access.** The Item will not show the standard Unit Cost and the Average Cost under the Pricing tab of the Item sub-view. Also, the Pricing Tab will not be visible in the detailed Item view. The same is with the Item Centre, the Standard Unit Cost and the Average Cost columns will not be available to view. On the other hand, if the Access has been provided, these fields will be available to view in the Item. ### **23. Estimate – Payment Terms and Advance payment** While creating an Estimate, the “Payment Term” and ‘Required Advanced Payment” will autofill after the Customer is defined. **How does it work?** * Set a Payment Term and Advance Payment for any Customer. * Select that Customer for creating an Estimate. * The Payment Term and Advance Payment fields will automatically populate for that customer. * These fields can also be changed if required. ### **24. Create Image: Description length not limited.** The characters limit has been increased and **extended to 4000 Characters** for writing the **Description of an Image.** ### **25. Customer Message Box: Estimate/SO** The Customer Message box size has been increased in the create SO and create Estimate modules. This will give you the ability to write extensive notes to your Customers. ### **26. SO to PO/TPO – Choose the “Ship To Address”** Created a pop-up window to choose an address to be used as the Ship-To Address while copying an SO to PO or TPO. When we convert SO to PO or SO to TPO (all options), then the system will show a popup to select from the Customer’s Ship to Address and Store’s Address to be populated in the PO and TPO. * If the Customer’s Ship-To Address is selected in the pop-up, then it will populate Ship to Address in PO or TPO. * If the Store’s address is selected in the pop-up, then it will populate Store’s address in PO or TPO. ### **27. Item: Sales Forecast** Added ***Sales Forecast*** tab to the **Create Item** module. A new feature is added to the Create Item module; **A Sales Forecast Tab.** A prediction/target can be set for a particular Year, under a given Month for the quantity of the Item to be sold. * The Year dropdown is also a filter used to refresh the values in the table * By default, the Current Year will be selected and the related records in the table will be shown for that year. * Also added save tab on item sub-view and given editable year filter to the table on that basis. * The Item sales forecast table is just a reference table, and has no implication to any other module at this time. ### **28. Customer: Ability to change the Customer Type** Added functionality to disable changing Customer Type from the Customer module. **How does it work?** * Navigate to the Customer module. * Click on the three dots on the top right of the page. * Click on the “Page defaults and a Popup box will open. * Select the default Customer Type that you’d like to set * At the bottom of the box, click on the pencil icon to choose the fields that you wish to disable, in this case, the “Customer Type”. * Hit “Save”. * This will lock the Customer Type, (for what you selected) every time you create a new Customer. #### **29. Short Inventory Planner: Create Batch MO** Batch MO can be created when an MO is created from the Short inventory Planner. **Bach Manufacturing Order can now be created on the basis of Base Part number** from the Short Inventory Planner module. The different Base Parts can be batch manufactured together, **for the manufacturable Items**. Also, the **“Processes” & “Services” can be added** to the manufacturing unit. How does it work? * Go to SIP (short inventory planner). * Select any manufacturable items and create batch MO from the “Options” tab. * A pop will open up with “*Add processes and services*” & “*Generate Batch MO per Base Part*” values turned off. * Turn on the “***Add Process and Services***” & “***Generate Batch MO per Base Part***” options and click ok. * A pop will open up to add Processes and Services to the Batch MOs. * After they are added, hit “Generate Batch”. * Batch MO’s should be created successfully. Now multiple batches will be made if the items belonging to the different base part numbers. Another way to do it is from the “On SO” link in the Short Inventory Planner. * Click on the “On SO” link of any manufacturable item. * Hit “Generate Manufacturing Orders”. * A popup will open with the new option ‘Add processes and services’. * You can keep it turned “Off” for existing functionality or turn it “On” for opening Batch MO popup for creating batch MO’s. * You also have the option to produce “Batch MO per BOM” or “Individual MO per Sales Order”. The feature is also available in the Sales Order module. * Go to the Sales Order module and create a new Sales Order with the manufacturable item. * Go to options (page top) and select ‘Create Manufacture Order’ from the COPY option. * A new option ‘Add processes and services’ will appear. * You can keep it turned “Off” for existing functionality or turn it “On” for opening Batch MO popup for creating batch MO’s. **The “Add Later” functionality** An “***Add Later***” functionality is added for Processes and Services in the Manufacturing Process module. * Now the Batch MOs can be created without adding processes and services. * This flag will be shown true on the MO centre for the created MO(s). Flags names are- ‘Is Processes Added Later?’ and ‘Is Services Added Later?’. * Later you can add processes and services from the MO centre by clicking on the batch number. * You can add/update processes and services only if the MO(s) of the selected batch is in Open or Release status from the batch MO page and the flag will remain the same in the MO centre. (Ie. The flag will remain set true if you adds Processes and Services later.) * Processes can be marked completed from batch sub-view (open from MO centre) only if the order is not in open and release status. ### **30. Activity Log: Viewing Sales Order/Estimate** Additional Transactions can now be recorded in the ***Activity Tracking module.*** On ***accessing/viewing Invoice, credit memo, RMA, Sales Receipt, Customer, Invoice and Refund Receipts, Estimate and Sales Order***, a log entry will be made in Activity Tracking that the Sales Order/Estimate has been viewed by the user. Also, the “**Batch Delete**” activity of the customer, Invoice, and the Sales Order will be recorded and viewed in the Activity Tracking module. ### ### **31. Custom Field Mapping** Created a new module “***Custom field mapping***“. Link or Map the Custom fields of an Item or a Customer, with the Sales Order. **How does it work?** * Type in “Custom field mapping” in the search menu to navigate to the “Custom field mapping” module. * In the “From-Entity” column select “Item” from the dropdown to map the Custom fields of Item with SO from the “To Entity” dropdown. When an item is mapped to an SO Detail, then it will populate the value from the Item and place it in the SO Detail mapped in the Custom Field header. * In the “From-Entity” column select “Customer” from the dropdown to map the Custom fields of Customer with SO from the “To Entity” dropdown. Similarly, the Custom Fields under the Customer will be mapped with the Custom Fields under the Sales Order Header. **Note:** Currently, we support ***Item to map with Sales Order Detail*** and ***Customer to map with the Sales Order Header***. There is an option to delete the individual mapping, also the option to batch delete the mapping is available in this module. ### ### **32. Manufacturing Order: Custom Fields** We have implemented the addition of Custom Fields into Manufacturing Orders. With this feature, the custom fields for the Manufacture Order can be accessed directly from the manufacturing order.
### **33. Job Scheduler Queue – Feature** Implemented the job schedule queue functionality with the following additional features – * No two jobs of the same component can run in parallel even from the different job headers. It should go to the queue and run in the sequence after one another. * Jobs can be re-run, stopped from the Job history page rather than the details page. * Add option to run/stop multiple jobs in parallel. * After stopping one job, the next job in the queue must be run automatically (in sequence). This should also work for the jobs in the different job header for the same component. If one job finishes or stopped, it should find the next job of the same component in the same job header or different and run it. ### **34. Custom Field Data Type – Ability to select data type when adding a custom Field** Navigate to the Custom Field Definition page. Added an option to specify data types for custom type: Text, Number, and List. For the list, we can specify comma-separated list values. This feature is available for all Transaction Types. ### **35. Exchange Rate: Disable editing** An App Config setting is created to disable changing/editing the Exchange rate on Sales Order and Purchase Order. **How does it work?** * Go to the App Config module under the General settings find the “Disable exchange rate modification” setting. * Click on the pencil icon, and select the module for which you want to disable the modification of the exchange rate. * Exchange rate modification will be disabled for the selected module. * If SALES is selected then all sales module will not allow users to update the exchange rates. * The setting will have an impact on the following modules under SO: 1. Estimate 2. Sales order 3. Invoice 4. Sales receipt 5. Credit memo 6. Invoice credit memo 7. Refund receipt * The same is the case if PURCHASE is selected. * The setting will have an impact on the following modules under PO: 1. Item receipt 2. Bill 3. Vendor credit 4. Vendor prepayment ***Note: The Page Default setting will override the setting defined under the App Config.*** # January 2021 Release ### 1. Wave Center: Added Item UPC column. Added Item UPC column to Wave Center (Wave Detail View & Wave Detail Allocation View), Wave Subview, and Pick Wave module. * **UPC column in the Wave Centre; Wave Detail view.** * **UPC column in the Wave Centre; Wave Detail Allocation view.** * **UPC column in the Wave Centre; Wave Sub-view.** * **UPC column in the Pick Wave Module** ### 2. Estimate module- The Copy Address check box. The Copy Address check box has been added to the Estimate module. Now the Bill to Address can be copied to the Ship to Address and vice-versa. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2021/02/img_60365b556e5a9.png) ### 3. Sales Order Centre: Added Payment Links to Invoice and Customer Deposit Center Added the ability to copy links (URL) from Invoice/Deposit Center. Sales Order Centre. Added an icon to view Deposit Email Sent History, under the “Deposit Email Sent?” column. Also added an icon to view the Pay Deposit Link in the “Deposit Link” Column. To view it, double click on the “Pin icon”. A pop-up will open up to show the Payment Links. These are “copy to clipboard” links. There will be 3 different types of Links available to see: 1. Round Green Tick: Usable Link. 2. Blue Tick: Used link. 3. Caution sign: Expired Link. The same feature is available in the Invoice Centre. Here in the Invoice Centre, an icon to view the Pay Deposit Link in the “Payment Email Sent” Column has been provided. We have a “copy to the clipboard” button for the links. Apart from this, we have fixed several existing issues: “Generate Pay Deposit Link” and “Send Pay Deposit Link”: * It will not create duplicate links if we already have valid links. * These operations are only allowed for the order type SALE. * Deposit links will not generate for Orders marked No Deposit required. ### 4. Create Wave & Pick Wave Module: Columns added. Added Item Description & Item Category Column to Create Wave & Pick Wave Modules. Create Wave module: Pick Wave module: ### 5. Create ASN opens up in a separate window. In the Purchase module, the Create ASN screen will open up in a separate window rather than a pop-up window. How does it work? * Navigate to Purchase order centre * From the PO centre, right-click on a PO and click Create ASN option and it will open up in a new tab. ### 6. Inventory Transfer Centre: Log for the Inventory Movement A new Centre; Inventory Transfer Centre is created for showing Inventory Movement Records. This Centre will maintain a record for all the Inventory movements that were created in the system from the Inventory Movement Module. Also, the details of the Inventory Transfer can be viewed by double-clicking on the Transfer record. #### ### 7. Linked Sales Order: New field added under the Invoice Header. Added a new field “Linked Sales Order” to the Invoice module. If an Invoice is created from the Sales Order, then it will show the Sales Order Number with a clickable link. On clicking the hyperlink, the linked sales Order will open in a new tab. The linked SO can directly be accessed from the Invoice Sub-view form, by double-clicking the Invoice in the Invoice Centre. ### 8. Data Export Access. A new Access Setting is added in the Access Manager Module, to Restrict/Provide the access for Exporting Reports from the various Module Centre’s. How does it work? * Select a User * In the Access Manager, go to the Configuration -> Application Configuration -> Centre Data Export. * With the help of this setting, the access to be given for Data Export can be managed. * To allow access to the Data Export, this needs to be turned On. * The Export (Download Button) is available. * When it’s unchecked, the Export (Download Button) from any module cannot be seen. * The Export (Download Button) is not available. ### 9. Bill Payment Receipt: Ability to Change the Exchange rate. The Exchange rate could be changed on the Bill Payment Receipts with Foreign Currency. The system should now calculate the exchange rate Gain and Loss Transactions according to the new exchange rate. The Exchange Rate gain/loss transaction is created based on the difference in the exchange rate between the original Bill/Vendor credit/Vendor prepayment and Bill payment. How does it work? * Go to the Bill Payment Centre, double click to open the Bill Payment (Not Home Currency). * Edit the Bill Payment in Foreign Currency. * Change the Exchange Rate. * Click Save. * Now the Transactions will be Balanced, you can see it in the Journal transaction View by right-clicking. Note: This is applicable to all types of Bill Payments (Paid Amount, Vendor Credit Applied (VC), Vendor Prepayment Applied (VP), Discount Applied). ### 10. Item: Added Discontinued Date Added Discontinued Date into Item and Item Centre. If a particular item is not to be used, the date can be defined in the system to keep a record of when it should not be used. Also added Custom Fields and Discontinued Date into Upload Product Module. * Find this attribute in the Create Item module, under “Other Attributes”. * Can be viewed in the Item Centre. * Find it in the Product Upload module. * Custom Fields, under Create Item: ### 11. Split Orders: Deposits split on Splitting Sales Orders. Added App Config (Under Sales) – Auto Split Deposit when splitting a Sales Order. To split the Deposit amount, when an SO is split, an App Config is created in the system that allows Auto split deposit on splitting a sales order. **How does it work?** If selected yes then it will allow splitting the Deposit linked with Sales Order, when the Sales Order is split into new Sales Order. * If the linked Deposit amount is equal to the new Sales Order total amount, then the Deposit amount linked to the Old SO will be linked to the new SO. * If the linked Deposit amount is less than the new Sales Order total amount, then the linked Deposit amount will be linked to the new SO. * If the linked amount is more than the new SO total amount, then the Deposit amount equal to the new SO will be linked to it. Updated Deposit linked amount criteria: 1. For old SO (Deposit linked amount) = Linked deposit amount – New SO total amount. 2. For new SO (Deposit linked amount) = New SO total amount. ### 12. Deposit/Payment Email: Company or User Added an App config setting for Deposit/Payment Email link in app config under Sales. How does it work? * Navigate to App Config (Sales). * Select User Email or Company Email for sending Payment/Deposit link. Selecting one of these options will decide which Email Type (Company Email or User Email) will be used when sending Deposit and Payment links to the Customers. ### 13. Bill Payment Centre: Add to Email Queue. Added “Add to Email Queue” option in Bill Payment Centre. Now the Bill Payment Receipt could be Emailed directly from the Bill Payment Centre. The feature is available under the Options tab in the Bill Payment Centre. There is an option to Email the Receipt right away or Add it to the Email Queue. ### 14. Purchase Order: Search fields added Added search fields in Purchase Order Centre, Item Receipt Centre, and Bill Centre modules. * Purchase Order Centre: Search by Ref Number; * Item Receipt Centre: Search by Packing Slip Number; * Bill Centre: Search by Vendor Bill Number #### ### 15. Item: Option to remove the Image. An Image added for an Item can now be removed from the Create Item module. This Delete icon is now accessible directly under the “Other Attributes” of the Item module. This is an important feature in the case where the same image is used on multiple items of the same Product. #### #### #### 16. Customer Centre: Batch Update Sales Rep In the Customer Centre, an option to Batch update Sales Rep has been added. From the Options tab in the Customer Centre, the Sales Rep can be updated for the selected Customer from the Batch Update option. ### 17. App Config: To Hide Estimate from Customer Info An App config setting is created in Xoro that will give an ability to customize the visibility of Estimate in the Customer Info. Find this setting in the App config module, under the Sales section to hide Estimates in the Customer Info (Estimates/Sales Order Section). How does it work? When this setting is turned off, the estimates will be shown in the Customer info module. To hide the Estimate from the Customer Info, turn this setting On.
### 18. App Config: Transfer Third-party SO information. An App Config setting is created to Copy Third Party Ref# when Duplicating or Splitting an SO. Find this setting in the App Config Module: App Config > Warehousing > “Transfer third-party SO information” How does it work? When App Config setting is ON: When splitting lines on an SO to a new SO, the Third-Party Ref Number will be carried over to the new Order. Also, when duplicating an SO the Third-Party Ref Number will be carried over to the new Order. When App Config setting is OFF: When splitting lines on an SO to a new SO, the Third-Party Ref Number will NOT be carried over to the new Order. When duplicating an SO the Third-Party Ref Number will NOT be carried over to the new Order. ### 19. Activity Log: Viewing Sales Order/Estimate Two additional Transactions can now be viewed in the Activity Tracking. On accessing/viewing saved Estimate and Sales Order, a log entry will be made in Activity Tracking that the Sales Order/Estimate has been viewed by the user. ### 20. Good Received Notification Email: Attached Linked Sales Orders. Added Linked Sale Order(s) in the Goods received Notification Mail. How does it work? For a single PO linked with multiple Sales Orders, the Goods Received Email will now show all the Sales Orders connected to it. This feature will aid in keeping a note of the Backorders.
#### #### ### 21. Multi-Currency Support in PO Reconcile Process Added Multi-Currency Support in PO Reconcile Process. How does it work? Xoro is now giving a feature to Reconcile in a different currency than what’s on the PO. This applies to both IR & Bill Reconciliation. * Added currency dropdown and Exchange rate field in add items and removed from Select Items. * Vendor and Account dropdown will be populated on the basis of Line level Reconcile currency. * Also, an Alert function has been provided when the Reconciliation is finished. **Note:** There cannot be more than 1 Foreign Currency per Bill/IR Example – Home Currency = USD Vendor = USD Freight (Service 1) = CAD Customs (Service 2) = USD/CAD, cannot be in any other currency Duty (Service 3) = USD/CAD, cannot be in any other currency ### 22. LPN: Added Auto Consolidate property Added a new App Config (Auto combine LPN by Location Type) under Warehouse. This setting will allow to auto combine LPNs by Location type for the current Location while Adding/Subtracting Inventory. The LPNs will be auto combined by location type **for the same Location and Item.** How does it work? * Navigate to the App Config module, under Warehouse look for “Auto combine LPN by Location Type” and select the Location Types for which you merge the LPNs. After defining the Location type for the “Auto combine LPN by Location Type” in the App Config Setting, LPNs will be auto merged for the same Location and Item number, whenever there is some Addition/Subtraction in the Inventory (from Receive/Close ASN, Inventory Adjustments, etc). Added option to merge LPNs in Inventory by Location module. This option is available only if LPNs are enabled. Clicking the Merge LPNs options will open up a dialog for selecting Primary LPN. ![](https://help.xorosoft.io/wp-content/uploads/2021/02/img_60367d12d1638.png) Clicking the ‘Merge LPNs -Select First’ will consider the first LPN in selection as primary LPN. LPN merging is not allowed for the following cases: * When Qty allocated is greater than 0. * If LPN is linked to MO. * If the Location or Item is different. ### 23. Short Inventory Planner: Create Batch MO Batch MO can be created when an MO is created from the Short inventory Planner. Bach Manufacturing Order can now be created on the basis of Base Part number from the Short Inventory Planner module. The different Base Parts can be batch manufactured together, for the manufacturable Items associated with them. Also, the “Processes” & “Services” can be added to the manufacturing unit. How does it work? * Go to SIP (short inventory planner). * Select any manufacturable items with the different Base Part numbers and create batch MO from the “Options” tab. * A pop will open up with “*Add processes and services*” & “*Generate Batch MO per Base Part*” values turned off. * Turn on the “Add Process and Services” & “Generate Batch MO per Base Part” options and click OK. * A pop will open up to add Processes and Services to the Batch MOs. * After they are added, hit “Generate Batch”. * Batch MO’s should be created successfully. Another way to do it is from the “On SO” link in the Short Inventory Planner. * Click on the “On SO” link of any manufacturable item. * Hit “Generate Manufacturing Orders”. * A pop-up will open with the new option ‘Add processes and services’. * You can keep it turned “Off” for existing functionality or turn it “On” for opening Batch MO popup for creating batch MO’s. * You also have the option to produce “Batch MO per BOM” or individual MO per Sales Order. The feature is also available in the Sales Order module. 1. Go to the Sales Order module and create a new Sales Order with the manufacturable item. 2. Go to options (page top) and select ‘Create Manufacture Order’ from the COPY option. 1. A new option ‘Add processes and services’ will appear. 2. You can keep it turned “Off” for existing functionality or turn it “On” for opening Batch MO popup for creating batch MO’s. #### ### 24. Data upload defaults\*\*. **Data Uploads: Error if provided any unmatched information.** Changes are made in some of the Upload modules: Customer Uploads, Invoice Upload, Vendor Upload, Accounts Upload, User Uploads, Bills Upload, Credit Memo Upload, Vendor Credits Upload. While feeding data in Xoro through these Uploads, the following check is established: * In the case where the Mandatory Field Columns are left blank, the system will pick-up the default value. However, in case of any unknown value (That is not existing in the system), it will show an error and the Data could not be uploaded. ### 25. Global Payments: New Payment gateway added in Xoro\*\* Global Payments has been added to supported payments gateways in Xoro. To connect, go to the “manage Payment Services” module. **Supported Currencies** are USD, CAD, AUD, EUR Just like Authorize.Net, Payments once saved need 24hrs to settle, before that transaction can’t be refunded ### **26. IP Restriction Implementation\*\*** An App Config has been added to restrict the login access of certain IP addresses. You will find this setting Under the “Advanced Security” tab of the App Config module. By turning ON this setting “**Use IP Restriction**” you will enable the feature of restricting the IP addresses in the system. In the “**IP Restriction Approval Email(s)**” you can set the email address(s), that are going to receive the email to grant access to that particular IP. In the Email Template module you can set up the Email template for both **IP Restriction** and **IP Added to whitelist**. In the IP restriction management module you can add the User name and IP address while adding IP addresses make sure they are IPV4 and IPV6 addresses only. When IP is blocked it’s going to show a blocked page (send request). After the request is successfully sent the emails added in the App Config will receive the confirmation email. After granting access the same link will expire. ### **27. Running Sub-Total** An App Config setting has been added to calculate the Sub-Total amount for the lines whose sub-total amount has not been calculated. **How Does it Work?** Turn ON the setting from the “App Config” module under the general settings. Now Open/Create a Sale Order. Add an Item with the Item Type “Sub Total” from the Add Item option. * The Running Sub Total amount can be calculated by adding it under the required Item line. * This can be kept wherever required, also multiple fields can be added. This feature is available in the Estimate, Invoice, Purchase Order, Bill, Item Receipt modules… # 2020 # October 2020 Release ### **1. Enhancement:** Item Tracking by Serial Number Added a new flag in the Item Module called, “*Tracking by Serial Number*“. Once turned on, the system will prompt a pop-up for entering the serial number (by units), at the time of Shipping in the Outbound Module of Xoro. Further this feature *“Tracking by Serial Number”*, will soon be added to the Inbound Module too. **How does it work?** * **Item Module** * Navigate to the “Item Module”. * Create New Items or modify them from the existing Items. * Navigate to “Other Attributes” and mark “Tracking By Serial Number” checked. * **Outbound Module** * Create a Sales Order for the Item for which the “Tracking by Serial Number” flag has been marked checked. * Save the Sales Order and Release it. * Go to the Options and Quick-Ship the SO, “Add Serial Number” box will pop-up automatically. Fill in the serial numbers for all the units and save them. This functionality is also available in Express-Ship/Pack & Ship. * Release the Sales Order and create a Wave. * Fulfill, Close, and Ship Wave. * While Shipping Orders a dialog window will pop-up asking for serial numbers for the Items. **C: Invoice, Credit Memo & Invoice Credit Memo** This feature is present in the Invoice, Credit Memo & Invoice Credit Memo as well. * Serial numbers linked to an Invoice, Credit Memo, or Invoice Credit Memo can be viewed in the subview form. * The Serial numbers of the Items can be viewed in the “list icon” on the right side of the Item lines. **\*\*Note:** * The Item Serial number will be a unique identifier for each unit of Item that is to be shipped. * No two units can have the same serial number. ### 2. Kits drop down with Description Search While adding a kit with the “Item Kit Finder” dropdown option in an Estimate/Sales Order/Purchase Order Modules, the description field for the items is made visible. The search can also be made with the description in the “Item Kit Finder” dropdown. How does it work? * Navigate to the Item Kit Finder in the Sales Order. * The “Item Kit dropdown” populates the item with its description. ### 3. “Card(s) on File” field added to the Customer Info page On the Customer Info page, the “*Card(s) on File*” information has been added. If a customer has any cards added, the count of the cards will be shown on the Customer Info page with this added label. **How does it work?** * **Customer Info** On the Customer Info module, the Card(s) on the file label will show the number of cards added in the Customer details. ### 4. Search boxes added for quick searching in the centres Enhancement has been made in the following Centres by adding a few more search text bars. * *Item centre* – Description and Base Part * *Item inventory snapshot* – Description and base part * *Wave centre* – wave, Customer name and SO * *Invoice payment centre* – Customer name * *Invoice centre* – Reference number * *Vendor centre* – Vendor name * *Inventory by location* – Description * *Bill of Material centre* – Description * **Item centre – Description and Base Part** * **Item inventory snapshot – Description and base part** * **Wave centre – wave, Customer name and SO** * **Invoice payment centre – Customer name** * **Invoice centre – Reference number** * **Vendor centre – Vendor name** * **Inventory by location – Description** * **Bill of Material centre – Description** **\*\* Note:** The search can also be made with the help of pipe operator “|”. ### 5. Memo field added in the Customer Info page. Added Memo option in the Transactions, Invoices, & Estimate tab of the Customer info page. **How does it work?** * Go to the Customer Info screen. * Transaction tab – Invoice records, Orders & Estimate tab will have the Memo column. **For the Transactions tab:** **For the Sales & Estimate tab:** **For the Invoices tab:**
### **6.** Data Export Module: ASN Close Date column added to the ASN detail Module. Added “***ASN Close Date***” column in the ASN detail of the Data Export Centre. **How does it work?** * Go to the Data Export Centre. * Select ASN detail in the “Search by” option * The column mentioning “ASN Close Date” will be shown in the description (if selected to show). * Download the file- it will have an ASNCloseDate column in it. ### 7. Invoice Payment Module: View Current Balance of the Customer An icon is added next to the customer in the Invoice Payment Module to see the total amount owed by the customer for all invoices and other details. How does it work? * Go to the Invoice Payment Module, select a Customer * Click on the Icon above the customer to see the Details. ### 8. App Config: Do not allow to Create Tags in different modules There is an option to create Tags in the Orders (sales & Purchase), Invoice, Customer, and Item. An App config is added in General, to allow creating tags for Order tags, Customer tags, and Item tags. If the Config is unchecked, then the user will not be able to add new tags in the tags dropdown. **How does it work?** * Go to the App Config Module and find “Allow to Auto-Create Tags” in the “General” settings. * Un-check for all (Order Tags, Customer Tags, and Item Tags): New Tags can’t be created. * If Checked: New Tags can be created. Un-check for all (Order Tags, Customer Tags and Item Tags) * Open an Order- Sales Order/Purchase Order or an Invoice. There will be no option to “Add Tag” in the “Order Tag” option. (existing will be used) Similarly, there won’t be an option to “Add Tag” in the “Customer Tag” and “Item Tag” menu. If Checked: New Tags can be created * Now, in the App Config module, Allow to Create Tags check for all (Order Tags, Customer Tags, and Item Tags). * There will be an option to “Add Tag” in the “Order Tag” option. * Similarly, there will be an option to “Add Tag” in the “Customer Tag” and “Item Tag” menu. ### 9. App Config: Select the Inventory Type for the Availability column in Sales Order. Added an App Config for showing Availability type under Inventory for: * Net Available * ATS * Available * ATS (Inc PO). **How does it work?** * Go to the App Config. * Under the Sales option, find “Inventory Type for Availability Column”. * Choose the type of Inventory that should be visible in the SO. **App Config:** **Sales Order:** \*\* Note: Quantity shown in SO Detail or Estimate Detail under Availability column will be based on the type selected in the above new Config. ### 10. Item Module: Enable Weight & Dims for Non-Inventory Items. ***Enabled weights and Dims tab*** for Item type – Non-Inventory **How does it work?** * Go to the App Config Module. * In the General settings find “***Enable Weight & Dims for Non-Inventory Items***” and tick “Yes”. Now the Non-Inventory items will have the “Add Weight & Dims” option enabled. ### 11. Added two fields BOM Instruction and PPE notes in the BOM header. Added fields “BOM Instruction” & “PPE Notes” in Bill of Material Module, Center, and Subview form. Also added PPE Notes in the Upload Bill of Material. **BOM Header:** **BOM Centre:** **BOM Subview:** **BOM Upload Sheet:** ### 12. “Title” column added to Modules A new “Title” column is added on the following modules, Centres, and Subview forms. * Sales Order (Details) * Purchase Order (Details) * Invoice (Details) * Bills (Details) * Item receipts (Details) The option to list the “Title” column can be chosen from the list icon on the right-hand side of the Details. **\*\*Note: ‘Title’ column will be visible when Product variants are enabled.** #### 13. Product Matrix Generator: Added new Fields New fields have been added in the Product Variants Module. These columns are: * Alternative Item Number, * CARB * Country Of Origin * Is Pre-Sell? * Material * Warranty Time * Warranty UOM * Shelf Life * Project/Class **How does it work?** * Go to Product Matrix Generator Module. * Select any Product and generate a matrix. * Matrix will have new columns- Alternative Item Number- CARB, Is Pre-Sell? Material, Warranty Time, Warranty UOM, Shelf Life, Project/Class, and Country of Origin. **Product Matrix Generator:** ### 14. Added option to “Apply Payments on the Customer info Module”. The Payments to the customers can now be made directly on the Customer Info Page. This option will help to process the payments in fewer clicks. **How does it work?** * Go to the Customer Info page. * On the bottom of the page look for the newly added Invoices tab. * Open the Invoices tab * Right-click on the Invoice and the Payment can be applied directly from the option Apply Deposit/Credits. ### 15. Vendor Credit Module: App Config added for Allowing duplicate reference number for a vendor in Vendor Credit. Added a New setting in the App Config module, to allow creating Duplicate Vendor Credit with the same Vendor and Reference Number. **How does it work?** * Go to the App-Config module, under the general section find “Allow Duplicate Vendor Credit Reference Number” and mark it “Yes”. * This feature will allow to create a Duplicate Vendor Credit with the same reference number and the same vendor. ### 16. Fixed: Sorting with Cheque number in Bill payment Centre. The search can be made by sorting the values in the Ascending and Descending order. Further, with the Advanced filters applied, the sorting can be made more specific. ### 17. New fields added to the Transfer Sales Order and Transfer Purchase Order Module The following new fields have been added under the Transfer Sales Order and Transfer Purchase Order: TSO Header: * Order Type and Reference Number TSO Detail: * Drop Down for Address finder TPO Header: * Order Type and Reference Number TPO Detail: * Drop Down for Address finder **TSO Header:** Order Type & Reference number. **TSO Details:** Drop Down to select Address, above the “Ship From Address” and “Ship to Address”. To allow choosing previously added addresses. **TPO Header:** Order Type & Reference number. **TPO Details:** Drop Down to select Address, above the “Ship From Address” and “Ship to Address”.
#### #### ### **18.** Authorize. Net: New Payment gateway added in Xoro A new Payment Gateway,” Authorise.Net” has been added in the Manage Payment Services. Now the payment can also be processed using the Authorise.Net payment gateway. Supported Currencies are: USD, CAD, AUD, EUR ### 19. Admin: Added Task Management Module A New Module has been added in Xoro, to manage the tasks efficiently. This “Task Management module” will ease the process of handling the entire life-cycle of a task, right from planning to tracking to execution. It helps the teams to track tasks from the beginning, setting deadlines, prioritizing tasks, and assigning them to the right people. It ensures projects stay on track and get completed on time How does it work? In this module, the following activities can be performed: * Create a task with a due date * Assign/change status of the task * Assign/change the due date of the task * Assign a user to the task * Add/Remove watchers to the task * Get a notification before the due date of the task (eg; 15 Min, 30 Min, 1Hr). An App-Config setting is added to choose what notifications are to be received on the Task management module. Select all the required notifications and check it. * Add a Task, choose the Priority Level: Urgent, High, Low, Normal * Select a Due Date and can also add a Reminder time. * Can Create the Task on someone’s behalf by choosing a Requester. * Give an Assignee for the Task. * Assign Watcher(s). * The mode of sending the Notification can be chosen: Via E-Mail/Internal Notification/Both: * Check this box, if the Watcher(s) should receive the notifications for the Task: * Write Detailed Description about the task in the Description box: * Save or Delete the Task: * Go to Task centre for all the created tasks: **\*\* Note:** This feature will be billable to your subscription as an addition. Please log a new ticket to subscribe to this new module. ### 20. Manufacturing Order Module: Added New feature to create Batch MOs with Production Stages With the help of this added module, the Manufacturing Orders can be generated in Batches. **How does it work?** Now, instead of creating different Manufacturing Orders for different manufacturable Items, one Batch can be created. * Pull up the Batch Manufacturing Order Module. * Select the Base Product and the options (if required). * Select the Item lines and add the qty for the items * Then move the item lines and add them to the batch. * Choose the Processes to be applied for the Manufacturing with the Production stages. For example: Grading > Cutting > Dyeing etc. * Add them to the Process In the “Manufacturing Process” module, new Processes can be added according to the requirements of the Process. * Can also add the Services if required. * Can choose if the service required is “One Time”. * Also, the Service cost can be marked as “Split” by the number of quantities under each Item line. * Finally, click on “Generate Batch Mos”. * In the Manufacturing Order Centre, the Batch MOs can be found with their MO numbers. * In the Subview form of the Batch MO, the processes can be updated, and that process will be completed for all MO’s. * Quick Produce also can be done from subview form. * Also, from the Subview form, one can directly Navigate to the MO and update the status of the Processes if required. # XoroERP Basics Welcome to the XoroERP Basics page, your gateway to mastering the fundamental aspects of our powerful ERP software. Whether you're a new user or seeking a refresher, this comprehensive guide will help you navigate the system with ease and confidence. 1. [Getting Help](/xoroerp-1/xoroerp-basics/getting-help): Need assistance? Our robust support system is just a click away. Discover how to access documentation, reach our support team, and explore our vibrant user community for tips and best practices. 2. [Navigation](/xoroerp-1/xoroerp-basics/navigation): Seamlessly traverse XoroERP with our intuitive navigation guide. Learn how to efficiently move between modules, screens, and menus to access the information you need, exactly when you need it. 3. [Log In](/xoroerp-1/xoroerp-basics/log-in): Begin your ERP journey by understanding the log-in process. Discover different authentication methods and ensure your account security with best practices for password management. 4. [Setting Preferences](/xoroerp-1/xoroerp-basics/setting-preferences): Tailor XoroERP to suit your preferences with ease. Learn how to personalize your user settings, including language, time zone, and display options, to optimize your ERP experience. Empower yourself with the essential knowledge to make the most of XoroERP. From the moment you log in to explore the nooks and crannies of our system, XoroERP Basics is your foundation for success. Let's dive in and unleash the full potential of your ERP journey! # Getting Help At Xorosoft, we are dedicated to empowering our users with all the support they need, right at their fingertips. Whether you're a seasoned user or just starting, our extensive array of resources ensures you'll never be left in the dark. * Knowledge base: Access our comprehensive Knowledge base, your go-to destination for detailed documentation, tutorials, and FAQs, providing step-by-step guidance for various functionalities. * Customer Training: Enhance your expertise with our customer training sessions, designed to elevate your skills and maximize the benefits of XoroERP. * Xorosoft Support: Our dedicated support team is always ready to assist you. Reach out to us anytime for prompt and reliable assistance, ensuring a smooth user experience. Get the most out of XoroERP with our extensive support ecosystem, allowing you to focus on your business goals while we handle the rest. Watch our introductory video to explore how we cater to your support needs and accelerate your journey to success. # Navigation The navigation menu in **XoroERP** is designed for quick and intuitive access to all core business modules. Located on the **left‑hand side** of the interface, this menu serves as your central control panel, enabling you to move seamlessly between different areas of the system. ### **1. User Profile & Role Information** At the very top of the menu, you’ll find your **name** and **user role** (e.g., *Admin*). This section helps you quickly identify the active user account and its access level. Clicking here may provide options for profile management, password changes, or account settings depending on permissions. *** ### **2. Search Menu** Directly below the profile section is the **Search Menu** bar. This universal search tool allows you to instantly locate and open any module, record, or feature within XoroERP without manually scrolling through the menu tree. *** ### **3. Module Navigation** The left‑hand navigation is divided into structured **module categories**, each expandable to reveal its relevant functions: | **Module** | **Purpose** | | ----------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Dashboards** | Provides high‑level overviews of business performance, including key metrics, profit & loss summaries, and visual analytics. | | **Sales** | Houses all sales‑related processes such as Estimates, Sales Orders, Shipments, and Invoices. | | **B2B** | Supports business‑to‑business operations and integrations. | | **Purchase** | Manages purchase workflows including Purchase Orders, Vendor Bills, and Item Receipts. | | **Admin** | Administrative tools for system configuration and control. | | **Utilities** | Assorted tools for system management and operational support. | | **Warehouse** | Features for inventory storage, transfers, and warehouse operations. | | **Inventory** | Core inventory management including adjustments, item master data, and tracking. | | **Manufacturing** | Modules for production planning, work orders, and manufacturing resource management. | | **Accounting** | All finance‑related activities such as ledgers, account settings, and reconciliations. | | **User** | User account management, roles, and permissions. | | **Configuration** | System setup and configuration options for customization. | | **Planning** | Modules for demand planning, forecasting, and scheduling. | | **Reports** | Comprehensive reporting tools for data insights and analytics. | | **Connect Banks** | Bank integration for reconciliation and transaction imports. | | **Apps** | Additional applications and extensions for enhanced functionality. | *** ### **4. Collapsible Menu** The navigation menu is **collapsible**, allowing you to maximize screen space for work areas. You can toggle between expanded and collapsed views depending on preference. *** ### **5. Active Module Highlight** The module you are currently in will be highlighted in the menu, making it easy to identify your current workspace. *** #### **Why This Navigation Design Works** * **Centralized access**: All business functions are accessible from one menu. * **Logical grouping**: Modules are arranged in a way that mirrors business workflows. * **Quick search**: The search menu eliminates unnecessary clicks. * **Collapsible flexibility**: Gives you more workspace when needed. # Log In # Setting Preferences | **Icon** | **Description** | | ----------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **🔔 Notifications** | Displays recent system notifications such as approvals, alerts, workflow updates, or system messages. The orange badge with a number indicates the count of unread notifications. | | **🟥 “New” Indicator** | Highlights newly released features, updates, or announcements within the system. Clicking on it will show details of the new changes. | | **❓ Help / Support** | Opens the help section, documentation, or user guide for the current module. May also link to training materials or knowledge base. | | **🕒 Recent Activity / History** | Displays recently accessed records, pages, or activities for quick navigation. | | **⋮ Vertical Ellipsis (User Menu)** | Opens the **User Menu**, which includes options such as *Set As Start Page*, *Add to Favourites*, *Page Defaults*, *Global Search Settings*, and more. | ### **User Menu (Top‑Right Corner) Options** When you click on the **vertical ellipsis (⋮)** in the top‑right corner of the XoroERP interface, a dropdown menu appears with the following options: | **Option** | **Description** | | -------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | **Set As Start Page** | Sets the current page as the default start page when the user logs into XoroERP. | | **Add to Favourites** | Adds the current page to the user’s list of favourites for quick access. | | **Page Defaults** | Opens a pop‑up for setting default configurations for the module currently in use. These defaults will apply automatically when the module is opened. | | **Global Search Settings** | Configures how the global search bar behaves, including filters and search scope. | | **Disable Confirm Popups** | Enables or disables confirmation pop‑up messages for actions performed in the system. | | **Fixed Sidebar** | Locks the sidebar in a fixed position, preventing it from collapsing automatically. | | **Log Out** | Logs the user out of the XoroERP system. | # Dashboards # Business Dashboard Business Dashboard gives you an overview of the overall performance of the business. Xoro ‘Business Dashboard’ is divided into two sections: ### Key Metrics The top section of the Business Dashboard displays 4 key metrics: **Invoices, Bills, Bank Balance, and Credit Card Balance.**
#### **Business Dashboard Header Fields**
FieldDescription
InvoicesThis section displays the collective amount in all the invoices in “Open” status. In short, this is the amount that is yet to be collected from the customers.
BillsThis section gives you the collective amount of all the unpaid bills. This is the amount that is yet to be paid to the vendors.
Bank BalanceThis section shows the amount of funds in your Bank Account at a given time.
Credit Card BalanceThis section displays the bill that you owe on your Credit Card at any given time.
***Please Note:*** *You can click on each of the figures of these metrics to see a detailed breakdown.*
### **Income and Expense Analysis** The bottom section of the Business Dashboard gives a visual representation of the Expense and Income Analytics of the business. It is divided into 4 sections: * **Profit & Loss:** This section displays the Profit and Loss data in the form of a bar chart. You can choose to view the Daily, Weekly, or Monthly data or you can choose to fetch data for a custom time period by selecting the Start Date and End Date. To do that, select the Dates and click on the Reload icon at the top-right of this section.
* **Expense by Type:** This section gives a visual representation of the expenses for a select time period. These expenses are segregated by different types of Expense Accounts and displayed in the form of a pie chart.\ You can select the number of Accounts that you want to fetch the data for using the “Count” drop-down.
* **Sales by Store:** This section displays the Sales done by each store for a selected time period in the form of a Bar Chart.
* **Income by Type:** This section gives an overview of your income for a selected time period. The Income is segregated by different types of Income Accounts and displayed in the form of a pie chart.
### Tips & Tricks * You can download the reports as an Image or Document by clicking on the three-line menu and choosing the desired format.
* Place the cursor on a particular section of the chart to see the exact data.
***\*\* Please note that the balance shown in these Dashboards is not your actual Bank Balance. It is the Books Balance, i.e. it is calculated from all the transactions you have recorded in the System.*** # Sales Dashboard The Sales Dashboard presents your overall sales data for a specific time period. This allows you to effectively assess the sales performance of the business and devise future sales strategies to enhance sales. The Sales Dashboard can be divided into 2 sections: Key Metrics and Sales Data and Analysis. ### Key Metrics The top section of the Sales Dashboard displays 3 key metrics that give you an overview of your sales.
#### **Sales Dashboard Key Metrics**
MetricDescription
SalesThis metric displays your sales revenue from the beginning of the month up to the current date. At the bottom-right corner of this section, you'll also find the total amount in Released Orders.
InvoicesThis metric showcases the sum of funds in outstanding invoices.
ReturnsThis metric exhibits the monetary value associated with orders (limited to inventory items) that have been returned from the beginning of the month until the current date. These returns are recorded through Credit Memos, Invoice Credit Memos, and Refund Receipts.
***Please Note:** You can click on each of the figures in these metrics to see a detailed breakdown.*
### Sales Data and Analysis The bottom section of the sales dashboard gives a visual representation of the sales analytics of the business. It is divided into 4 sections: 1. **Top Customers by Revenue:** This section displays the top customer based on revenue, presented through a horizontal bar chart. To view data for a specific time frame, choose the Start Date and End Date. Click the Reload icon at the top-right of this section to update the data. You can also adjust the number of accounts displayed using the "Count" drop-down menu.
2. **Top Items by Revenue:** This section displays the top-selling items on the basis of Revenue in the form of a Pie Chart.
3. **AR Aging By Customer:** This section presents a tabular format detailing the amount in unpaid invoices categorized by the customer and the duration they have been outstanding. This data is segregated into 5 sections: * Current: The amount in unpaid Invoices that are due Today. * 1-30: The amount in unpaid Invoices that are overdue for less than a month. * 31-60: The amount in unpaid Invoices that have been overdue for more than 30 days to 60 days. * 61-90: The amount in unpaid Invoices that have been overdue for more than 60 days to 90 days. * 90+: The amount in unpaid Invoices that have been overdue for more than 90 days.
Additionally, this table also presents to you the Deposits and Credits recorded for each customer. With that, in the “Total” column, you can see the net amount that each Customer owes you.
#### Tips & Filters * You can fetch the data in this report based on customer currency using the “Currency” drop-down in the top-left corner of the section.
* At the bottom of this section, you can set the number of rows to be displayed per page.
* To customize the columns shown in this report, click the 9-dot icon button positioned at the top-right corner. You can save this column view by clicking the “Save” button.
* Click on any figure (except “Total”) to see a detailed breakdown.
* Use the Up and Down arrows beside the column name to display the data in ascending or descending order.
4. **Year over Year Sales**: The last section gives you an overview of your sales performance, presenting a comparison between this year and last year through a bar chart. \ \ Within this section, it illustrates the monthly revenue for both the current and previous years, along with the average revenue for each month.
**Tips and Filters:** * The keys given at the bottom of this section are clickable. Hide/show the data from the Chart by clicking on the respective Key. For example, if you do not want to see the Average data, click on the ‘Average’ key to hide it.
### General Dashboard Tips & Tricks: * Download the reports as an Image or Document by clicking on the three-line menu and choosing the desired format.
* Place the cursor on any section of the Chart to see the exact Data.
# Purchase Dashboard Purchase Dashboard presents your overall purchase data for a specific time period. Purchase Dashboard can be divided into 2 sections: Key Metrics and Purchase Data & Analysis. ### Key Metrics The top section of the Purchase Dashboard displays 3 key metrics.
#### **Purchase Dashboard Header Section Fields**
FieldDescription
PurchasesThis section displays the cost of Inventory bought in the month till the current date.
BillsThis metric displays the amount of money in the unpaid Bills.
ReturnsThis metric displays the amount of money corresponding to the Orders (only Inventory Items) that were returned to the Vendors in the month till the current date.
***Please Note:** You can click on each of the figures of these metrics to see a detailed breakdown.*
### Purchase Data & Analysis: * **Top Items by Purchase:** This section the most purchased Items in a select time period in the form of a Pie Chart.\ \ You can fetch this data for a custom time period by selecting the Start Date and End Date. To do that, select the Dates and click on the Reload icon at the top-right of this section. You can also select the number of Accounts that you want to fetch the data for using the “Count” drop-down.
* **Top Vendors by Purchase:** This section displays the Vendors with the most purchases in the form of a horizontal Bar Chart. This data is displayed for a select time period.
* **AP Aging By Vendor:** This section displays in a tabular form, the unpaid Vendor bills and Item Reciepts of the respective Vendors that are yet to be converted into Bills. \ \ This data is sorted according to the length of time the Item Receipts and the Bills have been outstanding. This data is segregated into 5 sections:
* **Current**: The amount in the Item Receipts and the Bills that are due Today. * **1-30:** The amount in the Bills that are overdue for less than a month. * **31-60:** The amount in the Bills that have been overdue for more than 30 days to 60 days. * **61-90:** The amount in the Bills that have been overdue for more than 60 days to 90 days. * **90+:** The amount in the Bills that have been overdue for more than 90 days. Additionally, this table also presents to you the Credits and Prepayments recorded for every Vendor. With that, in the “Total” column, you can see the net amount that you owe to each Vendor.
#### Tips and Filters: * On the top-right corner, click on the 9-dot icon button to choose the columns to display in this report. You can save the column view by clicking on the “Save” button.
* At the bottom of this section, you can choose the number of rows to be displayed per page.
* Click on any figure (except “Total”) to see a detailed breakdown.
* Use the Up and Down arrows besides the Colum name to display the data in ascending or descending order.
### General Dashboard Tips & Tricks: * Download the reports as an Image or Document by clicking on the three-line menu and choosing the desired format.
* Place the cursor on any section of the Chart to see the exact Data.
* Click on the “Reload” button after any change to refresh the data in the Dashboard.
# Warehouse Dashboard: Inbound The Warehouse Inbound Dashboard provides an at-a-glance view of the key indicators of the inventory coming into the warehouse, allowing you to easily monitor and track the incoming stock. At the top-right corner of this Dashboard, there is an option to select the Store for which you want to see the data. You can select one or multiple stores as needed and the Dashboard view will be customized accordingly.
The Warehouse Inbound Dashboard can be divided into 2 sections: Key Metrics and Inbound Data & Analysis. ### Key Metrics The header section of the dashboard shows the essential metrics related to the inbound inventory.
#### Warehouse Dashboard Inbound Header Fields
MetricsDescription
PO LinesThis section displays the total number of Item lines in Released or Partially Released POs.
ASN LinesThis section displays the total number of ASNs that are in ‘Open’, ‘In Receiving’, and ‘Received’ status.
ASN Lines ClosedThis section displays the number of ASNs closed on that particular day.
***Please Note:** You can click on each of the figures of these metrics to see a detailed breakdown.*
### Inbound Data & Analysis The bottom section of the dashboard gives detailed insight into the inbound operations, enabling streamlined management and informed decision-making. It offers key information about the inbound inventory, including the ASNs being processed, closed ASN lines organized by store, incoming deliveries arranged by their delivery dates, and inbound ASNs based on dates. * **ASNs In Process:** This section displays the ‘Open’, ‘In Receiving’, and ‘Received’ ASNs represented in the form of a Pie Chart.
* **Closed ASN Lines By Store:** This section displays the data of closed ASN lines for the chosen time frame, presented in a Bar Chart format. You can customize your view by selecting Daily, Weekly, or Monthly data, or opt for a specific time range by picking a Start Date and End Date. To apply these changes, select the desired dates and click the Reload icon located at the top-right of this section.
* **Inbound Deliveries (By Delivery Date):** This section displays in a tabular form, the number of Items in “Released” or “Partially Received” Purchase Orders. This data is segregated as per each Store according to the Type of Order and the Date on which the Items are expected to be received. For instance, it shows the number of Items in Purchase Orders and Transfer Purchase Orders that are expected to be received Upto Yesterday, Yesterday, and Today. Additionally, it also shows the Total number of Items that are to be received for the Store.
You can click on any of these figures (excluding “Total”) to see a detailed breakdown.
* **Inbound ASNs (By Date):** This section showcases a table presenting the count of ASNs created up to yesterday based on their respective statuses.
Click on any of these figures (excluding 'Total') to see a detailed breakdown.
### General Dashboard Tips * Download the reports as an Image or Document by clicking on the three-line menu and choosing the desired format.
* Hover over any part of the chart to view precise data.
# Warehouse Dashboard: Outbound Warehouse Outbound Dashboard provides an at-a-glance view of the key performance indicators relevant to the outbound (sales) process and helps you to track outgoing inventory. At the top-right corner of this dashboard, there is an option to select the store for which you want to see the data. You can select one or multiple stores as needed, and the dashboard view will be customized accordingly. The warehouse outbound dashboard can be divided into 2 sections: Key Metrics & Outbound Data & Analysis. ### Key Metrics The header section of the dashboard shows the essential metrics related to the inbound inventory.
#### Warehouse Dashboard Outbound Header Fields
MetricDescription
SO LinesThis section displays the total number of item lines in "Released" or "Partially Shipped" SOs.
Waves Lines In ProcessThis section displays the total number of waves currently in progress, i.e. the waves that are not "Void" or "Shipped".
SO Lines ShippedThis section displays the number of Item lines that have been shipped on the current day.
***Please Note:** You can click on each of the figures in these metrics to see a detailed breakdown.* ### Outbound Data & Analysis The bottom section of the dashboard provides a comprehensive analysis of the outbound operations. It offers key information about the outbound inventory, including the shipped items, the count of waves at different statuses, outgoing deliveries arranged by their ship dates, and outbound waves based on dates. This provides a detailed insight into sales performance, allowing for efficient management and well-informed decision-making. * **Shipped Order Lines:** This section displays the Shippe![](/files/8oIKb4dKsr10Njs2T74j)d Order Lines in a selected time period in the form of a stacked Bar Chart. You can choose to view the Daily, Weekly, or Monthly data or you can choose to fetch data for a custom time period by selecting the Start Date and End Date. To do that, select the Dates and click on the Reload icon at the top-right of this section.
* **Waves In Process:** This section displays the Waves Lines as per their Status in the form of a Pie Chart.
* **Outbound Deliveries (By Ship Date):** This section displays in a tabular form for each store, the number of Items in “Released” or “Partially Shipped” Sales Orders according to the Type of the Order, Ship Method and the Date on which the Items are expected to be Shipped.
* **Outbound Waves (By Date):** This section displays in a tabular form, the number of Waves created the day before the Current Date according to the Status.
### General Dashboard Tips * Download the reports as an Image or Document by clicking on the three-line menu and choosing the desired format.
* Place the cursor on any section of the Chart to see the exact data.
# Sales Rep Dashboard The Sales Rep dashboard provides sales representatives with an overall view of key performance indicators and relevant data related to their sales activities. The dashboard offers a quick and comprehensive overview of a sales rep's performance, allowing them to make informed decisions and take actions to meet their targets. The XoroERP sales rep dashboard can be divided into two sections: Key Metrics, and Sales Rep Data & Analytics ### Key Metrics The top section of the dashboard displays 4 key metrics that give you an overview of your sales.
#### **Sales Rep Dashboard Key Metrics**
MetricDescription
Sales (MTD)This metric displays your sales revenue generated by the sales representative from the beginning of the month until the current date. At the bottom-left corner of this section, you'll also find the total revenue stemming from the sales orders written by the sales representative.
Sales OrdersThis metric represents the sales value associated with the “Released”, “Allocated” and “Shipped” sales orders handled by the sales representative, all of which were generated on the current date.
EstimatesThis metric represents the sales value associated with the estimates handled by the sales representative, all of which were generated on the current date.
Returns (MTD)This metric exhibits the monetary value associated with orders (limited to inventory items) that have been returned from the beginning of the month until the current date. These returns are recorded through Credit Memos, Invoice Credit Memos, and Refund Receipts.
***Please Note:** You can click on the 'Sales Orders' and 'Estimates' figures in these metrics to see a detailed breakdown.*
### Sales Rep Data & Analytics The bottom section of the sales rep dashboard gives a visual representation of the data and analytics related to the sales activities of the sales representative. It is divided into 4 sections: * **Sales by Rep:** This section displays the revenue generated by the sales representative. \ You can opt to view data on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis. Alternatively, you can fetch data for a custom time period by selecting the start and end dates. To do so, choose the dates and click on the Reload icon at the top-right of this section.
* **Top 10 Customers By Revenue:** This section displays the top 10 customers from which the Sales Rep has brought in the most revenue.
* **Estimates To Follow Up (By Follow Up Date):** This section displays the estimates handled by the sales rep according to the follow-up Date. This data is segregated into 2 sections: * **Yesterday -:** These are the estimates with a follow-up date of yesterday or earlier. * **Tomorrow +:** These are the estimates with a follow-up date of tomorrow or later.
* **Outbound Deliveries (By Sales Rep):** This section displays the number of “Released”, “Allocated” and “Shipped” sales orders handled by the sales rep segregated by store. This data is segregated into 2 sections: * **Yesterday -:** These are the sales orders with a delivery date of yesterday or earlier. * **Tomorrow +:** These are the sales orders with a delivery date of tomorrow or later.
# Manufacturing Dashboard The Manufacturing Dashboard presents the overall data related to the Manufacturing Orders. It shows you the status of the manufacturing orders and helps to track and manage the production process. Nestled at the top-right corner of the dashboard is the option to select the store for which you want to access the data, offering a personalized and efficient user experience. You can select one or multiple stores as needed and the dashboard view will be customized accordingly.
Manufacturing dashboard can be divided into 2 sections: Key Metrics and Manufacturing Data & Analysis. ### Key Metrics The top section of the manufacturing dashboard displays three key metrics. The
FieldDescription
ReleasedThis metric displays the number of Manufacturing Orders that are currently in “Released” status.
In ProcessThis metric displays the number of Manufacturing Orders that are currently in “In Picking” or “Work In Progress” state.
ProducedThis metric displays the number of Manufacturing Orders “Produced” on the current date.
***Please Note:** You can click on each of the figures of these metrics to see a detailed breakdown.* ### Manufacturing Data & Analysis The bottom section of the manufacturing dashboard offers a visual depiction of data and insights related to the manufacturing orders, segmented into four distinct sections. * **Quantity Produced:** This section displays the number of items produced through a stacked bar chart. To retrieve data for a specific time frame, choose the Start Date and End Date. Execute this by selecting the dates and clicking on the Reload icon situated at the top-right corner of this section.
* **Top Items by Qty Produced:** This section displays the most manufactured items in the form of a bar chart. Use the "Count" drop-down menu to choose the specific number of items for which you intend to retrieve data.
* **Manufacturing Orders (By Schedule Date):** This section displays the number of Manufacturing Orders that are currently in process. This data is segregated as per each Store according to the Status of the Order and the Date on which the Items are scheduled to be produced. For instance, it shows the number of Manufacturing Orders that are scheduled to be produced Upto Yesterday and Yesterday. Additionally, it also shows the Total number of Manufacturing Orders that are in Process for the Store.
You can click on any of these figures (except “Total”) to see a detailed breakdown.
### General Dashboard Tips & Tricks * Download the reports as an Image or Document by clicking on the three-line menu and choosing the desired format.
* Place the cursor on any section of the Chart to see the exact Data.
# Sales # Customer Section # Customer ### What is Customer module? The Customer module in XoroERP facilitates efficient customer management by capturing essential information and offering customization options.
{% hint style="info" %} To create a customer, users navigate to **Menu > Sales > Customer Section > Customer** {% endhint %} To create a customer, users navigate to Menu > Sales > Customer Section > Customer and fill in primary details such as Customer Type, Company Name, and Sales Rep. Further details are added through tabs such as Contact Info, allowing for the input of email addresses, phone numbers, and addresses. The system selects the email for communication, based on a hierarchy. The Payments tab enables setting up payment information, including default accounts and payment terms, while the Shipping tab configures shipping details. ### Use Cases The Sales Tax tab facilitates tax configuration, and the Other Info tab allows for additional details like Business Number and Customer Tags. Users can enable/disable notifications and manage portal settings in dedicated tabs. Custom Fields provide flexibility for unique business requirements. Advanced Configuration options optimize order allocation processes, while header-level options like Create Duplicate and various action buttons streamline workflows. These actions include creating estimates, sales orders, sales receipts, invoices, and sending portal invitations or direct debit requests. The module also allows for updating existing customer information, providing comprehensive functionality for efficient customer relationship management within XoroERP. # Creating Customers In XoroERP, the process of creating a customer involves capturing essential information, including the Customer Name, Contact Info, Payment Terms, Tax, and Account details. The system offers additional customization by allowing users to include vital details such as Customer Type, Company Name, and Sales Rep. Once added to the customer card, these crucial details are automatically retrieved whenever the customer orders, streamlining the ordering process. The Customer Info module is a centralized hub to view and manage these comprehensive customer details, ensuring seamless and efficient customer relationship management within the ERP system.
{% hint style="info" %} To create a Customer, go to **Menu > Sales > Customer Section > Customer** {% endhint %} ### Creating Customer Fields To initiate the customer creation process, it is essential to complete specific fields such as Customer Type, Company Name, and Sales Rep. The inclusion of these critical details on the customer card ensures seamless order processing, as the system automatically retrieves and applies them whenever the customer places an order. To create a customer, you need to fill in the following fields. #### **Primary** This tab allows you to fill in the primary details of the Customer.
Field NameDescription
Customer Type

This is the type of the customer. A customer can be an individual or a company.

Individual - If you're purchasing goods for yourself and don't have a company (B2C).

Company - If you're a business (B2B).

Company NameThis is the name of the customer or Company (if the customer is a company).
First NameThis is the first name of the customer
Last NameThis is the last name of the customer
Customer NumberThis is the number of the Customer
Customer Name

This is the company's name if the Customer Type is a business, organization, or company.

An Individual Type Customer is automatically populated with the combination of First Name and Last Name.

In the case of a Company Type Customer, it is automatically filled with the Company name.

Sales RepWhen creating a customer, you can assign a default Sales Rep. The Sales Rep is created in the User Centre and is available for selection in this tab in the form of a dropdown.
CSR (Customer Service Rep)This is the Customer Service Representative responsible for interacting with the customer to handle and resolve complaints, process orders, and guide general. It is optional to fill in.
CurrencyThis is the home currency of the customer. This can be selected based on the country of the Customer.
Customer JobEnable this option if the customer being created is a child customer.
Select CustomerThis dropdown field allows you to select the parent customer for the current customer.
#### **Contact Info** This tab allows you to populate the contact details of the customer. It includes all the important contact details regarding the customer. By populating the **Contact Info** tab, businesses ensure that key stakeholders within the organization have easy access to accurate and current customer contact details. This facilitates seamless communication, helps in resolving issues promptly, and supports personalized engagement with the customer. The Contact Info page comprises four sub-tabs: **Contact Info,** **Address Info, Contacts and Email**.
#### **Tabs** **Contact Info** This sub-tab allows you to populate email addresses, phone numbers, and additional contact info of a customer.
FieldDescription
Default Billing AddressThis is the default billing address registered for the customer.
Main EmailThis is the main email for the customer. This represents the primary email address associated with the customer. It is the designated email for sending or requesting deposit/payment links.
CC Email This is the secondary email if available.
Billing EmailThis is the billing email for the customer. This email address serves as the designated billing contact for the customer. Customers can utilize this email field if they prefer to utilize a distinct email specifically for billing requests.
Shipment Update EmailThis is the shipment update email. This email is used for shipping updates including confirmation for shipped orders.
Main PhoneThis is the main phone number of the Customer.
Work Phone This is the work phone of the Customer.
MobileThis is the mobile phone number of the Customer
FaxThis is the fax number of the Customer.
Job TitleThis is the Job Title of the Customer.
Other Contact InfoThis is additional information, if any, regarding the customer's contact details.
{% hint style="info" %} The system selects the email for communication-based on the following hierarchy - 1. **Portal Email** (If available). 2. **Billing Email** - If the Portal Email is not available, the system will pick the Billing Email to contact the customer. In case the Billing Email is left blank, the system then looks for Main Email. 3. **Main Email** - This is the email that is lowest in the system's email hierarchy. If the Portal Email and Billing Email are not available, the system will pick the Main Email for communication. {% endhint %} To know the sequence in which Customer Emails are used to send the SO-related Emails, click [here](/xoroerp-1/sales/customer-section/customer-portal-invitation/in-what-sequence-are-the-customer-emails-used-to-send-the-so-related-emails). **Address Info** XoroERP provides users with the capability to input multiple "**Bill to**" and "**Ship to**" addresses. This functionality proves valuable for companies with diverse stores or establishments situated in various locations. For instance, a hotel chain with distinct locations can be managed as a single entity in XoroERP, while allowing for the specification of different delivery locations for goods supply.
**Bill To Address Fields** Clicking on the **Add New** button will open up a pop-up window where you need to fill in the following details.
FieldDescription
NameThis is the First Name and Last Name of the customer.
Company NameThis is the Company Name of the customer.
Address1This is the main address line of the customer that includes apartment number, house number, etc.
Address2This includes the lane number or a landmark.
CityThis is the City of the customer.
CountryThis is the Country of the customer. For example, the US, Canada, etc.
StateThis is the State of the customer. For example, California.
Zip/Postal CodeThis is the Zip/Postal Code of the customer's address.
PhoneThis is the Phone no. of the customer.
EmailThis is the Email of the customer.
Save Address AsThis is the name with which you can save the address and the system will populate it.
You can Save the above Bill to details as default by checking the **Set As Default** box.
**Ship To Address** Clicking on the **Add New** button will open up a pop-up window where you need to fill in the following details.
Field Description
NameThis is the First Name and Last Name of the customer.
Company NameThis is the Company Name of the customer.
Address1This is the main address line of the customer that includes apartment number, house number, etc.
Address2This includes the lane number or a landmark.
CityThis is the City of the customer.
CountryThis is the Country of the customer. For example, the US, Canada, etc.
StateThis is the State of the customer. For example, California.
Zip/Postal CodeThis is the Zip/Postal Code of the customer's address.
PhoneThis is the Phone no. of the customer.
EmailThis is the Ship To Email for the shipping address, used for shipment updates and delivery-related communication.
Shipping AccountThis field allows you to enter shipping account number associated with the customer. Please note that this field is only enabled if "Enable Address Level Shipping Account Number" app config is enabled. If the customer shipping account is entered, this is given the highest priority.
Save Address AsThis is the name with which you can save the address and the system will populate it.
**Important Icons**
* **Add New** - This allows you to add a new Bill To or Ship to address. * **Edit** - This allows you to make changes to an already saved address. * **Remove** - This allows you to remove an address. * **Copy** - This allows you to copy the Bill To address to the Ship To address and vice versa. * **Address Instruction** - This allows you to enter any additional address instructions such as address type and address name. * **Search** - This allows you to search for a specific address. **Contacts** The **Contacts Tab**, within the **"Contact Info"** parent tab in the **Customer module**, provides a centralized space to store and manage contacts directly linked to a specific customer or vendor. This enhancement improves data organization, reduces manual entry, and ensures seamless communication tracking.
Users can **view all linked contacts**, eliminating the need to navigate separately to the Contacts module. They can also **add new contacts**, ensuring that each customer or vendor has updated and accurate details, including phone numbers, emails, and addresses. Existing contacts can be **edited or modified** to reflect the latest information, preventing outdated details from being used in transactions. If a contact is no longer needed, users have the option to **delete it**, provided it is not linked to an existing transaction or record. **Emails** This sub-tab allows you to define and manage multiple email addresses for different customer communication scenarios. It includes dedicated fields to capture specific email recipients for reminders, payments, shipments, order processing updates, and customer statements. By configuring the **Emails** sub-tab, businesses ensure that the right contacts receive the right information at every step of the transaction lifecycle. This reduces dependency on a single contact field, minimizes communication errors, and provides flexibility to tailor email flows according to operational needs.
| **Field** | **Description** | | ------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Customer Reminder Email | Used for sending invoice reminders, payment due alerts, and overdue notifications. | | Customer Payment Email | Used for payment acknowledgements, deposit emails, and dispatching payment links. | | Customer Shipment Email | Used to send shipment confirmation emails to notify customers when orders are dispatched. | | Customer Order Processing Email | Used throughout various sales order workflows, including order release, estimate approval, pack and hold release, order cancellation, and wave allocation. | | Customer Statement Email | Used for scheduled or on-demand dispatch of customer statements. | #### **“Use Contact Email” Toggle**
To complement these fields, each one comes with a **“Use Contact Email” toggle**. This toggle determines whether the system should include the email address of the **order or invoice contact** along with the addresses specified in the input field. * **When Enabled (ON):**\ The system automatically **adds the Contact Email** from the associated order or invoice to the specified email list. This ensures that both customer-level contacts and transaction-specific contacts receive the necessary communication. * **When Disabled (OFF):**\ Only the addresses entered in the input field will be used. This gives teams precise control over who gets which updates. * **Fallback Logic:**\ If the toggle is **OFF** and the input field is empty, the system will fall back to the legacy behavior, using the customer’s main contact email to avoid any missed communication. #### Payments Under the **Payments** tab, you can set up the payment information for the customer including default accounts and payment terms. Setting up default accounts involves associating specific financial accounts with the customer, and streamlining the recording and tracking of financial transactions. This ensures that payments made by or to the customer are accurately reflected in the appropriate accounts, contributing to the overall financial accuracy of the system.
FieldDescription
Opening BalanceThis is the Opening Balance of the customer. If needed, you can enter a positive or negative amount here for the starting balance. It's useful when setting up customers who already have an existing balance.
Opening Balance DateThis is the Opening Balance date of the customer.
Account NumberThis is the Account Number of the customer in case you have set up an account for the same.
Default Payment TermsThese are the payment terms set up for the customer. For example, COD, Cash in Advance, etc. You can specify the agreed-upon terms of payment for the customer, defining when and how the customer should make the payment.
Default Payment MethodThis is the default Payment Method for the customer. For example, cash, credit card, or cheque.
Put Customer Account On HoldEnable the toggle button to put the customer on hold.
On Hold MessageEnter any message explaining why the customer has been put on hold. In the Customer Info, this message is displayed as an alert just below the Customer Name in the following format: “This customer is currently put ON HOLD due to following reason – On-Hold Message”
Deposit AccountThis is the default Deposit Account.
Liability AccountThis is the default Liability Account.
Default Account ReceivableThis is the default Accounts Receivable of the customer. When this customer is chosen, their Account Receivable will automatically populate in the relevant modules.
Credit LimitThis is the Credit Limit of the customer. This will be used to calculate the customer’s defaulter status.
Require Advance PaymentThis allows you to set up Advance Payment conditions. You can select an absolute amount or percentage of the order. You can utilize this field to restrict the order from waving or shipping if the payment is not recorded in the system.
**Default Payment Method -** In case you select the default payment method as a credit card, the system will display another option **Auto-Select Process Card.** When opting for the default payment method as a credit card in XoroERP, a valuable feature comes into play—the **Auto-Select Process Card** option. This option is specifically designed to streamline and automate credit card transactions, ensuring a seamless and efficient payment process.
{% hint style="info" %} It's important to note that the "Auto-Select Process Card" option is exclusively presented when the default payment method type is set to Credit Card, aligning with the specific needs of credit-based transactions. {% endhint %} * If the "Auto-Select Process Card" option is configured as true for a customer, the system brings forth a significant enhancement in the Payment modules, including Invoice Payment and Customer Deposit. In these modules, the Customer's Default Payment Method is automatically populated in the Payment Method field, simplifying data entry. * Additionally, the Process Card option is automatically checked, eliminating the need for manual intervention and expediting the payment workflow. This integration ensures a smooth and error-free handling of credit card transactions within our system. **Credit Card Info** You can also add or update the customer's Credit Card or Debit Card info via the **Payments** tab. This option allows you to save the credit card details of a customer, so you do not have to enter the details every time when making the payment. Enter the credit card details (card holder name, card number, expiration date, and CVV) and click "Confirm" to save the credit card info. So, the next time you try to take payment for the customer, you can select the saved card, saving you time and efforts.
You can delete the credit card details by clicking on the "Bin" icon next to the saved card.
**Direct Debit Info** This allows you to view the **Customer Direct Deposit Centre**.
#### Shipping The **Shipping** tab provides a dedicated interface for configuring shipping details and associated parameters specific to a customer within the ERP system. This comprehensive functionality allows users to define key elements such as the default shipping method and shipping type, facilitating precise and tailored management of shipping-related information for individual customers.
Field Description
Default Ship Method

XoroERP provides three options to be selected as shipping method -
Pick Up - Select this if the customer is picking up the goods by themselves.

Delivery(Own Truck) - Select this if your company’s truck is being used for the delivery.
Delivery(Third-Party) - Select this if an external company ships the goods for you.

Default CarrierThis is the Default Carrier of the customer. This field gets populated when the Default Ship Method is selected as Delivery(Own Truck/Third Party).
Default FOBThis allows you to set up the Default Freight On Board for the customer. You can select either Origin or Destination.
Default ServiceThis is the Default Shipping Service of the customer responsible for delivering the order to the customer. If Delivery (Own Truck) is selected, the company’s carrier can be selected. If, however, Delivery (Third Party) is selected, you can choose another company’s carrier for shipping (FedEx, UPS, etc.).
Default Shipping TermsThese are the Default Shipping Terms set up for the customer. Available options - Prepaid, Collect, Prepaid & Billed, Collect & Allowed, Third Party Billing
Shipping Account NumberThis is the Shipping Account No. (if available) of the customer.
Shipping NotesThis field allows you to add any notes related to shipping.
#### Sales Tax The **Sales Tax** tab facilitates the configuration of the customer's tax structure based on their location. This functionality is particularly valuable for businesses operating in diverse regions with varying tax regulations. Users can utilize this tab to set up and customize tax-related parameters specific to each customer, ensuring accurate and compliant taxation practices.
If the tax applies to a customer, mark the checkbox labeled "**Is Customer Taxable on Sales.**"
FieldDescription
Default Tax CodeThis field may remain unspecified, as XoroERP's system-dependent functionalities automatically compute the tax. Nevertheless, if the customer's address is provided, you have the option to pre-select the applicable tax.
Force Default Tax CodeEnabling this feature allows you to enforce the Tax Code specifically for the customer. By checking this box, address-based taxes will be bypassed and not applied.
Tax Number 1This is the tax number of the customer.
Tax Number 2 This is the secondary tax number of the customer.
Canada Sales Tax Exemption Rules

This section allows you to set the exemption rules for the following four provinces of Canada:

  • Is Customer BC PST Exempt?: If this option is selected, the sales order qualifies for exemption from British Columbia PST tax.
  • Is Customer SK PST Exempt?: If this option is selected, the sales order qualifies for exemption from Saskatchewan PST tax.
  • Is Customer MB RST Exempt?: If this option is selected, the sales order qualifies for exemption from Manitoba RST tax.
  • Is Customer QC QST Exempt?: If this option is selected, the sales order qualifies for exemption from Quebec QST tax.

Please note that this section will only be available if the "Home Currency" of your instance is Canadian Dollar.

{% hint style="info" %} Force Tax Code - This will force the default tax code for this customer when orders are created from internal/external sources (API) or upload files. In this case, no address-based taxes will be applied. {% endhint %} #### Other Info The "Other Info" tab allows you to populate additional information about the customer within XoroERP. It provides a designated space for crucial details such as the Business Number, Customer Tags, Default Project Class, and Default Customer Message. The inclusion of these fields enables businesses to organize and manage specific information relevant to individual customers efficiently. For instance, the Business Number allows the association of unique identifiers, while Customer Tags facilitate categorization.
FieldDescription
Business NumberThis is the Business Number of the customer.
Customer TagsThis is the assigned Customer Tag. For example, wholesale, retail, E-comm, etc.
Customer GroupsThis is the assigned Customer Field. You can select this in case you want further categorization.
Default Project ClassThis is the customer's Project Class, utilized primarily for reporting purposes. For example, within an organization with distinct segments like Beauty and Lifestyle, the assigned Project Class enables tracking the customer's sales and income history for analytical and reporting needs.
Default Order TypeThis defines the default Order Type for the customer. When a sales order is created for this customer, the selected Order Type is automatically populated, reducing manual selection.
Default Wave TemplateThis is the Default Wave Template of the customer.
Default Customer MessageThis is the Default Message of the customer. This default message self-populates when you create a S O for the created customer.
Alert NoteThis is the alert note of the customer. When your team creates an Estimate, SO, or PO for the customer, this alert note will pop up as a notification.
WebsiteThis field captures the customer's business website URL, if applicable.
Customer Since DateThis is the date when the customer has signed up with you.
UPC Company PrefixThis is the Universal Product Code Company Prefix. A Company Prefix helps to identify your company as the owner of your UPC barcode and the product that it's on. When retailers check your UPCs in the GS1 database, they will see your company name associated with that product.
Permission GroupSelect the permission group to assign to the customer.
Is VAS Required?Enable this option to make VAS mandatory for the customer.
VAS InstructionIf the VAS is marked as required for the customer, this field allows you to add instructions related to VAS.
Attach ImagesThis allows you to attach any images for the customer such as their company logo.
Default Sales StoreThis field defines the primary sales store for the customer. When creating orders for this customer, the system will automatically assign the selected store as the default point of sale
Default Ship StoreThis field specifies the primary shipping store for the customer. Whenever a sales order is created, the system will default to this store as the origin of shipment, streamlining the fulfillment process.
Permission GroupDefines the access group or role assigned to the customer within the system. This is typically used to restrict or allow certain functionalities, pricing, or operational workflows based on the customer’s assigned group.
Is VAS Required (Toggle)A toggle option to indicate whether Value Added Services (VAS) are mandatory for this customer. If enabled, the system will enforce VAS-related processes when creating sales orders or shipments for this customer.
VAS Instruction Provides a space to enter specific instructions or guidelines related to Value Added Services for the customer. For example, this could include special packaging requirements, labelling instructions, or custom handling processes.
Default UOMThis field allows users to select the default Unit of Measure (UOM) for the customer. When the Use UOM from the Customer/Item Customer Mapping on Add Item app configuration is enabled with the Customer option selected, the system automatically uses this UOM when items are added to sales transactions. Users can modify the selected UOM at the transaction line level if required.
Default RouteSpecifies the default delivery route for the customer. When a Sales Order is created for the customer, the selected route is automatically populated in the Route field of the Sales Order Header. Users can modify the route on the Sales Order if required before processing.
{% hint style="info" %} Customer Tags and Groups can be created in their respective centres and then can be assigned to the Customer on the Other Info Tab. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} If a **Default Sales Store** or **Default Ship Store** is defined at the customer level, the system will pre-select and override the user’s own default store with the customer’s default store during order creation. {% endhint %} {% hint style="info" %} The tab also allows you to edit or add Wave Templates when creating Customer. {% endhint %}
Clicking **Edit Wave Template** will take you to the **Wave Template m**odule where you can edit the Template and add it. #### Notifications This tab allows you to enable/disable the following notifications for a customer: * **Restrict Auto Release SO email:** Enable this option to disable the automatic email notifications sent when a sales order is released. Enabling this restriction ensures customers do not receive these emails. * **Restrict invoice overdue reminder email:** Enable this option to stop the system from sending reminder emails to customers when their invoices are overdue. * **Restrict due invoice reminder email:** Enable this option to prevent reminder emails for upcoming due invoices from being sent to customers. * **Restrict auto ship confirmation on pack and ship email:** Enabling this option prevents automated emails from being sent when an order is packed and shipped. You might enable this if your customers prefer to receive shipment updates through another channel or if they only need to be notified once the package is delivered. * **Restrict daily ship confirmation emails:** Enable this option to stop email notifications confirming shipped orders from being sent to customers. Enabling this restriction prevents daily shipping confirmation emails. * **Enable Automatic Monthly Statements:** Enabling this option allows you to generate and send monthly statements to your customers automatically. To know more about this feature, click [here](#enabling-automatic-monthly-customer-statements).
#### Portal This tab allows you to populate the Portal no in case the customer is a portal user.
**Who is a Portal User?** To make use of the Xoro B2B functionality, it is essential to designate the customer as a portal user. Upon registration with Xoro, access to XoroERP is granted, and in addition, customers can benefit from the Xoro B2B portal. When establishing a B2B portal and deciding to provide access to your customers, you take on the role of a portal user. This role provides you with the ability to set up a portal email for logging into Xoro B2B. To populate this tab, check the box labeled **Is Portal User.**
Deselecting the aforementioned checkbox will unlink the portal account associated with the customer. Checking this box, however, will mark this customer as a portal user and display the following customizable fields: 1. **Show Invoices, Credits, and Deposits:** Selecting this checkbox activates the visibility of invoices, credits, and deposits associated with the customer within the portal. 2. **Portal Account:** This field is automatically assigned after the portal account is set up for the customer. 3. **Allow Credit Card Payments in B2B:** By checking this box, you grant permission for credit card payments within the B2B portal. 4. **Brands:** To restrict customers to viewing only certain brands within the B2B module, you can choose the desired brand from the drop-down menu. If the Brands field is left empty, customers will have access to view all available products.
**Restrict the above-selected brands in B2B ordering -** If this setting is enabled, the selected Brands in the above dropdown will not be available for customers to order in the B2B module. #### Email Templates This tab gives the ability to map **Default Document Templates Mapping with Customers*****,*** where the Default PDF Template/Email body and the “Send From Email” can be defined.
**Select Document** - This field enables you to choose the document associated with the customer for which you wish to associate the Email Template.
You can define the following: 1. **Document (PDF)** that will be attached in the email, 2. **Email Template(**Email Template Body) is to be used, and 3. **“Send From”** Email (Company/user). #### Custom Fields The **Custom Fields** tab in the **Create Customer** module allows users to store additional, user-defined information about customers that may not be captured in standard fields. These fields provide flexibility and customization, enabling businesses to adapt the system to their unique operational or reporting needs. You can also create Custom Fields in the **Custom Fields** module.
#### Available Custom Field Types * **Text**\ Used to capture free-form information such as notes, codes, or short identifiers. * **Multi-Select List**\ Allows users to select multiple values from a predefined list. Useful for categorizing customers under multiple attributes (e.g., customer segments, service types). * **List**\ Provides a dropdown of predefined values from which only one option can be selected. Helps standardize data entry for commonly used classifications. * **Number**\ Used to store numeric values such as rankings, counts, or other measurable attributes. * **Date**\ Allows entry of date values. Useful for tracking customer-specific events such as contract start date, renewal date, or follow-up reminders. #### Advanced Configuration The Create Customer module in XoroERP incorporates a powerful functionality that provides users with the ability to toggle the Advanced Configuration setting named "Disable Sell Package Allocation." This feature plays a crucial role in optimizing order allocation processes and is designed to enhance flexibility in warehouse management. When the App Config Setting under the Warehouse tab of the App Config module is enabled and the Customer setting for "Disable Sell Package Allocation" is turned OFF, coupled with a predefined Sell Package Quantity for an Item, the system will intelligently allocate (wave) orders in multiples of the specified Sell Package Quantity available at different locations. The intricate sequence of this allocation process is contingent upon the "Wave Template" selected. This ensures that the system aligns with specific business requirements or preferences, providing a tailored approach to order allocation. The interplay between the Customer module's advanced configuration and the App Config Setting under the Warehouse tab ensures a dynamic and efficient order allocation process within XoroERP.
#### Accounts This tab allows you to populate the Default Income Account and Default Income Return Account.
### Parent and Child Customers In XoroERP, managing customer relationships is streamlined through the parent and child customer functionality. This feature allows businesses to establish hierarchical connections between customers, providing flexibility in handling customer credits and payments. #### Creating Customer Job To assign a parent to a customer, navigate to the customer module and open the customer's profile. In the primary tab, enable the "Customer Job" option.
This will prompt you to select a parent customer from the dropdown menu. Choose the desired parent customer and click "Update" to apply the changes. The selected customer will then become the parent customer/job of the current child customer.
#### **Benefits of Parent-Child Customers** Once the parent-child relationship is established, you can leverage the credit of one customer to pay invoices for the other. For instance, if the parent customer has available credit, you can use it to pay off an outstanding invoice for the child customer, and vice versa. This feature simplifies the payment process and provides greater flexibility in managing customer accounts.
### Header Level Options For efficient management of Customer Info, the **Customer Info** module offers a range of options at the header level.
**Create Duplicate** - XoroERP allows you to create duplicate entries for customers. This feature facilitates the generation of a duplicate entry, allowing users to create a new customer record mirroring the details of an existing customer. It serves as a time-saving solution for instances where identical customer information needs to be replicated within the system. {% hint style="info" %} The system will prompt you for your permission when creating a duplicate entry mentioning the details that already exist in the system. Refer to the image below. {% endhint %}
**Create Estimate** - This allows you to create an Estimate with the Customer details inputted in the system when creating the customer. This functionality directs users to the "**Estimate"** module, where they can effortlessly generate estimates with accurate customer information, enhancing efficiency in the estimation workflow. **Create SO** - This allows you to directly create a Sales Order for the customer using the details inputted when creating the customer. Utilizing the details entered during customer creation, this feature directs users to the "**Create** **Sales** **Order"** module, where the system auto-populates customer details from the Customer Info module, streamlining the process of creating sales orders. **Create Sales Receipt** - This enables users to directly generate sales receipts for customers, leveraging the customer details inputted during customer creation. This functionality seamlessly directs users to the "**Sales Receipt"** module, where the system auto-populates customer details from the Customer Info module, ensuring accuracy and efficiency in creating sales receipts. **Create Invoice** - This allows you to directly create an Invoice using the details inputted when creating the customer. This option efficiently navigates users to the "**Create Invoice"** module, where the system auto-populates customer details from the Customer Info module, facilitating prompt and accurate invoice creation. **Send Portal Invitation** - This allows you to send **Portal** invitations to the selected customer. This option is valid only once the customer's portal is activated. **Send Direct Debit Request** - Additionally, the "**Send Direct Debit Request**" feature enables users to seamlessly send direct debit requests to specified customers, streamlining communication and financial transactions. {% hint style="info" %} All the above-mentioned Header level options are valid once the customer is created and the details are saved. {% endhint %} ### Update Customer The "**Create Customer**" page additionally provides the capability to modify the existing information for the chosen customer.
### Merging Customers in Xoro The customers created in the system can be merged if required. Merging customers involves combining or consolidating multiple customer records or profiles into a single, unified customer entry. Xoro gives you the ability to merge more than 100 Customers in one go. #### Merging the Customers You can merge the customer from the Customer Centre by following the steps mentioned below: * Navigate to the “Customer Centre” and select the Customers you want to merge.
* Under “Options” click on “Merge”.
* In the "Merge Customer" screen, select the “Primary Customer” under which you want to merge all the other selected Customers and hit "Merge".
* All the customers will be merged into the one selected “Primary Customer”. * You will get a success notification at the bottom of the page once the customers are successfully merged.
#### **Please note:** * Only the saved credit cards of the primary customer will be preserved. The saved cards of the merged customers will be deleted. *\*\*This may cause issues when refunding the secondary customers where saved cards were used to pay.* * If you want to preserve the data of the secondary customer, enable the "Preserve Merge Customer Date" toggle on the Merge Customers screen.\ \ This will preserve the following data from the customer being merged:
* Name, Main Email, and Main Phone will be appended to the other contact info field of the primary customer.
* Addresses of the merged customers will be appended to those of the primary customer. ### Enabling Automatic Monthly Customer Statements XoroERP provides you with the ability to automatically send customer statements to the customers. Please note that this option will only be available for customers with the "Enable Automatic Monthly Statements**"** option turned ON.
You can use the batch update option in the Customer Centre to enable automatic monthly statements. This feature is app-config-based and is determined by the following configurations: 1. **Auto-Send Monthly Customer Statements:** If this setting is on, it will automatically send statements to customers covering the previous month's activity. This will dispatch statement emails to those customers with the "Enable Automatic Monthly Statements" option activated in the Customer module.
2. **Customer Statement email intervals in days**: This app config is multi-select and has three options specifying from and up to what dates we want to send a statement.\ \ If this setting is enabled, it will send the email notification of customer statements to the customer automatically based on the value provided. \ For example, when the option "First day of month" is selected, it will send a statement from the previous month's first day to last day. If the option"15th day of month" is selected, it will send the current month's first day to the fifteenth day. Similarly, if the option "Last day of month" is selected, it will send a statement from the current month's first day to the last day of the month.
3. **Customer statement Email Time:** This will allow you to specify the time at which the email will be sent to customers.
### Page Defaults The **Page Defaults** option (accessible from the vertical three-dot menu in the top-right corner of the page) allows users to configure the default behavior of certain fields and settings within the Create Customer module. These preferences are automatically applied when creating new customer records and are also respected when editing existing customer records. * **Set as Default (Bill To Address):** This setting controls the default state of the **Set as Default** checkbox in the Bill To Address popup. When enabled, newly created Bill To addresses are automatically marked as the default billing address. When disabled, the Set as Default checkbox remains unchecked by default. * **Set as Default (Ship To Address):** This setting controls the default state of the **Set as Default** checkbox in the Ship To Address popup. When enabled, newly created Ship To addresses are automatically marked as the default shipping address. When disabled, the Set as Default checkbox remains unchecked by default. * **Default Project Class:** Defines the default project/class associated with customer transactions. * **Default Order Type:** Sets the default order type that will be applied to sales orders created for the customer. * **Default Wave Template:** Allows users to specify a default wave template for warehouse operations. * **Default Sales Account:** Defines the default sales account associated with customer transactions. * **Default Sales Return Account:** Sets the default sales return account used when processing customer returns. #### FAQs #### How can I add additional shipping addresses to a customer account? XoroERP allows you to maintain multiple **Ship To** addresses for a customer. Additional shipping addresses can be added directly from the customer record or imported in bulk using the **Upload Customer Addresses** module. **To add a shipping address manually:** 1. Navigate to **Menu → Sales → Customer**. 2. Open the required customer record. 3. Go to the **Contact Info** tab and locate the **Address Info** section. 4. Under **Ship To**, click **Add New**. 5. Enter the required shipping address details. 6. Click **Save Address As** to save the new address. 7. (Optional) Select **Set As Default** if you want the new address to become the customer's default shipping address. **Bulk upload multiple shipping addresses** If you need to add shipping addresses for multiple customers or import several addresses at once, use the **Upload Customer Addresses** module. When preparing the upload file: * Set **AddressTypeName** to **Ship To**. * Set **DefaultFlag** to **Y** if the address should be the customer's default shipping address. {% hint style="info" %} **Note:** XoroERP supports maintaining multiple **Ship To** and **Bill To** addresses for each customer, allowing you to manage different delivery and billing locations as needed. {% endhint %} # Customer Info ## What is Customer Info Module ? The Customer Info module helps to manage & track detailed information of the customer like balance, AR Aging, transactions, orders and estimates, invoice details, and communication history. The Customer Info Module contains all the information about various customers in the XoroERP database. You may quickly check all the details about a customer by using the Customer Info module. On this page, you may see, update, and view their orders, invoices, and balances.
{% hint style="info" %} To view the Customer Info Module, go to *Menu > Sales > Customer Section > Customer Info* {% endhint %} ### Use Cases The Customer Information Module is crucial for increasing sales performance by providing superior customer service and building strong client relationships. As the Customer Info module contains all the customer's stored details, sales reps can use this module to make sure that bills are accurate and sent on time, follow up on orders and estimates, and reply to client inquiries promptly. The sales team is much more productive thanks to the module's ability to filter and categorize data by transaction kinds, dates, and other criteria. This allows them to concentrate more on engaging customers and less on administrative duties. #### **Overview of Customer Information:** * The primary use case of the Customer Info module is to provide a comprehensive overview of a customer's information quickly. * Users can access essential details such as Orders, Invoices, and balances directly from this module. #### **Orders & Estimates:** * Users can access a tab listing orders and estimates for the selected customer. * Filtering options include Type, Status, Date Filter, and Ship Date, offering flexibility in viewing specific types of orders within a specified timeframe. * Efficient management of customer orders and estimates is facilitated through these features. #### **Efficient Customer Management:** * The module offers a variety of options at both the header and detail levels, enhancing the efficiency of customer information management. * Users can swiftly navigate through different tabs and apply filters to focus on specific information. #### **Real-time Editing of Orders and Invoices:** * Users can edit customer Orders and Invoices directly from the Customer Info module, ensuring real-time updates and corrections as needed. The Customer Info module serves as a centralized and efficient tool for managing customer-related information, enabling users to quickly access, analyze, and edit crucial data for improved customer relationship management within the XoroERP system. --- [Next Page](/llms-full.txt/1)